Table of Contents

UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
 
 
 
 
Form 10-K
 
 
 
 
     
þ
  ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
    For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010
OR
o
  TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
    For the transition period from          to           
Commission File No. 1-7657
 
 
 
 
American Express Company
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
 
     
New York
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  13-4922250
(I.R.S. Employer
Identification No.)
World Financial Center
200 Vesey Street
New York, New York
(Address of principal executive offices)
  10285
(Zip Code)
 
Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (212) 640-2000
 
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
 
 
 
     
Title of each class   Name of each exchange on which registered
 
Common Shares (par value $0.20 per Share)
  New York Stock Exchange
 
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None
 
 
 
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.  Yes  þ      No  o
 
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act.  Yes  o      No  þ
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.  Yes  þ      No  o
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).  Yes  þ      No  o
 
Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.   þ
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.
Large accelerated filer  þ Accelerated filer  o Non-accelerated filer  o Smaller reporting company  o
(Do not check if a smaller reporting company)
 
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Act).  Yes  o      No  þ
 
As of June 30, 2010, the aggregate market value of the registrant’s voting shares held by non-affiliates of the registrant was approximately $47.6 billion based on the closing sale price as reported on the New York Stock Exchange.
 
As of February 22, 2011, there were 1,202,409,106 common shares of the registrant outstanding.
 
DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
 
Parts I, II and IV: Portions of Registrant’s 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders.
 
Part III: Portions of Registrant’s Proxy Statement to be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission in connection with the Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on May 2, 2011.
 


 

 
TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
Form 10-K
 
Item Number
 
                 
        Page
 
      Business     1  
           Introduction     1  
           Global Network & Merchant Services     4  
           U.S. Card Services     17  
           International Card Services     28  
           Global Commercial Services     29  
           Corporate & Other     34  
           Supervision and Regulation — General     38  
           Foreign Operations     53  
           Sale of American Express Bank Ltd./Discontinued Operations     54  
           Segment Information and Classes of Similar Services     54  
           Executive Officers of the Company     54  
           Employees     56  
           Guide 3 — Statistical Disclosure by Bank Holding Companies     56  
      Risk Factors     73  
      Unresolved Staff Comments     91  
      Properties     91  
      Legal Proceedings     91  
 
      Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities     100  
      Selected Financial Data     101  
      Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations     101  
      Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk     101  
      Financial Statements and Supplementary Data     101  
      Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure     101  
      Controls and Procedures     101  
      Other Information     102  
 
      Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance     102  
      Executive Compensation     102  
      Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters     102  
      Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence     102  
      Principal Accounting Fees and Services     103  
 
      Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules     103  
        Signatures     105  
        Index to Financial Statements     F-1  
        Exhibit Index     E-1  
  EX-3.5
  EX-10.8
  EX-10.24
  EX-10.30
  EX-10.34
  EX-12
  EX-13
  EX-21
 
  EX-31.1
  EX-31.2
  EX-32.1
  EX-101 INSTANCE DOCUMENT
  EX-101 SCHEMA DOCUMENT
  EX-101 CALCULATION LINKBASE DOCUMENT
  EX-101 LABELS LINKBASE DOCUMENT
  EX-101 PRESENTATION LINKBASE DOCUMENT
  EX-101 DEFINITION LINKBASE DOCUMENT


i


Table of Contents

 
PART I*
 
ITEM 1.   BUSINESS
 
INTRODUCTION
 
Overview
 
American Express Company, together with its consolidated subsidiaries (“American Express,” the “Company,” “we,” “us” or “our”), is a global service company that provides customers with access to products, insights and experiences that enrich lives and build business success. Our principal products and services are charge and credit payment card products and travel-related services offered to consumers and businesses around the world. We were founded in 1850 as a joint stock association. We were incorporated in 1965 as a New York corporation. American Express Company and its principal operating subsidiary, American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. (“TRS”), are bank holding companies under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (the “BHC Act”), subject to the supervision and examination by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the “Federal Reserve”).
 
Our headquarters are located in New York, New York in lower Manhattan. We also have offices in other locations in North America, as well as throughout the world.
 
We are principally engaged in businesses comprising four reportable operating segments: U.S. Card Services, International Card Services, Global Commercial Services, and Global Network & Merchant Services, all of which we describe below. Corporate functions and auxiliary businesses, including the Company’s Enterprise Growth Group, publishing business, as well as other company operations, are included in Corporate & Other.
 
Securities Exchange Act Reports and Additional Information
 
We maintain an Investor Relations Web site on the Internet at http://ir.americanexpress.com. We make available free of charge, on or through this Web site, our annual, quarterly and current reports and any amendments to those reports as soon as reasonably practicable following the time they are electronically filed with or furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). To access these materials, just click on the “SEC Filings” link under the caption “Financial Information/Filings” on our Investor Relations homepage.
 
You can also access our Investor Relations Web site through our main Web site at www.americanexpress.com by clicking on the “About American Express” link, which is located at the bottom of our homepage. Information contained on our Investor Relations Web site and our main Web site is not incorporated by reference into this report or any other report filed with or furnished to the SEC.
 
2010 Highlights
 
Compared with 2009, we delivered:
 
  •  total revenues net of interest expense of $27.8 billion, up 13% from $24.5 billion
 
  •  income from continuing operations of $4.1 billion, up 90% from $2.1 billion
 
 
      *Some of the statements in this report constitute forward-looking statements. You can identify forward-looking statements by words such as “believe,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “optimistic,” “intend,” “plan,” “aim,” “will,” “may,” “should,” “could,” “would,” “likely,” “estimate,” “predict,” “potential,” “continue” or other similar expressions. We discuss certain factors that affect our business and operations and that may cause our actual results to differ materially from these forward-looking statements under “Item 1A. Risk Factors” below. You are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date on which they are made. We undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements.


1


Table of Contents

 
  •  net income of $4.1 billion, up 90% from $2.1 billion
 
  •  diluted earnings per share based on net income of $3.35, up 118% from $1.54
 
  •  return on average equity of 27.5%, compared with 14.6%.
 
The Company’s results for 2010 reflected strong spending growth and improved credit performance. Throughout the year cardmember spending volumes grew both in the United States and internationally, and across all of the Company’s businesses. Cardmember spending levels in 2010 reached record levels at the end of the year. Improving credit trends contributed to the reduction in loan and receivable write-offs and the reduction of loss reserve levels over the course of 2010 when compared to 2009. It is expected that the year-over-year benefits from improving credit trends will decrease over the course of 2011. While the Company invested at historically high levels in 2010, it intends to maintain the flexibility to scale back on investments as business conditions change and the benefits realized from improving credit trends lessen.
 
Despite improvement in parts of the economic environment, challenges clearly remain for the Company, both in the United States and in many other key regions. These challenges include weak job creation, volatile consumer confidence, consumer behavior, an uncertain housing market, and the regulatory and legislative environment, including the uncertain impact of the Credit Card Accountability Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 (the “CARD Act”), of the recently enacted Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (“Dodd-Frank”) and of the proceeding against the Company recently brought by the Department of Justice (“DOJ”) and certain state attorneys general alleging a violation of the U.S. antitrust laws. In addition, as previously discussed, the Company will stop receiving quarterly litigation payments from MasterCard International, Inc. (“MasterCard”) and Visa Inc. (“Visa”) at the end of the second and fourth quarters of 2011, respectively, and year-over-year comparisons will be more difficult to maintain in light of the strong 2010 results.
 
In 2011, the Company will be particularly focused on several initiatives designed to help us accomplish our long-term growth goals: providing greater value to merchants; adding more women, minorities and younger adults to our customer base; accelerating our growth outside the U.S.; making significant progress in the Enterprise Growth Group; and increasing our share of online spending across all products while transforming our customers’ digital experience.
 
We also continue to seek more ways to turn existing capabilities and relationships into new fee services. In the past eighteen months, we launched or expanded several key initiatives, including Business Insights, which provides analytics and consulting services to help merchants attract more customers and increase sales, and AcceptPay, which simplifies the invoicing and payment process for small businesses. Overall, we set an aggressive goal to generate $3 billion in annual fee-based revenues for the Company by the end of 2014.
 
For a complete discussion of our 2010 financial results, including financial information regarding each of our reportable operating segments, see pages 20-120 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which are incorporated herein by reference. For a discussion of our principal sources of revenue, see pages 72-73 of the 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders.
 
Products and Services
 
The Company’s range of products and services includes:
 
  •  charge and credit card products
 
  •  expense management products and services
 
  •  consumer and business travel services
 
  •  stored value products such as Travelers Cheques and other prepaid products
 
  •  network services
 
  •  merchant acquisition and processing, point-of-sale, servicing and settlement, and marketing and information products and services for merchants; and


2


Table of Contents

 
  •  fee services, including market and trend analyses and related consulting services, fraud prevention services, and the design of customized customer loyalty and rewards programs.
 
The Company’s products and services are sold globally to diverse customer groups, including consumers, small businesses, mid-sized companies and large corporations. These products and services are sold through various channels, including direct mail, on-line applications, targeted direct and third-party sales forces, and direct response advertising.
 
The Company’s products and services generate the following types of revenue for the Company:
 
  •  Discount revenue, the Company’s largest revenue source, which represents fees charged to merchants when cardmembers use their cards to purchase goods and services on the Company’s network;
 
  •  Net card fees, which represent revenue earned for annual charge card memberships;
 
  •  Travel commissions and fees, which are earned by charging a transaction or management fee for airline or other travel-related transactions;
 
  •  Other commissions and fees, which are earned on foreign exchange conversions and card-related fees and assessments;
 
  •  Other revenue, which represents insurance premiums earned from cardmember travel and other insurance programs, revenues arising from contracts with Global Network Services’ partners (including royalties and signing fees), publishing revenues and other miscellaneous revenue and fees; and
 
  •  Interest and fees on loans, which principally represents interest income earned on outstanding balances, and card fees related to the cardmember loans portfolio.
 
Our general-purpose card network, card-issuing and merchant-acquiring and processing businesses are global in scope. We are a world leader in providing charge and credit cards to consumers, small businesses and corporations. These cards include cards issued by American Express as well as cards issued by third-party banks and other institutions that are accepted on the American Express network (collectively, “Cards”). Our Cards permit our cardmembers (“Cardmembers”) to charge purchases of goods and services in most countries around the world at the millions of merchants that accept Cards bearing our logo. At December 31, 2010, we had total worldwide Cards-in-force of 91.0 million (including Cards issued by third parties). In 2010, our worldwide billed business (spending on American Express ® Cards, including Cards issued by third parties) was $713 billion.
 
The Company has also recently created an Enterprise Growth Group to focus on generating alternative sources of revenue on a global basis, both organically and through acquisitions, in areas such as online and mobile payments and fee-based services. For a discussion concerning our Enterprise Growth Group, please see “Corporate & Other” below.
 
Our business as a whole has not experienced significant seasonal fluctuations, although travel sales generally tend to be highest in the second and fourth quarters. Travelers Cheque sales and Travelers Cheques outstanding tend to be greatest each year in the summer months, peaking in the third quarter. American Express ® Gift Card sales are highest in the months of November and December; and Card billed business tends to be moderately higher in the fourth quarter than in other quarters.
 
Spend-Centric Model is Competitive Advantage
 
Despite the continuing challenges of the current economic environment, we believe our “spend-centric” business model (which focuses on generating revenues primarily by driving spending on our Cards and secondarily by finance charges and fees) continues to give us significant competitive advantages. Average spending on our Cards, which is substantially higher on a per-card basis for us versus our competitors, represents greater value to merchants in the form of loyal customers and higher sales. This enables us to earn premium discount rates and thereby invest in greater value-added services for merchants and Cardmembers. As a result of the higher revenues generated from higher spending Cardmembers, we have the flexibility to invest in more attractive rewards and other incentives to Cardmembers, and targeted marketing and other


3


Table of Contents

programs and investments for merchants, all of which in turn create incentives for Cardmembers to spend more on their Cards. The significant investments we make in rewards and other compelling value propositions for Cardmembers drive Card usage at merchants and encourage Cardmember loyalty. This business model, along with our closed-loop network, in which we are both the Card issuer and, in most instances, the merchant acquirer, gives us a competitive advantage that we seek to leverage to provide more value to Cardmembers, merchants and our Card-issuing partners.
 
The American Express Brand
 
Our brand and its attributes—trust, security, integrity, quality and customer service—are key assets of the Company. We continue to focus on our brand by educating employees about these attributes and by incorporating them into our programs, products and services. Our brand has consistently been rated one of the most valuable brands in the world in published studies, and we believe it provides us with a significant competitive advantage.
 
We believe our brand and its attributes are critical to our success, and we invest heavily in managing, marketing and promoting it. In addition, we place significant importance on trademarks, service marks and patents, and diligently protect our intellectual property rights around the world.
 
GLOBAL NETWORK & MERCHANT SERVICES
 
The Global Network & Merchant Services (“GNMS”) segment operates a global general-purpose charge and credit card network for both proprietary Cards and Cards issued under the global network services business. It also manages merchant services globally, which includes signing merchants to accept Cards as well as processing and settling Card transactions for those merchants. This segment also offers merchants point-of-sale, servicing and settlement, fraud prevention services, and marketing and information products and services.
 
Cards bearing our logo are issued by our principal operating subsidiary, TRS, by the Company’s U.S. bank subsidiaries, American Express Centurion Bank (“Centurion Bank”) and American Express Bank, FSB (“AEBFSB”), and by other operating and bank subsidiaries outside the United States. They are accepted at all merchant locations worldwide that accept American Express-branded Cards. In addition, depending on the product, Cards bearing our logo are generally accepted at ATM locations worldwide that accept Cards. TRS and its subsidiaries, including Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, issue the majority of Cards on our network.
 
Our Global Network Services (“GNS”) business establishes and maintains relationships with banks and other institutions around the world that issue Cards and, in certain countries, acquire local merchants on the American Express network. GNS is key to our strategy of broadening the Cardmember and merchant base for our network worldwide.
 
Our Global Merchant Services (“GMS”) business provides us with access to rich transaction data through our closed-loop network, which encompasses relationships with both the Cardmember and the merchant. This capability helps us acquire new merchants, deepen relationships with existing merchants, process transactions, and provide targeted marketing, analytical and other value-added services to merchants in our network. In addition, it allows us to analyze trends and spending patterns among various segments of our customer base.
 
Global Network Services
 
We continue to pursue a strategy, through our GNS business, of inviting U.S. and foreign banks and other institutions to issue Cards and acquire merchants on the American Express network. By leveraging our global infrastructure and the appeal of the American Express brand, we broaden our Cardmember and merchant base for our network worldwide. The GNS business has established 129 card-issuing and/or merchant-acquiring arrangements with banks and other institutions in 131 countries.


4


Table of Contents

In 2010, GNS signed four new partners to issue Cards and/or acquire merchants on the American Express network. Additionally, GNS partners launched approximately 77 new products during 2010, bringing the total number of American Express-branded GNS partner products to approximately 1,000.
 
GNS focuses on partnering with qualified third-party banks and other financial institutions that choose to issue Cards accepted on our global network and/or acquire merchants on our network. Although we customize our network arrangements to the particular country and each partner’s requirements, as well as to our strategic plans in that marketplace, all GNS arrangements are designed to help issuers develop products for their highest-spending and most affluent customers and to support the value of American Express Card acceptance to merchants. We choose to partner with institutions that share a core set of attributes compatible with the American Express brand, such as commitment to high quality standards and strong marketing expertise, and we require adherence to our product, brand and service standards.**
 
As discussed below, while GNS has added significant partners in 2010, a core strategy of GNS is to build and invest in deeper and more meaningful relationships with its existing partners.
 
With approximately 1,000 different Card products launched on our network so far by our partners, GNS is an increasingly important business that is strengthening our brand visibility around the world, driving more transaction volume onto our merchant network and increasing the number of merchants accepting the American Express Card. GNS enables us to expand our network’s global presence generally without assuming additional Cardmember credit risk or having to invest a large amount of resources, as our GNS partners already have established attractive customer bases they can target with American Express-branded products, and are responsible for managing the credit risk associated with the Cards they issue. Since 1999, Cards-in-force issued by GNS partners have grown at a compound annual growth rate of 24%, and totaled over 29 million Cards at the end of 2010. Outside the United States, 75% of new Cards issued in 2010 were Cards issued by GNS partners. Spending on GNS Cards has grown at a compound annual rate of 25% since 1999. Year-over-year spending growth on these Cards in 2010 was 28%, with total spending equal to $92 billion.
 
In assessing whether a given country should be proprietary, GNS, or some combination thereof, we consider a wide range of country-specific factors including the stability and attractiveness of returns, the size of the affluent segment, the strength of available marketing and credit data, the size of co-brand opportunities and how best can we create strong merchant value.
 
GNS Arrangements
 
Although the structures and details of each of the GNS arrangements vary, all of them generate revenues for us from the Card transaction volumes they drive on the American Express network. Gross revenues we receive per dollar spent on a Card issued by a GNS partner are generally lower than those from our proprietary Card-issuing business. However, because the GNS partner is responsible for most of the operating costs and risk of its Card-issuing business, our operating expenses and credit losses are generally lower than those in our proprietary Card-issuing business. The GNS business model generates an attractive earnings stream and risk profile that requires a lower level of capital support. The return on equity in our GNS business can thus be significantly higher than that of our proprietary Card-issuing business. In addition, since the majority of GNS costs are fixed, the GNS business is highly scalable. GNS partners benefit from their association with the American Express brand and their ability to gain attractive revenue streams and expand and differentiate their product offerings with innovative marketing programs.
 
Our GNS arrangements fall into the following three main categories: Independent Operator Arrangements, Network Card License Arrangements and Joint Venture Arrangements.
 
 
      ** The use of the term “partner” or “partnering” does not mean or imply a formal legal partnership, and is not meant in any way to alter the terms of American Express’ relationship with third-party issuers and merchant acquirers.


5


Table of Contents

Independent Operator Arrangements
 
The first type of GNS arrangement is known as an independent operator (“IO”) arrangement. As of the end of 2010, we had 64 of these arrangements around the world. We pursue these arrangements to expand the presence of the American Express network in countries in which we do not offer a proprietary local currency Card. The partner’s local presence and relationships help us enhance the impact of our brand in the country, reach merchant coverage goals more quickly, and operate at economic scale and cost levels that would be difficult for us to achieve on our own. Subject to meeting our standards, IO bank partners are licensed to issue local currency Cards in their countries, including the classic Green, Gold and Platinum American Express Cards. In addition, the majority of these partners serve as the merchant acquirer and processor for local merchants. American Express retains the relationship with multinational merchants. Our IO partners own the customer relationships and credit risk for the Cards they issue, and make the decisions about which customers will be issued Cards. GNS generates revenues in IO arrangements from Card licensing fees, royalties on Cardmember billings, foreign exchange conversion revenue, royalties on charge volume at merchants, share of discount revenue and, in some partnerships, royalties on net spread revenue or royalties on cards-in-force. Our IO partners are responsible for transaction authorization, billing and pricing, Cardmember and merchant servicing, and funding Card receivables for their Cards and payables for their merchants.
 
We bear the credit risk arising from the IO partner’s potential failure to meet its settlement obligations to us. We mitigate this risk by partnering with institutions that we believe are financially sound and will meet their obligations, and by monitoring their financial health, their compliance with the terms of their relationship with us and the political, economic and regulatory environment in which they operate. In addition, depending on an IO partner’s credit rating and other indicators of financial health, we may require an IO partner to post a letter of credit, bank guarantee or other collateral to reduce this risk.
 
Examples of countries where we have entered into IO arrangements include Brazil, Russia, China, Indonesia, Turkey, Ecuador, Greece, South Korea, Pakistan, Croatia, Peru, Portugal and Vietnam. Through our IO partnerships, we believe we can accelerate growth in Cardmember spending, Cards-in-force and merchant acceptance in these countries.
 
Network Card License Arrangements
 
The second type of GNS arrangement is known as a network card license (“NCL”). At the end of 2010, we had 61 of these arrangements in place worldwide. We pursue these arrangements to increase our brand presence and gain share in countries in which we have a proprietary Card-issuing and/or merchant acquiring business and, in a few cases, those in which we have IO partners. In an NCL arrangement, we grant the third-party financial institution a license to issue American Express-branded Cards. The NCL issuer owns the customer relationships for all Cards it issues, provides customer service to its Cardmembers, authorizes transactions, manages billing and credit, is responsible for marketing the Cards, and designs Card product features (including rewards and other incentives for Cardmembers), subject to meeting certain standards. We operate the merchant network, route and process Card transactions from the merchant’s point-of-sale through submission to the issuer, and settle with issuers. The NCL is the type of arrangement we have implemented with banks in the United States, United Kingdom, Australia and Japan.
 
GNS’ revenues in NCL arrangements are driven by a variety of factors, including the level of Cardmember spending, royalties, currency conversions and licensing fees paid by the partner and fees charged to the Card issuer based on charge volume, and our provision of value-added services such as Cardmember insurance products and other Card features and benefits for the issuer’s Cards. As indicated above, the NCL issuer bears the credit risk for the issued Cards, as well as the Card marketing and acquisition costs, Cardmember fraud risks and costs of rewards and other loyalty initiatives. We bear the risk arising from the NCL partner’s potential failure to meet its settlement obligations to us. We mitigate this risk by partnering with institutions that we believe are financially sound and will meet their obligations, and by monitoring their financial health, their compliance with the terms of their relationship with us and the political, economic and regulatory environment in which they operate. In addition, depending on an NCL issuer’s credit rating and


6


Table of Contents

other indicators of financial health, we may require an NCL issuer to post a letter of credit, bank guarantee or other collateral to reduce this risk.
 
Examples of NCL arrangements include our relationships with Bank of America in the United States, Lloyds TSB Bank in the United Kingdom and Westpac Banking Corporation in Australia.
 
Joint Venture Arrangements
 
The third type of GNS arrangement is a joint venture (“JV”) arrangement. We have utilized this type of arrangement in Switzerland and Belgium, as well as in other countries. In these countries, we join with a third-party to establish a separate business in which we have a significant ownership stake. The JV typically signs new merchants to the American Express network and issues local currency Cards that carry our logo. In a JV arrangement, the JV is responsible for the Cardmember credit risk and bears the operating and marketing costs. Unlike the other two types of GNS arrangements, we share management, risk, and profit and loss responsibility with our JV partners. Income is generated by discount revenues, card fees and net spread revenues. The economics of the JV are similar to those of our proprietary Card-issuing business, which we discuss under “U.S. Card Services,” and we receive a portion of the JV’s income depending on, among other things, the level of our ownership interest. Our subsidiary, AEOCC Ltd., purchases card receivables from certain of the GNS JVs from time to time.
 
GNS Business Highlights
 
Outside the United States we signed a number of agreements in 2010 to enhance our presence in countries where we already do business and further expanded our global presence into new geographic areas.
 
Some of the highlights of our GNS business outside the United States in 2010 include:
 
  •  Announcement of a new card partnership with Sberbank, a leading retail bank in Russia, for the issuance of American Express branded-cards in Russia
 
  •  Expansion of our card-issuing partnership with China Merchants Bank through the launch of American Express consumer Cards that bear the Centurion image
 
  •  Announcement of the launch of the Pantai American Express ® Credit Card with Maybank in Malaysia, the first medical co-brand credit card with a leading healthcare service provider in Malaysia
 
  •  Renewal by Credit Saison of its signature product line in Japan and introduction of four new Saison American Express Cards with the Centurion image
 
  •  Launch of the Blue from American Express Card in Georgia, with our partner, Bank of Georgia
 
  •  Launch of the Blue from American Express Card in Kazakhstan, with our partner, Kazkommertsbank
 
  •  Launch of the American Express ® Gold Card in Armenia, with our partner, ACBA Credit Agricole.
 
GNS continues to expand the airline co-brand products issued through GNS relationships, launching 8 new airline co-brands in 2010 bringing the total to 52 airline co-brand products. Some of the key airline co-brand launches outside the United States in 2010 include:
 
  •  Hana SK Skypass American Express ® Card and the Hana SK Skypass Corporate American Express ® Card with HanaSK Card Co., Ltd. in Korea
 
  •  Lotte Skypass from American Express with Lotte Bank in South Korea
 
  •  Miles & More Brussels Airlines products with our partner Alpha Card in Belgium
 
  •  AAdvantage from Bank of America Europe Card Services (MBNA) in the United Kingdom
 
  •  Aeroflot Card from American Express with our partner Russian Standard Bank in Russia
 
  •  La Tarjeta Distancia American Express ® Platinum and Elite with Banco de Guayaquil in Ecuador.


7


Table of Contents

 
Some of the highlights of our GNS business in the United States in 2010 include:
 
  •  Announcement of a new partnership for Macy’s and Bloomingdale’s credit cards to be co-branded exclusively with American Express and issued by Citibank
 
  •  Announcement of a new partnership with Regions Bank in the U.S. to launch the Regions Reserve sm American Express ® Card, developed for Regions Bank’s Private Banking clients and issued by Bank of America.
 
Global Merchant Services
 
We operate a GMS business, which includes signing merchants to accept Cards, accepting and processing Card transactions, and settling with merchants that accept Cards for purchases made by Cardmembers with Cards (“Charges”). We also provide marketing information, and other programs and services to merchants, leveraging the capabilities provided by our investments in our closed-loop structure, as well as point-of-sale products, servicing, and fraud prevention services.
 
Our objective is for Cardmembers to be able to use the Card wherever and however they desire, and to increase merchant coverage in key geographic areas and in selected new industries that have not traditionally accepted the Card. We add new merchants to our network through a number of sales channels: a proprietary sales force, third-party sales and service agents, strategic alliances with banks and processors, the Internet, telemarketing and inbound “Want to Honor” calls (i.e., where merchants desiring to accept the Card contact us directly). As discussed in the “Global Network Services” section, our IO partners and JVs also add new local merchants to the American Express network.
 
During 2010, we continued expanding our integrated American Express OnePoint ® solution for small- and medium-sized merchants in the United States. Under this program, third-party service agents provide payment processing services to merchants on our behalf for Card transactions, while we retain the acceptance contract with participating merchants, manage merchant pricing decisions and negotiations, and receive the same transactional information we always have received through our closed-loop network. This program simplifies card processing for small- and medium-sized merchants by providing them with a single source for statements, settlement and customer service. We are now following a similar strategy to our OnePoint solution in Spain through our arrangement with La Caixa, one of Spain’s largest acquirers.
 
GMS continues to significantly expand the number of merchants that accept our Card products as well as the kinds of businesses that accept the Card. Over the last several years, we have focused our efforts on increasing the use of our Cards for everyday spending. In 1990, 64% of our U.S. billings came from the travel and entertainment sectors and 36% came from retail and other sectors. That proportion has now been more than reversed. In 2010, U.S. non-travel and entertainment billings represented approximately 71.5% of the U.S. billed business on American Express Cards. This shift resulted, in part, from the growth, over time, in the types of merchants that began to accept charge and credit cards in response to consumers’ increased desire to use these cards for more of their purchases, our focus on expanding Card acceptance to meet Cardmembers’ needs, and increased competition from our competitors for travel and entertainment sector spending.
 
During 2010, we continued our efforts to bring Card acceptance to industries where cash or checks are the predominant form of payment. For example, we have made headway in promoting Card acceptance in industries such as pharmaceuticals, construction, industrial supply, insurance and advertising. Card acceptance agreements signed in 2010 in the United States include:
 
  •  Mercury Insurance Group, a leading insurance company
 
  •  BDO USA, LLP, a leading professional services firm providing assurance, tax, financial advisory and consulting services
 
  •  Applied Medical, a global medical device company that develops, manufactures and markets medical devices used in surgical procedures.


8


Table of Contents

 
Internationally, among others, Card acceptance agreements were reached with:
 
  •  Centro de Recaudaciones de Impuestos Municipales (CRIM), the tax collections governmental agency in Puerto Rico & the Caribbean
 
  •  Municipio de Naucalpan in Mexico
 
  •  AAMI, one of Australia’s largest and highest profile general insurance companies
 
  •  Ageas Insurance Solutions in the United Kingdom.
 
Additionally, we continued our drive to expand Card acceptance for retail and everyday spending categories outside the United States. For example, during 2010, we announced Card acceptance agreements with:
 
  •  Seven Eleven, now accepting the Card in Mexico
 
  •  Best Buy, now accepting the Card in the United Kingdom
 
  •  Kaiser’s Tengelmann AG, now an accepting supermarket merchant in Germany.
 
Globally, acceptance of general-purpose charge and credit cards continues to increase. As in prior years, during 2010, we continued to grow merchant acceptance of Cards around the world and to refine our approach to calculating merchant coverage in accordance with changes in the marketplace. Management estimates that, as of the end of 2010, our merchant network in the United States accommodated more than 90% of our Cardmembers’ general-purpose charge and credit card spending, and our international merchant network as a whole accommodated approximately 80% of our Cardmembers’ general-purpose charge and credit card spending. These percentages are based on comparing our Cardmembers’ spending on our network currently with our estimate of what our Cardmembers would spend on our network if all merchants that accept general-purpose credit and charge cards accepted American Express Cards.
 
We earn “discount” revenue from fees charged to merchants for accepting Cards as payment for goods or services sold. The merchant discount is the fee charged to the merchant for accepting Cards and is generally expressed as a percentage of the amount charged on a Card. In some instances, an additional flat transaction fee is assessed. The merchant discount is generally deducted from the amount of the payment that the “merchant acquirer” (in most cases, including for all U.S. merchants, TRS or one of its subsidiaries) pays to a merchant for Charges submitted. A merchant acquirer is the entity that contracts for Card acceptance with the merchant, accepts transactions from the merchant, pays the merchant for these transactions and submits the transactions to the American Express network, which submits the transactions to the appropriate Card issuer. When a Cardmember presents the Card for payment, the merchant creates a record of charge for the transaction and submits it to the merchant acquirer for payment. To the extent that TRS or one of its subsidiaries is the merchant acquirer, the merchant discount is recorded by us as discount revenue at the time the transaction is received by us from the merchant.
 
Where we act as the merchant acquirer and the Card presented at a merchant is issued by a third-party bank or financial institution, such as in the case of our GNS partners, we will make financial settlement to the merchant and receive the discount revenue. In our role as the operator of the Card network, we will also receive financial settlement from the Card issuer, who receives an issuer rate (i.e., the individually negotiated amount that Card issuers receive for transactions charged on our network with Cards they issue, which is usually expressed as a percentage of the charged amount). The difference between the discount revenue (received by us in the form of the merchant discount) and the issuer rate received by the Card issuer generates a return to us. In cases where American Express is the Card issuer and the merchant acquirer is a third-party bank or financial institution (which can be the case in a country in which the IO is the local merchant acquirer), we receive an individually negotiated issuer rate in our settlement with the merchant acquirer, which is recorded by us as discount revenue. By contrast with networks such as Visa and MasterCard, there is no collectively set interchange rate on the American Express network.


9


Table of Contents

The following diagrams depict the relationships among the parties in a point-of-sale transaction effected on the American Express network where we act as both the Card issuer and merchant acquirer (the “3-Party Model”) and under an NCL arrangement where third-party financial institutions act as Card issuers (the “NCL Model”):
 
(PERFORMANCE GRAPH)
 
The merchant discount we charge reflects the value we deliver to the merchant and generally represents a premium over the rates charged for acceptance of many cards issued on other networks. We deliver greater value to merchants in a variety of ways, including through higher spending by our Cardmembers relative to users of cards issued on competing card networks, our product and network features and functionality, our marketing expertise and programs, information services, fraud prevention services, and other investments which enhance the merchant value propositions associated with acceptance of the Card.
 
The merchant discount varies, among other factors, with the industry in which the merchant does business, the merchant’s Charge volume, the timing and method of payment to the merchant, the method of submission of Charges and, in certain instances, the geographic scope of the Card acceptance agreement signed with us (local or global) and the Charge amount.
 
In prior years, we experienced some reduction in our global weighted average merchant discount rate. The average discount rate was 2.55 percent and 2.54 percent for 2010 and 2009, respectively. Over time, certain repricing initiatives, changes in the mix of business and volume-related pricing discounts and investments will likely result in some erosion of the average discount rate.
 
While most merchants that accept our Cards understand our merchant discount pricing in relation to the value provided, we do encounter a relatively small number of merchants that accept our Cards, but tell their customers that they prefer to accept another type of payment or otherwise seek to suppress use of the Card. Subject to local legal requirements (such as, by way of example, Dodd-Frank), we respond to this issue vigorously to ensure that our Cardmembers are able to use their Card where and when they want to and to protect the American Express brand. We have made progress limiting Card suppression by focusing on acquiring merchants where Cardmembers want to use the Card; continuing to enhance the value we provide to merchants through programs such as DailyWish and American Express Selects, which enable merchants of


10


Table of Contents

any size to gain valuable exposure and additional sales by providing exclusive offers and experiences to American Express Cardmembers; developing and providing new and innovative business insights, marketing programs and fraud prevention tools using information available through our closed-loop network; providing better and earlier communication of our value proposition; and, when appropriate, exercising our right to terminate Card acceptance agreements with merchants who seek to suppress the use of our Card products. We have a client management organization which is dedicated to growing our merchant customers’ business and finding ways to enhance effectiveness of our relationship with these key business partners. Most importantly, we recognize that it is the merchant’s choice whether or not to accept American Express cards and that all merchants have numerous options given the intense competition from new and traditional forms of payment. Therefore, we dedicate substantial resources to delivering superior and differentiated value to attract and retain our merchant customers.
 
The laws of a number of states in the U.S. and certain countries outside the U.S. prohibit surcharging credit card purchases. American Express’ Card acceptance agreements with merchants generally do not prohibit surcharging so long as it is permitted by law and a merchant does not discriminate against the Card by surcharging higher amounts on purchases with the Card than on purchases with other cards, or by imposing a surcharge only on Card purchases, but not on purchases made with other cards. American Express also does not prohibit merchants from offering discounts to customers who pay with cash, check or Automated Clearing House (i.e., inter-bank transfers or “ACH”). In addition, American Express does not prohibit U.S. merchants from offering discounts or in-kind incentives to customers who pay with particular forms of payment in accordance with the provisions of Dodd-Frank, which was enacted in July 2010. For information concerning the proceeding against us recently brought by the DOJ and certain state attorneys general alleging violation of the U.S. antitrust laws with regard to certain provisions of our merchant agreements that are designed to protect our Cardmembers and our brand against discrimination at the point of sale, please see “Corporate Matters” within “Legal Proceedings” beginning on page 91.
 
GMS is focused on understanding and addressing factors that influence merchant satisfaction, including developing and executing innovative programs that increase Card usage at merchants, using technology resources, enhancing operational efficiencies and merchants’ ease of doing business with us, providing a suite of online servicing tools, making our United States operating procedures easily available to merchants on our Web site, applying our closed-loop capabilities and deep marketing expertise, and strengthening our relationships with merchants through an expanding roster of services that helps them meet their business goals.
 
We also offer our merchant customers a full range of point-of-sale solutions, including integrated point-of-sale terminals, software, online solutions, and direct links that allow merchants to accept American Express Cards (as well as credit and debit cards issued on other networks and checks). Virtually all proprietary point-of-sale solutions support direct processing (i.e., direct connectivity) to American Express, which can lower a merchant’s cost of Card acceptance and enhance payment efficiency.
 
In November 2010, we acquired Accertify Inc., a leading provider of solutions that help merchants combat fraudulent online and other card-not-present transactions. Launched in 2007, Accertify provides a hosted software application that offers an extra level of security for transactions over any of the major payment networks, including American Express, Visa, MasterCard, Discover and PayPal, or any other alternative payment method. Accertify also offers merchants the option to outsource their end-to-end fraud management process. With the acquisition of Accertify, American Express is able to broaden its fraud prevention services to merchants for transactions that take place on all networks. Accertify’s capabilities are incremental and complementary to American Express’ fraud solutions already offered to merchants for transactions on the American Express network.
 
In November 2010, we also announced the launch of American Express SafeKey sm , an online fraud prevention solution, which licenses Visa’s 3-D Secure Protocol, a technology embraced by the payments industry as a global standard for payment authentication.
 
We continue to focus our commitment to driving global interoperability in payment card specifications, making it easier for merchants to accept our Cards, for Cardmembers to have a more seamless experience at


11


Table of Contents

the point of sale, and for issuers who have more than one network relationship to have a standard across their card products.
 
We are an owner-member of EMVCo, the standards body that manages, maintains, and enhances specifications for chip-based payment cards and acceptance devices, including point-of-sale terminals. Our participation in this company helps to drive secure and interoperable payments globally for transactions made with chip cards by aligning and progressing the EMV specifications. Further, as EMVCo’s scope expands to include emerging payment technologies such as contactless cards and mobile phones, our participation will facilitate our products and specifications being universally compatible and ready for merchant acceptance.
 
We continue to focus our efforts in areas that make use and acceptance of the Card more convenient for merchants and Cardmembers. For instance, American Express offers a contactless payment feature embedded in certain cards, to provide a fast, easy-to-use alternative to cash, check, debit or other payment forms, particularly for making everyday purchases at merchants where speed and convenience is important. In the U.S., top quick-service restaurants, movie theaters, drug and convenience stores and major retail chains readily accept American Express contactless payments. Similarly, Automatic Bill Payment focuses on providing convenience by allowing merchants to bill Cardmembers on a regular basis for recurring charges approved by the Cardmember such as insurance premiums, newspaper subscriptions, health club memberships, commutation costs and telecommunication services. Additionally, to provide extra convenience and speed at the point of sale, low value transactions (under $25 in the U.S.) do not require a signature.
 
Wherever we manage both the acquiring relationship with merchants and the Card-issuing side of the business, there is a “closed-loop,” which distinguishes our network from the bankcard networks, in that we have access to information at both ends of the Card transaction. We maintain direct relationships with both our Cardmembers and our merchants, and we handle all key aspects of those relationships.
 
Our relationships allow us to analyze information on Cardmember spending. This enables us to provide targeted marketing and other information services for merchants and special offers and services to Cardmembers through a variety of channels. Recently, we created a business within GMS called American Express ® Business Insights, which offers products and services derived from our strong business model and closed loop network. Business Insights combines aggregated, non-personally identifiable data and trend analysis to provide specialized business planning and marketing expertise to our customers. At the same time, we protect the confidentiality of information on Cardmember spending, and comply with our privacy and firewall policies and applicable legal requirements.
 
We work closely with our Card-issuing and merchant-acquiring bank partners to maintain key elements of this closed-loop, which permits them to customize marketing efforts, deliver greater value to their Cardmembers and help us to direct increased business to merchants who accept the Card.
 
As the merchant acquirer, we have certain exposures that arise if a billing dispute between a Cardmember and a merchant is settled in favor of the Cardmember. Drivers of this liability are returns in the normal course of business, disputes over fraudulent charges, the quality or non-delivery of goods and services and billing errors. Typically, we offset the amount due to the Cardmember against payments for the merchant’s current or future Charge submissions. We can realize losses when a merchant’s offsetting Charge submissions cease, such as when the merchant decides to no longer accept the Card, commences a bankruptcy proceeding or goes out of business. We actively monitor our merchant base to assess the risk of this exposure. When appropriate, we will take action to reduce the net exposure to a given merchant by holding cash reserves funded through Charge payable holdbacks from a merchant, lengthening the time between when the merchant submits a Charge for payment and when we pay the merchant requiring the merchant to secure a letter of credit or a parent company guarantee, or implementing other appropriate risk management tools. We also establish reserves on our balance sheet for these contingencies in accordance with relevant accounting rules.
 
With the increase in electronic transmission of payment card transaction data over merchants’ point-of-sale systems, American Express and other card networks recognized the necessity for merchants and merchant processors to secure this data against accidental or intentional compromise using a standard protocol that applies to all card types. We and Discover Financial Services, JCB Co., Ltd., MasterCard Worldwide and


12


Table of Contents

Visa formed PCI Security Standards Council, LLC (“PCI SSC”), an independent standards-setting organization. PCI SSC’s role is to manage the Payment Card Industry (“PCI”) Data Security Standard, and more recently the PCI PIN Entry Device (“PED”) Security Requirements and the Payment Application Data Security Standard, which focus on improving payment card account security throughout the transaction process. By establishing PCI SSC, we and the other founders have developed common standards that are more accessible and efficient for participants in the payment card industry. All our merchants and service providers that store, process and transmit payment card data are required to comply with the PCI Data Security Standard. PCI SSC is dedicated to driving greater education, awareness and adoption of these security standards to ensure that all stakeholders involved in the payment process conduct their business responsibly.
 
In some markets outside the United States, particularly in Asia, third-party processors and some bankcard acquirers offer merchants the capability of converting credit card transactions from the local currency to the currency of the cardholder’s residence (i.e., the cardholder’s billing currency) at the point-of-sale, and submitting the transaction in the cardholder’s billing currency, thus bypassing the traditional foreign currency conversion process of the card network. This practice is known as “dynamic currency conversion.” If a merchant utilizes a dynamic currency conversion process, the merchant and processor share any fee assessed or spread earned for converting the transaction at the point-of-sale, thus reducing or eliminating revenue for card issuers and card networks relating to the conversion of foreign charges to the cardholder’s billing currency. This practice is still not widespread, and it remains uncertain whether its use will expand over time. Our policy generally requires merchants to submit Charges and be paid in the currency of the country in which the transaction occurs, and we convert the transaction to the Cardmember’s billing currency.
 
Global Network & Merchant Services — Competition
 
Our global card network, including our Global Merchant Services and Global Network Services businesses, competes in the global payments industry with other card networks, including, among others, Visa, MasterCard, Diners Club International (which was acquired by Discover Financial Services), and Discover (primarily in the United States). We are the third largest general-purpose charge and credit card network based on charge volume, behind Visa and MasterCard, which we believe are larger than we are in most countries. In addition, apart from such network services, a range of companies globally, including merchant acquirers and processors, carry out some activities similar to those performed by our GMS and GNS businesses. No single entity participates on a global basis in the full range of activities that are encompassed by our closed-loop business model.
 
The principal competitive factors that affect the network and merchant service businesses include:
 
  •  the number of Cards-in-force and amount of spending on these Cards
 
  •  the quantity and quality of the establishments where the Cards can be used
 
  •  the economic attractiveness to card issuers and merchants of participating in the network
 
  •  the success of marketing and promotional campaigns
 
  •  reputation and brand recognition
 
  •  innovation and investment in systems, technology, product and service offerings, particularly in on-line commerce
 
  •  the quality of customer service
 
  •  the security of Cardmember and merchant information
 
  •  the impact of existing litigation, legislation and government regulation
 
  •  the cost of Card acceptance relative to the value provided.
 
Another aspect of network competition is the recent emergence and rapid growth of alternative payment mechanisms and systems, which include aggregators (such as PayPal), wireless payment technologies


13


Table of Contents

(including using mobile telephone networks to carry out transactions), prepaid systems and systems linked to payment cards, and bank transfer models.
 
New technologies, together with the portability provided by smartphones and tablets and evolving consumer behavior with social networking, are rapidly changing the way people interact with each other and transact business all around the world. In this connection, traditional and non-traditional competitors such as mobile telecommunications companies are working to deliver digital and mobile payment services for both consumers and merchants. While we estimate that we have the largest share of online spending of any major card issuer and more global online billings volume than PayPal, the competition remains fierce for capturing online spend in the ever-increasing digital world.
 
To the extent alternative payment mechanisms and systems, such as aggregators, continue to successfully expand, discount revenues and our ability to access transaction data through our closed-loop network, and potentially other revenues could be negatively impacted. In the United States, alternative payment vehicles that seek to redirect customers to payment systems based on ACH continue to emerge and grow, and existing debit networks also continue to expand both on- and off-line and are making efforts to develop online PIN functionality, which could further reduce the relative use of charge and credit cards online. For a discussion concerning our involvement in the emerging payments area, please see “Enterprise Growth” beginning on page 34 below.
 
Some of our competitors have attempted to replicate our closed-loop functionality, such as Visa, with its Visa Incentive Network. Although it remains to be seen how effective Visa will be, efforts by Visa and other card networks and payment providers to replicate the closed-loop speak to its continued value and to the intensely competitive environment in which we operate.
 
Global Network & Merchant Services — Regulation
 
Local regulations governing the issuance of charge and credit cards have not been a significant factor impacting GNS’ arrangements with banks and qualifying financial institutions, because such banks and institutions generally are already authorized to issue general-purpose cards and, in the case of our IO arrangements, to operate merchant-acquiring businesses. Accordingly, our GNS partners have generally not had difficulty obtaining appropriate government authorization in the countries in which we have chosen to enter into GNS arrangements. As a service provider to regulated U.S. banks, our GNS business is subject to review by certain federal bank regulators, including the Federal Reserve, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”), the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (“OCC”) and the Office of Thrift Supervision (“OTS”).
 
As the operator of a general-purpose card network, we are also subject to certain provisions of the Currency and Foreign Transactions Reporting Act and the accompanying regulations issued by the U.S. Department of the Treasury (collectively referred to as the “Bank Secrecy Act”), as amended by the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001 (the “Patriot Act”). We conduct due diligence on our GNS partners to ensure that they have implemented and maintain sufficient anti-money laundering (“AML”) controls to prevent our network from being used for money laundering or terrorist financing purposes. As a result of American Express Company and TRS each being bank holding companies, our business is also subject to further regulation and regulatory oversight by the Federal Reserve. For additional information about our regulatory status, please see “Supervision and Regulation — General” beginning on page 38 below.
 
In recent years, regulators in several countries outside the United States have focused on the fees involved in the operation of card networks, including interchange fees paid to card issuers and the fees merchants are charged to accept cards. Regulators in the United Kingdom, Canada, New Zealand, Poland, Italy, Switzerland, Hungary, the European Union, Australia, Brazil, Mexico and Venezuela, among others, have conducted investigations that are either ongoing, concluded, or on appeal.
 
The interchange fee, which is the collectively set fee paid by the bankcard merchant acquirer to the card issuing bank in “four party” payment networks, like Visa and MasterCard, is generally the largest component of the merchant service charge payable by merchants for bankcard debit and credit card acceptance in these


14


Table of Contents

systems. By contrast, the American Express network does not have interchange fees. Although the regulators’ focus has primarily been on Visa and MasterCard as the dominant card networks and their operations on a multilateral basis, antitrust actions and government regulation relating to merchant pricing could ultimately affect all networks. Lower interchange and/or merchant discount revenue may lead card issuers to look for other sources of revenue from consumers such as higher annual card fees or interest charges, as well as to reduce costs by scaling back or eliminating rewards programs.
 
In the United States, Congress continued to focus on the interchange issue during 2010. Congress passed Dodd-Frank, which the President signed into law in July 2010. Dodd-Frank gives the Federal Reserve the authority to establish rules regarding interchange fees charged by payment card issuers for transactions in which a person uses a debit or general-use prepaid card, and to enforce a new statutory requirement that such fees be reasonable and proportional to the actual cost of a transaction to the issuer, with specific allowances for the costs of fraud prevention, as well as to prohibit exclusive network routing restrictions for electronic debit transactions. American Express does not offer a debit card linked to a deposit account, but does issue various types of prepaid cards. Reloadable general-use prepaid cards, but not those marketed or labeled as gift cards or gift certificates, are exempt from the interchange fee limitations. In contrast to the interchange fee limitations, all prepaid cards would be subject to the exclusive network routing restrictions for electronic debit transactions. In December 2010, the Federal Reserve issued a Notice of Proposed Rulemaking requesting comments to implement the interchange fee limitations and exclusive network routing restrictions. The Federal Reserve has proposed two options for the interchange limitations and describes two interpretations of the statutory language on the exclusive network routing restrictions. Comments on the proposal were due by February 22, 2011. The Federal Reserve must issue final rules on the interchange limitations by April 2011, and those rules take effect on July 21, 2011. The Federal Reserve must issue final rules on the exclusive network routing restrictions by July 21, 2011. The statute does not specify when those rules must take effect. The proposed rules issued by the Federal Reserve have garnered attention from members of Congress, and the relevant congressional committees have held hearings to review the proposal. It is difficult to assess at this time the extent to which the final regulations, once issued, could adversely impact our revenues and profitability.
 
Additionally, Dodd-Frank prohibits payment card networks from restricting merchants from offering discounts or incentives to encourage customers to pay with particular forms of payment such as cash, check, credit or debit card, provided that such offers do not discriminate on the basis of the network or issuer. Further, to the extent required by federal law or applicable state law, the discount or incentive must be offered to all prospective buyers and must be clearly and conspicuously disclosed. Dodd-Frank also permits U.S. merchants to establish minimum purchase amounts of no more than $10 for credit card purchases, provided that the merchants do not discriminate between networks or issuers. Federal government agencies and institutions of higher learning are also permitted to establish maximum amounts for credit card purchases provided they do not discriminate between networks or issuers. As a result of these new laws, customers may be incentivized by merchants to move away from the use of charge and credit card products to other forms of payment, such as debit, which could adversely affect our revenues and profitability. During the last four years, a number of bills were proposed in individual state legislatures seeking to impose caps on credit card interchange fees or to prohibit credit card companies from charging a merchant discount on the sales tax portion of credit card purchases. Other proposals were aimed at increasing the transparency of card network rules for merchants. In addition, a number of bills were proposed to establish merchant liability for the costs of a data security breach of a merchant’s system or require merchants to adopt technical safeguards to protect sensitive cardholder payment information. In 2010, Vermont enacted legislation that permits merchants to set a minimum dollar value of no more than $10 for acceptance of any form of payment; permits merchants to provide discounts or other benefits based on the form of payment (i.e., card, cash, check, debit card, stored-value card, charge card or credit card); and permits merchants to accept the cards of a payment system at one or more of its locations but not at others. This legislation may serve as a model for other states. In the event that additional legislative or regulatory activity to limit interchange or merchant fees continues or increases, or state data security legislation is adopted, our revenues and profitability could be adversely affected.


15


Table of Contents

In certain countries where antitrust actions or regulations have led our competitors to lower their fees, we have made adjustments to our pricing to merchants to reflect local competitive trends. For example, reductions in bankcard interchange mandated by the Reserve Bank of Australia in 2003 resulted in lower merchant discount rates for Visa and MasterCard acceptance. As a result of changes in the marketplace, we reduced our own merchant discount rates in Australia over time, although we have been able to increase billed business and the number of merchants accepting our Cards. In addition, under legislation enacted in Argentina, a merchant acquirer is required to charge the same merchant discount rate to all merchants in the same industry category, and merchant discount rates for credit cards cannot exceed 3%. The Central Bank of Venezuela has issued regulations regarding the maximum level of merchant discount rates by industry category. In December 2007, the European Commission ruled that MasterCard’s multilateral interchange fees (“MIF”) for cross-border payment card transactions violate EC Treaty rules on restrictive business practices. The Commission’s decision applies to cross-border consumer credit, charge and debit card transactions within the EU and to domestic transactions to which MasterCard has chosen to apply the cross-border MIF. The ruling does not prevent MasterCard and its member banks from adopting an alternative MIF arrangement that can be proven to comply with EU Competition rules. Although the Commission’s investigation included commercial cards, it has reserved judgment for the time being on the legality of MasterCard’s cross-border MIF for commercial card transactions. MasterCard lodged an appeal against the Commission’s findings, which is pending. An interim settlement, pending the appeal, was agreed to in 2009 between the Commission and MasterCard, capping MIF at 30 basis points for consumer card transactions and 20 basis points for debit card transactions.
 
In 2002, the Commission granted an exemption to Visa regarding its MIFs for cross-border consumer card transactions within Europe. This exemption expired on December 31, 2007 and in March 2008 the Commission opened formal antitrust proceedings against Visa Europe Limited in relation to Visa’s MIFs for such transactions. The Commission indicated that the MasterCard decision should “provide Visa with guidance for the way ahead,” although it stated that “every MIF must be examined on its own merits.” In 2010, the Commission accepted Visa Europe’s pledge to cut its cross-border debit card MIF to 20 basis points for four years. The Commission’s investigation into Visa Europe’s credit and deferred debit card MIF for cross-border transactions remains ongoing.
 
Developments at the EU level may affect how the competition authorities in the Member States of the EU view domestic interchange and the progress of ongoing investigations. In 2007, for example, consistent with the Commission’s findings of that year in its case against MasterCard, the competition regulator in Poland found insufficient basis for Visa and MasterCard interchange fees and ordered the associations and their members to stop their current interchange setting practices. However, the banks appealed that decision, and in November 2008 the decision was overturned. The Polish Competition Authority has appealed that ruling. More recently, the Office of Fair Trading in the United Kingdom indicated that it was delaying further consideration of its cases against MasterCard and Visa pending the outcome of the appeal of the European Commission’s decision against MasterCard.
 
In 2010, national parliaments in Hungary and France enacted legislation to cap interchange fees or point of sale service charges without government sponsorship for these measures. Although in both cases the legislation has been either repealed or struck down on procedural grounds, it is possible there may be further attempts to enact regulation of merchant fees or interchange with direct or indirect impacts on American Express.
 
In August 2009, Visa and MasterCard settled an anti-trust case with the New Zealand regulatory authorities regarding whether the setting of interchange rates constituted price fixing and whether other scheme rules lessened competition. The settlement results in changes to the Visa and MasterCard scheme rules, which will set maximum interchange rates and also allow bilateral setting of lower interchange rates between issuers and acquirers, as well as remove the schemes’ no surcharging rules. On April 17, 2010, each of the schemes released their maximum interchange rates. It is difficult to assess at this time the extent to which the changes to interchange could adversely impact our revenues and profitability in New Zealand.
 
Regulators have also considered network rules that prohibit merchants from surcharging card purchases. In Australia, we have seen selective, but increasing, merchant surcharging on our Cards in certain industries


16


Table of Contents

and, in some cases, on a basis that is greater than that applied to cards issued on the bankcard networks. The member states of the European Economic Area have now implemented a relatively new legislative framework for electronic payment services, including cards, called the European Directive 2007/64/EC on payment services. This directive, commonly referred to as the Payment Services Directive, prescribes common rules for licensing and supervision of payment services providers, including card issuers and merchant acquirers, and for their conduct of business with customers. The objective of the Payment Services Directive is to facilitate the operation of a single internal payments market in the EU through harmonization of EU Member State laws governing payment services. One provision of the Payment Services Directive permits merchants to surcharge, subject to disclosure requirements, but also allows individual Member States to override this rule by prohibiting or limiting surcharging. To date, the member states of the European Economic Area are split on whether they prohibit or permit surcharging, with countries such as the United Kingdom (which for a number of years has permitted it for credit card purchases), the Netherlands and Spain permitting it, in some cases within limits, and other countries such as France, Italy and Sweden prohibiting it. All member states permit discounts. The Payment Services Directive complements another European initiative, the Single Euro Payments Area (“SEPA”), which is an industry-led initiative with support from EU institutions. Among other changes, SEPA involves the adoption of new, pan-European technical standards for cards and card transactions. All of the foregoing requires significant costs to implement and maintain.
 
The Canadian Competition Bureau has commenced an application against Visa and MasterCard under the price maintenance provisions of the Canadian Competition Act seeking a remedial order prohibiting Visa and MasterCard from entering into, enforcing or imposing terms that restrain merchants from certain business practices, including encouraging use of lower cost methods of payment and discouraging use of credit cards with higher card acceptance fees, declining acceptance of certain credit cards and surcharging customers who use Visa and MasterCard credit cards. While the Competition Bureau did not name American Express in its application, this action evidences the strong regulatory and judicial focus on this area, which could have indirect implications for American Express.
 
The Canadian Department of Finance requires Amex Bank of Canada as well as other payment networks, issuers and acquirers to adhere to the Code of Conduct for the Credit and Debit Card Industry in Canada which among other things requires increased transparency and disclosure of fees in merchant agreements and monthly statements, requires 90 days notice of merchant fee increases or introduction of new fees and gives merchants the right to cancel their contract without penalty after receiving such notice, allows differential discounting by merchants between forms of payment and payment networks and requires that merchants provide their express consent to accept new products or services.
 
U.S. CARD SERVICES
 
As a significant part of our proprietary Card-issuing business, our U.S. banking subsidiaries, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, issue a wide range of Card products and services to consumers and small businesses in the United States. Our consumer travel business, which provides travel services to Cardmembers and other consumers, complements our core Card business, as does our Global Payment Options business.
 
The proprietary Card business offers a broad set of card products to attract our target customer base. As we continue to focus on premium products, the Company’s priority will be to drive billed business and average spend per card rather than achieve broad growth in cards-in-force. Core elements of our strategy are:
 
  •  focusing on acquiring and retaining high-spending, creditworthy Cardmembers
 
  •  designing Card products with features that appeal to specific customer segments
 
  •  using strong incentives to drive spending on our various Card products, including our Membership Rewards ® program and other rewards features
 
  •  using loyalty programs such as Delta SkyMiles, sponsored by our co-brand and other partners to drive spending
 
  •  developing and nurturing wide-ranging relationships with co-brand and other partners


17


Table of Contents

 
  •  promoting and using incentives for Cardmembers to use their Cards in new and expanded merchant categories, including everyday spend and traditional cash and check categories
 
  •  providing exceptional customer service.
 
In August 2010, J.D. Power and Associates released its annual nationwide credit card satisfaction study and ranked American Express highest in overall satisfaction among 10 of the largest card issuers in the United States, for the fourth consecutive year.
 
Consumer and Small Business Services
 
We offer individual consumer charge Cards such as the American Express ® Card, the American Express ® Gold Card, the Platinum Card ® , and the Centurion ® Card, as well as the ZYNC ® Card from American Express; revolving credit Cards such as Blue from American Express ® , Blue Cash ® Card from American Express, Blue Sky from American Express sm , and Blue Sky Preferred from American Express sm ; and a variety of Cards sponsored by and co-branded with other corporations and institutions, such as the Delta SkyMiles ® Credit Card from American Express, True-Earnings ® Card exclusively for Costco members, Starwood Preferred Guest ® Credit Card and JetBlue Card from American Express.
 
Centurion Bank and AEBFSB as Issuers of Certain Cards
 
We have two U.S. bank subsidiaries, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, which are wholly owned subsidiaries of TRS. Each bank is an FDIC insured depository institution. The activities of Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are subject to examination by their respective regulators. Both banks take steps to maintain compliance programs to address the various safety and soundness, internal control and compliance requirements, including anti-money laundering requirements that apply to them. You can find a further discussion of the anti-money laundering initiatives affecting us under “Corporate & Other” below.
 
Certain additional information regarding each bank is set forth in the table below:
 
             
      Centurion Bank     AEBFSB
Type of Bank
    Utah-chartered industrial bank     Federal savings bank
             
Regulatory Supervision
    Regulated, supervised and regularly examined by the Utah Department of Financial Institutions and the FDIC     Regulated, supervised and regularly examined by the OTS, a bureau of the U.S. Department of the Treasury, until July 21, 2011*; thereafter regulated, supervised and regularly examined by the OCC, a bureau of the U.S. Department of the Treasury.
             
Types of cards issued
   
•   Consumer credit cards
•   Consumer charge cards
    •   Consumer credit cards (including all Co-brand credit cards)
•   Consumer charge cards
•   All OPEN ® credit cards and charge cards
             
Marketing methods     Primarily direct mail and other remote marketing channels    
•   Direct mail and other remote marketing channels
•   In-person selling and third-party co-brand partners
             
Risk-based capital adequacy requirements**, based on Tier One risk-based capital, total risk-based capital and Tier One core capital ratios at December 31, 2010     Well capitalized     Well capitalized***
             


18


Table of Contents

 
July 21, 2011 is the “transfer date” of the OTS’s supervisory responsibility for federal savings banks to the OCC under Section 311 of Dodd-Frank. The Treasury Secretary may extend the transfer date for up to six additional months upon finding that an orderly implementation process is not feasible by July 21, 2011.
 
** The risk-based capital standards for both the FDIC and OTS are substantively identical. Currently, a bank generally is deemed to be well capitalized if it maintains a Tier One risk-based capital ratio of at least 6%, a total risk-based capital ratio of at least 10% and a leverage ratio of at least 5%. For further discussion regarding capital adequacy, including changes to capital adequacy rules, please see “Supervision and Regulation — General — Capital Adequacy” beginning on page 41.
 
*** Since January 2009, AEBFSB has committed to maintain a Total capital ratio of no less than 15%.
 
Charge Cards
 
Our charge Cards, which generally carry no preset spending limits, are primarily designed as a method of payment and not as a means of financing purchases of goods or services. Charges are approved based on a variety of factors including a Cardmember’s current spending patterns, payment history, credit record, and financial resources. Cardmembers generally must pay the full amount billed each month, and no finance charges are assessed on the balance. Charge Card accounts that are past due are subject, in most cases, to a delinquency assessment and, if not brought to current status, may be cancelled. The no preset-spending limit and pay-in-full nature of these products attract high-spending Cardmembers.
 
The charge Cards also offer several ways for eligible U.S. Cardmembers to pay off certain of their purchases over time. The Sign & Travel ® Feature permits eligible U.S. Cardmembers to extend payment for airline tickets, cruise ship tickets and other travel charges purchased with our charge Cards. The Extended Payment Option permits eligible U.S. Cardmembers to extend payment for eligible charges above a certain dollar amount.
 
As part of our effort to deliver additional value for existing Cardmembers and to attract new high-spending customers to American Express, we launched in 2010 the following three new benefits for our Platinum Card ® and Centurion Card ® that will provide our consumer and OPEN ® Cardmembers with improved value and service while traveling:
 
  •  a $200 airline fee credit that allows Cardmembers to enroll and receive up to $200 annually on incidental fees on their airline of choice
 
  •  a 20% travel bonus benefit that gives back to Cardmembers 20% of the points they redeem for travel when they use Membership Rewards ® Pay With Points
 
  •  a special version of the new American Express Travel iphone application.
 
We also announced in December 2010 that we will eliminate foreign currency transaction fees for U.S. consumer and small business Cardmembers who make international purchases with their Platinum Cards ® or Centurion ® Cards, which is expected to be effective towards the end of the first quarter of 2011.
 
In September 2010, we also announced that Continental Airlines will no longer participate in the Airport Club Access program for Centurion and Platinum Cardmembers or the Membership Rewards points transfer program as of October 1, 2011. However, Cardmembers will still be able to redeem points for travel on Continental Airlines ® through Membership Rewards Pay with Points ® . While Continental Airlines was a significant participant in the Airport Club Access Program and key redemption partner in our Membership Rewards points transfer program, we continue to strengthen our relationships with our Cardmembers by enhancing the value we provide through our premium offerings and benefits, including those listed above.
 
In May 2010, we launched the ZYNC ® Card from American Express, a new charge Card with a low annual fee of $25. Cardmembers get core charge Card features and protections on the base card with the added flexibility to select bundles of rewards and benefits called “Packs” that are tailored to specific lifestyle interests and spending habits in categories such as music, fashion, food, travel and more.


19


Table of Contents

Revolving Credit Cards
 
We offer a variety of revolving credit Cards. These Cards have a range of different payment terms, interest rate and fee structures, rewards programs and Cardmember benefits. Revolving credit Card products, such as Blue from American Express, Blue Cash from American Express and Blue Sky from American Express, provide Cardmembers with the flexibility to pay their bill in full each month or carry a monthly balance on their Cards to finance the purchase of goods or services. Along with charge Cards and co-brand Cards, these revolving credit Cards attract affluent Cardmembers and promote increased relevance for our expanding merchant network.
 
In 2010, we launched Blue Sky Preferred from American Express, which offers double Blue Sky sm points on hotel, dining and car rental purchases which can be redeemed towards travel anywhere, anytime, on any airline with no blackout dates or restrictions. In addition, Cardmembers receive an annual $100 Airline Allowance for use on airline incidental fees (e.g., checked baggage fees, in-flight meals, etc.). Blue Sky Preferred sm Card is the first proprietary lending product in the Blue Card family with an annual fee, diversifying the revenue streams of this portfolio.
 
Co-brand Cards
 
We issue Cards under co-brand agreements with selected commercial firms in the United States. The competition among card issuers and networks for attractive co-brand card partnerships is quite intense because these partnerships can generate high-spending loyal cardholders. The duration of our co-brand arrangements generally ranges from five to ten years. Cardmembers earn rewards provided by the partners’ respective loyalty programs based upon their spending on the co-brand Cards, such as frequent flyer miles, hotel loyalty points and cash back. We make payments to our co-brand partners, which can be significant, based primarily on the amount of Cardmember spending and corresponding rewards earned on such spending and, under certain arrangements, on the number of accounts acquired and retained. We expense amounts due under co-brand arrangements in the month earned. Payment terms vary by arrangement, but are monthly or quarterly. Generally, once we make payment to the co-brand partner, the partner is solely liable for providing rewards to the Cardmember under the co-brand partner’s own loyalty program. As the issuer of the co-brand Card, we retain all the credit risk with the Cardmember and bear the receivables funding and operating expenses for such Cards. The co-brand partner retains the risk associated with the miles, points or other currency earned by the Cardmember under the partner’s loyalty program.
 
During 2010, we introduced several new innovations to our existing products. For example, we launched the First Bag Free benefit which allows Gold, Platinum and Reserve Delta SkyMiles Credit Card Cardmembers to check their first bag for free on Delta Air Lines operated flights. We also launched two new benefits on the Starwood Preferred Guest Credit Card and the Starwood Preferred Guest Business Credit Card that provides a 5 night / 2 stay credit so Cardmembers earn elite status faster and an exclusive Sheraton Hotels and Resorts offer.
 
Co-brand Partnerships with Financial Services Institutions
 
We also issue Cards that are marketed under co-brand partnership arrangements with financial services partners. Such partnerships involve the offering of a standard product (issued by TRS or one of its subsidiaries) to customers of the financial services partner, generally co-branded with the partner’s name on the Card. Under these arrangements, we may make payments to the financial services partners that are primarily based on the number of accounts acquired and/or retained through the arrangement and/or the amount of Cardmember spending on such Cards. The duration of such arrangements generally ranges from three to seven years.
 
Card Pricing and Account Management
 
Certain Cards, particularly charge Cards, charge an annual fee that varies based on the type of Card and the number of Cards for each account. We also offer many revolving credit Cards with no annual fee but on which we assess finance charges for revolving balances. Depending on the product, we also charge


20


Table of Contents

Cardmembers an annual program fee to participate in the Membership Rewards programs and fees for account performance (e.g., late fees) or for certain services (e.g., additional copies of account statements). We apply standards and criteria for creditworthiness to each Cardmember through a variety of means both at the time of initial solicitation or application and on an ongoing basis during the Card relationship. We use sophisticated credit models and techniques in our risk management operations. For a further description of our risk management policies, please see “Risk Management” appearing on page 48 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
Membership Rewards ® Program
 
The Membership Rewards program from American Express allows Cardmembers to earn one point for virtually every dollar charged on eligible, enrolled American Express Cards, and then redeem points for a wide array of rewards, including travel, retail merchandise, dining and entertainment, financial services and even donations to benefit tens of thousands of charities. Points generally have no expiration date and there is no limit on the number of points one can earn. A large majority of spending by eligible Cardmembers earns points under this program.
 
The U.S. Membership Rewards program has over 150 redemption partners and features over 500 merchandise brands. Membership Rewards program tiers are aligned with specific Card products to better meet Cardmember lifestyle and reward program usage needs. American Express Cardmembers participate in one of three Membership Rewards program tiers based on the Credit or Charge Card they have in their wallet. For those Cardmembers with American Express Cards, such as Blue from American Express and ZYNC from American Express, we have the Membership Rewards Express ® program. American Express Charge Cardmembers with American Express Green and Gold Cards have the Membership Rewards ® program. Platinum Card ® members and Centurion ® Cardmembers are enrolled in the Membership Rewards First ® program.
 
During the year, we enhanced our Membership Rewards ® program with the introduction of new reward options designed to meet customer demand and provide Cardmembers with greater breadth and variety as well as utility. For example, we launched a new benefit that allows Membership Rewards points to be used for purchases on Amazon.com at the point of sale. In addition to this redemption option at Amazon, we have added a number of new partners to the program that give Cardmembers a broader range of opportunities to redeem points, such as Universal Studios Theme Parks, Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts, Victoria’s Secret, Ruby Tuesday and Zynga. In addition, Cardmembers now have the ability to pay for their annual membership fee with Membership Rewards points. We believe our Membership Rewards point bank is a substantial asset and a competitive advantage, and is moving towards becoming a valued virtual currency.
 
When a Cardmember enrolled in the Membership Rewards program uses the Card, we establish reserves to cover the cost of estimated future reward redemptions for points earned to date. When a Membership Rewards program enrollee redeems a reward using Membership Rewards points, we make a payment to the Membership Rewards program partner providing the reward pursuant to contractual arrangements. Membership Rewards expense is driven by Cardmember charge volume, customer participation in the program, and contractual arrangements with redemption partners. At year end, we estimated that current Cardmembers will ultimately redeem approximately 90% of their points. For more information on our Membership Rewards program, see “Critical Accounting Policies — Reserves for Membership Rewards Costs” appearing on page 25 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
Membership Rewards continues to be an important driver of Cardmember spending and loyalty. We believe, based on historical experience, that Cardmembers enrolled in rewards programs yield higher spend, stronger credit performance and greater profit for us. By offering a broader range of redemption choices, we


21


Table of Contents

have given our Cardmembers more flexibility in the use of their rewards points and have favorably affected our average cost per point. We continually seek to optimize the overall economics of the program and make changes to enhance its value to Cardmembers. Our program is also valuable to merchants that become redemption partners as we bring them high-spending Cardmembers and new marketing channels to reach these Cardmembers.
 
Cardmember Special Services and Programs
 
Throughout the world, our Cardmembers have access to a variety of fee-free and fee-based special services and programs, depending on the type of Cards they have. Examples of these special services and programs include:
 
             
  the Membership Rewards ® program     Automatic Flight Insurance
  Premium Return Protection     Premium Baggage Protection
  Global Assist ® Hotline     CreditSecure ®
  Extended Warranty     Account Protector
  Car Rental Loss and Damage Insurance Plan     Online Fraud Protection Guarantee
  Purchase Protection Plan     Credit Card Registry
  Emergency Card Replacement     My Free Credit Score and Report
  Return Protection     Identity Theft Assistance
  Manage Your Card Account Online     Event Ticket Protection Plan
  Online Year-End Summary     Platinum Office Program
  American Express Roadside Assistance Services     Online Money Manager
  American Express Bill Pay ®     Exclusive Access to Cardmember Events
  Advanced Ticket Sales        
 
OPEN
 
In addition to our U.S. Consumer Card business, through AEBFSB we are also a leading provider of financial services to small businesses (generally, firms with less than 100 employees and/or annual sales up to $10 million). American Express OPEN (“OPEN”) offers small business owners a wide range of tools, services and savings designed to meet their evolving needs, including:
 
  •  charge and credit cards
 
  •  fee-based business solutions to help everyday business operations such as AcceptPay ® , InsuranceEdge sm and SearchManager
 
  •  rewards on eligible spend and business relevant redemptions
 
  •  retail and travel protections such as purchase protection and baggage insurance
 
  •  travel services
 
  •  3%–10% or more discounts at select suppliers of travel, business services, and products through OPEN Savings ®
 
  •  expense management reporting
 
  •  enhanced online account management capabilities
 
  •  resources to help grow and manage a business through the award winning community-driven website, OPEN Forum ®
 
All American Express OPEN ® Cardmembers are automatically enrolled in OPEN Savings ® , a program that offers discounts for all OPEN customers on travel and other major business expenses simply by using their American Express OPEN Card at participating companies. These savings may be combined with any existing discounts or offers.


22


Table of Contents

Some of the highlights of our OPEN business in 2010 include:
 
  •  Launch of InsuranceEdge, an integrated solution designed to help small business owners research, review, compare and purchase commercial insurance appropriate for their business needs.
 
  •  Launch of SearchManager, a solution that simplifies the way business owners can manage their online advertising campaigns.
 
  •  Launch of a new mobile platform for OPEN Forum.
 
  •  Expansion of the OPEN Savings program through new partnerships with AirTran Airways, OfficeMax, Hewlett Packard and Firedog tech support.
 
  •  Launch and development of the first ever Small Business Saturday sm , a day to support local businesses that create jobs, boost the economy and preserve neighborhoods around the country by providing an incentive for Cardmembers to spend at their local businesses.
 
  •  Expansion of OPEN for Government Contracts: Victory in Procurement ® (VIP) for Small Business by holding proprietary events across the U.S. designed to help business owners access government contracts as a means to grow their business.
 
Card-Issuing Business — Competition
 
Our proprietary Card business encounters substantial and intense competition in the United States and internationally. As a card issuer, we compete in the United States with financial institutions (such as Citibank, Bank of America, JPMorgan Chase, and Capital One Financial) that issue general-purpose charge and revolving credit cards, and Discover Financial Services, which issues the Discover Card on the Discover Business Services network. We also encounter competition from businesses that issue their own cards or otherwise extend credit to their customers, such as retailers and airline associations, although these cards are generally accepted only at limited locations. Because of continuing consolidations among banking and financial services companies and credit card portfolio acquisitions by major card issuers, there are now a smaller number of significant issuers. The largest competing issuers have continued to grow, in several cases by acquiring card portfolios, and also by cross-selling through their retail branch networks.
 
In recent years, we have encountered increasingly intense competition in the small business sector, as competitors have targeted OPEN’s customer base and our leadership position in providing financial services and other fee-based solutions to small businesses. Competing card issuers offer a variety of products and services to attract cardholders, including premium cards with enhanced services or lines of credit, airline frequent flyer program mileage credits, cash rebates and other reward or rebate programs, services for small business owners, “teaser” promotional interest rates for both credit card acquisition and balance transfers, and co-branded arrangements with partners that offer benefits to cardholders.
 
Most financial institutions that offer demand deposit accounts also issue debit cards to permit depositors to access their funds. Use of debit cards for point-of-sale purchases has grown as most financial institutions have replaced ATM cards with general-purpose debit cards bearing either the Visa or MasterCard logo. As a result, the purchase volume and number of transactions made with debit cards in the United States has grown more rapidly than credit and charge card transactions. Debit cards were marketed as replacements for cash and checks, and transactions made with debit cards have typically been for smaller dollar amounts. There is no credit extended when a debit card is used and the consumer must have sufficient funds in his or her demand deposit account to pay for the purchase at the time of the transaction as opposed to charge cards where payment is due at the end of the billing period or credit cards where payment can be extended over a period of time. However, debit cards are also perceived as an alternative to credit or charge cards and used in that manner. We do not offer a debit card linked to a deposit account, but we do issue various types of prepaid cards. As the payments industry continues to evolve, we are also facing increasing competition from non-traditional players, such as online networks, telecom providers, or software-as-a-service providers that leverage new technologies and customers’ existing charge and credit card accounts and bank relationships to create payment or other fee-based solutions. In addition, the evolution of payment products in emerging markets may


23


Table of Contents

be different than it has been in developed markets. Instead of migrating from cash to checks to plastic, technology and consumer behaviors in these markets may result in the skipping of one or more steps to alternative payment mechanisms such as mobile payments. For a further discussion of the evolving competitive landscape in the payments industry, please see “ Global Network & Merchant Services—Competition ” beginning on page 13 above.
 
The principal competitive factors that affect the card-issuing business include:
 
  •  features and the quality of the services, including rewards programs, provided to Cardmembers
 
  •  the number, spending characteristics and credit performance of Cardmembers
 
  •  the quantity, diversity, and quality of the establishments that accept Cards
 
  •  the cost of Cards to Cardmembers
 
  •  pricing, payment and other Card account terms and conditions
 
  •  the number and quality of other payment cards and other forms of payment available to Cardmembers
 
  •  the nature and quality of expense management data capture and reporting capability
 
  •  the success of targeted marketing and promotional campaigns
 
  •  reputation and brand recognition
 
  •  the ability of issuers to manage credit and interest rate risk throughout the economic cycle
 
  •  the ability of issuers to implement operational and cost efficiencies
 
  •  the quality of customer service.
 
Financing Activities
 
The Company meets its financing needs through a variety of sources, including cash or assets that are readily convertible into cash, direct and third-party distributed deposits, unsecured medium- and long-term notes, asset securitizations, securitized borrowings through a conduit facility and long-term committed bank borrowing facilities in certain non-U.S. markets.
 
American Express Credit Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of TRS, along with its subsidiaries (“Credco”), acquires or finances the majority of charge Card receivables arising from the use of corporate Cards issued in the United States and consumer and corporate Cards issued in certain currencies outside the United States. Credco funds the acquisition or financing of receivables principally through the sale of medium- and long-term notes. Centurion Bank and AEBFSB finance their revolving credit receivables and consumer and small business charge card receivables, in part, through the sale of medium-term notes and by offering consumer deposits in the United States. TRS, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB also fund receivables through asset securitization programs. The cost of funding Cardmember receivables and loans is a major expense of Card operations.
 
(You can find a discussion of our securitization and other financing activities on pages 41-44 under the caption “Financial Review,” and Note 7 on pages 85-87 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which portions we incorporate herein by reference.) In addition, please see “Difficult conditions in the global capital markets and economy generally, as well as political conditions in the United States and elsewhere, may materially adversely affect our business and results of operations” and “Adverse capital and credit market conditions may significantly affect the Company’s ability to meet liquidity needs, access to capital and cost of capital” in “Item 1A—Risk Factors” below.
 
Deposit Programs
 
Our banking subsidiaries offer deposits to individuals through third-party brokerage networks as well as directly to consumers. As of December 31, 2010, we had approximately $29.7 billion in total consumer


24


Table of Contents

deposits. The majority of the Company’s outstanding U.S. retail deposits have been raised through third-party channels. As part of its funding strategy, a majority of the deposits raised during 2010 were sourced directly by the Company with consumers through Personal Savings from American Express. Our deposit-taking activities compete with other deposit-taking organizations that source deposits through telephone, internet and other electronic delivery channels, brokerage networks, and/or through branch locations. We compete primarily in the deposit sectors on the basis of rates and our brand reputation for safety and service. We seek to obtain the deposits of new customers as well as existing card customers by offering attractive rates and marketing our name brand.
 
Our ability to obtain deposit funding and offer competitive interest rates on deposits also is dependent on capital levels of our bank subsidiaries. The Federal Deposit Insurance Act (“FDIA”) generally prohibits a bank, including our banking subsidiaries, from accepting brokered deposits or offering interest rates on any deposits significantly higher than the prevailing rate in its normal market area or nationally (depending upon where the deposits are solicited), unless (1) it is well capitalized or (2) it is adequately capitalized and receives a waiver from the FDIC. A bank that is less than well capitalized generally may not pay an interest rate on any deposit, including direct-to-consumer deposits, in excess of 75 basis points over the national rate published by the FDIC unless the FDIC determines that the bank is operating in a high-rate area. An adequately capitalized insured depository institution may not accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposit unless it has applied for and been granted a waiver of this prohibition by the FDIC. Undercapitalized depository institutions may not solicit deposits by offering interest rates that are significantly higher than the prevailing rates of interest on insured deposits in such institution’s normal market areas or in the market area in which such deposits would otherwise be accepted. There are no such restrictions on a bank that is well capitalized (provided such bank is not subject to a capital maintenance provision within a written agreement, consent order, order to cease and desist, capital directive, or prompt corrective action directive issued by its federal regulator). If a depository institution’s federal regulator determines that it is in an unsafe or unsound condition or is engaging in unsafe or unsound banking practices, the regulator may reclassify a well capitalized institution as adequately capitalized, require an adequately capitalized institution to comply with certain restrictions as if it were undercapitalized, and require an undercapitalized institution to take certain actions applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions, all of which would adversely impact its ability to accept brokered deposits.
 
Card-Issuing Business — Regulation
 
The charge card and consumer lending businesses are subject to extensive regulation. In the United States, we are subject to a number of federal laws and regulations, including:
 
  •  the Equal Credit Opportunity Act (which generally prohibits discrimination in the granting and handling of credit)
 
  •  the Fair Credit Reporting Act (“FCRA”), as amended by the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act (“FACT Act”) (which, among other things, regulates use by creditors of consumer credit reports and credit prescreening practices and requires certain disclosures when an application for credit is rejected)
 
  •  the Truth in Lending Act (“TILA”) (which, among other things, requires extensive disclosure of the terms upon which credit is granted), including the amendments to TILA that were adopted through the enactment of the Fair Credit and Charge Card Disclosure Act (which mandates certain disclosures on credit and charge card applications)
 
  •  the Fair Credit Billing Act (which, among other things, regulates the manner in which billing inquiries are handled and specifies certain billing requirements)
 
  •  the Electronic Funds Transfer Act (which regulates disclosures and settlement of transactions for electronic funds transfers including those at ATMs)
 
  •  the CARD Act (which prohibits certain acts and practices in connection with consumer credit card accounts)


25


Table of Contents

 
  •  The Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010 (Title X of Dodd–Frank) (which provides for the creation of the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, a new consumer financial services regulator)
 
  •  Regulation Z (which was recently amended by the Federal Reserve to extensively revise the open end consumer credit disclosure requirements and to implement the requirements of the CARD Act)
 
  •  federal and state laws and regulations that generally prohibit engaging in unfair and deceptive business practices.
 
Certain federal privacy-related laws and regulations govern the collection and use of customer information by financial institutions (see “Corporate & Other” below). Federal legislation also regulates abusive debt collection practices. In addition, a number of states, the European Union, and many foreign countries in which we operate have significant consumer credit protection and disclosure and privacy-related laws (in certain cases more stringent than the laws of the United States). Bankruptcy and debtor relief laws affect us to the extent that such laws result in amounts owed being classified as delinquent and/or charged off as uncollectible. As stated above, card issuers and card networks are subject to certain provisions of the Bank Secrecy Act as amended by the Patriot Act, with regard to maintaining effective anti-money laundering programs. For a discussion of these and other regulations and legislation that impact our business, please see “Supervision and Regulation — General” within “Corporate & Other” below.
 
American Express Company and its subsidiaries, including in particular Centurion Bank, AEBFSB and our other bank entities, are subject to a variety of laws and regulations applicable to financial institutions. Changes in such laws and regulations or in the regulatory application or judicial interpretation thereof could impact the manner in which we conduct our business and the costs of compliance. The regulatory environment in which our Card and lending businesses operate has become increasingly complex and robust, and following the financial crisis of 2008, supervisory efforts to apply relevant laws, regulations and policies have become more intense. The U.S. Congress and regulators, as well as various consumer advocacy groups, have continued to focus their attention on certain practices of credit card issuers, such as unfair and deceptive business practices, increases in annual percentage rates (“APRs”), changes in the terms of the account, and the types and levels of fees and financial charges charged by card issuers for, among other things, late payments, returned checks, payments by telephone, copies of statements and the like. In August 2010, AEBFSB entered into a public, written supervisory agreement with the OTS, its primary federal banking regulator, requiring AEBFSB to make certain enhancements to its compliance program and to complete certain corrective actions relating to compliance. We regularly review and, as appropriate, refine our business practices in light of existing and anticipated developments in laws, regulations and industry trends so we can continue to manage our business prudently and consistent with regulatory requirements and expectations. For information about the recently enacted CARD Act, please see “Privacy, Fair Credit Reporting” within “Supervision and Regulatory — General” below beginning on page 48.
 
In January 2003, the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council (the “FFIEC”), an interagency body composed of the principal U.S. federal entities that regulate banks and other financial institutions, issued new guidance to the industry on credit card account management and loss allowance practices (the “Guidance”). The Guidance covers five areas: (i) credit line management; (ii) over-limit practices; (iii) minimum payment and negative amortization practices; (iv) workout and forbearance practices; and (v) certain income (fee) recognition and loss allowance practices. The Guidance is generally applicable to all institutions under the supervision of the federal bank regulatory agencies that comprise the FFIEC, although it is primarily the result of the identification by bank regulators in their examinations of other credit card lenders’ practices deemed by them to be inappropriate, particularly, but not exclusively, with regard to subprime lending programs. At present, we do not have any lending programs that target the subprime sector. Centurion Bank and AEBFSB evaluate and discuss the Guidance with their respective regulators on an ongoing basis as part of their regulatory examination processes, and, as a result, may refine their practices from time to time based on regulatory input. The Guidance has not had, nor do we expect it to have, any material impact on our businesses or practices.


26


Table of Contents

American Express Consumer Travel Network — USA
 
The American Express Consumer Travel Network — USA provides travel, financial and Cardmember services to consumers through American Express-owned travel service offices, call centers, participating American Express Representatives (independently owned travel agency locations that operate under the American Express brand) and the Consumer Travel Web site. U.S. Consumer Travel has distinguished itself in the luxury segment through its Platinum Travel Services and Centurion Travel Services, which service the needs of our premium Cardmembers and support the exclusive travel benefits that we provide for them. These exclusive travel benefits include the International Airline Program, which offers international first- and or business-class companion tickets on one of 22 world class airlines, and the Fine Hotels & Resorts program, which is a luxury hotel program offering room upgrades and value-added amenities.
 
During 2010, we also introduced new travel benefits for Platinum and Centurion Cardmembers, an American Express mobile application to keep travelers informed with flight alerts and an airport lounge locator. Other premium programs developed by Consumer Travel for Centurion ® Card and Platinum Card ® members include the Cruise Privileges Program, Destinations Vacations Program and the Private Jet Services Program. Consumer Travel also provides other value-added programs such as Gold Card Destinations, a collection of travel benefits exclusively for Gold Card members, and Destination Family ® , a set of valuable benefits and offers across cruise, tour, hotel, and car rental designed for American Express Card members traveling with families. In addition, the Consumer Travel business operates a wholesale travel business in the United States through our Travel Impressions subsidiary. (A wholesaler secures allotments, such as hotel rooms, from suppliers and then offers the services to customers at retail prices that the wholesaler determines.) Our wholesale travel business manages and operates American Express ® Vacations, sold exclusively through the American Express Consumer Travel Network in the United States and our Membership Travel Services International Group internationally. Travel Impressions also distributes travel packages through other retail travel agents and private label brands for third parties in the United States. Travel Impressions is consistently recognized by its customers for outstanding services, including being named Travel Weekly’s “Best Tour Operator, Sales and Service,” for six years in a row.
 
Our Consumer Travel Web site, americanexpress.com/travel, offers a full range of travel rates and discounts on airfares, hotels, car rentals, last-minute deals, cruises and full vacation packages. The Web site offers unique American Express Cardmember benefits such as an American Express Travel Office locator, Travel Specialist finder tools, double Membership Rewards ® points, and travel planning resources and destination content. In addition, Cardmembers are able to Pay With Points by redeeming Membership Rewards points for some categories of travel through our Web site, as well as through our call centers and Travel Offices.
 
In January 2010, we launched americanexpressfhr.com, allowing Platinum Cardmembers to book Fine Hotels & Resorts online for the first time. The web site provides details on the 700+ hotels in the program, including hotel overviews, photos, room type descriptions, dining and service information, and any special offer details. This site offers our Cardmembers another option for booking luxury travel with American Express. In 2010, Consumer Travel launched a new ad campaign, “Left Behind,” highlighting the unique benefits we offer our cardmembers and what they miss out on when they don’t book travel through our Consumer Travel Network. In addition, our lodging marketing initiatives focused on the lowest rate guarantee for all hotel bookings made through Consumer Travel’s online site.
 
American Express Consumer Travel Network — USA — Competition
 
Consumer Travel competes with a variety of different competitors including traditional “brick and mortar” travel agents, credit card issuers offering products with significant travel benefits, online travel agents and travel suppliers that distribute their products to consumers directly via the Internet or telephone-based customer service centers. In recent years we have experienced an increasing presence of “niche” players that are seeking to capitalize on the growth in the luxury travel segment by combining luxury travel offers with concierge-type services.


27


Table of Contents

 
INTERNATIONAL CARD SERVICES
 
We issue our charge and credit Cards in numerous countries around the globe. Our geographic scope is widespread and we focus primarily on those countries that we believe offer us the greatest financial opportunity. For a discussion of Cards issued internationally through our GNS partner relationships, please see the section “Global Network Services” above.
 
The Company continued to bolster its international proprietary Card business through the launch of numerous new or enhanced Card products during 2010. These are Cards that we issue, either on our own or as co-brands with partnering institutions. As we have renewed many of our co-brand and financial institution deals, we have been focused on adding new products, new channels, and increasingly, new markets to the agreements. This past year, among other new proprietary products, we announced or launched several new co-branded products in the International Consumer Business, including: a new Platinum co-brand card in partnership with Air New Zealand, New Zealand’s national air carrier; a co-brand Card program with Sol Melia, a luxury hotel and resort chain based in Spain; and the new Starwood Preferred Guest credit card from American Express in the United Kingdom and Canada, offering cardmembers and Starwood Preferred Guests program loyalists the opportunity to earn Starpoints on virtually all of their card spending. We offer many of the same programs and services in our international proprietary Card-issuing business as we do in our U.S. proprietary issuing business. For example, as in the United States, we offer various flexible payment options similar to our Sign & Travel ® program and our Extended Payment Option to Cardmembers in several countries outside the U.S. Also, as in the United States, we issue Cards internationally under distribution agreements with financial services institutions. Another example of our distribution partnerships is affinity cards with fraternal, professional, educational and other organizations. For instance, we have been successful in penetrating the affinity card segment in Australia, where we issue Cards with the majority of the largest professional associations in that country. In Australia, affinity cards are a substantial part of our total revolving portfolio and contribute to our proprietary consumer lending activities.
 
As in the United States, the Membership Rewards programs are a strong driver of Cardmember spending in the international consumer business. We have more than 1,500 redemption partners across our international business, with an average of approximately 84 partners in each country; approximately 30% of these partners are in the travel industry. Cardmembers can redeem their points with more than 40 airlines and over 175 hotels. Our redemption options include travel, retail merchandise, entertainment, shopping and recreation gift certificates, experiences, financial services and charity rewards. In 2010, we continued to enhance our rewards programs in several countries, offering more flexible choices that enable Cardmembers to redeem Membership Rewards points more quickly.
 
We continue to build on the Company’s strengths and look for further opportunities to increase our presence internationally. In December 2010, we announced that we entered into an agreement to acquire Loyalty Partner, a leading marketing services company known for the loyalty programs it operates in Germany, Poland and India. Loyalty Partner also provides analytics, operating platforms and consulting services that help merchants grow their businesses. The acquisition will deepen our merchant relationships in select countries, add more than 34 million consumers to the company’s international customer base and expand its range of rewards and loyalty marketing services. The acquisition is part of the Company’s drive to build and diversify its fee service revenues and expand its international presence. The purchase, which has received regulatory approval, is expected to close in the first quarter of 2011. The transaction, which values the company at $660 million (subject to currency movement and other adjustments), consists of an upfront cash purchase price of $566 million and an additional $94 million equity interest that the Company will acquire over the next five years at a value based on business performance.
 
Membership Travel Services International provides premium travel and concierge services to our Platinum and Centurion Customers, through 24 exclusively dedicated call centers in 23 international countries. Additionally, Membership Travel Services operates 16 proprietary Travel Service Offices in Mexico, Italy and Argentina to provide all Cardmembers with travel and general card service assistance. We also provide to our cardmembers certain foreign exchange, travelers cheque services and other cardmember-related services in Travel Service Offices in Mexico, Argentina and Italy. We have taken steps to enhance our capabilities to sell


28


Table of Contents

exclusively negotiated benefits and luxury travel packages with preferred suppliers through the Fine Hotels & Resorts Program, American Express Vacations and American Express’ International Airline Program. Our International Airline Program, which is exclusively available to Platinum Card and Centurion Cardmembers, allows these Cardmembers to receive complimentary companion tickets or a class upgrade when flying on qualifying international flights in business or first class.
 
We expanded the flexibility of payment for travel and concierge services by allowing International Consumer Cardmembers to use their Membership Rewards points to pay for their travel purchases in 15 countries outside the U.S.
 
International Proprietary Consumer Card — Competition
 
Compared to the United States, consumers outside the United States use general-purpose charge and credit cards for a smaller percentage of their total payments, with some large emerging market countries just beginning to transition to card usage in any meaningful way. Although our geographic scope is widespread, we generally do not have significant share in the countries in which we operate internationally. Our proprietary Card-issuing business is subject to competition from multinational banks, such as Citibank, HSBC and Banco Santander, as well as many local banks and financial institutions. Globally, we view Citibank and Banco Santander as our strongest competitors, as they currently offer card products in a large number of countries.
 
International Proprietary Consumer Card — Regulation
 
As discussed elsewhere in this Form 10-K, regulators in 2010 continued to propose and enact a variety of regulatory changes to the payments landscape in many of our key countries. We expect this activity to continue in 2011. Regulators continue to consider developments in the United States and other jurisdictions to help inform their policy. While the nature of the proposals varies, regulators in a number of countries have been focused on pricing, disclosure, responsible lending and other card practices and we expect this to continue in 2011. For example, in the United Kingdom the government adopted a new policy by way of a “white paper” setting out several requirements around card practices. In the European Economic Area, member states have implemented or are in the process of implementing European Directive 2008/48/EC on credit agreements for consumers (commonly referred to as the Consumer Credit Directive), which in some countries will have impacts on charge cards in addition to credit cards. Member states have also implemented the Payment Services Directive, which regulates the conduct of business of payment service providers, including card issuers.
 
As a consequence, these and perhaps other regulators may consider and implement additional card practice regulation in 2011. We continue to evaluate our business planning in light of changing market circumstances and the evolving political, economic, regulatory and media environment.
 
GLOBAL COMMERCIAL SERVICES
 
In our Global Commercial Services (“GCS”) segment, we provide expense management services to companies and organizations worldwide through Global Commercial Card and Global Business Travel Services. American Express is a leading global issuer of commercial cards and is also a leading global travel management company for businesses. During 2010, we added or retained several major Commercial Card clients in the United States and internationally, including Eaton, GlaxoSmithKline, Pfizer, Eastman Kodak, PPG, Xerox, Oracle, and McDonalds. Additionally, in 2010, we added or retained several American Express Business Travel clients in the United States and internationally, including: HCSC (Health Care Services); AXA Canada LTD.; University of Nottingham; FIS; Automatic Data Processing Inc.; Motorola Mobility; and Symantec Corporation.


29


Table of Contents

GCS offers a wide range of expense management products and services to companies worldwide, including:
 
  •  A comprehensive offering of Corporate Card Programs, such as:
 
  –  Corporate Cards: issued to individuals through a corporate account established by their employer and which many business customers use to manage travel and entertainment (“T&E”) spending
 
  –  Corporate Meeting Cards: provided primarily to corporate meeting planners as a tool to help companies control their meeting and event expenses
 
  –  Business Travel Accounts (“BTA”): centrally billed to and paid directly by corporate clients, BTAs can be used by companies to pay for their employees’ travel expenses
 
  •  A suite of Business-to-Business (or “B2B”) Payment Solutions, including:
 
  –  Corporate Purchasing Card: an account established by companies to pay for everyday and large-ticket business expenses such as office and computer supplies
 
  –  vPayment: provides fast and efficient payment for business-related purchases and permits the processing of transactions with effective fraud controls
 
  –  Buyer Initiated Payments: an electronic solution for companies looking to automate their payment processes.
 
  •  American Express Global Business Travel, which helps businesses manage and optimize their travel expenses through a variety of travel-related products, services and solutions.
 
Global Commercial Card
 
Global Commercial Card (“GCC”) offers a range of expense management solutions to companies worldwide through our Corporate Card Programs and our Business-to-Business Payment Solutions.
 
Corporate Card Programs
 
The American Express ® Corporate Card is a charge card that individuals may obtain through a corporate account established by their employer for business purposes. Through our Corporate Card Program, companies can manage their T&E spending and everyday business expenses and improve negotiating leverage with suppliers, among other benefits. We use our direct relationships with merchants to offer Corporate Card clients superior data about company spending, as well as streamlined dispute resolution. We issue local currency Corporate Cards in 44 countries and international dollar/euro Corporate Cards in 108 countries. We also offer Corporate Cards issued through our GNS partner relationships in an additional 30 countries. In 2010, we introduced international dollar/euro Corporate Cards in an additional 24 countries and launched a ruble-based Business Travel Account to Russian customers, the first product of its kind in Russian currency.
 
With the heightened focus on cost containment, many companies increasingly are interested in our Corporate Meeting Card program, which helps businesses control meeting-related expenses. It allows clients to capture meeting spending, simplify the payment process, and gain access to data to support negotiations with suppliers.
 
American Express also partners with many other companies around the world to offer a number of co-brand Corporate Cards in various countries. These products, typically suited for mid-sized companies, provide savings on everyday business spending and/or air travel. To date, American Express has 15 Corporate Card co-brand partnerships worldwide. In 2010, we added the American Express ® Cathay Pacific Corporate Card, the first co-branded airline corporate card in Hong Kong. We also continued to enhance our existing co-brand portfolios through the launch of the American Express ®  / Business ExtrAA ® Corporate Platinum Card in the United States in 2010.


30


Table of Contents

Business-to-Business Payment Solutions
 
We also offer a series of Business-to-Business Payment Solutions to help companies manage B2B spending. This type of spending by companies helps to diversify our spend mix. These solutions provide a variety of benefits to companies, including cost savings, process efficiency, improved cash flow and increased visibility, and control and security over business expenses. The Corporate Purchasing Card helps large corporations and mid-sized companies manage their everyday spending. It is used to pay for everyday goods and business expenses, such as office supplies, industrial supplies and business equipment in 27 countries around the world.
 
vPayment, which offers companies single-use virtual account numbers, allows GCC customers to make payments with enhanced controls, data capture and reconciliation capabilities. Charges are authorized for a specified amount during a specified amount of time. The solution automates reconciliation, eliminates manual check requests, interfaces easily with a customer’s enterprise resource planning (ERP), procurement and accounts payable systems, and can be used at one or more stages of the procurement-to-payables process.
 
Buyer Initiated Payments allows American Express to pay B2B suppliers electronically on behalf of our clients, permitting them to manage payments, extend their own days payable outstanding (or “float”), and increase their cash on hand. Buyer Initiated Payments is currently available to companies in the United States and will be offered to companies in Canada in 2011. This solution is best suited for mid- to large-sized companies that want to transition rapidly to electronic payments, reduce supplier inquiries, convert from paper to electronic payments, and optimize cash flow. In 2010, American Express and SAP AG announced an effort to develop an integrated corporate payments solution for joint GCC and SAP customers in the United States. The solution will integrate SAP’s software solutions into American Express’ Buyer Initiated Payments platform to enable “plug-and-play” functionality when integrating Buyer Initiated Payments into the client’s Enterprise Resource Planning system, thereby reducing the roadblocks that often delay or deter companies from adopting electronic payments.
 
Mid-sized Companies
 
In addition to providing Corporate Card Programs and our Business-to-Business Payment Solutions to large and global organizations, GCC markets its products and services to mid-sized companies (defined in the United States as firms with annual revenues of $10 million to $1 billion worldwide). GCC is focused on continuing to expand its business with mid-sized companies, which represent significant growth opportunities. Businesses of this size often do not have a corporate card program. However, once enrolled, mid-sized companies typically put a significant portion of their business spending on the Corporate Card because they can gain control, savings and employee benefits.
 
In 2010, together with our partner, Concur Technologies Inc., we launched Concur Breeze in the United States, a cost-effective and easy-to-manage online expense reporting service for mid-sized clients that automates and streamlines the submission, review, approval and departmental allocation of all business expenses. We also launched similar versions of this product targeted to mid-sized clients in the United Kingdom, Netherlands, Germany and Australia in 2010.
 
GCC offers the Savings at Work ® Program to mid-sized companies in the United States, as well as similar programs globally, which provides companies with cash back and/or discounted pricing on everyday business products and services, such as car rentals, hotels, restaurants and courier services. Corporate Cardmembers can also take advantage of our Membership Rewards program to earn points that can be redeemed for air travel and hotel stays, as well as retail, home, and recreation items. Membership Rewards is a powerful tool for encouraging Corporate Card usage, leading to greater control and savings.
 
Online Capabilities
 
GCC offers companies and individual cardmembers the ability to manage their Corporate Card Programs on a 24/7 basis through a suite of secure web-based online tools. American Express @ Work ® provides clients’ authorized users online access to global management information to help them gain visibility into their


31


Table of Contents

spending patterns, as well as the ability to make changes to their Corporate Card, Corporate Purchasing Card, Business Travel Account (“BTA”) and Corporate Meeting Card accounts. Cardmembers can use the online Manage Your Card Account (MYCA) tool to manage their individual Card account.
 
Global Commercial Card—Competition
 
The commercial payments sector is dynamic and highly competitive, with competition increasingly intense at both the card network and card issuer levels. At the network level, we have experienced increasing competition including intense price competition, aggressive expansion into new and emerging segments, efforts to transition business-to-business spend from cash and check to cards and electronic invoicing and payment vehicles, and expanding marketing and advertising budgets for commercial services. Both Visa and MasterCard continue to support card issuers such as U.S. Bank, JPMorgan Chase, and Citibank to build and support data collection and reporting necessary to satisfy customer requirements. Moreover, in the current economic environment, the interest in expense management tools is particularly strong, as clients aim to capture data, analyze trends and make decisions that enhance their cash flow and profitability. Commercial card issuers have increasingly acquired technology offerings to enhance data capture capabilities and reporting functionality. In addition, many issuers attempt to leverage their banking relationships and capabilities to secure and retain card business. Global servicing, data quality, technological functionality and simplicity, customer experience, and price and other financial terms are among the key competitive factors in the commercial card business.
 
Global Commercial Card—Regulation
 
The Global Commercial Card business, which engages in the extension of commercial credit, is subject to more limited regulation than our consumer lending business. In the United States, we are subject to certain of the federal and state laws applicable to our consumer lending business, including the Equal Credit Opportunity Act, the FCRA (as amended by the FACT Act), as well laws that generally prohibit engaging in unfair and deceptive business practices. (For a discussion of the FACT Act, see “Card-Issuing Business — Regulation”.) We are also subject to certain state laws that regulate fees and charges on our products. Additionally, as a global business, we are subject to U.S. state data security and breach notification laws and regulations, as well as significant data protection laws in the European Union and many foreign countries in which we operate. We are also subject to bankruptcy and debtor relief laws that can affect our ability to collect amounts owed to us. As discussed above, along with the rest of our business, we are subject to certain provisions of the Bank Secrecy Act as amended by the Patriot Act, with regard to maintaining effective anti-money laundering programs. (For a discussion of this legislation and its effect on our business, see “Supervision and Regulation—General” within “Corporate & Other” below.) In some countries, regulation of card practices and consumer protection legislation may apply to some commercial card relationships.
 
Global Business Travel
 
American Express Global Business Travel (“Global Business Travel”) provides globally integrated solutions, both online and offline, to help organizations manage and optimize their travel investments and service their traveling employees. With clients ranging from small businesses to multinational corporations, these solutions include travel reservation advice and transaction processing through a global network that is available 24 hours per day; travel expense management policy consultation; meeting management, supplier negotiation and consultation; advisory services, management information reporting, data analysis and benchmarking; and group and incentive travel services.
 
In 2010, we launched several new programs to support our corporate clients. These included the launch of aXcentis sm in key countries globally, which focuses on delivering localized, flexible and comprehensive travel management programs to small and mid-sized companies with up to $10 million in annual travel spending; the entry into a new strategic alliance with Concur Technologies Inc., which allows us to offer global clients a comprehensive, end-to-end corporate travel and expense management program, expanding on GCC’s pre-existing partnership with Concur; and the launch of an online, interactive travel management scorecard to measure travel program effectiveness. We continue to evaluate our economic model and invest in new products, services and technologies to enhance the value that we deliver to our customers and address


32


Table of Contents

ongoing travel industry challenges and opportunities. For example, we have substantially reduced our reliance on commission revenues from suppliers (such as airlines or hotels), and now generate revenues primarily from customers who pay for the services that we provide.
 
These services include solutions designed to provide our clients with savings, control, services and traveler care. For example, we offer customers savings and benefits through the Preferred Extra sm supplier value programs and advisory services, which provide preferred supplier rates and consulting solutions in all areas of T&E expense management. We also provide comprehensive travel expenses insights through global data with our aXis@work ® solution, which provides real time global data through a single on-line interface, enabling clients to gain real time visibility into their spending patterns and make real time adjustments to their programs and policies for maximum bottom line benefit.
 
In 2010, we further developed our comprehensive cost-saving travel management offerings, including products such as mobileXtend, a mobile travel solution that provides travelers with various support services. Global Business Travel has moved many of its business processes and customer servicing online. In the United States, approximately 57.5% of all Global Business Travel transactions continue to be processed online. In addition, the volume of online transactions is growing in other countries around the world.
 
Global Business Travel — Competition
 
Global Business Travel continues to face intense competition in the United States and internationally from numerous traditional and online travel management companies, as well as from direct sales by airlines and other travel suppliers. Competition among travel management companies is mainly based on price, service, value creation, convenience, global capabilities and proximity to the customer. Competition also comes from corporate customers themselves, as some companies have become accredited as in-house corporate travel agents. New entrants could also represent additional competition along the end to end travel value chain, which could impact competition in the medium to long term.
 
For many years, travel management companies have faced pressure on revenues from airlines, as most carriers have stopped paying “base” commissions to travel agents for tickets sold and significantly reduced other forms of travel agent compensation. Carriers have also increased the number of transactions they book directly through their Web sites and other means. These trends have reduced the revenue opportunities for travel management companies because they do not receive distribution revenue from directly booked transactions. In recent years, the airline industry has undergone bankruptcies, restructurings, consolidations and other similar events including expanded grants of antitrust immunity to airline alliances. This immunity enables airlines to closely coordinate their international operations and to launch highly integrated joint ventures in transatlantic and other markets. These types of structural changes may result in additional challenges to travel management companies. For additional information concerning these issues, please see “Risk Factors — We have agreements with business partners in a variety of industries, including the airline industry, that represent a significant portion of our business ” on page 87 below.
 
Overall, intense competition among travel management companies, the ongoing trends of increasing direct sales by airlines, the rise of low-cost carriers and ongoing reductions in or elimination of airline commissions and fees, continue to put pressure on revenue and profitability for travel agents.
 
Over the last few years we have evolved our business model to permit us to charge customers for the services we provide and the value we create, and restructured our expense base through the rationalization of our call center locations and the transitioning of many of our services online. We continue to look for new ways to enhance the value we deliver for our customers both online and offline. Additionally, we are focusing on developing new and innovative products, services and technologies, which enhance the value we deliver to our customers and suppliers and address ongoing travel industry challenges and opportunities.
 
Global Business Travel — Regulation
 
The Global Business Travel business is subject to domestic and international laws applicable to the provision of travel services, including licensure requirements, as well as laws and regulations regarding


33


Table of Contents

passenger screening and registration such as the Secure Flight Rule issued by the U.S. Transportation Security Administration. Additionally, we are subject to U.S. state data security and breach notification laws and regulations, as well as significant data protection laws in the European Union and many foreign countries in which we operate. We are also subject to bankruptcy and debtor relief laws that can affect our ability to collect amounts owed to us.
 
CORPORATE & OTHER
 
Corporate & Other consists of corporate functions and auxiliary businesses, including the Company’s Enterprise Growth Group, the Company’s publishing business, as well as other company operations. We also discuss information relevant to the Company as a whole in this section.
 
Enterprise Growth Group
 
The Enterprise Growth Group was established to create a digital services platform for the company, to expand alternative mobile and online payment services, form new partnerships and build new revenue streams beyond the traditional card and travel businesses. The Enterprise Growth Group will leverage the assets and capabilities that exist today and build or acquire the talent, businesses and platforms required to deliver new forms of growth in the digital world. The Group consists of four core business units: Online and Mobile Payments, Emerging Markets, Fee Based Services and Global Payment Options (formerly known as Global Prepaid).
 
The Enterprise Growth Group also includes Serve Virtual Enterprises, Inc. or “Serve” (formerly known as Revolution Money). Since acquiring Serve about a year ago, we have been working to transition it from a separate business unit into an enterprise wide platform to support future digital initiatives. In early 2011, we plan to launch this next generation payment platform, rebranded and retooled, as a first step toward delivering more alternative payment options, including peer-to-peer payments, mobile capabilities, prepaid products, virtual currencies and international remittances.
 
Online and Mobile Payments
 
The Online and Mobile business unit is responsible for developing new online and mobile payment capabilities that can expand the role we play in the digital world. The team is focused on working with the right partners to roll out easy to use digital payment solutions for consumers, businesses and sellers.
 
Emerging Markets
 
The Emerging Markets team is responsible for expanding our presence in countries like India and China by embracing new online and mobile payment technologies and introducing payment forms, such as prepaid, that fall outside of our core charge and credit cards. This business unit is focused on growing our businesses organically, as well as identifying acquisition targets and strategic partnerships that can significantly increase international revenues.
 
Fee Based Services
 
The Fee Based Services team within the Enterprise Growth Group, as well as our existing businesses, is tasked with identifying ways to capitalize on the existing assets of American Express by creating business models that can generate new, non-payment revenue streams. The Fee Based Services team is responsible for supporting our LoyaltyEdge offering, a new business line that assists partners, like Delta Airlines, with developing, operating, and improving their own loyalty programs.
 
Global Payment Options (formerly known as Global Prepaid)
 
Global Payment Options (“GPO”) offers a wide range of prepaid products across the globe, including the American Express ® Gift Card, available in over 100,000 locations in the U.S. and Canada. Sales of gift cards


34


Table of Contents

continued to rise in 2010, reflecting the growing popularity of these products and our efforts to increase buying convenience for customers.
 
GPO also offers a variety of incentive prepaid cards, such as prepaid rebate and reward card products, as well as prepaid reloadable cards. In May, we launched PASS from American Express ® , a prepaid reloadable card, which is sold and marketed to parents as a payment tool for teens and young adults that is an alternative to cash, credit or debit cards. In addition we launched a prepaid travel card in Australia in August and Brazil in December.
 
In addition, we have been in the business of issuing and selling travelers cheques since 1891. We sell the American Express ® Travelers Cheque (“Travelers Cheque” or “Cheque”) as a safe and convenient alternative to cash. Travelers Cheques are currently available in U.S. dollars and four foreign currencies, including Euros. We also issue and sell other forms of paper travelers cheques, including American Express ® Gift Cheques (“Gift Cheques”), which are available in U.S. and Canadian dollars. Sales of Travelers Cheques continued to decline in 2010.
 
During 2010 we formed a strategic partnership with the Bank of China to launch the American Express Chinese Yuan Travelers Cheques, the world’s first Yuan prepaid travel product and available for international travelers visiting China from certain key countries around the world.
 
We sell American Express prepaid products through a variety of channels, including sales directly to customers via phone and the Internet. Travelers Cheques and Gift Cheques are sold primarily through a broad network of selling outlets worldwide, including American Express travel offices, limited independent agents and third-party financial institutions. Gift cards are available at americanexpress.com, in most malls and retail locations and in many bank branches.
 
The Global Foreign Exchange Services division (“GFES”) of GPO consists of retail and wholesale foreign exchange services and FX International Payments (“FXIP”). Other than in Australia and Singapore, where we operate foreign exchange offices in city locations and through selected partner locations, we concentrate our retail foreign exchange business in key international airports, for example at London Heathrow in the United Kingdom, Barajas Madrid in Spain and Changi Airport in Singapore. For corporate clients, our FXIP online product allows companies and financial institutions to make cross-border payments in major foreign currencies at competitive exchange rates.
 
For fiscal periods ended on or prior to December 31, 2010, the results of operations of GFES were included within the GCS reportable operating segment. Effective January 1, 2011, the results of operations of GFES will be reported as part of GPO within the Corporate & Other Segment. This organizational change is part of the Company’s strategy to accelerate the growth of foreign-exchange related activities in new payment areas.
 
Global Payment Options — Competition
 
Our products compete with a wide variety of financial payment products including cash, foreign currency, checks, other brands of travelers cheques, debit, prepaid and ATM cards, store branded gift cards, other network branded cards and other payment cards.
 
The principal competitive factors affecting the prepaid sector are:
 
  •  the number and location of merchants willing to accept the form of payment
 
  •  the availability to the consumer of other forms of payment
 
  •  the amount of fees charged to the consumer
 
  •  the compensation paid to, and frequency of settlement by, selling outlets
 
  •  the accessibility of sales and refunds for the products
 
  •  the success of marketing and promotional campaigns
 
  •  the ability to service the customer satisfactorily, including for lost or stolen instruments.


35


Table of Contents

 
Global Payment Options — Regulation
 
As an issuer of travelers cheques and prepaid cards and a provider of foreign exchange services, we are regulated in the United States under the “money transmitter” or “sale of check” laws in effect in most states. These laws require travelers cheque (and, where applicable, prepaid card) issuers, as well as providers of foreign exchange services, to obtain licenses, to meet certain safety and soundness criteria, to hold outstanding proceeds of sale in highly rated and secure investments, and to provide detailed reports. We invest the proceeds from sales of our Travelers Cheques and prepaid cards in accordance with applicable law, predominantly in highly rated debt securities consisting primarily of intermediate- and long-term federal, state and municipal obligations. Many states examine licensees annually.
 
In addition, federal anti-money laundering regulations require, among other things, the registration of traveler cheque issuers and the providers of foreign exchange services as “Money Service Businesses” and compliance with applicable anti-money laundering recordkeeping and reporting requirements. Outside the United States, there are varying licensing and anti-money laundering requirements, including some that are similar to those in the United States.
 
Travelers cheque issuers are required by the laws of many states to comply with state unclaimed and abandoned property laws under which such issuers must pay to states the face amount of any travelers cheque that is uncashed or unredeemed after a period of time, usually 15 years. The abandoned property laws of numerous states also apply to prepaid cards in a variety of ways.
 
In May 2009, the CARD Act amended provisions of the Electronic Funds Transfer Act to impose new restrictions on the terms of gift cards and certain other prepaid cards, including restrictions on the fees that may be charged, expiration dates, and consumer disclosures. The Federal Reserve issued final regulations to implement the CARD Act gift card provisions that became effective in August 2010. Congress thereafter passed legislation that extended the August 2010 effective date of the CARD Act gift card provisions to January 2011 for gift cards produced prior to April 1, 2010, provided certain conditions are met. We continue to monitor state legislative activity restricting the terms of gift cards. In certain states where regulation continues to restrict fees and has made it unprofitable for us to offer gift cards, we have limited or withdrawn from selling these cards.
 
In June 2010, the Financial Crimes Enforcement Network, an enforcement agency of the U.S. Department of the Treasury, issued a notice of proposed rule making that proposes a number of changes to its regulation of the prepaid industry. In general, the proposed rule redefines the term “stored value” more broadly and renames this group of products “prepaid access.” The three traditional categories of stored value participants, “issuers, sellers and redeemers of stored value,” are now consolidated into two groups, “providers and sellers of prepaid access.” With limited exceptions, the proposed rule imposes suspicious activity reporting, customer identification, and record keeping requirements on the two newly defined groups, which could mean non-bank program managers and retailers would have to develop and maintain AML programs that were not previously required. The public comment period for the proposed rule closed on August 27, 2010. We are awaiting issuance of the final rule and will analyze its impact on our current products once the final rule is issued.
 
Please see “ Global Network & Merchant Services — Regulation” on page 14 for a discussion of the Federal Reserve’s proposed rules under Dodd-Frank to establish, among other things, interchange fee limitation rules for debit or prepaid gift card transactions, and to prohibit exclusive network routing restrictions for electronic debit transactions (which applies to all prepaid cards).
 
American Express Publishing
 
Through American Express Publishing, we publish: luxury lifestyle magazines such as Travel + Leisure ® , Food & Wine ® , Departures ® and Black Ink ® ; travel resources such as SkyGuide ® ; business resources such as the American Express Appointment Book and SkyGuide Executive Travel, a business traveler supplement; a variety of general interest, cooking, travel, wine, cocktail, financial and time management books; branded membership services; a growing roster of international and electronic editions of our magazines, and branded mobile applications; as well as directly sold and licensed products. American Express Publishing also has a


36


Table of Contents

custom publishing group and is expanding its service-driven Web sites and applications for mobile devices such as: travelandleisure.com, foodandwine.com, departures.com, tlgolf.com, tlfamily.com and eskyguide.com. We have an agreement with Time Inc. under which it manages our publishing business, and we share profits relating to this business.
 
The Global Services Group
 
The Global Services Group (“Global Services”) was created to heighten the company’s focus on customer service and to ensure all business operations are managed as effectively and efficiently as possible. We have organized support functions by process rather than business unit, which the Company expects will streamline costs, reduce duplication of work, better integrate skills and expertise, and improve customer service.
 
Global Services is comprised principally of the following divisions:
 
World Service
 
Our U.S. and international service organizations have been consolidated under World Service. Our customer service units have worked over a number of years to ensure outstanding service to customers, while at the same time improving operating margins. As mentioned earlier in this Report, J.D. Power and Associates released its annual nationwide credit card satisfaction study and ranked American Express highest in overall satisfaction among 10 of the largest card issuers in the United States for the fourth consecutive year.
 
Global Business Services
 
The Global Business Services division is principally comprised of procurement, real estate, human resources processing and financial processing. These internal process-driven activities have been consolidated to simplify and standardize processes for increased quality, efficiency and cost savings.
 
Global Credit Administration
 
Global Credit Administration (“GCA”) is responsible for the end-to-end management of our credit, collections, and fraud operations around the world. GCA aims to strike the right balance between helping Cardmembers in need through a range of workout programs, and taking actions to prevent spending that will not be paid back to American Express.
 
Technologies
 
We continue to make significant investments, both in the United States and internationally, in our Card systems and infrastructure to allow faster introduction and greater customization of products. We also are using technology to develop and improve our service capabilities to continue to deliver a high quality customer experience. For example, we maintain a service delivery platform that our employees use in the Card business to support a variety of customer servicing and account management activities such as account maintenance, updating of Cardmember information, the addition of new Cards to an account and resolving customer satisfaction issues. In international markets, we are enhancing our global platforms and capabilities, such as in revolving credit.
 
We continue to leverage the Internet to lower costs, improve service quality and enhance our business model. During 2010, we continued to broaden our focus to use the Internet to drive revenue and build our brand, while continuing to migrate transaction volumes at lower costs. We also continue to have more online customer service interactions in the United States than we do by telephone or in person.
 
As of year-end, customers had enrolled approximately 30 million Cards globally in our online account management capability known as the “Manage Your Card Account” service. This service enables Cardmembers to review all of their card transactions online, pay their American Express bills electronically, view and service their Membership Rewards program accounts and conduct various other functions quickly and securely online. We now have an online presence in 24 countries around the world, including the United Kingdom, Australia, Italy, France, Mexico and Japan. We continue to devote substantial resources to our technology


37


Table of Contents

platform to ensure the highest level of data integrity, security and privacy. We are one of the founders of PCI SSC, an independent standards-setting organization that manages the evolution of technical data security standards. We also are an owner-member of EMVCo, the standards body that manages, maintains, and enhances specifications for chip-based payment cards and acceptance devices, including point-of-sale terminals. (For a discussion of these organizations, see the “Global Merchant Services” section above.)
 
We have outsourced most of our technology infrastructure management and application development and maintenance to third party service providers to enable us to benefit from their expertise while lowering our information technology costs per transaction. However, our internal IT organization continues to retain the Company’s key technology competencies, including information technology strategy, information security, managing strategic relationships with technologies’ partners, data center operations, technology architecture and engineering, oversight of application and database development and maintenance, and managing the technology portfolios of our businesses.
 
Supervision and Regulation — General
 
Overview
 
Federal and state banking laws, regulations and policies extensively regulate the Company, TRS, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, including prescribing standards relating to capital, earnings, liquidity, dividends, the repurchase or redemption of shares, loans or extension of credit to affiliates and insiders, internal controls, information systems, internal audit systems, loan documentation, credit underwriting, asset growth and impaired assets, among other things. Such laws and regulations are intended primarily for the protection of depositors, other customers and the federal deposit insurance funds, as well as to minimize systemic risk, and not for the protection of our shareholders or creditors. Following the financial crisis of 2008, supervisory efforts to apply these laws, regulations and policies have become more intense.
 
American Express Company and TRS are bank holding companies under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (“BHC Act”) and have elected to be treated as financial holding companies under the BHC Act. As a bank holding company under the BHC Act, the Company is subject to supervision and examination by the Federal Reserve. Under the system of “functional regulation” established under the BHC Act, the Federal Reserve supervises the Company, including all of its non-bank subsidiaries, as an “umbrella regulator” of the consolidated organization and generally defers to the primary U.S. regulators of the Company’s U.S. depository institution subsidiaries, as applicable. Bank regulatory agencies have broad examination and enforcement power over bank holding companies and their subsidiaries, including the power to impose substantial fines, limit dividends, restrict operations and acquisitions and require divestitures. Bank holding companies and banks, as well as subsidiaries of both, are prohibited by law from engaging in practices that the relevant regulatory authority deems unsafe or unsound.
 
Many aspects of our business are also subject to rigorous regulation by other U.S. federal and state regulatory agencies and securities exchanges and by non-U.S. government agencies or regulatory bodies and securities exchanges. Certain of our public disclosure, internal control environment and corporate governance principles are subject to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (“Sarbanes-Oxley”) and related regulations and rules of the SEC and the New York Stock Exchange, Inc. As a global financial institution, to the extent that different regulatory systems impose overlapping or inconsistent requirements on the conduct of our business, we face complexity and additional costs in our compliance efforts.
 
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act
 
Dodd-Frank, which was enacted in July 2010, significantly restructures the financial regulatory regime in the United States, including through the creation of a new systemic risk oversight body, the Financial Stability Oversight Council (“FSOC”). The FSOC will oversee and coordinate the efforts of the primary U.S. financial regulatory agencies (including the Federal Reserve, the SEC, the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission, the OCC and the FDIC) in establishing regulations to address financial stability concerns. Dodd-Frank directs the FSOC to make recommendations to the Federal Reserve as to supervisory requirements and prudential standards applicable to bank holding companies with $50 billion or more in total consolidated


38


Table of Contents

assets, which includes the Company, and other systemically important financial institutions. The standards include capital, leverage, liquidity and risk-management requirements. Dodd-Frank mandates that the requirements applicable to systemically important financial institutions be more stringent than those applicable to other financial companies.
 
In addition to the framework for systemic risk oversight implemented through the FSOC, Dodd-Frank broadly affects the financial services industry in numerous respects, including by creating a resolution authority, by requiring banks to pay increased fees to regulatory agencies, by requiring all publicly traded bank holding companies that have assets of at least $10 billion to establish a risk committee (including independent directors) responsible for enterprise-wide risk management oversight and practices, and through numerous other provisions aimed at strengthening the sound operation of the financial services sector. Moreover, Title X of Dodd-Frank, known as the Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010 (the “CFPA”), provides for the creation of the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, a new consumer financial services regulator, discussed below under “Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010.” New laws or regulations or changes to existing laws and regulations (including changes in interpretation or enforcement) could materially adversely affect our financial condition or results of operations. As discussed further throughout this section, many aspects of Dodd-Frank are subject to further rulemaking and will take effect over several years, making it difficult to anticipate the overall financial impact on the Company or across the industry. In addition to the discussion in this section, please see “Risk Factors — The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act may have a significant adverse impact on our business, results of operations and financial condition” on pages 77-78 and “Risk Factors — Banks, card issuers and card network operators generally are the subject of increasing global regulatory focus, which may impose costly new compliance burdens on our Company and lead to decreased transaction volumes and revenues through our network” on pages 80-82 for a further discussion of some of the potential impact legislative and regulatory changes may have on our results of operations and financial condition.
 
Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010
 
As mentioned above, the CFPA provides for the creation of the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (the “Bureau”), a new consumer financial services regulator. As of July 21, 2011, but subject to a possible six-month extension, our marketing and sale of consumer financial products and our compliance with certain federal consumer financial laws, including the CFPA and the Truth in Lending Act, will be supervised and examined by the Bureau. On that date, the Bureau will assume responsibility from our current banking regulators for supervision and examination of Centurion Bank, AEBFSB, and their affiliates, including the Company, with respect to such federal consumer financial laws. The Bureau will have authority to take enforcement actions against us for violation of those laws and also will have exclusive rulemaking authority for such federal consumer financial laws. In the interim, the federal banking agencies have been vigorously enforcing consumer protection laws.
 
The Bureau also will be directed to prohibit “unfair, deceptive or abusive” acts and practices and to ensure that all consumers have access to markets for consumer financial products and services, and that such markets are fair, transparent and competitive. The new legislation also weakens federal preemption available to federal savings associations, including AEBFSB, and gives state attorneys general the ability to enforce applicable federal consumer protection laws.
 
Financial Holding Company Status and Activities
 
The BHC Act limits the nonbanking activities of bank holding companies. Unless a bank holding company has qualified as a “financial holding company,” its nonbanking activities are restricted to those that the Federal Reserve has determined are “so closely related to banking as to be a proper incident thereto.” An eligible bank holding company may elect to be a financial holding company, which is authorized to engage in a broader range of financial activities. A financial holding company may engage in any activity that has been determined by rule or order to be financial in nature, incidental to such financial activity, or (with prior Federal Reserve approval) complementary to a financial activity and that does not pose a substantial risk to the safety or soundness of a depository institution or to the financial system generally. American Express


39


Table of Contents

engages in various activities permissible only for a bank holding company that has elected to be treated as a financial holding company, including in particular providing travel agency services, acting as a finder and engaging in certain insurance underwriting and agency services.
 
For a bank holding company to be eligible for financial holding company status, each of its subsidiary U.S. depository institutions must be “well capitalized” and “well managed” and must have received at least a satisfactory rating on its most recent Community Reinvestment Act of 1977 (the “CRA”) review. Pursuant to Dodd-Frank, beginning July 21, 2011, but subject to a possible six-month extension, to be eligible for financial holding company status, the Company and TRS also must be and remain well capitalized and well managed. If the Company fails to continue to meet applicable capital or managerial standards for financial holding company status, the Company would be required to enter into an agreement with the Federal Reserve to comply with applicable capital and managerial standards. Moreover, until all relevant conditions are satisfied, the Company, its subsidiaries and affiliates would not, without the Federal Reserve’s prior approval, be permitted to commence any additional activities, or acquire control or shares of any company, in reliance on the Company’s status as a financial holding company, and the Company would be required to comply with any additional limitations that the Federal Reserve imposes. If a company does not return to compliance within 180 days, the Federal Reserve may order the company to divest its subsidiary U.S. depository institutions or the company may discontinue or divest investments in companies engaged in activities permissible only for a bank holding company that has elected to be treated as a financial holding company. In addition, if any subsidiary U.S. depository institution fails to maintain a satisfactory rating under the CRA, American Express would be subject to substantially the same restrictions on activities and acquisitions as set forth above.
 
Please see “ Our business is subject to significant and extensive government regulation and supervision which could adversely affect our results of operations and financial condition ” in “Item 1A—Risk Factors” below.
 
Heightened Prudential Requirements for Large Bank Holding Companies
 
As discussed above, Dodd-Frank creates a new systemic risk oversight body, the FSOC, to identify, monitor and address potential threats to U.S. financial stability. Additionally, Dodd-Frank imposes heightened prudential requirements on bank holding companies with at least $50 billion in total consolidated assets, including the Company, and requires the Federal Reserve to establish prudential standards for such large bank holding companies that are more stringent than those applicable to other bank holding companies, including standards for risk-based capital requirements and leverage limits, liquidity, risk-management requirements, resolution plans (referred to as “living wills”), credit exposure reporting, and concentration. The Federal Reserve has discretionary authority to establish additional prudential standards, on its own or at the FSOC’s recommendation, regarding contingent capital, enhanced public disclosures, short-term debt limits and otherwise as it deems appropriate.
 
Dodd-Frank requires the Federal Reserve to conduct annual analyses of bank holding companies with at least $50 billion in total consolidated assets to evaluate whether the companies have sufficient capital on a total consolidated basis necessary to absorb losses as a result of adverse economic conditions. In addition, such large bank holding companies, including the Company, must conduct similar so-called “stress tests” on a semiannual basis. Furthermore, such large bank holding companies may be required to maintain a debt-to-equity ratio of no more than 15 to 1 upon a determination by the FSOC that the company poses a grave threat to the financial stability of the U.S. and the imposition of such requirement is necessary to mitigate the posed threat.
 
As noted above, Dodd-Frank will require us to prepare and provide to regulators a resolution plan that must, among other things, ensure that our depository institution subsidiaries are adequately protected from risks arising from our other subsidiaries. The establishment and maintenance of this resolution plan may, as a practical matter, present additional constraints on transactions and business arrangements between our bank and non-bank subsidiaries.


40


Table of Contents

Activities and Acquisitions
 
The BHC Act requires a bank holding company to obtain the prior approval of the Federal Reserve before: (1) it may acquire direct or indirect ownership or control of any voting shares of any bank or savings and loan association, if after such acquisition, the bank holding company will directly or indirectly own or control more than 5% of any class of the voting securities of the institution; (2) it or any of its subsidiaries, other than a bank, may acquire all or substantially all of the assets of any bank or savings and loan association; or (3) it may merge or consolidate with any other bank holding company.
 
The Federal Reserve must approve certain additional capital contributions to an existing non-U.S. investment and certain direct and indirect acquisitions by the Company of an interest in a non-U.S. company, including in a foreign bank, as well as the establishment by Centurion Bank of foreign branches in certain circumstances. Additionally, a provision of Dodd-Frank that became effective on the day of enactment requires bank holding companies with total consolidated assets equal to or greater than $50 billion to provide the Federal Reserve with written notice prior to acquiring direct or indirect ownership or control of any voting shares of any company (other than an insured depository institution) that is engaged in financial activities described in section 4(k) of the BHC Act and that has total consolidated assets of $10 billion or more, subject to certain exceptions. Moreover, another provision of Dodd-Frank that is effective on the transfer date of July 21, 2011, but subject to a possible six-month extension, requires financial holding companies to obtain Federal Reserve approval prior to acquiring a nonbank company with total consolidated assets in excess of $10 billion.
 
The Change in Bank Control Act prohibits a person, entity, or group of persons or entities acting in concert, from acquiring “control” of a bank holding company such as the Company unless the Federal Reserve has been given prior notice and has not objected to the transaction. Under Federal Reserve regulations, the acquisition of 10% or more of a class of voting stock of the Company would generally create a rebuttable presumption of acquisition of control of the Company.
 
In addition, under the BHC Act, any company is required to obtain the approval of the Federal Reserve before acquiring control of the Company, which, among other things, includes the acquisition of ownership of or control over 25% or more of any class of voting securities of the Company or the power to exercise a “controlling influence” over the Company. In the case of an acquirer that is a bank or bank holding company, the BHC Act requires approval of the Federal Reserve for the acquisition of ownership or control of any voting securities of the Company, if the acquisition results in the bank or bank holding company controlling more than 5% of the outstanding shares of any class of voting securities of the Company.
 
Source of Strength
 
Federal Reserve policy historically has required bank holding companies to act as a source of strength to their bank subsidiaries and to commit capital and financial resources to support those subsidiaries. Dodd-Frank makes this a statutory requirement and extends it to all insured depository institution subsidiaries beginning on July 21, 2011, subject to a possible six-month extension. Therefore, the Company is expected to act as a source of strength to Centurion Bank and AEBFSB and to commit capital and financial resources to support both institutions. Such support may be required at times when, absent this requirement, we otherwise might determine not to provide it.
 
Capital loans by a bank holding company to any of its subsidiary banks are subordinate in right of payment to deposits and to certain other indebtedness of such subsidiary banks. In the event of a bank holding company’s bankruptcy, any commitment by the bank holding company to a federal bank regulator to maintain the capital of a subsidiary bank will be assumed by the bankruptcy trustee and entitled to a priority of payment.
 
Capital Adequacy
 
The Company, TRS, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are required to comply with the applicable capital adequacy guidelines established by the federal banking regulators. There are two risk-based measures of


41


Table of Contents

capital adequacy for bank holding companies that have been promulgated by the Federal Reserve, as well as a leverage measure.
 
The Company currently calculates its risk-based capital ratios under guidelines adopted by the Federal Reserve, based on the 1998 Capital Accord (“Basel I”) of the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the “Basel Committee”). In June 2004, the Basel Committee published new international guidelines for determining regulatory capital (“Basel II”). In December 2007, the U.S. bank regulatory agencies jointly adopted a final rule based on Basel II. The Company, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are required to transition to the Basel II based guidelines no later than January 1, 2013, unless extended by its regulators. In December 2010, the Basel Committee released its final framework for strengthening international capital and liquidity regulation, now officially identified by the Basel Committee as “Basel III”. Basel III, when implemented by the U.S. banking agencies and fully phased-in, will require bank holding companies and their bank subsidiaries to maintain substantially more capital, with a greater emphasis on common equity. Each Basel Accord is discussed below.
 
The risk-based capital guidelines are designed to make regulatory capital requirements sensitive to differences in credit and market risk profiles among banks and financial holding companies, to account for off-balance-sheet exposure, and to minimize disincentives for holding liquid assets. Assets and off-balance-sheet items are assigned to broad risk categories, each with appropriate weights. The resulting capital ratios represent capital as a percentage of total risk-weighted assets and off-balance-sheet items. As a supervisory matter, federal bank regulatory agencies expect most bank holding companies, and in particular larger bank holding companies such as the Company, to maintain regulatory capital ratios that, at a minimum, qualify a bank holding company and its depository institution subsidiaries as “well capitalized.” The required ratios to qualify as well capitalized are a total risk-based capital ratio of at least 10%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of at least 6% and a leverage ratio of at least 5%. The guidelines also provide that bank holding companies experiencing internal growth or making acquisitions will be expected to maintain strong capital positions substantially above the minimum supervisory levels without significant reliance on intangible assets. Following the recent financial crisis, the federal bank regulatory agencies have encouraged larger bank holding companies to maintain capital ratios appreciably above the “well capitalized” standard. Moreover, the Federal Reserve is focusing more on the regulatory requirement that common equity be the “predominant” element of Tier 1 capital. Furthermore, the Federal Reserve has indicated that it will consider a “tangible Tier 1 capital leverage ratio” (deducting all intangibles) and other indicators of capital strength in evaluating proposals for expansion or new activities. In addition, the Federal Reserve has assessed the capital adequacy of the country’s 19 largest bank holding companies, including the Company, under a so-called “stress test”.
 
For additional information regarding our capital ratios, please see “Consolidated Capital Resources and Liquidity” on pages 39-41 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
Basel I
 
The Company, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB currently calculate regulatory capital ratios under Basel I, as adopted by the applicable federal bank regulatory agencies. Under Basel I, as adopted, the minimum guideline for the ratio of total capital to risk-weighted assets (including certain off-balance-sheet items, such as standby letters of credit) is 8%. At least half of the total capital must be composed of Tier 1 capital, which includes common equity, undivided profits, minority interests in the equity accounts of consolidated subsidiaries (including, for bank holding companies but not banks, trust preferred securities), non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock and for bank holding companies (but not banks) a limited amount of cumulative perpetual preferred stock, less goodwill and certain other intangible assets. Tier 2 capital may consist of, among other things, qualifying subordinated debt, mandatorily convertible debt securities, other preferred stock and trust preferred securities and a limited amount of the allowance for loan losses. Non-cumulative perpetual preferred stock, trust preferred securities and other so-called “restricted core capital elements” are generally limited to 25% of Tier 1 capital. The minimum guideline for the ratio of Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets is 4%.


42


Table of Contents

The risk-based capital rules state that the capital guidelines are minimum standards based primarily on broad credit-risk considerations and do not take into account the other types of risk a banking organization may be exposed to (e.g., interest rate, market, liquidity and operational risks). The Federal Reserve may, therefore, set higher capital requirements for categories of banks (e.g., systematically important firms), or for an individual bank, as situations warrant.
 
Basel II
 
The U.S. Basel II final rule became effective on April 1, 2008. The Company, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are required to transition to the Basel II-based guidelines by January 1, 2013,unless extended by its regulators. The final rule provides for a series of three transitional periods during which the Company must calculate its risk-based capital ratios under both the Basel I-based guidelines and the new Basel II-based guidelines, with the minimum capital requirements during the transitional periods being the greater of the required capital as calculated under the final rule and a designated percentage of required capital as calculated under Basel I. Prior to beginning the three transitional periods, we must complete a satisfactory parallel-run period of no less than four consecutive calendar quarters during which we will be required to confidentially report regulatory capital under both the Basel I and Basel II regulations. Under the final rule, we must begin the first transitional period for capital calculation under the final rule no later than January 1, 2013, unless this time is extended by the Federal Reserve.
 
Dodd-Frank appears to require the Federal Reserve to adopt regulations imposing a continuing “floor” of the Basel I-based capital guidelines in cases where the Basel II-based capital requirements and any changes in capital regulations resulting from Basel III otherwise would permit lower requirements. In December 2010, the Federal Reserve published for comment proposed regulations implementing this requirement.
 
Leverage Requirement
 
Basel I and Basel II do not include a leverage requirement as an international standard. However, the Federal Reserve has established minimum leverage ratio guidelines for bank holding companies (and, as further discussed below, Basel III will impose a leverage requirement as an international standard). The Federal Reserve’s existing guidelines provide for a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to average total assets, less goodwill and certain other intangible assets (the “Leverage Ratio”), of 3% for bank holding companies that meet certain specified criteria, including having the highest regulatory rating. All other bank holding companies generally are required to maintain a Leverage Ratio of at least 4%.
 
Basel III
 
The Basel III final capital framework, among other things:
 
  •  introduces as a new capital measure “Common Equity Tier 1” , or “CET1”, specifies that Tier 1 capital consists of CET1 and “Additional Tier 1 capital” instruments meeting specified requirements, defines CET1 narrowly by requiring that most adjustments to regulatory capital measures be made to CET1 and not to the other components of capital, and expands the scope of the adjustments as compared to existing regulations;
 
  •  when fully phased in on Jan. 1, 2019, requires banks to maintain:
 
  –  as a newly adopted international standard, a minimum ratio of CET1 to risk-weighted assets of at least 4.5%, plus a 2.5% “capital conservation buffer”, which is added to the 4.5% CET1 ratio as that buffer is phased in, effectively resulting in a minimum ratio of CET1 to risk-weighted assets of at least 7% (there is no comparable CET1 requirement under Basel I or II)
 
  –  a minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets of at least 6.0%, plus the capital conservation buffer, which is added to the 6.0% Tier 1 capital ratio as that buffer is phased in, effectively resulting in a minimum Tier 1 capital ratio of 8.5% upon full implementation (the current requirement is 6.00% for a well capitalized bank)


43


Table of Contents

 
  –  a minimum ratio of Total (that is, Tier 1 plus Tier 2) capital to risk-weighted assets of at least 8.0%, plus the capital conservation buffer, which is added to the 8.0% total capital ratio as that buffer is phased in, effectively resulting in a minimum total capital ratio of 10.5% upon full implementation (the current requirement is 10% for a well capitalized bank) and
 
  –  as a newly adopted international standard, a minimum leverage ratio of 3%, calculated as the ratio of Tier 1 capital to balance sheet exposures plus certain off-balance sheet exposures (as the average for each quarter of the month-end ratios for the quarter) and
 
  •  provides for a “countercyclical capital buffer”, generally to be imposed when national regulators determine that excess aggregate credit growth becomes associated with a buildup of systemic risk, that would be a CET1 add-on to the capital conservation buffer in the range of 0% to 2.5% when fully implemented (potentially resulting in total buffers of between 2.5% and 5%).
 
The capital conservation buffer is designed to absorb losses during periods of economic stress. Banking institutions with a ratio of CET1 to risk-weighted assets above the minimum but below the conservation buffer (or below the combined capital conservation buffer and countercyclical capital buffer, when the latter is applied) will face constraints on dividends, equity repurchases and compensation based on the amount of the shortfall.
 
The implementation of the Basel III final framework will commence January 1, 2013. On that date, banking institutions will be required to meet the following minimum capital ratios:
 
  •  3.5% CET1 to risk-weighted assets;
 
  •  4.5% Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets; and
 
  •  8.0% Total capital to risk-weighted assets.
 
The Basel III final framework provides for a number of new deductions from and adjustments to CET1. These include, for example, the requirement that mortgage servicing rights, deferred tax assets dependent upon future taxable income and significant investments in non-consolidated financial entities be deducted from CET1 to the extent that any one such category exceeds 10% of CET1 or all such categories in the aggregate exceed 15% of CET1. The amount of these assets that is not deducted from CET1 will be risk weighted at 250%.
 
Implementation of the deductions and other adjustments to CET1 will begin on January 1, 2014 and will be phased-in over a five-year period (20% per year). The implementation of the capital conservation buffer will begin on January 1, 2016 at 0.625% and be phased in over a four-year period (increasing by that amount on each subsequent January 1, until it reaches 2.5% on January 1, 2019).
 
The U.S. banking agencies have indicated informally that they expect to propose regulations implementing Basel III in mid-2011 with final adoption of implementing regulations in mid-2012. Notwithstanding its release of the Basel III framework as a final framework, the Basel Committee is considering further amendments to Basel III, including the imposition of additional capital surcharges on globally systemically important financial institutions. The Company does not believe it will be considered a globally systemically important financial institution. Dodd-Frank requires the federal banking agencies to adopt regulations affecting U.S. banking institutions’ capital requirements in a number of respects and mandates that the Federal Reserve adopt prudential requirements applicable to systemically important financial institutions (including risk-based capital and leverage requirements) that are more stringent than those applicable to other financial companies. The Company is a bank holding company with more than $50 billion in total consolidated assets, so it is considered a systemically important financial institution under Dodd-Frank. The implications of this designation on the Company’s capital requirements are uncertain at this time. Accordingly, the regulations ultimately applicable to us may be substantially different from the Basel III final framework as published in December 2010.


44


Table of Contents

Liquidity Ratios under Basel III
 
Historically, regulation and monitoring of bank and bank holding company liquidity has been addressed as a supervisory matter, both in the U.S. and internationally, without required formulaic measures. The Basel III final framework requires banks and bank holding companies to measure their liquidity against specific liquidity tests that, although similar in some respects to liquidity measures historically applied by banks and regulators for management and supervisory purposes, going forward will be required by regulation. One test, referred to as the liquidity coverage ratio (“LCR”), is designed to ensure that the banking entity maintains an adequate level of unencumbered high-quality liquid assets equal to the entity’s expected net cash outflow for a 30-day time horizon (or, if greater, 25% of its expected total cash outflow) under an acute liquidity stress scenario. The other test, referred to as the net stable funding ratio (“NSFR”), is designed to promote more medium-and long-term funding of the assets and activities of banking entities over a one-year time horizon. These requirements will incent banking entities to increase their holdings of U.S. Treasury securities and other sovereign debt as a component of assets and increase the use of long-term debt as a funding source. The LCR would be implemented subject to an observation period beginning in 2011, but would not be introduced as a requirement until January 1, 2015, and the NSFR would not be introduced as a requirement until January 1, 2018. These new standards are subject to further rulemaking and their terms may change before implementation.
 
Prompt Corrective Action
 
The FDIA requires, among other things, that federal banking regulators take prompt corrective action in respect of FDIC-insured depository institutions (such as Centurion Bank and AEBFSB) that do not meet minimum capital requirements. The FDIA specifies five capital tiers: “well capitalized,” “adequately capitalized,” “undercapitalized,” “significantly undercapitalized,” and “critically undercapitalized.” A depository institution’s capital tier depends upon how its capital levels compare to various relevant capital measures and certain other factors, as established by regulation. A bank may be deemed to be in a capitalization category that is lower than is indicated by its actual capital position if it receives an unsatisfactory examination rating. Once an institution becomes “undercapitalized,” the FDIA imposes progressively more restrictive constraints on operations, management and capital distributions, depending on the capital category in which an institution is classified. A depository institution that is not well capitalized is also subject to restrictions on the acceptance of brokered deposits including Certificate of Deposit Account Registry Service deposits. The majority of the Company’s outstanding U.S. retail deposits have been raised through third-party channels and are considered brokered deposits for bank regulatory purposes. As part of its funding strategy, a majority of the deposits raised during 2010 were sourced directly by the Company with consumers through Personal Savings from American Express. For a description of our deposit programs, please see “Deposit Programs” beginning on page 24 above and “Deposit Programs” on page 43 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
The FDIA generally prohibits an FDIC-insured depository institution from making any capital distribution (including payment of dividends) or paying any management fee to its holding company if the depository institution would thereafter be undercapitalized. Undercapitalized depository institutions are subject to restrictions on borrowing from the Federal Reserve and to growth limitations, and are required to submit a capital restoration plan. For a capital restoration plan to be acceptable, any holding company must guarantee the capital plan up to an amount equal to the lesser of 5% of the depository institution’s assets at the time it became undercapitalized and the amount of the capital deficiency at the time it fails to comply with the plan. In the event of the holding company’s bankruptcy, such guarantee would take priority over claims of its general unsecured creditors. If a depository institution fails to submit an acceptable plan, it is treated as if it is significantly undercapitalized.
 
Significantly undercapitalized depository institutions may be subject to a number of requirements and restrictions, including orders to sell sufficient voting stock to become adequately capitalized, requirements to reduce total assets and cessation of receipt of deposits from correspondent banks. Critically undercapitalized depository institutions are subject to appointment of a receiver or conservator.


45


Table of Contents

Dividends
 
The Company and TRS as well as Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are limited by banking statutes and regulations in their ability to pay dividends. In general, federal and applicable state banking laws prohibit, without first obtaining regulatory approval, insured depository institutions, such as Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, from making dividend distributions if such distributions are not paid out of available recent earnings or would cause the institution to fail to meet capital adequacy standards. In addition to specific limitations on the dividends that subsidiary banks can pay to their holding companies, federal regulators could prohibit a dividend that would constitute an unsafe or unsound banking practice in light of the financial condition of the banking organization.
 
Dividend payments by the Company and TRS to shareholders are subject to the oversight of the Federal Reserve. It is Federal Reserve policy that bank holding companies generally should pay dividends on common stock to common shareholders only out of net income available to common shareholders over the past year and only if the prospective rate of earnings retention appears consistent with the organization’s current and expected future capital needs, asset quality, and overall financial condition. Moreover, bank holding companies should not maintain dividend levels that place undue pressure on the capital of depository institution subsidiaries or that may undermine the bank holding company’s ability to be a source of strength to its banking subsidiaries. The Federal Reserve could prohibit a dividend by the Company or TRS that would constitute an unsafe or unsound banking practice in light of the financial condition of the banking organization.
 
Under “temporary” guidance issued by the Federal Reserve in November 2010, bank holding companies, such as the Company and TRS, should consult with the Federal Reserve before taking any actions that could result in a diminished capital base, including actions such as increasing dividends. The Federal Reserve will assess the bank holding company’s capital adequacy based on capital plans and stress tests submitted by the bank holding company. The Federal Reserve will review the capital plans, including dividend policies, against, among other things, the bank holding company’s ability to achieve Basel III capital ratio requirements referred to above as they are phased in by U.S. regulators and any potential impact of Dodd-Frank on the company’s risk profile, business strategy, corporate structure or capital adequacy. A company that has not achieved Basel III capital requirements on a fully phased-in basis may have difficulty increasing dividends. Although the regulations ultimately applicable to the Company will be determined by the Federal Reserve, the Company estimates that, had regulations implementing Basel III been in place during the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company’s capital ratios under Basel III would have exceeded the minimum requirements. This estimate could change in the future. Although we expect to meet the Basel III capital requirements, inclusive of the capital conservation buffer, as phased in by the Federal Reserve, the regulations ultimately applicable to us may be substantially different from the Basel III final framework as published in December 2010.
 
Transactions between Centurion Bank or AEBFSB and Their Respective Affiliates
 
Certain transactions (including loans and credit extensions from Centurion Bank and AEBFSB) between Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, on the one hand, and their affiliates (including the Company, TRS and their non-bank subsidiaries), on the other hand, are subject to quantitative and qualitative limitations, collateral requirements, and other restrictions imposed by statute and Federal Reserve regulation. Effective July 21, 2012 (subject to a six-month extension) Dodd-Frank significantly expands the coverage and scope of the limitations on affiliate transactions within a banking organization and changes the procedure for seeking exemptions from these restrictions. Transactions subject to these restrictions are generally required to be made on an arms-length basis. These restrictions generally do not apply to transactions between a depository institution and its subsidiaries.
 
FDIC Insurance Assessments
 
Centurion Bank and AEBFSB accept deposits, and those deposits are insured by the FDIC up to the applicable limits. The FDIC’s deposit insurance fund (“Deposit Insurance Fund”) is funded by assessments on insured depository institutions, which currently depend on the risk category of an institution and the amount of


46


Table of Contents

insured deposits that the institution holds. The FDIC may increase or decrease the assessment rate schedule on a semi-annual basis.
 
As part of its efforts to rebuild the Deposit Insurance Fund, the FDIC required insured depository institutions, including Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, to prepay their estimated assessments for all of 2010, 2011 and 2012 on December 30, 2009.
 
Dodd-Frank requires the FDIC to amend its regulations to base insurance assessments on the average consolidated total assets less the average tangible equity of the insured depository institution during the assessment period (the “new assessment base”). The FDIC has approved a final rule, effective April 1, 2011, that implements the required change to the assessment base and changes the assessment rate calculation for large insured depository institutions, including Centurion Bank and AEBFSB. Effective April 1, 2011, the assessment rates will be subject to adjustments based upon the insured depository institution’s ratio of (1) long-term unsecured debt to the new assessment base, (2) long-term unsecured debt issued by another insured depository institution to the new assessment base, and (3) brokered deposits to the new assessment base. However, effective April 1, 2011, the adjustments based on brokered deposits to the new assessment base will not apply so long as the institution is well capitalized and has a composite CAMELS rating of 1 or 2. Additionally, the rules permit the FDIC to impose additional discretionary assessment rate adjustments. These changes could have an adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition. Furthermore, future changes to deposit insurance assessments also could have an adverse effect on our results of operation and financial condition.
 
Dodd-Frank also requires the FDIC to increase the reserve ratio for the Deposit Insurance Fund from 1.15 percent to reach a minimum of 1.35 percent of estimated insured deposits by September 30, 2020. On December 20, 2010, the FDIC issued a final rule setting the increased reserve ratio at 2 percent. This increase will result in increased costs for Centurion Bank and AEBFSB. In addition, Dodd-Frank eliminates the ceiling (1.5 percent of insured deposits) on the size of the Deposit Insurance Fund and makes the payment of dividends from the Deposit Insurance Fund by the FDIC discretionary.
 
Under the FDIA, the FDIC may terminate the insurance of an institution’s deposits upon a finding that the institution has engaged in unsafe or unsound practices, is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue operations or has violated any applicable law, regulation, rule, order or condition imposed by the FDIC. We do not know of any practice, condition or violation that might lead to termination of deposit insurance at either of our insured depository institution subsidiaries.
 
FDIC Powers upon Insolvency of Insured Depository Institutions
 
If the FDIC is appointed the conservator or receiver of an insured depository institution, such as Centurion Bank or AEBFSB, upon its insolvency or in certain other events, the FDIC has the power: (1) to transfer any of the depository institution’s assets and liabilities to a new obligor without the approval of the depository institution’s creditors; (2) to enforce the terms of the depository institution’s contracts pursuant to their terms; or (3) to repudiate or disaffirm any contract or lease to which the depository institution is a party, the performance of which is determined by the FDIC to be burdensome and the disaffirmation or repudiation of which is determined by the FDIC to promote the orderly administration of the depository institution.
 
In addition, under federal law, the claims of holders of U.S. deposit liabilities and certain claims for administrative expenses against an insured depository institution would be afforded a priority over other general unsecured claims against the institution, including claims of debt holders of the institution and depositors in non-U.S. offices, in the liquidation or other resolution of the institution by a receiver. As a result, whether or not the FDIC ever sought to repudiate any debt obligations of Centurion Bank or AEBFSB, the debt holders would be treated differently from, and could receive substantially less, if anything, than the depositors in U.S. offices of the depository institution.


47


Table of Contents

Orderly Liquidation Authority under Dodd-Frank
 
Dodd-Frank creates Orderly Liquidation Authority (“OLA”), a resolution regime for systemically important non-bank financial companies, including bank holding companies, under which the Treasury Secretary may appoint the FDIC as receiver to liquidate such a company if the company is in danger of default and presents a systemic risk to U.S. financial stability. This determination by the Treasury Secretary must come after supermajority recommendations by the Federal Reserve and the FDIC and consultation by the Treasury Secretary with the President. OLA is similar to the FDIC resolution model for depository institutions, with certain modifications to reflect differences between depository institutions and non-bank financial companies and to reduce disparities between the treatment of creditors’ claims under the U.S. Bankruptcy Code and in an OLA proceeding as compared to disparities that would exist in the resolution by the FDIC of an insured depository institution.
 
An Orderly Liquidation Fund will fund OLA liquidation proceedings through borrowings from the U.S. Department of Treasury and risk-based assessments made, first, on entities that receive more in the resolution than they would have received in liquidation to the extent of such excess, and second, if necessary, on bank holding companies with total consolidated assets of $50 billion or more, such as the Company, and on certain other non-bank financial companies. If an orderly liquidation is triggered, the Company could face assessments for the Orderly Liquidation Fund. It is not possible to determine the level of any such future assessments.
 
Cross-Guarantee Provisions
 
Under the “cross-guarantee” provision of the Financial Institutions Reform, Recovery and Enforcement Act of 1989 (“FIRREA”), insured depository institutions, such as Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, may be liable to the FDIC with respect to any loss incurred or reasonably anticipated to be incurred by the FDIC in connection with the default of, or FDIC assistance to, any commonly controlled insured depository institution. Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are commonly controlled within the meaning of the FIRREA cross-guarantee provision.
 
Community Reinvestment Act
 
Centurion Bank and AEBFSB are subject to the provisions of the CRA. Under the terms of the CRA, the primary federal regulator of a depository institution is required, in connection with its examination of the depository institution, to assess such depository institution’s record in meeting the credit needs of the communities served by that depository institution, including low- and moderate-income neighborhoods. Furthermore, such assessment also is required of any depository institution that has applied to, among other things, merge or consolidate with or acquire the assets or assume the liabilities of a federally regulated financial institution or to open or relocate a branch office. In the case of a bank holding company applying for approval to acquire a bank or bank holding company, the Federal Reserve will assess the record of each subsidiary depository institution of the applicant bank holding company in considering the application. In addition, as discussed previously, the failure of the Company’s subsidiary depository institutions to maintain satisfactory CRA ratings could result in restrictions on the Company’s and TRS’ ability to engage in activities in reliance on financial holding company authority.
 
Privacy, Fair Credit Reporting
 
We use information about our customers to develop and make available relevant, personalized products and services. Customers are given choices about how we use and disclose their information, and we give them notice regarding the measures we take to safeguard this information. Regulatory activity in the areas of privacy and data security continues to increase worldwide, spurred by advancements in technology and related concerns about the rapid and widespread dissemination and use of information. Our regulatory examiners, as well as our auditors, are increasingly focused on ensuring that our privacy and data security/access control policies and practices are adequate to inform our customers of our data uses and to protect their personal data.


48


Table of Contents

As noted above, as part of our efforts to enhance payment account data security, in 2006, we and several other payment card networks formed the PCI SSC, an independent standards-setting organization to manage the evolution of the PCI Data Security Standard, which helps organizations that process card payments to prevent credit/charge card security breaches and fraud through increased controls around data and its exposure to compromise.
 
The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (“GLBA”) became effective on July 1, 2001. The GLBA requires consumer notice of a financial institution’s privacy policies and practices and affords customers the right to “opt out” of the institution’s disclosure of their personal financial information to nonaffiliated third parties (with limited exceptions). This legislation does not preempt state laws that afford greater privacy protections to consumers, and several states have adopted such legislation. For example, in 2003 California enacted that state’s Financial Information Privacy Act, which requires (with limited exceptions) “opt-in” consent from customers before their data may be disclosed to nonaffiliated third parties.
 
In addition, various federal banking regulatory agencies, and as many as 46 states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands, have enacted security breach laws and regulations, requiring varying levels of consumer notification in the event of a data security breach. Data breach laws are also becoming more prevalent in other parts of the world where we operate, including Japan, Mexico and Germany. In many countries that have yet to impose automatic data breach notification requirements, regulators have increasingly used the threat of significant sanctions and penalties by data protection authorities to encourage voluntary notification and discourage data breaches.
 
Beyond these data breach laws, we are subject to the GLBA’s requirements to safeguard customer information, and to a growing number of state laws (including in Massachusetts and Nevada) that impose broad-ranging data security obligations regarding the protection of customer and employee data. In 1995, the European Parliament and Council passed European Directive 95/46/EC on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data (commonly referred to as the Data Protection Directive), which obligates the controller of an individual’s personal data to, among other things, take the necessary technical and organizational steps to protect personal data. Compliance with these various laws could result in higher technology, administrative and other costs for the Company. In July 2010, we submitted for review by relevant European data protection authorities our draft binding corporate rules for processing of data within the American Express group which, once approved, will enable a more efficient basis on which to transfer data within our group. The European Commission is currently assessing the need for further changes to the European Union’s data protection regime.
 
We continue our efforts to safeguard the data entrusted to us in accordance with applicable law and our internal data protection policies, including taking steps to reduce the potential for identity theft or other fraud, while seeking to collect and use data properly to achieve our business objectives. We also have undertaken measures to assess the level of access to customer data by our employees and our partners and service providers, and to ensure that such access is limited to the least privileged level necessary to perform their job or function for the Company.
 
The FCRA regulates the disclosure of consumer credit reports by consumer reporting agencies and the use of consumer credit report information by banks and other companies. Among other things, FCRA places restrictions (with limited exceptions) on the sharing and use of certain personal financial and creditworthiness information of our customers with and by our affiliates.
 
FCRA was significantly amended by the enactment in December 2003 of the FACT Act. The FACT Act requires any company that receives information concerning a consumer from an affiliate, subject to certain exceptions, to permit the consumer to opt out from having that information used to market the company’s products to the consumer. In November 2007, the federal banking agencies issued a final rule implementing the affiliate marketing provisions of the FACT Act. Companies subject to oversight by these agencies were required to comply with the rules by October 1, 2008. The Company has implemented various mechanisms to allow our customers to opt out of affiliate sharing and of marketing by the Company and our affiliates, and it continues to review and enhance these mechanisms to ensure compliance with applicable law and a favorable customer experience.


49


Table of Contents

The FACT Act further amended the FCRA by adding several new provisions designed to prevent or decrease identity theft and to improve the accuracy of consumer credit information. The federal banking agencies and the Federal Trade Commission (“FTC”) published a final rule in November 2007 requiring financial institutions to implement a program containing reasonable policies and procedures to address the risk of identity theft and to identify accounts where identity theft is more likely to occur. Companies subject to oversight by the federal banking agencies originally were required to comply with the rule by November 1, 2008, but the FTC suspended enforcement of its rule through December 31, 2010 pending legislation to clarify the law’s scope. On December 18, 2010, the President signed the Red Flag Program Clarification Act of 2010 into law. The Company’s internal policies and standards, as well as our enterprise-wide data security and fraud prevention programs, comply with the new identity theft requirements.
 
The FACT Act also imposes duties on both consumer reporting agencies and on businesses that furnish or use information contained in consumer credit reports. For example, a furnisher of information is required to implement procedures to prevent the reporting of any information that it learns is the result of identity theft. Also, if a consumer disputes the accuracy of information provided to a consumer reporting agency, the furnisher of that information must conduct an investigation and respond to the consumer in a timely fashion. The federal banking regulatory agencies and the FTC have issued rules that specify the circumstances under which furnishers of information would be required to investigate disputes regarding the accuracy of the information provided to a consumer reporting agency. The FACT Act also requires grantors of credit that use consumer credit report information in making a determination to offer a borrower credit on terms that are “materially less favorable” than the terms offered to most of the lender’s other customers to notify the borrower that the terms are based on a consumer credit report. In such a case the borrower is entitled to receive a free copy of the report from the consumer reporting agency. The federal bank regulatory agencies and the FTC have issued rules that specify the circumstances under which “risk-based pricing” notices must be provided to customers and the content, format and timing of such notices. Dodd-Frank will require, effective July 21, 2011, the addition of certain information about credit scores to “risk-based pricing” notices and to adverse action notices otherwise required by the FCRA. Grantors of credit using prescreened consumer credit report information in credit solicitations are also required to include an enhanced notice to consumers that they have the right to opt out from receiving further prescreened offers of credit. The enactment of the FACT Act and the promulgation of rules implementing it are not expected to have a significant impact on our business or practices.
 
The CARD Act
 
In May 2009, the CARD Act was enacted to prohibit certain practices for consumer credit card accounts. The CARD Act, among other requirements, prohibits issuers from treating a payment as late for any purpose, including increasing the APR or imposing a fee, unless a consumer has been provided a “reasonable amount of time” to make the payment. It also requires issuers to apply payment amounts in excess of the minimum payment first to the balance with the highest APR and then to balances with lower APRs. In addition, the Act prohibits an issuer from increasing the APR on outstanding balances, except in limited circumstances such as when a promotional rate expires, a variable rate adjusts, or an account is seriously delinquent or completes a workout arrangement. These requirements became effective on February 22, 2010.
 
The CARD Act also requires issuers to maintain reasonable written policies to consider a consumer’s income or assets and current obligations prior to opening an account or increasing a credit line. This required minor adjustments to our account opening decisioning and line increase decisioning processes. This requirement became effective on February 22, 2010, and to date has not had any significant impact on these decisions. In addition, applicants for new accounts who are under the age of 21 must demonstrate an independent ability to make the required minimum periodic payments. On October 19, 2010, the Federal Reserve proposed clarifications to its rules implementing the CARD Act, which would include a requirement that applicants who are 21 and over must also demonstrate an independent ability to make the required monthly minimum payments. Issuers would not be permitted to consider household income or assets, but only the individual income or assets of the applicant. If adopted as proposed, this rule may decrease the number of applications for our Cards that are approved for applicants who do not have sufficient individual income, even


50


Table of Contents

though their household income may be sufficient for approval. Since August 22, 2010, the CARD Act requires that penalty fees be reasonable and proportional. While the Company has adjusted penalty fees (late fees and returned payment fees) accordingly, this requirement is not expected to have any significant impact on results of operations.
 
Also, since August 22, 2010, the CARD Act requires issuers to periodically reevaluate APR increases to determine if a decrease is appropriate. The first of these reevaluations must be completed in February 2011. The obligation to periodically reevaluate APR increases is ongoing, and it is uncertain how these provisions will be interpreted or amended by the new Consumer Financial Protection Bureau. Therefore, while the ultimate impact of this requirement is uncertain at this time, it could have a significant impact on our results of operations.
 
The Federal Reserve also amended its rules on the format and content of consumer credit card disclosures. The amendments required revisions to the format and content of all main types of open-end consumer credit disclosures, including applications and solicitations, account-opening disclosures, and periodic billing statements. These amendments became effective on July 1, 2010.
 
Certain provisions of the CARD Act also apply to stored value and prepaid products sold on or after August 22, 2010. In March 2010, the Federal Reserve amended its Regulation E to impose new restrictions on the ability to impose dormancy, inactivity or service fees with respect to gift certificates, store gift cards and general-use prepaid cards issued primarily for personal use. Such fees may only be imposed under certain conditions. Additionally, the rules prohibit the sale or issuance of a gift certificate, store gift card or general-use prepaid card that has an expiration date of less than five years after either the date a certificate or card is issued or the date on which funds were last loaded. The rules also require implementation of policies and procedures to give consumers a reasonable opportunity to purchase a certificate or card with at least five years before the certificate or card expiration date, prohibit any fees for replacing an expired certificate or card or refunding the remaining balance as long as the underlying funds remain valid, and require additional disclosures for any fee other than a dormancy, inactivity or service fee.
 
While the Company has made certain changes to our product terms and practices designed to comply with the CARD Act, the long-term impact of the CARD Act on the Company’s business practices and revenues will depend upon a number of factors, including our ability to successfully implement our business strategies, consumer behavior and the actions of the Company’s competitors, which are difficult to predict at this time. If the Company is not able to lessen the impact of the changes required by the CARD Act, it will have a material adverse effect on results of operations.
 
Anti-Money Laundering Compliance
 
In the United States, the USA Patriot Act was enacted in October 2001 in the wake of the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks. The Patriot Act, in addition to substantially broadening existing AML and terrorist financing legislation, amended the Bank Secrecy Act, the primary legislation governing AML requirements. The Patriot Act contains a wide variety of provisions aimed at fighting terrorism and money laundering, including provisions aimed at impeding terrorists’ ability to access and move funds used in support of terrorist activities. Among other things, the Bank Secrecy Act, as amended by the Patriot Act, requires financial institutions to establish AML programs that meet certain standards, including, in some instances, expanded reporting and enhanced information gathering and recordkeeping requirements. While American Express has long maintained AML programs in our businesses, certain of our business activities are subject to specific AML regulations that prescribe minimum standards for components of the AML programs. For example, our GNS business maintains a risk-based program to ensure that institutions that are licensed to issue cards or acquire merchants on their networks maintain adequate AML controls. We have also developed and implemented a Know Your Customer, or due diligence, program and an enhanced due diligence program, including a program for verifying the identity of our customers for applicable businesses. We will take steps to comply with any additional regulations or initiatives that are adopted, whether in the United States or in other jurisdictions in which we conduct business.


51


Table of Contents

Over the last several years, the industry has seen increased regulatory scrutiny of the AML compliance programs of financial institutions, with emphasis on record keeping and reporting requirements such as the requirement to identify and report suspicious activity, leading to enforcement actions and increased penalties for non-compliance. To meet this increased scrutiny, we continue to enhance our enterprise-wide AML compliance program. Our AML compliance programs primarily consist of risk-based policies, procedures and controls that are reasonably designed to prevent, detect and report money laundering.
 
We have significant operations in the European Union, including a number of regulated businesses. We monitor developments in EU legislation, as well as in the other countries in which we operate, to ensure that we are in a position to comply with all applicable legal requirements, including European Union directives applicable to payment institutions, credit providers, insurance intermediaries and other financial institutions.
 
Office of Foreign Assets Control Regulation
 
The United States has imposed economic sanctions that affect transactions with designated foreign countries, nationals and others. These are typically known as the “OFAC” rules, and they are administered by the U.S. Department of Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (“OFAC”). The OFAC-administered sanctions take many different forms. Generally, however, they contain one or more of the following elements: (i) restrictions on trade with or investment in a sanctioned country, including prohibitions against direct or indirect imports from and exports to a sanctioned country and prohibitions on “U.S. persons” engaging in financial transactions relating to making investments in, or providing investment-related advice or assistance to, a sanctioned country; and (ii) a blocking of assets in which the government or specially designated nationals of the sanctioned country have an interest, by prohibiting transfers of property subject to U.S. jurisdiction (including property in the possession or control of U.S. persons). Blocked assets (e.g., property or bank deposits) cannot be paid out, withdrawn, set off or transferred in any manner without a license from OFAC. Failure to comply with these sanctions could have serious legal and reputational consequences.
 
Compensation Practices
 
Our compensation practices are subject to oversight by the Federal Reserve. In June 2010, the Federal Reserve, the OCC, the FDIC and the OTS jointly issued final guidance on sound incentive compensation policies that applies to all banking organizations supervised by the Federal Reserve, including bank holding companies, such as the Company, as well as all insured depository institutions, including Centurion Bank and AEBFSB. The final guidance sets forth three key principles for incentive compensation arrangements that are designed to help ensure that incentive compensation plans do not encourage excessive risk-taking and are consistent with the safety and soundness of banking organizations. The three principles provide that a banking organization’s incentive compensation arrangements should provide incentives that appropriately balance risk and financial results in a manner that does not encourage employees to expose their organizations to imprudent risks, be compatible with effective internal controls and risk management, and be supported by strong corporate governance, including active and effective oversight by the organization’s board of directors. Any deficiencies in compensation practices of a banking institution that are identified by the Federal Reserve or other bank regulatory agencies in connection with its review of such organization’s compensation practices may be incorporated into the organization’s supervisory ratings, which can affect its ability to make acquisitions or perform other actions. The final guidance provides that enforcement actions may be taken against a banking organization if its incentive compensation arrangements or related risk-management control or governance processes pose a risk to the organization’s safety and soundness and the organization is not taking prompt and effective measures to correct the deficiencies.
 
Additionally, on February 7, 2011, the FDIC approved a notice of proposed rulemaking pursuant to Dodd-Frank on incentive-based compensation practices. The proposed rule is a joint rulemaking by the Federal Reserve, the OCC, the FDIC, the OTS, the SEC, the Federal Housing Finance Agency and the National Credit Union Administration, which each must independently approve the proposed rule before it is published for comment. Under the proposed rule, all financial institutions with total consolidated assets of $1 billion or more (such as the Company, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB) would be prohibited from offering incentive-based compensation arrangements that encourage inappropriate risk taking by offering “excessive” compensation or


52


Table of Contents

compensation that could lead the company to material financial loss. All covered institutions would be required to provide federal regulators with additional disclosures to determine compliance with the proposed rule and also to maintain policies and procedures to ensure compliance. Additionally, for covered institutions with at least $50 billion in total consolidated assets, such as the Company, the proposed rule requires that at least 50% of certain executive officers’ incentive-based compensation be deferred for a minimum of three years and provides for the adjustment of deferred payments to reflect actual losses or other measures of performance that become known during the deferral period. Moreover, the board of directors of a covered institution with at least $50 billion in total consolidated assets must identify employees who have authority to expose an institution to substantial risk, evaluate and document the incentive-based compensation methods used to balance risk and financial rewards for the identified employees, and approve incentive-based compensation arrangements for those employees after appropriately considering other available methods for balancing risk and financial rewards. The form and timing of any final rule cannot be determined at this time.
 
Our compensation practices are affected by Dodd-Frank amendments to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) requiring a non-binding “say-on-pay” vote to be provided at least once every three years at a shareholders’ meeting and a non-binding shareholder vote to be provided at least once every six years to determine the frequency of say-on-pay votes. These votes must be provided at meetings of shareholders occurring after January 21, 2011. In addition, Dodd-Frank requires proxy statement disclosure of compensation arrangements requiring payments to named executive officers upon a change in control (“golden parachutes”) if shareholders are voting on a merger or similar transaction, as well as a separate non-binding vote to approve golden parachute compensation arrangements that had not previously been subject to a say-on-pay vote. The golden parachute disclosure and vote is required in proxy statements and other schedules and forms initially filed on or after April 25, 2011.
 
The scope and content of these policies and regulations on executive compensation are continuing to develop and are likely to continue evolving in the near future. It cannot be determined at this time whether compliance with such policies and regulations will adversely affect the ability of American Express and its subsidiaries to hire, retain and motivate its and their key employees.
 
Foreign Corrupt Practices Act
 
Our international operations are subject to complex international and U.S. laws and regulations, including the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (the “FCPA”) and local laws that prohibit the making or offering of improper payments to foreign government officials, political parties or political party officials for the purpose of obtaining or retaining business or an improper advantage. The anti-corruption provisions of the FCPA are enforced by DOJ. The FCPA also requires us to strictly comply with certain accounting and internal controls standards enforced by the SEC. In recent years, DOJ and SEC enforcement of the FCPA has become more intense. Failure to comply with the FCPA and other laws can expose us and/or individual employees to potentially severe criminal and civil penalties. The risk may be greater when we transact business, whether through subsidiaries or joint ventures or other partnerships, in countries with higher perceived levels of corruption. We have policies and procedures designed to detect and deter prohibited practices, provide specialized training, monitor our operations and payments globally, and investigate allegations of improprieties relating to transactions and the manner in which transactions are recorded. However, if our employees, contractors or agents fail to comply with applicable laws governing our international operations, the Company, as well as individual employees, may face investigations or prosecutions, which could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition or results of operations.
 
FOREIGN OPERATIONS
 
We derive a significant portion of our revenues from the use of our Card products, Travelers Cheques, travel and other financial products and services in countries outside the United States and continue to broaden the use of these products and services outside the United States. (For a discussion of our revenue by geographic region, see Note 25 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, which you can find on pages 114-116 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders and which is incorporated herein by reference.)


53


Table of Contents

Our revenues can be affected by political and economic conditions in these countries (including the availability of foreign exchange for the payment by the local Card issuer of obligations arising out of local Cardmembers’ spending outside such country, for the payment of Card bills by Cardmembers who are billed in other than their local currency, and for the remittance of the proceeds of Travelers Cheque sales). Substantial and sudden devaluation of local Cardmembers’ currency can also affect their ability to make payments to the local issuer of the Card in connection with spending outside the local country.
 
As a result of our foreign operations, we are exposed to the possibility that, because of foreign exchange rate fluctuations, assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than the U.S. dollar may be realized in amounts greater or less than the U.S. dollar amounts at which they are currently recorded in our Consolidated Financial Statements. Examples of transactions in which this may occur include the purchase by Cardmembers of goods and services in a currency other than the currency in which they are billed; the sale in one currency of a Travelers Cheque denominated in a second currency; and, in most instances, investments in foreign operations. These risks, unless properly monitored and managed, could have an adverse effect on our operations. For more information on how we manage risk relating to foreign exchange, see “Risk Management — Market Risk Management Process” on pages 48-49 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
SALE OF AMERICAN EXPRESS BANK LTD. / DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
 
On September 18, 2007, we entered into an agreement to sell our international banking subsidiary, American Express Bank Ltd. (“AEBL”), to Standard Chartered PLC (“Standard Chartered”), and to sell American Express International Deposit Company (“AEIDC”) through a put/call agreement to Standard Chartered 18 months after the close of the AEBL sale. The sale of AEBL was completed on February 29, 2008. In the third quarter of 2008, AEIDC qualified to be reported as a discontinued operation and the sale of AEIDC was completed on September 10, 2009.
 
For all periods presented, all of the operating results, assets and liabilities, and cash flows of AEBL (except for certain components of AEBL that were not sold) and AEIDC have been removed from the Corporate & Other segment and are presented separately in discontinued operations in the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements. The Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements have been adjusted to exclude discontinued operations unless otherwise noted.
 
You can find more information regarding this transaction in Note 2 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, appearing on page 75 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.
 
SEGMENT INFORMATION AND CLASSES OF SIMILAR SERVICES
 
You can find information regarding the Company’s reportable operating segments, geographic operations and classes of similar services in Note 25 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, which appears on pages 114-116 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which Note is incorporated herein by reference.
 
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE COMPANY
 
Set forth below in alphabetical order is a list of all our executive officers as of February 25, 2011. None of our executive officers has any family relationship with any other executive officer, and none of our executive officers became an officer pursuant to any arrangement or understanding with any other person. Each executive


54


Table of Contents

officer has been elected to serve until the next annual election of officers or until his or her successor is elected and qualified. Each officer’s age is indicated by the number in parentheses next to his or her name.
 
     
DOUGLAS E. BUCKMINSTER —
  President, International Consumer and Small Business Services
 
Mr. Buckminster (50) has been President, International Consumer and Small Business Services of the Company since November 2009. Prior thereto he had been Executive Vice President, International Consumer Products and Marketing since July 2002.
 
     
KENNETH I. CHENAULT —
  Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
 
Mr. Chenault (59) has been Chairman since April 2001 and Chief Executive Officer since January 2001.
 
     
L. KEVIN COX —
  Executive Vice President, Human Resources
 
Mr. Cox (46) has been Executive Vice President, Human Resources of the Company since April 2005. Prior thereto, he had been Executive Vice President of The Pepsi Bottling Group since September 2004.
 
     
EDWARD P. GILLIGAN —
  Vice Chairman
 
Mr. Gilligan (51) has been Vice Chairman of the Company and head of the Company’s Global Consumer and Small Business Card Issuing, Network and Merchant businesses since October 2009. Prior thereto, he had been Vice Chairman of the Company and head of the Company’s Global Business to Business Group since July 2007. Prior thereto, he had been Group President, American Express International & Global Corporate Services since July 2005. Prior thereto, he had been Group President, Global Corporate Services since June 2000 and Group President, Global Corporate Services & International Payments, since July 2003.
 
     
WILLIAM H. GLENN —
  President, Global Merchant Services
 
Mr. Glenn (53) has been President, Global Merchant Services since June 2007. Prior thereto, he had been President of Merchant Services North America and Global Merchant Network Group since September 2002.
 
     
ASH GUPTA —
  Chief Risk Officer and President, Risk and Information Management
 
Mr. Gupta (57) has been President of Risk, Information Management and Banking Group and Chief Risk Officer since July 2007. Prior thereto, he had been Executive Vice President and Chief Risk Officer of the Company since July 2003.
 
     
JOHN D. HAYES —
  Executive Vice President and Chief Marketing Officer
 
Mr. Hayes (56) has been Executive Vice President since May 1995 and Chief Marketing Officer of the Company since August 2003.
 
     
DANIEL T. HENRY —
  Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 
Mr. Henry (61) has been Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of the Company since October 2007. Since February 2007, Mr. Henry had been serving as Executive Vice President and Acting Chief Financial Officer of the Company. Prior thereto, he had been Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, U.S. Consumer, Small Business and Merchant Services since October 2005 and Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, U.S. Consumer and Small Business Services since August 2000.
 
     
LOUISE M. PARENT —
  Executive Vice President and General Counsel
 
Ms. Parent (60) has been Executive Vice President and General Counsel since May 1993.
 
     
THOMAS SCHICK —
  Executive Vice President, Corporate and External Affairs
 
Mr. Schick (64) has been Executive Vice President, Corporate and External Affairs since March 1993.
 


55


Table of Contents

     
DANIEL H. SCHULMAN —
  Group President, Enterprise Growth
 
Mr. Schulman (53) has been Group President, Enterprise Growth since August 2010. Mr. Schulman joined American Express from Sprint Nextel Corporation, where he served as President of the Prepaid group from 2009 until August 2010. Before joining Sprint, Mr. Schulman was the founding CEO of Virgin Mobile USA, a mobile virtual operator, acquired by Sprint in 2009. Prior to that he was CEO of priceline.com and spent the early part of his career with AT&T, where he ultimately led the company’s consumer long distance business.
 
     
STEPHEN J. SQUERI —
  Group President, Global Services
 
Mr. Squeri (51) has been Group President, Global Services, since October 2009. From May 2005 to October 2009, he served as Executive Vice President and Chief Information Officer. In addition, from July 2008 to September 2010, he was the head of Corporate Development, overseeing mergers and acquisitions activities for the Company. Prior thereto, he had been President, Global Commercial Card — Global Corporate Services since January 2002.
 
EMPLOYEES
 
We had approximately 61,000 employees on December 31, 2010.
 
GUIDE 3 — STATISTICAL DISCLOSURE BY BANK HOLDING COMPANIES
 
The accompanying supplemental information should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements in the Company’s 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference (“Annual Report”). This information excludes discontinued operations unless otherwise noted.
 
Upon adoption of new GAAP governing transfers of financial assets and consolidation of variable interest entities (“VIEs”), the Company was required to change its accounting for the American Express Credit Account Master Trust (the “Lending Trust”), a previously unconsolidated VIE, which is now consolidated. As a result, beginning January 1, 2010, the securitized cardmember loans and related debt securities issued to third parties by the Lending Trust are included on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheet. The Company continues to consolidate the American Express Issuance Trust (the “Charge Trust”). Prior period results have not been revised for the change in accounting for the Lending Trust. Refer to Note 1 “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” on page 72 and Note 7 “Asset Securitizations” on page 85 of the Annual Report for further discussion.

56


Table of Contents

DISTRIBUTION OF ASSETS, LIABILITIES, AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY; INTEREST RATES AND INTEREST DIFFERENTIAL
 
The following tables provide a summary of the Company’s consolidated average balances including major categories of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities along with an analysis of net interest earnings. Consolidated average balances, interest, and average yields are segregated between U.S. and non-U.S. offices. Assets, liabilities, interest income and interest expense are attributed to U.S. and non-U.S. based on location of the office recording such items.
 
                                                                         
    2010     2009     2008  
    Average
    Interest
    Average
    Average
    Interest
    Average
    Average
    Interest
    Average
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   Balance(a)     Income     Yield     Balance(a)     Income     Yield     Balance(a)     Income     Yield  
 
Interest-earning assets
                                                                       
Interest-bearing deposits in other banks(b)(c)
                                                                       
U.S. 
  $ 16,276     $ 40       0.2 %   $ 7,090     $ 13       0.2 %   $ 8,814     $ 136       1.5 %
Non-U.S. 
    2,203       23       1.0       1,724       28       1.6       1,402       19       1.4  
Federal funds sold and securities purchased under agreements to resell
                                                                       
U.S. 
                                                     
Non-U.S. 
    309       12       3.9       123       6       4.9       122       10       8.2  
Short-term investment securities
                                                                       
U.S. 
    1,214       2       0.2       10,523       28       0.3       4,926       73       1.5  
Non-U.S. 
    349       1       0.3       195       1       0.5       31       2       6.5  
Cardmember loans(d)(e)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    47,700       5,407       11.3       26,114       2,984       11.4       36,962       4,464       12.1  
Non-U.S. 
    8,419       1,356       16.1       8,696       1,446       16.6       10,670       1,649       15.5  
Other loans
                                                                       
U.S. 
    41       3       7.3       140       3       2.1       175       4       2.3  
Non-U.S. 
    410       18       4.4       527       38       7.2       646       74       11.5  
Taxable investment securities(f)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    11,225       137       1.2       13,198       457       3.5       5,841       333       5.6  
Non-U.S. 
    247       13       5.3       285       18       6.0       382       24       6.1  
Non-taxable investment securities(f)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    5,999       252       6.3       5,989       286       6.8       6,565       334       7.6  
Other assets(g)
                                                                       
Primarily U.S. 
    523       28       n.m.       485       23       n.m.       336       79       n.m.  
                                                                         
Total interest-earning assets(h)
  $ 94,915     $ 7,292       7.8 %   $ 75,089     $ 5,331       7.3 %   $ 76,872     $ 7,201       9.6 %
                                                                         
U.S. 
    82,978       5,869               63,539       3,794               63,619       5,423          
Non-U.S. 
    11,937       1,423               11,550       1,537               13,253       1,778          
 


57


Table of Contents

                         
    2010     2009     2008  
    Average
    Average
    Average
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   Balance(a)     Balance(a)     Balance(a)  
 
Non-interest-earning assets
                       
Cash and due from banks(c)
                       
U.S. 
  $ 1,805     $ 1,063     $ 1,179  
Non-U.S. 
    640       429       448  
Cardmember receivables, net
                       
U.S. 
    18,045       17,056       20,220  
Non-U.S. 
    16,253       13,812       16,500  
Other receivables, net
                       
U.S. 
    1,825       2,149       2,349  
Non-U.S. 
    1,227       1,249       1,279  
Reserves for cardmember and other loans losses
                       
U.S. 
    (3,696 )     (2,556 )     (1,923 )
Non-U.S. 
    (612 )     (564 )     (432 )
Other assets(i)
                       
U.S. 
    11,900       12,288       9,699  
Non-U.S. 
    1,907       2,131       2,205  
                         
Total non-interest-earning assets
    49,294       47,057       51,524  
                         
U.S. 
    29,879       30,000       31,524  
Non-U.S. 
    19,415       17,057       20,000  
Assets of discontinued operations
          75       5,745  
                         
Total assets
  $ 144,209     $ 122,221     $ 134,141  
                         
U.S. 
    112,857       93,539       95,143  
Non-U.S. 
    31,352       28,607       33,253  
Assets of discontinued operations
          75       5,745  
Percentage of total average assets attributable to non-U.S. activities
    21.7 %     23.4 %     24.8 %
 
 
(a) Averages based on month end balances, except reserves for cardmember and other receivables/loans, which are based on quarter end averages.
 
(b) Amounts include (i) average interest-bearing restricted cash balances of $1,570 million, $417 million, and $214 million for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, which are included in other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheets, and (ii) the associated interest income.
 
(c) “Interest bearing deposits in other banks” and “cash and due from banks” have been revised for book overdraft misclassifications in 2009 and 2008, as described in Note 1 “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” on page 72 of the Annual Report.
 
(d) Card fees related to cardmember loans included in interest income were $115 million, $107 million, and $95 million in U.S. and $105 million, $79 million and $51 million in non-U.S. for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
(e) Average non-accrual loans were included in the average loan balances used to determine the average yield on loans in amounts of $839 million, $554 million and $8 million in U.S. as well as $11 million, $15 million and $6 million in non-U.S. for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
(f) Average yields for available-for-sale investment securities have been calculated using total amortized cost balances and do not include changes in fair value recorded in other comprehensive (loss) income. Average yield on non-taxable investment securities is calculated on a tax-equivalent basis using the U.S. federal statutory tax rate of 35 percent.
 
(g) Amounts include (i) average equity securities balances, which are included in investment securities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets, and (ii) the associated dividend income. The average yield on other assets has not been shown as it would not be meaningful.
 
(h) The average yield on total interest-earning assets is adjusted for the impacts of items mentioned in (f) above.
 
(i) Includes premises and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation.
 

58


Table of Contents

                                                                         
    2010     2009     2008  
    Average
    Interest
    Average
    Average
    Interest
    Average
    Average
    Interest
    Average
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   Balance(a)     Expense     Rate     Balance(a)     Expense     Rate     Balance(a)     Expense     Rate  
 
Interest-bearing liabilities
                                                                       
Customer deposits
                                                                       
U.S. 
  $ 27,373     $ 522       1.9 %   $ 19,638     $ 393       2.0 %   $ 12,130     $ 366       3.0 %
Non-U.S. 
    693       24       3.5       798       32       4.0       1,432       88       6.1  
Federal funds purchased and securities sold under agreements to repurchase
                                                                       
U.S. 
                      48                   1,493       53       3.5  
Non-U.S. 
                                                     
Short-term borrowings(b)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    1,066       4       0.4       2,145       31       1.4       12,490       399       3.2  
Non-U.S. 
    1,066                   801       6       0.7       942       31       3.3  
Long-term debt(b)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    66,121       1,811       2.7       54,032       1,658       3.1       54,408       2,491       4.6  
Non-U.S. 
    2,202       40       1.8       1,463       55       3.8       1,968       82       4.2  
Other liabilities(c)
                                                                       
Primarily U.S. 
    292       22       n.m.       284       32       n.m.       277       45       n.m.  
                                                                         
Total interest-bearing liabilities
  $ 98,813     $ 2,423       2.5 %   $ 79,209     $ 2,207       2.8 %   $ 85,140     $ 3,555       4.2 %
                                                                         
U.S. 
    94,852       2,359               76,147       2,114               80,798       3,354          
Non-U.S. 
    3,961       64               3,062       93               4,342       201          
Non-interest-bearing liabilities
                                                                       
Travelers Cheques outstanding
                                                                       
U.S. 
    5,272                       5,623                       6,289                  
Non-U.S. 
    254                       330                       410                  
Accounts payable(d)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    6,666                       5,854                       7,172                  
Non-U.S. 
    3,757                       3,146                       2,699                  
Other liabilities(d)
                                                                       
U.S. 
    10,962                       10,298                       9,311                  
Non-U.S. 
    3,732                       3,130                       5,484                  
                                                                         
Total non-interest-bearing liabilities
    30,643                       28,381                       31,365                  
                                                                         
U.S. 
    22,900                       21,775                       22,772                  
Non-U.S. 
    7,743                       6,606                       8,593                  
Liabilities of discontinued operations
                          61                       5,561                  
                                                                         
Total liabilities
    129,456                       107,651                       122,066                  
                                                                         
U.S. 
    117,752                       97,922                       103,570                  
Non-U.S. 
    11,704                       9,668                       12,935                  
Liabilities of discontinued operations
                          61                       5,561                  
                                                                         
Total shareholders’ equity
    14,753                       14,570                       12,075                  
                                                                         
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 144,209                     $ 122,221                     $ 134,141                  
                                                                         
Percentage of total average liabilities attributable to non-U.S. activities
    9.0 %                     9.0 %                     10.6 %                
Interest rate spread
                    5.3 %                     4.5 %                     5.4 %
                                                                         
Net interest income and net average yield on interest-earning assets(e)
          $ 4,869       5.3 %           $ 3,124       4.3 %           $ 3,646       5.0 %
                                                                         
 
 
(a) Averages based on month end balances.
 
(b) Interest expense incurred on derivative instruments in qualifying hedging relationships has been reported along with the related interest expense incurred on the hedged debt instrument.

59


Table of Contents

 
(c) Amounts include (i) average deferred compensation liability balances which are included in other liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets, and (ii) the associated interest expense. The average rate on other liabilities has not been shown as it would not be meaningful.
 
(d) “Accounts payable” and “other liabilities” have been revised for book overdraft misclassifications in 2009 and 2008, as further described in Note 1 “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” on page 72 of the Annual Report.
 
(e) Net average yield on interest-earning assets is defined as net interest income divided by average total interest-earning assets as adjusted for the items mentioned in note (f) on page 58.
 
CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME -VOLUME AND RATE ANALYSIS (a)
 
The following table presents the amount of changes in interest income and interest expense due to changes in both average volume and average rate. Major categories of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities have been segregated between U.S. and non-U.S. offices. Average volume/rate changes have been allocated between the average rate and average volume variances on a consistent basis based upon the respective percentage changes in average balances and average rates.
 
                                                 
    2010 versus 2009     2009 versus 2008  
    Increase (Decrease) due to change in:           Increase (Decrease) due to change in:        
    Average
    Average
    Net
    Average
    Average
    Net
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions)   Volume     Rate     Change     Volume     Rate     Change  
 
Interest-earning assets
                                               
Interest-bearing deposits in other banks(b)
                                               
U.S. 
  $ 17     $ 10     $ 27     $ (27 )   $ (96 )   $ (123 )
Non-U.S. 
    8       (13 )     (5 )     4       5       9  
Securities purchased under agreements to resell
                                               
Non-U.S. 
    9       (3 )     6             (4 )     (4 )
Short-term investment securities
                                               
U.S. 
    (25 )     (1 )     (26 )     83       (128 )     (45 )
Non-U.S. 
    1       (1 )           11       (12 )     (1 )
Cardmember loans
                                               
U.S. 
    2,467       (44 )     2,423       (1,310 )     (170 )     (1,480 )
Non-U.S. 
    (46 )     (44 )     (90 )     (305 )     102       (203 )
Other loans
                                               
U.S. 
    (2 )     2             (1 )           (1 )
Non-U.S. 
    (8 )     (12 )     (20 )     (14 )     (22 )     (36 )
Taxable investment securities
                                               
U.S. 
    (70 )     (250 )     (320 )     404       (280 )     124  
Non-U.S. 
    (4 )     (1 )     (5 )     (5 )     (1 )     (6 )
Non-taxable investment securities
                                               
U.S. 
    (12 )     (22 )     (34 )     (17 )     (31 )     (48 )
Other assets
                                               
Primarily U.S. 
    2       3       5       35       (91 )     (56 )
                                                 
Change in interest income
    2,337       (376 )     1,961       (1,142 )     (728 )     (1,870 )
                                                 


60


Table of Contents

                                                 
    2010 versus 2009     2009 versus 2008  
    Increase (Decrease) due to change in:           Increase (Decrease) due to change in:        
    Average
    Average
    Net
    Average
    Average
    Net
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions)   Volume     Rate     Change     Volume     Rate     Change  
 
Interest-bearing liabilities
                                               
Customer deposits
                                               
U.S. 
    155       (26 )     129       227       (200 )     27  
Non-U.S. 
    (4 )     (4 )     (8 )     (39 )     (17 )     (56 )
Federal funds purchased and securities sold under agreements to repurchase
                                               
U.S. 
                      (51 )     (2 )     (53 )
Short-term borrowings
                                               
U.S. 
    (16 )     (11 )     (27 )     (330 )     (38 )     (368 )
Non-U.S. 
    2       (8 )     (6 )     (5 )     (20 )     (25 )
Long-term debt
                                               
U.S. 
    371       (218 )     153       (17 )     (816 )     (833 )
Non-U.S. 
    28       (43 )     (15 )     (21 )     (6 )     (27 )
Other liabilities
                                               
Primarily U.S. 
    1       (11 )     (10 )     1       (14 )     (13 )
                                                 
Change in interest expense
    537       (321 )     216       (235 )     (1,113 )     (1,348 )
                                                 
Change in net interest income
  $ 1,800     $ (55 )   $ 1,745     $ (907 )   $ 385     $ (522 )
                                                 
 
 
(a) Refer to the notes on pages 58 and 59 for additional information.
 
(b) “Interest bearing deposits in other banks” has been revised for book overdraft misclassifications in 2009 and 2008, as described in Note 1 “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” on page 72 of the Annual Report.
 
INVESTMENT SECURITIES PORTFOLIO
 
The following table presents the fair value of the Company’s available-for-sale investment securities portfolio. Refer to Note 6 “Investment Securities” on page 83 in the Annual Report for additional information.
 
                         
December 31, (Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
State and municipal obligations
  $ 5,797     $ 6,250     $ 5,631  
U.S. Government agency obligations
    3,413       6,745       3,185  
U.S. Government treasury obligations
    2,456       5,566       1,981  
Corporate debt securities
    1,445       1,335       218  
Retained subordinated securities
          3,599       744  
Mortgage-backed securities
    276       180       75  
Equity securities
    475       530       544  
Foreign government bonds and obligations
    99       92       81  
Other
    49       40       67  
                         
Total available-for-sale securities
  $ 14,010     $ 24,337     $ 12,526  
                         

61


Table of Contents

The following table presents an analysis of remaining contractual maturities and weighted average yields for available-for-sale investment securities. Yields on tax-exempt obligations have been computed on a tax-equivalent basis as discussed earlier.
 
                                         
    2010  
          Due after 1
    Due after 5
             
    Due in 1
    through
    through
    Due after
       
December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   year or less     5 years     10 years     10 years     Total  
 
State and municipal obligations(a)
  $ 3     $ 71     $ 257     $ 5,466     $ 5,797  
U.S. Government agency obligations
    2,953       458             2       3,413  
U.S. Government treasury obligations
    2,427       4       7       18       2,456  
Corporate debt securities
    815       590       40             1,445  
Mortgage-backed securities(a)
                3       273       276  
Foreign government bonds and obligations
    55       11             33       99  
                                         
Total fair value(b)
  $ 6,253     $ 1,134     $ 307     $ 5,792     $ 13,486  
                                         
Weighted average yield(c)
    0.7 %     2.4 %     7.2 %     6.4 %     3.5 %
 
 
(a) The expected payments on state and municipal obligations and mortgage-backed securities may not coincide with their contractual maturities because the issuers have the right to call or prepay certain obligations.
 
(b) Excludes equity securities and other securities included in the prior table above as these are not debt securities with contractual maturities.
 
(c) Average yields for available-for-sale investment securities have been calculated using the effective yield on the date of purchase.
 
As of December 31, 2010, U.S. Government treasury and agency obligations were the only investments that exceeded 10 percent of shareholders’ equity.
 
LOANS AND CARDMEMBER RECEIVABLES PORTFOLIOS
 
The following table presents gross loans, net of unearned income, and gross cardmember receivables by customer type segregated between U.S. and non-U.S., based on the domicile of the borrowers. Allowance for losses is presented beginning on page 67. Refer to Note 4 “Accounts Receivable and Loans” on page 78 and Note 5 “Reserves for Losses” on page 81 in the Annual Report for additional information.
 
                                         
December 31, (Millions)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Loans
                                       
U.S. loans
                                       
Cardmember(a)
  $ 51,565     $ 23,507     $ 32,684     $ 43,253     $ 33,543  
Other(b)
    44       46       144       91       132  
Non-U.S. loans
                                       
Cardmember(a)
    9,285       9,265       9,527       11,155       9,685  
Other(b)
    392       487       913       716       885  
                                         
Total loans
  $ 61,286     $ 33,305     $ 43,268     $ 55,215     $ 44,245  
                                         
Cardmember receivables
                                       
U.S. cardmember receivables
                                       
Consumer(c)
  $ 19,155     $ 17,750     $ 17,822     $ 21,418     $ 20,586  
Commercial(d)
    6,439       5,587       5,269       6,261       5,897  
Non-U.S. cardmember receivables
                                       
Consumer(c)
    6,852       6,149       5,769       7,243       6,484  
Commercial(d)
    4,820       4,257       4,128       5,150       4,400  
                                         
Total cardmember receivables
  $ 37,266     $ 33,743     $ 32,988     $ 40,072     $ 37,367  
                                         
 
 
(a) Represents loans to individual and small business consumers.
 
(b) Other loans at December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 primarily represent small business installment loans, a store card portfolio whose billed business is not processed on the Company’s network, and small business loans associated with the acquisition of Corporate Payment Services. Other loans at December 31, 2008,


62


Table of Contents

also included a loan to an affiliate in discontinued operations. 2007 and prior periods primarily represent small business installment loans.
 
(c) Represents receivables from individual and small business charge card consumers.
 
(d) Represents receivables from corporate charge card clients.
 
MATURITIES AND SENSITIVITIES TO CHANGES IN INTEREST RATES
 
The following table presents contractual maturities of loans and cardmember receivables by customer type and segregated between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers, and distribution between fixed and floating interest rates for loans due after one year based upon the stated terms of the loan agreements.
 
                                 
    2010  
    Within
    1-5
    After
       
December 31, (Millions)   1 year(a)(b)     years(b)(c)     5 years(c)     Total  
 
Loans
                               
U.S. loans
                               
Cardmember
  $ 51,410     $ 155     $     $ 51,565  
Other
    9       15       20       44  
Non-U.S. loans
                               
Cardmember
    9,274       3       8       9,285  
Other
    389       3             392  
                                 
Total loans
  $ 61,082     $ 176     $ 28     $ 61,286  
                                 
Loans due after one year at fixed interest rates
            176       28       204  
Loans due after one year at variable interest rates
                         
                                 
Total loans
          $ 176     $ 28     $ 204  
                                 
Cardmember receivables
                               
U.S. cardmember receivables
                               
Consumer
  $ 19,131     $ 24           $ 19,155  
Commercial
    6,439                   6,439  
Non-U.S. cardmember Receivables
                               
Consumer
    6,852                   6,852  
Commercial
    4,820                   4,820  
                                 
Total cardmember receivables
  $ 37,242     $ 24     $     $ 37,266  
                                 
 
 
(a) Cardmember loans have no stated maturity and are therefore included in the due within one year category. However, many of the Company’s cardmembers will revolve their balances, which may extend their repayment period beyond one year for balances due at December 31, 2010.
 
(b) Cardmember receivables are immediately due upon receipt of cardmember statements and have no stated interest rate and are included within the due within one year category. Receivables due after one year represent long-term modification programs or Troubled Debt Restructurings (TDRs), wherein the terms of a receivable have been modified for cardmembers that are experiencing financial difficulties and a long-term concession (more than 12 months) has been granted to the borrower.
 
(c) Cardmember and other loans due after one year primarily represent installment loans and approximately $166 million of TDRs.


63


Table of Contents

 
CARDMEMBER LOAN AND CARDMEMBER RECEIVABLE CONCENTRATIONS
 
The following table presents the Company’s exposure to any concentration of gross cardmember loans and cardmember receivables which exceeds 10 percent of total cardmember loans and cardmember receivables. Cardmember loan and cardmember receivable concentrations are defined as cardmember loans and cardmember receivables due from multiple borrowers engaged in similar activities that would cause these borrowers to be impacted similarly to certain economic or other related conditions.
 
         
December 31, (Millions)   2010(a)  
 
Individuals
  $ 86,857  
Commercial(b)
  $ 11,259  
         
Total on-balance sheet
  $ 98,116  
         
Unused lines of credit-individuals(c)
  $ 225,830  
         
 
 
(a) Refer to Note 22 “Significant Credit Concentrations” on page 110 in the Annual Report for additional information on concentrations, including exposure to the airline industry, and for a discussion of how the Company manages concentration exposures. Certain distinctions between categories require management judgment.
 
(b) Includes corporate charge card receivables of $641 million from financial institutions, $21 million from U.S. Government agencies and $10.6 billion from other corporate institutions.
 
(c) Because charge card products have no preset spending limit, the associated credit limit on cardmember receivables is not quantifiable. Therefore, the quantified unused line-of-credit amounts only include the approximate credit line available on cardmember loans (including both for on-balance sheet loans and loans previously securitized).
 
RISK ELEMENTS
 
The following table presents the amounts of non-performing loans and cardmember receivables that are either non-accrual, past due, or restructured, segregated between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers. Past due loans are loans that are contractually past due 90 days or more as to principal or interest payments. Restructured loans and cardmember receivables are those that meet the definition of “Troubled Debt Restructurings”.
 
                                         
December 31, (Millions)   2010(a)     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Loans
                                       
Non-accrual loans(b)
                                       
U.S.(c)
  $ 628     $ 480     $ 8     $ 8     $ 112  
Non-U.S. 
    12       14       6       5       5  
                                         
Total non-accrual loans
    640       494       14       13       117  
                                         
Loans contractually 90 days past-due and still accruing interest
                                       
U.S.(d)
    90       102       692       558       277  
Non-U.S. 
    99       151       166       149       133  
                                         
Total loans contractually 90 days past-due and still accruing interest
    189       253       858       707       410  
                                         
Restructured loans(d)(e)
                                       
U.S. 
    1,076       706       403       47       73  
Non-U.S. 
    11       15       24       41       66  
                                         
Total restructured loans
    1,087       721       427       88       139  
                                         
Total non-performing loans
  $ 1,916     $ 1,468     $ 1,299     $ 808     $ 666  
                                         
Cardmember receivables
                                       
Restructured cardmember receivables(d)(e)
                                       
U.S. 
    114       94       141       4        
                                         
Total restructured cardmember receivables
  $ 114     $ 94     $ 141     $ 4     $  
                                         
 
 
(a) The increase in impaired loans was due to the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, which resulted in the consolidation of the Lending Trust as discussed further in Note 1 “Summary of Significant


64


Table of Contents

Accounting Policies” on page 72 of the Annual Report. As a result of these changes, amounts as of December 31, 2010 include impaired loans and receivables for both the Charge Trust and Lending Trust; correspondingly, amounts as of December 31, 2009 only include impaired loans and receivables for the Charge Trust and the seller’s interest portion of the Lending Trust. Amounts as of both balance sheet dates also include impaired loans and receivables associated with other non-securitized portfolios.
 
(b) The Company’s policy is generally to cease accruing interest income once a related cardmember loan is 180 days past due at which time the cardmember loan is written off. The Company establishes loan loss reserves for estimated uncollectible interest receivable balances prior to write-off. Beginning with 2009, certain cardmember loans placed with outside collection agencies are put on non-accrual status.
 
(c) As of December 31, 2009, these amounts primarily include certain cardmember loans placed with outside collection agencies. Non-accrual loans at December 31, 2006 and 2005 included a single loan to a U.S. commercial airline of approximately $104 million and $266 million, respectively, which was paid off in full during the second quarter of 2007. The loan was put on non-accrual status in the third quarter of 2005.
 
(d) Represents long-term and short-term modification programs or TDRs, wherein the terms of a loan or receivable have been modified for cardmembers that are experiencing financial difficulties and a concession has been granted to the borrower. The Company may modify cardmember loans and receivables and such modifications may include reducing the interest rate/delinquency fees on the loans and receivables and/or placing the cardmember on a fixed payment plan not exceeding 60 months. If the cardmember does not comply with the modified terms, then the loan or receivable agreement reverts back to its original terms.
 
(e) Certain reclassifications of prior year amounts have been made to conform to the current presentation.
 
IMPACT OF NON-PERFORMING LOANS ON INTEREST INCOME
 
The following table presents the gross interest income for both non-accrual and restructured loans for 2010 that would have been recognized if such loans had been current in accordance with their original contractual terms, and had been outstanding throughout the period or since origination if held for only part of 2010. The table also presents the interest income related to these loans that was actually recognized for the period. These amounts are segregated between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers.
 
                         
    2010  
Year Ended December 31, (Millions)   U.S.     Non-U.S.     Total  
 
Gross amount of interest income that would have been recorded in accordance with the original contractual terms(a)
  $ 143     $ 3     $ 146  
Interest income actually recognized
    16       1       17  
                         
Total interest revenue foregone
  $ 127     $ 2     $ 129  
                         
 
 
(a) Based on the contractual rate that was being charged at the time the loan was restructured or placed on non-accrual status.
 
POTENTIAL PROBLEM RECEIVABLES
 
This disclosure presents outstanding amounts as well as specific reserves for certain receivables where information about possible credit problems of borrowers causes management to have serious doubts as to the ability of such borrowers to comply with the present repayment terms. At December 31, 2010, the Company did not identify any potential problem loans or receivables within the cardmember loans and receivables portfolio that were not already included in “Risk Elements” above.
 
CROSS-BORDER OUTSTANDINGS
 
Cross-border disclosure is based upon the Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council’s (“FFIEC”) guidelines governing the determination of cross-border risk. The Company has adopted the FFIEC guidelines for its cross-border disclosure starting with 2009 reporting.


65


Table of Contents

The primary differences between the FFIEC and Guide 3 guidelines for reporting cross-border exposure are: i) available-for-sale investment securities are reported based on amortized cost for FFIEC instead of fair value for Guide 3; ii) net local country claims are reduced by local country liabilities (regardless of currency denomination) excluding any debt that is funding the local assets through a foreign domiciled subsidiary for FFIEC compared to Guide 3 where only amounts in the same currencies are offset and such debt noted above is a reduction to local country claims; iii) the FFIEC methodology includes mark-to-market exposures of derivative assets which are excluded under Guide 3; and iv) investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries are included under FFIEC but excluded under Guide 3.
 
The following table presents the aggregate amount of cross-border outstandings from borrowers or counterparties for each foreign country that exceeds 1 percent of consolidated total assets for any of the periods reported below. Cross-border outstandings include loans, receivables, interest-bearing deposits with other banks, other interest-bearing investments and other monetary assets that are denominated in either dollars or other non-local currency.
 
The table separately presents the amounts of cross-border outstandings by type of borrower including governments and official institutions, banks and other financial institutions and other, along with an analysis of local country assets net of local country liabilities.
 
                                                                 
          Governments
    Banks and
          Net local
    Total
             
          and official
    other financial
          country
    cross-border
    Cross-border
    Total
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions)         institutions     institutions     Other     claims     outstandings     commitments(b)     exposure  
 
Australia
    2010     $     $ 37     $ 1     $ 4,225     $ 4,263           $ 4,263  
      2009             1,026       1       3,869       4,896             4,896  
      2008             278       5       3,686       3,969             3,969  
 
 
United Kingdom
    2010     $ 2     $ 1,582     $ 345     $ 800     $ 2,729           $ 2,729  
      2009             959       314       1,264       2,537             2,537  
      2008             844       379       2,286       3,509             3,509  
 
 
Canada
    2010     $     $ 258     $ 3     $ 2,212     $ 2,473           $ 2,473  
      2009       4       25       3       1,667       1,699             1,699  
      2008       5       782       3       1,451       2,241             2,241  
 
 
France
    2010     $     $ 45     $ 8     $ 824     $ 877           $ 877  
      2009             1,136       7       876       2,019             2,019  
      2008             1,213       9       800       2,022             2,022  
 
 
Netherlands
    2010     $     $ 7     $ 221     $     $ 228           $ 228  
      2009             35       188             223             223  
      2008             886       223       183       1,292             1,292  
 
 
Other countries(a)
    2010     $ 1     $ 501     $ 283     $ 2,389     $ 3,174           $ 3,174  
      2009       1       5       223       2,156       2,385             2,385  
      2008             1,003       227       1,984       3,214             3,214  
 
 
 
 
(a) In 2010, only Mexico cross-border outstandings are between 0.75 percent and 1.0 percent of consolidated total assets. Italy and Sweden were also included within 2009 or 2008 as they exceeded the threshold, to be consistent with prior year presentation.
 
(b) Generally, all charge and credit cards have revocable lines of credit, and therefore, are not disclosed as cross-border commitments. Refer to loan concentrations on page 64 for amount of unused lines of credit.


66


Table of Contents

 
SUMMARY OF LOAN LOSS EXPERIENCE
 
ANALYSIS OF THE ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES
 
The following table summarizes the changes to the Company’s allowance for cardmember loan losses. The table segregates such changes between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers.
 
                                         
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Cardmember loans
                                       
Allowance for loan losses at beginning of year — U.S. loans
  $ 2,541     $ 2,164     $ 1,457     $ 836     $ 727  
Reserves established for consolidation of a variable interest entities
    2,531                          
                                         
U.S. loans — adjusted balance
    5,072       2,164       1,457       836       727  
Non-U.S. loans
    727       406       374       335       269  
                                         
Total allowance for losses — beginning of year
    5,799       2,570       1,831       1,171       996  
                                         
Cardmember lending provisions(a)
                                       
U.S. loans
    1,291       3,276       3,490       2,179       993  
Non-U.S. loans
    236       990       741       582       630  
                                         
Total cardmember lending provisions
    1,527       4,266       4,231       2,761       1,623  
                                         
Write-offs
                                       
U.S. loans
    (3,614 )     (2,914 )     (2,816 )     (1,630 )     (946 )
Non-U.S. loans
    (573 )     (810 )     (708 )     (655 )     (600 )
                                         
Total write-offs
    (4,187 )     (3,724 )     (3,524 )     (2,285 )     (1,546 )
                                         
Recoveries
                                       
U.S. loans
    468       230       207       198       108  
Non-U.S. loans
    100       97       94       97       79  
                                         
Total recoveries
    568       327       301       295       187  
                                         
Net write-offs(b)(c)
    (3,619 )     (3,397 )     (3,223 )     (1,990 )     (1,359 )
                                         
Other(d)
                                       
U.S. loans
    (64 )     (215 )     (174 )     (126 )     (46 )
Non-U.S. loans
    3       44       (95 )     15       (43 )
                                         
Total other
    (61 )     (171 )     (269 )     (111 )     (89 )
                                         
Allowance for loan losses at end of year
                                       
U.S. loans
    3,153       2,541       2,164       1,457       836  
Non-U.S. loans
    493       727       406       374       335  
                                         
Total allowance for losses
    3,646     $ 3,268     $ 2,570     $ 1,831     $ 1,171  
                                         
Net write-offs / average cardmember loans outstanding(b)(c)(e)
    5.6 %     8.5 %     5.5 %     3.5 %     3.3 %
 
 
(a) Refer to Note 5 “Reserves for Losses” on page 81 in the Annual Report for a discussion of management’s process for evaluating allowance for loan losses.
 
(b) In the third quarter of 2008, the Company revised its method of reporting the cardmember lending net write-off rate. Historically, the net write-off rate has been presented using net write-off amounts for principal, interest, and fees. However, industry convention is generally to include only the net write-offs related to principal in write-off rate disclosures. The write-off rate for 2010, 2009, 2008 and 2007 is a principal only write-off rate consistent with industry convention. The write-off rate for 2006 reflects principal only write-offs in the U.S. and total write-offs (principal, interest, and fees) outside the U.S. as principal only write-off information was not available outside the U.S. for 2006.
 
(c) For purposes of calculating the net write-off rate in accordance with (b) above, net write-offs were $3.3 billion, $2.9 billion, $2.6 billion, $1.6 billion, $1.2 billion for 2010-2006, respectively.
 
(d) Includes $160 million of reserves in 2009, that were removed in connection with securitizations during the year. The offset is in the allocated cost of the associated retained subordinated securities. This amount also includes foreign currency translation adjustments. The prior years included foreign currency translation and other adjustments primarily related to the reclassification of waived fee reserves to a contra-cardmember loan.
 
(e) Average cardmember loans are based on month end balances.


67


Table of Contents

 
The following table summarizes the changes to the Company’s allowance for other loan losses. The table segregates such changes between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers.
 
                                         
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Other loans
                                       
Allowance for loan losses at beginning of year
                                       
U.S. loans
  $ 2     $ 15     $ 12     $ 16     $ 19  
Non-U.S. loans
    25       24       33       24       19  
                                         
Total allowance for losses
    27       39       45       40       38  
                                         
Provisions for other loan losses(a)
                                       
U.S. loans
    3       5       10       4       1  
Non-U.S. loans
    22       45       53       41       21  
                                         
Total provisions for other loan losses
    25       50       63       45       22  
                                         
Write-offs
                                       
U.S. loans
    (4 )     (19 )     (8 )     (9 )     (6 )
Non-U.S. loans
    (34 )     (50 )     (72 )     (36 )     (19 )
                                         
Total write-offs
    (38 )     (69 )     (80 )     (45 )     (25 )
                                         
Recoveries
                                       
U.S. loans
    1       1       1       1       2  
Non-U.S. loans
    8       10       7       6       4  
                                         
Total recoveries
    9       11       8       7       6  
                                         
Net write-offs
    (29 )     (58 )     (72 )     (38 )     (19 )
                                         
Other(b)
                                       
U.S. loans
                             
Non-U.S. loans
    1       (4 )     3       (2 )     (1 )
                                         
Total other
    1       (4 )     3       (2 )     (1 )
                                         
Allowance for loan losses at end of year
                                       
U.S. loans
    2       2       15       12       16  
Non-U.S. loans
    22       25       24       33       24  
                                         
Total allowance for losses
  $ 24     $ 27     $ 39     $ 45     $ 40  
                                         
Net write-offs/average other loans outstanding(c)
    6.5 %     8.7 %     8.8 %     4.0 %     1.2 %
 
 
(a) Provisions for other loan losses are determined based on a specific identification methodology and models that analyze specific portfolio statistics.
 
(b) Includes primarily foreign currency translation adjustments.
 
(c) The net write-off rate presented is on a worldwide basis and is based on write-offs of principal and fees. Average other loans are based on month end balances.


68


Table of Contents

 
The following table summarizes the changes to the Company’s allowance for losses on cardmember receivables. The table segregates such changes between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers.
 
                                         
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Cardmember receivables
                                       
Allowance for losses at beginning of year
                                       
U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
  $ 256     $ 474     $ 844     $ 666     $ 659  
Commercial
    93       113       104       99       96  
                                         
Total U.S. receivables
    349       587       948       765       755  
Non-U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    148       173       167       188       166  
Commercial
    49       50       34       28       21  
                                         
Total non-U.S. receivables
    197       223       201       216       187  
                                         
Total allowance for losses
    546       810       1,149       981       942  
                                         
Provisions for losses(a)
                                       
U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    296       492       899       824       567  
Commercial
    105       106       130       96       68  
                                         
Total U.S. provisions
    401       598       1,029       920       635  
Non-U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    148       196       255       170       264  
Commercial
    46       63       79       50       36  
                                         
Total non-U.S. provisions
    194       259       334       220       300  
                                         
Total provisions for losses
    595       857       1,363       1,140       935  
                                         
Write-offs
                                       
U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    (528 )     (984 )     (1,326 )     (748 )     (671 )
Commercial
    (128 )     (154 )     (142 )     (111 )     (84 )
                                         
Total U.S. write-offs
    (656 )     (1,138 )     (1,468 )     (859 )     (755 )
Non-U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    (222 )     (261 )     (214 )     (208 )     (193 )
Commercial
    (77 )     (81 )     (57 )     (43 )     (39 )
                                         
Total non-U.S. write-offs
    (299 )     (342 )     (271 )     (251 )     (232 )
                                         
Total write-offs
    (955 )     (1,480 )     (1,739 )     (1,110 )     (987 )
                                         
 


69


Table of Contents

                                         
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Cardmember receivables
                                       
Recoveries
                                       
U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
  $ 227     $ 268     $ 115     $ 139     $ 121  
Commercial
    50       29       27       22       20  
                                         
Total U.S. recoveries
    277       297       142       161       141  
Non-U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    55       37       34       32       27  
Commercial
    25       15       11       10       9  
                                         
Total non-U.S. recoveries
    80       52       45       42       36  
                                         
Total recoveries
    357       349       187       203       177  
                                         
Net write-offs(b)
    (598 )     (1,131 )     (1,552 )     (907 )     (810 )
                                         
Other(c)
                                       
U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    (58 )     6       (58 )     (37 )     (10 )
Commercial
    (41 )     (1 )     (6 )     (2 )     (1 )
                                         
Total U.S. other
    (99 )     5       (64 )     (39 )     (11 )
Non-U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    (45 )     3       (69 )     (15 )     (76 )
Commercial
    (13 )     2       (17 )     (11 )     1  
                                         
Total non-U.S. other
    (58 )     5       (86 )     (26 )     (75 )
                                         
Total other
    (157 )     10       (150 )     (65 )     (86 )
                                         
Allowance for losses at end of year
                                       
U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    193       256       474       844       666  
Commercial
    79       93       113       104       99  
                                         
Total U.S. receivables
    272       349       587       948       765  
Non-U.S. receivables
                                       
Consumer
    84       148       173       167       188  
Commercial
    30       49       50       34       28  
                                         
Total non-U.S. receivables
    114       197       223       201       216  
                                         
Total allowance for losses
  $ 386     $ 546     $ 810     $ 1,149     $ 981  
                                         
Net write-offs / average cardmember receivables outstanding(d)
    1.7 %     3.6 %     4.1 %     2.4 %     2.4 %
Net loss ratio as a percentage of charge volume(e)
                            0.24 %     0.24 %
 
 
(a) Refer to Note 5 “Reserves for Losses” on page 81 in the Annual Report for a discussion of management’s process for evaluating allowance for receivable losses.
 
(b) In the fourth quarter of 2008, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in U.S. Card Services are written off to 180 days past due, consistent with applicable regulatory guidance. Previously, receivables were written off when 360 days past billing. The net write-offs for 2008 include approximately $341 million resulting from this write-off methodology change.
 
(c) Includes foreign currency translation and other adjustments primarily related to the reclassification of waived fee reserves to a contra-cardmember receivable.
 
(d) The net write-off rate presented is on a worldwide basis and is based on write-offs of principal and fees. The U.S. Card Services write-off rate was 1.6 percent, for 2010. Averages are based on month end balances.
 
(e) The net loss ratio represents the worldwide ratio of charge card write-offs consisting of principal (resulting from authorized and unauthorized transactions) and fee components, less recoveries, on cardmember receivables expressed as a percent of gross amounts billed to customers. As a result of the change discussed in (b) above, the Company stopped calculating the worldwide net loss ratio beginning in 2008 based on 360 days past billing methodology.

70


Table of Contents

ALLOCATION OF ALLOWANCE FOR LOSSES
 
The following table presents an allocation of the allowance for losses for loans and cardmember receivables and the percent of loans and cardmember receivables in each category of total loans and cardmember receivables, respectively, by customer type. The table segregates loans and cardmember receivables and related allowances for losses between U.S. and non-U.S. borrowers.
 
                                                                                 
December 31,
                             
(Millions, except percentages)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
          Percent of
          Percent of
          Percent of
          Percent of
          Percent of
 
          loans/
          loans/
          loans/
          loans/
          loans/
 
          receivables
          receivables
          receivables
          receivables
          receivables
 
          in each
          in each
          in each
          in each
          in each
 
          category
          category
          category
          category
          category
 
Allowance for
        to total
          to total
          to total
          to total
          to total
 
losses at end of year
        loans/
          loans/
          loans/
          loans/
          loans/
 
applicable to   Amount     receivables     Amount     receivables     Amount     receivables     Amount     receivables     Amount     receivables  
 
Loans
                                                                               
U.S. loans
                                                                               
Cardmember
  $ 3,153       84 %   $ 2,541       71 %   $ 2,164       76 %   $ 1,457       79 %   $ 836       76 %
Other
    2             2             15       1       12             16        
Non-U.S. loans
                                                                               
Cardmember
    493       15       727       28       406       22       374       20       335       22  
Other
    22       1       25       1       24       1       33       1       24       2  
                                                                                 
    $ 3,670       100 %   $ 3,295       100 %   $ 2,609       100 %   $ 1,876       100 %   $ 1,211       100 %
                                                                                 
Cardmember receivables
                                                                               
U.S. cardmember receivables
                                                                               
Consumer
  $ 193       52 %   $ 256       53 %   $ 474       54 %   $ 844       53 %   $ 666       55 %
Commercial
    79       17       93       17       113       16       104       16       99       16  
Non-U.S. cardmember receivables
                                                                               
Consumer
    84       18       148       18       173       17       167       18       188       17  
Commercial
    30       13       49       12       50       13       34       13       28       12  
                                                                                 
    $ 386       100 %   $ 546       100 %   $ 810       100 %   $ 1,149       100 %   $ 981       100 %
                                                                                 
 
CUSTOMER DEPOSITS
 
The following table presents the average balances and average interest rates paid for types of customer deposits segregated between U.S. and non-U.S. offices. Refer to Note 9 “Customer Deposits” on page 89 in the Annual Report for additional information.
 
                                                 
    2010     2009     2008  
    Average
    Average
    Average
    Average
    Average
    Average
 
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   Balance(a)     Rate     Balance(a)     Rate     Balance(a)     Rate  
 
U.S. customer deposits
                                               
Savings
  $ 12,657       1.1 %   $ 7,977       0.8 %   $ 3,215       2.5 %
Time
    14,462       2.7       11,412       2.9       8,737       3.3  
Other(b)
    254       0.6       249       0.5       178        
                                                 
Total U.S. customer deposits
    27,373       1.9       19,638       2.0       12,130       3.0  
Non-U.S. customer deposits(c)
                                               
Other foreign time & savings
    502       4.5       612       4.8       1,205       6.0  
Other foreign demand
    191       1.0       186       1.3       227       6.6  
                                                 
Total Non-U.S. customer deposits
    693       3.5       798       4.0       1,432       6.1  
                                                 
Total customer deposits
  $ 28,066       1.9 %   $ 20,436       2.1 %   $ 13,562       3.3 %
                                                 
 
 
(a) Averages are based on month end balances.
 
(b) Other U.S. customer deposits include primarily non-interest-bearing and interest-bearing demand deposits.
 
(c) Prior year numbers have been revised to conform to current year presentation.


71


Table of Contents

 
TIME CERTIFICATES OF DEPOSIT OF $100,000 OR MORE
 
The following table presents the amount of time certificates of deposit of $100,000 or more issued by the Company in its U.S. offices, further segregated by time remaining until maturity.
 
                                         
    By remaining maturity as of December 31, 2010  
          Over 3 months
    Over 6 months
             
    3 months
    but within
    but within
    Over
       
(Millions)   or less     6 months     12 months     12 months     Total  
 
U.S. time certificates of deposits ($100,000 or more)
  $ 105     $ 107     $ 197     $ 280     $ 689  
 
As of December 31, 2010, time certificates of deposit and other time deposits in amounts of $100,000 or more issued by non-U.S. offices was $291 million.
 
RETURN ON EQUITY AND ASSETS
 
The following table presents the Company’s return on average total assets, return on average shareholders’ equity, dividend payout ratio, and average shareholders’ equity to average total assets ratio.
 
                         
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions, except percentages and per share amounts)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130     $ 2,699  
Net income per share — basic(a)
  $ 3.37     $ 1.54     $ 2.33  
Dividends declared per share
  $ 0.72     $ 0.72     $ 0.72  
Return on average total assets(b)
    2.8 %     1.8 %     2.0 %
Return on average shareholders’ equity(c)
    27.5 %     14.6 %     22.3 %
Dividend payout ratio(d)
    21.4 %     46.8 %     30.9 %
Average shareholders’ equity to average total assets ratio
    10.2 %     12.0 %     9.1 %
 
 
(a) Effective January 1, 2009, guidance for determining whether instruments granted in share-based payment transactions are participating securities requires that restricted stock awards be included in the computation of basic and diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) pursuant to the two-class method. Accordingly, the Company has retrospectively adjusted EPS for 2008.
 
(b) Based on the year’s net income as a percentage of average total assets calculated using month end average balances.
 
(c) Based on the year’s net income as a percentage of average shareholders’ equity calculated using month end average balances.
 
(d) Calculated on the year’s dividends declared per share as a percentage of the year’s net income per basic share.


72


Table of Contents

 
SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS
 
The following table presents amounts and weighted average rates for categories of short-term borrowings. Refer to Note 10, “Debt” on page 89 in the Annual Report for additional information.
 
                         
Years Ended December 31, (Millions, except percentages)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Commercial paper
                       
Balance at the end of the year
  $ 645     $ 975     $ 7,272  
Monthly average balance outstanding during the year
  $ 900     $ 1,990     $ 10,638  
Maximum month-end balance during the year
  $ 1,398     $ 5,201     $ 14,634  
Stated rate at December 31(a)
    0.16 %     0.19 %     2.20 %
Weighted average rate during the year
    0.22 %     1.50 %     2.90 %
Federal funds purchased and securities sold under repurchase agreements(b)
                       
Balance at the end of the year
  $     $     $ 470  
Monthly average balance outstanding during the year
  $     $ 48     $ 1,493  
Maximum month-end balance during the year
  $     $ 86     $ 2,972  
Stated rate at December 31(a)
    %     %     1.30 %
Weighted average rate during the year
    %     0.76 %     3.58 %
Other short-term borrowings
                       
Balance at the end of the year
  $ 2,769     $ 1,369     $ 1,251  
Monthly average balance outstanding during the year
  $ 1,231     $ 956     $ 2,794  
Maximum month-end balance during the year
  $ 2,769     $ 1,369     $ 4,244  
Stated rate at December 31(a)
    1.23 %     0.85 %     1.90 %
Weighted average rate during the year (c)
    0.19 %     0.70 %     4.33 %
 
 
(a) For floating rate debt issuances, the stated interest rates are based on the floating rates in effect as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
(b) Includes term federal funds purchased and overnight federal funds purchased.
 
(c) Does not include non-interest-bearing short-term borrowings (i.e. book overdrafts).
 
Short-term borrowings, including commercial paper and federal funds purchased, are defined as any debt instrument with an original maturity of 12 months or less. Federal funds purchased represent overnight and term funds as well as Federal Home Loan Bank advances. Commercial paper generally is issued in amounts not less than $100,000 and with maturities of 270 days or less. Other short-term borrowings include certain book overdrafts (i.e., primarily timing differences arising in the ordinary course of business), short-term borrowings from banks, as well as interest-bearing amounts due to merchants in accordance with merchant service agreements.
 
ITEM 1A.   RISK FACTORS
 
This section highlights specific risks that could affect our Company and its businesses. You should carefully consider each of the following risks and all of the other information set forth in this Annual Report on Form 10-K. Based on the information currently known to us, we believe the following information identifies the most significant risk factors affecting our Company. However, the risks and uncertainties our Company faces are not limited to those described below. Additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us or that we currently believe to be immaterial may also adversely affect our business.
 
If any of the following risks and uncertainties develops into actual events or if the circumstances described in the risks and uncertainties occur or continue to occur, these events or circumstances could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations. These events could also have a negative effect on the trading price of our securities.
 
Current Economic and Political Risks
 
Difficult conditions in the global capital markets and economy generally, as well as political conditions in the United States and elsewhere, may materially adversely affect our business and results of operations.
 
Our results of operations are materially affected by conditions in the global capital markets and the economy generally, both in the United States and elsewhere around the world.


73


Table of Contents

Ongoing concerns over the availability and cost of credit, the mortgage and real estate markets, sovereign debt crises, fear of a double-dip recession and geopolitical issues have contributed to uncertain expectations for the economy and the markets going forward. These factors, combined with still relatively low levels of consumer confidence and relatively high levels of unemployment, continue to impact global economies. This environment has had, and may continue to have, an adverse effect on us, in part because we are very dependent upon consumer and business behavior. If the economy were to worsen, customer behaviors could change further. For example, Cardmembers could decide to redeem Membership Rewards points at abnormally high levels to replace cash expenditures.
 
Factors such as consumer spending, business investment, government spending, interest rates, the volatility and strength of the capital markets and inflation all affect the business and economic environment and, ultimately, our profitability. An economic downturn characterized by higher unemployment, lower family income, lower corporate earnings, lower business investment and lower consumer spending is likely to materially and adversely affect our business, results of operations and financial condition. Furthermore, the factors discussed above may cause our earnings, credit metrics and margins to fluctuate and diverge from expectations of analysts and investors, who may have differing assumptions regarding their impact on our business, and may impact the trading price of our common shares.
 
Political or economic instability in certain regions or countries could also affect our commercial or other lending activities, among other businesses, or result in restrictions on convertibility of certain currencies. In addition, our travel network may be adversely affected by world geopolitical and other conditions. Travel expenditures are sensitive to business and personal discretionary spending levels and tend to decline during general economic downturns.
 
Terrorist attacks, intrusion into our infrastructure by “hackers” or other catastrophic events may have a negative effect on our business. Because of our proximity to the World Trade Center, our headquarters were damaged as a result of the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001. Similar events or other disasters or catastrophic events in the future could have a negative effect on our businesses and infrastructure, including our information technology systems. Because we derive a portion of our revenues from travel-related spending, our business will be sensitive to safety concerns, and thus is likely to decline during periods in which travelers become concerned about safety issues or when travel might involve health-related risks.
 
We held approximately $5.8 billion of investment securities of state and municipal obligations as of December 31, 2010. In the event that actual default rates of these investment securities were to significantly change from historical patterns due to challenges in the economy or otherwise, it could have a material adverse impact on the value of our investment portfolio.
 
If the conditions described above (or similar ones) were to persist or worsen, we could experience continuing or increased adverse effects on our results of operations and financial condition.
 
Adverse capital and credit market conditions may significantly affect our ability to meet liquidity needs, access to capital and cost of capital.
 
The global money and capital markets, while demonstrating generally improved conditions, remain susceptible to volatility and disruption, which could negatively impact market liquidity conditions.
 
We need liquidity to pay merchants, operating expenses, interest on debt and dividends on capital stock and to repay maturing liabilities. Without sufficient liquidity, we could be forced to limit our investments in growth opportunities or curtail operations. The principal sources of our liquidity are payments from Cardmembers and merchants, cash flow from our investment portfolio and assets, consisting mainly of cash or assets that are readily convertible into cash, direct and third-party distributed deposits, debt instruments such as unsecured medium- and long-term notes and asset securitizations, securitized borrowings through our conduit facility, the Federal Reserve discount window and long-term committed bank borrowing facilities in certain countries outside the United States.
 
Notwithstanding our solid financial position, we are not immune from pressures experienced broadly across the financial markets. The fragility of the credit markets and the current economic and regulatory


74


Table of Contents

environment have impacted financial services companies. Although the market for our unsecured term debt and asset securitizations has improved, there is no assurance that the markets will be open to us in the future. Therefore, our ability to obtain financing in the debt capital markets for unsecured term debt and asset securitizations is dependent on investor demand. In addition, our liquidity position will be impacted by our ability to meet our objectives with respect to the maintenance and growth of our direct and third-party distributed deposit programs. We also would have less flexibility in accessing the commercial paper market as a short-term funding vehicle in the event of a downgrade in Credco’s short-term debt rating and volatility in the commercial paper market generally.
 
In the event that current sources of liquidity, including internal sources, do not satisfy our needs, we would be required to seek additional financing. The availability of additional financing will depend on a variety of factors such as market conditions, the general availability of credit and consumer deposits, the overall availability of credit to the financial services industry, our credit ratings (which were downgraded in April 2009 by two of the major ratings agencies), and credit capacity, as well as the possibility that lenders or depositors could develop a negative perception of our long- or short-term financial prospects if we incur large credit losses or if the level of our business activity decreases due to an economic downturn.
 
Similarly, our access to funds may be impaired if regulatory authorities or rating agencies take negative actions against us. While we have experienced positive credit trends since the latter half of 2009, if the performance of our charge card and credit card portfolios were to weaken through increasing delinquencies and write-offs, our long-term and short-term debt ratings could be downgraded and our access to capital could be materially adversely affected and our cost of capital could increase. Disruptions, uncertainty or volatility in the capital and credit markets may also limit our access to capital required to operate our business. Such market conditions may limit our ability to replace, in a timely manner, maturing liabilities, satisfy regulatory capital requirements and access the capital necessary to grow our business. As such, we may be forced to delay raising capital or bear an unattractive cost to raise capital, which could decrease profitability and significantly reduce financial flexibility. If levels of market disruption and volatility worsen, there can be no assurance that we will not experience an adverse effect, which may be material, on our ability to access capital and on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
 
For a further discussion of our liquidity and funding needs, see “Financial Review — Funding Programs and Activities” on pages 42-46 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
We can be adversely affected by the impairment of other financial institutions.
 
Our ability to engage in routine funding transactions could be adversely affected by the actions and commercial soundness of other financial services institutions. Financial services institutions are interrelated as a result of trading, clearing, counterparty or other relationships. We routinely execute transactions with counterparties in the financial services industry, including commercial banks, investment banks and insurance companies. Defaults or non-performance by, or even rumors or questions about, one or more financial services institutions, or the financial services industry generally, have led to market-wide liquidity problems and could lead to losses or defaults by one or more of our counterparties, which, in turn, could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
 
Any reduction in the Company’s and its subsidiaries’ credit ratings could increase the cost of our funding from, and restrict our access to, the capital markets and have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
 
Although the Company’s and its subsidiaries’ long-term debt is currently rated investment grade by the major rating agencies, the ratings of that debt were downgraded during the second quarter of 2009 by Moody’s Investors Services (“Moody’s”) and Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”), two of the major rating agencies. The rating agencies regularly evaluate the Company and its subsidiaries, and their ratings of the Company’s and its subsidiaries’ long-term and short-term debt are based on a number of factors, including their financial strength as well as factors not entirely within their control, including conditions affecting the financial services industry


75


Table of Contents

generally, and the wider state of the economy. There can be no assurance that the Company and its subsidiaries will maintain their current respective ratings. Failure to maintain those ratings could, among other things, adversely limit our access to the capital markets and adversely affect the cost and other terms upon which the Company and its subsidiaries are able to obtain funding.
 
The ability of issuers of asset-backed securities to obtain necessary credit ratings for their issuances has historically been based, in part, on qualification under the FDIC’s safe harbor rule for assets transferred in securitizations. In 2009 and 2010, the FDIC issued a series of changes to its safe harbor rule, with its new final rule for its securitization safe harbor, issued in 2010, requiring issuers to comply with a new set of requirements in order to qualify for the safe harbor. Issuances out of our American Express Credit Account Master Trust are “grandfathered” under the new FDIC final rule. The trust for the Company’s Cardmember charge receivable securitization (the “Charge Trust”) does not satisfy the criteria required to be covered by the FDIC’s new safe harbor rule, nor did it meet the requirements to be covered by the safe harbor rule existing prior to 2009. It was structured and continues to be structured such that the financial assets transferred to the Charge Trust would not be deemed to be property of the originating banks in the event the FDIC is appointed as a receiver or conservator of the originating banks. The Company has received confirmation from Moody’s, S&P and Fitch Ratings, which rate issuances from the Charge Trust, that they will continue to rate issuances from the Charge Trust in the same manner as they have historically, even though they do not satisfy the requirements to be covered by the FDIC’s safe harbor rule. Nevertheless, one or more of the rating agencies may ultimately conclude that in the absence of compliance with the safe harbor rule, the highest rating a Charge Trust security could receive would be based on the originating bank’s unsecured debt rating. If one or more rating agencies come to this conclusion, it could adversely impact the Company’s capacity and cost of using its Charge Trust as a source of funding for its business.
 
We cannot predict what actions rating agencies may take. As with other companies in the financial services industry, the Company’s and its subsidiaries’ ratings could be downgraded at any time and without any notice by any of the rating agencies.
 
Adverse currency fluctuations and foreign exchange controls could decrease revenue we receive from our international operations.
 
During 2010, over 33% of our revenue net of interest expense was generated from activities outside the United States. We are exposed to foreign exchange risk from our international operations, and some of the revenue we generate outside the United States is subject to unpredictable and indeterminate fluctuations if the values of other currencies change relative to the U.S. dollar. Resulting exchange gains and losses are included in our net income. Furthermore, we may become subject to exchange control regulations that might restrict or prohibit the conversion of our other revenue currencies into U.S. dollars. The occurrence of any of these events or circumstances could decrease the revenues we receive from our international operations and have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.
 
Legal and Regulatory Risks
 
Ongoing legal proceedings regarding the Company’s “anti-steering” and surcharging-related contractual provisions could require changes to those provisions that could result in a material loss of revenue or increased expenses, substantial monetary judgments and/or damage to the Company’s global reputation and brand.
 
The DOJ and certain state attorneys general have recently brought an action against the Company alleging that the provisions in the Company’s card acceptance agreements with merchants that prohibit merchants from discriminating against the Company’s card products at the point of sale violate the U.S. antitrust laws. Visa and MasterCard are also defendants in this proceeding, but they have entered into a proposed settlement, which is subject to judicial review and approval following a comment period. In addition, the Company is a defendant in a number of actions, including proposed class actions, filed by merchants that challenge the Company’s “anti-steering” provisions as well as surcharging-related provisions. Visa and MasterCard have been named as defendants in lawsuits that include similar allegations relating to their “anti-steering” and/or


76


Table of Contents

surcharging-related policies and rules. A description of these legal proceedings is contained in “Legal Proceedings” below. An adverse outcome in any of these proceedings against the Company could materially and adversely impact the profitability of the Company, require it to change its merchant agreements in a way that could expose the Company’s card products to steering or other forms of discrimination at the point of sale that would impair our Cardmember’s experience, result in the imposition of substantial monetary damages and/or damage the Company’s global reputation and brand. Even if the Company were not required to change its merchant agreements, changes in Visa and MasterCard’s policies or practices as a result of any such legal proceedings or regulatory actions could subject the Company to market pressures that could materially and adversely impact its profitability.
 
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act may have a significant adverse impact on our business, results of operations and financial condition.
 
In July 2010, President Obama signed into law Dodd-Frank. Dodd-Frank, as well as regulations promulgated thereunder, could have a significant adverse impact on the Company’s business, results of operations and financial condition by, for example, requiring the Company to change its business practices, requiring the Company to comply with more stringent capital, liquidity and leverage ratio requirements, limiting the Company’s ability to pursue business opportunities, imposing additional costs on the Company (including increased compliance costs and increased costs of funding raised through the issuance of asset-backed securities), limiting the fees the Company can charge for services and impacting the value of the Company’s assets. A description of certain provisions of Dodd-Frank and other legislative and regulatory developments is contained in “Supervision and Regulation” above.
 
Dodd-Frank will result in increased scrutiny and oversight of consumer financial services and products, primarily through the establishment of the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau within the Federal Reserve. The Bureau will have broad rulemaking and enforcement authority over providers of credit, savings and payment services and products and authority to prevent “unfair, deceptive or abusive” practices. The Bureau will write regulations under federal consumer financial protection laws, and enforce those laws against and examine large financial institutions like us, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB for compliance. The Bureau will collect fines and provide consumer restitution in the event of violations, engage in consumer financial education, track consumer complaints, request data and promote the availability of financial services to underserved consumers and communities. Depending on how the Bureau functions and its areas of focus, it could have a material adverse impact on our businesses. In addition to increasing our compliance costs and potentially delaying our ability to respond to marketplace changes, this could result in requirements to alter our products and services that would make our products less attractive to consumers and impair our ability to offer them profitably. The impact this new regulatory regime will have on the Company’s business is uncertain at this time and will depend on, among other things, the timing of the Bureau’s assumption of its authority from other governmental agencies, which is expected to occur by July 21, 2011.
 
Under Dodd-Frank, the Federal Reserve is authorized to regulate interchange fees charged by payment card issuers for transactions in which a person uses a debit or general-use prepaid card, and to enforce a new statutory requirement that such fees be reasonable and proportional to the actual cost of a transaction to the issuer, with specific allowances for the costs of fraud prevention, as well as to prohibit exclusive network routing restrictions for electronic debit transactions. Additionally, Dodd-Frank prohibits payment card networks from restricting merchants from offering discounts or incentives to encourage customers to pay with particular forms of payment such as cash, check, credit or debit card, provided that such offers do not discriminate on the basis of the network or issuer. Further, to the extent required by federal law or applicable state law, the discount or incentive must be offered to all prospective buyers and must be clearly and conspicuously disclosed. Dodd-Frank also permits U.S. merchants to establish minimum purchase amounts of no more than $10 for credit card purchases, provided that the merchants do not discriminate between networks or issuers. Federal government agencies and institutions of higher learning also are permitted to establish maximum amounts for credit card purchases provided they do not discriminate between networks or issuers. For more information on this aspect of Dodd-Frank and its potential impact on our business, please see “Risk Factors- Banks, card issuers and card network operators generally are the subject of increasing global regulatory


77


Table of Contents

focus, which may impose costly new compliance burdens on our Company and lead to decreased transaction volumes and revenues through our network.
 
Dodd-Frank mandates the Federal Reserve to establish heightened capital, leverage and liquidity standards, risk management requirements, concentration limits on credit exposures, “living wills” and stress tests for, among others, bank holding companies that have greater than $50 billion in total consolidated assets, such as the Company. In addition, most interest rate and currency swaps will be required to be exchange-traded which may increase collateral posting requirements for the Company.
 
Pursuant to Dodd-Frank, the responsibility and authority of the OTS to supervise federal savings associations, including AEBFSB, will be transferred to the OCC on July 21, 2011 (unless extended for up to six months). AEBFSB will need to develop a relationship with its new regulator, and there could be additional compliance costs associated with aligning AEBFSB’s current compliance structure with the OCC’s expectations. Additionally, the transfer of responsibility from the OTS to the OCC could result in new regulatory standards as it is, at this time, unclear whether the OCC will adopt or modify OTS regulations, orders or policies, including interpretations or applications. Any shifts in current regulatory positions could adversely affect our results of operation.
 
Many provisions of Dodd-Frank, including numerous provisions not described above, require the adoption of rules to implement. In addition, Dodd-Frank mandates multiple studies, which could result in additional legislative or regulatory action. Therefore, the ultimate consequences of Dodd-Frank and its implementing regulations on the Company’s business, results of operations and financial condition remain uncertain.
 
The Credit Card Accountability Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 will significantly impact our business practices and could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.
 
The CARD Act required the Company to make fundamental changes to many of our business practices, including marketing, underwriting, pricing and billing. Among other things, the CARD Act prohibits an issuer from increasing the APR on outstanding balances (with limited exceptions), requires additional account disclosures, provides consumers with the right to opt out of significant changes to account terms, and restricts penalty fees and charges that may be imposed by an issuer. Most of the requirements of the CARD Act became effective in February 2010. Additional amendments to Regulation Z revising the open-end credit disclosure requirements became effective on July 1, 2010.
 
Since August 22, 2010, the CARD Act, among other things, requires that penalty fees be reasonable and proportional. Also, since August 22, 2010, the CARD Act requires issuers to periodically reevaluate APR increases to determine if a decrease is appropriate. The first of these reevaluations must be completed in February 2011. The obligation to periodically reevaluate APR increases is ongoing, and it is uncertain how these provisions will be interpreted or amended by the new Consumer Financial Protection Bureau. Therefore, while the ultimate impact of this requirement is uncertain at this time, it could have a significant impact on our results of operations.
 
While the Company has made certain changes to its product terms and practices that are designed to mitigate the impact of the changes required by the CARD Act, there is no assurance that it will be successful. The long-term impact of the CARD Act on the Company’s business practices and revenues will depend upon a number of factors, including its ability to successfully implement its business strategies, consumer behavior and the actions of the Company’s competitors, which are difficult to predict at this time. In the event the actions undertaken by the Company to date to offset the impact of the new legislation and regulations are not ultimately effective, they could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations, including its revenue and net income.


78


Table of Contents

Our business is subject to significant and extensive government regulation and supervision which could adversely affect our results of operations and financial condition.
 
On November 14, 2008, American Express Company and TRS each became bank holding companies under the BHC Act and elected to be treated as financial holding companies under the BHC Act. As a result of becoming a bank holding company, we are subject to regulation by the Federal Reserve, including, without limitation, consolidated capital regulation at the holding company level, maintenance of certain capital and management standards in connection with our two U.S. depository institutions and restrictions on our non-banking activities under the Federal Reserve’s regulations.
 
If we fail to satisfy regulatory requirements applicable to bank holding companies, our financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.
 
We are also subject to extensive government regulation and supervision in jurisdictions around the world, both as a participant in the financial services industry and otherwise. Banking regulations are primarily intended to protect depositors’ funds, federal deposit insurance funds and the banking system as a whole, and not for the protection of our shareholders or creditors. Among other things, as a result of regulators enforcing existing laws and regulations, we could be fined, prohibited from engaging in some of our business activities, subject to limitations or conditions on our business activities or subjected to new or substantially higher taxes or other governmental charges in connection with the conduct of our business or with respect to our employees. There is also the risk that new laws or regulations or changes in enforcement of existing laws or regulations applicable to our businesses may be imposed which could impact the profitability of the Company’s business activities, limit our ability to pursue business opportunities, require the Company to change certain of its business practices or alter its relationships with customers, affect retention of key Company personnel, or expose the Company to additional costs (including increased compliance costs). Such changes also may require us to invest significant management attention and resources to make any necessary changes and could adversely affect our results of operations and financial condition.
 
Please see “Supervision and Regulation” beginning on page 38 for more information about the regulation to which we are subject.
 
We are subject to capital adequacy guidelines and, if we fail to meet these guidelines, our financial condition would be adversely affected.
 
Under regulatory capital adequacy guidelines and other regulatory requirements, the Company, TRS and our subsidiary banks, Centurion Bank and AEBFSB, must meet guidelines for capital adequacy and leverage ratios that include quantitative measures of assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items, subject to qualitative judgments by regulators about components, risk weightings and other factors. As discussed above under “Supervision and Regulation — Capital Adequacy”, the capital requirements applicable to the Company and TRS as bank holding companies and our subsidiary depository institutions are in the process of being substantially revised, including in connection with our transition to Basel II and as a result of Basel III and the requirements of Dodd-Frank. If the Company, TRS or our subsidiary depository institutions fail to meet current or future minimum capital, leverage or other financial requirements, their respective financial conditions would be materially adversely affected. In light of recent market events, Dodd-Frank and Basel III, the Company, TRS and our subsidiary depository institutions will be required to satisfy additional, more stringent capital adequacy standards than in the past. We cannot fully predict the final form of, or the effects of, these regulations. Failure by any of the Company, TRS or a subsidiary depository institution to maintain its respective status as “well capitalized” and “well managed,” if unremedied over a period of time, would cause us to lose our status as a financial holding company and could compromise our competitive position. For more information on capital adequacy requirements, please see “Supervision and Regulation — Capital Adequacy” above.


79


Table of Contents

We are subject to restrictions that limit our ability to pay dividends and repurchase our capital stock.
 
We are limited in our ability to pay dividends by our regulators who could prohibit a dividend that would be considered an unsafe or unsound banking practice. For example, it is the policy of the Federal Reserve that bank holding companies should generally pay dividends on common stock only out of earnings, and only if prospective earnings retention is consistent with the organization’s expected future needs, asset quality, and financial condition. Recently issued temporary guidance from the Federal Reserve states that our dividend policies will be assessed against, among other things, our ability to achieve Basel III capital ratio requirements. A company that has not achieved Basel III capital requirements on a fully phased-in basis may have difficulty increasing dividends.
 
While the regulations ultimately applicable to the Company will be determined by the Federal Reserve, the Company estimates that, had regulations implementing Basel III been in place during the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company’s capital ratios under Basel III would have exceeded the minimum requirements. This estimate could change in the future. While we expect to meet the Basel III capital requirements, inclusive of the capital conservation buffer, as phased in by the Federal Reserve, the regulations ultimately applicable to us may be substantially different from the Basel III final framework as published in December 2010. Moreover, the Federal Reserve will closely scrutinize any dividend payout ratios exceeding 30% of after-tax net income.
 
During the fourth quarter of 2010, we repurchased 14 million shares of our common stock through our share repurchase program. On January 7, 2011, we submitted our Comprehensive Capital Plan (“CCP”) to the Federal Reserve requesting approval to proceed with additional share repurchases in 2011. The CCP includes an analysis of performance and capital availability under certain adverse economic assumptions. We expect a response from the Federal Reserve by the end of the first quarter. No additional shares are expected to be repurchased prior to its response. We cannot predict whether the Federal Reserve will approve additional share purchases.
 
For more information on bank holding company dividend restrictions, please see “Supervision and Regulation — General — Dividends” on page 46, as well as “Financial Review — Share Repurchases and Dividends” on page 41 and Note 23 on page 111 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference.
 
Banks, card issuers and card network operators generally are the subject of increasing global regulatory focus, which may impose costly new compliance burdens on our Company and lead to decreased transaction volumes and revenues through our network.
 
We are subject to regulations that affect banks and the payments industry in the United States and many other countries in which our charge and credit Cards are used and where we conduct banking and Card activities. In particular, we are subject to numerous regulations applicable to financial institutions in the United States and abroad. We are also subject to regulations as a provider of services to financial institutions. Regulation of the payments industry has increased significantly in recent years. For example, we are subject to certain provisions of the Bank Secrecy Act as amended by the Patriot Act, with regard to maintaining effective anti-money laundering programs. Increased regulatory focus in this area could result in additional obligations or restrictions with respect to the types of products and services we may offer to consumers, the countries in which our charge and credit Cards may be used, and the types of cardholders and merchants who can obtain or accept our charge and credit Cards. In addition, the member states of the European Economic Area have now implemented a relatively new European Union legislative directive, called the Payment Services Directive, for electronic payment services, including cards, that puts in place a common legal framework for licensing and supervision of payment services providers, including card issuers and merchant acquirers, and for their conduct of business.
 
Various regulatory agencies and legislatures are also considering regulations and legislation covering identity theft, account management guidelines, disclosure rules, security, and marketing that would impact us directly, in part due to increased scrutiny of our underwriting standards. These new requirements may restrict our ability to issue charge and credit cards or partner with other financial institutions, which could decrease


80


Table of Contents

our transaction volumes. In some circumstances, new regulations and legislation could have the effect of limiting our ability to offer new types of charge or credit cards or restricting our ability to offer existing Cards, such as stored value cards, which could materially and adversely reduce our revenues and revenue growth.
 
In recent years, regulators in several countries outside the United States have focused on the fees involved in the operation of card networks, including interchange fees paid to card issuers and the fees merchants are charged to accept cards. Regulators in the United Kingdom, Canada, New Zealand, Poland, Italy, Switzerland, Hungary, the European Union, Australia, Brazil, Mexico and Venezuela, among others, have conducted investigations that are either ongoing, concluded or on appeal.
 
The interchange fee, which is the collectively set fee paid by the bankcard merchant acquirer to the card issuing bank in “four party” payment networks, like Visa and MasterCard, is generally the largest component of the merchant service charge charged to merchants for bankcard debit and credit card acceptance in these systems. By contrast, the American Express network does not have interchange fees. Although the regulators’ focus has primarily been on Visa and MasterCard as the dominant card networks and on their operations on a multilateral basis, antitrust actions and government regulation relating to merchant pricing could ultimately affect all networks. Lower interchange and/or merchant discount revenue may lead card issuers to look for other sources of revenue such as higher annual card fees or interest charges, as well as to reduce costs by scaling back or eliminating rewards programs.
 
In the United States, Congress continued to focus on the interchange issue during 2010. Congress passed Dodd-Frank, which the President signed into law in July 2010. Dodd-Frank gives the Federal Reserve the authority to establish rules regarding interchange fees charged by payment card issuers for transactions in which a person uses a debit or general-use prepaid card, and to enforce a new statutory requirement that such fees be reasonable and proportional to the actual cost of a transaction to the issuer, with specific allowances for the costs of fraud prevention, as well as to prohibit exclusive network routing restrictions for electronic debit transactions. American Express does not offer a debit card linked to a deposit account, but does issue various types of prepaid cards. Reloadable general-use prepaid cards, but not those marketed or labeled as gift cards or gift certificates, are exempt from the interchange fee limitations. In contrast to the interchange fee limitations, all prepaid cards would be subject to the exclusive network routing restrictions for electronic debit transactions. In December 2010, the Federal Reserve issued a Notice of Proposed Rulemaking requesting comments to implement the interchange fee limitations and exclusive network routing restrictions. The Federal Reserve must issue final rules on the exclusive network routing restrictions by July 21, 2011. The statute does not specify when those rules must take effect. It is difficult to assess at this time the extent to which the final regulations, once issued, could adversely impact our revenues and profitability.
 
Additionally, Dodd-Frank prohibits payment card networks from restricting merchants from offering discounts or incentives to encourage customers to pay with particular forms of payment such as cash, check, credit or debit card, provided that such offers do not discriminate on the basis of the network or issuer. Further, to the extent required by federal law or applicable state law, the discount or incentive must be offered to all prospective buyers and must be clearly and conspicuously disclosed. Dodd-Frank also permits U.S. merchants to establish minimum purchase amounts of no more than $10 for credit card purchases, provided that the merchants do not discriminate between networks or issuers. Federal government agencies and institutions of higher learning are also permitted to establish maximum amounts for credit card purchases provided they do not discriminate between networks or issuers. As a result of these new laws, customers may be incentivized by merchants to move away from the use of charge and credit card products to other forms of payment, such as debit, which could adversely affect our revenues and profitability.
 
During the last four years, a number of bills were proposed in individual state legislatures seeking to impose caps on credit card interchange fees or to prohibit credit card companies from charging a merchant discount on the sales tax portion of credit card purchases. Other proposals were aimed at increasing the transparency of card network rules for merchants. In addition, a number of bills were proposed to establish merchant liability for the costs of a data security breach of a merchant’s system or require merchants to adopt technical safeguards to protect sensitive cardholder payment information. In 2010, Vermont enacted legislation that permits merchants to set a minimum dollar value of no more than $10 for acceptance of any form of


81


Table of Contents

payment; permits merchants to provide discounts or other benefits based on the form of payment (i.e., card, cash, check, debit card, stored-value card, charge card or credit card); and permits merchants to accept the cards of a payment system at one or more of its locations but not at others. This legislation may serve as a model for other states. In the event that additional legislative or regulatory activity to limit interchange or merchant fees continues or increases, or state data security legislation is adopted, our revenues and profitability could be adversely affected.
 
Increased regulatory focus on our Company, such as in connection with the matters discussed above, may increase our compliance costs or result in a reduction of transactions processed on our networks or merchant discount revenues from such transactions, which could materially and adversely impact our results of operations.
 
If we are not able to protect our intellectual property, and invest successfully in, and compete at the leading edge of, technological developments across all our businesses, our revenue and profitability could be negatively affected.
 
Our industry is subject to rapid and significant technological changes. In order to compete in our industry, we need to continue to invest in business process and technology advances across all areas of our business, including in transaction processing, data management, customer interactions and communications, travel reservations systems, prepaid products, alternative payment mechanisms and risk management and compliance systems. We rely in part on third parties, including some of our competitors and potential competitors, for the development of and access to new technologies. We expect that new technologies applicable to the payments industry will continue to emerge, and these new technologies may be superior to, or render obsolete, the technologies we currently use in our Cards, networks and other services. Because of evolving payments technologies and the competitive landscape, we may not, among other things, be successful in increasing or maintaining our share of online spending and enhancing our Cardmembers’ digital experience, which could have an adverse effect on our revenues and profitability. Our ability to develop, acquire, or access competitive technologies or business processes on acceptable terms may be limited by patent rights that third parties, including competitors and potential competitors, may assert. In addition, our ability to adopt new technologies that we develop may be inhibited by a need for industry-wide standards or by resistance from Cardmembers or merchants to such changes.
 
We rely on a variety of measures to protect our intellectual property and proprietary information, including copyrights, trademarks, patents and controls on access and distribution. These measures may not prevent misappropriation or infringement of our intellectual property or proprietary information and a resulting loss of competitive advantage. In addition, competitors or other third parties may allege that our systems, processes or technologies infringe their intellectual property rights. Given the complex, rapidly changing and competitive technological and business environment in which we operate and the potential risks and uncertainties of intellectual property related litigation, we cannot assure you that a future assertion of an infringement claim against us will not cause us to lose significant revenues, incur significant license, royalty or technology development expenses, or pay significant monetary damages.
 
Regulation in the areas of privacy and data security could increase our costs and decrease the number of charge and credit Cards issued.
 
We are subject to various regulations related to privacy and data security/breach, and we could be negatively impacted by these regulations. For example, in the United States, we are subject to the safeguards guidelines under the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act. The safeguards guidelines require that each financial institution develop, implement and maintain a written, comprehensive information security program containing safeguards that are appropriate to the financial institution’s size and complexity, the nature and scope of the financial institution’s activities and the sensitivity of any customer information at issue. Broad-ranging data security laws that affect our business have also been adopted by various states, such as Massachusetts and Nevada.
 
Compliance with these laws regarding the protection of customer and employee data could result in higher compliance and technology costs for the Company, as well as potentially significant fines and penalties


82


Table of Contents

for non-compliance. Many foreign jurisdictions in which we operate are also expanding the scope of their data security requirements and standards, as well as increasing enforcement activity in this area. In 1995, the European Parliament and Council passed European Directive 95/46/EC on the protection of individuals with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data (commonly referred to as the Data Protection Directive), which obligates the controller of an individual’s personal data to take the necessary technical and organizational measures to protect personal data. The Data Protection Directive has been implemented through local laws regulating data protection in European Union Member States. As these laws are interpreted throughout the European Union where we have a significant commercial presence, compliance costs are increasing, particularly in the context of ensuring that adequate data security protections and data transfer mechanisms are in place. In July 2010, we submitted for review by relevant European data protection authorities our draft binding corporate rules for processing of data within the American Express group which, once approved, will enable a more efficient basis on which to transfer data within our group.
 
In addition to the foregoing enhanced data security requirements, various federal banking regulatory agencies, and as many as 46 states, the District of Columbia, Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands, have enacted data breach regulations and laws requiring varying levels of consumer notification in the event of a security breach. Data breach laws are also becoming more prevalent in other parts of the world where we operate, including Japan, Mexico and Germany. In many countries that have yet to impose automatic data breach notification requirements, regulators have increasingly used the threat of significant sanctions and penalties by data protection authorities to encourage voluntary notification and discourage data breaches. Many of these regulations also apply broadly to retailers/merchants that accept our Cards; thus, to the extent they experience data security breaches, this presents additional risks for American Express and our Cardmembers.
 
In addition, federal legislators and regulators are increasingly pursuing new guidelines, laws and regulations that, if adopted, could further restrict how the Company collects, uses, shares and secures customer information, which could impact some of the Company’s current or planned business initiatives. For example, a recent FTC report, which applies to a company’s collection and use of customer information both online and offline, would impose greater transparency, use, disclosure and consumer choice obligations on the Company, and may ultimately result in the creation of an online mechanism through which consumers could opt out of all online tracking for online behavioral advertising purposes. A companion report by the United States Department of Commerce (“DOC”) would require companies to be more transparent in their online privacy practices, and recommends the creation of a national data security/data breach standard. Both the FTC and the DOC are expected to release final reports by the end of 2011. Additionally, two draft privacy bills were introduced in the 111th Congress in the summer of 2010, and a number of federal legislators have either expressed their support for these draft bills or have indicated their intent to introduce new bills in the 112th Congress. If adopted, any such privacy bill could have a significant impact on the Company’s current and planned data privacy and security practices, could increase our costs of compliance and business operations and could reduce revenues from certain business initiatives.
 
We continue to seek ways to minimize these risks and costs internally by improving our own data privacy and security policies and practices, and externally through regular improvements to the PCI Data Security Standard and by placing strong contractual obligations on retailers/merchants that accept our Cards, as well as on our service providers and business partners, relating to data security and data breach. We also have undertaken measures to assess the level of access to customer data by employees and our partners and service providers, and to ensure that such access is limited to the least privileged level necessary to perform their job or function for the Company. Still, increased regulation and enforcement activity throughout the world in the areas of data privacy and data security/breach may materially increase our costs and may decrease the number of our Cards that we issue, or restrict our ability to fully exploit our closed-loop capability, which could materially and adversely affect our profitability. Our failure to comply with the privacy and data security/breach laws and regulations to which we are subject could also result in fines, sanctions and damage to our global reputation and our brand.


83


Table of Contents

Our success is dependent, in part, upon our executive officers and other key personnel, and the loss of key personnel could materially adversely affect our business.
 
Our success depends, in part, on our executive officers and other key personnel. Our senior management team has significant industry experience and would be difficult to replace. Our senior management team is relatively small and we believe we are in a critical period of competition in the financial services and payments industry. The market for qualified individuals is highly competitive, and we may not be able to attract and retain qualified personnel or candidates to replace or succeed members of our senior management team or other key personnel. As further described in “Supervision and Regulation — Compensation Practices” on pages 52-53, our compensation practices are subject to review and oversight by the Federal Reserve and the compensation practices of our depository institution subsidiaries are subject to review and oversight by the FDIC and the OTS (and beginning in July 2011, the OCC). As a large financial and banking institution, we may be subject to limitations on compensation practices, which may or may not affect our competitors, by the Federal Reserve, the FDIC or other regulators worldwide. These limitations, including limitations on any incentive compensation policies pursuant to Dodd-Frank, could further affect our ability to attract and retain our executive officers and other key personnel. The loss of key personnel could materially adversely affect our business.
 
Litigation and regulatory actions could subject us to significant fines, penalties, judgments and/or requirements resulting in increased expenses.
 
Businesses in the credit card industry have historically been subject to significant legal actions, including class action lawsuits and patent claims. Many of these actions have included claims for substantial compensatory or punitive damages. In addition, we may be involved in various actions or proceedings brought by governmental regulatory agencies in the event of noncompliance with laws or regulations, which could subject us to significant fines, penalties or other requirements resulting in increased expenses and damage to our global reputation and our brand.
 
Business Risks
 
Our operating results may suffer because of substantial and increasingly intense competition worldwide in the payments industry.
 
The payments industry is highly competitive and includes, in addition to charge, credit and debit card networks and issuers, cash, credit and ACH, as well as evolving alternative payment mechanisms, systems and products, such as aggregators (e.g., PayPal), wireless payment technologies (including using mobile telephone networks to carry out transactions), prepaid systems and systems linked to payment cards, and bank transfer models. We are the third largest general-purpose charge and credit card network based on charge volume, behind Visa and MasterCard, which we believe are larger than we are in most countries. As a result, other card issuers may be able to benefit from the strong position and marketing and pricing power of Visa and MasterCard.
 
Because of continuing consolidations among banking and financial services companies and credit card portfolio acquisitions by major card issuers, there are now a smaller number of significant issuers. Continuing consolidation in the banking industry may result in a financial institution with a strong relationship with us being acquired by an institution that has a strong relationship with a competitor, resulting in a potential loss of business for us. The largest competing issuers have continued to grow, in several cases by acquiring card portfolios, and also by cross-selling through their retail branch networks, and competition among all issuers remains intense. We are also subject to increasing pricing pressure from our competitors.
 
In addition, some of our competitors have developed, or may develop, substantially greater financial and other resources than we have, may offer a wider range of programs and services than we offer or may use more effective advertising and marketing strategies to achieve broader brand recognition or merchant acceptance than we have. We may not continue to be able to compete effectively against these threats. Our competitors may also be more efficient in introducing innovative products, programs and services than we are. Spending on our Cards could be impacted by consumer usage of debit cards, as we do not currently offer a


84


Table of Contents

debit card linked to a deposit account, but we do issue various types of prepaid cards. In fact, the purchase volume and number of transactions made with debit cards in the United States has grown more rapidly than credit and charge card transactions.
 
Internationally, competition remains fierce, and as a result, we may not be successful in accelerating our growth outside of the United States through proprietary consumer, small business and corporate products, GNS partners and alternative payment vehicles.
 
New technologies, together with the portability provided by smartphones and tablets and evolving consumer behavior with social networking, are rapidly changing the way people interact with each other and transact business all around the world. In this connection, traditional and non-traditional competitors such as mobile telecommunications companies are working to deliver digital and mobile payment services for both consumers and merchants.
 
In the United States, alternative payment vehicles that seek to redirect customers to payment systems based on ACH continue to emerge and grow, and existing debit networks also continue to expand both on-and off-line and are making efforts to develop online PIN functionality, which could further reduce the relative use of charge and credit cards online.
 
To the extent alternative payment mechanisms, systems and products continue to successfully expand in the online payments space, our discount revenues and our ability to access transaction data through our closed-loop network could be negatively impacted. The Company has recently created an Enterprise Growth Group to focus on this strategic challenge by generating alternative sources of revenue on a global basis, both organically and through acquisitions, in areas such as online and mobile payments and fee-based services. While expanding the Enterprise Growth Group is a top priority for the Company, many of the growth initiatives will involve new areas for the Company and we may not be successful in executing our strategy.
 
Regulators have recently put forward various proposals that may impact our businesses, including proposals relating to restrictions on the type of activities in which financial institutions are permitted to engage and the size of financial institutions, and proposals to impose taxes or fees on certain financial institutions. These or similar proposals, which may not apply to all of our competitors, could impact our ability to compete effectively.
 
We face increasingly intense competitive pressure that may impact the prices we charge merchants who accept our Cards for payment for goods and services.
 
Unlike our competitors in the payments industry that rely on high revolving credit balances to drive profits, our business model is focused on Cardmember spending. Discount revenue, which represents fees charged to merchants when Cardmembers use their Cards to purchase goods and services on our network, is primarily driven by billed business volumes and is our largest single revenue source. In recent years, we have been under market pressure to reduce merchant discount rates and undertake other repricing initiatives. In addition, differentiated payment models from non-traditional players in the alternative payments space and the regulatory and litigation environment could pose challenges to our traditional payment model and adversely impact our average discount rate. As a priority in 2011, we are seeking to drive greater value to our merchants, which if not successful, could negatively impact our discount revenue and financial results. If we continue to experience a decline in the average merchant discount rate or are unable to sustain merchant discount rates on our Cards without experiencing overall volume growth or an increase in merchant coverage, our revenues and profitability could be materially and adversely affected.
 
We may not be successful in our efforts to promote Card usage through our marketing, promotion and rewards programs or to effectively control the costs of such programs, both of which may impact our profitability.
 
Our business is characterized by the high level of spending by our Cardmembers. Increasing consumer and business spending and borrowing on our payment services products, particularly credit and charge Cards and Travelers Cheques and other prepaid products, and growth in Card lending balances, depend in part on our


85


Table of Contents

ability to develop and issue new or enhanced Card and prepaid products and increase revenues from such products. One of the ways in which we attract new Cardmembers, reduce Cardmember attrition and seek to capture a greater share of customers’ total spending on Cards issued on our network, both in the United States and in our international operations, is through our Membership Rewards program, as well as other Cardmember benefits. We may not be able to cost effectively manage and expand Cardmember benefits, including containing the growth of marketing, promotion and rewards expenses and Cardmember services expenses. In addition, many credit card issuers have instituted rewards and co-brand programs that are similar to ours, and issuers may in the future institute programs that are more attractive to cardmembers than our programs.
 
During the last several years, we have received quarterly payments from each of Visa and MasterCard under the agreements that we entered into with each company to settle claims made against them in separate antitrust actions. We recognized $280 million ($172 million after-tax) from Visa in 2010 and 2009, and $600 million ($372 million after-tax) from MasterCard in 2010 and 2009. Our ability to continue to invest in marketing, promotion and rewards programs, as well as our overall profitability, may be negatively impacted if we are unable to replace the payments provided to us under our settlements with MasterCard and Visa once the aggregate settlement amounts have been paid in full through the second and fourth quarters of 2011, respectively.
 
Our brand and reputation are key assets of our Company, and our business may be affected by how we are perceived in the marketplace.
 
Our brand and its attributes are key assets of the Company. Our ability to attract and retain consumer Cardmembers and corporate clients is highly dependent upon the external perceptions of our level of service, trustworthiness, business practices and financial condition. Negative perceptions or publicity regarding these matters could damage our reputation among existing and potential Cardmembers and corporate clients, which could make it difficult for us to attract new Cardmembers and maintain existing ones. Adverse developments with respect to our industry may also, by association, negatively impact our reputation, or result in greater regulatory or legislative scrutiny or litigation against us. Although we monitor developments for areas of potential risk to our reputation and brand, negative perceptions or publicity could materially and adversely affect our revenues and profitability.
 
We may not be successful in realizing the benefits associated with our acquisitions and investment activity.
 
We have recently acquired a number of businesses, including our acquisitions of Serve, Accertify and Loyalty Partner, which is pending. We expect to continue to evaluate and enter into discussions regarding a wide array of potential transactions. These transactions could be material to our financial condition and results of operations. The process of integrating an acquired company, business, or technology has created, and will continue to create, unforeseen operating difficulties and expenditures. The areas where we face risks include: implementation or remediation of controls, procedures, and policies at the acquired company; diversion of management time and focus from operating our business to acquisition integration challenges; coordination of product, engineering, and sales and marketing functions; transition of operations, users, and customers onto our existing platforms; cultural challenges associated with integrating employees from the acquired company into our organization; retention of employees from the businesses we acquire; integration of the acquired company’s accounting, management information, human resource, and other administrative systems; liability for activities of the acquired company before the acquisition, including patent and trademark infringement claims, violations of laws, commercial disputes, tax liabilities, and other known and unknown liabilities; litigation or other claims in connection with the acquired company, including claims from terminated employees, customers, former stockholders, or other third parties; in the case of foreign acquisitions, the need to integrate operations across different cultures and languages and to address the particular economic, currency, political, and regulatory risks associated with specific countries; and failure to successfully further develop the acquired technology.


86


Table of Contents

Our failure to address these risks or other problems encountered in connection with our past or future acquisitions and investments could cause us to fail to realize the anticipated benefits of such acquisitions or investments, incur unanticipated liabilities, and harm our business generally.
 
An increase in account data breaches and fraudulent activity using our Cards could lead to reputational damage to our brand and could reduce the use and acceptance of our charge and credit Cards.
 
We and other third parties store Cardmember account information in connection with our charge and credit Cards. Criminals are using increasingly sophisticated methods to capture various types of information relating to Cardmembers’ accounts, including Membership Rewards accounts, to engage in illegal activities such as fraud and identity theft. As outsourcing and specialization become a more acceptable and common way of doing business in the payments industry, there are more third parties involved in processing transactions using our Cards. If data breaches or fraud levels involving our Cards were to rise, it could lead to regulatory intervention (such as mandatory card reissuance), increased concerns of customers relating to the privacy of their data and reputational and financial damage to our brand, which could reduce the use and acceptance of our Cards, and have a material adverse impact on our business.
 
We have agreements with business partners in a variety of industries, including the airline industry, that represent a significant portion of our business. We are exposed to risks associated with these industries, including bankruptcies, restructurings, consolidations and alliances of our partners, and the possible obligation to make payments to our partners.
 
In the ordinary course of our business we enter into different types of contractual arrangements with business partners in a variety of industries. For example, we have partnered with Costco and Delta Air Lines to offer co-branded cards for consumers and small businesses, and through our Membership Rewards program we have partnered with businesses in many industries, including the airline industry, to offer benefits to Cardmember participants. Under some types of these contractual arrangements, upon the occurrence of certain triggering events, we may be obligated to make payments to certain co-brand partners, merchants, vendors and customers. If we are not able to effectively manage the triggering events, we could unexpectedly have to make payments to these partners, which could have a negative effect on our financial condition and results of operations. Similarly, we have credit risk to certain co-brand partners relating to our prepayments for loyalty program points that will not be fully redeemed for multi-year periods. We are also exposed to risk from bankruptcies, restructurings, consolidations and other similar events that may occur in any industry representing a significant portion of our billed business, which could negatively impact particular card products and services (and billed business generally) and our financial condition and results of operations. For example, we could be materially impacted if we were obligated to or elected to reimburse Cardmembers for products and services purchased from merchants that are bankrupt or have ceased operations.
 
The airline industry represents a significant portion of our billed business and in recent years has undergone bankruptcies, restructurings, consolidations and other similar events. During 2010, there continued to be significant consolidation in the airline industry, particularly in the United States (e.g., United Airlines/Continental Airlines and the pending merger of Southwest Airlines and AirTran), through mergers and/or grants of antitrust immunity to airline alliances and joint ventures, and this trend could continue. In particular, the United States Department of Transportation has granted antitrust immunity to members of the Skyteam, Star and Oneworld Alliances, enabling the covered airlines to closely coordinate their cross-regional operations and to launch highly integrated joint ventures in transatlantic and other markets, including jointly pricing and managing capacity on covered routes, sharing revenues and costs, and coordinating sales and corporate contracts, all outside of the scope of the U.S. antitrust laws. The European Commission has similarly approved the Oneworld Alliance, and its review of the other alliances is continuing. Increasing consolidation and expanded antitrust immunity could create challenges for our relationships with the airlines including by reducing our profitability on our airline business.
 
Airlines are also some of the most important and valuable partners in our Membership Rewards program. If a participating airline merged with an airline that did not participate in Membership Rewards, the combined airline would have to determine whether or not to continue participation. Similarly, if one of our co-brand


87


Table of Contents

airline partners merged with an airline that had a competing co-brand card, the combined airline would have to determine which co-brand cards it would offer. If an airline determined to withdraw from Membership Rewards or to cease offering an American Express co-brand card, whether as the result of a merger or otherwise, such as our recent announcement that Continental Airlines will no longer participate in the Airport Club Access program for Centurion and Platinum Cardmembers or the Membership Rewards points transfer program as of October 1, 2011, our business could be adversely affected. For additional information relating to the general risks related to the airline industry, see “Financial Review — Exposure to Airline Industry” on page 60 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.
 
Our reengineering and other cost control initiatives may not prove successful, and we may not realize all or a significant portion of the benefits we intended.
 
We have regularly undertaken, and are currently undertaking, a variety of efforts to reengineer our business operations in order to achieve cost savings and other benefits (including the reinvestment of such savings in key areas such as marketing, promotion, rewards and infrastructure), enhance revenue-generating opportunities and improve our operating expense to revenue ratio both in the short-term and over time. These efforts include cost management, structural and strategic measures such as vendor, process, facilities and operations consolidation, outsourcing functions (including, among others, technologies operations), relocating certain functions to lower cost overseas locations, moving internal and external functions to the Internet to save costs and planned staff reductions relating to certain of these reengineering actions. If we do not successfully achieve these efforts in a timely manner or if we are not able to capitalize on these efforts, including the ability of the Global Services Group to generate an annualized level of gross expense savings of approximately $500 million by 2012, or if the actions taken ultimately come at the expense of operational efficiency, we may not realize all or a significant portion of the benefits we intended. Failure to achieve these benefits could have a negative effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
 
Our risk management policies and procedures may not be effective.
 
We must effectively manage credit risk related to consumer debt, business loans, settlement risk with regard to GNS partners, merchant bankruptcies, the rate of bankruptcies, and other credit trends that can affect spending on Card products, debt payments by individual and corporate customers and businesses that accept our Card products.
 
Credit risk is the risk of loss from obligor or counterparty default. We are exposed to both consumer credit risk, principally from Cardmember receivables and our other consumer lending activities, and institutional credit risk from merchants, GNS partners and GCC clients. Third parties may default on their obligations to us due to bankruptcy, lack of liquidity, operational failure or other reasons. Country, regional and political risks are components of credit risk. Rising delinquencies and rising rates of bankruptcy are often precursors of future write-offs and may require us to increase our reserve for loan losses. Higher write-off rates and an increase in our reserve for loan losses adversely affect our profitability and the performance of our securitizations, and may increase our cost of funds.
 
Although we make estimates to provide for credit losses in our outstanding portfolio of loans and receivables, these estimates may not be accurate. In addition, the information we use in managing our credit risk may be inaccurate or incomplete. Although we regularly review our credit exposure to specific clients and counterparties and to specific industries, countries and regions that we believe may present credit concerns, default risk may arise from events or circumstances that are difficult to foresee or detect, such as fraud. We may also fail to receive full information with respect to the credit risks of our customers.
 
We must also effectively manage market risk to which we are exposed. Market risk represents the loss in value of portfolios and financial instruments due to adverse changes in market variables. We are exposed to market risk from interest rates in our Card business and in our investment portfolios. Changes in the interest rates at which we borrow and lend money affect the value of our assets and liabilities. If the rate of interest we pay on our borrowings increases more than the rate of interest we earn on our loans, our net interest yield, and consequently our net income, could fall.


88


Table of Contents

We must also accurately estimate the fair value of the assets in our investment portfolio and, in particular, those investments that are not readily marketable.
 
Additionally, we must effectively manage liquidity risk to which we are exposed. Liquidity risk is defined as the inability to access cash and equivalents needed to meet business requirements and satisfy our obligations. If we are unsuccessful in managing our liquidity risk, we may maintain too much liquidity, which can be costly and limit financial flexibility, or we may be too illiquid, which could result in financial distress during a liquidity event. For additional information regarding our management of liquidity risk, see “Adverse capital and credit market conditions may significantly affect our ability to meet liquidity needs, access to capital and cost of capital” above.
 
Finally, we must also manage the operational risks to which we are exposed. We consider operational risk to be the risk of not achieving business objectives due to inadequate or failed processes or information systems, human error or the external environment (i.e., natural disasters) including losses due to failures to comply with laws and regulations. Operational risks include the risk that we may not comply with specific regulatory or legal requirements, exposing us to fines and/or penalties and possibly brand damage; employee error or intentional misconduct that results in a material financial misstatement; or a failure to monitor an outsource partner’s compliance with a service level agreement, resulting in economic harm to us.
 
Although we have devoted significant resources to develop our risk management policies and procedures and expect to continue to do so in the future, our hedging strategies and other risk management techniques may not be fully effective. See “Financial Review — Risk Management” on pages 48-50 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders for a discussion of the policies and procedures we use to identify, monitor and manage the risks we assume in conducting our businesses. Management of credit, market and operational risk requires, among other things, policies and procedures to record properly and verify a large number of transactions and events, and these policies and procedures may not be fully effective.
 
An inability to accept or maintain deposits due to market demand or regulatory constraints could materially adversely affect our liquidity position and our ability to fund our business.
 
As a source of funding, our banking subsidiaries offer deposits to individuals through brokerage networks as well as directly to consumers.
 
As of December 31, 2010, we had approximately $29.7 billion in total customer deposits. The majority of the Company’s outstanding U.S. retail deposits have been raised through third-party channels and, as such, are considered brokered deposits for bank regulatory purposes. As part of our funding strategy, a majority of the deposits raised during 2010 were sourced directly by the Company with consumers through Personal Savings from American Express. Many other financial services firms are increasing their use of deposit funding, and as such we may experience increased competition in the deposit markets, particularly as to brokerage networks. We cannot predict how this increased competition will affect deposit renewal rates, costs or availability. If we are required to offer higher interest rates to attract or maintain deposits, our funding costs will be adversely impacted.
 
Our ability to obtain deposit funding and offer competitive interest rates on deposits also is dependent on capital levels of our bank subsidiaries. The FDIA generally prohibits a bank, including our banking subsidiaries, from accepting brokered deposits or offering interest rates on any deposits significantly higher than the prevailing rate in its normal market area or nationally (depending upon where the deposits are solicited), unless (1) it is well capitalized or (2) it is adequately capitalized and receives a waiver from the FDIC. A bank that is less than well capitalized generally may not pay an interest rate on any deposit, including direct-to-consumer deposits, in excess of 75 basis points over the national rate published by the FDIC unless the FDIC determines that the bank is operating in a high-rate area. An adequately capitalized insured depository institution may not accept, renew or roll over any brokered deposit unless it has applied for and been granted a waiver of this prohibition by the FDIC. Undercapitalized depository institutions may not solicit deposits by offering interest rates that are significantly higher than the prevailing rates of interest on insured deposits in such institution’s normal market areas or in the market area in which such deposits would otherwise be accepted. There are no such restrictions on a bank that is well capitalized (provided such bank is not subject to a capital maintenance provision within a written agreement, consent order, order to cease and


89


Table of Contents

desist, capital directive, or prompt corrective action directive issued by its federal regulator). If a depository institution’s federal regulator determines that it is in an unsafe or unsound condition or is engaging in unsafe or unsound banking practices, the regulator may reclassify a well capitalized institution as adequately capitalized, require an adequately capitalized institution to comply with certain restrictions as if it were undercapitalized, and require an undercapitalized institution take certain actions applicable to significantly undercapitalized institutions.
 
While Centurion Bank and AEBFSB were considered “well capitalized” for these purposes as of December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2010, there can be no assurance that they will continue to meet this definition. Basel III, when implemented by the U.S. banking agencies and fully phased-in, will require bank holding companies and their bank subsidiaries to maintain substantially more capital, with a greater emphasis on common equity. Additionally, our regulators can adjust the requirements to be well capitalized at any time and have authority to place limitations on our deposit businesses, including the interest rate we pay on deposits. An inability to attract or maintain deposits in the future could materially adversely affect our liquidity position and our ability to fund our business.
 
If our global network systems are disrupted or we are unable to process transactions efficiently or at all, our revenue and profitability would be materially reduced.
 
Our transaction authorization, clearing and settlement systems may experience service interruptions as a result of fire, natural disasters, power loss, disruptions in long distance or local telecommunications access, fraud, terrorism or accident. A natural disaster or other problem at our facilities could interrupt our services. Additionally, we rely on third-party service providers for the timely transmission of information across our global network. If a service provider fails to provide the communications capacity or services we require, as a result of natural disaster, operational disruption, terrorism or any other reason, the failure could interrupt our services, adversely affect the perception of our brands’ reliability and materially reduce our revenue and profitability.
 
We rely on third-party providers of various computer systems and other services integral to the operations of our businesses. These third parties may act in ways that could harm our business.
 
We operate a service network around the world.  In order to achieve cost and operational efficiencies, we outsource to third-party vendors many of the computer systems and other services that are integral to the operations of our global businesses. A significant amount of this outsourcing occurs in developing countries. We are subject to the risk that certain decisions are subject to the control of our third-party service providers and that these decisions may adversely affect our activities. In addition, the management of multiple third-party vendors increases our operational complexity and decreases our control. It is also possible that the cost efficiencies of certain outsourcings will decrease as the demand for these services increases around the world.
 
Our business is subject to the effects of weather and natural disasters.
 
As previously disclosed, natural disasters, severe weather conditions and other catastrophic events can have a negative effect on the Company’s business. Because the Company derives a portion of its revenues from travel-related spending, its business is sensitive to disruptions in air travel and other forms of travel caused by such events. Such disruptions can result in the payment of claims under travel interruption insurance policies that the Company offers and, if such disruptions to travel are prolonged, they can materially adversely affect overall travel-related spending. If the conditions described above (or similar ones) result in widespread or lengthy disruptions to travel, they could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.
 
Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements
 
We have made various statements in this Report that may constitute “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Forward-looking statements may also be made in our other reports filed with or furnished to the SEC, in our press releases and in other documents. In addition, from time to time, we, through our management, may make oral forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties, including those identified above, which could cause actual results to differ materially from such statements. The words “believe,” “expect,”


90


Table of Contents

“anticipate,” “optimistic,” “intend,” “plan,” “aim,” “will,” “may,” “should,” “could,” “would,” “likely” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. We caution you that the risk factors described above are not exclusive. There may also be other risks that we are unable to predict at this time that may cause actual results to differ materially from those in forward-looking statements. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date on which they are made. We undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements.
 
ITEM 1B.   UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS
 
Not applicable.
 
ITEM 2.   PROPERTIES
 
Our principal executive offices are in a 51-story, 2.2 million square foot building located in lower Manhattan. This building, which is on land leased from the Battery Park City Authority for a term expiring in 2069, is one of four office buildings in a complex known as the World Financial Center. We have a 49% ownership interest in the building and Brookfield Financial Properties owns the remaining 51% interest in the building. We also lease space in the building from Brookfield.
 
Other owned or leased principal locations currently include: the American Express Service Centers in Fort Lauderdale, Florida; Phoenix, Arizona; Greensboro, North Carolina; and Salt Lake City, Utah; the American Express Data Centers in Phoenix, Arizona and in Minneapolis, Minnesota; a multi-building campus housing the American Express Finance Center in Phoenix, Arizona; the headquarters for American Express Services Europe Limited in London, England; the Amex Canada Inc. headquarters in Markham, Ontario, Canada; and service centers located in Mexico City, Mexico; Sydney, Australia; Gurgaon, India and Brighton, England.
 
As part of the Company’s decision to consolidate locations within the Company’s global servicing network, a facility in Greensboro, North Carolina, will be closed, with work currently handled there being transferred to other locations in the U.S. Subject to local consultations, the Company also plans to transfer work currently handled at a Madrid, Spain, service center to facilities in Brighton, U.K., and Buenos Aires, Argentina, and service support for the Japanese card business from Sydney, Australia to Japan.
 
During 2004 and 2005, we engaged in several sale-leaseback transactions pursuant to which we sold various owned properties to third parties and leased back the properties under long-term net leases whereby each American Express entity that leases back the property is responsible for all costs and expenses relating to the property (including maintenance, repair, utilities, operating expenses and insurance costs) in addition to annual rent. The sale-leaseback transactions have not materially impacted our financial results in any year. Gains resulting from completed sale and leaseback transactions are amortized over the initial ten-year lease periods. We continue to consider whether sale-leaseback transactions are appropriate for other properties that we currently own.
 
Generally, we lease the premises we occupy in other locations. We believe that the facilities we own or occupy suit our needs and are well maintained.
 
ITEM 3.   LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
 
The Company and its subsidiaries are involved in a number of legal and arbitration proceedings, including class actions, concerning matters arising in connection with the conduct of their respective business activities. The Company believes it has meritorious defenses to each of these actions and intends to defend them vigorously. In the course of its business, the Company and its subsidiaries are also subject to governmental examinations, information gathering requests, subpoenas, inquiries and investigations. The Company believes that it is not a party to, nor are any of its properties the subject of, any pending legal, arbitration, regulatory or investigative proceedings that would have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial condition or liquidity. However, it is possible that the outcome of any such proceeding could have a material impact on results of operations in any particular reporting period as the proceedings are resolved. Certain legal proceedings involving the Company are described below.


91


Table of Contents

For those legal proceedings and governmental examinations disclosed below as to which a loss is reasonably possible in future periods, whether in excess of a related accrued liability or where there is no accrued liability, and for which the Company is able to estimate a range of possible loss, the current estimated range is zero to $500 million in excess of the accrued liability (if any) related to those matters. This aggregate range represents management’s estimate of possible loss with respect to these matters and is based on currently available information. This estimated range of possible loss does not represent the Company’s maximum loss exposure. The legal proceedings and governmental examinations underlying the estimated range will change from time to time and actual results may vary significantly from the current estimate. For additional information, please see Note 24 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, which can be found on page 113 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders.
 
Corporate Matters
 
During the last few years as regulatory interest in credit card network pricing to merchants and related issues has increased, the Company has responded to many inquiries from banking and competition authorities throughout the world. In October 2008, the Company received a Civil Investigative Demand (“CID”) from the Antitrust Division of the DOJ. Pursuant to the CID, the DOJ requested the production of documents and information regarding the Company’s contractual provisions relating to merchant surcharging and that prohibit merchants from discriminating against American Express cards. The Company cooperated with the DOJ’s request. The Company had also received a similar civil investigative demand from the attorney general of the state of Ohio.
 
On October 4, 2010, the DOJ, along with Attorneys General from Connecticut, Iowa, Maryland, Michigan, Missouri, Ohio and Texas, filed a complaint in the U.S. District Court for the Eastern District of New York against the Company, MasterCard International Incorporated and Visa, Inc., alleging a violation of Section 1 of the Sherman Antitrust Act. The complaint alleges that the defendants’ policies prohibiting merchants from steering a customer to use another network’s card, another type of card or another method of payment (“anti-steering” and “non-discrimination” rules and contractual provisions) violate the antitrust laws. The complaint alleges that the defendants participate in two distinct markets, a “General Purpose Card network services market,” and a “General Purpose Card network services market for merchants in travel and entertainment (“T&E”) businesses.” The complaint contends that each of the defendants has market power in the alleged two markets. The complaint seeks a judgment permanently enjoining the defendants from enforcing their anti-steering and non-discrimination rules and contractual provisions. The complaint does not seek monetary damages. Concurrent with the filing of the complaint, Visa and MasterCard announced they had reached an agreement settling the allegations in the complaint against them by agreeing to modifications in their rules prohibiting merchants that accept their cards from steering customers to use another network’s card, another type of card or another method of payment. American Express response to the complaint was filed on December 7, 2010. On December 20, 2010, the complaint filed by the DOJ and certain state attorneys general was amended to add as plaintiffs the Attorneys General from Arizona, Hawaii, Idaho, Illinois, Montana, Nebraska, New Hampshire, Rhode Island, Tennessee, Utah and Vermont. American Express’ response to the amended complaint was filed on January 4, 2011. A hearing has been scheduled for March 2, 2011 to discuss scheduling and coordination of the DOJ and state attorneys general litigation with other cases pending in the Eastern District of New York against American Express relating to the non-discrimination provisions in its merchant agreements, which cases are described below in the section entitled “U.S. Card Services and Global Merchant Services Matters.”
 
On February 20, 2009, a putative class action captioned Brozovich v. American Express Co., Kenneth I. Chenault and Daniel T. Henry , was filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. The lawsuit alleged violations of the federal securities laws in connection with certain alleged misstatements regarding the credit quality of the Company’s credit card customers. The purported class covered the period from March 1, 2007 to November 12, 2008. The action sought unspecified damages and costs and fees. The Brozovich action was subsequently voluntarily dismissed. In March 2009, a putative class action, captioned Baydale v. American Express Co., Kenneth I. Chenault and Daniel Henry , which made similar allegations to those made in the Brozovich action, was filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. In October 2009, the plaintiff in the Baydale action filed an Amended Consolidated Class Action Complaint in the action. The Company filed a motion to dismiss with the Court. On July 19, 2010, the Court granted the Company’s


92


Table of Contents

motion to dismiss and dismissed the complaint in its entirety. The plaintiff has filed a Notice of Appeal with the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit.
 
In May 2008, a shareholders’ derivative suit was filed in New York State Supreme Court in Manhattan naming American Express Company and certain current and former directors and senior executives as defendants. The case, captioned as City of Tallahassee Retirement System v. Akerson et al., alleges breaches of fiduciary duty “arising from knowing breaches of fiduciary obligations by certain current and former officers and directors of the Company that have led to the imposition of deferred criminal charges on a bank that at the time such charges were entered was owned by American Express, as well as the Company’s payment of approximately $65 million in penalties to federal and state regulators” related to American Express Bank Limited’s (AEBL) and TRS’s anti-money laundering programs. The complaint also states that the sale of AEBL took place after American Express had “allowed the value of its banking business unit to be dramatically impaired on account of the systemic violations of law and resulting deferred criminal charges.” The complaint seeks monetary damages on behalf of the Company. The defendants filed a motion to dismiss the complaint and in October 2009, the Court dismissed the complaint against all defendants. The plaintiff had filed a Notice of Appeal of the dismissal, but has since informed the Company that it does not intend to pursue such appeal.
 
In December 2008, a putative class action captioned Obester v. American Express Company, et al. was filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. The complaint alleges that the defendants violated certain ERISA obligations by: allowing the investment of American Express Retirement Savings Plan (“Plan”) assets in American Express common stock when American Express common stock was not a prudent investment; misrepresenting and failing to disclose material facts to Plan participants in connection with the administration of the Plan; and breaching certain fiduciary obligations. Thereafter, three other putative class actions making allegations similar to those made in the Obester matter were filed against the defendants: Tang v. American Express Company, et al. , filed on December 29, 2008 in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York, Miner v. American Express Company et al. , filed on February 4, 2009 in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York, and DiLorenzo v. American Express Company et al. , filed on February 10, 2009 in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. American Express filed a motion to dismiss these actions. In April 2009, these actions were consolidated into a Consolidated Amended Complaint, captioned In re American Express ERISA Litigation. Following argument on American Express’ motion to dismiss this action, the Court permitted plaintiffs to file a Second Amended Complaint. In April 2010, American Express filed a motion to dismiss the Second Amended Complaint. On November 2, 2010, the District Court dismissed the Second Amended Complaint in its entirety. On December 2, 2010, Plaintiffs filed a Notice of Appeal, appealing the case to the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit. That appeal is currently pending.
 
The Company is a defendant in a putative class action captioned Kaufman v. American Express Travel Related Services , which was filed on February 14, 2007, and is pending in the United States District Court for the Northern District of Illinois. The allegations in Kaufman relate primarily to monthly service fee charges in respect of the Company’s gift card products, with the principal claim being that the Company’s gift cards violate consumer protection statutes because consumers allegedly have difficulty spending small residual amounts on the gift cards prior to the imposition of monthly service fees. In January 2009, the Company signed a Memorandum of Understanding to resolve these claims. Since such time, the parties have entered into a settlement agreement that was submitted to the Court for preliminary approval. The proposed settlement class consists of “all purchasers, recipients and holders of all gift cards issued by American Express from January 1, 2002 through the date of preliminary approval of the Settlement, including without limitation, gift cards sold at physical retail locations, via the internet, or through mall co-branded programs.” Under the terms of the proposed settlement, in addition to certain non-monetary relief, the Company would pay $3 million into a settlement fund. Members of the settlement class would then be entitled to submit claims against the settlement fund to receive refunds of certain gift card fees, and any monies remaining in the settlement fund after payment of all claims would be paid to charity. In addition, the Company would make available to the settlement class for a period of time the opportunity to buy gift cards with no purchase fee. Finally, the Company would be responsible for paying class counsel’s reasonable fees and expenses and certain expenses of administering the class settlement. The Company is also a defendant in two other putative class actions making allegations similar to those made in Kaufman : Goodman v. American Express


93


Table of Contents

Travel Related Services
, pending in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York, and Jarratt v. American Express Company , filed in California Superior Court in San Diego and subsequently removed to the United States District Court for the Southern District of California. If the court ultimately approves the proposed settlement in Kaufman , all related gift card claims and actions would also be released. In August 2010, in response to objections by plaintiffs in certain of the other pending cases, the Kaufman court partially granted and partially denied approval of the settlement. The Company has filed a motion for reconsideration of the portion of the court’s decision partially denying approval of the settlement, and that motion is pending.
 
Beginning in mid-July 2002, 12 putative class action lawsuits were filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. In October 2002, these cases were consolidated under the caption In re American Express Company Securities Litigation. These lawsuits allege violations of the federal securities laws and the common law in connection with alleged misstatements regarding certain investments in high-yield bonds and write-downs in the 2000-2001 timeframe. The purported class covers the period from July 26, 1999 to July 17, 2001. The actions seek unspecified compensatory damages as well as disgorgement, punitive damages, attorneys’ fees and costs, and interest. On March 31, 2004, the Court granted the Company’s motion to dismiss the lawsuit. Plaintiffs appealed the dismissal to the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit. In August 2006, the Court of Appeals, without expressing any views whatsoever on the merits of the cases, vacated the District Court’s judgment and remanded all claims to the District Court for further proceedings. Plaintiffs filed an amended complaint on January 5, 2007. The Company subsequently filed a motion to dismiss the amended complaint, which motion was granted in September 2008. Plaintiffs appealed the dismissal, and in May 2010, the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit affirmed the dismissal. Plaintiffs filed for rehearing and rehearing en banc with the Second Circuit in June 2010, which motions were denied by the Court. Plaintiffs’ time to appeal to seek review of the decision by the U.S. Supreme Court has expired.
 
U.S. Card Services and Global Merchant Services Matters
 
Merchant Cases
 
Since July 2003 the Company has been named in a number of putative class actions in which the plaintiffs allege an unlawful antitrust tying arrangement between certain of the Company’s charge cards and credit cards in violation of various state and federal laws. These cases have all been consolidated in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York under the caption: In re American Express Merchants’ Litigation. A case making similar allegations was also filed in the Southern District of New York in July 2004 captioned: The Marcus Corporation v. American Express Company et al. The Marcus case is not consolidated. The plaintiffs in these actions seek injunctive relief and an unspecified amount of damages. In April 2004, the Company filed a motion to dismiss all the actions filed prior to the date of its motion. In March 2006, that motion was granted, with the Court finding the claims of the plaintiffs to be subject to arbitration. Plaintiffs asked the District Court to reconsider its dismissal. That request was denied. The plaintiffs appealed the District Court’s arbitration ruling and in January 2009, the United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit reversed the District Court. The Company filed with the United States Supreme Court a petition of certiorari from the Second Circuit’s arbitration ruling. On May 3, 2010, the Supreme Court granted the Company’s petition, vacated the judgment of the Second Circuit and remanded the case back to the Second Circuit for further consideration. The matter remains pending in the Second Circuit. The Company also filed a motion to dismiss the action filed by The Marcus Corporation, which was denied in July 2005. In October 2007, The Marcus Corporation filed a motion seeking certification of a class. In March 2009, the Court denied the plaintiffs’ motion for class certification, without prejudicing their right to remake such a motion upon resolution of the pending summary judgment motion. In April 2009, the Court denied plaintiffs’ motion for reconsideration of the March 2009 order. In September 2008, American Express moved for summary judgment seeking dismissal of The Marcus Corporation’s complaint, and The Marcus Corporation cross-moved for partial summary judgment on the issue of liability. A decision on the summary judgment motions is pending. A case captioned Hayama Inc. v. American Express Company et al. , which makes similar allegations as those in the actions described above, was filed and remains in the Superior Court of California, Los Angeles County (filed December 2003). The Company continues to request that the California Superior Court that is hearing the Hayama action stay such action. To date the Hayama action has been stayed.


94


Table of Contents

In February 2009, an amended complaint was filed in In re American Express Merchants’ Litigation . The amended complaint contains a single count alleging a violation of federal antitrust laws through an alleged unlawful tying of: (a) corporate, small business and/or personal charge card services; and (b) Blue, Costco and standard GNS credit card services. In addition, in February 2009, a new complaint making the same allegations as made in the amended complaint filed in In re American Express Merchants’ Litigation was also filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. That new case is captioned Greenporter LLC and Bar Hama LLC, on behalf of themselves and all others similarly situated v. American Express Company and American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc.   Proceedings in the Greenporter action and on the amended complaint filed in In re American Express Merchants’ Litigation have been held in abeyance pending the disposition of the motions for summary judgment in the Marcus case.
 
Beginning in August 2005, the Company has been named in a number of putative class actions alleging that the Company’s “anti-steering” policies and contractual provisions violate United States antitrust laws. Those cases were consolidated in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York under the caption In re American Express Anti-Steering Rules Antitrust Litigation . The plaintiffs’ complaint in that consolidated action seeks injunctive relief and unspecified damages. These plaintiffs agreed that a stay would be imposed with regard to their respective actions pending the appeal of the Court’s arbitration ruling discussed above. Given the 2009 ruling of the Second Circuit (described above in connection with In re American Express Merchants’ Litigation ), the stay was lifted, and American Express’ response to the complaint was filed in April 2009. The Court entered a scheduling order on December 28, 2009. In July 2010 the Court entered an order partially staying the case pending the Second Circuit’s arbitration ruling (following the 2010 remand by the Supreme Court described above in connection with In re American Express Merchants’ Litigation ). In June 2010, the attorneys representing the plaintiffs in In re American Express Anti-Steering Rules Antitrust Litigation filed an action making similar allegations captioned National Supermarkets Association v. American Express and American Express Travel Related Services . Upon filing, the plaintiffs designated that case as “related” to In re American Express Anti-Steering Rules Antitrust Litigation . By agreement of the parties, that case has also been partially stayed pending the Second Circuit’s arbitration ruling referenced above.
 
In June 2008, five separate lawsuits were filed against American Express Company in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York alleging that the Company’s “anti-steering” provisions in its merchant acceptance agreements with the merchant plaintiffs violate federal antitrust laws. As alleged by the plaintiffs, these provisions prevent merchants from offering consumers incentives to use alternative forms of payments when consumers wish to use an American Express-branded card. The five suits were filed by each of Rite-Aid Corp., CVS Pharmacy Inc., Walgreen Co., Bi-Lo LLC., and H.E. Butt Grocery Company. The plaintiff in each action seeks damages and injunctive relief. American Express filed its answer to these complaints and also filed a motion to dismiss these complaints as time barred. The Court denied the Company’s motion to dismiss the complaints in March 2010. On October 1, 2010, the parties to these actions agreed to stay all proceedings pending related mediations, and Magistrate Judge Ramon E. Reyes entered an order staying these actions on October 18, 2010. The parties have since notified the Court that those mediations have reached impasses. On January 21, 2011, the following parties filed lawsuits making similar allegations that the Company’s “anti-steering” provisions violate antitrust laws: Meijer, Inc., Publix Super Markets, Inc., Raley’s Inc., Supervalu, Inc., The Kroger Co., Safeway, Inc., Ahold U.S.A., Inc., Albertson’s LLC, Hy-Vee, Inc., and The Great Atlantic & Pacific Tea Company, Inc.
 
In November 2010, two putative class action complaints making allegations similar to those in In re American Express Anti-Steering Rules Antitrust Litigation were filed in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York by Firefly Air Solutions, LLC d/b/a 128 Café and Plymouth Oil Corp. d/b/a Liberty Gas Station. In addition, in December 2010, a putative class action complaint making similar allegations, and seeking certification of a Wisconsin-only class, was filed by Treehouse Inc. d/b/a Treehouse Gift & Home in the United States District Court for the Western District of Wisconsin. In January 2011, a putative class complaint, captioned Il Forno v. American Express Centurion Bank , seeking certification of a California-only class and making allegations similar to those in In re American Express Anti-Steering Rules Antitrust Litigation, was filed in United States District Court for the Central District of California.


95


Table of Contents

On February 7, 2011, in response to a transfer motion filed by the plaintiffs in the Plymouth Oil action discussed above, the United States Judicial Panel on Multi-District Litigation entered an order centralizing the following actions discussed above in the Eastern District of New York for coordinated or consolidated pretrial proceedings before the Honorable Nicholas G. Garaufis: (a) the putative class action that had been previously pending in the Southern District of New York captioned In re American Express Anti-Steering Rules Antitrust Litigation ; (b) the putative class actions already pending in the Eastern District of New York filed by Firefly Air Solutions, LLC and by Plymouth Oil Corp.; and (c) the individual merchant suits already pending in the Eastern District of New York. On February 15, 2011, the United States Judicial Panel on Multi-District Litigation issued a conditional transfer order centralizing the related putative class actions pending in the Central District of California and Western District of Wisconsin before Judge Garaufis in the Eastern District of New York. It is expected that this conditional order will soon become final, and that those actions will be centralized before Judge Garaufis. A hearing has been scheduled for March 2, 2011 to discuss scheduling and coordination of the cases that are the subject of coordinated or consolidated pretrial proceedings under the Multi-District Litigation Panel Order and the DOJ and attorneys general litigation discussed above.
 
Other Cases
 
In September 2010, a putative class action, captioned Meeks v. American Express Centurion Bank , was filed in Fulton County Superior Court, Georgia. In October 2010, the Company removed the matter to federal court. The complaint alleges that plaintiff opened an account in 2005 with an interest rate of prime plus an additional marginal rate of 2.99%. Plaintiff contends that he was promised that the marginal rate would remain fixed. Plaintiff alleges that beginning in December 2008 the marginal rate began to increase. Plaintiff asserts claims for breach of contract, covenant of good faith and fair dealing, unconscionability, unjust enrichment and duress. Plaintiff seeks to certify a nationwide class of all American Express Cardmembers who received unilateral interest rate increases despite their accounts being in good standing. Plaintiff has filed a motion to remand the case from federal court back to state court, and that motion is pending.
 
In June 2009, a putative class action, captioned Mesi v. American Express Centurion Bank , was filed in the United States District Court for the Central District of California. The complaint seeks to certify a class of American Express Cardmembers with billing addresses in 16 different states “whose interest rates on their outstanding balances were retroactively increased” by the Company. The complaint seeks, among other things, damages “in excess of $5,000,000” and unspecified injunctive relief. The complaint has been amended twice by plaintiff. On December 7, 2009, the Court ordered that the matter be stayed pending decisions on relevant legal issues in other cases not involving American Express.
 
In October 2009, a putative class action, captioned Lopez, et al. v. American Express Bank, FSB and American Express Centurion Bank , was filed in the United States District Court for the Central District of California. The complaint seeks to certify a nationwide class of American Express Cardmembers whose interest rates were changed from fixed to variable in or around August 2009 or otherwise increased. American Express filed a motion to compel arbitration, and plaintiff has amended their complaint to limit the class to California residents only. The Company filed a revised motion to compel arbitration and a motion to dismiss the amended complaint. Both motions were denied by the Court. Subsequently, in response to a request by the Company, the Court stayed the action pending the outcome of a case captioned AT&T Mobility v. Concepcion , which is pending before the United States Supreme Court and may impact the question of whether the Company’s motion to compel arbitration should have been granted.
 
In September 2001, Hoffman, et al. v. American Express Travel Related Services Company, et al. was filed in the Superior Court of the State of California, Alameda County. Plaintiffs in that case claim that American Express erroneously charged Cardmember accounts in connection with its airflight insurance programs because in certain circumstances customers must request refunds, as disclosed in materials for the voluntary program. In January 2006, the Court certified a class of American Express charge Cardmembers asserting claims for breach of contract and conversion under New York law, with a subclass of California residents asserting violations of California Business & Professions Code §§ 17200 and 17500, and a subclass of New York residents asserting violation of New York General Business Law § 349. American Express sought to compel arbitration of the claims of all non-California residents. The motion to compel arbitration was


96


Table of Contents

denied by the trial court, which decision was affirmed by the California Court of Appeal on July 6, 2007. The case went to trial in November 2008 and January to February 2009. American Express was granted judgment on all counts. The plaintiffs have filed a notice of appeal; American Express has filed a protective notice of appeal to preserve certain legal issues.
 
In addition, a case making the same factual allegations (purportedly on behalf of a different class of Cardmembers) as those in the Hoffman case is pending in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of New York, entitled Law Enforcement Systems v. American Express et al. That case was stayed pending the trial in the Hoffman action. After judgment was rendered for American Express in Hoffman , the plaintiff in Law Enforcement Systems asked the Court to lift the stay and to allow plaintiff to obtain certain Cardmember information. The Court denied the request. No other activity has occurred in that case. Further, on October 30, 2008, a putative class action on behalf of American Express credit Cardmembers making the same allegations as those raised in the Hoffman and Law Enforcement Systems cases was filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of Florida, captioned Kass v. American Express Card Services, Inc., American Express Company and American Express Travel Related Services . On March 11, 2009, the Kass Court entered an order granting the joint motion of the parties to stay the case, and the Court also administratively closed the case.
 
In June 2006, a putative class action captioned Homa v. American Express Company et al. was filed in the United States District Court for the District of New Jersey. The case alleges, generally, misleading and fraudulent advertising of the “tiered” “up to 5 percent” cash rebates with the Blue Cash card. The complaint initially sought certification of a nationwide class consisting of “all persons who applied for and received an American Express Blue Cash card during the period from September 30, 2003 to the present and who did not get the rebate or rebates provided for in the offer.” On December 1, 2006, however, plaintiff filed a First Amended Complaint dropping the nationwide class claims and asserting claims only on behalf of New Jersey residents who “while so residing in New Jersey, applied for and received an American Express Blue Cash card during the period from September 30, 2003 to the present.” The plaintiff seeks unspecified damages and other unspecified relief that the District Court deems appropriate. In May 2007, the District Court granted the Company’s motion to compel individual arbitration and dismissed the complaint. Plaintiff appealed that decision to the United States Court of Appeals for the Third Circuit, and in February 2009, the Third Circuit reversed the decision and remanded the case back to the District Court for further proceedings. In October 2009, a putative class action captioned Pagsolingan v. American Express Company, et al. was filed in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California. That case made allegations that were largely similar to those made in Homa , except that Pagsolingan alleged multiple theories of liability and sought to certify a nationwide class of “[a]ll persons who applied for and received an American Express Blue Cash card during the period from September 30, 2003 to the present and who did not get the rebate or rebates provided for in the offer.” In May 2010, plaintiffs voluntarily dismissed the Pagsolingan case in its entirety. Subsequently, in response to a request by the Company, the District Court stayed the Homa action pending the outcome of the case AT&T Mobility v. Concepcion , which is pending before the United States Supreme Court and may impact the question of whether the Company’s motion to compel arbitration should have been granted.
 
In July 2004, a purported class action captioned Ross, et al. v. American Express Company, American Express Travel Related Services and American Express Centurion Bank was filed in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. The complaint alleges that American Express conspired with Visa, MasterCard and Diners Club in the setting of foreign currency conversion rates and in the inclusion of arbitration clauses in certain of their cardmember agreements. The suit seeks injunctive relief and unspecified damages. The class is defined as “all Visa, MasterCard and Diners Club general-purpose cardholders who used cards issued by any of the MDL Defendant Banks.” American Express cardholders are not part of the class. In September 2005, the District Court denied the Company’s motion to dismiss the action and preliminarily certified an injunction class of Visa and MasterCard cardholders to determine the validity of Visa’s and MasterCard’s cardmember arbitration clauses. American Express filed a motion for reconsideration with the District Court, which motion was denied in September 2006. The Company filed an appeal from the District Court’s order denying its motion to compel arbitration. In October 2008, the United States Court of Appeals


97


Table of Contents

for the Second Circuit denied the Company’s appeal and remanded the case to the District Court for further proceedings. In January 2010, the Court (1) certified a damage class of all Visa, MasterCard and Diners Club general purpose cardholders who used cards issued by any of the alleged co-conspiring banks during the period July 22, 2000 to November 8, 2006, who were assessed a foreign exchange transaction fee or surcharge and who have submitted valid claims in In re Currency Conversion Antitrust Litigation , and (2) denied American Express’ motion to amend its answer to add the affirmative defense of release. In June 2010, the Company filed a motion for summary judgment with the Court, which seeks dismissal of plaintiff’s complaint, and that motion is pending.
 
International Matters
 
In November 2006, in a matter captioned Sylvan Adams v. Amex Bank of Canada filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Montreal (originally filed in November 2004), the Superior Court authorized a class action against Amex Bank of Canada. The plaintiff alleges that prior to December 2003, Amex Bank of Canada charged a foreign currency conversion commission on transactions to purchase goods and services in currencies other than Canadian dollars and failed to disclose the commissions in monthly billing statements or solicitations directed to prospective cardmembers. The class, consisting of all Cardmembers in Quebec that purchased goods or services in a foreign currency prior to December 2003, claims reimbursement of all foreign currency conversion commissions, CDN$1,000 in punitive damages per class member, interest and fees and costs. The trial in the Adams action commenced, and was completed, in December 2008 after the conclusion of the trial in the Marcotte action described below. The Superior Court rendered a judgment in favor of the plaintiffs against Amex Bank of Canada on June 11, 2009, and awarded damages in the amount of CDN$11.2 million plus interest on the non-disclosure claims. In addition, the Superior Court awarded punitive damages in the amount of CDN$2.2 million. The judgment has been appealed by Amex Bank of Canada. The appeal is scheduled to be heard by the Quebec Court of Appeal in September 2011.
 
In May 2006, in a matter captioned Marcotte v. Bank of Montreal et al. , filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Montreal (originally filed in April 2003), the Superior Court authorized a class action against Amex Bank of Canada, Bank of Montreal, Toronto-Dominion Bank, Royal Bank of Canada, Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce, Scotiabank, National Bank of Canada, Laurentian Bank of Canada and Citibank Canada. The action alleges that conversion commissions made on foreign currency transactions are credit charges under the Quebec Consumer Protection Act (the QCPA) and cannot be charged prior to the 21-day grace period under the QCPA. The class includes all persons holding a credit card issued by one of the defendants to whom fees were charged since April 17, 2000, for transactions made in foreign currency before expiration of the period of 21 days following the statement of account. The class claims reimbursement of all foreign currency conversions, CDN$400 per class member for trouble, inconvenience and punitive damages, interest and fees and costs. The trial in the Marcotte action commenced in September 2008 and was completed in November. The Superior Court rendered a judgment in favor of the plaintiffs against Amex Bank of Canada on June 11, 2009, and awarded damages in the amount of CDN$7.1 million plus interest on the QCPA claims and individual claims to be made on the non-disclosure claims. In addition, the Superior Court awarded punitive damages in the amount of CDN$21.52 per cardmember. The judgment has been appealed by all banks, including Amex Bank of Canada. The appeal is scheduled to be heard by the Quebec Court of Appeal in September 2011.
 
In November 2010 and December 2010, two motions to authorize class actions were filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Montreal, under the class representative names of Giroux and Marcotte . Both class actions set out the same allegations as the Marcotte class action filed in 2006 except the timeframe for the new class actions starts as of January 1, 2008 wherein the Marcotte case under appeal ends as of December 31, 2007. Both class actions are pending certification as two law firms filed the same class action. A judge will decide which case will be certified and who will represent the class going forward.
 
While the Marcotte and Adams cases proceeded before the Superior Court, several class actions filed in the Province of Quebec remained dormant; however, those actions (set out below) have recently become active.


98


Table of Contents

In November 2006, in a matter captioned Option Consommateurs and Benoit Fortin v. Amex Bank of Canada filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Montreal (originally filed in July 2003), the Superior Court authorized a class action against Amex Bank of Canada. The plaintiff alleges the defendant violated the QCPA by imposing finance charges on credit card transactions prior to 21 days following the receipt of the statement containing the charge. It is alleged that the QCPA provisions, which require a 21-day grace period prior to imposing finance charges, apply to credit cards issued by Amex Bank of Canada in Quebec and all finance charges imposed within the 21 day grace period are contrary to the QCPA. The class seeks reimbursement of all such finance charges, CDN$200 in punitive damages per class member, interest, fees and costs. A motion was brought in October 2010 to extend the class period from July 18, 2000 to August 31, 2010. No discovery has been scheduled in this matter but one has taken place in a parallel class action against several banks in late 2010. Further discoveries of a co-defendant will take place in early 2011. In May 2005, a motion for authorization of a similar class action was filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Quebec City captioned as Option Consommateurs and Joel-Christian St-Pierre v. Bank of Montreal et al alleging that Amex unlawfully charged interest 21 days from the date of the printing of the statement as opposed to the date of the mailing of the statement. The proposed class seeks reimbursement of all finance charges imposed, CDN$100 in punitive damages per class member, interest and fees and costs. The St. Pierre class motion is stayed pending final judgment in Marcotte .
 
In October 2007, in a matter captioned Option Consommateurs and Marylou Corriveau v. Amex Bank of Canada et al. , filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Montreal (originally filed in December 2006), the Superior Court authorized a class action against Amex Bank of Canada, Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce, National Bank of Canada, Royal Bank of Canada, Bank of Nova Scotia, Banque Laurentienne du Canada, President’s Choice Bank, Toronto Dominion Bank, Bank of Montreal, Citibank Canada, Federation de Caisses Desjardins du Quebec and MBNA Canada. The action alleges that cash advance fees for transactions in Canada or abroad cannot be charged under QCPA. The class includes all persons party to a variable credit agreement concluded in Quebec for a purpose other than the operation of a business and who paid the defendants from October 4, 2001. A motion was granted in October 2010 to extend the class period from October 4, 2001 to September 30, 2010. It is alleged the QCPA provisions apply to credit cards issued by Amex Bank of Canada in Quebec and all cash advance fees imposed are contrary to the QCPA. The class seeks reimbursement of all such cash advance fees, CDN$200 in punitive damages per class member, interest and costs. No discovery has been scheduled in this matter but one has taken place in a parallel class action against several banks in late 2010. Further discoveries of a co-defendant will take place in early 2011.
 
In October 2007, in a matter captioned Option Consommateurs and Serge Lamoureux v. Amex Bank of Canada et al. , filed in the Superior Court of Quebec, District of Montreal (originally filed in December 2006), the Court authorized a class action against Amex Bank of Canada, Banque du Montreal, Banque Royale du Canada, Banque Nationale du Canada, Banque Canadienne Imperiale de Commerce, Citibanque Canada, MBNA Canada and Banque de Nouvelle-Ecosse. The plaintiff alleges the defendants violated the QCPA, by unilaterally increasing credit card limits without consent and charging over limit fees from January 12, 2001. There are two distinct areas of the claim. Amex is not part of the first portion of the claim dealing with the unilateral increase without consent under the QCPA. Amex is included in the second portion of the claim permitting Cardmembers to make charges at the point of sale that exceed their credit limit thereby incurring an over limit fee for these occurrences contrary to the QCPA. The action alleges the QCPA provisions apply to credit cards issued by Amex Bank of Canada in Quebec. A motion was granted in October 2010 to extend the class period from January 12, 2001 to September 30, 2010. The class seeks reimbursement of all over limit fees imposed, CDN$200 in punitive damages per class member, interest and costs. Discovery of Amex was held in December 2010.


99


Table of Contents

 
PART II
 
ITEM 5.   MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES
 
(a) Our common stock trades principally on The New York Stock Exchange under the trading symbol AXP. As of December 31, 2010, we had 32,776 common shareholders of record. You can find price and dividend information concerning our common stock in Note 27 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, which can be found on page 119 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which note is incorporated herein by reference. For information on dividend restrictions, please see “Financial Review — Share Repurchases and Dividends” on page 41 and Note 23 on page 111 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which information is incorporated herein by reference. You can find information on securities authorized for issuance under our equity compensation plans under the captions “Executive Compensation — Share Plans,” and “Executive Compensation — Equity Compensation Plan Information” to be contained in the Company’s definitive 2011 proxy statement for our Annual Meeting of Shareholders, which is scheduled to be held on May 2, 2011. The information to be found under such captions is incorporated herein by reference. Our definitive 2011 proxy statement for our Annual Meeting of Shareholders is expected to be filed with the SEC in March 2011 (and, in any event, not later than 120 days after the close of our most recently completed fiscal year).
 
Under the Treasury’s Capital Purchase Program pursuant to the Emergency Economic Stabilization Act of 2008, we announced on January 9, 2009, the receipt of aggregate proceeds of $3.39 billion from the Treasury in exchange for the sale to the Treasury of (i) 3,388,890 shares of our Fixed Rate Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series A, par value $1.66 2 / 3 per share (the “Series A Preferred Stock”), having a liquidation preference per share equal to $1,000 and (ii) a ten-year warrant (the “Warrant”) to purchase up to 24,264,129 shares of our common shares at an initial per share exercise price of $20.95 per share. We repurchased all of the Series A Preferred Stock in June 2009 and repurchased the Warrant in July 2009. For additional information about these transactions, please see our Current Reports on Form 8-K filed on January 9, 2009, June 17, 2009 and July 29, 2009.
 
(b) Not applicable.
 
(c) ISSUER PURCHASES OF SECURITIES
 
The table below sets forth the information with respect to purchases of the Company’s common stock made by or on behalf of the Company during the quarter ended December 31, 2010.
 
                                 
                Maximum
            Total Number
  Number
            of Shares
  of Shares that
            Purchased as
  May Yet Be
    Total Number
      Part of Publicly
  Purchased Under
    of Shares
  Average Price
  Announced Plans
  Plans or
    Purchased   Paid Per Share   or Programs(3)   Programs
 
October 1-31, 2010
                               
Repurchase program(1)
    4,555,028     $ 40.16       4,555,028       95,463,940  
Employee transactions(2)
    (36 )   $ 35.54       N/A       N/A  
November 1-30, 2010
                               
Repurchase program(1)
    9,610,800     $ 42.34       9,610,800       85,853,140  
Employee transactions(2)
    29,770     $ 42.00       N/A       N/A  
December 1-31, 2010
                               
Repurchase program(1)
        $             85,853,140  
Employee transactions(2)
    1,004     $ 43.05       N/A       N/A  
Total
                               
Repurchase program(1)
    14,165,828     $ 41.64       14,165,828        
Employee transactions(2)
    30,738     $ 42.05       N/A       N/A  
 


100


Table of Contents

(1) As of December 31, 2010, there were approximately 86 million shares of common stock remaining under the authorization of the Company’s Board of Directors. Such authorization does not have an expiration date, and at present, there is no intention to modify or otherwise rescind such authorization. Since the program was first announced in September 1994, the Company has acquired 684 million shares of common stock under various Board authorizations to repurchase up to an aggregate of 770 million shares, including purchases made under agreements with third parties.
 
(2) Includes: (a) shares delivered by or deducted from holders of employee stock options who exercised options (granted under the Company’s incentive compensation plans) in satisfaction of the exercise price and/or tax withholding obligation of such holders and (b) restricted shares withheld (under the terms of grants under the Company’s incentive compensation plans) to offset tax withholding obligations that occur upon vesting and release of restricted shares. The Company’s incentive compensation plans provide that the value of the shares delivered or attested to, or withheld, be based on the price of the Company’s common stock on the date the relevant transaction occurs.
 
(3) Share purchases under publicly announced programs are made pursuant to open market purchases or privately negotiated transactions (including with employee benefit plans) as market conditions warrant and at prices the Company deems appropriate.
 
ITEM 6.   SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
 
The “Consolidated Five-Year Summary of Selected Financial Data” appearing on page 120 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 7.   MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
 
The information set forth under the heading “Financial Review” appearing on pages 20-64 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 7A.   QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK
 
The information set forth under the heading “Risk Management” appearing on pages 48-50 and in Note 12 to our Consolidated Financial Statements on pages 92-95 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders is incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 8.   FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA
 
The “Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” (PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP), the “Consolidated Financial Statements” and the “Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements” appearing on pages 67-119 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders are incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 9.   CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE
 
Not applicable.
 
ITEM 9A.   CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
 
The Company’s management, with the participation of the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, has evaluated the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Exchange Act as of the end of the period covered by this Report. Based on such evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer have concluded that, as of the end of such period, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures are effective and designed to ensure that the information required to be disclosed in our reports filed or submitted under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the requisite time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms, and that it is accumulated and communicated to our management, including


101


Table of Contents

our principal executive officer and principal financial officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.
 
There have not been any changes in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting (as such term is defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Exchange Act) during the Company’s fourth quarter that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
“Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting,” which sets forth management’s evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, and the “Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010, appearing on pages 65-66 of our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, are incorporated herein by reference.
 
ITEM 9B.   OTHER INFORMATION
 
On February 24, 2011, the Board of Directors of the Company approved an amendment to Section 2.2 of the Company’s By-laws (the “Amendment”). Section 2.2 was amended to allow shareholders holding at least 25% of the outstanding common stock of the Company, determined to be “Net Long Shares” (as described in the Amendment), to request that the Company hold a special meeting of shareholders.
 
Shareholders requesting the special meeting are required to disclose certain information, including information required by the Company’s advance notice By-laws, with respect to any proposed business or director nominations at the special meeting. Additionally, the shareholders requesting the special meeting must acknowledge that any reduction in Net Long Shares held by the requesting shareholders acts as a revocation of the meeting request to the extent of the reduction and agree to inform the Company following any reduction in Net Long Shares held by the requesting shareholders. The requesting shareholders are required to update the disclosure required by the Amendment as of the record date for the special meeting (and, in the case of documentation of their share ownership, as of a date no later than five business days before the scheduled date of the special meeting).
 
The Amendment enumerates certain instances in which a special meeting need not be called, including because the request for the special meeting: is contrary to the By-laws; is not an appropriate subject for shareholder action; is made less than 90 days prior to the anniversary date of the preceding annual meeting; relates to a substantially similar item (other than election or removal of directors) that was voted on in the past year; relates to the election or removal of directors and a meeting at which directors were elected or removed was held within the past 90 days; relates to a substantially similar item, including election or removal of directors, that will be voted on at an annual or special meeting to be held within 120 days; or was made in violation of the proxy rules.
 
The foregoing description of the Amendment does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the amended By-laws which are attached hereto as Exhibit 3.5 and incorporated by reference herein.
 
PART III
 
ITEMS 10, 11, 12 and 13.   DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE; EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION; SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS; CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR INDEPENDENCE
 
We expect to file with the SEC, in March 2011 (and, in any event, not later than 120 days after the close of our last fiscal year), a definitive proxy statement, pursuant to SEC Regulation 14A in connection with our


102


Table of Contents

Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held May 2, 2011, which involves the election of directors. The following information to be included in such proxy statement is incorporated herein by reference:
 
  •  information included under the caption “Corporate Governance — Independence of Directors”
 
  •  information included in the table under the caption “Board Meetings — Membership on Board Committees”
 
  •  information under the captions “Corporate Governance — Compensation and Benefits Committee — Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation” and “Report of the Compensation and Benefits Committee”
 
  •  information included under the caption “Corporate Governance — Audit and Risk Committee”
 
  •  information included under the caption “Compensation of Directors”
 
  •  information included under the caption “Ownership of Our Common Shares”
 
  •  information included under the caption “Item 1 — Election of Directors”
 
  •  information included under the caption “Executive Compensation”
 
  •  information under the caption “Certain Relationships and Transactions”
 
  •  information under the caption “Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance.”
 
In addition, the information regarding executive officers called for by Item 401(b) of Regulation S-K may be found under the caption “Executive Officers of the Company” in this Report.
 
We have adopted a set of Corporate Governance Principles, which together with the charters of the five standing committees of the Board of Directors (Audit and Risk; Compensation and Benefits; Innovation and Technology; Nominating and Governance; and Public Responsibility), our Code of Conduct (which constitutes the Company’s code of ethics), and the Code of Business Conduct for the Members of the Board of Directors, provide the framework for the governance of the Company. A complete copy of our Corporate Governance Principles, the charters of each of the Board committees, the Code of Conduct (which applies not only to our Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and Comptroller, but also to all other employees of the Company) and the Code of Business Conduct for the Members of the Board of Directors may be found by clicking on the “Corporate Governance” link found on our Investor Relations Web site at http://ir.americanexpress.com. You may also access our Investor Relations Web site through the Company’s main Web site at www.americanexpress.com by clicking on the “About American Express” link, which is located at the bottom of the Company’s homepage. (Information from such sites is not incorporated by reference into this Report.) You may also obtain free copies of these materials by writing to our Secretary at the Company’s headquarters.
 
ITEM 14.   PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES
 
The information set forth under the heading “Item 2 — Ratification of the Appointment of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm — Audit Fees;” “— Audit-Related Fees;” “— Tax Fees;” “— All Other Fees;” and “— Policy on Pre-Approval of Services Provided by Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm,” which will appear in the Company’s definitive proxy statement in connection with our Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held May 2, 2011, is incorporated herein by reference.
 
PART IV
 
ITEM 15.   EXHIBITS, FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
 
(a)


103


Table of Contents

1.  Financial Statements :
 
The financial statements filed as a part of this Report are listed on page F-1 hereof under “Index to Financial Statements,” which is incorporated herein by reference.
 
2.  Financial Statement Schedules :
 
All schedules are omitted since the required information is either not applicable, not deemed material, or shown in the respective financial statements or in notes thereto.
 
3.  Exhibits :
 
The list of exhibits required to be filed as exhibits to this Report is listed on pages E-1 through E-4 hereof under “Exhibit Index,” which is incorporated herein by reference.


104


Table of Contents

 
SIGNATURES
 
Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Company has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.
 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
/s/   DANIEL T. HENRY
Daniel T. Henry
Executive Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
 
February 25, 2011
 
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Company and in the capacities and on the date indicated.
 
     
     
/s/   Kenneth I. Chenault

Kenneth I. Chenault
Chairman, Chief Executive Officer and
Director
 
/s/   Jan Leschly

Jan Leschly
Director
     
/s/   Daniel T. Henry

Daniel T. Henry
Executive Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
 
/s/   Richard C. Levin

Richard C. Levin
Director
     
/s/   Joan C. Amble

Joan C. Amble
Executive Vice President and
Comptroller
 
/s/   Richard A. McGinn

Richard A. McGinn
Director
     
/s/   Daniel F. Akerson

Daniel F. Akerson
Director
 
/s/   Edward D. Miller

Edward D. Miller
Director
     
/s/   Charlene Barshefsky

Charlene Barshefsky
Director
 
/s/   Steven S Reinemund

Steven S Reinemund
Director
     
/s/   Ursula M. Burns

Ursula M. Burns
Director
 
/s/   Robert D. Walter

Robert D. Walter
Director
     
/s/   Peter Chernin

Peter Chernin
Director
 
/s/   Ronald A. Williams

Ronald A. Williams
Director
     
/s/   Theodore J. Leonsis

Theodore J. Leonsis
Director
   
 
February 25, 2011


105


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(Items 15(a)(1) and 15(a)(2) of Form 10-K)
 
                 
        Annual Report
        to Shareholders
    Form 10-K   (Page)
 
American Express Company and Subsidiaries:
               
Data incorporated by reference from 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders:
               
Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting
            65  
Report of independent registered public accounting firm (PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP)
            66  
Consolidated statements of income for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010
            68  
Consolidated balance sheets at December 31, 2010 and 2009
            69  
Consolidated statements of cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010
            70  
Consolidated statements of shareholders’ equity for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2010
            71  
Notes to consolidated financial statements
            72  
Consent of independent registered public accounting firm
    F-2          
Schedules:
               
 
All schedules for American Express Company and subsidiaries have been omitted since the required information is not present or not present in amounts sufficient to require submission of the schedule, or because the information required is included in the respective financial statements or notes thereto. Refer to Notes 5 and 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements in our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders for information on accounts receivable reserves, loan reserves and condensed financial information of the Parent Company only, respectively.
 
*     *     *
 
The Consolidated Financial Statements of American Express Company (including the report of independent registered public accounting firm) listed in the above index, which are included in our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, are hereby incorporated by reference. With the exception of the pages listed in the above index, unless otherwise incorporated by reference elsewhere in this Report, our 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders is not to be deemed filed as part of this report.


F-1


Table of Contents

Exhibit 23.1
 
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements (Form S-8 No. 2-46918, No. 2-59230, No. 2-64285, No. 2-73954, No. 2-89680, No. 33-01771, No. 33-02980, No. 33-28721, No. 33-33552, No. 33-36442, No. 33-48629, No. 33-62124, No. 33-65008, No. 33-53801, No. 333-12683, No. 333-41779, No. 333-52699, No. 333-73111, No. 333-38238, No. 333-98479; and No. 333-142710; Form S-3 No. 2-89469, No. 33-43268, No. 33-50997, No. 333-32525, No. 333-45445, No. 333-47085, No. 333-55761, No. 333-51828, No. 333-113768, No. 333-117835, No. 333-138032 and 333-162791) of American Express Company of our report dated February 25, 2011, relating to the consolidated financial statements and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, which appears in the 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which is incorporated by reference in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.
 
/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
 
New York, New York
February 25, 2011


F-2


Table of Contents

 
EXHIBIT INDEX
 
The following exhibits are filed as part of this Annual Report. The exhibit numbers preceded by an asterisk (*) indicate exhibits electronically filed herewith. All other exhibit numbers indicate exhibits previously filed and are hereby incorporated herein by reference. Exhibits numbered 10.1 through 10.34, 10.38, 10.39, 10.41, 10.42 and 10.44 through 10.46 are management contracts or compensatory plans or arrangements.
 
         
  3 .1   Company’s Restated Certificate of Incorporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-3, dated July 31, 1997 (Commission File No. 333-32525)).
  3 .2   Company’s Certificate of Amendment of the Certificate of Incorporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended March 31, 2000).
  3 .3   Company’s Certificate of Amendment of the Certificate of Incorporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.3 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended March 31, 2008).
  3 .4   Company’s Certificate of Amendment of the Certificate of Incorporation (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 3.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated January 7, 2009 (filed January 9, 2009)).
  *3 .5   Company’s By-Laws, as amended through February 24, 2011.
  4 .1   The instruments defining the rights of holders of long-term debt securities of the Company and its subsidiaries are omitted pursuant to Section(b)(4)(iii)(A) of Item 601 of Regulation S-K. The Company hereby agrees to furnish copies of these instruments to the SEC upon request.
  4 .2   Form of Global Note for $1,250,000,000 principal amount of 7.25% Notes due May 20, 2014 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) dated May 19, 2009).
  4 .3   Form of Global Note for $1,750,000,000 principal amount of 8.125% Notes due May 20, 2019 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) dated May 19, 2009).
  10 .1   American Express Company 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan, as amended through July 25, 2005 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2005).
  10 .2   American Express Company 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan Master Agreement, dated April 27, 1998 (for awards made prior to January 22, 2007) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended September 30, 2004).
  10 .3   Amendment of American Express Company 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan Master Agreement, dated April 27, 1998 (for awards made prior to January 22, 2007) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended March 31, 2000).
  10 .4   American Express Company 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan Master Agreement, dated January 22, 2007 (for awards made on or after such date) (as amended and restated effective January 1, 2009) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).
  10 .5   Form of award agreement for executive officers in connection with Portfolio Grants under the American Express Company 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan, as amended (for awards made after January 22, 2007) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated January 22, 2007 (filed January 26, 2007)).
  10 .6   Section 409A Amendments to form of award agreement for Portfolio Grants made under the American Express Company 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan, as amended (for awards made after January 22, 2007) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.6 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).


E-1


Table of Contents

         
  10 .7   American Express Company 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated April 23, 2007 (filed April 27, 2007)).
  *10 .8   American Express Company 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan Master Agreement (as amended and restated effective January 1, 2011).
  10 .9   Form of award agreement for executive officers in connection with Portfolio Grants under the American Express Company 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.13 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2007).
  10 .10   Section 409A Amendments to form of award agreement for Portfolio Grants made under the American Express Company 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.10 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).
  10 .11   Form of award agreement for executive officers in connection with Performance Grant awards (a/k/a Incentive Awards) under the American Express Company 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan (as amended and restated effective January 1, 2009) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.11 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).
  10 .12   American Express Company Deferred Compensation Plan for Directors and Advisors, as amended through January 1, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.13 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).
  10 .13   American Express Company 2007 Pay-for-Performance Deferral Program Document (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated November 20, 2006 (filed November 22, 2006)).
  10 .14   Description of amendments to 1994 — 2006 Pay-for-Performance Deferral Programs (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.13 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2006).
  10 .15   American Express Company 2006 Pay-for-Performance Deferral Program Guide (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated November 21, 2005 (filed November 23, 2005)).
  10 .16   American Express Company 2005 Pay-for-Performance Deferral Program Guide (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.10 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2004).
  10 .17   Description of American Express Company Pay-for-Performance Deferral Program (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. l-7657), dated November 22, 2004 (filed January 28, 2005)).
  10 .18   Amendment to the Pre-2008 Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans of American Express Company (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.19 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).
  10 .19   American Express Company Retirement Plan for Non-Employee Directors, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.12 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1988).
  10 .20   Certificate of Amendment of the American Express Company Retirement Plan for Non-Employee Directors dated March 21, 1996 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.11 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1995).
  10 .21   American Express Key Executive Life Insurance Plan, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.12 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 1991).
  10 .22   Amendment to American Express Company Key Executive Life Insurance Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended September 30, 1994).

E-2


Table of Contents

         
  10 .23   Amendment to American Express Company Key Executive Life Insurance Plan, effective as of January 22, 2007 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.22 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2006).
  *10 .24   Amendment to American Express Company Key Executive Life Insurance Plan, effective as of January 1, 2011.
  10 .25   American Express Key Employee Charitable Award Program for Education (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.13 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1990).
  10 .26   American Express Directors’ Charitable Award Program (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.14 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1990).
  10 .27   American Express Company Salary/Bonus Deferral Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.20 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1988).
  10 .28   Amendment to American Express Company Salary/Bonus Deferral Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.4 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended September 30, 1994).
  10 .29   American Express Company 1993 Directors’ Stock Option Plan, as amended (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.11 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended March 31, 2000).
  *10 .30   American Express Senior Executive Severance Plan, effective January 1, 1994 (as amended and restated through January 1, 2011).
  10 .31   Amendments of (i) the American Express Supplemental Retirement Plan, (ii) the American Express Salary/Bonus Deferral Plan and (iii) the American Express Key Executive Life Insurance Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.37 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1997).
  10 .32   American Express Retirement Restoration Plan (as amended and restated effective January 1, 2011) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) dated October 27, 2010 (filed November 2, 2010).
  10 .33   American Express Directors’ Stock Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.4 of the Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-8, dated December 9, 1997 (Commission File No. 333-41779)).
  *10 .34   American Express Annual Incentive Award Plan (as amended and restated effective January 1, 2011).
  10 .35   Agreement dated February 27, 1995 between the Company and Berkshire Hathaway Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.43 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 1994).
  10 .36   Agreement dated July 20, 1995 between the Company and Berkshire Hathaway Inc. and its subsidiaries (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended September 30, 1995).
  10 .37   Amendment dated September 8, 2000 to the agreement dated February 27, 1995 between the Company and Berkshire Hathaway Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 99.3 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) dated January 22, 2001).
  10 .38   Description of a special grant of a stock option and restricted stock award to Kenneth I. Chenault, the Company’s President and Chief Operating Officer (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended June 30, 1999).
  10 .39   American Express Company 2003 Share Equivalent Unit Plan for Directors, as amended and restated, effective January 1, 2009 (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.40 of the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the year ended December 31, 2008).

E-3


Table of Contents

         
  10 .40   Tax Allocation Agreement, dated as of September 30, 2005, by and between American Express Company and Ameriprise Financial, Inc. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated October 6, 2005).
  10 .41   Form of award agreement for executive officers in connection with Portfolio Grant 2009-2010 under the American Express Company 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended March 31, 2009).
  10 .42   Letter Agreement, dated October 2, 2009, between the Company and Alfred F. Kelly, Jr. (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended September 30, 2009).
  10 .43   Time Sharing Agreement, dated May 27, 2010, by and between National Express Company and Kenneth I. Chenault (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended June 30, 2010).
  10 .44   Consulting Services Agreement, effective July 19, 2010, by and between American Express Company and Theodore J. Leonsis (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.2 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended June 30, 2010).
  10 .45   Description of Compensation Payable to Non-Management Directors (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.3 of the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q (Commission File No. 1-7657) for the quarter ended June 30, 2010).
  10 .46   Company’s Retirement Restoration Plan (f/k/a Supplemental Retirement Plan) (as amended and restated effective as of January 1, 2011) (incorporated by reference to Exhibit 10.1 of the Company’s Report on Form 8-K (Commission File No. 1-7657), dated October 27, 2010 (filed November 2, 2010)).
  *12     Computation in Support of Ratio of Earnings to Fixed Charges.
  *13     Portions of the Company’s 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders that are incorporated herein by reference.
  *21     Subsidiaries of the Company.
  *23 .1   Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (contained on page F-2 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K).
  *31 .1   Certification of Kenneth I. Chenault, Chief Executive Officer, pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
  *31 .2   Certification of Daniel T. Henry, Chief Financial Officer, pursuant to Rule 13a-14(a) promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
  *32 .1   Certification of Kenneth I. Chenault, Chief Executive Officer, and Daniel T. Henry, Chief Financial Officer, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
  101 .INS   XBRL Instance Document**
  101 .SCH   XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document**
  101 .CAL   XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document**
  101 .LAB   XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document**
  101 .PRE   XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document**
  101 .DEF   XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document**
 
 
** These interactive data files are furnished and deemed not filed or part of a registration statement or prospectus for purposes of Sections 11 or 12 of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, are deemed not filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and otherwise are not subject to liability under those sections.

E-4


Table of Contents

 
UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
 
 
Form 10-K
 
ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF
THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
 
 
     
For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010
  Commission File No. 1-7657
 
 
American Express Company
(Exact name of Company as specified in charter)
 
EXHIBITS
 
 

Exhibit 3.5
 
BY-LAWS
 
OF
 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
(A New York Corporation)
 
 
(As amended and restated as of February 24, 2011)


 

BY-LAWS
OF
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
ARTICLE I
 
OFFICES
 
SECTION 1.1 PRINCIPAL OFFICE. The principal office of the corporation within the State of New York shall be located in the City of New York, County of New York.
 
SECTION 1.2 OTHER OFFICES. The corporation may have such other offices and places of business within and without the State of New York as the business of the corporation may require.
 
ARTICLE II
 
SHAREHOLDERS
 
SECTION 2.1 ANNUAL MEETING. The annual meeting of the shareholders for the election of directors and for the transaction of other business shall be held at such place, within or without the State of New York, on such date and at such time as shall be fixed by the Board of Directors (hereinafter referred to as the “Board”) from time to time. If the election of directors shall not be held on the date so fixed for the annual meeting, a special meeting of the shareholders for the election of directors shall be called forthwith in the manner provided herein for special meetings, or as may otherwise be provided by law. (B.C.L. Section 602.)(Footnote 1)
 
SECTION 2.2 SPECIAL MEETINGS. Special meetings of the shareholders may be held for such purpose or purposes as shall be specified in a call for such meeting made by (i) resolution of the Board or by a majority of the directors then in office or by the Chief Executive Officer, or (ii) solely to the extent required by this Section 2.2, by the Secretary. (B.C.L. Section 602(c).)
 
Subject to the provisions of this Section 2.2 and all other applicable sections of these by-laws, a special meeting of shareholders shall be called by the Secretary of the corporation (the “Secretary”) upon written request (a “Special Meeting Request”) to the Secretary of one or more record holders of common shares of the corporation representing not less than 25% of the voting power of all outstanding common shares of the corporation which shares are determined to be “Net Long Shares” in accordance with this Section 2.2 (the “Requisite Percentage”).
 
For purposes of this Section 2.2 and for determining the Requisite Percentage, Net Long Shares shall be limited to the number of shares beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by any shareholder or beneficial owner that constitute such person’s net long position as defined in Rule 14e-4 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), provided that for purposes of such definition the date the tender offer is first announced shall instead be the date for determining and/or documenting a shareholder’s or beneficial owner’s Net Long Shares and the reference to the highest tender price shall refer to the market price on such date and, to the extent not covered by such definition, reduced by any shares as to which such person does not, at the time the Special Meeting Request is delivered to the Company, have the right to vote or direct the vote at the Special Meeting or as to which such person has entered into a derivative or other agreement, arrangement or understanding that hedges or transfers, in whole or in part, directly or indirectly, any of the economic consequences of ownership of such shares. In addition, to the extent any affiliates of the Requesting Shareholder (as defined below) are acting in concert with the Requesting Shareholder with respect to the calling of the special meeting, the determination of Net Long Shares may include the effect of aggregating the Net Long Shares (including any negative number) of such affiliate or affiliates. Whether shares constitute “Net Long Shares” shall be decided by the Board in its reasonable determination.
 
 
      (Footnote 1) This and other references to the New York Business Corporation Law are not part of the by-laws, but are included solely for convenience in locating relevant portions of the statute.


 

A Special Meeting Request must be delivered by hand or by registered U.S. mail, postage prepaid, return receipt requested, or courier service, postage prepaid, to the attention of the Secretary at the principal executive offices of the corporation. A Special Meeting Request shall only be valid if it is signed and dated by each shareholder of record submitting the Special Meeting Request and by each of the beneficial owners, if any, on whose behalf the Special Meeting Request is being made (each such record owner and beneficial owner, a “Requesting Shareholder”), and includes (i) a statement of the specific purpose(s) of the special meeting and the matters proposed to be acted on at the special meeting, the text of any proposal or business (including the text of any resolutions proposed for consideration, and in the event that such business includes a proposal to amend the by-laws of the corporation, the text of the proposed amendment), the reasons for conducting such business at the special meeting, and any material interest in such business of each Requesting Shareholder; (ii) in the case of any director nominations proposed to be presented at the special meeting, the information required by the second paragraph of Section 3.11 of these by-laws, including with respect to each Requesting Shareholder; (iii) in the case of any matter (other than a director nomination) proposed to be conducted at the special meeting, the information required by the second paragraph of Section 2.9 of these by-laws, including with respect to each Requesting Shareholder; (iv) a representation that each Requesting Shareholder, or one or more representatives of each such shareholder, intends to appear in person or by proxy at the special meeting to present the proposal(s) or business to be brought before the special meeting; (v) a representation as to whether the Requesting Shareholders intend, or are part of a group that intends, to solicit proxies with respect to the proposals or business to be presented at the special meeting; (vi) an agreement by the Requesting Shareholders to notify the corporation promptly in the event of any decrease in the number of Net Long Shares held by the Requesting Shareholders following the delivery of such Special Meeting Request and prior to the special meeting and an acknowledgement that any such decrease shall be deemed to be a revocation of such Special Meeting Request to the extent of such reduction; and (vii) documentary evidence that the Requesting Shareholders own the Requisite Percentage as of the date on which the Special Meeting Request is delivered to the Secretary; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that if the shareholder(s) of record submitting the Special Meeting Request are not the beneficial owners of the shares representing the Requisite Percentage, then to be valid, the Special Meeting Request must also include documentary evidence (or, if not simultaneously provided with the Special Meeting Request, such documentary evidence must be delivered to the Secretary within 10 days after the date on which the Special Meeting Request is delivered to the Secretary) that the beneficial owners on whose behalf the Special Meeting Request is made beneficially own the Requisite Percentage as of the date on which such Special Meeting Request is delivered to the Secretary. In addition, each Requesting Shareholder shall promptly provide any other information reasonably requested by the corporation.
 
The corporation will provide the Requesting Shareholders with notice of the record date for the determination of shareholders entitled to vote at the special meeting. Each Requesting Shareholder is required to update the notice delivered pursuant to this Section 2.2 not later than 10 business days after such record date to provide any material changes in the foregoing information as of such record date and, with respect to the information required under clause (vii) of the previous paragraph, also as of a date not more than five business days before the scheduled date of the special meeting as to which the Special Meeting Request relates.
 
A Special Meeting Request shall not be valid, and a special meeting requested by shareholders shall not be held, if (i) the Special Meeting Request does not comply with this Section 2.2; (ii) the Special Meeting Request relates to an item of business that is not a proper subject for shareholder action under applicable law; (iii) the Special Meeting Request is delivered during the period commencing 90 days prior to the first anniversary of the date of the immediately preceding annual meeting of shareholders and ending on the date of the next annual meeting; (iv) an identical or substantially similar item (as determined in good faith by the Board, a “Similar Item”), other than the election or removal of director(s), was presented at an annual or special meeting of shareholders held not more than 12 months before the Special Meeting Request is delivered; (v) the Special Meeting Request relates to the election or removal of director(s) and the election or removal of director(s) was presented at an annual or special meeting of shareholders held not more than 90 days before the Special Meeting Request is delivered; (vi) a Similar Item, including the election or removal of director(s), is included in the corporation’s notice of meeting as an item of business to be brought before an


2


 

annual or special meeting of shareholders that has been called but not yet held or that is called for a date within 120 days of the receipt by the corporation of a Special Meeting Request; or (vii) the Special Meeting Request was made in a manner that involved a violation of Regulation 14A under the Exchange Act or other applicable law. The Board shall determine in good faith whether all requirements set forth in this Section 2.2 have been satisfied and such determination shall be binding on the corporation and its shareholders.
 
Except as otherwise provided in this Section 2.2, a special meeting held following a Special Meeting Request shall be held at such date, time and place, within or without the State of New York, as may be fixed by the Board.
 
A Requesting Shareholder may revoke a Special Meeting Request by written revocation delivered to Secretary at the principal executive offices of the corporation at any time prior to the special meeting. If, following such revocation (or deemed revocation pursuant to clause (vi) of the fourth paragraph of this Section 2.2), there are unrevoked requests from Requesting Shareholders holding, in the aggregate, less than the Requisite Percentage, the Board, in its discretion, may cancel the special meeting.
 
If none of the Requesting Shareholders appear or send a duly authorized agent to present the business to be presented for consideration specified in the Special Meeting Request, the corporation need not present such business for a vote at the special meeting, notwithstanding that proxies in respect of such matter may have been received by the corporation.
 
Business transacted at any special meeting shall be limited to (i) the purpose(s) stated in the valid Special Meeting Request for such special meeting and (ii) any additional matters the Board determines to submit to the shareholders at such special meeting. The chairman of a special meeting shall determine all matters relating to the conduct of the special meeting, including, without limitation, determining whether to adjourn the special meeting and whether any nomination or other item of business has been properly brought before the special meeting in accordance with these by-laws, and if the chairman should so determine and declare that any nomination or other item of business has not been properly brought before the special meeting, then such business shall not be transacted at the special meeting.
 
SECTION 2.3 NOTICE OF MEETINGS. Notice of all meetings of shareholders shall be in writing and shall state the place, date and hour of the meeting and such other matters as may be required by law. Notice of any special meeting shall also state the purpose or purposes for which the meeting is called and shall indicate that it is being issued by or at the direction of the person or persons calling the meeting. A copy of the notice of any meeting, shall be given, personally or by mail, not less than ten nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, provided that a copy of such notice may be given by third class mail not less than twenty-four nor more than sixty days before the date of the meeting, to each shareholder entitled to vote at such meeting. If mailed, such notice shall be deemed given when deposited in the United States mail, with postage thereon prepaid, directed to the shareholder at his address as it appears on the record of shareholders, or, if he shall have filed with the Secretary of the corporation a written request that notices to him be mailed at some other address, then directed to him at such other address. Notice of any adjourned meeting of the shareholders shall not be required if the time and place to which the meeting is adjourned are announced at the meeting at which the adjournment is taken, but if after the adjournment the Board or Chief Executive Officer fixes a new record date for the adjourned meeting, notice of the adjourned meeting shall be given to each shareholder of record on the new record date. (B.C.L. Section 605.)
 
SECTION 2.4 QUORUM AND VOTING. Except as otherwise provided by law or the certificate of incorporation, the holders of a majority of the votes of the shares entitled to vote thereat shall constitute a quorum at any meeting of the shareholders for the transaction of any business, but a lesser interest may adjourn any meeting from time to time and from place to place until a quorum is obtained. Any business may be transacted at any adjourned meeting that might have been transacted at the original meeting. When a quorum is once present to organize a meeting of shareholders, it is not broken by the subsequent withdrawal of any shareholders. Any corporate action taken by vote of the shareholders shall, except as otherwise required by law or the certificate of incorporation, be authorized by a majority of the votes cast at a meeting of shareholders by the holders of shares entitled to vote thereon. Every shareholder of record shall be entitled at every meeting of shareholders to one vote for each share standing in his name on the record of shareholders,


3


 

unless otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation. Neither treasury shares, nor shares held by any other corporation, if a majority of the shares entitled to vote in the election of directors of such other corporation is held by the corporation, shall be voted at any meeting or counted in determining the total number of outstanding shares then entitled to vote.
 
In a non-contested election of directors, any incumbent director nominee who is not elected by the shareholders shall immediately tender his or her resignation. The Board of Directors shall decide whether or not to accept such resignation, and shall promptly disclose and explain its decision in a Form 8-K (or successor form) filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission within 90 days after the date the results of the election are certified. An incumbent director who tenders his or her resignation pursuant to this paragraph will not participate in the Board’s deliberations with respect to such resignation. In acting on the resignation, the Board shall consider all factors that it may deem relevant.
 
If the incumbent director’s resignation is not accepted by the Board, he or she shall continue to serve until the next annual meeting of shareholders and until his or her successor is elected and qualified. If the resignation is accepted or if the nominee who failed to receive the required vote is not an incumbent director, the Board may fill the resulting vacancy or decrease the size of the Board in accordance with these by-laws. (B.C.L. Sections 608, 614.)
 
SECTION 2.5 PROXIES. Every shareholder entitled to vote at a meeting of the shareholders may authorize another person to vote for him by proxy executed in writing (or in such manner permitted by law) by the shareholder or his attorney-in-fact. No proxy shall be valid after the expiration of eleven months from the date thereof, unless otherwise provided in the proxy. Every proxy shall be revocable at the pleasure of the shareholder executing it, except that a proxy which is entitled “irrevocable proxy” and which states that it is irrevocable shall be irrevocable when and to the extent permitted by law. (B.C.L. Section 609.)
 
SECTION 2.6 LIST OF SHAREHOLDERS AT MEETINGS. A list of shareholders as of the record date, certified by the Secretary or by the transfer agent of the corporation, shall be produced at any meeting of shareholders upon the request thereat or prior thereto of any shareholder. If the right to vote at any meeting is challenged, the inspectors of election or person presiding thereat shall require such list of shareholders to be produced as evidence of the right of the persons challenged to vote at such meeting, and all persons who appear from such list to be shareholders entitled to vote thereat may vote at such meeting. (B.C.L. Section 607.)
 
SECTION 2.7 WAIVER OF NOTICE. Notice of a shareholders’ meeting need not be given to any shareholder who submits a signed waiver of notice, in person or by proxy, whether before or after the meeting. The attendance of any shareholder at a meeting, in person or by proxy, without protesting prior to the conclusion of the meeting the lack of notice of such meeting, shall constitute a waiver of notice by him. (B.C.L. Section 606.)
 
SECTION 2.8 INSPECTORS AT SHAREHOLDERS’ MEETINGS. The Board, in advance of any shareholders’ meeting, may appoint one or more inspectors to act at the meeting or any adjournment thereof and to perform such duties thereat as are prescribed by law. If inspectors are not so appointed, the person presiding at a shareholders’ meeting shall appoint one or more inspectors. In case any person appointed fails to appear or act, the vacancy may be filled by appointment made by the Board in advance of the meeting or at the meeting by the person presiding thereat. Each inspector, before entering upon the discharge of his duties, shall take and sign an oath faithfully to execute the duties of inspector at such meeting with strict impartiality and according to the best of his ability. (B.C.L. Section 610.)
 
SECTION 2.9 BUSINESS TO BE TRANSACTED AT SHAREHOLDERS’ MEETINGS. Only such business (other than nominations for the election of directors to the Board, which must comply with the provisions of Section 3.11 of these by-laws) may be transacted at any annual meeting of shareholders as is (i) specified in the notice of the meeting given by or at the direction of the Board (including, if so specified, any shareholder proposal submitted pursuant to the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission), (ii) otherwise brought before the meeting by or at the direction of the Board or (iii) otherwise brought before the meeting in accordance with the procedure set forth in the following paragraph by a


4


 

shareholder of the corporation entitled to vote at such meeting. This Section 2.9 is expressly intended to apply to any business proposed to be brought before an annual meeting of shareholders other than any proposal made pursuant to Rule 14a-8 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
 
For business to be brought by a shareholder before an annual meeting of shareholders pursuant to clause (iii) above, the shareholder must have given written notice thereof to the Secretary of the corporation, such notice to be received at the principal executive offices of the corporation not less than 90 nor more than 120 days prior to the one year anniversary of the date of the annual meeting of shareholders of the previous year; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that in the event that the annual meeting of shareholders is called for a date that is not within 25 days before or after such anniversary date, notice by the shareholder must be received at the principal executive offices of the corporation not later than the close of business on the tenth day following the day on which the corporation’s notice of the date of the meeting is first given or made to the shareholders or disclosed to the general public (which disclosure may be effected by means of a publicly available filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission), whichever occurs first. A shareholder’s notice to the Secretary shall set forth, as to each matter the shareholder proposes to bring before the annual meeting of shareholders, (i) a brief description of the business proposed to be brought before the annual meeting of shareholders and of the reasons for bringing such business before the meeting and, if such business includes a proposal to amend either the certificate of incorporation or these by-laws, the text of the proposed amendment, (ii) the name and record address of the shareholder proposing such business, (iii) as to the shareholder giving the notice, (A) the class, series and number of all shares of the corporation that are owned of record or beneficially by such shareholder, (B) the name of each nominee holder of shares owned beneficially but not of record by such shareholder and the number of shares of the corporation held by each such nominee holder, (C) whether and the extent to which any derivative instrument, swap, option, warrant, short interest, hedge or profit interest has been entered into by or on behalf of such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates with respect to the shares of the corporation, (D) whether any other transaction, agreement, arrangement or understanding (including any short position or any borrowing or lending of shares) has been made by or on behalf of such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates, the effect or intent of which is to mitigate loss to, or to manage risk or benefit of share price changes for, such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates or to increase or decrease the voting power or pecuniary or economic interest of such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates with respect to the shares of the corporation, and (E) a representation that such shareholder will notify the corporation in writing of the information required in clauses (A) through (D), in each case as in effect as of the record date for the meeting, promptly following the later of the record date or the date notice of the record date is first publicly disclosed, (iv) any material interest of the shareholder in such business and (v) such other information relating to the proposal that is required to be disclosed in solicitations pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission or other applicable law.
 
Notwithstanding anything in these by-laws to the contrary, no business (other than nominations for the election of directors to the Board, which must comply with the provisions of Section 3.11 of these by-laws) shall be conducted at an annual meeting of shareholders except in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Section 2.9; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that nothing in this Section 2.9 shall be deemed to preclude discussion by any shareholder of any business properly brought before the annual meeting of shareholders in accordance with such procedures. The chairman of an annual meeting of shareholders shall, if the facts warrant, determine and declare to the meeting that the business was not properly brought before the meeting in accordance with the provisions of this Section 2.9, and if he should so determine, he shall so declare to the meeting and any such business not properly brought before the annual meeting of shareholders shall not be transacted.
 
ARTICLE III
 
DIRECTORS
 
SECTION 3.1 POWERS, NUMBER, QUALIFICATIONS AND TERM OF OFFICE. The business of the corporation shall be managed by its Board, which shall consist of not less than seven persons, each of whom


5


 

shall be at least twenty-one years of age. Subject to such limitation, the number of directors shall be fixed and may be increased or decreased from time to time by a majority of the entire Board. Directors need not be shareholders. Except as otherwise provided by law or these by-laws, the directors shall be elected at the annual meetings of the shareholders, and each director shall hold office until the next annual meeting of shareholders, and until his successor has been elected and qualified. Newly created directorships resulting from an increase in the number of directors and any vacancies occurring in the Board for any reason, including vacancies occurring by reason of the removal of any of the directors with or without cause, may be filled by vote of a majority of the directors then in office, although less than a quorum exists. No decrease in the number of directors shall shorten the terms of any incumbent director. A director elected to fill a vacancy shall be elected to hold office for the unexpired term of his predecessor. If the Board has not elected a Chairman of the Board as an officer, it may choose a Chairman of the Board from among its members to preside at its meetings. (B.C.L. Sections 701, 702, 703, 705.)
 
SECTION 3.2 REGULAR MEETINGS. There shall be regular meetings of the Board, which may be held on such dates and without notice or upon such notice as the Board may from time to time determine. Regular meetings shall be held at the principal office of the corporation within the State of New York or at such other place either within or without the State of New York and at such specific time as may be fixed by the Board from time to time. There shall also be a regular meeting of the Board, which may be held without notice or upon such notice as the Board may from time to time determine, after the annual meeting of the shareholders or any special meeting of the shareholders at which an election of directors is held. (B.C.L. Sections 710, 711.)
 
SECTION 3.3 SPECIAL MEETINGS. Special meetings of the Board may be held at any place within or without the State of New York at any time when called by the Chairman of the Board or the President or four or more directors. Notice of the time and place of special meetings shall be given to each director by serving such notice upon him personally within the City of New York at least one day prior to the time fixed for such meeting, or by mailing or telegraphing it, prepaid, addressed to him at his post office address, as it appears on the books of the corporation, at least three days prior to the time fixed for such meeting. Neither the call or notice nor any waiver of notice need specify the purpose of any meeting of the Board. (B.C.L. Sections 710, 711.)
 
SECTION 3.4 WAIVER OF NOTICE. Notice of a meeting need not be given to any director who signs a waiver of notice whether before or after the meeting, or who attends the meeting without protesting, prior thereto or at its commencement, the lack of notice to him. (B.C.L. Section 711(c).)
 
SECTION 3.5 QUORUM AND VOTING. One-third of the entire Board shall constitute a quorum. A majority of the directors present, whether or not a quorum is present, may adjourn any meeting to another time and place. Notice of any adjournment shall be given to the directors who were not present at the time of the adjournment and, unless the time and place of such adjournment are announced at the meeting, to the other directors. The vote of a majority of the directors present at the time of the vote, if a quorum is present at such time, shall be the act of the Board, except where a larger vote is required by law, the certificate of incorporation or these by-laws. (B.C.L. Sections 701, 708, 711(d).)
 
SECTION 3.6 ACTION BY THE BOARD. Any reference in these by-laws to corporate action to be taken by the Board shall mean such action at a meeting of the Board. However, any action required or permitted to be taken by the Board or any committee thereof may be taken without a meeting if all members of the Board or the committee consent in writing to the adoption of a resolution authorizing the action. The resolution and the written consent thereto by the members of the Board or committee shall be filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Board or committee. Any one or more members of the Board or any committee thereof may participate in a meeting of such Board or committee by means of a conference telephone or similar communications equipment allowing all persons participating in the meeting to hear each other at the same time. Participation by such means shall constitute presence in person at the meeting. (B.C.L. Section 708.)
 
SECTION 3.7 COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD. The Board by resolution adopted by a majority of the entire Board may designate from among its members one or more committees, each consisting of three or


6


 

more directors. Each such committee shall have all the authority of the Board to the extent provided in such resolution, except as limited by law. No such committee shall exercise its authority in a manner inconsistent with any action, direction, or instruction of the Board.
 
The Board may appoint a Chairman of any committee (except for the Executive Committee, if one is established, in the case where the Chairman of the Executive Committee has been elected pursuant to Section 4.1 of these by-laws), who shall preside at meetings of their respective committees. The Board may fill any vacancy in any committee and may designate one or more directors as alternate members of such committee, who may replace any absent member or members at any meeting of such committee. Each such committee shall serve at the pleasure of the Board, but in no event beyond its first meeting following the annual meeting of the shareholders.
 
All acts done and powers conferred by any committee pursuant to the foregoing authorization shall be deemed to be and may be certified as being done or conferred under authority of the Board.
 
A record of the proceedings of each committee shall be kept and submitted at the next regular meeting of the Board.
 
At least one-third but not less than two of the members of any committee shall constitute a quorum for the transaction of business, and the vote of a majority of the members present at the time of the vote, if a quorum is present at such time, shall be the act of the committee. If a committee or the Board shall establish regular meetings of any committee, such meetings may be held without notice or upon such notice as the committee may from time to time determine. Notice of the time and place of special meetings of any committee shall be given to each member of the committee in the same manner as in the case of special meetings of the Board. Notice of a meeting need not be given to any member of a committee who signs a waiver of notice whether before or after the meeting, or who attends the meeting without protesting, prior thereto or at its commencement, the lack of notice to him. Except as otherwise provided in these by- laws, each committee shall adopt its own rules of procedure. (B.C.L. Section 712.)
 
SECTION 3.8 COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS. The Board shall have authority to fix the compensation of directors for services in any capacity. (B.C.L. Section 713(e).)
 
SECTION 3.9 RESIGNATION AND REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS. Any director may resign at any time by giving written notice thereof to the Chief Executive Officer or to the Board, and such resignation shall take effect at the time therein specified without the necessity of further action. Any director may be removed with or without cause by vote of the shareholders, or with cause by action of the Board. (B.C.L. Section 706.)
 
SECTION 3.10 THE “ENTIRE BOARD”. As used in these by-laws the term “the entire Board” or “the entire Board of Directors” means the total number of directors which the corporation would have if there were no vacancies. (B.C.L. Section 702.)
 
SECTION 3.11 NOMINATION OF DIRECTORS. Subject to the rights of holders of any class or series of shares having a preference over the common shares as to dividends or upon liquidation, nominations for the election of directors may only be made (i) by the Board or a committee appointed by the Board or (ii) by a shareholder of the corporation entitled to vote at the meeting at which a person is to be nominated in accordance with the procedure set forth in the following paragraph.
 
A shareholder may nominate a person or persons for election as directors only if the shareholder has given written notice of its intent to make such nomination to the Secretary of the corporation, such notice to be received at the principal executive offices of the corporation (i) with respect to an annual meeting of shareholders, not less than 90 nor more than 120 days prior to the one year anniversary of the date of the annual meeting of shareholders of the previous year; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that in the event that the annual meeting of shareholders is called for a date that is not within 25 days before or after such anniversary date, notice by the shareholder must be received at the principal executive offices of the corporation not later than the close of business on the tenth day following the day on which the corporation’s notice of the date of the meeting is first given or made to the shareholders or disclosed to the general public (which disclosure may be effected by means of a publicly available filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission), whichever


7


 

occurs first and (ii) with respect to a special meeting of shareholders called for the purpose of electing directors, not later than the close of business on the tenth day following the day on which the corporation’s notice of the date of the meeting is first given or made to the shareholders or disclosed to the general public (which disclosure may be effected by means of a publicly available filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission), whichever occurs first. A shareholder’s notice to the Secretary shall set forth (i) the name and record address of the shareholder who intends to make such nomination, (ii) the name, age, business and residence addresses and principal occupation of each person to be nominated, (iii) as to the shareholder giving the notice, (A) the class, series and number of all shares of the corporation that are owned of record or beneficially by such shareholder, (B) the name of each nominee holder of shares owned beneficially but not of record by such shareholder and the number of shares the corporation held by each such nominee holder, (C) whether and the extent to which any derivative instrument, swap, option, warrant, short interest, hedge or profit interest has been entered into by or on behalf of such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates with respect to the shares of the corporation, (D) whether any other transaction, agreement, arrangement or understanding (including any short position or any borrowing or lending of shares) has been made by or on behalf of such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates, the effect or intent of which is to mitigate loss to, or to manage risk or benefit of share price changes for, such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates or to increase or decrease the voting power or pecuniary or economic interest of such shareholder or any of its affiliates or associates with respect to the shares of the corporation, and (E) a representation that such shareholder will notify the corporation in writing of the information required in clauses (A) through (D), in each case as in effect as of the record date for the meeting, promptly following the later of the record date or the date notice of the record date is first publicly disclosed, (iv) a description of all arrangements and understandings between the shareholder and each proposed nominee and any other person or persons (including their names) pursuant to which the nomination(s) are to be made by such shareholder, (v) such other information relating to the person(s) that is required to be disclosed in solicitations for proxies for election of directors pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission or other applicable law and (vi) the written consent of each proposed nominee to be named as a nominee and to serve as a director of the corporation if elected, together with an undertaking, signed by each proposed nominee, to furnish to the corporation any information it may request upon the advice of counsel for the purpose of determining such proposed nominee’s eligibility to serve as a director. The chairman of the meeting shall, if the facts warrant, determine and declare to the meeting that a nomination was not made in accordance with the foregoing procedures and if he should so determine, he shall so declare to the meeting and the defective nomination shall be disregarded.
 
ARTICLE IV
 
OFFICERS AND OFFICIALS
 
SECTION 4.1 OFFICERS. The Board shall elect a Chairman of the Board or a President or both, and a Secretary, a Treasurer and a Comptroller and may elect such other officers, including a Chairman of the Executive Committee and one or more Vice Chairmen of the Board, as the Board shall determine. Each officer shall have such powers and perform such duties as are provided in these by-laws and as may be provided from time to time by the Board or by the Chief Executive Officer. Each officer shall at all times be subject to the control of the Board, and any power or duty assigned to an officer by these by-laws or the Board or the Chief Executive Officer shall be subject to control, withdrawal or limitation by the Board. (B.C.L. Section 715.)
 
SECTION 4.2 QUALIFICATIONS. Any person may hold two or more offices, except that neither the Chairman nor the President shall be Secretary or Treasurer. The Board may require any officer to give security for the faithful performance of his duties. (B.C.L. Sections 715(e) and (f).)
 
SECTION 4.3 ELECTION AND TERMINATION. The Board shall elect officers at the meeting of the Board following the annual meeting of the shareholders and may elect additional officers and fill vacancies at any other time. Unless the Board shall otherwise specify, each officer shall hold office until the meeting of the Board following the next annual meeting of the shareholders, and until his successor has been elected and qualified, except as hereinafter provided. The Board may remove any officer or terminate his duties and


8


 

powers, at any time, with or without cause. Any officer may resign at any time by giving written notice thereof to the Chief Executive Officer or to the Board, or by retiring or by leaving the employ of the corporation (without being employed by a subsidiary or affiliate) and any such action shall take effect as a resignation without necessity of further action. The Chief Executive Officer may suspend any officer until the next meeting of the Board. (B.C.L. Sections 715, 716.)
 
SECTION 4.4 DELEGATION OF POWERS. Each officer may delegate to any other officer and to any official, employee or agent of the corporation, such portions of his powers as he shall deem appropriate, subject to such limitations and expirations as he shall specify, and may revoke such delegation at any time.
 
SECTION 4.5 CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD. The Chairman of the Board may be, but need not be, a person other than the Chief Executive Officer of the corporation. The Chairman of the Board may be, but need not be, an officer or employee of the corporation. The Chairman of the Board shall preside at meetings of the Board of Directors and shall establish agendas for such meetings. In addition, he shall assure that matters of significant interest to shareholders and the investment community are addressed by management. The Chairman of the Board shall be an ex-officio member of each of the standing committees of the Board, except for the Executive Committee, of which he shall be a member.
 
SECTION 4.6 CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER. The Chief Executive Officer shall, subject to the direction of the Board, have general and active control of the affairs and business of the corporation and general supervision of its officers, officials, employees and agents. He shall preside at all meetings of the shareholders. He shall also preside at all meetings of the Board and any committee thereof of which he is a member, unless the Board or such committee shall have chosen another chairman. He shall see that all orders and resolutions of the Board are carried into effect, and in addition he shall have all the powers and perform all the duties generally appertaining to the office of the Chief Executive Officer of a corporation. The Chief Executive Officer shall designate the person or persons who shall exercise his powers and perform his duties in his absence or disability and the absence or disability of the President.
 
SECTION 4.7 PRESIDENT. The President may be Chief Executive Officer if so designated by the Board. If not, he shall have such powers and perform such duties as are prescribed by the Chief Executive Officer or by the Board, and, in the absence or disability of the Chief Executive Officer, he shall have the powers and perform the duties of the Chief Executive Officer, except to the extent that the Board shall have otherwise provided.
 
SECTION 4.8 CHAIRMAN OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE. The Chairman of the Executive Committee shall be a member of the Executive Committee. He shall preside at meetings of the Executive Committee and shall have such other powers and perform such other duties as are prescribed by the Board or by the Chief Executive Officer.
 
SECTION 4.9 VICE CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD. Each Vice Chairman of the Board shall have such powers and perform such duties as are prescribed by the Chief Executive Officer or by the Board.
 
SECTION 4.10 SECRETARY. The Secretary shall attend all meetings and keep the minutes of all proceedings of the shareholders, the Board, the Executive Committee and any other committee unless it shall have chosen another secretary. He shall give notice of all such meetings and all other notices required by law or by these by-laws. He shall have custody of the seal of the corporation and shall have power to affix it to any instrument and to attest thereto. He shall have charge of the record of shareholders required by law, which may be kept by any transfer agent or agents under his direction. He shall maintain the records of directors and officers as required by law. He shall have charge of all documents and other records, except those for which some other officer or agent is properly accountable, and shall generally perform all duties appertaining to the office of secretary of a corporation. (B.C.L. Sections 605, 624, 718.)
 
SECTION 4.11 TREASURER. The Treasurer shall have the care and custody of all of the funds, securities and other valuables of the corporation, except to the extent they shall be entrusted to other officers, employees or agents by direction of the Chief Executive Officer or the Board. The Treasurer may hold the funds, securities and other valuables in his care in such vaults or safe deposit facilities, or may deposit them in and entrust them to such bank, trust companies and other depositories, all as he shall determine with the


9


 

written concurrence of the Chief Executive Officer or his delegate. The Treasurer shall account regularly to the Comptroller for all of his receipts, disbursements and deliveries of funds, securities and other valuables.
 
The Treasurer or his delegate, jointly with the Chief Executive Officer or his delegate, may designate in writing and certify to any bank, trust company, safe deposit company or other depository the persons (including themselves) who are authorized, singly or jointly as they shall specify in each case, to open accounts in the name of the corporation with banks, trust companies and other depositories, to deposit therein funds, instruments and securities belonging to the corporation, to draw checks or drafts on such accounts in amounts not exceeding the credit balances therein, to order the delivery of securities therefrom, to rent safe deposit boxes or vaults in the name of the corporation, to have access to such facility and to deposit therein and remove therefrom securities and other valuables. Any such designation and certification shall contain the regulations, terms and conditions applicable to such authority and may be amended or terminated at any time.
 
Such powers may also be granted to any other officer, official, employee or agent of the corporation by resolution of the Board or by power of attorney authorized by the Board.
 
SECTION 4.12 COMPTROLLER. The Comptroller shall be the chief accounting officer of the corporation and shall have control of all its books of account. He shall see that correct and complete books and records of account are kept as required by law, showing fully, in such form as he shall prescribe, all transactions of the corporation, and he shall require, keep and preserve all vouchers relating thereto for such period as may be necessary.
 
The Comptroller shall render periodically such financial statements and such other reports relating to the corporation’s business as may be required by the Chief Executive Officer or the Board. He shall generally perform all duties appertaining to the office of comptroller of a corporation. (B.C.L. Section 624.)
 
SECTION 4.13 OFFICIALS AND AGENTS. The Chief Executive Officer or his delegate may appoint such officials and agents of the corporation as the conduct of its business may require and assign to them such titles, powers, duties and compensation as he shall see fit and may remove or suspend or modify such titles, powers, duties or compensation at any time with or without cause.
 
ARTICLE V
 
SHARES
 
SECTION 5.1 CERTIFICATES. The shares of the corporation shall be represented by certificates or shall be uncertificated shares. Certificates shall be in such form, consistent with law, as prescribed by the Board, and signed and sealed as provided by law. (B.C.L. Section 508.)
 
SECTION 5.2 TRANSFER OF SHARES. Except as provided in the certificate of incorporation, upon surrender to the corporation or to its transfer agent of a certificate representing shares, duly endorsed or accompanied with proper evidence of succession, assignment or authority to transfer, it shall be the duty of the corporation to issue a new certificate to the person entitled thereto and to cancel the old certificate. The corporation shall be entitled to treat the holder of record of any shares as the holder in fact thereof, and, accordingly, shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to or interest in such shares on the part of any other person, whether or not the corporation shall have express or other notice thereof, except as may be required by law. (B.C.L. Section 508(d).)
 
SECTION 5.3 RECORD OF SHAREHOLDERS. The corporation shall keep at its principal office within the State of New York, or at the office of its transfer agent or registrar in the State of New York, a record in written form, or in any other form capable of being converted into written form within a reasonable time, which shall contain the names and addresses of all shareholders, the numbers and class of shares held by each, and the dates when they respectively became the owners of record thereof. (B.C.L. Section 624(a).)
 
SECTION 5.4 LOST OR DESTROYED CERTIFICATES. In case of the alleged loss, destruction or mutilation of a certificate or certificates representing shares, the Board may direct the issuance of a new


10


 

certificate or certificates in lieu thereof upon such terms and conditions in conformity with law as the Board may prescribe. (B.C.L. Section 508(e).)
 
SECTION 5.5 FIXING RECORD DATE. The Board or the Chief Executive Officer may fix, in advance, a date as the record date for the purpose of determining the shareholders entitled to notice of or to vote at any meeting of shareholders or any adjournment thereof, or for the purpose of determining shareholders entitled to receive payment of any dividend or the allotment of any rights, or for the purpose of any other action. Such date shall not be more than sixty nor less than ten days before the date of such meeting, nor more than sixty days prior to any other action. (B.C.L. Section 604.)
 
ARTICLE VI
 
INDEMNIFICATION OF CORPORATION PERSONNEL
 
SECTION 6.1 DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES. The corporation shall, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as the same exists or may hereafter be in effect, indemnify any person, made or threatened to be made, a party to, or who is otherwise involved in, any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative, legislative or investigative, by reason of the fact that such person, is or was or has agreed to become a director of the corporation, or is or was an officer or employee of the corporation, or serves or served or has agreed to serve any other corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise in any capacity at the request of the corporation, against judgments, fines, penalties, amounts paid in settlement and reasonable expenses, including attorneys’ fees actually and necessarily incurred in connection with such action or proceeding, or any appeal therein; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that no indemnification shall be provided to any such person if a judgment or other final adjudication adverse to the director, officer or employee establishes that (i) his acts were committed in bad faith or were the result of active and deliberate dishonesty and, in either case, were material to the cause of action so adjudicated, or (ii) he personally gained in fact a financial profit or other advantage to which he was not legally entitled. Any action or proceeding by or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor or by or in the right of any other corporation of any type or kind, domestic or foreign, or any partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise, which any director, officer or employee serves or served or agreed to serve at the request of the corporation shall be included in the actions for which directors, officers and employees will be indemnified under the terms of this Section 6.1. Such indemnification shall include the right to be paid advances of any expenses incurred by such person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding, upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of such person to repay such amount consistent with the provisions of applicable law. (B.C.L. Sections 721, 722, 723(c).)
 
SECTION 6.2 OTHER INDEMNIFICATION. The corporation may indemnify any person to whom the corporation is permitted by applicable law or these by-laws to provide indemnification or the advancement of expenses, whether pursuant to rights granted pursuant to, or provided by, the New York Business Corporation Law or any other law or these by-laws or other rights created by (i) a resolution of shareholders, (ii) a resolution of directors, or (iii) an agreement providing for such indemnification, it being expressly intended that these by-laws authorize the creation of other rights in any such manner. The right to be indemnified and to the reimbursement or advancement of expenses incurred in defending a proceeding in advance of its final disposition authorized by this Section 6.2, shall not be exclusive of any other right which any person may have or hereafter acquire under any statute, provision of the certificate of incorporation, by-laws, agreement, vote of shareholders or disinterested directors or otherwise. (B.C.L. Sections 721, 723(c).)
 
SECTION 6.3 MISCELLANEOUS. The right to indemnification conferred by Section 6.1, and any indemnification extended under Section 6.2, (i) is a contract right pursuant to which the person entitled thereto may bring suit as if the provisions thereof were set forth in a separate written contract between the corporation and such person, (ii) is intended to be retroactive to events occurring prior to the adoption of this Article VI, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, and (iii) shall continue to exist after the rescission or restrictive modification thereof with respect to events occurring prior thereto. The benefits of Section 6.1 shall extend to the heirs, executors, administrators and legal representatives of any person entitled to indemnification under this Article.


11


 

ARTICLE VII
 
MISCELLANEOUS
 
SECTION 7.1 FISCAL YEAR. The fiscal year of the corporation shall be the calendar year.
 
SECTION 7.2 VOTING OF SHARES OF OTHER CORPORATIONS. The Board may authorize any officer, agent or proxy to vote shares of any domestic or foreign corporation of any type or kind standing in the name of this corporation and to execute written consents respecting the same, but in the absence of such specific authorization the Chief Executive Officer of this corporation or his delegate may vote such shares and may execute proxies and written consents with relation thereto.
 
ARTICLE VIII
 
AMENDMENTS
 
SECTION 8.1 GENERAL. Except as otherwise provided by law, these by-laws may be amended or repealed or new by-laws may be adopted by the Board of Directors, or by vote of the holders of the shares at the time entitled to vote in the election of any directors, except that the Board may not amend or repeal any by-law, or adopt any new by-law with respect to the subject matter of any by-law, which specifically states that it may be amended or repealed only by the shareholders. (B.C.L. Section 601.)
 
SECTION 8.2 AMENDMENT OF THIS ARTICLE. This Article VIII may be amended or repealed only by the shareholders entitled to vote hereon as provided in Section 8.1 above.


12

EXHIBIT 10.8
(AMERICAN EXPRESS LOGO)
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2007 INCENTIVE COMPENSATION PLAN
MASTER AGREEMENT
(As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 2011)
 
     Nonqualified Stock Options, Restricted Stock Awards, and Restricted Stock Unit Awards (“Awards”) are issued pursuant to the 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”) of American Express Company (the “Company”) at the discretion and subject to the administration of the Compensation and Benefits Committee, or its successor (the “Committee”) of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Board”). Awards issued on or after April 23, 2007 shall contain the general terms set forth in the applicable provisions of this Master Agreement. The specific terms of individual Awards will be contained in the Award Schedule(s) delivered to participants in the Plan (the “Participants”). All Awards shall be subject to the Plan and any administrative guidelines or interpretations by the Committee under the Plan, the Plan and any such guidelines or interpretations being incorporated into this Master Agreement by reference and made a part hereof. As used herein, the term “shares” refers to the common shares of the Company having a par value of $.20 per share, or the shares of any other stock of any other class into which such shares may thereafter be changed.
Section I
MASTER AGREEMENT PROVISIONS RELATING TO
A GRANT OF NONQUALIFIED STOCK OPTION
     1. Sections I, IV, and V of this Master Agreement, together with an Award Schedule referring to Section I of this Master Agreement, shall contain the terms of a specific Nonqualified Stock Option (“Option”) issued to a Participant. Each Award Schedule shall specify the number of shares subject to the Option, the Option Date of Grant, the Option Exercise Date(s), the Option Exercise Price, and any additional terms applicable to the Option. Such additional terms may address any matter deemed appropriate by the Committee or its delegate and may include terms not contained in this Master Agreement and/or may delete terms contained in this Master Agreement. A stock appreciation right is included herein only if specifically approved by the Committee and reflected in an Award Schedule.
     2. Unless otherwise determined by the Committee and subject to the provisions of this Master Agreement and the applicable provisions of the Plan, a Participant may exercise this Option as follows:
     (a) No part of this Option may be exercised before the first Option Exercise Date listed in the Award Schedule or after the expiration of ten years from the Date of Grant set forth in the Award Schedule;

 


 

     (b) At any time or times on or after the first Option Exercise Date listed in the Award Schedule, a Participant may exercise this Option as to any number of shares which, when added to the number of shares as to which a Participant has theretofore exercised this Option, if any, will not exceed 25% of the total number of shares covered hereby;
     (c) At any time or times on or after the second Option Exercise Date listed in the Award Schedule, a Participant may exercise this Option as to any number of shares which, when added to the number of shares as to which a Participant has theretofore exercised this Option, if any, will not exceed 50% of the total number of shares covered hereby;
     (d) At any time or times on or after the third Option Exercise Date listed in the Award Schedule, a Participant may exercise this Option as to any number of shares which, when added to the number of shares as to which a Participant has theretofore exercised this Option, if any, will not exceed 75% of the total number of shares covered hereby; and
     (e) At any time or times on or after the fourth Option Exercise Date listed in the Award Schedule and thereafter through the expiration date of this Option, a Participant may exercise this Option as to any number of shares which, when added to the number of shares as to which the Participant has theretofore exercised this Option, if any, will not exceed the total number of shares covered hereby.
This Option may not be exercised for a fraction of a share.
     3. A Participant may not exercise this Option and, if applicable, any stock appreciation right included herein, unless all of the following conditions are met:
     (a) Legal counsel for the Company must be satisfied at the time of exercise that the issuance of shares upon exercise will be in compliance with the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and applicable United States federal, state, local, and foreign laws;
     (b) The Participant must pay at the time of exercise the full purchase price for the shares being acquired hereunder, by (i) paying in cash in United States dollars (which may be in the form of a check), (ii) tendering shares owned by the Participant which have a fair market value equal to the full purchase price for the shares being acquired, such fair market value to be determined in such reasonable manner as may be provided from time to time by the Committee or as may be required in order to comply with the requirements of any applicable laws or regulations, (iii) if permitted by the Committee, by authorizing a third party to sell, on behalf of the Participant, the appropriate number of shares otherwise issuable to the Participant upon the exercise of this Option and to remit to the Company a sufficient portion of the sale proceeds to pay the entire exercise price and any tax withholding resulting from such exercise, or (iv) tendering a combination of the forms of payment provided for in this Paragraph 3(b); and
     (c) The Participant must, at all times during the period beginning with the Date of Grant of this Option and ending on the date of such exercise, have been employed

2


 

by the Company or an Affiliate (as defined in the Plan) or have been engaged in a period of Related Employment (as defined in the Plan). However, if the Participant ceases to be so employed or terminates a period of Related Employment by reason of the Participant’s disability or Retirement (as such terms are defined in the Plan and interpreted and administered by the Committee) while holding this Option which has not expired and has not been fully exercised, the Participant may, at any time within five years of the date of the onset of such disability (but in no event after the expiration of this Option under Paragraph 2(a) above with respect to ten years from the Date of Grant) or in the case of Retirement until the expiration of the Option under Paragraph 2(a) above, exercise this Option with respect to the number of shares, after giving full effect to the gradual vesting provisions of Paragraph 2 above, as to which the Participant could have exercised this Option on the date of the onset of such disability or Retirement, or with respect to such greater number of shares as determined by the Committee in its sole discretion, and any remaining portion of this Option shall be canceled by the Company. In the event the Participant’s employment by the Company and its Affiliates or Related Employment terminates for reasons other than disability or Retirement as described in this Paragraph 3(c) or death as described in Paragraph 4 below, this Option shall be canceled by the Company; provided, however, if within two years following a Change in Control (as defined in Section IV of this Master Agreement), a Participant is terminated under circumstances that would entitle the Participant to severance under an applicable U.S. severance plan (other than Constructive Termination, as defined in the applicable plan), the Participant may, at any time within 90 days following such termination (but in no event after the expiration of this Option under Paragraph 2(a) above with respect to ten years from the Date of Grant), exercise this Option with respect to the number of shares as to which the Participant could have exercised this Option on the date of such termination. For any other Participant not covered by a U.S. severance plan, the 90-day extension period shall apply if the Participant is terminated within two years following a Change in Control and the Participant would have been entitled to severance under the applicable U.S. severance plan had the Participant been a U.S. employee.
     4. Except as otherwise determined by the Committee, a Participant may not assign, transfer, pledge, hypothecate, or otherwise dispose of this Option (and any stock appreciation right included herein), except by will or the laws of descent and distribution, and this Option is exercisable during the Participant’s lifetime only by the Participant. If the Participant or anyone claiming under or through the Participant attempts to violate this Paragraph 4, such attempted violation shall be null and void and without effect, and the Company’s obligation to make any further payments (stock or cash) hereunder shall terminate. If at the time of the Participant’s death this Option has not been fully exercised, the Participant’s estate or any person who acquires the right to exercise this Option by bequest or inheritance or by reason of the Participant’s death may, at any time within five years after the date of the Participant’s death (but in no event after the expiration of this Option under Paragraph 2 (a) above with respect to ten years from the Date of Grant or the time period described in Paragraph 3(c) above with respect to disability), exercise this Option with respect to the number of shares, after giving full effect to the gradual vesting provisions of Paragraph 2 above, as to which the Participant could have exercised this Option at the time of the Participant’s death, or with respect to such greater number of shares as determined by the Committee in its sole discretion. The applicable requirements of Paragraph 3 above must be satisfied at the time of such exercise.

3


 

     5. In the event that the Company or any of its Affiliates is a participant in a corporate merger, consolidation, or other similar transaction, neither the Company nor such Affiliate shall be obligated to cause any other participant in such transaction to assume this Option or to substitute a new option for this Option.
     6. (a) If approved by the Committee and subject to the conditions specified in Paragraph 6(b) below, within such time or times as this Option shall be exercisable in whole or in part and to the extent that it shall then be exercisable in accordance with Paragraph 2 above, the Participant (or any person acting under Paragraph 4 above) may surrender unexercised this Option or any portion thereof which is then exercisable to the Company and receive from the Company in exchange therefor that number of shares having an aggregate value equal to 100% of the excess of the value of one share over the Option Exercise Price per share heretofore specified times the lesser of (i) the number of shares as to which this Option then is exercisable or (ii) the number of shares as to which this Option is surrendered to the Company. This right to surrender unexercised this Option or any portion thereof which is then exercisable is referred to herein as a “stock appreciation right.” No fractional shares shall be delivered, but in lieu thereof a cash adjustment shall be made.
     (b) If granted by the Committee, the stock appreciation right may be exercised only if, and to the extent that,
     (i) this Option is at the time exercisable, and
     (ii) on the date of exercise (1) this Option will, in accordance with Paragraph 2(a) above, expire within 30 days, or (2) the Participant has ceased to be an employee of the Company or an Affiliate thereof or terminated a period of Related Employment by reason of the Participant’s disability or Retirement (as defined in the Plan), or (3) the Participant has died.
Notwithstanding Paragraph 6(b)(ii) above, but subject to the conditions of Paragraph 6(b)(i) above, (1) the ability to exercise a stock appreciation right may be further limited to the extent determined by the Committee as necessary or desirable to comply with applicable provisions of United States federal, state, local, or foreign law or regulation, and (2) if the Participant is on the date of exercise an executive officer of the Company as that term is defined in the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules thereunder (an “Insider”), the stock appreciation right may be exercised only with respect to a maximum of 50% of the shares subject to this Option granted hereunder, unless otherwise determined by the Committee.
     (c) The Committee may elect from time to time in its sole discretion to settle the obligation arising out of the exercise of the stock appreciation right, by the payment of cash equal to the aggregate value of the shares it otherwise would be obligated to deliver or partly by the payment of cash and partly by the delivery of shares.
     (d) For all purposes under this Paragraph 6, the value of a share shall be the fair market value thereof, as determined by the Committee, on the last business day preceding the date of the election to exercise the stock appreciation right, provided that if notice of such election is received by the Committee more than three business days after

4


 

the date of such election (as such date of election is stated in the notice of election), the Committee may, but need not, determine the value of a share as of the day preceding the date on which the notice of election is received.
     7. It shall be a condition to the obligation of the Company to furnish shares upon exercise of this Option or settlement of a stock appreciation right by delivery of shares and/or cash (a) that the Participant (or any person acting under Paragraph 4 above) pay to the Company or its designee, upon its demand, in accordance with Paragraph 17(f) of the Plan, such amount as may be demanded for the purpose of satisfying its obligation or the obligation of any of its Affiliates or other person to withhold United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment or other taxes incurred by reason of the exercise of this Option or the settlement of the stock appreciation right or the transfer of shares thereupon, (b) whether the settlement of the stock appreciation right is to be made by delivery of shares or by the payment of cash, that the Participant (or any person acting under Paragraph 4 above) execute such forms as the Committee shall prescribe for the purpose of evidencing the surrender of this Option in whole or in part, as the case may be, and (c) that the Participant (or any person acting under Paragraph 4 above) provide the Company with any forms, documents, or other information reasonably required by the Company in connection with the grant. The Company shall have the right to deduct or cause to be deducted from any payment made in settlement of a stock appreciation right any United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment or other taxes that it determines are required by law to be withheld with respect to such payment. If the amount requested for the purpose of satisfying the withholding obligation is not paid, the Company may refuse to furnish shares upon exercise of this Option or shares and/or cash upon settlement of the stock appreciation right.
Section II
MASTER AGREEMENT PROVISIONS RELATING TO
AWARDS OF RESTRICTED STOCK
     1. Sections II, IV, and V of this Master Agreement, together with an Award Schedule referring to Section II of this Master Agreement, shall contain the terms of a specific Restricted Stock Award (“RSA”) issued to a Participant. Each Award Schedule shall specify the number of shares awarded, the Award Date, the Expiration Date, and any additional terms applicable to the Award. Such additional terms may address any matter deemed appropriate by the Committee or its delegate and may include terms not contained in this Master Agreement and/or may delete terms contained in this Master Agreement.
     2. An RSA consists of the number of shares specified in an Award Schedule and is subject to the provisions of the Plan. In addition, the following terms, conditions and restrictions apply to RSAs issued under the Plan:
     (a) Except as otherwise determined by the Committee, such shares cannot be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged, hypothecated, or otherwise disposed of (except that Participants may designate a beneficiary as provided herein) on or before the Expiration Date and prior to the subsequent issuance to a Participant (or, in the event of a Participant’s death, the Participant’s designated beneficiary) of a certificate or an uncertificated book entry position for such shares free of any legend or other transfer

5


 

restriction relating to the terms, conditions, and restrictions provided for in the Award Schedule or this Master Agreement. If a Participant or anyone claiming under or through such Participant attempts to violate this Paragraph 2(a), such attempted violation shall be null and void and without effect, and the Company’s obligation to make any further payments or deliveries (in stock or cash) hereunder shall terminate.
     (b) An RSA shall be evidenced by a share certificate or an uncertificated book entry position maintained by the Company’s transfer agent and registrar.
     (c) If (i) a Participant’s continuous employment with the Company and its Affiliates (as defined in the Plan) shall terminate for any reason on or before the Expiration Date, except for a period of Related Employment (as defined in the Plan), and except as provided in Paragraph 2(d) below or (ii) within the period following the Expiration Date as determined by the Committee, a Participant (or such Participant’s designated beneficiary) has not paid to the Company or such Affiliate or other person an amount equal to any United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment or other taxes which the Company determines is required to be withheld in respect of such shares, or fails to provide such information as is described in Paragraph 4 below, then, unless the Committee determines otherwise, the Participant’s RSA or portion thereof shall be automatically terminated, cancelled, and rendered null and void as of the Expiration Date without any action on the part of the Company, and the Company shall be deemed to have exercised its repurchase option without the requirement of any payment, and shall be entitled to the return from such Participant (or the Participant’s designated beneficiary or the Secretary of the Company) of any share certificate(s) issued in respect of the Award or the cancellation of any book entry memo position maintained by the Company’s transfer agent and registrar with respect to a Participant’s RSA.
     (d) On or before the Expiration Date, the Committee shall have the authority, in its sole discretion, to determine whether and to what extent, the termination provisions of Paragraph 2(c) shall cease to be effective with respect to a Participant’s Award in the following situations:
     (i) a Participant shall die or have a termination of employment or Related Employment by reason of disability or Retirement (as such terms are defined in the Plan and interpreted and administered by the Committee); or
     (ii) in such circumstances as the Committee, in its sole discretion, shall deem appropriate if, since the Award Date, a Participant has been in the continuous employment of the Company or an Affiliate or has undertaken Related Employment.
     (e) The share certificate, if any, issued in respect of a RSA shall be held in escrow by the Secretary of the Company during the period up to and including the date determined by the Committee pursuant to Paragraph 2(c) above, unless otherwise determined by the Committee.
     3. In the event of any change in the outstanding shares of the Company by reason of any stock split, stock dividend, split-up, split-off, spin-off, recapitalization, merger,

6


 

consolidation, rights offering, reorganization, combination, subdivision or exchange of shares, sale by the Company of all or part of its assets, distribution to shareholders other than a normal cash dividend, or other extraordinary or unusual event, or in the event a Participant (or the Participant’s designated beneficiary) receives any shares, securities, or other property in respect of the shares which have been awarded to a Participant (including, but not limited to, by way of a dividend or other distribution on such shares), any such shares, securities, or other property received by a Participant (or a Participant’s designated beneficiary) in respect of the shares awarded to such Participant shall, other than upon a Change In Control as defined in Section IV of this Master Agreement, be subject to the Company’s right to receive or cancel such shares, securities, or other property from such Participant (or such Participant’s designated beneficiary), as provided in Paragraph 2(c) above and the other terms, conditions, and restrictions specified herein to the extent that, and in such manner as, the Committee shall determine. Any such determination by the Committee under this Paragraph 3 shall be final, binding, and conclusive.
     4. If the Company, in its sole discretion, shall determine that the Company or an Affiliate or other person has incurred or will incur any obligation to withhold any United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment, or other taxes by reason of making of the Award to a Participant, the transfer of shares to a Participant (or the Participant’s designated beneficiary) pursuant thereto or the lapse or release of the termination provisions contained in Paragraph 2(c) above with respect to a Participant’s Award or any other restrictions upon such shares, such Participant (or such Participant’s designated beneficiary) will, promptly upon demand therefor by the Company, pay to the Company or such Affiliate or other person any amount demanded by it for the purpose of satisfying such liability. If the amount so demanded is not promptly paid or if such Participant (or such Participant’s designated beneficiary) shall fail to promptly provide the Company with any and all forms, documents, or other information reasonably required by the Company in connection with the Award, the Company or its designee may refuse to permit the transfer of such shares and may, without further consent by or notice to such Participant (or such Participant’s designated beneficiary), cancel the Award and the shares otherwise issuable under the Award.
Section III
MASTER AGREEMENT PROVISIONS RELATING TO
AWARDS OF A RESTRICTED STOCK UNIT
     1. Sections III, IV, and V of this Master Agreement, together with an Award Schedule referring to Section III of this Master Agreement, shall contain the terms of a specific Restricted Stock Unit (“RSU”) issued to a Participant. Each Award Schedule shall specify the number of shares to be awarded, the RSU Date, the Expiration Date, and any additional terms applicable to the Award. Such additional terms may address any matter deemed appropriate by the Committee or its delegate and may include terms not contained in this Master Agreement and/or may delete terms contained in this Master Agreement.
     2. Subject to the provisions of the Plan and the following terms, conditions and restrictions herein set forth, the Company will issue to a Participant a certificate for the number of shares specified in an Award Schedule as promptly as practicable following January 1 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year that includes the last day of the period of

7


 

four years from the RSU Date (the “Restricted Period”), but in no event later than 90 days thereafter:
     (a) Except as otherwise determined by the Committee, rights under this RSU may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged, hypothecated, or otherwise disposed of, except by will or the laws of descent and distribution, on or before the last day of the Restricted Period and prior to the subsequent issuance to a Participant (or, in the event of a Participant’s death, the Participant’s designated beneficiary) of a certificate for such shares free of any legend or other transfer restriction relating to the terms, conditions, and restrictions provided for in this Master Agreement. If a Participant or anyone claiming under or through a Participant attempts to violate this Paragraph 2(a), such attempted violation shall be null and void and without effect, and the Company’s obligations hereunder shall terminate.
     (b) If (i) a Participant’s continuous employment with the Company and its Affiliates (as defined in the Plan) shall terminate for any reason on or before the last day of the Restricted Period, except for a period of Related Employment (as defined in the Plan), and except as provided in Paragraph 2(c) below, or (ii) within the period following the last day of the Restricted Period as determined by the Committee, a Participant (or such Participant’s designated beneficiary) has not paid to the Company or such Affiliate or other person an amount equal to any United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment, or other taxes which the Company determines is required to be withheld in respect of such shares, or fails to provide such information as is described in Paragraph 4 below, then, unless the Committee determines otherwise, this RSU or portion thereof shall be automatically terminated, cancelled, and rendered null and void as of the last day of the Restricted Period without any action on the part of the Company.
     (c) If a Participant shall, on or before the last day of the Restricted Period, die or have a termination of employment or Related Employment by reason of disability or Retirement (as such terms are defined in the Plan and interpreted and administered by the Committee), or by reason of such other circumstances as the Committee, in its sole discretion, shall deem appropriate, after a Participant has been, since the RSU Date, in the continuous employment of the Company or an Affiliate or have undertaken Related Employment, the Committee, in its sole discretion, shall determine whether and to what extent, if any, the Company’s right as specified in Paragraph 2(b) above (and in any and all other terms, conditions, and restrictions imposed hereby) shall lapse and cease to be effective. The Company’s right specified in Paragraph 2(b) above shall be exercisable at such time as to the remaining shares, if any.
     (d) From time to time during the Restricted Period, the Company shall pay to a Participant an amount of cash equal to the regular quarterly cash dividend paid by the Company on a number of shares equal to the number of shares remaining to be issued to a Participant hereunder less any applicable United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment, or other taxes that the Company determines are required to be withheld therefrom. Such payment shall be made as soon as practicable following the applicable dividend payment date, but in no event later than 60 days thereafter. The Company’s obligation to make such payment shall cease with respect to any shares at

8


 

such time as the Company’s right becomes exercisable with respect thereto pursuant to Paragraph 2(b) or 2(c) above.
     3. If the Company, in its sole discretion, shall determine that the Company or an Affiliate or other person has incurred or will incur any obligation to withhold any United States federal, state, local, or foreign income, employment or other taxes by reason of the issuance or operation of this RSU, a Participant (or, in the event of a Participant’s death, the legal representatives of a Participant’s estate) will, promptly upon demand therefor by the Company, pay to the Company or such Affiliate or other person, in accordance with Paragraph 17(f) of the Plan, any amount demanded by it for the purpose of satisfying such obligation. If the amount so demanded is not promptly paid or if a Participant (or, in the event of a Participant’s death, the legal representatives of a Participant’s estate) shall fail to promptly provide the Company with any and all forms, documents, or other information reasonably required by the Company in connection with this RSU, the Company or its designee may refuse to permit the transfer of any shares and the distribution of any proceeds and may, without further consent by or notice to a Participant (or, in the event of a Participant’s death, the legal representatives of a Participant’s estate) cancel its agreement to issue to a Participant any shares and cancel any shares otherwise issuable hereunder.
Section IV
MASTER AGREEMENT COMMON PROVISIONS RELATING TO
MORE THAN ONE FORM OF AWARD
     1. Notwithstanding anything in this Master Agreement to the contrary (but subject to those provisions in Paragraph 3 or 4 below which could reduce payments hereunder as a result of Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”)), upon a Change in Control (as applicable to a particular award), the award holder shall immediately be:
     (a) with respect to any Option issued pursuant to the Option provisions of this Master Agreement, 100% vested in the total number of shares covered thereby such that they shall be fully exercisable;
     (b) with respect to any RSA issued pursuant to the RSA provisions of this Master Agreement, 100% vested in the total number of shares covered thereby such that they shall no longer be subject to any transfer restrictions imposed by this Master Agreement; and
     (c) with respect to any RSU issued pursuant to the RSU provisions of this Master Agreement, entitled to receive the total number of shares covered thereby such that they shall no longer be subject to any restrictions on issuance imposed by this Master Agreement, and:
     (1) if the Change in Control qualifies as a “change in ownership,” a “change in effective control,” or a “change in ownership of a substantial portion of the assets” of the Company (each as defined by Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated and other official guidance issued thereunder (collectively, “Section 409A”)), then the shares underlying such RSU

9


 

shall be issued to the Participant immediately upon the occurrence of the Change in Control, but in no event later than five days thereafter; or
     (2) if the Change in Control does not so qualify, then the shares underlying such RSU shall be issued to the Participant as soon as administratively practicable following January 1 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year that includes the last day of the original Restricted Period, but in no event later than 90 days thereafter.
The Committee may not amend or delete this Section IV of this Master Agreement in a manner that is detrimental to the award holder, without his written consent.
     2. A “Change in Control” means the happening of any of the following:
     (a) Any individual, entity, or group (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)) (a “Person”) becomes the beneficial owner (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 25% or more of either (i) the then outstanding common shares of the Company (the “Outstanding Company Common Shares”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Company entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Company Voting Securities”); provided, however, that such beneficial ownership shall not constitute a Change in Control if it occurs as a result of any of the following acquisitions of securities: (A) any acquisition directly from the Company; (B) any acquisition by the Company or any corporation, partnership, trust, or other entity controlled by the Company (a “Subsidiary”); (C) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or any Subsidiary; (D) any acquisition by an underwriter temporarily holding Company securities pursuant to an offering of such securities; (E) any acquisition by an individual, entity, or group that is permitted to, and actually does, report its beneficial ownership on Schedule 13-G (or any successor schedule), provided that, if any such individual, entity or group subsequently becomes required to or does report its beneficial ownership on Schedule 13D (or any successor schedule), then, for purposes of this subsection, such individual, entity, or group shall be deemed to have first acquired, on the first date on which such individual, entity, or group becomes required to or does so report, beneficial ownership of all of the Outstanding Company Common Stock and Outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by it on such date; or (F) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a reorganization, merger, or consolidation if, following such reorganization, merger, or consolidation, the conditions described in clauses (i), (ii), and (iii) of Paragraph 2(c) are satisfied. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change in Control shall not be deemed to occur solely because any Person (the “Subject Person”) became the beneficial owner of 25% or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities as a result of the acquisition of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities by the Company which, by reducing the number of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, increases the proportional number of shares beneficially owned by the Subject Person; provided, that if a Change in Control would be deemed to have occurred (but for

10


 

the operation of this sentence) as a result of the acquisition of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities by the Company, and after such share acquisition by the Company, the Subject Person becomes the beneficial owner of any additional Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities which increases the percentage of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by the Subject Person, then a Change in Control shall then be deemed to have occurred; or
     (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Company’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of either an actual or threatened election contest or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board, including by reason of agreement intended to avoid or settle any such actual or threatened contest or solicitation; or
     (c) The consummation of a reorganization, merger, statutory share exchange, consolidation, or similar corporate transaction involving the Company or any of its direct or indirect Subsidiaries (each a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i) the Outstanding Company Common Shares and the Outstanding Company Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination, continue to represent (either by remaining outstanding or being converted into voting securities of the resulting or surviving entity or any parent thereof) more than 50% of the then-outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, as the case may be, of the corporation resulting from Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation that, as a result of such transaction, owns the Company or all or substantially all of the Company’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries), (ii) no Person (excluding the Company, any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Company, a Subsidiary or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination or any parent or subsidiary thereof, and any Person beneficially owning, immediately prior to such Business Combination, directly or indirectly, 25% or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, as the case may be) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 25% or more of, respectively, the then-outstanding shares of common stock of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (or any parent thereof) or the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities of such corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (or any parent thereof) were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement or action of the Board providing for such Business Combination; or

11


 

     (d) The consummation of the sale, lease, exchange, or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, unless such assets have been sold, leased, exchanged, or disposed of to a corporation with respect to which following such sale, lease, exchange, or other disposition (i) more than 50% of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of such corporation and the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities of such corporation (or any parent thereof) entitled to vote generally in the election of directors is then beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Company Common Shares and Outstanding Company Voting Securities immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange, or other disposition in substantially the same proportions as their ownership immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange, or other disposition of such Outstanding Company Common Shares and Outstanding Company Voting Shares, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding the Company and any employee benefit plan (or related trust)) of the Company or a Subsidiary or of such corporation or a subsidiary thereof and any Person beneficially owning, immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange, or other disposition, directly or indirectly, 25% or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, as the case may be) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 25% or more of respectively, the then-outstanding shares of common stock of such corporation (or any parent thereof) and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation (or any parent thereof) entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of such corporation (or any parent thereof) were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement or action of the Board providing for such sale, lease, exchange, or other disposition of assets of the Company; or
     (e) Approval by the shareholders of the Company of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company.
     3. This Paragraph 3 shall apply in the event of a Change in Control.
     (a) In the event that any payment or benefit received or to be received by a Participant hereunder in connection with a Change in Control or termination of such Participant’s employment (hereinafter referred to collectively as the “Payments”), will be subject to the excise tax referred to in Section 4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be reduced to the extent necessary so that no portion of the Payments is subject to the Excise Tax but only if (A) the net amount of all Total Payments (as hereinafter defined), as so reduced (and after subtracting the net amount of federal, state, and local income and employment taxes on such reduced Total Payments), is greater than or equal to (B) the net amount of such Total Payments without any such reduction (but after subtracting the net amount of federal, state, and local income and employment taxes on such Total Payments and the amount of Excise Tax to which the Participant would be subject in respect of such unreduced Total Payments); provided, however, that the Participant may elect in writing to have other components of his or her Total Payments reduced prior to any reduction in the Payments hereunder.

12


 

     (b) For purposes of determining whether the Payments will be subject to the Excise Tax, the amount of such Excise Tax and whether any Payments are to be reduced hereunder: (i) all payments and benefits received or to be received by the Participant in connection with such Change in Control or the termination of such Participant’s employment, whether pursuant to the terms of this Master Agreement or any other plan, arrangement, or agreement with the Company, any Person (as such term is defined in Paragraph 2(a) above) whose actions result in such Change in Control or any Person affiliated with the Company or such Person (collectively, the “Total Payments”), shall be treated as “parachute payments” (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code) unless, in the opinion of the accounting firm which was, immediately prior to the Change in Control, the Company’s independent auditor, or if that firm refuses to serve, by another qualified firm, whether or not serving as independent auditors, designated by the Committee (the “Firm”), such payments or benefits (in whole or in part) do not constitute parachute payments, including by reason of Section 280G(b)(2)(A) or Section 280G(b)(4)(A) of the Code; (ii) no portion of the Total Payments the receipt or enjoyment of which the Participant shall have waived at such time and in such manner as not to constitute a “payment” within the meaning of Section 280G(b) of the Code shall be taken into account; (iii) all “excess parachute payments” within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(l) of the Code shall be treated as subject to the Excise Tax unless, in the opinion of the Firm, such excess parachute payments (in whole or in part) represent reasonable compensation for services actually rendered (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(4)(B) of the Code) in excess of the Base Amount (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(3) of the Code) allocable to such reasonable compensation, or are otherwise not subject to the Excise Tax; and (iv) the value of any noncash benefits or any deferred payment or benefit shall be determined by the Firm in accordance with the principles of Sections 280G(d)(3) and (4) of the Code and regulations or other guidance thereunder. For purposes of determining whether any Payments in respect of a Participant shall be reduced, a Participant shall be deemed to pay federal income tax at the highest marginal rate of federal income taxation (and state and local income taxes at the highest marginal rate of taxation in the state and locality of such Participant’s residence, net of the maximum reduction in federal income taxes which could be obtained from deduction of such state and local taxes) in the calendar year in which the Payments are made. The Firm will be paid reasonable compensation by the Company for its services.
     (c) As soon as practicable following a Change in Control, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, the Company shall provide to each Participant with respect to whom it is proposed that Payments be reduced, a written statement setting forth the manner in which the Total Payments in respect of such Participant were calculated and the basis for such calculations, including, without limitation, any opinions or other advice the Company has received from the Firm or other advisors or consultants (and any such opinions or advice which are in writing shall be attached to the statement).
     4. The terms of any Option, RSA, or RSU (including terms under this Master Agreement or any Award Schedule) may be amended from time to time by the Committee in its sole discretion in any manner that it deems appropriate (including, but not limited to, acceleration of the date of payments thereunder); provided, however, that no such amendment shall adversely affect in a material manner any right of a Participant under such Option, RSA, or RSU without

13


 

the written consent of such Participant; provided, however, that the Committee shall not have the authority to amend any Option held by any executive officer of the Company as defined in Rule 3(b)(7) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, so that the amount of compensation an executive officer could receive is not based solely on an increase in the value of shares, or to otherwise amend any Award issued to such executive officer if the amendment would cause compensation payable thereunder to be nondeductible under Section 162(m) of the Code (or any successor provision) or regulations thereunder assuming such executive officer is a covered employee for purposes of such Section. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Committee shall not amend the terms of any Option, RSA, or RSU (including terms under this Master Agreement or any Award Schedule), to the extent such amendment would cause a violation of Section 409A.
     5. If and to the extent permitted by the Committee, and subject to the provisions of the Plan, a Participant may, by completing the form provided by the Corporate Secretary for such purpose and returning it to the Corporate Secretary’s Office in New York City, name a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive any payment or exercise any rights to which such Participant may become entitled under an Award in the event of such Participant’s death. To the extent permitted by the Corporate Secretary, a Participant may change his or her designated beneficiary or beneficiaries from time to time by submitting a new form to the Corporate Secretary’s Office in New York City, to the extent permitted by law (for example, unless such Participant has made a prior irrevocable designation). If a Participant does not designate a beneficiary, or if no designated beneficiary is living on the date any amount becomes payable under an Award, such payment will be made to the legal representatives of such Participant’s estate, which will be deemed to be the Participant’s designated beneficiary under the Award.
     6. If the Company, in its sole discretion, shall determine that the listing upon any securities exchange or registration or qualification under any United States federal, state, local, or foreign law of any shares to be delivered pursuant to an Award is necessary or desirable, delivery of such shares shall not be made in shares until such listing, registration, or qualification shall have been completed. Until a certificate for some or all of the shares subject to an RSU is issued to a Participant, a Participant shall have no rights as a shareholder of the Company and, in particular, shall not be entitled to vote such shares or to receive any dividend or other distribution paid in respect thereof.
     7. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Committee, in its sole discretion, may approve and the Company may issue Options, RSAs, or RSUs that are not governed by the provisions contained in this Master Agreement.
     8. Any action taken or decision made by the Company, the Board, or the Committee or its delegates arising out of or in connection with the construction, administration, interpretation, or effect of any provision of the Plan or this Master Agreement shall lie within its sole and absolute discretion, as the case may be, and shall be final, conclusive, and binding on the Participant and all persons claiming under or through the Participant. By receipt of such Awards or other benefit under the Plan, the Participant and each person claiming under or through the Participant shall be conclusively deemed to have indicated acceptance and ratification of, and consent to, any action taken under the Plan or this Master Agreement, by the Company, the Board or the Committee or its delegates.

14


 

     9. The validity, construction, interpretation, administration, and effect of the Plan and its rules and regulations, and rights relating to the Plan, and to any Award issued under this Master Agreement, shall be governed by the substantive laws, but not the choice of law rules, of the State of New York, in the United States of America.
     10. The Committee may rescind, without further notice to the Participant, any Award issued to the Participant under the Plan in duplicate, or in error, as determined in the sole discretion of the Committee.
     11. The Options and RSAs subject to this Master Agreement are intended to be exempt from Section 409A and the RSUs subject to this Master Agreement are intended to comply with Section 409A, and the Plan, this Master Agreement, and the applicable Award Schedules shall be administered and interpreted consistent with such intent and the American Express Section 409A Compliance Policy, as amended from time to time, and any successor policy thereto (the “409A Policy”).
Section V
MASTER AGREEMENT
DETRIMENTAL CONDUCT PROVISIONS
     1.  Applicability . Unless the Committee expressly determines otherwise, the provisions of this Section V of this Master Agreement shall apply to all Awards issued under the Plan.
     2.  Detrimental Conduct . If a current or former employee of, or other individual that provides or has provided services for the Company (the “Employee”) engages in Detrimental Conduct, Awards previously issued to such Employee may be canceled, rescinded, or otherwise restricted and the Company can recover any payments received by, and stock delivered to, the Employee in accordance with the terms of Paragraph 3. For purposes of this Section V, “Detrimental Conduct” shall mean the conduct described in Paragraphs 2(a) through 2(g).
     (a) Noncompete . For a one-year period after the last day of active employment if the Employee is a Band 70 or above employee, or for a six-month period after the last day of active employment if the Employee is a Band 50 or 60 employee, and during the Employee’s employment with the Company, the Employee shall not be employed by, provide advice to, or act as a consultant for any Competitor. The Company has defined Competitor for certain lines of business, departments or job functions by establishing a specific standard and/or by name as set forth in the Company’s Competitor List(s). An Employee’s personal list of competitors will be the sum of:
     (1) either (i) all competitors derived from the column titled Standard on the Competitor List for the lines of business and departments (as listed on the Competitor List under the Line of Business column) that the Employee provided services to or managed during the two-year period preceding the date the Employee’s active employment with the Company terminates, or (ii) if the job function the Employee is employed in at the time his or her active employment with the Company terminates is listed on the Competitor List under the Line of

15


 

Business column, the competitors cited for that job function under the Standard column of the Competitor List; and
     (2) the Entities (as that term is defined in Paragraph 8) listed on the Competitor List under the column titled Business Unit-Wide Competitors for the business units, i.e., AEB or TRS, the Employee provided services to or managed during the two-year period preceding the date his or her active employment with the Company terminates. If any line(s) of business the Employee provided services to or managed during the two-year period preceding the date his or her active employment with the Company terminates is not listed on the Competitor List then, with respect to such line(s) of business, the Employee shall not be employed by, provide advice to, or act as a consultant for (i) an Entity’s line of business that competes with those line(s) of business and (ii) the Entities listed on the Competitor List under the column titled Business Unit-Wide Competitors for the business units the Employee provided services to or managed during the two-year period preceding the date the Employee’s active employment with the Company terminates. Except for Business Unit-Wide Competitors, the prohibition against being employed by, providing advice to, or acting as a consultant for a Competitor is limited to the line(s) of business of the Competitor that compete with the line(s) of business of the Company that the Employee provided services to or managed. With respect to Business Unit-Wide Competitors, the Employee agrees not to be employed by, provide advice to, or act as a consultant for such Entities in any line of business because these Entities compete with several of the Company’s lines of business. The Company can revise the Competitor List at its discretion at any time and from time to time and as revised will become part of this Section V; a copy of the current Competitor List will be available through the Corporate Secretary’s Office. Notwithstanding anything in this Section V to the contrary, the Company shall not make any addition to the Competitor List for a period of two years following the date of a Change in Control (as defined in Section IV of this Plan Master Agreement, and as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto).
     (b) Nondenigration . For a one-year period after an Employee’s last day of active employment (the “Restricted Period”) and during his or her employment with the Company, an Employee or anyone acting at his or her direction may not denigrate the Company or the Company’s employees to the media or financial analysts. During the Restricted Period an Employee may not (i) provide information considered proprietary by the Company to the media or financial analysts or (ii) discuss the Company with the media or financial analysts, without the explicit written permission of the Executive Vice President of Corporate Affairs and Communications. This Paragraph shall not be applicable to any truthful statement required by any legal proceeding.
     (c) Nonsolicitation of Employees . During the Restricted Period, an Employee may not employ or solicit for employment any employee of the Company. In addition, during the Restricted Period an Employee may not advise or recommend to any other person that he or she employ or solicit for employment, any person employed by the Company for the purpose of employing that person at an Entity at which the Employee is

16


 

or intends to be (i) employed, (ii) a member of the Board of Directors, or (iii) providing consulting services.
     (d) Nonsolicitation of Customers . During the Restricted Period, an Employee may not directly or indirectly solicit or enter into any arrangement with any Entity which is, at the time of such solicitation, a significant customer of the Company for the purpose of engaging in any business transactions of the nature performed or contemplated by the Company. This Paragraph shall apply only to customers whom the Employee personally serviced while employed by the Company or customers the Employee acquired material information about while employed by the Company.
     (e) Misconduct . During his or her employment with the Company, an Employee may not engage in any conduct that results in termination of his or her employment for Misconduct. For purposes of this Section V, “Misconduct” is (i) material violation of the American Express Company Code of Conduct, (ii) criminal activity, (iii) gross insubordination, or (iv) gross negligence in the performance of duties.
     (f) Confidential Information . During the Restricted Period and during his or her employment with the Company, an Employee may not misappropriate or improperly disclose confidential information or trade secrets of the Company and its businesses, including but not limited to information about marketing or business plans, possible acquisitions or divestitures, potential new products or markets, and other data not available to the public.
     (g) Other Detrimental Conduct . During the Restricted Period, an Employee may not take any actions that the Company reasonably deems detrimental to its interests. To the extent practicable, the Company will request an Employee to cease and desist or rectify the conduct prior to seeking any legal remedies under this Paragraph, and will only seek legal remedies if the Employee does not comply with such request. This Paragraph shall not be applied to conduct that is otherwise permitted by Paragraphs 2(a) through 2(f). For example, if an Employee leaves the Company’s employment to work for an Entity that is not a Competitor under Paragraph 2(a), the Company will not claim that employment with that Entity violates Paragraph 2(g). Notwithstanding anything in this Section V to the contrary, this Paragraph 2(g) shall not be applicable to an Employee from and after his or her last day of active employment, if his or her active employment terminates for any reason (other than for Misconduct, as defined in Paragraph 2(e) above) within two years following a Change in Control (as such term is defined in Section IV of this Master Agreement, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto).
     3.  Remedies .
     (a) Repayment of Financial Gain . If an Employee fails to comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 2(a) through 2(g) and is at Band 70 or above at the time his or her active employment with the Company terminates, the Company may cancel any outstanding Awards and recover from the Employee (i) the amount of any gain realized on Options and stock appreciation rights exercised, as of the date exercised, (ii) any payments received for Portfolio Grant Awards or other Awards and (iii) stock whose restrictions lapsed (or the value of the stock at the time the restrictions lapsed) pursuant to

17


 

an RSA, RSU Award, or other Awards, during the last two years the Employee was employed by the Company. If an Employee fails to comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 2(a) through 2(g) and is at Band 50 or 60 at the time his or her active employment with the Company terminates, the Company may cancel any outstanding Awards and recover from the Employee the amount of any gain realized on Options and stock appreciation rights exercised, as of the date exercised, which were exercised during the last six months the Employee was employed by the Company. If an Employee fails to comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 2(a) through 2(g), the Employee must and agrees to repay the Company in accordance with the terms of this Paragraph, and the Company shall be entitled, to the extent and in the manner permitted by the 409A Policy, to set off against the amount of any such repayment obligation any amount owed, from any source, to the Employee by the Company.
     (b) Other Remedies . The remedy provided pursuant to Paragraph 3(a) shall be without prejudice to the Company’s right to recover any losses resulting from a violation of this Section V and shall be in addition to whatever other remedies the Company may have, at law or equity, for violation of the terms of this Section V.
     4.  Approval to Exercise Options . If an Employee is a Band 70 or above employee and elects to exercise more than 40% of his or her outstanding vested Options in any 90-day period, such Employee will need the written approval of the Chief Executive Officer or President of American Express Company or their delegate. If an Employee is a member of the Global Leadership Team (“GLT”) and elects to exercise more than 25% of his or her outstanding vested Options in any 90-day period, such Employee will need the written approval of the Chief Executive Officer or President of American Express Company or, if he or she is the Chief Executive Officer or President of American Express Company, the written approval of the Committee. If an Employee is a Band 50 or 60 employee and elects to exercise more than 40% of his or her outstanding vested Options in any 90-day period, such Employee will need the written approval of the Executive Officer who manages the area he or she works in. The standard for determining whether to approve an Employee’s request to exercise options will be whether he or she is complying and will comply with the requirement of Paragraphs 2(a) through 2(g). If an Employee’s request for approval is denied, he or she may submit a second request after 90 days have elapsed from the submission date of a completed Notice of Exercise of Employee Stock Option form (“Form”) on the first request. An Employee will have 30 trading days (exclusive of blackout periods due to “window” closings) from the date he or she receives written approval to exercise up to the full number of options requested in the Form.
     5.  Compensation Band Changes . If the Company changes its current system of classifying employees in compensation bands and management tiers, the references to Bands 50, 60 and 70, Executive Officers, and GLT members in this Section V will be construed to mean the compensation level(s) and management tiers in the new or revised system that, in the Company’s discretion, most closely approximates these bands and management tiers under the current system.
     6.  Involuntary Terminations . This Section V will not apply to employees of the Company who enter into a severance agreement with the Company or other involuntary terminations as determined by the Company (excluding terminations covered by Paragraph 2(e)).

18


 

     7.  Court Modification . If any term of this Section V is determined by a court of competent jurisdiction not to be enforceable in the manner set forth in this Section V, such term shall be enforceable to the maximum extent possible under applicable law, and such court shall reform such term to make it enforceable.
     8.  Definition of Entity . As used in this Section V, the word Entity or Entities shall mean any corporation, partnership, association, joint venture, trust, government, governmental agency or authority, person, or other organization or entity.
     9.  Waivers . The failure of the Company to enforce at any time any term of this Section V shall not be construed to be a waiver of such term or of any other term. Any waiver or modification of the terms of this Section V will only be effective if reduced to writing and signed by both the Employee and the President or Chief Executive Officer of the Company.
* * * * *

19

EXHIBIT 10.24
AMENDMENT OF
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
KEY EXECUTIVE LIFE INSURANCE PLAN
RESOLVED, that pursuant to Section 10.01 of the American Express Company Key Executive Life Insurance Plan (the “Plan”), the Plan is amended effective as of January 1, 2011 (the “Effective Date”), as follows:
  1.   Article VII, Section 7.02, Subsection (d)(iii) is hereby amended by adding a new Subsection (d)(iii) to read as follows:
(d)(iii)(A) This Section (d)(iii) shall apply in the event of a Change in Control, as defined in Section 2.19 hereof.
(B) In the event that any payment or benefit received or to be received by a Participant hereunder in connection with a Change in Control or termination of such Participant’s employment (hereinafter referred to collectively as the “Payments”), will be subject to the excise tax referred to in Section 4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be reduced to the extent necessary so that no portion of the Payments is subject to the Excise Tax but only if (a) the net amount of all Total Payments (as hereinafter defined), as so reduced (and after subtracting the net amount of federal, state, and local income and employment taxes on such reduced Total Payments), is greater than or equal to (b) the net amount of such Total Payments without any such reduction (but after subtracting the net amount of federal, state, and local income and employment taxes on such Total Payments) and the amount of Excise Tax to which the Participant would be subject in respect of such unreduced Total Payments; provided , however , that the Participant may elect in writing to have other components of his or her Total Payments reduced prior to any reduction in the Payments hereunder.
(C) For purposes of determining whether the Payments will be subject to the Excise Tax, the amount of such Excise Tax and whether any Payments are to be reduced hereunder: (a) all payments and benefits received or to be received by the Participant in connection with such Change in Control or the termination of such Participant’s employment, whether pursuant to the terms of this Agreement or any other plan, arrangement, or agreement with the Company, any Person (as such term is defined in Section 1.22 above) whose actions result in such Change in Control or any Person affiliated with the Company or such Person (collectively, “Total Payments”), shall be treated as “parachute payments” (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code) unless, in the

 


 

opinion of the accounting firm which was, immediately prior to the Change in Control, the Company’s independent auditor, or if that firm refuses to serve, by another qualified firm, whether or not serving as independent auditors, designated by the Committee (the “Firm”), such payments or benefits (in whole or in part) do not constitute parachute payments, including by reason of Section 280G(b)(2)(A) or Section 280G(b)(4)(A) of the Code; (b) no portion of the Total Payments the receipt or enjoyment of which the Participant shall have waived at such time and in such manner as not to constitute a “payment” within the meaning of Section 280G(b) of the Code shall be taken into account; (c) all “excess parachute payments” within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(l) of the Code shall be treated as subject to the Excise Tax unless, in the opinion of the Firm, such excess parachute payments (in whole or in part) represent reasonable compensation for services actually rendered (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(4)(B) of the Code) in excess of the Base Amount (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(3) of the Code) allocable to such reasonable compensation, or are otherwise not subject to the Excise Tax; and (d) the value of any noncash benefits or any deferred payment or benefit shall be determined by the Firm in accordance with the principles of Sections 280G(d)(3) and (4) of the Code and regulations or other guidance thereunder. For purposes of determining whether any Payments in respect of a Participant shall be reduced, a Participant shall be deemed to pay federal income tax at the highest marginal rate of federal income taxation (and state and local income taxes at the highest marginal rate of taxation in the state and locality of such Participant’s residence, net of the maximum reduction in federal income taxes which could be obtained from deduction of such state and local taxes) in the calendar year in which the Payments are made. The Firm will be paid reasonable compensation by the Company for its services.
(D) As soon as practicable following a Change in Control, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, the Company shall provide to each Participant with respect to whom it is proposed that Payments be reduced, a written statement setting forth the manner in which the Total Payments in respect of such Participant were calculated and the basis for such calculations, including, without limitation, any opinions or other advice the Company has received from the Firm or other advisors or consultants (and any such opinions or advice which are in writing shall be attached to the statement).

2

EXHIBIT 10.30
(AMERICAN EXPRESS LOGO)
AMERICAN EXPRESS
SENIOR EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE PLAN
(As amended and restated effective January 1, 2011)

 


 

EXHIBIT 10.30
AMERICAN EXPRESS
SENIOR EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE PLAN
(As amended and restated effective January 1, 2011)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
             
Introduction
        1  
 
           
Article 1
  Definitions     1  
 
           
Article 2
  Participation     7  
 
           
Article 3
  Amount of Benefits     9  
 
           
Article 4
  Method of Payment     12  
 
           
Article 5
  Administration of the Plan     14  
 
           
Article 6
  Adopting Companies and Plan Mergers     16  
 
           
Article 7
  Amendment and Termination     16  
 
           
Article 8
  Financial Provisions     17  
 
           
Article 9
  Liability and Indemnification     17  
 
           
Article 10
  Miscellaneous     19  
 
           
Schedule A
  Schedule for Severance Pay Benefits     20  

 


 

EXHIBIT 10.30
AMERICAN EXPRESS
SENIOR EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE PLAN
(As amended and restated effective January 1, 2011)
INTRODUCTION
     The Board of Directors of American Express Company established the American Express Senior Executive Severance Plan effective as of January l, l994, to provide for severance benefits for certain eligible executive officers of American Express Company and its participating subsidiaries whose employment is terminated under certain conditions. Severance benefits under the Plan are to be provided to such eligible executives in exchange for a signed agreement that includes a release of all claims.
ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS
     1.1 “ Administration Committee ” means the Committee established and appointed by the Board of Directors or by a committee of the Board of Directors.
     1.2 “ Affiliated Company ” means any corporation which is a member of a controlled group of corporations (determined in accordance with Section 4l4(b) of the Code) of which the Company is a member and any other trade or business (whether or not incorporated) which is controlled by, or under common control (determined in accordance with Section 4l4(c) of the Code) with the Company, but which is not an Employing Company.
     1.3 “ Annualized Compensation ” means, for an Employee for a given year, the Employee’s annualized compensation based upon the annual rate of pay for services provided to the Employing Company for the taxable year of the Employee for the year preceding the given year in which the Employee has a Separation from Service (adjusted for any increases during the given year that was expected to continue indefinitely if the Employee had not had a Separation from Service), determined in accordance with Section 1.409A-1(b)(9)(iii)(A)(1) of the Treasury Regulations.
     1.4 “ Base Salary ” means the regular basic cash remuneration before deductions for taxes and other items withheld, payable to an Employee for services rendered to an Employing Company, but not including pay for bonuses, incentive compensation, special pay, awards or commissions.
     1.5 “ Board of Directors ” means the board of directors of the Company.
     1.6 “ Bonus ” means annual incentive compensation paid to an Employee over and above Base Salary earned and paid in cash or otherwise under any executive bonus or sales incentive plan or program of an Employing Company. Annual incentive compensation shall not include incentive compensation with a performance period longer than one year (e.g., performance grant awards), but shall include restricted stock awards expressly granted in lieu of cash supplemental annual incentive awards.

 


 

     1.7 “ Change in Control ” means the happening of any of the following:
          (a) Any individual, entity or group (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)) (a “Person”) becomes the beneficial owner (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 25 percent or more of either (i) the then outstanding common shares of the Company (the “Outstanding Company Common Shares”) or (ii) the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of the Company entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Company Voting Securities”); provided, however, that such beneficial ownership shall not constitute a Change in Control if it occurs as a result of any of the following acquisitions of securities: (A) any acquisition directly from the Company; (B) any acquisition by the Company or any corporation, partnership, trust or other entity controlled by the Company (a “Subsidiary”); (C) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or any Subsidiary; (D) any acquisition by an underwriter temporarily holding Company securities pursuant to an offering of such securities; (E) any acquisition by an individual, entity or group that is permitted to, and actually does, report its beneficial ownership on Schedule 13-G (or any successor schedule), provided that, if any such individual, entity or group subsequently becomes required to or does report its beneficial ownership on Schedule 13D (or any successor schedule), then, for purposes of this subsection, such individual, entity or group shall be deemed to have first acquired, on the first date on which such individual, entity or group becomes required to or does so report, beneficial ownership of all of the Outstanding Company Common Stock and Outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by it on such date; or (F) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a reorganization, merger or consolidation if, following such reorganization, merger or consolidation, the conditions described in clauses (i), (ii) and (iii) of Section 1.7(c) are satisfied. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change in Control shall not be deemed to occur solely because any Person (the “Subject Person”) became the beneficial owner of 25 percent or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities as a result of the acquisition of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities by the Company which, by reducing the number of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, increases the proportional number of shares beneficially owned by the Subject Person; provided, that if a Change in Control would be deemed to have occurred (but for the operation of this sentence) as a result of the acquisition of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities by the Company, and after such share acquisition by the Company, the Subject Person becomes the beneficial owner of any additional Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities which increases the percentage of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by the Subject Person, then a Change in Control shall then be deemed to have occurred; or
          (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board of Directors (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Company’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for

2


 

this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of either an actual or threatened election contest or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board of Directors, including by reason of agreement intended to avoid or settle any such actual or threatened contest or solicitation; or
          (c) The consummation of a reorganization, merger, statutory share exchange, consolidation, or similar corporate transaction involving the Company or any of its direct or indirect Subsidiaries (each a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i) the Outstanding Company Common Shares and the Outstanding Company Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination, continue to represent (either by remaining outstanding or being converted into voting securities of the resulting or surviving entity or any parent thereof) more than 50 percent of the then outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, as the case may be, of the corporation resulting from Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation that, as a result of such transaction, owns the Company or all or substantially all of the Company’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries), (ii) no Person (excluding the Company, any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Company, a Subsidiary of such corporation resulting from such Business Combination or any parent or subsidiary thereof, and any Person beneficially owning, immediately prior to such Business Combination, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, as the case may be) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (or any parent thereof) or the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (or any parent thereof) were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement or action of the Board of Directors providing for such Business Combination; or
          (d) The consummation of the sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, unless such assets have been sold, leased, exchanged or disposed of to a corporation with respect to which following such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition (i) more than 50 percent of, respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of such corporation and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation (or any parent thereof) entitled to vote generally in the election of directors is then beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Company Common Shares and Outstanding Company Voting Securities immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition in substantially the same proportions as their ownership immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of such Outstanding Company Common Shares and Outstanding Company Voting Shares, as the case may be, (ii) no Person (excluding the Company and any employee benefit plan (or related trust)) of the Company or a Subsidiary or of such corporation or a subsidiary thereof and any Person beneficially owning, immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of the Outstanding Company

3


 

Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, as the case may be) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of respectively, the then outstanding shares of common stock of such corporation (or any parent thereof) and the combined voting power of the then outstanding voting securities of such corporation (or any parent thereof) entitled to vote generally in the election of directors and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of such corporation (or any parent thereof) were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement or action of the Board of Directors providing for such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of assets of the Company; or
          (e) Approval by the shareholders of the Company of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company.
     1.8 “ Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.
     1.9 “ Committee ” means the Compensation and Benefits Committee of the Board of Directors or any successor committee appointed by the Board of Directors.
     1.10 “ Company ” means American Express Company, a New York corporation, its successors and assigns.
     1.11 “ Comparable Position ” means a job with the Company, an Employing Company, an Affiliated Company or successor company at the same or higher Base Salary as an Employee’s current job and at a work location within reasonable commuting distance from an Employee’s home, as determined by such Employee’s Employing Company. For Employees in the Employing Company’s international expatriate program, Comparable Position means a job with an Employing Company, an Affiliated Company or successor company at the same or higher Base Salary as an Employee’s current job and at a work location in the Employee’s country of assignment, home country or career base country.
     1.12 “ Completed Years of Service ” means the number of full one year periods that have transpired since the Employee’s original date of hire or, in the case of someone who has incurred a break in service, the date of rehire, through the Employee’s Separation from Service with the Company.
     1.13 “ Constructive Termination ” means a Separation from Service by an Employee from an Employing Company as a result of one or more of the following without the Employee’s written consent within two years after a Change in Control (each of the following, a “Good Reason”):
          (a) a material reduction in Base Salary, except for across-the-board changes similarly affecting all Employees of the Employing Company and all Employees of any Person in control of the Employing Company, or any material reduction in the aggregate of the Employee’s annual and long term incentive opportunity, in each case from that in effect immediately prior to the Change in Control;

4


 

          (b) the Employing Company’s requirement that the Employee be based more than 50 miles from the location at which the Employee was based immediately prior to the Change in Control and which location is more than 35 miles from the Employee’s residence;
          (c) the assignment to the Employee of any duties that are materially inconsistent with the Employee’s duties prior to the Change in Control; or
          (d) a significant reduction in the Employee’s position, duties, or responsibilities from those in effect prior to the Change in Control.
The Employee shall notify the Employing Company within 30 days after the occurrence of an event giving rise to a Good Reason and the Employing Company shall have 30 days to remedy the condition, and if remedied by the Employing Company within such 30-day period, no Good Reason shall exist on account of the remedied event. A “Constructive Termination” is intended to qualify as an involuntary separation from service for purposes of Section 409A, and this definition of “Constructive Termination” shall be administered and interpreted consistent with such intention.
     1.14 “ Defined Termination ” means a Separation from Service of an Employee within two years after a Change in Control that occurs as a result of either: (a) an Involuntary Termination, or (b) a Constructive Termination.
     1.15 “ Employee ” means any person, at the senior executive level as defined by the Administration Committee, paid through the payroll function of the Employing Company (as opposed to the accounts payable function of the Employing Company) and employed on a regular full-time basis (i.e., an employee whose scheduled workweek is consistent with the standard workweek schedule of a business unit or department) or regular part-time basis (i.e., an employee who is scheduled to work at least 20 hours per week, but fewer than the hours of a regular full-time employee) by an Employing Company, who receives from an Employing Company a regular stated compensation and an annual IRS Form W-2; provided, however, that an Employing Company or operating business unit thereof, due to business, marketplace or employee relations reasons, may, in its sole discretion, by policy exclude from the definition of Employee under the Plan any category or level of employee employed in a non-exempt, exempt or executive level position or in an initial probationary or trial period of employment. The term “Employee” shall not include any person who has entered into an independent contractor agreement, consulting agreement, franchise agreement or any similar agreement with an Employing Company, nor the employees of any such person, regardless of whether that person (including his or her employees) is later found to be an employee by any court of law or regulatory authority.
     1.16 “ Employing Company ” means the Company and such of its subsidiaries and affiliated companies and other trades or businesses as have adopted the Plan and have been admitted to participation by the Committee or any one or more of them, and any corporation or other entity succeeding to the rights and assuming the obligations of any such company hereunder in the manner described in Section 6.1.

5


 

     1.17 “ ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of l974, as amended from time to time.
     1.18 “ Executive Officer ” means an employee of the Company or one of its subsidiaries who is in a position which is designated by the Board of Directors of the Company as a position which is subject to the reporting requirements under Section 16(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder in respect of the equity securities of the Company; provided, however, that the Comptroller of the Company (although subject to the above reporting requirements) shall not be deemed to be an Executive Officer.
     1.19 “ Good Cause ” means a discontinuance of an Employee’s employment by an Employing Company upon one of the following:
          (a) the Employee’s Willful and continued failure to adequately perform substantially all of the Employee’s duties with the Employing Company;
          (b) the Employee’s Willful engagement in conduct which is demonstrably and materially injurious to the Employing Company or an affiliate thereof, monetarily or otherwise; or
          (c) the Employee’s conviction of a felony.
     1.20 “ Involuntary Termination ” means any involuntary Separation from Service by an Employee from an Employing Company for reasons other than Good Cause within two years after a Change in Control. An “Involuntary Termination” is intended to qualify as an involuntary separation from service for purposes of Section 409A, and this definition of “Involuntary Termination” shall be administered and interpreted consistent with such intention.
     1.21 “ Leave of Absence ” means the period during which an Employee is absent from work pursuant to a leave of absence granted by an Employing Company where such leave of absence does not result in a Separation from Service.
     1.22 “ Mutually Satisfactory Resignation ” means an Employee’s resignation where the Employing Company would have terminated the Employee’s services if the Employee did not voluntarily resign, and the Employee was aware of that fact. A “Mutually Satisfactory Resignation” is intended to qualify as an involuntary separation from service for purposes of Section 409A, and this definition of “Mutually Satisfactory Resignation” shall be administered and interpreted consistent with such intention.
     1.23 “ Plan ” means the American Express Senior Executive Severance Plan, as set forth herein and as hereafter amended from time to time.
     1.24 “ Plan Year ” means a calendar year.
     1.25 “ Policy ” means the American Express Section 409A Compliance Policy, as amended from time to time, and any successor policy thereto.

6


 

     1.26 “ Predecessor Company ” means any corporation or unincorporated entity heretofore or hereafter merged or consolidated with or otherwise absorbed by an Employing Company or any substantial part of the business of which has been or shall be acquired by an Employing Company.
     1.27 “ Retirement ” means a Separation from Service that qualifies as a “normal retirement,” as defined in and meeting the terms and conditions of the American Express Retirement Savings Plan, as amended from time to time, and any successor plan thereto.
     1.28 “ Section 409A ” means Section 409A of the Code, and the Treasury Regulations promulgated and other official guidance issued thereunder.
     1.29 “ Section 409A Change in Control ” means a “change in the ownership,” a “change in the effective control” or a “change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets” of the Employing Company, each as determined in accordance with Section 409A.
     1.30 “ Section 401(a)(17) Limit ” means, with respect to a given year, the maximum amount that may be taken into account under a qualified plan pursuant to Section 401(a)(17) of the Code for such year, determined in accordance with Section 1.409A-1(b)(9)(iii)(A)(2) of the Treasury Regulations.
     1.31 “ Separation from Service ” means a “separation from service” for purposes of Section 409A, as determined in accordance with the Policy.
     1.32 “ Separation Period ” means the period of time over which an Employee receives severance benefits under the Plan in substantially equal installment payments, which shall be equal to the number of weeks of severance benefits to which the Employee is entitled pursuant to Schedule A hereto.
     1.33 “ Willful ” means that an act or failure to act on an Employee’s part is done, or omitted to be done, by the Employee in a manner that is not in good faith, and that is without reasonable belief that such action or omission was in the best interests of an Employing Company.
ARTICLE 2
PARTICIPATION
     2.1 Eligibility to Receive Benefits . Subject to Section 2.2, each Employee shall be eligible to receive benefits under the Plan in the event of such Employee’s Separation from Service from an Employing Company for one of the following reasons:
          (a) reduction in force;
          (b) position elimination;
          (c) office closing;
          (d) poor performance;

7


 

          (e) Mutually Satisfactory Resignation;
          (f) relocation of an employee’s current position that does not meet the definition of Comparable Position; or
          (g) Defined Termination (notwithstanding any provision of Section 2.3).
     2.2 Limitations on Eligibility In the event an Employee who is otherwise eligible to receive benefits under the Plan is offered a Comparable Position (whether the position is accepted or rejected by the Employee), the Employee will not be eligible to receive benefits under the Plan with respect to any resultant Separation from Service. In addition, an Employee is not eligible to receive benefits under the Plan if the Employee accepts any position in the Company, an Employing Company, an Affiliated Company or successor company (regardless of whether it is a Comparable Position). An Employee who is an Executive Officer and who otherwise meets the eligibility criteria may only receive benefits under the Plan if approved by the Committee in advance. An Employee who is offered or placed on a temporary layoff status (often referred to as a furlough) with reduced or no pay for a period of less than six months during which time the Employee continues to participate in certain benefit plans as determined by the Company is not eligible to receive benefits under the Plan.
     2.3 Ineligibility for Participation . An Employee is ineligible to receive benefits under the Plan in the event his Separation from Service by an Employing Company for a reason other than those enumerated in Section 2.1, including, but not limited to, the following:
          (a) voluntary resignation;
          (b) failure to report for work;
          (c) failure to return from leave;
          (d) return from a Leave of Absence which extends beyond the policy reinstatement period, if applicable, and no position is available;
          (e) excessive absenteeism or lateness;
          (f) merger, acquisition, sale, transfer, outsourcing or reorganization of all or part of the Employing Company or any affiliate thereof where either (i) a Comparable Position is offered with, or (ii) the Employee accepts any position (regardless of whether it is a Comparable Position) with, a successor company, whether affiliated or unaffiliated with the Employing Company, including an outside contractor, and whether or not the successor company adopts the Plan;
          (g) violation of a policy or procedure of the Employing Company, insubordination, unwillingness to perform the duties of a position, suspected dishonesty, or other misconduct;
          (h) Retirement, including the acceptance of any Employing Company sponsored retirement incentive; provided, however, that in the event an Employee is otherwise

8


 

eligible for a severance pay benefit in accordance with Section 2.1 and also eligible for Retirement, the Employee shall be eligible to receive benefits under the Plan in accordance with Article 3; or
          (i) death.
ARTICLE 3
AMOUNT OF BENEFITS
     3.1 Amount of Benefits . The severance benefit payable to an eligible Employee under the Plan shall be based on his Completed Years of Service and position with the Company, Employing Company or Affiliated Company. The formula for determining an Employee’s severance benefit payment shall be calculated by first adding together (a) the Employee’s annual Base Salary in effect immediately prior to the date of Separation from Service and (b) the last annual Bonus paid to the Employee as of the date management tenders to him the Agreement required pursuant to Section 3.5. In the case of a recently hired Employee who has not yet received a Bonus, the Employee’s designated target Bonus may be used as the Section 3.1(b) portion of the foregoing calculation. The sum of Section 3.1(a) and (b) shall then be divided by 52 to calculate the weekly severance benefit (the “Weekly Severance Benefit Amount”). The amount of the total severance benefit (the “Gross Severance Benefit Amount”) shall be determined by multiplying the Weekly Severance Benefit Amount by the number of weeks of severance benefits to which the Employee is entitled pursuant to Schedule A hereto. The number of weeks over which severance benefits are payable under the Plan to any eligible Employee who is not an Executive Officer shall not exceed 78 weeks, and the number of weeks over which severance benefits are payable under the Plan to any eligible Employee who is an Executive Officer shall not exceed 104 weeks. The total amount of severance calculated pursuant to Schedule A hereto shall not exceed 78 weeks for Employees who are not Executive Officers or 104 weeks for Executive Officers.
     3.2 Limitations on Amount of Severance Benefits . To the extent permissible under Section 409A, benefits payable under the Plan to an Employee shall be inclusive of and offset by any other severance, redundancy or termination payment made by an Employing Company to the Employee, including, but not limited to, any amounts paid pursuant to federal, state, local or foreign government worker notification (e.g., Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act) or office closing requirements, any amounts owed the Employee pursuant to a contract with the Employing Company (unless the contract specifically provides otherwise) and amounts paid to an Employee placed in a temporary layoff status (often referred to as a furlough) which immediately precedes the commencement of the severance payments.
     3.3 Reemployment . In the event an Employee is reemployed by the Employing Company or an Affiliated Company within the period covered by the schedule of severance benefits on Schedule A hereto, the severance benefits, if any, that are in excess of the number of weeks between the Separation from Service and the rehire date shall be repaid by the Employee or withheld by the Employing Company, as the case may be; and any benefits withheld or repaid shall be forfeited by the Employee. In the further event an eligible Employee who is receiving severance benefits under the Plan is later rehired by an Employing Company or an Affiliated Company, and employment later terminates under conditions making such Employee eligible for

9


 

severance benefits under the Plan, the amount of the second severance benefit will be based on such Employee’s actual date of reemployment and not the original date of employment.
     3.4 Withholding Tax . The Employing Company shall deduct from the amount of any severance benefits payable under the Plan, any amount required to be withheld by the Employing Company by reason of any law or regulation, for the payment of taxes or otherwise to any federal, state, local or foreign government. In determining the amount of any applicable tax, the Employing Company shall be entitled to rely on the number of personal exemptions on the official form(s) filed by the Employee with the Employing Company for purposes of income tax withholding on regular wages.
     3.5 Requirement of Signed Agreement . Receipt of severance benefits under the Plan is conditioned upon the Employee signing an agreement with the Employee’s Employing Company in a form satisfactory to the Company and in accordance with the requirements of applicable law (the “Agreement”). The Agreement must include a release of claims and may include whatever other terms the Employing Company deems appropriate, including restrictive covenants. If the terms of the Agreement are found to be legally unenforceable, the Employee must return any severance benefits paid pursuant to Section 3.1 of the Plan plus the value of any long term incentive awards which vested during the Separation Period; provided, however, that in the event the Employee has a Defined Termination, such restrictive covenants shall (a) be reasonable under the applicable facts and circumstances; (b) include the following (i) non-solicitation of customers and employees; (ii) confidentiality of business data; (iii) full release of claims; and (iv) non-denigration of the Company and its affiliates, and their officers, directors and agents; and (c) not include any non-competition limitations. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Company shall, for a period of two years and one day following a Change in Control, be prohibited from entering into any agreement with an Employee, which contains a more expansive Competitor List (as provided in Paragraph 2 of the “Consent to the Application of Forfeiture and Detrimental Conduct Provisions to Incentive Compensation Plan Awards”) than that which was in effect for such Employee immediately prior to the date of such Change in Control. If an Employee has already signed the Agreement required by this Section 3.5 prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Employee is not eligible to receive any benefits that would otherwise be triggered by a Change in Control, except as provided by Section 4.1(g).
     3.6 Excise Tax .
          (a) This Section 3.6 shall apply in the event of a Change in Control.
          (b) In the event that any payment or benefit received or to be received by an Employee hereunder in connection with a Change in Control or such Employee’s Separation from Service (such payments and benefits hereinafter referred to collectively as the “ Payments ”), will be subject to the excise tax (the “ Excise Tax ”) referred to in Section 4999 of the Code, then the Payments shall be reduced to the extent necessary so that no portion of the Payments is subject to the Excise Tax but only if (A) the net amount of all Total Payments (as hereinafter defined), as so reduced (and after subtracting the net amount of federal, state and local income and employment taxes on such reduced Total Payments), is greater than or equal to (B) the net amount of such Total Payments without any such reduction (but after subtracting the net amount

10


 

of federal, state and local income and employment taxes on such Total Payments and the amount of Excise Tax to which an Employee would be subject in respect of such unreduced Total Payments); provided, however, that the Employee may elect in writing to have other components of his or her Total Payments reduced prior to any reduction in the Payments hereunder.
          (c) For purposes of determining whether the Payments will be subject to the Excise Tax, the amount of such Excise Tax and whether any Payments are to be reduced hereunder: (i) all payments and benefits received or to be received by an Employee in connection with such Change in Control or such Employee’s Separation from Service, whether pursuant to the terms of the Plan or any other plan, arrangement or agreement with the Company, any Person (as such term is defined in Section 1.7) whose actions result in such Change in Control or any Person affiliated with the Company or such Person (all such payments and benefits being hereinafter referred to as the “ Total Payments ”), shall be treated as “parachute payments” (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code) unless, in the opinion of the accounting firm which was, immediately prior to the Change in Control, the Company’s independent auditor, or if that firm refuses to serve, by another qualified firm, whether or not serving as independent auditors, designated by the Administration Committee (the “ Firm ”), such payments or benefits (in whole or in part) do not constitute parachute payments, including by reason of Section 280G(b)(2)(A) or Section 280G(b)(4)(A) of the Code; (ii) no portion of the Total Payments the receipt or enjoyment of which the Employee shall have waived at such time and in such manner as not to constitute a “payment” within the meaning of Section 280G(b) of the Code shall be taken into account; (iii) all “excess parachute payments” within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(l) of the Code shall be treated as subject to the Excise Tax unless, in the opinion of the Firm, such excess parachute payments (in whole or in part) represent reasonable compensation for services actually rendered (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(4)(B) of the Code) in excess of the Base Amount (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(3) of the Code) allocable to such reasonable compensation, or are otherwise not subject to the Excise Tax; and (iv) the value of any noncash benefits or any deferred payment or benefit shall be determined by the Firm in accordance with the principles of Sections 280G(d)(3) and (4) of the Code and regulations or other guidance there under. For purposes of determining whether any Payments in respect of a Employee shall be reduced, the Employee shall be deemed to pay federal income tax at the highest marginal rate of federal income taxation (and state and local income taxes at the highest marginal rate of taxation in the state and locality of such Employee’s residence, net of the maximum reduction in federal income taxes which could be obtained from deduction of such state and local taxes) in the calendar year in which the Payments are made. The Firm will be paid reasonable compensation by the Company for its services.
          (d) As soon as practicable following a Change in Control, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, the Company shall provide to each Employee with respect to whom it is proposed that Payments be reduced, a written statement setting forth the manner in which the Total Payments in respect of such Employee were calculated and the basis for such calculations, including, without limitation, any opinions or other advice the Company has received from the Firm or other advisors or consultants (and any such opinions or advice which are in writing shall be attached to the statement).

11


 

ARTICLE 4
METHOD OF PAYMENT
     4.1 Payment .
          (a) Except as otherwise provided by this Article 4 or the Plan, the Company shall pay the Gross Severance Benefit Amount to the Employee during the Separation Period in substantially equal payments in accordance with the normal payroll schedule applicable to the Employee, commencing with the applicable payroll period immediately following the Employee’s Separation from Service.
          (b) If the severance benefits provided under the Plan qualify for the involuntary separation pay exception under Section 409A, the Employee is a “specified employee” (for purposes of Section 409A and as determined in accordance with the Policy) on the date of his Separation from Service, and the total amount of benefits to be paid to the Employee during the six-month period following his Separation from Service is more than two times the lesser of the Employee’s Annualized Compensation or the Section 401(a)(17) Limit, each for the year in which the Separation from Service occurs, then:
               (i) the severance benefits to be paid during the six-month period following the Employee’s Separation from Service shall be two times the lesser of the Employee’s Annualized Compensation or the Section 401(a)(17) Limit, each for the year in which the Separation from Service occurs, divided by the number of severance payments to be made during such six-month period (given the normal payroll schedule applicable to the Employee);
               (ii) the difference between the amount of the severance benefits actually paid by the Company or Employing Company pursuant to Section 4.1(b)(i) and the amount the Employee would have received during such six-month period but for the application of Section 4.1(b)(i), shall be paid to the Employee on the first payroll date immediately following the first day of the seventh month following the Employee’s Separation from Service; and
               (iii) the balance of the severance benefits to be paid for the remainder of the Separation Period following the expiration of the six-month period shall be paid in accordance with Section 4.1(a).
          (c) In the event that the severance benefits provided under the Plan do not qualify for the involuntary separation pay exception under Section 409A and the Employee is a “specified employee” (for purposes of Section 409A and as determined in accordance with the Policy) on the date of his Separation from Service, then:

12


 

               (i) the amount the Employee would have received during the six-month period following the Employee’s Separation from Service had the severance benefits been paid in installments in accordance with Section 4.1(a) during such six-month period shall be paid to the Employee in a lump sum on the first payroll date immediately following the first day of the seventh month following the Employee’s Separation from Service; and
               (ii) the balance of the severance benefits to be paid for the remainder of the Separation Period following the expiration of the six-month period shall be paid in accordance with Section 4.1(a).
          (d) In the event the Employee has a Defined Termination, and the Change in Control to which the Defined Termination relates qualifies as a Section 409A Change in Control, then:
               (i) if the Employee is not a “specified employee” (for purposes of Section 409A and as determined in accordance with the Policy) on the date of his Separation from Service, the Employee’s Gross Severance Benefit Amount will be paid to him in a lump sum within 15 days following the Employee’s Separation from Service; and
               (ii) if the Employee is a “specified employee” (for purposes of Section 409A and as determined in accordance with the Policy) on the date of his Separation from Service, the Employee’s Gross Severance Benefit Amount will be paid to him as follows:
                    (1) if the severance benefits provided under the Plan qualify for the involuntary separation pay exception under Section 409A, an amount equal to two times the lesser of the Employee’s Annualized Compensation or the Section 401(a)(17) Limit, each for the year in which the Separation from Service occurs, shall be paid to him in a lump sum within 15 days following the Employee’s Separation from Service; and
                    (2) the Employee’s Gross Severance Benefit Amount, less the amount, if any, paid to the Employee pursuant to Section 4.1(d)(ii)(1), will be paid to him in a lump sum on the first day of the seventh month following the Employee’s Separation from Service.
          (e) Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, if the Employee’s Separation from Service occurs within two years following a Change in Control, then to the extent permissible under Section 409A, the Employee shall continue to be eligible to receive benefits under the Company’s medical and dental plans for the applicable period as if the Employee were paid severance in installments, such benefits to be substantially identical to the benefits provided immediately prior to the Change in Control. In the event that the continuation of any such benefits during the six-month period following Separation from Service would result in the imposition of a tax under Section 409A, the Company shall allow the Employee to pay the out-of-pocket cost of such benefits during such six-month period and the Company will make a lump-sum payment to the Employee in an amount equal to the out-of-pocket costs so paid by the Employee, on the first day of the seventh month following the Employee’s Separation from Service.

13


 

          (f) Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, if the Employee is not a United States citizen and has not been taxable for US federal income tax purposes as a resident alien at any time during his employment with the Employing Company, then, to the extent it would not result in the imposition of the excise tax or penalty under Section 409A to the Employee, the Employing Company may pay the Gross Severance Benefit Amount to the Employee in a lump sum or in installments, in the Employing Company’s sole discretion.
          (g) Inactive Employment Status . During the Separation Period, the Employee will remain in an inactive employment status until receipt of such payments is completed, at which time employment will be terminated. During the Separation Period, to the extent permissible under Section 409A, certain other employee benefits may be continued, payment for which shall be deducted from such severance payments in accordance with the Employee’s previously elected benefit coverage. During the Separation Period, the Company reserves the right, to the extent permissible under Section 409A, to continue other programs such as the Incentive Compensation Plan and the Perquisite Program in accordance with its policies, which may be changed or terminated from time to time. Nothing in this Section 4.1(g) shall create a contract to provide such benefits.
     4.2 Limitations on Severance Payments . In no event shall the period of time during which an Employee receives severance payments exceed 104 weeks. Nothing in this Section 4.2 shall affect the total number of weeks payable under the Plan pursuant to Schedule A hereto, including, but not limited to, the 104-week maximum payment.
     4.3 Death . In the event an Employee dies before full receipt of severance benefits payable under the Plan, the remaining severance benefits will be paid to the legal representative of such Employee’s estate in a lump sum after receipt of notice of such death and evidence satisfactory to the Company of the payment or provision for the payment of any estate, transfer, inheritance or death taxes which may be payable with respect thereto; provided, however, payment must be made within 90 days of the date of the Employee’s death, or such later date permitted by Section 409A.
ARTICLE 5
ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN
     5.1 Powers of the Employing Company . The Employing Company shall have such powers, authorities and discretion as are necessary or appropriate in order to carry out its duties under the Plan, including, but not limited to, the power:
          (a) to obtain such information as it shall deem necessary or appropriate in order to carry out its duties under the Plan;
          (b) to make determinations with respect to the grounds for termination of employment of any Employee; and
          (c) to establish and maintain necessary records.

14


 

     5.2 Employing Company Authority . Nothing contained in the Plan shall be deemed to qualify, limit or alter in any manner the Employing Company’s sole and complete authority and discretion to establish, regulate, determine or modify at any time, the terms and conditions of employment, including, but not limited to, levels of employment, hours of work, the extent of hiring and employment termination, when and where work shall be done, marketing of its products, or any other matter related to the conduct of its business or the manner in which its business is to be maintained or carried on, in the same manner and to the same extent as if the Plan were not in existence.
     5.3 Administration Committee Duties and Powers . The Administration Committee shall be responsible for the general administration and interpretation of the Plan and the proper execution of its provisions and shall have full discretion to carry out its duties. The Administration Committee shall be the “Administrator” of the Plan and shall be, in its capacity as Administrator, a “Named Fiduciary,” as such terms are defined or used in ERISA. For the purposes of carrying out its duties as Administrator, the Administration Committee may, in its sole discretion, allocate its responsibilities under the Plan among its members, and may, in its sole discretion, designate persons other than members of the Administration Committee to carry out such of its responsibilities under the Plan as it may deem fit. In addition to the powers of the Administration Committee specified elsewhere in the Plan, the Administration Committee shall have all discretionary powers necessary to discharge its duties under the Plan, including, but not limited to, the following discretionary powers and duties:
          (a) to interpret or construe the Plan, and resolve ambiguities, inconsistencies and omissions;
          (b) to make and enforce such rules and regulations and prescribe the use of such forms as it deems necessary or appropriate for the efficient administration of the Plan; and
          (c) to decide all questions on appeal concerning the Plan and the eligibility of any person to receive benefits under the Plan.
     5.4 Determinations . The determination of the Administration Committee as to any question involving the general administration and interpretation or construction of the Plan shall be within its sole discretion and shall be final, conclusive and binding on all persons, except as otherwise provided herein or by law.
     5.5 Claims Review Procedure . Consistent with the requirements of ERISA and the regulations thereunder as promulgated by the Secretary of Labor from time to time, the following claims review procedure shall be followed with respect to the denial of severance benefits to any Employee:
          (a) Within 30 days from the date of an Employee’s Separation from Service, the Employing Company shall furnish such Employee either an agreement offering severance benefits under the Plan or notice of such Employee’s ineligibility for or denial of severance benefits, either in whole or in part. Such notice from the Employing Company will be in writing and sent to the Employee or the legal representative of his estate stating the reasons for such ineligibility or denial and, if applicable, a description of additional information that might cause a

15


 

reconsideration by the Administration Committee or its delegate of the decision and an explanation of the Plan’s claims review procedure. In the event such notice is not furnished within 30 days, any claim for severance benefits shall be deemed denied and the Employee shall be permitted to proceed to Section 5.5(b).
          (b) Within 60 days after receiving notice of such denial or ineligibility or within 90 days after the Employee’s Separation from Service if no notice is received, the Employee, the legal representative of his estate or a duly authorized representative may then submit to the Administration Committee a written request for a review of such decision of denial.
          (c) The Administration Committee will review the claim and within 60 days (or 120 days in special circumstances) provide a written response to the appeal setting forth specific reasons for such decision. In the event the decision on review is not furnished within such time period, the claim shall be deemed denied.
ARTICLE 6
ADOPTING COMPANIES AND PLAN MERGERS
     6.1 Adopting Companies . Any corporation which succeeds to the business and assets of the Company or any part of its operations, may by appropriate resolution adopt the Plan and shall thereupon succeed to such rights and assume such obligations hereunder as the Company and said corporation shall have agreed upon in writing. Any corporation which succeeds to the business of any Employing Company other than the Company, or any part of the operations of such Employing Company, may by appropriate resolution adopt the Plan and shall thereupon succeed to such rights and assume such obligations hereunder as such Employing Company and said corporation shall have agreed upon in writing, provided, however, that such adoption and the terms thereof agreed upon in such writing have been approved by the Company.
ARTICLE 7
AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION
     7.1 Right to Amend or Terminate . The Company reserves the right, by action of the Board of Directors or the Committee, to amend or terminate the Plan in whole or in part at any time and from time to time, and any amendment or effective date of termination may be given retroactive effect; provided, however, that the Plan may not be amended or terminated if such amendment or termination would cause the Plan to fail to comply with, or cause an Employee to be subject to tax under, Section 409A. The foregoing sentence to the contrary notwithstanding, for a period of two years and one day after the date of an occurrence of a Change in Control, neither the Board of Directors nor the Committee may terminate the Plan or amend the Plan in a manner that is detrimental to the rights of any eligible Employee under the Plan without his or her written consent.
     7.2 Termination by an Employing Company . Any Employing Company other than the Company may withdraw from participation in the Plan at any time by delivering to the Administration Committee written notification to that effect signed by such Employing Company’s chief executive officer or his delegate. Withdrawal by any Employing Company pursuant to this Section 7.2, or complete discontinuance of severance benefits under the Plan by

16


 

any Employing Company other than the Company, shall constitute termination of the Plan with respect to such Employing Company. The foregoing sentence to the contrary notwithstanding, neither the Board of Directors nor the Committee may terminate the Plan or amend the Plan in a manner that (a) would cause the Plan to fail to comply with, or cause an Employee to be subject to tax under, Section 409A; (b) is detrimental to the rights of any eligible Employee of the Plan without his written consent (i) with respect to the provisions of the Plan which become applicable upon a Change in Control, and (ii) with respect to all provisions of the Plan for a period of two years and one day after the date of a Change in Control.
     7.3 Limitation on Benefits . In the event any Employing Company withdraws from participation or the Company terminates the Plan as provided in this Article 7, no Employee shall be entitled to receive benefits hereunder for employment either before or after such action.
ARTICLE 8
FINANCIAL PROVISIONS
     8.1 Funding . All severance benefits payable under the Plan shall be payable and provided for solely from the general assets of the Employing Company in accordance with the Plan, at the time such severance benefits are payable, unless otherwise determined by the Employing Company. The Employing Company shall not be required to establish any special or separate fund or to make any other segregation of assets to assure the payment of any severance benefits under the Plan.
ARTICLE 9
LIABILITY AND INDEMNIFICATION
     9.1 Standard of Conduct . To the extent permitted by ERISA and other applicable law, no member (which term, as used in this Article 9, shall include any employee of any Employing Company designated to carry out any responsibility of the Administration Committee pursuant to Section 5.3) of the Administration Committee shall be liable for anything done or omitted to be done by him in connection with the Plan, unless the member failed to act (a) in good faith and (b) for a purpose which such member reasonably believed to be in accordance with the intent of the Plan. The Company or Employing Company, as applicable, hereby indemnifies each person made, or threatened to be made, a party to an action or proceeding, whether civil or criminal, or against whom any claim or demand is made, by reason of the fact that he, his testator or intestate, was or is a member of the Administration Committee, against judgments, fines, amounts paid in settlement and reasonable expenses (including attorney’s fees) actually and necessarily incurred as a result of such action or proceeding, or any appeal therein, or as a result of such claim or demand, if such member of the Administration Committee acted in good faith for a purpose which he reasonably believed to be in accordance with the intent of the Plan and, in criminal actions or proceedings, in addition, had no reasonable cause to believe that his conduct was unlawful. Any reimbursement shall be paid to a member of the Administration Committee in accordance with the Policy.
     9.2 Presumption of Good Faith . The termination of any such civil or criminal action or proceeding, or the disposition of any such claim or demand, by judgment, settlement, conviction, or upon a plea of nolo contendere, or its equivalent, shall not in itself create a

17


 

presumption that any such member of the Administration Committee did not act (a) in good faith and (b) for a purpose which he reasonably believed to be in accordance with the intent of the Plan.
     9.3 Successful Defense . A person who has been wholly successful, on the merits or otherwise, in the defense of a civil or criminal action or proceeding or claim or demand of the character described in Section 9.1 shall be entitled to indemnification as authorized in such Section 9.1.
     9.4 Unsuccessful Defense . Except as provided in Section 9.3, any indemnification under Section 9.1, unless ordered by a court of competent jurisdiction, shall be made by the Company only if authorized in the specific case:
          (a) by the Board of Directors acting by a quorum consisting of directors who are not parties to such action, proceeding, claim or demand, upon a finding that the member of the Administration Committee has met the standard of conduct set forth in Section 9.1; or
          (b) if a quorum under Section 9.4(a) is not obtainable with due diligence:
               (i) by the Board of Directors upon the opinion in writing of independent legal counsel (who may be counsel to any Employing Company) that indemnification is proper under the circumstances because the standard of conduct set forth in Section 9.1 has been met by such member of the Administration Committee; or
               (ii) by the shareholders of the Company upon a finding that the member of the Administration Committee has met the standard of conduct set forth in such Section 9.1.
     9.5 Advance Payments . Expenses incurred in defending a civil or criminal action or proceeding or claim or demand may be paid by the Company or Employing Company, as applicable, in advance of the final disposition of such action or proceeding, claim or demand, if authorized in the manner specified in Section 9.4, except that, in view of the obligation of repayment set forth in Section 9.6, there need be no finding or opinion that the required standard of conduct has been met.
     9.6 Repayment of Advance Payments . All expenses incurred in defending a civil or criminal action or proceeding, claim or demand, which are advanced by the Company or Employing Company, as applicable, under Section 9.5 shall be repaid upon demand by the Company or Employing Company in case the person receiving such advance is ultimately found, under the procedures set forth in this Article 9, not to be entitled to indemnification or, where indemnification is granted, to the extent the expenses so advanced by the Company or Employing Company, as applicable, exceed the indemnification to which he is entitled.
     9.7 Right to Indemnification . Notwithstanding the failure of the Company or Employing Company, as applicable, to provide indemnification in the manner set forth in Section 9.4 or 9.5, and despite any contrary resolution of the Board of Directors or of the shareholders in the specific case, if the member of the Administration Committee has met the

18


 

standard of conduct set forth in Section 9.1, the person made or threatened to be made a party to the action or proceeding or against whom the claim or demand has been made, shall have the legal right to indemnification from the Company or Employing Company, as applicable, as a matter of contract by virtue of the Plan, it being the intention that each such person shall have the right to enforce such right of indemnification against the Company or Employing Company, as applicable, in any court of competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 10
MISCELLANEOUS
     10.1 No Right to Continued Employment . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed as giving any Employee the right to be retained in the employ of any Employing Company or any right to any payment whatsoever, except to the extent of the severance benefits provided for by the Plan. Each Employing Company expressly reserves the right to dismiss any Employee at any time and for any reason without liability for the effect which such dismissal might have upon him as an eligible Employee under the Plan.
     10.2 Construction . The masculine pronoun shall be construed to mean the feminine and the singular shall be construed to mean the plural, wherever appropriate herein. Headings in this document are for identification purposes only and do not constitute a part of the Plan.
     10.3 Governing Law . The Plan shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the substantive laws but not the choice of law rules of the state of New York, except to the extent that such laws have been superseded by federal law.
     10.4 Expenses of the Plan . The expenses for establishment and administration of the Plan shall be paid by the Employing Companies. Any expenses paid by the Company pursuant to this Section 10.4 and indemnification under Article 9 shall be subject to reimbursement by the other Employing Companies of their proportionate shares of such expenses and indemnification, as determined by the Administration Committee in its sole discretion.
     10.5 Section 409A . It is intended that the benefits under the Plan are either exempt from, or compliant with, the requirements of Section 409A, so as to prevent the inclusion in gross income of any benefits accrued hereunder in a taxable year prior to the taxable year or years in which such amount would otherwise be actually distributed or made available to the Employees. The Plan shall be administered and interpreted to the extent possible in a manner consistent with that intent and the Policy. To the extent that a distribution to an Employee is not exempt from Section 409A, and is required to be delayed by six months pursuant to Section 409A, such distribution shall be made no earlier than the first day of the seventh month following the Employee’s Separation from Service, and the payments that otherwise would have been paid to the Employee during the six-month period immediately following the Employee’s Separation from Service shall be paid to the Employee in a lump sum on the first day of the seventh month following the Employee’s Separation from Service, or as soon as administratively practicable thereafter, but in no event later than 90 days thereafter.
* * * * *

19


 

AMERICAN EXPRESS
SENIOR EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE PLAN
(As amended and restated effective January 1, 2009)
SCHEDULE A
SCHEDULE FOR SEVERANCE PAY BENEFITS
         
Completed Years of Service   Number of Weekly Severance Benefit Payments
    Employees Who Are Not    
    Executive Officers   Executive Officers
12 or fewer   52   104
13   56   104
14   60   104
15   65   104
16   69   104
17   73   104
18 or more   78 Maximum   104 Maximum

20

EXHIBIT 10.34
AMERICAN EXPRESS
ANNUAL INCENTIVE AWARD PLAN
(As amended and restated effective January 1, 2011)
PURPOSE
     The purpose of this Annual Incentive Award Plan (the “ Plan ”) is to provide added incentive for those officers and key executives of American Express Company (the “ Company ”) and its subsidiaries who are in a position to make substantial contributions to the earnings and growth of these companies and to reward them collectively and individually for performance which contributes significantly toward such earnings and growth. The companies participating in the Plan (the “ Participating Companies ”) include the Company and such other corporations as may be taking part in the Plan from time to time pursuant to Article 8.
ARTICLE 1
ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN
     1.1 Administration . The Plan shall be administered by the Compensation and Benefits Committee (the “Committee”) of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Board”) as constituted from time to time, unless and until the Board provides otherwise.
     1.2 Authority and Delegation . The Committee shall be responsible for the general administration of the Plan. It shall also be responsible for the interpretation of the Plan and the determination of all questions arising hereunder. It shall have power to establish, interpret, enforce, amend and revoke from time to time such rules and regulations for the administration of the Plan and the conduct of its business as it deems appropriate. The Committee shall also have the power to delegate any of its authority under the Plan as allowed by law. Any action taken by the Committee within the scope of its authority shall be final and binding upon the Participating Companies, upon each and every person who participates in the Plan and any successors in interest of such persons, and any and all other persons claiming under or through any such person.
     1.3 Indemnification . No member of the Committee shall be liable for anything done or omitted to be done by him or by any other member of the Committee in connection with the Plan, unless such act or omission constitutes willful misconduct on his part.
ARTICLE 2
ANNUAL PERFORMANCE GOALS, PAYMENT GRID AND AWARD GUIDELINES
     2.1 Establishment . As soon as practicable at the beginning of each calendar year, the Committee shall determine the individual, division/group, Company or other appropriate performance goals, payment grid and award guidelines for such calendar year. In fixing such goals, grid and guidelines, the Committee shall receive and consider the recommendations of the Chief Executive Officer of the Company (the “CEO”), who, in turn, shall have received and

 


 

considered the respective recommendations of other appropriate officers and executives of the Participating Companies.
     2.2 Adjustment . If the Committee finds, during the course of and with respect to any year, that any of the performance goals, payment grid or award guidelines determined as herein above provided would not be justified for such year in the circumstances, it may in its sole discretion fix such performance goals, payment grid or award guidelines for such year at such different levels as it deems appropriate.
ARTICLE 3
PARTICIPATION IN THE PLAN
     3.1 Participation . Those eligible to participate in the Plan for any calendar year shall include such key executives of the Participating Companies as shall be designated by the Committee. In designating such persons the Committee shall receive and consider the recommendations of the CEO, who, in turn, shall have received and considered the respective recommendations of other appropriate officers and executives of the Participating Companies. However, the Committee shall have full authority to act in the matter and its determination shall be in all respects final and conclusive. Further, the Committee shall have full authority to delegate eligibility determination. Participants shall be designated prior to the beginning of the year or as soon as practicable thereafter, but new executives or executives whose duties and responsibilities have been materially increased during the year may be designated participants for such year at any time during the year. Designation as a participant shall not of itself entitle a person to receive payment of an award under the Plan. Participants must generally remain in continuous active employment with the Participating Company (or an affiliate thereof), through the end of the performance period (calendar-year end) and up until the payment date, and shall also make progress towards the applicable award goals and shall fulfill the conditions of Article 7.
     3.2 Special Awards . The Committee, upon recommendations as provided by Section 4.1, may also make special awards to a limited number of participants under the Plan. The CEO may also authorize special awards under the Plan, at any time or times during the year, provided that any special awards authorized by the CEO shall be reported to the Committee at its next regular meeting. These special awards shall be made in recognition of outstanding individual achievement.
     3.3 Committee Members Ineligible . No member of the Committee shall be eligible to participate in or receive any awards under the Plan.
ARTICLE 4
DETERMINATION OF AWARDS
     4.1 Determination of Awards . As soon as practicable after the end of each calendar year, the Committee shall fix the amount of each award. The Committee shall also have the power to delegate to the CEO the authority to approve individual awards and award changes for employees below the Senior Vice President level (below Band 70). Notwithstanding the previous sentence, the Committee shall continue to approve awards for Senior Vice Presidents

2


 

and higher (Band 70 and above), and to approve the aggregate awards for all participants in Bands 35 and above, subject to adjustment for delegated award changes after each February. In determining the aggregate awards, the Committee may approve the establishment of maximum award guidelines for employees of a Participating Company, division, business unit or other designated group, based upon specified company and other applicable organizational performance goals subject to applicable past limitations. In fixing such awards the Committee shall receive and consider the recommendations of the CEO who, in turn, shall have received and considered the respective recommendations of other appropriate officers and executives of the Participating Companies, as to whether and to what extent the individual, division/group or company performance goals have been met for such year, and as to where in the range of award guidelines each participant’s performance falls. Individual awards shall then be calculated based on the applicable payment grid, subject to available pool monies.
     4.2 Award Limits . Except for awards payable as a result of a Change in Control pursuant to Section 6.1, no award to a single participant for any year shall exceed (a) 200 percent of the Participant’s total award guideline for such year, or (b) 200 percent of the participant’s base salary for such year.
ARTICLE 5
PAYMENT OF AWARDS
     5.1 Payment . Each award, if any, shall be paid on or after January 31st of the calendar year immediately following the end of the performance period, as soon as practicable after the amount of the award shall have been determined, or at such subsequent time or times as the Committee shall determine, but in no event later than 90 days after January 31st of the calendar year immediately following the end of the performance period. Such payment shall be made in cash unless the Committee, at any time or from time to time, according to rules and regulations of general application, provides for a different method of payment, in whole or in part, of awards, including, but not limited to, the issuance or transfer of securities or other property, including common shares or other securities of the Company, another corporation or of a regulated investment company or companies, subject to restrictions and requirements to assure compliance with the conditions set forth in Article 7 and elsewhere in the Plan and such other restrictions and requirements as the Committee shall prescribe.
     5.2 Effect of Termination, Retirement, Disability and Death . The Committee has the sole discretion to consider the payment, if any, of an award for a participant in the event of the participant’s termination, retirement, disability, death or other individual circumstances before the award payment date; provided, however, the payment of an award by reason of the occurrence of such an event shall still be made at the time specified in Section 5.1. The Committee, upon recommendation provided by management, will approve to what extent, if any, payment of an award should be made if termination occurs after December 31, but before the actual payment date.
     5.3 Payment in the Event of Death . If any award shall become payable by reason of or following the death of a participant or former participant, such award shall be payable, at the time specified in Section 5.1 and in the same manner as if such participant or former participant were alive, to such beneficiaries of the participant or former participant as he shall have

3


 

designated in the manner described herein. If such participant or former participant shall have failed to designate any beneficiary, or if no such beneficiary shall survive him, then such payments shall be made to his legal representatives. With the approval of the Committee, a participant or former participant may designate one or more beneficiaries by executing and delivering to the Committee or its delegate written notice thereof at any time prior to his death, and may revoke or change the beneficiaries designated therein without their consent by written notices similarly executed and delivered to the Committee at any time and from time to time prior to his death. No such Participating Company is required to pay any amount to the beneficiary or legal representatives of any former participant until such beneficiary or legal representatives shall have furnished evidence satisfactory to it of the payment or provision for the payment of all estate, transfer, inheritance and death taxes, if any, which may be payable with respect thereto.
     5.4 Withholding . Any Participating Company required to make payments under the Plan shall deduct and withhold from any such payment all amounts which its officers believe in good faith the Participating Company is required to deduct or withhold pursuant to the laws of any jurisdiction whatsoever or, in the event that any such payment shall be made in securities, shall require that arrangements satisfactory to such Participating Company shall be made for the payment of all such amounts before such securities are delivered.
     5.5 Deferral of Awards . Upon a deferral of the payment of an award pursuant to a deferral plan of a Participating Company, the terms of the deferral and the payments thereunder shall be governed by the provision of such deferral plan. The obligation of any Participating Company to make deferred payments when due is merely contractual, and no amount credited to an account of a participant or former participant on the books of any Participating Company shall be deemed to be held in trust for such participant or former participant or for his beneficiary or legal representatives. Nothing contained in the Plan shall require any Participating Company to segregate or earmark any cash or other property. Any securities or other property held or acquired by any such Participating Company specifically for use under the Plan or otherwise shall, unless and until transferred in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Plan, be and at all times remain the property of such Participating Company, irrespective of whether such securities or other property are entered in a special account for the purpose of the Plan, and such securities or other property shall at all times be and remain available for any corporate purpose.
ARTICLE 6
CHANGE IN CONTROL
     6.1 Effect of Change in Control . If within two years following the occurrence of a Change in Control (as defined in Section 6.3), a participant experiences a separation from service (as that term is defined for purposes of Section 409A of the Code) that would otherwise entitle him to receive the payment of severance benefits under the provisions of the severance plan that is in effect and in which he participates as of the date of such Change in Control, and the participant is at Job Band 50 or higher on the date of such separation from service, then such participant shall, notwithstanding the provisions of Article 5, be paid, within five days after the date of such separation from service, a pro rata award under the Plan equal to: (a) the average award paid or payable to such participant under the Plan (or any other award program of the Participating Company or one of its subsidiaries at the time of such prior payment) for the two

4


 

years prior to the Change in Control (or if such participant has not received two such awards, the most recent award paid or payable (or target amount so payable if such participant has not previously received any such award) to such participant under the Plan (or any other award program of the Participating Company or one of its subsidiaries at the time of such prior payment)); multiplied by (b) the number of full or partial months that have elapsed during the performance year under the Plan at the time of such separation from service divided by 12; provided that in the event such separation from service occurs after the end of the performance year, but before the payment date, then the multiplier in clause (b) of the preceding sentence shall be one.
     6.2 Excise Tax . This Section 6.2 shall apply in the event of Change in Control.
          (a) In the event that any payment or benefit received or to be received by a participant hereunder in connection with a Change in Control or such participant’s termination of employment (hereinafter referred to collectively as the “Payments”), will be subject to the excise tax (the “Excise Tax”) referred to in Section 4999 of the Code, then the Payments shall be reduced to the extent necessary so that no portion of the Payments is subject to the Excise Tax but only if (A) the net amount of all Total Payments (as hereinafter defined), as so reduced (and after subtracting the net amount of federal, state and local income and employment taxes on such reduced Total Payments), is greater than or equal to (B) the net amount of such Total Payments without any such reduction (but after subtracting the net amount of federal, state and local income and employment taxes on such Total Payments and the amount of Excise Tax to which a participant would be subject in respect of such unreduced Total Payments); provided, however, that the participant may elect in writing to have other components of his Total Payments reduced prior to any reduction in the Payments hereunder.
          (b) For purposes of determining whether the Payments will be subject to the Excise Tax, the amount of such Excise Tax and whether any Payments are to be reduced hereunder: (i) all payments and benefits received or to be received by a participant in connection with such Change in Control or such participant’s termination of employment, whether pursuant to the terms of the Plan or any other plan, arrangement or agreement with a Participating Company, any Person (as such term is defined in Section 6.3(a)) whose actions result in such Change in Control or any Person affiliated with the Participating Company or such Person (all such payments and benefits being hereinafter referred to as the “Total Payments”), shall be treated as “parachute payments” (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(2) of the Code) unless, in the opinion of the accounting firm which was, immediately prior to the Change in Control, the Company’s independent auditor, or if that firm refuses to serve, by another qualified firm, whether or not serving as independent auditors, designated by the Administration Committee (the “Auditor”), such payments or benefits (in whole or in part) do not constitute parachute payments, including by reason of Section 280G(b)(2)(A) or Section 280G(b)(4)(A) of the Code; (ii) no portion of the Total Payments the receipt or enjoyment of which the participant shall have waived at such time and in such manner as not to constitute a “payment” within the meaning of Section 280G(b) of the Code shall be taken into account; (iii) all “excess parachute payments” within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(l) of the Code shall be treated as subject to the Excise Tax unless, in the opinion of the Auditor, such excess parachute payments (in whole or in part) represent reasonable compensation for services actually rendered (within the meaning of Section 280G(b)(4)(B) of the Code) in excess of the Base Amount (within the meaning of Section

5


 

280G(b)(3) of the Code) allocable to such reasonable compensation, or are otherwise not subject to the Excise Tax; and (iv) the value of any noncash benefits or any deferred payment or benefit shall be determined by the Auditor in accordance with the principles of Sections 280G(d)(3) and (4) of the Code and regulations or other guidance thereunder. For purposes of determining whether any Payments in respect of a participant shall be reduced, the participant shall be deemed to pay federal income tax at the highest marginal rate of federal income taxation (and state and local income taxes at the highest marginal rate of taxation in the state and locality of such participant’s residence, net of the maximum reduction in federal income taxes which could be obtained from deduction of such state and local taxes) in the calendar year in which the Payments are made. The Auditor will be paid reasonable compensation by the Company for its services.
          (c) As soon as practicable following a Change in Control, but in no event later than 30 days thereafter, the Company shall provide to each participant with respect to whom it is proposed that Payments be reduced, a written statement setting forth the manner in which the Total Payments in respect of such participant were calculated and the basis for such calculations, including, without limitation, any opinions or other advice the Company has received from the Auditor or other advisors or consultants (and any such opinions or advice which are in writing shall be attached to the statement).
     6.3 Definition of Change in Control . For purposes of the Plan, “Change in Control” means the happening of any of the following:
          (a) Any individual, entity or group (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)) (a “Person”) becomes the beneficial owner (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act) of 25 percent or more of either (i) the then-outstanding common shares of the Company (the “Outstanding Company Common Shares”); or (ii) the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities of the Company entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (the “Outstanding Company Voting Securities”); provided, however, that such beneficial ownership shall not constitute a Change in Control if it occurs as a result of any of the following acquisitions of securities: (i) any acquisition directly from the Company; (ii) any acquisition by the Company or any corporation, partnership, trust or other entity controlled by the Company (a “Subsidiary”); (iii) any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or any Subsidiary; (iv) any acquisition by an underwriter temporarily holding Company securities pursuant to an offering of such securities; (v) any acquisition by an individual, entity or group that is permitted to, and actually does, report its beneficial ownership on Schedule 13-G (or any successor schedule), provided that, if any such individual, entity or group subsequently becomes required to or does report its beneficial ownership on Schedule 13D (or any successor schedule), then, for purposes of this subsection, such individual, entity or group shall be deemed to have first acquired, on the first date on which such individual, entity or group becomes required to or does so report, beneficial ownership of all of the Outstanding Company Common Stock and Outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by it on such date; or (vi) any acquisition by any corporation pursuant to a reorganization, merger or consolidation if, following such reorganization, merger or

6


 

consolidation, the conditions described in clauses (i), (ii) and (iii) of Section 6.3(c) are satisfied. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change in Control shall not be deemed to occur solely because any Person (the “Subject Person”) became the beneficial owner of 25 percent or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities as a result of the acquisition of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities by the Company which, by reducing the number of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, increases the proportional number of shares beneficially owned by the Subject Person; provided, that if a Change in Control would be deemed to have occurred (but for the operation of this sentence) as a result of the acquisition of Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities by the Company, and after such share acquisition by the Company, the Subject Person becomes the beneficial owner of any additional Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities which increases the percentage of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by the Subject Person, then a Change in Control shall then be deemed to have occurred; or
          (b) Individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board (the “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board; provided, however, that any individual becoming a director subsequent to the date hereof whose election, or nomination for election by the Company’s shareholders, was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then comprising the Incumbent Board shall be considered as though such individual were a member of the Incumbent Board, but excluding, for this purpose, any such individual whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of either an actual or threatened election contest or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of a Person other than the Board, including by reason of agreement intended to avoid or settle any such actual or threatened contest or solicitation; or
          (c) The consummation of a reorganization, merger, statutory share exchange, consolidation, or similar corporate transaction involving the Company or any of its direct or indirect Subsidiaries (each a “Business Combination”), in each case, unless, following such Business Combination, (i) the Outstanding Company Common Shares and the Outstanding Company Voting Securities immediately prior to such Business Combination, continue to represent (either by remaining outstanding or being converted into voting securities of the resulting or surviving entity or any parent thereof) more than 50 percent of the then-outstanding shares of common stock and the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, as the case may be, of the corporation resulting from Business Combination (including, without limitation, a corporation that, as a result of such transaction, owns the Company or all or substantially all of the Company’s assets either directly or through one or more subsidiaries); (ii) no Person (excluding the Company, any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Company, a Subsidiary or such corporation resulting from such Business Combination or any parent or subsidiary thereof, and any Person beneficially owning, immediately prior to such Business Combination, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, as the case may be) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of, respectively, the then-outstanding shares of common stock of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (or any parent thereof) or the combined voting power of the

7


 

then-outstanding voting securities of such corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (or any parent thereof) were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement or action of the Board providing for such Business Combination; or
          (d) The consummation of the sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company, unless such assets have been sold, leased, exchanged or disposed of to a corporation with respect to which following such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition (i) more than 50 percent of, respectively, the then-outstanding shares of common stock of such corporation and the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities of such corporation (or any parent thereof) entitled to vote generally in the election of directors is then beneficially owned, directly or indirectly, by all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who were the beneficial owners, respectively, of the Outstanding Company Common Shares and Outstanding Company Voting Securities immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition in substantially the same proportions as their ownership immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of such Outstanding Company Common Shares and Outstanding Company Voting Shares, as the case may be; (ii) no Person (excluding the Company and any employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Company or a Subsidiary or of such corporation or a subsidiary thereof and any Person beneficially owning, immediately prior to such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of the Outstanding Company Common Shares or Outstanding Company Voting Securities, as the case may be) beneficially owns, directly or indirectly, 25 percent or more of respectively, the then-outstanding shares of common stock of such corporation (or any parent thereof) and the combined voting power of the then-outstanding voting securities of such corporation (or any parent thereof) entitled to vote generally in the election of directors; and (iii) at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of such corporation (or any parent thereof) were members of the Incumbent Board at the time of the execution of the initial agreement or action of the Board providing for such sale, lease, exchange or other disposition of assets of the Company; or
          (e) Approval by the shareholders of the Company of a complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company.
ARTICLE 7
CONDITIONS AND FORFEITURES
     7.1 Conditions . In addition to any other condition that may be imposed by the Committee, the payment of all awards (or any part thereof) under the Plan shall be contingent on the following:
          (a) The participant or former participant entitled thereto shall refrain from engaging (i) in any business or other activity which, in the judgment of the Committee is competitive with any activity of any Participating Company or any affiliate thereof, in which he was engaged at any time during the last five years of his employment by a Participating Company or any affiliate thereof; or (ii) in any business or other activity which is so competitive and of which he shall have special knowledge as the result of having been employed by the Participating

8


 

Company or any affiliate thereof; and from counseling or otherwise assisting any person, firm or organization that is so engaged;
          (b) The participant shall not furnish, divulge or disclose to any unauthorized person, firm or other organization any trade secrets, information or data with respect to any Participating Company or any affiliate thereof, or any of their employees, that he shall have reason to believe is confidential;
          (c) The participant will make himself available for such consultation and advice concerning matters with respect to which he was familiar while employed by any Participating Company or affiliate as may reasonably be requested, taking fairly into consideration his age, health, residence and individual circumstances and the total amount of the payments that he is receiving, and shall render such assistance and cooperation (including testimony and depositions) in respect of matters of which he shall have knowledge, as may reasonably be requested in any action, proceeding or other dispute, pending or prospective, to which any Participating Company or affiliate may be a party or in which it may have an interest. The participant or former participant shall have no obligation to render any services after he shall have ceased to be an employee of the Participating Companies and affiliates thereof, except as may be required under this subparagraph, and the death of the participant or former participant, or the failure to call upon him for the rendition of services called for under this Section 7.1(c), shall not in any way affect the right of the participant or former participant or his beneficiary or legal representatives, as the case may be, to receive any unpaid portion of any amounts payable to him; and
          (d) The participant’s employment by any Participating Company, subsidiary or any affiliate thereof, shall not have terminated as a result of his gross negligence, willful misconduct or poor performance and he shall not, while employed by a Participating Company, subsidiary or affiliate, have engaged in conduct which, had it been known at the time, would have resulted, on grounds of gross negligence or willful misconduct, in the termination of his employment by the Participating Company, subsidiary or affiliate by which he had been employed.
     7.2 Forfeiture . If, in the judgment of the Committee, reasonably exercised, a participant or former participant shall have failed at any time to comply with any of the conditions set forth in Section 7.1, the obligation of the Participating Company to make further payments to such participant or former participant or his beneficiary or legal representatives shall forthwith terminate, provided that no amount paid prior to the date of any such determination by the Committee shall be required to be repaid.
     7.3 No Assignment . No payment of any award under the Plan shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance or charge, and any attempt to anticipate, alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber or charge the same shall be void. No payment of any award shall be subject to any jurisdictional payment requirement upon death or termination. No such payments shall be in any manner liable for or subject to the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements or torts of the person entitled thereto, except as specifically provided in rules or regulations established by the Committee under the Plan; and in the event that any participant, former participant or beneficiary under the Plan

9


 

becomes bankrupt or attempts to anticipate, alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber or charge any such payment or a part thereof, then all such payments due him shall cease and in that event, the Participating Company shall hold and apply the same to or for his benefit or that of his spouse, children, or other dependents, or any of them, in such manner and in such proportions as the Committee, with the approval of the chief executive officer of such Participating Company, may deem proper.
ARTICLE 8
PARTICIPATING COMPANIES
     8.1 Participating Companies . Any subsidiary that the Committee (based on the recommendations of the CEO) or the Board has approved as a Participating Company may, with such approval, become a Participating Company upon delivering to the Committee certified copies of resolutions duly adopted by its board of directors to the effect that it adopts the Plan and consents to have the Plan administered by the Committee.
     8.2 Withdrawal . Any subsidiary which is a Participating Company may cease to be a Participating Company at any time and shall cease to be one upon delivering to the Committee certified copies of an appropriate resolution duly adopted by its board of directors terminating its participation. If any Participating Company hereunder ceases to be a subsidiary, such corporation may continue to be a Participating Company hereunder only upon such terms and conditions as the Company and such corporation shall agree upon in writing. In no event shall the termination of a corporation’s participation in the Plan relieve it of obligations theretofore incurred by it under the Plan, except to the extent that the same have been assumed by another corporation pursuant to Section 8.3.
     8.3 Successors . Any corporation which succeeds to all or any part of the business or assets of a Participating Company may, by appropriate resolution of its board of directors, adopt the Plan and shall thereupon succeed to such rights and assume such obligations hereunder as such corporation, such Participating Company and the Company shall have agreed upon in writing.
     8.4 Definition of Subsidiary . For the purposes of this Article 8, the term “subsidiary” shall mean any corporation (other than the Company and any non-Participating Company specifically designated by the Committee) in one or more unbroken chains of corporations connected through stock ownership with the Company, if the Company directly or indirectly through one or more such chains owns stock possessing more than 50 percent of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock and more than 50 percent of each class of non-voting stock of such corporation.
ARTICLE 9
GENERAL PROVISIONS
     9.1 Amendment and Termination . The Board may amend the Plan in whole or in part from time to time, and may terminate it at any time, without prior notice to any interested party, provided, however, that the Plan may not be amended in a manner that would cause the Plan to fail to comply with Section 409A. The Board may delegate its amendment power to such

10


 

individual or individuals as it deems appropriate in its sole discretion. The foregoing sentence to the contrary notwithstanding, for a period of two years and one day following a Change in Control, neither the Board nor the Committee may amend the Plan in a manner that is detrimental to the rights of any participant of the Plan without his written consent. No amendment or termination shall deprive any participant, former participant, beneficiary or legal representatives of a former participant of any right under the Plan as such right exists at the time of such amendment or termination, nor increase the obligations of any company that is or has been a Participating Company without its consent.
     9.2 No Right to Employment . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed as giving any person employed by a company which is or has been a Participating Company the right to be retained in the employ of such company or any right to any payment whatsoever, except to the extent provided by the Plan. Each such company shall have the right to dismiss any employee at any time with or without cause and without liability for the effect which such dismissal might have upon him as a participant under the Plan.
     9.3 Other Benefits . The Plan shall not be deemed a substitute for any other employee benefit or compensation plans or arrangements that may now or hereafter be provided for employees. The Plan shall not preclude any group, division, subsidiary or affiliate of the Company, whether or not a Participating Company, from continuing or adopting one or more separate or additional such plans or arrangements for all or a defined class of the employees of such group, division, subsidiary or affiliate. Any payment under any such plan or arrangement may be made independently of the Plan.
     9.4 Consent to Actions Taken . By accepting any benefits under the Plan, each participant, each beneficiary and each person claiming under or through him shall be conclusively bound by any action or decision taken or made, or to be taken or to be made under the Plan, by the Company, the Board or the Committee.
     9.5 Interpretation . The masculine pronoun includes the feminine, the singular the plural, and vice versa wherever appropriate.
     9.6 Governing Law . The Plan shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New York.
     9.7 Section 409A . It is intended that the benefits under the Plan comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations promulgated and other official guidance issued thereunder, and the Plan shall be administered and interpreted to the extent possible in a manner consistent with that intent and the American Express Section 409A Compliance Policy, as amended from time to time, and any successor policy thereto.
* * * * *

11

EXHIBIT 12
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
COMPUTATION IN SUPPORT OF RATIO OF EARNINGS TO FIXED CHARGES
( Dollars in Millions )
                                         
 
    Years Ended                          
    December 31,     Years Ended December 31,  
2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
Earnings:
                                       
Pretax income from continuing operations
  $ 5,964     $ 2,841     $ 3,581     $ 5,694     $ 5,152  
Interest expense
    2,423       2,208       3,628       4,525       3,258  
Other adjustments
    126       129       144       143       139  
 
                             
Total earnings (a)
  $ 8,513     $ 5,178     $ 7,353     $ 10,362     $ 8,549  
Fixed charges:
                                       
Interest expense
  $ 2,423     $ 2,208     $ 3,628     $ 4,525     $ 3,258  
Other adjustments
    85       121       114       106       106  
 
                             
Total fixed charges (b)
  $ 2,508     $ 2,329     $ 3,742     $ 4,631     $ 3,364  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges (a/b)
    3.39       2.22       1.96       2.24       2.54  
 
Included in interest expense in the above computation is interest expense related to the cardmember lending activities, international banking operations, and charge card and other activities in the Consolidated Statements of Income. Interest expense does not include interest on liabilities recorded under GAAP governing accounting for uncertainty in income taxes. The Company’s policy is to classify such interest in income tax provision in the Consolidated Statements of Income.
For purposes of the “earnings” computation, “other adjustments” include adding the amortization of capitalized interest, the net loss of affiliates accounted for under the equity method whose debt is not guaranteed by the Company, the noncontrolling interest in the earnings of majority-owned subsidiaries with fixed charges, and the interest component of rental expense, and subtracting undistributed net income of affiliates accounted for under the equity method.
For purposes of the “fixed charges” computation, “other adjustments” include capitalized interest costs and the interest component of rental expense.

 



For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010






















 
Exhibit 13
 
 
2010 FINANCIAL RESULTS
 
         
       
      FINANCIAL REVIEW
       
      MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
       
      REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
       
      INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
       
      CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
       
      NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
       
      CONSOLIDATED FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
       
      COMPARISON OF FIVE-YEAR TOTAL RETURN TO SHAREHOLDERS


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
The financial section of American Express Company’s (the Company) Annual Report consists of this Financial Review, the Consolidated Financial Statements and the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The following discussion is designed to provide perspective and understanding regarding the Company’s consolidated financial condition and results of operations. Certain key terms are defined in the Glossary of Selected Terminology, which begins on page 61.
This Financial Review and the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements have been adjusted to exclude discontinued operations unless otherwise noted.
 
EXECUTIVE OVERVIEW
American Express is a global service company that provides customers with access to products, insights and experiences that enrich lives and build business success. The Company’s principal products and services are charge and credit payment card products and travel-related services offered to consumers and businesses around the world. The Company’s range of products and services include:
 
  charge and credit card products;
 
  expense management products and services;
 
  consumer and business travel services;
 
  stored value products such as Travelers Cheques and other prepaid products;
 
  network services;
 
  merchant acquisition and processing, point-of-sale, servicing and settlement, and marketing and information products and services for merchants; and
 
  fee services, including market and trend analyses and related consulting services, fraud prevention services, and the design of customized customer loyalty and rewards programs.
 
The Company’s products and services are sold globally to diverse customer groups, including consumers, small businesses, mid-sized companies and large corporations. These products and services are sold through various channels, including direct mail, on-line applications, targeted direct and third-party sales forces, and direct response advertising.
The Company has also recently created an Enterprise Growth Group to focus on generating alternative sources of revenue on a global basis, both organically and through acquisitions, in areas such as online and mobile payments and fee-based services.
The Company’s products and services generate the following types of revenue for the Company:
 
  Discount revenue, which is the Company’s largest revenue source, represents fees charged to merchants when cardmembers use their cards to purchase goods and services on the Company’s network;
 
  Net card fees, which represent revenue earned for annual charge card memberships;
 
  Travel commissions and fees, which are earned by charging a transaction or management fee for airline or other travel-related transactions;
 
  Other commissions and fees, which are earned on foreign exchange conversions and card-related fees and assessments;
 
  Other revenue, which represents insurance premiums earned from cardmember travel and other insurance programs, revenues arising from contracts with Global Network Services’ (GNS) partners (including royalties and signing fees), publishing revenues and other miscellaneous revenue and fees; and
 
  Interest and fees on loans, which principally represents interest income earned on outstanding balances, and card fees related to the cardmember loans portfolio.
 
In addition to funding and operating costs associated with these types of revenue, other major expense categories are related to marketing and reward programs that add new cardmembers and promote cardmember loyalty and spending, and provisions for anticipated cardmember credit and fraud losses.
Historically, the Company sought to achieve three financial targets, on average and over time:
 
  Revenues net of interest expense growth of at least 8 percent;
 
  Earnings per share (EPS) growth of 12 to 15 percent; and
 
  Return on average equity (ROE) of 33 to 36 percent.
 
In addition, assuming achievement of such financial targets, the Company sought to return at least 65 percent of the capital it generates to shareholders as a dividend or through the repurchase of common stock.
The Company met or exceeded these targets for most of the past decade. However, during 2008 and 2009, its performance fell short of the targets due to the effects of the continuing global economic downturn. The Company’s share repurchase program was suspended in 2008 and, as a result, the amount of capital generated that has been returned to shareholders has been below the levels achieved earlier in the decade. Refer to Share Repurchases and Dividends below for further discussion of the Company’s share repurchase activity.
The Company is retaining its on average and over time revenue and earnings growth targets. However, evolving market, regulatory and debt investor expectations will likely cause the Company, as well as other financial institutions, to maintain in future years a higher level of capital than they have historically maintained. These higher capital requirements would in turn lead, all other things being equal, to lower future ROE than the Company has historically targeted. In addition, the Company recognizes it may need to maintain higher capital levels to support acquisitions that can augment its business growth. In combination, these factors have led the


20


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
Company to revise its on average and over time ROE financial target to 25 percent or more.
In establishing the revised ROE target, the Company has assumed that it will target a 10 percent Tier 1 Common ratio. The actual future capital requirements applicable to the Company are uncertain and will not be known until further guidance is provided in connection with certain initiatives, such as Basel III and the implementation of regulations under the recent United States financial reform legislation. International and United States banking regulators could also increase the capital ratio levels at which banks would be deemed to be “well capitalized”. Refer to Capital Strategy below. The revised ROE target also assumes the Company would need to maintain capital to finance moderate-sized acquisitions, although the actual magnitude of these transactions cannot be determined at this time. If the Company achieves its EPS target as well as the revised ROE target, it would seek to return, on average and over time, at least 50 percent of the capital it generates to shareholders as a dividend or through the repurchase of common stock rather than the 65 percent level referred to above.
Certain of the statements in this Annual Report are forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Refer to the “Forward-Looking Statements” section below.
 
BANK HOLDING COMPANY
The Company is a bank holding company under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 and the Federal Reserve Board (Federal Reserve) is the Company’s primary federal regulator. As such, the Company is subject to the Federal Reserve’s regulations, policies and minimum capital standards.
 
CURRENT ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT/OUTLOOK
The Company’s results for 2010 reflected strong spending growth and improved credit performance. Throughout the year cardmember spending volumes grew both in the United States and internationally, and across all of the Company’s businesses. Cardmember spending levels in 2010 reached record levels by the end of the year.
During 2010, the Company continued to see a sharp divergence between the positive growth rates in customer spending on credit cards and lower borrowing levels, due in part to changing consumer behavior and the Company’s strategic (e.g., additional focus on charge and co-brand products) and risk-related actions. While the offsetting influences of stronger billings growth and lower loan balances challenged overall revenue growth, the year-over-year benefits from improving credit trends have provided an ability to invest in the business at significant levels and also generate strong earnings. Some of these investments are focused on near-term metrics, while others are initiatives focused on the medium to long-term success of the Company. These investments are reflected not only in marketing and other operating expenses, but also involve using the Company’s strong capital base for acquisitions such as Accertify and Loyalty Partner, which were announced during the fourth quarter of 2010. Refer to “Acquisitions” below.
The improving credit trends contributed to a significant reduction in loan and receivable write-offs and in loss reserve levels over the course of 2010 when compared to 2009. Despite the reduction in loss reserve levels, reserve coverage ratios remain strong. It is expected that the year-over-year benefits from improving credit trends will decrease over the course of 2011. While the Company invested at historically high levels in 2010, it intends to maintain the flexibility to scale back on investments as business conditions change and the benefits realized from improving credit trends lessen.
Net interest yield declined over the course of 2010. The lower yield reflects higher payment rates and lower revolving levels, and the implementation of elements of the Credit Card Accountability Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 (the “CARD Act”), which were partially offset by the benefit of certain repricing initiatives effective during 2009 and 2010. The Company expects the net interest yield in the US Consumer business to decline, moving closer to historic levels, but this remains subject to uncertainties such as cardmember behavior and the requirement under the CARD Act to periodically reevaluate annual percentage rate (APR) increases.
Despite improvement in parts of the economic environment, challenges clearly remain for the Company, both in the United States and in many other key regions. These challenges include weak job creation, volatile consumer confidence, uncertain consumer behavior, an uncertain housing market, and the regulatory and legislative environment, including the uncertain impact of the CARD Act, of the recently enacted Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act and of the proceeding against the Company recently brought by the Department of Justice (DOJ) and certain state attorneys general alleging a violation of the U.S. antitrust laws. In addition, during 2011 the Company will stop receiving quarterly Visa and MasterCard litigation settlement payments, and year-over-year comparisons will be more difficult in light of the strong 2010 results. Refer to “Certain Legislative, Regulatory and Other Developments”, “Other Information — Legal Proceedings” and “Risk Factors” below.


21


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
REENGINEERING INITIATIVES
On January 19, 2011, the Company announced that it was undertaking various reengineering initiatives resulting in charges aggregating approximately $113 million pretax (approximately $74 million after-tax), which were recorded in the fourth quarter of 2010. The charges for the reengineering initiatives include a fourth quarter restructuring charge in the amount of approximately $98 million pretax (approximately $63 million after-tax) relating to employee severance obligations and other employee-related costs.
The $98 million restructuring charge is pursuant to a plan, approved by the Company’s management in December 2010, that resulted in a consolidation of facilities within the Company’s global servicing network due to reduced service volumes as a greater number of routine transactions have migrated to online and mobile channels. In addition, the Company expects to record further restructuring charges in one or more quarterly periods during 2011 relating to these restructuring activities in the aggregate amount of approximately $60 million to $80 million pretax (approximately $38 million to $51 million after-tax). The total expected additional charges include approximately $25 million to $35 million in costs associated with additional employee compensation and approximately $35 million to $45 million in other costs principally relating to the termination of certain real property leases.
The reengineering activities, in total, are expected to result in the elimination of approximately 3,500 jobs (including approximately 3,200 jobs relating to the above noted restructuring charge). However, overall staffing levels are expected to decrease only by approximately 550 positions on a net basis (including 400 positions related to specific restructuring activities), as new employees are hired at the locations to which work is being transferred.
Substantially all of these reengineering activities are expected to be completed by the end of the fourth quarter of 2011.
The Company also announced that it expects the reengineering charges recorded in the fourth quarter of 2010 and to be recorded during 2011 to result in annualized cost savings to the Company of approximately $70 million pretax, starting in 2012. The Company announced that it intends to reinvest a portion of such savings into new servicing capabilities and other business building initiatives.
During 2008 and 2009, the Company undertook major reengineering initiatives that were expected to produce significant cost benefits in 2009. These initiatives included reducing staffing levels resulting in lower compensation expenses and reducing certain operating costs for marketing and other business building initiatives. As the Company has previously disclosed, benefits related to better than initially forecasted credit and business trends for 2009 were utilized to increase spending on marketing and other business-building initiatives during the second half of 2009, reducing the expected reengineering benefits.
 
ACQUISITIONS
During the course of the year, the Company purchased Accertify (November 10, 2010) and Revolution Money (January 15, 2010) for a total consideration of $151 million and $305 million, respectively. Accertify is an on-line fraud solution provider and Revolution Money is a provider of secure person-to-person payment services through an internet-based platform. These acquisitions did not have a significant impact on either the Company’s consolidated results of operations or the segments in which they are reflected for the year ended December 31, 2010.
On March 28, 2008, the Company purchased Corporate Payment Services (CPS), General Electric Company’s commercial card and corporate purchasing business unit.
 
The following table summarizes the assets acquired and liabilities assumed for these acquisitions as of the acquisition dates:
 
                         
   
                Corporate
 
          Revolution
    Payment
 
(Millions)   Accertify     Money     Services  
 
Goodwill
  $ 131     $ 184     $ 818  
Definite-lived intangible assets
    15       119       232  
Other assets
    11       7       1,259  
                         
Total assets
    157       310       2,309  
Total liabilities
    6       5       65  
                         
Net assets acquired
  $ 151     $ 305     $ 2,244  
                         
Reportable operating segment
    GNMS       Corporate
& Other
      GCS (a)
 
 
 
(a) An insignificant portion of the receivables and intangible assets are also allocated to the USCS reportable operating segment.
 
On December 16, 2010, the Company announced an agreement to acquire Loyalty Partner, a leading marketing services company known for the loyalty programs it operates in Germany, Poland and India. The purchase, which has received regulatory approval, is expected to close in the first quarter of 2011. The transaction, which values Loyalty Partner at approximately $660 million (subject to currency movement and other adjustments), consists of an upfront cash purchase price of approximately $566 million and an additional $94 million equity interest that the Company will acquire over the next five years at a value based on business performance.
 
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
For the applicable periods, the operating results, assets and liabilities, and cash flows of American Express International Deposit Company (AEIDC), which was sold to Standard Chartered in the third quarter of 2009, have been removed from the Corporate & Other segment and reported separately within the discontinued operations captions on the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements. Refer to Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of the Company’s discontinued operations.


22


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
FINANCIAL SUMMARY
A summary of the Company’s recent financial performance follows:
 
                           
     
Years Ended December 31,
              Percent
   
(Millions, except per share
              Increase
   
amounts and ratio data)   2010     2009     (Decrease)    
 
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 27,819     $ 24,523       13   %
Provisions for losses
  $ 2,207     $ 5,313       (58 ) %
Expenses
  $ 19,648     $ 16,369       20   %
Income from continuing operations
  $ 4,057     $ 2,137       90   %
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130       90   %
Earnings per common share from continuing operations – diluted (a)
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54       #    
Earnings per common share – diluted (a)
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54       #    
Return on average equity (b)
    27.5 %     14.6 %          
Return on average tangible common equity (c)
    35.1 %     17.6 %          
 
 
 
# Denotes a variance of more than 100 percent.
 
(a) Earnings per common share from continuing operations — diluted and Earnings per common share — diluted were both reduced by the impact of (i) accelerated preferred dividend accretion of $212 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, due to the repurchase of $3.39 billion of preferred shares issued as part of the Capital Purchase Program (CPP), (ii) preferred share dividends and related accretion of $94 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, and (iii) earnings allocated to participating share awards and other items of $51 million and $22 million for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
(b) ROE is calculated by dividing (i) one-year period net income ($4.1 billion and $2.1 billion for 2010 and 2009, respectively), by (ii) one-year average total shareholders’ equity ($14.8 billion and $14.6 billion for 2010 and 2009, respectively).
(c) Return on average tangible common equity is computed in the same manner as ROE except the computation of average tangible common equity excludes from average total shareholders’ equity average goodwill and other intangibles of $3.3 billion and $3.0 billion as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. The Company believes that return on average tangible common equity is a useful measure of profitability of its business.
 
See Consolidated Results of Operations, beginning on page 31, for discussion of the Company’s results.
Upon adoption of new accounting standards related to transfers of financial assets and consolidation of variable interest entities (VIEs) effective on January 1, 2010 (new GAAP effective January 1, 2010), the Company was required to change its accounting for the American Express Credit Account Master Trust (the Lending Trust), a previously unconsolidated VIE which is now consolidated. Prior period results have not been revised for the change in accounting for the Lending Trust. Refer to Note 1 and Note 7 for further discussion.
The Company follows U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). For periods ended on or prior to December 31, 2009, the Company’s non-securitized cardmember loans and related debt performance information on a GAAP basis was referred to as the “owned” basis presentation. For such periods, the Company also provided information on a non-GAAP “managed” basis. This information assumes, in the Consolidated Selected Statistical Information and U.S. Card Services (USCS) segment, there have been no cardmember loans securitization transactions. Upon adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, both the Company’s securitized and non-securitized cardmember loans are included in the consolidated financial statements. As a result, the Company’s 2010 GAAP presentations and managed basis presentations prior to 2010 are generally comparable. Refer to “Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” on page 54.
Certain reclassifications of prior year amounts have been made to conform to the current presentation.


23


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
 
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES
Refer to Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for a summary of the Company’s significant accounting policies referenced, as applicable, to other notes. The following chart provides information about five critical accounting policies that are important to the Consolidated Financial Statements and that require significant management assumptions and judgments.
 
RESERVES FOR CARDMEMBER LOSSES
         
 
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
Reserves for cardmember losses relating to cardmember loans and receivables represent management’s best estimate of the losses inherent in the Company’s outstanding portfolio of loans and receivables.  
Reserves for cardmember loans and receivables losses are primarily based upon models that analyze portfolio performance and reflect management’s judgment regarding overall reserve adequacy. The analytic models take into account several factors, including average losses and recoveries over an appropriate historical period. Management considers whether to adjust the analytic models for specific factors such as increased risk in certain portfolios, impact of risk management initiatives on portfolio performance and concentration of credit risk based on factors such as tenure, industry or geographic regions. In addition, management may increase or decrease the reserves for losses on cardmember loans for other external environmental factors including leading economic and market indicators such as the unemployment rate, Gross Domestic Product (GDP), home price indices, non-farm payrolls, personal consumption expenditures index, consumer confidence index, purchasing managers index, bankruptcy filings and the legal and regulatory environment. Due to the short-term nature of cardmember receivables, the impact of the other external environmental factors on the inherent losses within the cardmember receivable portfolio is not significant. As part of this evaluation process, management also considers various reserve coverage metrics, such as reserves as a percentage of past due amounts, reserves as a percentage of cardmember loans and receivables, and net write-off coverage.
Cardmember loans and receivables are written off when management deems amounts to be uncollectible and is generally determined by the number of days past due. Cardmember loans and receivables are generally written off no later than 180 days past due.
Cardmember loans and receivables in bankruptcy or owed by deceased individuals are written off upon notification.
Recoveries of both cardmember loans and receivables are recognized on a cash basis.
 
To the extent historical credit experience updated for emerging market trends in credit is not indicative of future performance, actual losses could differ significantly from management’s judgments and expectations, resulting in either higher or lower future provisions for losses, as applicable.
As of December 31, 2010, an increase (decrease) in write-offs equivalent to 20 basis points of cardmember loan and receivable balances at such date would increase (decrease) the provision for cardmember losses by approximately $196 million. This sensitivity analysis does not represent management’s expectations for write-offs but is provided as a hypothetical scenario to assess the sensitivity of the provision for cardmember losses to changes in key inputs.
The process of determining the reserve for cardmember losses requires a high degree of judgment. It is possible that others, given the same information, may at any point in time reach different reasonable conclusions.
 
 


24


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
RESERVES FOR MEMBERSHIP REWARDS COSTS
         
 
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
The Membership Rewards program is the largest card-based rewards program in the industry. Eligible cardmembers can earn points for purchases charged on many card products. Many of these card products offer the ability to earn bonus points for certain types of purchases. Membership Rewards points are redeemable for a broad variety of rewards including travel, entertainment, retail certificates and merchandise.
Points typically do not expire and there is no limit on the number of points a cardmember may earn. A large majority of spending earns points under the program. While cardmember spend, redemption rates, and the related expense have increased, the Company believes it has historically benefited through higher revenues, lower cardmember attrition and credit losses and more timely payments.
The Company establishes balance sheet liabilities that represent the estimated future cost of points earned to date that are expected to be ultimately redeemed. These liabilities reflect management’s judgment regarding overall adequacy. The provision for the cost of Membership Rewards is included in marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses.
 
A weighted-average cost per point redeemed during the previous 12 months, adjusted as appropriate for recent changes in redemption costs, is used to approximate future redemption costs and is affected by the mix of rewards redeemed. Management uses models to estimate ultimate redemption rates based on historical redemption statistics, card product type, year of program enrollment, enrollment tenure and card spend levels. These models incorporate sophisticated statistical and actuarial techniques to estimate ultimate redemption rates of points earned to date by current cardmembers given historical redemption trends and projected future redemption behavior.
The global ultimate redemption rate assumption that drives the Company’s balance sheet reserves for expected redemptions by current participants is 91 percent. The Company continually evaluates its reserve methodology and assumptions based on developments in redemption patterns, cost per point redeemed, contract changes and other factors.
 
The reserve for the estimated cost of points expected to be redeemed is impacted over time by enrollment levels, the number of points earned and redeemed, and the weighted-average cost per point, which is influenced by redemption choices made by cardmembers, reward offerings by partners and other Membership Rewards program changes. The reserve is most sensitive to changes in the estimated ultimate redemption rate. This rate is based on the expectation that a large majority of all points earned will eventually be redeemed.
As of December 31, 2010, if the ultimate redemption rate of current enrollees increased by 100 basis points, the balance sheet reserve and corresponding provision for the cost of Membership Rewards would each increase by approximately $283 million. Similarly, if the effective weighted-average cost per point increased by 1 basis point, the balance sheet reserve and corresponding provision for the cost of Membership Rewards would each increase by approximately $60 million.
 
 


25


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT
         
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
The Company holds investment securities and derivative instruments. These financial instruments are reflected at fair value on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. Management makes significant assumptions and judgments when estimating fair value for these financial instruments.   In accordance with fair value measurement and disclosure guidance, the objective of a fair value measurement is to determine the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (an exit price). The disclosure guidance establishes a three-level hierarchy of inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value. The fair value hierarchy gives the highest priority to the measurement of fair value based on unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1), followed by the measurement of fair value based on pricing models with significant observable inputs (Level 2), with the lowest priority given to the measurement of fair value based on pricing models with significant unobservable inputs (Level 3).    
         
Investment Securities
The Company’s investment securities are predominantly comprised of fixed-income securities issued by states and municipalities as well as the U.S. Government and Agencies (e.g., Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac or Ginnie Mae). The investment securities are classified as available-for-sale with changes in fair value recorded in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income within shareholders’ equity on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
Investment Securities
The fair market values for the Company’s investment securities are obtained primarily from pricing services engaged by the Company, and the Company receives one price for each security. The fair values provided by the pricing services are estimated using pricing models where the inputs to those models are based on observable market inputs. The inputs to the valuation techniques applied by the pricing services vary depending on the type of security being priced but are typically benchmark yields, benchmark security prices, credit spreads, prepayment speeds, reported trades and broker-dealer quotes, all with reasonable levels of transparency. The pricing services did not apply any adjustments to the pricing models used. In addition, the Company did not apply any adjustments to prices received from the pricing services. The Company reaffirms its understanding of the valuation techniques used by its pricing services at least annually. In addition, the Company corroborates the prices provided by its pricing services to test their reasonableness by comparing their prices to valuations from different pricing sources as well as comparing prices to the sale prices received from sold securities. As of December 31, 2010, all of the Company’s investment securities are classified in either Level 1 or Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy. Refer to Note 3 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements.
  Investment Securities
In the measurement of fair value for the Company’s investment securities, even though the underlying inputs used in the pricing models are directly observable from active markets or recent trades of similar securities in inactive markets, the pricing models do entail a certain amount of subjectivity and therefore differing judgments in how the underlying inputs are modeled could result in different estimates of fair value.
 
 


26


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT (CONTINUED)
 
         
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
   
Other-Than-Temporary Impairment
Realized losses are recognized when management determines that a decline in fair value is other-than-temporary. Such determination requires judgment regarding the amount and timing of recovery. The Company reviews and evaluates its investment securities, at least quarterly, and more often as market conditions may require, to identify investment securities that have indications of other-than-temporary impairments. The determination of other-than-temporary impairment is a subjective process, requiring the use of judgments and assumptions. Accordingly, the Company considers several factors when evaluating debt securities for other-than-temporary impairment, including the determination of the extent to which the decline in fair value of the security is due to increased default risk for the specific issuer or market interest rate risk. With respect to increased default risk, the Company assesses the collectibility of principal and interest payments by monitoring issuers’ credit ratings, related changes to those ratings, specific credit events associated with the individual issuers as well as the credit ratings of a financial guarantor, where applicable, and the extent to which amortized cost exceeds fair value and the duration and size of that difference. With respect to market interest rate risk, including benchmark interest rates and credit spreads, the Company assesses whether it has the intent to sell the investment securities, and whether it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the investment securities before recovery of any unrealized losses. Refer to Note 6 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements.
 
Other-Than-Temporary Impairment
In determining whether any of the Company’s investment securities are other-than-temporarily impaired, a change in facts and circumstances could lead to a change in management judgment around the Company’s view on collectibility and credit quality of the issuer, or the Company’s intent to sell the investment securities, and whether it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the investment securities before recovery of any unrealized losses. Therefore, it is at least reasonably possible that a change in estimate will occur in the near term relating to other-than-temporary impairment. This could result in the Company recording an other-than-temporary impairment loss through earnings with a corresponding offset to accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income. As of December 31, 2010, the Company had approximately $0.4 billion in gross unrealized losses in its investment securities portfolio which were deemed not to be other-than-temporarily impaired.
         
Defined Benefit Pension Plan Assets
Defined benefit pension plan (the Plan) assets are measured at fair value, changes in which are included in the determination of the Plan’s net funded status which is reported in other liabilities on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
Defined Benefit Pension Plan Assets
The fair value measurements for the Plan assets align with those described under investment securities above. Refer to Note 21 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements.
  Defined Benefit Pension Plan Assets
The fair value measurements for the Plan assets contain a similar amount of subjectivity as described under investment securities above, and therefore differing judgments in how the underlying inputs are modeled could result in different estimates of fair value.
 
 


27


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT (CONTINUED)
 
         
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
         
Derivative Instruments
The Company’s primary derivative instruments include interest rate swaps, foreign currency forward agreements and cross-currency swaps. Derivative instruments are reported at fair value in other assets and other liabilities on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. Changes in fair value are recorded in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income, and/or in the Consolidated Statements of Income, depending on (i) the documentation and designation of the derivative instrument, and (ii) if the derivative instrument is in a hedging relationship, its effectiveness in offsetting the changes in the designated risk being hedged.
 
Derivative Instruments
The fair value of the Company’s derivative instruments is estimated by using either a third-party valuation service that uses proprietary pricing models, or by internal pricing models. The pricing models do not contain a high level of subjectivity as the valuation techniques used do not require significant judgment and inputs to those models are readily observable from actively quoted markets. The pricing models used are consistently applied and reflect the contractual terms of the derivatives, including the period of maturity, and market-based parameters such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity indices or prices, and volatility.
Credit valuation adjustments are necessary when the market parameters, such as a benchmark curve, used to value the derivative instruments are not indicative of the credit quality of the Company or its counterparties. The Company considers the counterparty credit risk by applying an observable forecasted default rate to the current exposure.
The Company manages derivative instrument counterparty credit risk by considering the current exposure, which is the replacement cost of contracts on the measurement date, as well as estimating the maximum potential value of the contracts over the next 12 months, considering such factors as the volatility of the underlying or reference index. To mitigate derivative instrument credit risk, counterparties are required to be pre-approved and rated as investment grade.
The Company’s derivative instruments are classified in Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy. Refer to Notes 3 and 12 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements.
 
Derivative Instruments
In the measurement of fair value for the Company’s derivative instruments, although the underlying inputs used in the pricing models are readily observable from actively quoted markets, the pricing models do entail a certain amount of subjectivity and therefore, differing judgments in how the underlying inputs are modeled could result in different estimates of fair value. In addition, any necessary credit valuation adjustments are based on observable default rates. A change in facts and circumstances could lead to a change in management judgment about counterparty credit quality, which could result in the Company recognizing an additional counterparty credit valuation adjustment. As of December 31, 2010, the credit and nonperformance risks associated with the Company’s derivative instrument counterparties were not significant.
 
 


28


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
GOODWILL
         
 
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition cost of an acquired company over the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed. In accordance with GAAP, goodwill is not amortized but is tested for impairment at the reporting unit level annually at June 30 and between annual tests if events or circumstances arise, such as adverse changes in the business climate, that would more likely than not reduce the fair value of the reporting unit below its carrying value.
The Company assigns goodwill to its reporting units for the purpose of impairment testing. A reporting unit is defined as either an operating segment or a business one level below an operating segment for which discrete financial information is available that management regularly reviews.
The goodwill impairment test utilizes a two-step approach. The first step identifies whether there is potential impairment by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit to its carrying amount, including goodwill. If the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, the second step of the impairment test is required to measure the amount of any impairment loss.
 
Goodwill impairment testing involves management judgment, requiring an assessment of whether the carrying value of the reporting unit can be supported by its fair value using widely accepted valuation techniques, such as the market approach (earnings multiples or transaction multiples for the industry in which the reporting unit operates) or the income approach (discounted cash flow methods). The fair values of the reporting units were determined using a combination of valuation techniques consistent with the market approach and the income approach.
When preparing discounted cash flow models under the income approach, the Company estimates future cash flows using the reporting unit’s internal five year forecast and a terminal value calculated using a growth rate that management believes is appropriate in light of current and expected future economic conditions. The Company then applies a discount rate to discount these future cash flows to arrive at a net present value amount, which represents the estimated fair value of the reporting unit. The discount rate applied approximates the expected cost of equity financing, determined using a capital asset pricing model. The model generates an appropriate discount rate using internal and external inputs to value future cash flows based on the time value of money and the price for bearing the uncertainty inherent in an investment. The Company believes the resulting rate, 11.8 percent, appropriately reflects the risks and uncertainties in the financial markets generally and in the Company’s internally developed forecasts.
  The Company has approximately $2.6 billion of goodwill as of December 31, 2010. The fair value of each of the Company’s reporting units is above its carrying value; accordingly, the Company has concluded its goodwill is not impaired at December 31, 2010. The Company could be exposed to increased risk of goodwill impairment if future operating results or macroeconomic conditions differ significantly from management’s current assumptions.
 
 


29


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
INCOME TAXES
         
 
        Effect if Actual Results Differ
Description   Assumptions/Approach Used   from Assumptions
 
The Company is subject to the income tax laws of the United States, its states and municipalities and those of the foreign jurisdictions in which the Company operates. These tax laws are complex, and the manner in which they apply to the taxpayer’s facts is sometimes open to interpretation. In establishing a provision for income tax expense, the Company must make judgments about the application of these inherently complex tax laws.        
         
Unrecognized Tax Benefits
The Company establishes a liability for unrecognized tax benefits, which are the differences between a tax position taken or expected to be taken in a tax return and the benefit recognized in the financial statements.
 
Unrecognized Tax Benefits
In establishing a liability for an unrecognized tax benefit, assumptions may be made in determining whether a tax position is more likely than not to be sustained upon examination by the taxing authority and also in determining the ultimate amount that is likely to be realized. A tax position is recognized only when, based on management’s judgment regarding the application of income tax laws, it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained upon examination. The amount of tax benefit recognized is based on the Company’s assessment of the most likely outcome on ultimate settlement with the taxing authority. This measurement is based on many factors, including whether a tax dispute may be settled through negotiation with the taxing authority or is only subject to review in the courts. As new information becomes available, the Company evaluates its tax positions, and adjusts its unrecognized tax benefits, as appropriate.
 
Unrecognized Tax Benefits
If the tax benefit ultimately realized differs from the amount previously recognized in the income tax provision, the Company recognizes an adjustment of the unrecognized tax benefit through the income tax provision.
         
Deferred Taxes
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are determined based on the differences between the financial statement and tax bases of assets and liabilities using the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect for the years in which the differences are expected to reverse. A valuation allowance is established when management determines that it is more likely than not that all or some portion of the benefit of the deferred tax asset will not be realized.
 
Deferred Taxes
Since deferred taxes measure the future tax effects of items recognized in the financial statements, certain estimates and assumptions are required to determine whether it is more likely than not that all or some portion of the benefit of a deferred tax asset will not be realized. In making this assessment, management analyzes and estimates the impact of future taxable income, reversing temporary differences and available tax planning strategies. These assessments are performed quarterly, taking into account any new information.
 
Deferred Taxes
Should a change in facts or circumstances lead to a change in judgment about the ultimate realizability of a deferred tax asset, the Company records or adjusts the related valuation allowance in the period that the change in facts or circumstances occurs, along with a corresponding increase or decrease to the income tax provision.
 
 


30


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY CONSOLIDATED RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
Refer to “Glossary of Selected Terminology” for the definitions of certain key terms and related information appearing in the tables below.
 
SUMMARY OF THE COMPANY’S
FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions, except per share
                 
amounts and ratio data)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 27,819     $ 24,523     $ 28,365  
Provisions for losses
  $ 2,207     $ 5,313     $ 5,798  
Expenses
  $ 19,648     $ 16,369     $ 18,986  
Income from continuing operations
  $ 4,057     $ 2,137     $ 2,871  
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130     $ 2,699  
Earnings per common share from continuing operations — diluted (a)
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.47  
Earnings per common share — diluted (a)
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.32  
Return on average equity (b)
    27.5 %     14.6 %     22.3 %
Return on average tangible common equity (c)
    35.1 %     17.6 %     28.0 %
 
 
 
(a) Earnings per common share from continuing operations — diluted and Earnings per common share — diluted were both reduced by the impact of (i) accelerated preferred dividend accretion of $212 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, due to the repurchase of $3.39 billion of preferred shares issued as part of the Capital Purchase Program (CPP), (ii) preferred share dividends and related accretion of $94 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, and (iii) earnings allocated to participating share awards and other items of $51 million, $22 million and $15 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
(b) ROE is calculated by dividing (i) one-year period net income ($4.1 billion, $2.1 billion and $2.7 billion for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively) by (ii) one-year average total shareholders’ equity ($14.8 billion, $14.6 billion and $12.1 billion for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively).
(c) Return on average tangible common equity is computed in the same manner as ROE except the computation of average tangible common equity excludes from average total shareholders’ equity average goodwill and other intangibles of $3.3 billion, $3.0 billion and $2.5 billion as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Billions, except percentages
                 
and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Card billed business:
                       
United States
  $ 479.3     $ 423.7     $ 471.1  
Outside the United States
    234.0       196.1       212.2  
                         
Total
  $ 713.3     $ 619.8     $ 683.3  
                         
Total cards-in-force (millions) (a)
                       
United States
    48.9       48.9       54.0  
Outside the United States
    42.1       39.0       38.4  
                         
Total
    91.0       87.9       92.4  
                         
Basic cards-in-force (millions) (a)
                       
United States
    37.9       38.2       42.0  
Outside the United States
    37.4       34.3       33.4  
                         
Total
    75.3       72.5       75.4  
                         
Average discount rate
    2.55 %     2.54 %     2.55 %
Average basic cardmember
spending (dollars) (b)
  $ 13,259     $ 11,213     $ 12,025  
Average fee per card (dollars) (b)
  $ 38     $ 36     $ 34  
Average fee per card adjusted (dollars) (b)
  $ 41     $ 40     $ 39  
 
 
 
(a) As previously discussed, in the third quarter of 2010 the definition of cards-in-force was changed for certain retail co-brand cards in GNS. The change caused a reduction of 1.6 million to reported cards-in-force in the third quarter.
(b) Average basic cardmember spending and average fee per card are computed from proprietary card activities only. Average fee per card is computed based on net card fees, including the amortization of deferred direct acquisition costs, plus card fees included in interest and fees on loans (including related amortization of deferred direct acquisition costs), divided by average worldwide proprietary cards-in-force. The card fees related to cardmember loans included in interest and fees on loans were $220 million, $186 million and $146 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The adjusted average fee per card is computed in the same manner, but excludes amortization of deferred direct acquisition costs (a portion of which is charge card related and included in net card fees and a portion of which is lending related and included in interest and fees on loans). The amount of amortization excluded was $207 million, $243 million and $320 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The Company presents adjusted average fee per card because management believes that this metric presents a useful indicator of card fee pricing across a range of its proprietary card products.


31


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION
 
                         
   
As of or for the Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Billions, except percentages and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Worldwide cardmember receivables
                       
Total receivables
  $ 37.3     $ 33.7     $ 33.0  
Loss reserves (millions)
                       
Beginning balance
  $ 546     $ 810     $ 1,149  
Provision for losses on
authorized transactions (a)
    439       773       1,363  
Net write-offs (b)
    (598 )     (1,131 )     (1,552 )
Other
    (1 )     94       (150 )
                         
Ending balance
  $ 386     $ 546     $ 810  
                         
% of receivables
    1.0 %     1.6 %     2.5 %
Net write-off rate — USCS
    1.6 %     3.8 %     3.6 %
30 days past due as a % of total — USCS
    1.5 %     1.8 %     3.7 %
Net loss ratio as a % of charge
volume — ICS/GCS (b)(c)
    0.16 %     0.25 %     0.17 %
90 days past billing as a % of total — ICS/GCS (b)
    0.9 %     1.6 %     2.84 %
Worldwide cardmember loans — GAAP basis portfolio (d)
                       
Total loans
  $ 60.9     $ 32.8     $ 42.2  
30 days past due as a % of total
    2.1 %     3.6 %     4.4 %
Loss reserves (millions)
                       
Beginning balance
  $ 3,268     $ 2,570     $ 1,831  
Adoption of new GAAP
consolidation standard (e)
    2,531              
Provision for losses on
authorized transactions
    1,445       4,209       4,106  
Net write-offs — principal
    (3,260 )     (2,949 )     (2,643 )
Write-offs — interest and fees
    (359 )     (448 )     (580 )
Other
    21       (114 )     (144 )
                         
Ending balance
  $ 3,646     $ 3,268     $ 2,570  
                         
Ending Reserves — principal
  $ 3,551     $ 3,172     $ 2,379  
Ending Reserves — interest and fees
  $ 95     $ 96     $ 191  
% of loans
    6.0 %     10.0 %     6.1 %
% of past due
    287 %     279 %     137 %
Average loans
  $ 58.4     $ 34.8     $ 47.6  
Net write-off rate
    5.6 %     8.5 %     5.5 %
Net interest income divided by average loans (f)(g)
    8.3 %     9.0 %     7.7 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans (f)
    9.7 %     10.1 %     8.6 %
Worldwide cardmember loans — Managed basis portfolio (d)
                       
Total loans
  $ 60.9     $ 61.8     $ 72.0  
30 days past due as a % of total
    2.1 %     3.6 %     4.6 %
Net write-offs — principal (millions)
  $ 3,260     $ 5,366     $ 4,065  
Average loans
  $ 58.4     $ 63.8     $ 75.0  
Net write-off rate
    5.6 %     8.4 %     5.4 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans (f)
    9.7 %     10.4 %     9.1 %
 
 
 
(a) Represents loss provisions for cardmember receivables consisting of principal (resulting from authorized transactions) and fee reserve components. Adjustments to cardmember receivables resulting from unauthorized transactions have been reclassified from this line to “Other” for all periods presented.
(b) Effective January 1, 2010, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in International Card Services and Global Commercial Services are written off to when they are 180 days past due or earlier, consistent with applicable bank regulatory guidance and the write-off methodology adopted for U.S. Card Services in the fourth quarter of 2008. Previously, receivables were written off when they were 360 days past billing or earlier. Therefore, the net write-offs for the first quarter of 2010 included net write-offs of approximately $60 million for International Card Services and approximately $48 million for Global Commercial Services resulting from this write-off methodology change, which increased the net loss ratios and decreased the 90 days past billing metrics for these segments, but did not have a substantial impact on provisions for losses.
(c) Beginning with the first quarter of 2010, the Company has revised the net loss ratio to exclude net write-offs related to unauthorized transactions, consistent with the methodology for calculation of the net write-off rate for U.S. Card Services. The metrics for prior periods have not been revised for this change as it was deemed immaterial.
(d) Refer to “Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” on page 54 for discussion of the GAAP and non-GAAP presentation of the Company’s U.S. loan portfolio.
(e) Reflects the new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, which resulted in the consolidation of the American Express Credit Account Master Trust (the Lending Trust), reflecting $29.0 billion of additional cardmember loans along with a $2.5 billion loan loss reserve on the Company’s balance sheets.
(f) See below for calculations of net interest yield on cardmember loans, a non-GAAP measure, and net interest income divided by average loans, a GAAP measure. Management believes net interest yield on cardmember loans is useful to investors because it provides a measure of profitability of the Company’s cardmember loan portfolio.
(g) This calculation includes elements of total interest income and total interest expense that are not attributable to the cardmember loan portfolio, and thus is not representative of net interest yield on cardmember loans. The calculation includes interest income and interest expense attributable to investment securities and other interest-bearing deposits as well as to cardmember loans, and interest expense attributable to other activities, including cardmember receivables.


32


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
CALCULATION OF NET INTEREST YIELD ON CARDMEMBER LOANS (a)
 
                 
   
Years Ended December 31,
           
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Calculation based on 2010 and 2009 GAAP information: (b)
               
Net interest income
  $ 4,869     $ 3,124  
Average loans (billions)
  $ 58.4     $ 34.8  
Adjusted net interest income
  $ 5,629     $ 3,540  
Adjusted average loans (billions)
  $ 58.3     $ 34.9  
Net interest income divided by average loans (c)
    8.3 %     9.0 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans
    9.7 %     10.1 %
Calculation based on 2010 and 2009 managed information: (b)
               
Net interest income (b)
  $ 4,869     $ 5,977  
Average loans (billions)
  $ 58.4     $ 63.8  
Adjusted net interest income
  $ 5,629     $ 6,646  
Adjusted average loans (billions)
  $ 58.3     $ 63.9  
Net interest yield on cardmember loans
    9.7 %     10.4 %
 
 
 
(a) Beginning in the first quarter of 2010, the Company changed the manner in which it allocates interest expense and capital to its reportable operating segments. The change reflects modifications in allocation methodology that the Company believes to more accurately reflect the funding and capital characteristics of its segments. The change to interest allocation impacted the consolidated net interest yield on cardmember loans. Accordingly, the net interest yields for periods prior to the first quarter of 2010 have been revised for this change.
(b) Refer to “Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” on page 54 for discussion of GAAP and non-GAAP presentation of the Company’s U.S. loan portfolio.
(c) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (g) on page 32.
 
The following discussions regarding Consolidated Results of Operations and Consolidated Liquidity and Capital Resources are presented on a basis consistent with GAAP unless otherwise noted.
 
CONSOLIDATED RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2010
The Company’s 2010 consolidated income from continuing operations increased $1.9 billion or 90 percent to $4.1 billion and diluted EPS from continuing operations increased by $1.81 to $3.35. Consolidated income from continuing operations for 2009 decreased $734 million or 26 percent from 2008 and diluted EPS from continuing operations for 2009 declined $0.93 or 38 percent from 2008.
Consolidated net income for December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $4.1 billion, $2.1 billion and $2.7 billion, respectively. Net income included losses from discontinued operations of nil, $7 million and $172 million for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
The Company’s total revenues net of interest expense and total expenses increased by approximately 13 percent and 20 percent, respectively, while total provisions for losses decreased by 58 percent in 2010. Assuming no changes in foreign currency exchange rates from 2009 to 2010, total revenues net of interest expense and total expenses increased approximately 12 percent and 19 percent, respectively, while provisions for losses decreased approximately 59 percent in 2010 1 .
The Company’s total revenues net of interest expense, provisions for losses and total expenses decreased by approximately 14 percent, 8 percent and 14 percent, respectively, in 2009. Assuming no changes in foreign currency exchange rates from 2008 to 2009, total revenues net of interest expense, provisions for losses and total expenses decreased approximately 12 percent, 7 percent and 12 percent, respectively, in 2009 1 . Currency rate changes had a minimal impact on the growth rates in 2008.
 
Results from continuing operations for 2010 included:
 
  A $127 million ($83 million after-tax) net charge for costs related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives.
 
Results from continuing operations for 2009 included:
 
  A $180 million ($113 million after-tax) benefit in the third quarter related to the accounting for a net investment in the Company’s consolidated foreign subsidiaries. See also Business Segment Results — Corporate & Other below for further discussion;
 
  A $211 million ($135 million after-tax) gain in the second quarter of 2009 on the sale of 50 percent of the Company’s equity holdings of Industrial and Commercial Bank of China (ICBC); and
 
  A $190 million ($125 million after-tax) net charge related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives.
 
Results from continuing operations for 2008 included:
 
  A $600 million ($374 million after-tax) addition to U.S. lending credit reserves reflecting a deterioration of credit indicators in the second quarter of 2008;
 
  A $449 million ($291 million after-tax) net charge, primarily reflecting the restructuring costs related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives in the fourth quarter of 2008;
 
  A $220 million ($138 million after-tax) reduction to the fair market value of the Company’s interest-only strip; and
 
  A $106 million ($66 million after-tax) charge in the fourth quarter of 2008 to increase the Company’s Membership Rewards liability, in connection with the Company’s extension of its partnership arrangements with Delta.
 
 
  1   These currency rate adjustments assume a constant exchange rate between periods for purposes of currency translation into U.S. dollars (i.e., assumes the foreign exchange rates used to determine results for the current year apply to the corresponding year-earlier period against which such results are being compared). Management believes that this presentation is helpful to investors by making it easier to compare the Company’s performance from one period to another without the variability caused by fluctuations in currency exchange rates.


33


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
Total Revenues Net of Interest Expense
Consolidated total revenues net of interest expense for 2010 of $27.8 billion were up $3.3 billion or 13 percent from 2009. The increase in total revenues net of interest expense primarily reflects new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, which caused the reporting of write-offs related to securitized loans to move from securitization income, net in 2009 to provisions for cardmember loan losses in 2010. In addition, total revenues net of interest expense reflects higher discount revenues, increased other commissions and fees, greater travel commissions and fees, and higher net interest income, partially offset by lower other revenue, and reduced net card fees. Consolidated total revenues net of interest expense for 2009 of $24.5 billion were down $3.8 billion or 14 percent from 2008, due to lower discount revenue, lower total interest income, reduced securitization income, net, lower other commissions and fees, reduced travel commissions and fees, and decreased other revenues, partially offset by lower total interest expense.
Discount revenue for 2010 increased $1.7 billion or 13 percent as compared to 2009 to $15.1 billion as a result of a 15 percent increase in worldwide billed business and a slightly higher discount rate. The lower revenue growth versus total billed business growth reflects the relatively faster billed business growth rate of 28 percent related to GNS, where discount revenue is shared with card issuing partners, and higher contra-revenues, including cash-back rewards costs and corporate incentive payments. The 15 percent increase in worldwide billed business in 2010 reflected an increase in proprietary billed business of 13 percent. The average discount rate was 2.55 percent and 2.54 percent for 2010 and 2009, respectively. Over time, certain repricing initiatives, changes in the mix of business and volume-related pricing discounts and investments will likely result in some erosion of the average discount rate.
U.S. billed business and billed business outside the United States were up 13 percent and 19 percent, respectively, in 2010. The increase in billed business within the United States reflected an increase in average spending per proprietary basic card, partially offset by a slight decrease in basic cards-in-force. The increase in billed business outside the United States reflected an increase in average spending per proprietary basic card and basic cards-in-force.
 
The table below summarizes selected statistics for billed business and average spend:
 
                                 
   
    2010     2009  
          Percentage Increase
          Percentage Increase
 
          (Decrease) Assuming
          (Decrease) Assuming
 
          No Changes in
          No Changes in
 
    Percentage Increase
    Foreign Exchange
    Percentage Increase
    Foreign Exchange
 
    (Decrease)     Rates (a)       (Decrease)     Rates (a)    
 
Worldwide (b)
                               
Billed business
    15 %     14 %     (9 )%     (7 )%
Proprietary billed business
    13       13       (11 )     (9 )
GNS billed business (c)
    28       24       7       11  
Average spending per proprietary basic card
    18       17       (7 )     (5 )
Basic cards-in-force
    4               (4 )        
United States (b)
                               
Billed business
    13               (10 )        
Average spending per proprietary basic card
    18               (6 )        
Basic cards-in-force
    (1 )             (9 )        
Proprietary consumer card billed business (d)
    12               (10 )        
Proprietary small business billed business (d)
    11               (13 )        
Proprietary Corporate Services billed business (e)
    19               (11 )        
Outside the United States (b)
                               
Billed business
    19       15       (8 )     (1 )
Average spending per proprietary basic card
    20       16       (9 )     (3 )
Basic cards-in-force
    9               3          
Proprietary consumer and small business billed business (f)
    14       9       (10 )     (4 )
Proprietary Corporate Services billed business (e)
    20       18       (19 )     (12 )
 
 
 
(a) Refer to footnote 1 on page 33 relating to changes in foreign exchange rates.
(b) Captions in the table above not designated as “proprietary” or “GNS” include both proprietary and GNS data.
(c) Included in the Global Network segment.
(d) Included in the USCS segment.
(e) Included in the GCS segment.
(f) Included in the ICS segment.


34


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
Assuming no changes in foreign exchange rates, total billed business outside the United States grew 22 percent in Asia Pacific, 18 percent in Latin America, 10 percent in Europe and 9 percent in Canada.
During 2009, discount revenue decreased $1.6 billion or 11 percent to $13.4 billion compared to 2008 as a result of a 9 percent decrease in worldwide billed business. The greater decrease in discount revenue compared to billed business primarily reflected growth in billed business related to GNS where the Company shares the discount rate with card issuing partners, as well as a slight decline in the average discount rate. The 9 percent decrease in worldwide billed business in 2009 reflected a decline in proprietary billed business of 11 percent, offset by a 7 percent increase in billed business related to GNS.
Net card fees in 2010 decreased 2 percent, partially due to a non-renewal reserve adjustment in the prior year. Net card fees in 2009 remained unchanged compared to 2008 as the decline in total proprietary cards-in-force was offset by an increase in the average fee per card.
Travel commissions and fees increased $185 million or 12 percent to $1.8 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, primarily reflecting a 19 percent increase in worldwide travel sales, partially offset by a lower sales revenue rate. Travel commissions and fees decreased $416 million or 21 percent to $1.6 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, primarily reflecting a 28 percent decrease in worldwide travel sales, partially offset by higher sales commission and fee rates.
Other commissions and fees increased $253 million or 14 percent to $2.0 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, driven primarily by new GAAP effective January 1, 2010 where fees related to securitized receivables are now recognized as other commissions and fees. These fees were previously reported in securitization income, net. The increase also reflects greater foreign currency conversion revenues related to higher spending, partially offset by lower delinquency fees in the non-securitized cardmember loan portfolio. Other commissions and fees decreased $529 million or 23 percent to $1.8 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, due to lower delinquency fees reflecting decreased owned loan balances and the impacts of various customer assistance programs, in addition to reduced spending-related foreign currency conversion revenues.
Securitization income, net decreased $400 million to nil in 2010 compared to 2009, as the Company no longer reports securitization income, net, in accordance with new GAAP effective January 1, 2010. Securitization income, net decreased $670 million or 63 percent to $400 million in 2009 compared to 2008, primarily due to lower excess spread, net, driven by increased write-offs and a decrease in interest income on cardmember loans and fee revenues. These unfavorable impacts were partially offset by a decrease in interest expense due to lower coupon rates paid on variable-rate investor certificates, as well as a favorable fair value adjustment of the interest-only strip.
Other revenues in 2010 decreased $160 million or 8 percent to $1.9 billion compared to 2009, primarily reflecting the $211 million gain on the sale of 50 percent of the Company’s equity holdings in ICBC in 2009, lower insurance premium revenues and higher partner investments which appear as a contra-other revenue, partially offset by higher GNS partner-related royalty revenues, greater merchant fee-related revenue and higher publishing revenue. Other revenues in 2009 decreased $70 million or 3 percent to $2.1 billion compared to 2008, primarily reflecting decreased revenues from CPS, due to the migration of clients to the American Express network and lower publishing revenues, partially offset by the ICBC gain.
Interest income increased $2.0 billion or 37 percent to $7.3 billion in 2010 compared to 2009. Interest and fees on loans increased $2.3 billion or 52 percent, driven by an increase in the average loan balance resulting from the consolidation of securitized receivables in accordance with new GAAP effective January 1, 2010. Interest income related to securitized receivables is reported in securitization income, net in prior periods, but is now reported in interest and fees on loans. The increase related to this consolidation was partially offset by a lower yield on cardmember loans, reflecting higher payment rates and lower revolving levels, and the implementation of elements of the CARD Act. These reductions to yield were partially offset by the benefit of certain repricing initiatives effective during 2009 and 2010. Interest and dividends on investment securities decreased $361 million or 45 percent, primarily reflecting the elimination of interest on retained securities driven by new GAAP effective January 1, 2010 and lower short-term investment levels. Interest income from deposits with banks and other increased $7 million or 12 percent primarily due to higher average deposit balances versus the prior year. Interest income decreased $1.9 billion or 26 percent to $5.3 billion in 2009 compared to 2008. Interest and fees on loans decreased $1.7 billion or 27 percent due to decline in the average owned loan balance, reduced market interest rates and the impact of various customer assistance programs, partially offset by the benefit of certain repricing initiatives. Interest and dividends on investment securities increased $33 million or 4 percent, primarily reflecting increased investment levels partially offset by reduced investment yields. Interest income from deposits with banks and other decreased $212 million or 78 percent, primarily due to a reduced yield and a lower balance of deposits in other banks.
Interest expense increased $216 million or 10 percent to $2.4 billion in 2010 compared to 2009. Interest expense related to deposits increased $121 million or 28 percent, as higher customer balances were partially offset by a lower cost of funds. Interest expense related to short-term borrowings decreased $34 million or 92 percent, reflecting lower commercial paper levels versus the prior year and a lower cost of funds. Interest expense related to long-term debt and other increased $129 million or 7 percent, reflecting the consolidation of long-term debt associated with securitized loans previously held off-balance sheet in accordance with

35


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
new GAAP effective January 1, 2010. Interest expense related to this debt was reported in securitization income, net in prior periods, but is now reported in long-term debt and other interest expense. The increase was partially offset by lower average long-term debt. Interest expense decreased $1.3 billion or 38 percent to $2.2 billion in 2009 compared to 2008. Interest expense related to deposits decreased $29 million or 6 percent, primarily due to a lower cost of funds which more than offset increased balances. Interest expense related to short-term borrowings decreased $446 million or 92 percent, due to significantly lower short-term debt levels and a lower cost of funds. Interest expense related to long-term debt and other decreased $873 million or 33 percent, primarily reflecting a lower cost of funds driven by reduced market rates on variably priced debt, as well as a lower average balance of long-term debt outstanding.
 
Provisions for Losses
Provisions for losses of $2.2 billion in 2010 decreased $3.1 billion or 58 percent, compared to 2009. Charge card provisions for losses decreased $262 million or 31 percent, driven by lower reserve requirements, due to improved credit performance, partially offset by higher receivables. Cardmember loans provisions for losses decreased $2.7 billion or 64 percent, primarily reflecting lower reserve requirements during the year, due to improving credit performance, partially offset by an increase related to the inclusion of the 2010 expense for written-off securitized loans, which in 2009 was reported in securitization income, net. Other provisions for losses decreased $105 million or 55 percent primarily reflecting lower merchant-related debit balances.
Provisions for losses of $5.3 billion in 2009 decreased $485 million or 8 percent compared to 2008. Charge card provisions for losses decreased $506 million or 37 percent, primarily driven by improved credit performance. Cardmember loans provisions for losses increased $35 million or 1 percent, primarily due to a higher cardmember reserve level due to the challenging credit environment, partially offset by a lower owned-loan balance.
 
Expenses
Consolidated expenses for 2010 were $19.6 billion, up $3.2 billion or 20 percent from $16.4 billion in 2009. The increase in 2010 reflected greater marketing and promotion expenses, increased cardmember rewards expense, higher salaries and employee benefits, greater professional services expenses, higher other, net expenses, and increased cardmember services expenses, partially offset by lower occupancy and equipment expense and lower communications expense. Consolidated expenses for 2009 were $16.4 billion, down $2.6 billion or 14 percent from $19.0 billion in 2008. The decrease in 2009 was primarily driven by lower other, net expenses, reduced salaries and employee benefits expenses, lower marketing and promotion expense and decreased cardmember rewards expense, partially offset by greater cardmember services expense. Consolidated expenses in 2010, 2009 and 2008 also included $127 million, $190 million and $449 million, respectively, of reengineering costs, of which $96 million, $185 million and $417 million, respectively, represent restructuring charges.
Marketing and promotion expenses increased $1.2 billion or 60 percent to $3.1 billion in 2010 from $1.9 billion in 2009, as improved credit and billings trends led to increased investment levels in 2010. Marketing and promotion expenses decreased $516 million or 21 percent to $1.9 billion in 2009 from $2.4 billion in 2008, due to lower spending levels in the first three quarters of 2009, partially offset by higher expense in the fourth quarter of 2009.
Cardmember rewards expenses increased $993 million or 25 percent to $5.0 billion in 2010 from $4.0 billion in 2009, reflecting higher rewards-related spending volumes and co-brand expense, and a benefit in the third quarter of 2009 relating to the adoption of a more restrictive redemption policy for accounts 30 days past due. Cardmember rewards expenses decreased $353 million or 8 percent to $4.0 billion in 2009 from $4.4 billion in 2008, reflecting lower rewards-related spending volumes, partially offset by higher redemption rates and costs in Membership Rewards and higher costs with relatively lower declines in co-brand spending volumes.
Salaries and employee benefits expenses increased $486 million or 10 percent to $5.6 billion in 2010 from $5.1 billion in 2009, reflecting a 2 percent increase in total employee count, merit increases for existing employees, higher benefit-related costs, including the impact of reinstating certain benefits that were temporarily suspended during the recession, higher management incentive compensation expense and greater volume-related sales incentives, partially offset by lower net reengineering costs in 2010 versus 2009. Salaries and employee benefits expenses decreased $1.0 billion or 17 percent to $5.1 billion in 2009 from $6.1 billion in 2008, reflecting lower employee levels and costs related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives, as well as the restructuring charge in the fourth quarter of 2008.
Professional services expenses in 2010 increased $398 million or 17 percent compared to 2009, reflecting higher technology development expenditures, greater legal costs, and higher third-party merchant sales force commissions, partially offset by lower credit and collection agency costs. Professional services expenses in 2009 compared to 2008 remained flat.
Other, net expenses in 2010 increased $218 million or 9 percent to $2.6 billion compared to 2009, reflecting the $180 million ($113 million after-tax) benefit in the third quarter of 2009 related to the accounting for a net investment in the Company’s consolidated foreign subsidiaries, as well as higher investments in business building initiatives and higher travel and entertainment costs in 2010, partially offset by lower postage and telephone-related costs and a charge of $63 million in 2009 for certain property exits. Other, net expenses in 2009 decreased $708 million or 23 percent to $2.4 billion compared to 2008, reflecting the full


36


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
year of settlement payments from MasterCard in 2009 versus two quarters in 2008, a $180 million third quarter benefit related to the accounting for a net investment in the Company’s consolidated foreign subsidiaries (as discussed further in Business Segment Results — Corporate & Other below), a $59 million benefit in the second quarter of 2009 from the completion of certain account reconciliations related to prior periods, and lower travel and entertainment and other expenses due to the Company’s reengineering activities. These were partially offset by a $9 million favorable impact in the fourth quarter of 2008 related to fair value hedge ineffectiveness.
 
Income Taxes
The effective tax rate was 32 percent in 2010 compared to 25 percent in 2009 and 20 percent in 2008. The tax rates in all years reflect the level of pretax income in relation to recurring permanent tax benefits.
 
Discontinued Operations
Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax, was nil, $7 million and $172 million in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax, primarily reflected AEIDC and AEB results from operations, including AEIDC’s $15 million ($10 million after-tax) and $275 million ($179 million after-tax) of losses related to mark-to-market adjustments and sales within the AEIDC investment portfolio in 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
CASH FLOWS
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Cash flows from operating activities primarily include net income adjusted for (i) non-cash items included in net income, including the provision for losses, depreciation and amortization, deferred taxes, and stock-based compensation and (ii) changes in the balances of operating assets and liabilities, which can vary significantly in the normal course of business due to the amount and timing of various payments.
For the year ended December 31, 2010, net cash provided by operating activities of $9.3 billion increased $3.0 billion compared to $6.3 billion in 2009. The increase was primarily due to higher net income in 2010, increases in non-cash expenses for deferred taxes, acquisition costs and increases in accounts payable and other liabilities in 2010, partially offset by lower provisions for losses and an increase in other assets in 2010.
For the year ended December 31, 2009, net cash provided by operating activities of $6.3 billion decreased $1.5 billion compared to $7.8 billion in 2008. The decrease was primarily due to a decrease in deferred taxes, acquisition costs and other, fluctuations in the Company’s other receivables, accounts payable and other liabilities, as well as a reduction in income from continuing operations, partially offset by changes in other assets.
 
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
The Company’s investing activities primarily include funding cardmember loans and receivables, securitizations of cardmember loans and receivables, and the Company’s available-for-sale investment portfolio.
For the year ended December 31, 2010, net cash used in investing activities of $1.2 billion decreased $5.6 billion compared to net cash used in investing activities of $6.8 billion in 2009, primarily due to higher maturity and redemption of investments and lower purchases of investments, partially offset by increases in cardmember loans and receivables.
For the year ended December 31, 2009, net cash used in investing activities was $6.8 billion, compared to net cash provided by investing activities of $7.6 billion in 2008. The year-over-year change was primarily due to lower proceeds from cardmember loan securitizations, decreased maturities and redemptions of investments, and an increase in restricted cash required for related securitization activities.
 
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
The Company’s financing activities primarily include issuing and repaying debt, taking customer deposits, paying dividends and repurchasing its common and preferred shares.
For the year ended December 31, 2010, net cash used in financing activities of $8.1 billion increased $3.5 billion compared to $4.6 billion in 2009, due to a reduced level of growth in customer deposits during 2010 as compared to 2009 and an increase in principal payments of long-term debt, partially offset by a net increase in short-term borrowings in 2010 and the repayment of preferred shares in 2009.
For the year ended December 31, 2009, net cash used in financing activities of $4.6 billion decreased $5.8 billion compared to $10.4 billion in 2008, primarily due to an increase in customer deposits in 2009 and a reduction in cash used in financing activities attributable to discontinued operations from 2008 to 2009.


37


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
CERTAIN LEGISLATIVE, REGULATORY AND OTHER DEVELOPMENTS
As a participant in the financial services industry, the Company is subject to a wide array of regulations applicable to its businesses. The Company, as a bank holding company and a financial holding company, is subject to the supervision of the Federal Reserve. As such, the Company is subject to the Federal Reserve’s regulations and policies, including its regulatory capital requirements. In addition, the extreme disruptions in the capital markets that commenced in mid-2007 and the resulting instability and failure of numerous financial institutions have led to a number of changes in the financial services industry, including significant additional regulation and the formation of additional regulatory bodies. The Company’s conversion to a bank holding company in the fourth quarter of 2008 has increased the scope of its regulatory oversight and its compliance program. In addition, although the long-term impact on the Company of much of the recent and pending legislative and regulatory initiatives remains uncertain, the Company expects that compliance requirements and expenditures will continue to rise for financial services firms, including the Company, as the legislation and rules become effective over the course of the next several years.
 
The CARD Act
In May 2009, the U.S. Congress passed, and the President of the United States signed into law, legislation, known as the CARD Act, to fundamentally reform credit card billing practices, pricing and disclosure requirements. This legislation accelerated the effective date and expanded the scope of amendments to the rules regarding Unfair or Deceptive Acts or Practices (UDAP) and Truth in Lending Act that restrict certain credit and charge card practices and require expanded disclosures to consumers, which were adopted in December 2008 by federal bank regulators in the United States. Together, the legislation and the regulatory amendments include, among other matters, rules relating to the imposition by card issuers of interest rate increases on outstanding balances and the allocation of payments in respect of outstanding balances with different interest rates. Certain other provisions of the CARD Act require penalty fees to be reasonable and proportional in relation to the circumstances for which such fees are levied and require issuers to evaluate past interest rate increases twice per year to determine whether it is appropriate to reduce such increases.
The Company has made changes to its product terms and practices that are designed to mitigate the impact on Company revenue of the changes required by the CARD Act and the regulatory amendments. These changes include instituting product-specific increases in pricing on purchases and cash advances, modifying the criteria pursuant to which the penalty rate of interest is imposed on a cardmember and assessing late fees on certain charge products at an earlier date than previously assessed. Although the Company believes its actions to mitigate the impact of the CARD Act have, to date, been largely effective (as evidenced in part by the net interest yield for its U.S. lending portfolio), the impacts of certain other provisions of the CARD Act are still subject to some uncertainty (such as the requirement to periodically reevaluate APR increases). Accordingly, in the event the actions undertaken by the Company to date to offset the impact of the new legislation and regulations are not ultimately effective, they could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations, including its revenue and net income.
 
Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “Dodd-Frank Reform Act”)
In July 2010, President Obama signed into law the Dodd-Frank Reform Act. The Dodd-Frank Reform Act is comprehensive in scope and contains a wide array of provisions intending to govern the practices and oversight of financial institutions and other participants in the financial markets. Among other matters, the law creates a new independent Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, which will regulate consumer credit across the U.S. economy. The Bureau will have broad rulemaking authority over providers of credit, savings, payment and other consumer financial products and services with respect to certain federal consumer financial laws. Moreover, the Bureau will have examination and enforcement authority with respect to certain federal consumer financial laws for some providers of consumer financial products and services, including the Company and its insured depository institution subsidiaries. The Bureau will be directed to prohibit “unfair, deceptive or abusive” practices, and to ensure that all consumers have access to fair, transparent and competitive markets for consumer financial products and services.
Under the Dodd-Frank Reform Act, the Federal Reserve is authorized to regulate interchange fees paid to banks on debit card and certain general-use prepaid card transactions to ensure that they are “reasonable and proportional” to the cost of processing individual transactions, and to prohibit debit and general-use prepaid card networks and issuers from requiring transactions to be processed on a single payment network. The Company does not offer a debit card linked to a deposit account, but does issue various types of prepaid cards. The Dodd-Frank Reform Act also prohibits credit/debit networks from restricting a merchant from offering discounts or incentives to customers in order to encourage them to use a particular form of payment, or from restricting a merchant from setting certain minimum and maximum transaction amounts for credit cards, as long as any such discounts or incentives or any minimum or maximum transaction amounts do not discriminate among issuers or networks and comply with applicable federal or state disclosure requirements.
The Dodd-Frank Reform Act also authorizes the Federal Reserve to establish heightened capital, leverage and liquidity standards, risk management requirements, concentration limits on credit exposures, mandatory resolution plans (so-called “living wills”) and stress tests for, among others, large bank holding companies, such as the Company, that have greater than


38


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
$50 billion in assets. In addition, certain derivative transactions will be required to be centrally cleared, which may create or increase collateral posting requirements for the Company.
Many provisions of the Dodd-Frank Reform Act require the adoption of rules for implementation. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Reform Act mandates multiple studies, which could result in additional legislative or regulatory action. These new rules and studies will be implemented and undertaken over a period of several years. Accordingly, the ultimate consequences of the Dodd-Frank Reform Act and its implementing regulations on the Company’s business, results of operations and financial condition are uncertain at this time.
 
Other Legislative and Regulatory Initiatives
The credit and charge card sector also faces continuing scrutiny in connection with the fees merchants pay to accept cards. Although investigations into the way bankcard network members collectively set the “interchange” (that is, the fee paid by the bankcard merchant acquirer to the card issuing bank in “four party” payment networks, like Visa and MasterCard) had largely been a subject of regulators outside the United States, legislation was previously introduced in Congress designed to give merchants antitrust immunity to negotiate interchange collectively with card networks and to regulate certain card network practices. Although, unlike the Visa and MasterCard networks, the American Express network does not collectively set fees, antitrust actions and government regulation relating to merchant pricing could ultimately affect all networks.
In addition to the provisions of the Dodd-Frank Reform Act regarding merchants’ ability to offer discounts or incentives to encourage customers’ use of a particular form of payment, a number of U.S. states are also considering legislation that would prohibit card networks from imposing conditions, restrictions or penalties on a merchant if the merchant, among other things, (i) provides a discount to a customer for using one form of payment versus another or one type of credit or charge card versus another, (ii) imposes a minimum dollar requirement on customers with respect to the use of credit or charge cards or (iii) chooses to accept credit and charge cards at some of its locations but not at others. Such legislation has recently been enacted in Vermont, and similar legislation has been introduced in other states.
Also, other countries in which the Company operates have been considering and in some cases adopting similar legislation and rules that would impose changes on certain practices of card issuers and bankcard networks.
Any or all of the above changes to the legal and regulatory environment in which the Company operates could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations.
Refer to “Consolidated Capital Resources and Liquidity” for a discussion of the series of international capital and liquidity standards published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision.
 
CONSOLIDATED CAPITAL RESOURCES AND LIQUIDITY
The Company’s balance sheet management objectives are to maintain:
 
  A solid and flexible equity capital profile;
 
  A broad, deep and diverse set of funding sources to finance its assets and meet operating requirements; and
 
  Liquidity programs that enable the Company to continuously meet expected future financing obligations and business requirements, even in the event it is unable to raise new funds under its regular funding programs.
 
CAPITAL STRATEGY
The Company’s objective is to retain sufficient levels of capital generated through earnings and other sources to maintain a solid equity capital base and to provide flexibility to satisfy future business growth. The Company believes capital allocated to growing businesses with a return on risk-adjusted equity in excess of its costs will generate shareholder value.
The level and composition of the Company’s consolidated capital position are determined through the Company’s internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP), which reflects its business activities, as well as marketplace conditions and credit rating agency requirements. They are also influenced by subsidiary capital requirements. The Company, as a bank holding company, is also subject to regulatory requirements administered by the U.S. federal banking agencies. The Federal Reserve has established specific capital adequacy guidelines that involve quantitative measures of assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items.
The Company currently calculates and reports its capital ratios under the measurement standards commonly referred to as Basel I. In June 2004, the Basel Committee published new international guidelines for determining regulatory capital (Basel II). In December 2007, the U.S. bank regulatory agencies jointly adopted a final rule based on Basel II.
The Dodd-Frank Reform Act and a series of international capital and liquidity standards known as Basel III published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (commonly referred to as Basel) will in the future change these current quantitative measures. In general, these changes will involve, for the U.S. banking industry as a whole, a reduction in the types of instruments deemed to be capital along with an increase in the amount of capital that assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items require. These changes will generally serve to reduce reported capital ratios compared to current capital guidelines. The specific U.S. guidelines supporting the new standards and the proposed Basel III capital standards have not been finalized, but are generally expected to be issued within the next 12 months. In addition to these measurement changes, international and United States banking regulators could increase the ratio levels at which banks would be deemed to be “well capitalized”.


39


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
The following table presents the regulatory risk-based capital ratios and leverage ratio for the Company and its significant banking subsidiaries, as well as additional ratios widely utilized in the market place, as of the fourth quarter of 2010:
 
                 
   
    Well-
       
    Capitalized
       
    Ratio     Actual  
 
Risk-Based Capital
               
Tier 1
    6 %        
American Express Company
            11.1 %
Centurion Bank
            18.3 %
FSB
            16.3 %
Total
    10 %        
American Express Company
            13.1 %
Centurion Bank
            19.5 %
FSB (a)
            18.8 %
Tier 1 Leverage
    5 %        
American Express Company
            9.3 %
Centurion Bank
            19.4 %
FSB
            16.1 %
Tier 1 Common Risk-Based
               
American Express Company
            11.1 %
Common Equity to Risk-
Weighted Assets
               
American Express Company
            13.7 %
Tangible Common Equity to
Risk-Weighted Assets
               
American Express Company
            10.7 %
 
 
 
(a) Refer to Note 23 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of FSB’s Total capital ratio.
 
On December 16, 2010, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision issued the Basel III rules text, which presents details of global regulatory standards on bank capital adequacy and liquidity agreed to by Governors and Heads of Supervision, and endorsed by the G20 Leaders at their November 2010 summit. Basel III, when implemented by the U.S. banking agencies and fully phased-in, will require bank holding companies and their bank subsidiaries to maintain substantially more capital, with a greater emphasis on common equity. While final implementation of the rules related to capital ratios will be determined by the Federal Reserve, the Company estimates that had the new rules been in place during the fourth quarter of 2010, the reported Tier 1 risk-based capital and Tier 1 common risk-based ratios would decline by approximately 50 basis points. In addition, the impact of the new rules on the reported Tier 1 leverage ratio would be a decline of approximately 150 basis points.
 
The following provides definitions for the Company’s regulatory risk-based capital ratios and leverage ratio, all of which are calculated as per standard regulatory guidance:
 
Risk-Weighted Assets  — Assets are weighted for risk according to a formula used by the Federal Reserve to conform to capital adequacy guidelines. On and off-balance sheet items are weighted for risk, with off-balance sheet items converted to balance sheet equivalents, using risk conversion factors, before being allocated a risk-adjusted weight. The off-balance sheet items comprise a minimal part of the overall calculation. Risk-weighted assets as of December 31, 2010 were $118.3 billion.
 
Tier 1 Risk-Based Capital Ratio  — The Tier 1 capital ratio is calculated as Tier 1 capital divided by risk-weighted assets. Tier 1 capital is the sum of common shareholders’ equity, certain perpetual preferred stock (not applicable to the Company), and noncontrolling interests in consolidated subsidiaries, adjusted for ineligible goodwill and intangible assets, as well as certain other comprehensive income items as follows: net unrealized gains/losses on securities and derivatives, and net unrealized pension and other postretirement benefit losses, all net of tax. Tier 1 capital as of December 31, 2010 was $13.1 billion. This ratio is commonly used by regulatory agencies to assess a financial institution’s financial strength and is the primary form of capital used to absorb losses beyond current loss accrual estimates.
 
Total Risk-Based Capital Ratio  — The total risk-based capital ratio is calculated as the sum of Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital, divided by risk-weighted assets. Tier 2 capital is the sum of the allowance for receivable and loan losses (limited to 1.25 percent of risk-weighted assets) and 45 percent of the unrealized gains on equity securities, plus a $750 million subordinated hybrid security, for which the Company received approval from the Federal Reserve Board for treatment as Tier 2 capital. Tier 2 capital as of December 31, 2010 was $2.4 billion.
 
Tier 1 Leverage Ratio  — The Tier 1 leverage ratio is calculated by dividing Tier 1 capital by the Company’s average total consolidated assets for the most recent quarter. Average consolidated assets as of December 31, 2010 were $141.3 billion.
 
The following provides definitions for capital ratios widely used in the marketplace, although they may be calculated differently by different companies.
 
Tier 1 Common Risk-Based Capital Ratio — The Tier 1 common risk-based capital ratio is calculated as Tier 1 common capital divided by risk weighted assets. As of December 31, 2010, the Tier 1 common capital was $13.1 billion and is calculated as Tier 1 capital less (a) certain noncontrolling interests (applicable but immaterial for the Company), (b) qualifying perpetual preferred stock and (c) trust preferred securities. Items (b) and (c) are not applicable for the Company. While this was not one of the required risk-based capital ratios for regulatory reporting purposes, it was submitted to the Federal Reserve on January 7, 2011 as part of its 2011 Capital Plan Review.
 
Common Equity and Tangible Common Equity to Risk-Weighted Assets Ratios  — Common equity equals the Company’s shareholders’ equity of $16.2 billion as of December 31, 2010, and tangible common equity equals common equity, less goodwill and other intangibles of $3.6 billion. Management believes presenting the ratio of tangible common equity to risk-weighted assets is a useful measure of evaluating the strength of the Company’s capital position.


40


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
The Company seeks to maintain capital levels and ratios in excess of the minimum regulatory requirements; failure to maintain minimum capital levels could affect the Company’s status as a financial holding company and cause the respective regulatory agencies to take actions that could limit the Company’s business operations.
The Company’s primary source of equity capital has been through the generation of net income. Historically, capital generated through net income and other sources, such as the exercise of stock options by employees, has exceeded the growth in its capital requirements. To the extent capital has exceeded business, regulatory and rating agency requirements, the Company has returned excess capital to shareholders through its regular common dividend and share repurchase program.
The Company maintains certain flexibility to shift capital across its businesses as appropriate. For example, the Company may infuse additional capital into subsidiaries to maintain capital at targeted levels in consideration of debt ratings and regulatory requirements. These infused amounts can affect the capital profile and liquidity levels for American Express’ Parent Company (Parent Company).
 
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TREASURY CAPITAL PURCHASE PROGRAM
On January 9, 2009, under the United States Department of the Treasury (Treasury Department) Capital Purchase Program (CPP), the Company issued to the Treasury Department for aggregate proceeds of $3.39 billion: (1) 3.39 million shares of Fixed Rate (5 percent) Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Shares, Series A, and (2) a ten-year warrant (the Warrant) for the Treasury Department to purchase up to 24 million common shares at an exercise price of $20.95 per share. The Company repurchased the Preferred Shares from the Treasury Department at par on June 17, 2009, and repurchased the Warrant for $340 million on July 29, 2009. Refer to Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of this program.
 
SHARE REPURCHASES AND DIVIDENDS
The Company has a share repurchase program to return excess capital to shareholders. These share repurchases reduce shares outstanding and offset, in whole or part, the issuance of new shares as part of employee compensation plans.
During the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company repurchased 14 million shares through the share repurchase program. On January 7, 2011 the Company submitted its Comprehensive Capital Plan (CCP) to the Federal Reserve requesting approval to proceed with additional share repurchases in 2011. The CCP includes an analysis of performance and capital availability under certain adverse economic assumptions. The CCP was submitted to the Federal Reserve pursuant to the Federal Reserve’s guidance on dividends and capital distributions, most recently updated in November 2010, and discussed further below in “Regulatory Matters and Capital Adequacy — Bank Holding Company Dividend Restrictions”. The Company expects a response from the Federal Reserve by the end of the first quarter. The Company cannot predict whether the Federal Reserve will approve additional share repurchases. No additional shares are expected to be repurchased prior to its response. No shares were repurchased during 2009 as share repurchases were suspended during the first quarter of 2008 in light of the challenging global economic environment and limitations while under the CPP.
On a cumulative basis, since 1994, the Company has distributed 64 percent of capital generated through share repurchases and dividends.
During 2010, the Company returned $1.5 billion in dividends and share repurchases to shareholders, which represents approximately 30 percent of total capital generated.
 
FUNDING STRATEGY
The Company’s principal funding objective is to maintain broad and well-diversified funding sources to allow it to meet its maturing obligations, cost-effectively finance current and future asset growth in its global businesses as well as to maintain a strong liquidity profile. The diversity of funding sources by type of debt instrument, by maturity and by investor base, among other factors, provides additional insulation from the impact of disruptions in any one type of debt, maturity or investor. The mix of the Company’s funding in any period will seek to achieve cost-efficiency consistent with both maintaining diversified sources and achieving its liquidity objectives. The Company’s funding strategy and activities are integrated into its asset-liability management activities. The Company has in place a Funding Policy covering American Express Company and all of its subsidiaries.
The Company’s proprietary card businesses are the primary asset-generating businesses, with significant assets in both domestic and international cardmember receivable and lending activities. The Company’s financing needs are in large part a consequence of its proprietary card-issuing businesses and the maintenance of a liquidity position to support all of its business activities, such as merchant payments. The Company generally pays merchants for card transactions prior to reimbursement by cardmembers and therefore funds the merchant payments during the period cardmember loans and receivables are outstanding. The Company also has additional financing needs associated with general corporate purposes, including acquisition activities.


41


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
FUNDING PROGRAMS AND ACTIVITIES
The Company meets its funding needs through a variety of sources, including debt instruments such as direct and third-party distributed deposits, senior unsecured debentures, asset securitizations, securitized borrowings through a conduit facility and long-term committed bank borrowing facilities in certain non-U.S. regions.
The following discussion includes information on both a GAAP and managed basis. The managed basis presentation includes debt issued in connection with the Company’s lending securitization activities, which were off-balance sheet. The adoption of new GAAP effective on January 1, 2010 resulted in accounting for both the Company’s securitized and non-securitized cardmember loans in the Consolidated Financial Statements. As a result, the Company’s 2010 GAAP presentations and managed basis presentations prior to 2010 are generally comparable. Prior period Consolidated Financial Statements have not been revised for this accounting change. For a discussion of managed basis and management’s rationale for such presentation, refer to “U.S. Card Services — Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” below.
 
The Company had the following consolidated debt, on both a GAAP and managed basis, and customer deposits outstanding as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Billions)   2010     2009  
 
                                 
Short-term borrowings
  $ 3.4     $ 2.3  
Long-term debt
    66.4       52.3  
                 
Total debt (GAAP basis)
    69.8       54.6  
Off-balance sheet securitizations
          28.3  
                 
Total debt (managed basis)
    69.8       82.9  
Customer deposits
    29.7       26.3  
                 
Total debt (managed) and customer deposits
  $ 99.5     $ 109.2  
 
 
 
The Company seeks to raise funds to meet all of its financing needs, including seasonal and other working capital needs, while also seeking to maintain sufficient cash and readily-marketable securities that are easily convertible to cash, in order to meet the scheduled maturities of all long-term borrowings on a consolidated basis for a 12-month period. The Company has $8.9 billion of unsecured long-term debt, $5.3 billion of asset securitizations and $5.6 billion of long-term deposits that will mature during 2011. See “Liquidity Management” section for more details.
The Company’s equity capital and funding strategies are designed, among other things, to maintain appropriate and stable unsecured debt ratings from the major credit rating agencies, Moody’s Investor Services (Moody’s), Standard & Poor’s (S&P), Fitch Ratings (Fitch) and Dominion Bond Rating Services (DBRS). Such ratings help to support the Company’s access to cost effective unsecured funding as part of its overall financing programs. Ratings for the Company’s ABS activities are evaluated separately.
 
                 
 
Credit
      Short-Term
  Long-Term
   
Agency   Entity Rated   Ratings   Ratings   Outlook
 
                                 
DBRS
  All rated entities   R-1   A   Stable
        (middle)   (high)    
Fitch
  All rated entities   F1   A+   Stable
Moody’s
  TRS and rated operating subsidiaries   Prime-1   A2   Negative (a)
Moody’s
  American Express Company   Prime-2   A3   Negative
S&P
  All rated entities   A-2   BBB+   Stable
 
 
 
(a) In November 2010, Moody’s revised its ratings outlook for TRS and rated operating subsidiaries from “Stable” to “Negative”.
 
Downgrades in the Company’s unsecured debt or asset securitization program’s securities ratings could result in higher interest expense on the Company’s unsecured debt and asset securitizations, as well as higher fees related to borrowings under its unused lines of credit. In addition to increased funding costs, declines in credit ratings could reduce the Company’s borrowing capacity in the unsecured debt and asset securitization capital markets. The Company believes the change in its funding mix, which now includes an increasing proportion of FDIC-insured (as defined below) U.S. retail deposits, should reduce the impact that credit rating downgrades would have on the Company’s funding capacity and costs. Downgrades to certain of the Company’s unsecured debt ratings that have occurred over the last several years have not caused a permanent increase in the Company’s borrowing costs or a reduction in its borrowing capacity.
 
SHORT-TERM FUNDING PROGRAMS
Short-term borrowings, such as commercial paper, are defined as any debt or time deposit with an original maturity of 12 months or less. The Company’s short-term funding programs are used primarily to meet working capital needs, such as managing seasonal variations in receivables balances. Short-term borrowings were fairly stable throughout 2010; however, the Company did reflect an increase in short-term borrowings in November and December 2010, due to the reclassification of certain book overdraft balances (i.e., primarily due to timing differences arising in the ordinary course of business). The amount of short-term borrowings issued in the future will depend on the Company’s funding strategy, its needs and market conditions.


42


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
The Company had the following short-term borrowings outstanding as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Billions)   2010     2009  
 
Credco commercial paper
  $ 0.6     $ 1.0  
Other short-term borrowings
    2.8       1.3  
                 
Total
  $ 3.4     $ 2.3  
 
 
 
Refer to Note 10 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further description of these borrowings.
 
The Company’s short-term borrowings as a percentage of total debt as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                 
   
    2010     2009  
 
Short-term borrowings as a percentage of total
debt (GAAP basis)
    4.9 %     4.3 %
 
 
 
As of December 31, 2010, the Company had $0.6 billion of commercial paper outstanding. Average commercial paper outstanding was $0.9 billion and $2.0 billion in 2010 and 2009, respectively.
American Express Credit Corporation’s (Credco) total back-up liquidity coverage, which includes its undrawn committed bank facilities, was in excess of 100 percent of its net short-term borrowings as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. The undrawn committed bank credit facilities were $5.7 billion as of December 31, 2010.
 
DEPOSIT PROGRAMS
The Company offers deposits within its American Express Centurion Bank and American Express Bank, FSB subsidiaries (together, the “Banks”). These funds are currently insured up to $250,000 per account through the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC). The Company’s ability to obtain deposit funding and offer competitive interest rates is dependent on the Banks’ capital levels. During the second quarter of 2009, the Company, through FSB, launched a direct deposit-taking program, Personal Savings from American Express, to supplement its distribution of deposit products through third-party distribution channels. This program makes FDIC-insured certificates of deposit (CDs) and high-yield savings account products available directly to consumers.
During 2010, within U.S. retail deposits the Company focused on continuing to grow both the number of accounts and the total balances outstanding on savings accounts and CDs that were sourced directly with consumers through Personal Savings from American Express. These accounts and balances grew during the year and financed the maturities of CDs issued through third-party distribution channels.
 
The Company held the following deposits as of December 31, 2010 and 2009:
 
                 
   
(Billions)   2010     2009  
 
U.S. retail deposits:
               
Savings accounts — Direct
  $ 7.7     $ 2.0  
Certificates of deposit: (a)
               
Direct
    1.1       0.3  
Third party
    11.4       14.8  
Sweep accounts — Third party
    8.9       8.5  
Other deposits
    0.6       0.7  
                 
Total customer deposits
  $ 29.7     $ 26.3  
 
 
 
(a) The average remaining maturity and average rate at issuance on the total portfolio of U.S. retail CDs, issued through direct and third-party programs, were 19.2 months and 2.5 percent, respectively.
 
LONG-TERM DEBT PROGRAMS
During 2010, the Company and its subsidiaries issued debt and asset securitizations with maturities ranging from 2 to 5 years. These amounts included approximately $0.9 billion of AAA-rated lending securitization certificates and $2.4 billion of unsecured debt across a variety of maturities and markets. During the year, the Company retained approximately $0.3 billion of subordinated securities, as the pricing and yields for these securities were not attractive compared to other sources of financing available to the Company.
 
The Company’s 2010 offerings are presented as follows:
 
         
   
(Billions)   Amount  
 
American Express Credit Corporation:
       
Fixed Rate Senior Note (2.75% coupon)
  $ 2.0  
Bank Credit Facilities Borrowings (a)
    0.4  
American Express Issuance Trust (b)
       
Floating Rate Senior Notes held by Conduit (c)
    2.5  
American Express Credit Account Master Trust (d)
       
Floating Rate Senior Notes (1-month LIBOR plus 25 basis points)
    0.9  
Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (1-month LIBOR plus 102 basis points on average)
    0.1  
         
Total
  $ 5.9  
 
 
 
(a) Interest accrues at 1-month Australian Bank Bill Swap Bid rate plus 29 basis points.
(b) Issuances from the Charge Trust do not include $0.2 billion of subordinated securities retained by American Express during the year.
(c) The Secured Borrowing Capacity section below provides further details about this issuance.
(d) Issuances from the Lending Trust do not include $0.1 billion of subordinated securities retained by American Express during the year.


43


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
ASSET SECURITIZATION PROGRAMS
The Company periodically securitizes cardmember receivables and loans arising from its card business, as the securitization market provides the Company with cost-effective funding. Securitization of cardmember receivables and loans is accomplished through the transfer of those assets to a trust, which in turn issues certificates or notes (securities) collateralized by the transferred assets to third-party investors. The proceeds from issuance are distributed to the Company, through its wholly owned subsidiaries, as consideration for the transferred assets.
The receivables and loans being securitized are reported as owned assets on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets and the related securities issued to third-party investors are reported as long-term debt. Notes 1 and 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements provide a description of the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010 and the impact on the Company’s accounting for its securitization activities.
Under the respective terms of the securitization trust agreements, the occurrence of certain events could result in payment of trust expenses, establishment of reserve funds, or in a worst-case scenario, early amortization of investor certificates. As of December 31, 2010, no triggering events have occurred that would have resulted in the funding of reserve accounts or early amortization.
The ability of issuers of asset-backed securities to obtain necessary credit ratings for their issuances has historically been based, in part, on qualification under the FDIC’s safe harbor rule for assets transferred in securitizations. In 2009 and 2010, the FDIC issued a series of changes to its safe harbor rule, with its new final rule for its securitization safe harbor, issued in 2010, requiring issuers to comply with a new set of requirements in order to qualify for the safe harbor. Issuances out of the Lending Trust are grandfathered under the new FDIC final rule. The trust for the Company’s cardmember charge receivable securitization (the Charge Trust) does not satisfy the criteria required to be covered by the FDIC’s new safe harbor rule, nor did it meet the requirements to be covered by the safe harbor rule existing prior to 2009. It was structured and continues to be structured such that the financial assets transferred to the Charge Trust would not be deemed to be property of the originating banks in the event the FDIC is appointed as a receiver or conservator of the originating banks. The Company has received confirmation from Moody’s, S&P and Fitch, which rate issuances from the Charge Trust, that they will continue to rate issuances from the trust in the same manner as they have historically, even though they do not satisfy the requirements to be covered by the FDIC’s safe harbor rule. Nevertheless, one or more of the rating agencies may ultimately conclude that in the absence of compliance with the safe harbor rule, the highest rating a Charge Trust security could receive would be based on the originating bank’s unsecured debt rating. If one or more rating agencies come to this conclusion, it could adversely impact the Company’s capacity and cost of using its Charge Trust as a source of funding for its business.
 
LIQUIDITY MANAGEMENT
The Company’s liquidity objective is to maintain access to a diverse set of cash, readily-marketable securities and contingent sources of liquidity, such that the Company can continuously meet expected future financing obligations and business requirements, even in the event it is unable to raise new funds under its regular funding programs. The Company has in place a Liquidity Risk Policy that sets out the Company’s approach to managing liquidity risk on an enterprise-wide basis.
The Company incurs and accepts liquidity risk arising in the normal course of offering its products and services. The liquidity risks that the Company is exposed to can arise from a variety of sources, and thus its liquidity management strategy includes a variety of parameters, assessments and guidelines, including but not limited to:
 
  Maintaining a diversified set of funding sources (refer to Funding Strategy section for more details);
 
  Maintaining unencumbered liquid assets and off-balance sheet liquidity sources; and
 
  Projecting cash inflows and outflows from a variety of sources and under a variety of scenarios, including contingent liquidity exposures such as unused cardmember lines of credit and collateral requirements for derivative transactions.
 
The Company’s current liquidity target is to have adequate liquidity in the form of excess cash and readily-marketable securities that are easily convertible into cash to satisfy all maturing long-term funding obligations for a 12-month period. In addition to its cash and readily-marketable securities, the Company maintains a variety of contingent liquidity resources, such as access to secured borrowings through its conduit facility and the Federal Reserve discount window as well as committed bank credit facilities.


44


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
As of December 31, 2010, the Company’s excess cash and readily-marketable securities available to fund long-term maturities were as follows:
 
         
   
(Billions)   Total  
 
Cash
  $ 20.3 (a)
Readily-marketable securities
    7.1 (b)
         
Cash and readily-marketable securities
    27.4  
Less:
       
Operating cash
    6.5 (c)
Short-term obligations outstanding
    0.6 (d)
         
Cash and readily-marketable securities available to fund maturities
  $ 20.3  
 
 
 
(a) Includes $16.7 billion of cash and cash equivalents and $3.6 billion held in other assets on the Consolidated Balance Sheet for certain forthcoming asset-backed securitization maturities in the first quarter of 2011.
(b) Consists of certain available-for-sale investment securities (U.S. Treasury and agency securities, and government-guaranteed debt) that are considered highly liquid.
(c) Cash on hand for day-to-day operations.
(d) Consists of commercial paper and U.S. retail CDs with original maturities of three and six months.
 
The upcoming approximate maturities of the Company’s long-term unsecured debt, debt issued in connection with asset-backed securitizations and long-term certificates of deposit are as follows:
 
                                 
   
(Billions)   Debt Maturities  
    Unsecured
    Asset-Backed
    Certificates of
       
2011 Quarters Ending:   Debt     Securitizations     Deposit     Total  
 
March 31
  $         —     $            3.2     $           2.0     $ 5.2  
June 30
    1.4       1.5       1.6       4.5  
September 30
    0.6       0.6       0.7       1.9  
December 31
    6.9             1.3       8.2  
                                 
Total
  $ 8.9     $ 5.3     $ 5.6     $ 19.8  
 
 
 
The Company’s financing needs for 2011 are expected to arise from these debt and deposit maturities as well as changes in business needs, including changes in outstanding cardmember loans and receivables as well as acquisition activities.
The Company considers various factors in determining the amount of liquidity it maintains, such as economic and financial market conditions, seasonality in business operations, growth in its businesses, potential acquisitions or dispositions, the cost and availability of alternative liquidity sources, and regulatory and credit rating agency considerations.
The yield the Company receives on its cash and readily-marketable securities is, generally, less than the interest expense on the sources of funding for these balances. Thus, the Company incurs substantial net interest costs on these amounts.
The level of net interest costs will be dependent on the size of its cash and readily-marketable securities holdings, as well as the difference between its cost of funding these amounts and their investment yields.
 
Securitized Borrowing Capacity
During December 2010, the Company entered into a $3 billion, 3-year committed, revolving, secured financing facility sponsored by and with liquidity backup provided by a syndicate of banks. The facility gives the Company the right to sell up to $3 billion face amount of eligible notes issued from the Charge Trust at any time through December 16, 2013. The purchasers’ commitments to fund any unfunded amounts under this facility are subject to the terms and conditions of, among other things, a purchase agreement among certain subsidiaries, the note purchasers and certain other parties. This facility will be used in the ordinary course of business to fund seasonal working capital needs, as well as further enhance the Company’s contingent funding resources. The borrowing cost of the facility includes a fixed facility fee. In addition, the drawn balance incurs a weighted average cost of funds to the participating banks plus 25 basis points. On December 16, 2010, the Company drew $2.5 billion from the facility, which was still outstanding as of December 31, 2010. The Company incurred an interest cost on the drawn amount that was equal to the weighted average cost of funds, which was approximately 1-month LIBOR, plus 25 basis points.
 
Federal Reserve Discount Window
The Banks are insured depository institutions that have the capability of borrowing from the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco, subject to the amount of qualifying collateral that they pledge. The Federal Reserve has indicated that both credit and charge card receivables are a form of qualifying collateral for secured borrowing made through the discount window. Whether specific assets will be considered qualifying collateral for secured borrowings made through the discount window, and the amount that may be borrowed against the collateral, remains in the discretion of the Federal Reserve.
The Company had approximately $32.5 billion as of December 31, 2010, in U.S. credit card loans and charge card receivables that could be sold over time through its existing securitization trusts, or pledged in return for secured borrowings to provide further liquidity, subject in each case to applicable market conditions and eligibility criteria.


45


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
Committed Bank Credit Facilities
The Company maintained committed bank credit facilities as of December 31, 2010, as follows:
 
                                         
   
    Parent
          Centurion
             
(Billions)   Company     Credco     Bank     FSB     Total (a)    
 
Committed (b)
  $ 0.8     $ 9.0     $ 0.4     $ 0.4     $ 10.6  
Outstanding
  $     $ 4.1     $     $     $ 4.1  
 
 
 
(a) Does not include the $3.0 billion Secured Borrowing Capacity described above of which $2.5 billion was drawn as of December 31, 2010.
(b) Committed lines were supplied by 32 financial institutions as of year end.
 
The Company’s committed facilities expire as follows:
 
         
   
(Billions)      
 
2011
  $ 3.3  
2012
    7.3  
         
Total
  $ 10.6  
 
 
 
The availability of the credit lines is subject to the Company’s compliance with certain financial covenants, including the maintenance by the Company of consolidated tangible net worth of at least $4.1 billion, the maintenance by Credco of a 1.25 ratio of combined earnings and fixed charges to fixed charges, and the compliance by the Banks with applicable regulatory capital adequacy guidelines. As of December 31, 2010, the Company’s consolidated tangible net worth was approximately $13.1 billion, Credco’s ratio of combined earnings and fixed charges to fixed charges was 1.54 and Centurion Bank and FSB each exceeded their regulatory capital adequacy guidelines. The drawn balance of $4.1 billion as of December 31, 2010 was used to fund the Company’s business activities in the normal course. The remaining capacity of the facilities mainly served to further enhance the Company’s contingent funding resources.
The Company’s committed bank credit facilities do not contain material adverse change clauses, which might otherwise preclude borrowing under the credit facilities. The facilities may not be terminated should there be a change in the Company’s credit rating.
In consideration of all the funding sources described above, the Company believes it would have access to liquidity to satisfy all maturing long-term funding obligations for at least a 12-month period in the event that access to the secured and unsecured fixed income capital markets is completely interrupted for that length of time. These events are not considered likely to occur.
 
Parent Company Funding
Parent Company long-term debt outstanding was $10.3 billion and $10.2 billion as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
The Parent Company is authorized to issue commercial paper. This program is supported by a $0.8 billion multi-purpose committed bank credit facility. The credit facility will expire in 2012. There was no Parent Company commercial paper outstanding during 2010 and 2009 and no borrowings have been made under its bank credit facility.
 
OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS AND CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS
The Company has identified both on and off-balance sheet transactions, arrangements, obligations and other relationships that may have a material current or future effect on its financial condition, changes in financial condition, results of operations, or liquidity and capital resources.


46


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS
The table below identifies transactions that represent contractually committed future obligations of the Company. Purchase obligations include agreements to purchase goods and services that are enforceable and legally binding on the Company and that specify significant terms, including: fixed or minimum quantities to be purchased; fixed, minimum or variable price provisions; and the approximate timing of the transaction.
                                         
   
    Payments due by year  
                      2016 and
       
(Millions)   2011     2012-2013     2014-2015     thereafter     Total (a)    
 
Long-term debt
  $ 14,263     $ 26,135     $ 14,530     $ 11,601     $ 66,529  
Interest payments on long-term debt (b)
    1,729       2,434       1,449       3,859       9,471  
Other long-term liabilities (c)
    98       33       8       63       202  
Operating lease obligations
    222       379       305       1,071       1,977  
Purchase obligations (d)
    421       97       56       48       622  
                                         
Total
  $ 16,733     $ 29,078     $ 16,348     $ 16,642     $ 78,801  
 
 
 
(a) The above table excludes approximately $1.4 billion of tax liabilities that have been recorded in accordance with GAAP governing the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes as inherent complexities and the number of tax years currently open for examination in multiple jurisdictions do not permit reasonable estimates of payments, if any, to be made over a range of years.
(b) Estimated interest payments were calculated using the effective interest rate in place as of December 31, 2010, and reflects the effect of existing interest rate swaps. Actual cash flows may differ from estimated payments.
(c) As of December 31, 2010, there were no minimum required contributions, and no contributions are currently planned, for the U.S. American Express Retirement Plan. For the U.S. American Express Supplemental Retirement Plan and non-U.S. defined benefit pension and postretirement benefit plans, contributions in 2011 are anticipated to be approximately $69 million, and this amount has been included within other long-term liabilities. Remaining obligations under defined benefit pension and postretirement benefit plans aggregating $633 million have not been included in the table above as the timing of such obligations is not determinable. Additionally, other long-term liabilities do not include $4.5 billion of Membership Rewards liabilities, which are not considered long-term liabilities as cardmembers in good standing can redeem points immediately, without restrictions, and because the timing of point redemption is not determinable.
(d) The purchase obligation amounts represent non-cancelable minimum contractual obligations by period under contracts that were in effect as of December 31, 2010. Termination fees are included in these amounts.
 
The Company also has certain contingent obligations to make payments under contractual agreements entered into as part of the ongoing operation of the Company’s business, primarily with co-brand partners. The contingent obligations under such arrangements were approximately $7.5 billion as of December 31, 2010.
In addition to the contractual obligations noted above, the Company has off-balance sheet arrangements that include guarantees, retained interests in structured investments, unconsolidated variable interest entities and other off-balance sheet arrangements as more fully described below.
 
GUARANTEES
The Company’s principal guarantees are associated with cardmember services to enhance the value of owning an American Express card. As of December 31, 2010, the Company had guarantees totaling approximately $68 billion related to cardmember protection plans, as well as other guarantees in the ordinary course of business that are within the scope of GAAP governing the accounting for guarantees. Refer to Note 13 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion regarding the Company’s guarantees.
 
CERTAIN OTHER OFF-BALANCE SHEET
ARRANGEMENTS
As of December 31, 2010, the Company had approximately $226 billion of unused credit available to cardmembers as part of established lending product agreements. Total unused credit available to cardmembers does not represent potential future cash requirements, as a significant portion of this unused credit will likely not be drawn. The Company’s charge card products have no pre-set limit and, therefore, are not reflected in unused credit available to cardmembers.
Refer to Note 24 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for discussion regarding the Company’s other off-balance sheet arrangements.


47


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
RISK MANAGEMENT
GOVERNANCE
The Audit and Risk Committee of the Board approves the Company’s Enterprise-wide Risk Management Policy and all its subordinate risk policies. The Enterprise-wide Risk Management Policy defines risk management objectives, risk appetite, risk limits and escalation triggers, and establishes the governance structure for managing risk. The Policy focuses on the major risks that are relevant to the Company given its business model — credit risk (individual and institutional), operational risk, funding and liquidity risk, market risk and reputational risk. Internal management committees, including the Enterprise Risk Management Committee (ERMC), chaired by the Company’s Chief Risk Officer, and the Asset-Liability Committee (ALCO), chaired by the Company’s Chief Financial Officer, are responsible for implementing the Policy across the Company. Additionally, in 2010, the Risk Management organization developed a group to independently validate models used to manage the Company’s risk.
 
CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT PROCESS
Credit risk is defined as loss due to obligor or counterparty default. Credit risks in the Company are divided into two broad categories: individual and institutional. Each has distinct risk management tools and metrics. Business units that create individual or institutional credit risk exposures of significant importance are supported by dedicated risk management teams, each led by a Chief Credit Officer. To preserve independence, Chief Credit Officers for all business units have a solid line reporting relationship to the Company’s Chief Risk Officer.
 
INDIVIDUAL CREDIT RISK
Individual credit risk arises principally from consumer and small business charge cards, credit cards, lines of credit, loans and prepaid products. These portfolios consist of millions of customers across multiple geographies, occupations, industries and levels of net worth. The Company benefits from the high-quality profile of its customers, which is driven by brand, premium customer servicing, product features and risk management capabilities which span underwriting, customer management and collections. Externally, the risk in these portfolios is correlated with broad economic trends, such as unemployment rates, GDP growth, and home values, which can affect customer liquidity.
The business unit leaders and their embedded Chief Credit Officers take the lead in managing this process. These Chief Credit Officers are guided by the Individual Credit Policy Committee which is responsible for implementation and enforcement of the Individual Credit Risk Policy. This policy is further supported by subordinate policies and operating manuals covering decision logic and processes of credit extension, including prospecting, new account approvals, authorizations, line management and collections. The subordinate risk policies and operating manuals are designed to assure consistent application of risk management principles and standardized reporting of asset quality and loss recognition.
Individual credit risk management is supported by sophisticated proprietary scoring and decision-making models that use the most up-to-date proprietary information on prospects and customers, such as spending and payment history, data feeds from credit bureaus and mortgage information. Additional data, such as new commercial variables, were integrated into the Company’s models in the early stages of the recent economic downturn to further mitigate small business risk. The Company has developed data-driven economic decision logic for each customer interaction to better serve its customers.
 
INSTITUTIONAL CREDIT RISK
Institutional credit risk arises principally within the Company’s Global Corporate Card Services, Merchant Services and Network Services, prepaid services, foreign exchange services businesses, and investment activities. Unlike individual credit, institutional credit risk is characterized by a lower loss frequency but higher severity. It is affected both by general economic conditions and by customer-specific events. The absence of large losses in any given year or over several years is not necessarily representative of the level of risk of institutional portfolios, given the infrequency of loss events in such portfolios.
Similar to Individual Credit Risk, business units taking institutional risks are supported by Chief Credit Officers. These officers are guided by the Institutional Risk Management Committee (IRMC) which is responsible for implementation and enforcement of the Policy and for providing guidance to the credit officers of each business unit with substantial institutional credit risk exposures. The committee, along with business unit Chief Credit Officers, make investment decisions in core risk capabilities, ensure proper implementation of the underwriting standards and contractual rights of risk mitigation, monitor risk exposures, and determine risk mitigation actions. The IRMC formally reviews large institutional exposures to ensure compliance with ERMC guidelines and procedures and escalates them to the ERMC as appropriate. At the same time, the IRMC provides guidance to business unit risk teams to optimize risk-adjusted returns on capital. A company-wide risk rating utility and a specialized airline risk group provide risk assessment of institutional obligors.
 
MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT PROCESS
Market risk is the risk to earnings or value resulting from movements in market prices. The Company’s market risk exposure is primarily generated by:
 
  Interest rate risk in its card, insurance and Travelers Cheque businesses, as well as its investment portfolios; and
 
  Foreign exchange risk in its operations outside the United States.


48


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
 
  Market Risk limits and escalation triggers within the Market Risk Policy are approved by ALCO and by the ERMC. Market risk is centrally monitored for compliance with policy and limits by the Market Risk Committee, which reports into the ALCO and is chaired by the Chief Market Risk Officer. Market risk management is also guided by policies covering the use of derivative financial instruments, funding and liquidity and investments.
The Company’s market exposures are in large part by-products of the delivery of its products and services. Interest rate risk arises through the funding of cardmember receivables and fixed-rate loans with variable-rate borrowings as well as through the risk to net interest margin from changes in the relationship between benchmark rates such as Prime and LIBOR.
Interest rate exposure within the Company’s charge card and fixed-rate lending products is managed by varying the proportion of total funding provided by short-term and variable-rate debt and deposits compared to fixed-rate debt and deposits. In addition, interest rate swaps are used from time to time to effectively convert fixed-rate debt to variable-rate or to convert variable-rate debt to fixed-rate. The Company may change the mix between variable-rate and fixed-rate funding based on changes in business volumes and mix, among other factors.
The Company does not engage in derivative financial instruments for trading purposes. Refer to Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of the Company’s derivative financial instruments.
The detrimental effect on the Company’s annual pretax earnings of a hypothetical 100 basis point increase in interest rates would be approximately $149 million ($97 million related to the U.S. dollar), based on the 2010 year-end positions. This effect, which is calculated using a static asset liability gapping model, is primarily determined by the volume of variable-rate funding of charge card and fixed-rate lending products for which the interest rate exposure is not managed by derivative financial instruments. As of year end 2010, the percentage of worldwide charge card accounts receivable and loans that were deemed to be fixed rate was 65 percent, or $63.7 billion, with the remaining 35 percent, or $34.3 billion, deemed to be variable rate.
The Company is also subject to market risk from changes in the relationship between the benchmark Prime rate that determines the yield on its variable-rate lending receivables and the benchmark LIBOR rate that determines the effective interest cost on a significant portion of its outstanding debt. Differences in the rate of change of these two indices, commonly referred to as basis risk, would impact the Company’s variable-rate U.S. lending net interest margins because the Company borrows at rates based on LIBOR but lends to its customers based on the Prime rate. The detrimental effect on the Company’s pretax earnings of a hypothetical 10 basis point decrease in the spread between Prime and 1 month LIBOR over the next 12 months is estimated to be $34 million. The Company currently has approximately $34.3 billion of Prime-based, variable-rate U.S. lending receivables that are funded with LIBOR-indexed debt, including asset securitizations.
Foreign exchange risk is generated by cardmember cross-currency charges, foreign subsidiary equity and foreign currency earnings in units outside the United States. The Company’s foreign exchange risk is managed primarily by entering into agreements to buy and sell currencies on a spot basis or by hedging this market exposure to the extent it is economically justified through various means, including the use of derivative financial instruments such as foreign exchange forward and cross-currency swap contracts, which can help “lock in” the value of the Company’s exposure to specific currencies.
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, foreign currency derivative instruments with total notional amounts of approximately $22 billion and $19 billion, respectively, were outstanding. Derivative hedging activities related to cross-currency charges, balance sheet exposures and foreign currency earnings generally do not qualify for hedge accounting; however, derivative hedging activities related to translation exposure of foreign subsidiary equity generally do.
With respect to cross-currency charges and balance sheet exposures, including related foreign exchange forward contracts outstanding, the effect on the Company’s earnings of a hypothetical 10 percent change in the value of the U.S. dollar would be immaterial as of December 31, 2010. With respect to earnings denominated in foreign currencies, the adverse impact on pretax income of a hypothetical 10 percent strengthening of the U.S. dollar related to anticipated overseas operating results for the next 12 months would be approximately $152 million as of December 31, 2010. With respect to translation exposure of foreign subsidiary equity, including related foreign exchange forward contracts outstanding, a hypothetical 10 percent strengthening in the U.S. dollar would result in an immaterial reduction in equity as of December 31, 2010.
The actual impact of interest rate and foreign exchange rate changes will depend on, among other factors, the timing of rate changes, the extent to which different rates do not move in the same direction or in the same direction to the same degree, and changes in the volume and mix of the Company’s businesses.
 
FUNDING & LIQUIDITY RISK MANAGEMENT
PROCESS
Liquidity risk is defined as the inability of the Company to meet its ongoing financial and business obligations as they become due at a reasonable cost. General principles and the overall framework for managing liquidity risk across the Company are defined in the Liquidity Risk Policy approved by the ALCO and Audit and Risk Committee of the Board. Liquidity risk is centrally managed by the Funding and Liquidity Committee, which reports into the ALCO. The Company’s liquidity objective is to maintain access to a diverse set of cash, readily-marketable securities and contingent sources of liquidity, such that the Company can continuously meet


49


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
expected future financing obligations and business requirements, even in the event it is unable to raise new funds under its regular funding programs. The Company balances the trade-offs between maintaining too much liquidity, which can be costly and limit financial flexibility, and having inadequate liquidity, which may result in financial distress during a liquidity event.
Liquidity risk is managed both at an aggregate company level and at the major legal entities in order to ensure that sufficient funding and liquidity resources are available in the amount and in the location needed in a stress event. The Funding and Liquidity Committee reviews the forecasts of the Company’s aggregate and subsidiary cash positions and financing requirements, approves the funding plans designed to satisfy those requirements under normal conditions, establishes guidelines to identify the amount of liquidity resources required and monitors positions and determines any actions to be taken. Liquidity planning also takes into account operating cash flexibilities.
 
OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT PROCESS
The Company defines operational risk as the risk of not achieving business objectives due to inadequate or failed processes or information systems, human error or the external environment (i.e., natural disasters) including losses due to failures to comply with laws and regulations. Operational risk is inherent in all business activities and can impact an organization through direct or indirect financial loss, brand damage, customer dissatisfaction, or legal and regulatory penalties.
The operational risk governance and the overall framework for managing operational risk across the Company are defined in the Operational Risk Policy approved by the Audit and Risk Committee of the Board of Directors. The Operational Risk Management Committee (ORMC) coordinates and oversees the operational risk mitigation efforts by Lead Operational Risk Officers in the business units and staff groups supported by the control groups.
In order to appropriately measure operational risk, the Company has developed a comprehensive operational risk framework. This framework assesses (i) risk events; (ii) root causes; (iii) impact and (iv) accountability. The impact on the Company is assessed from a financial, brand, regulatory and legal perspective. The operational risk model also assesses the frequency and likelihood that events may occur again so that the appropriate mitigation steps may be taken.
Additionally, the Company uses an operational risk framework to identify, measure, monitor and report inherent and emerging operational risks. This framework, supervised by the ORMC, consists of (a) operational risk event capture, (b) project office to coordinate control enhancements, (c) key risk indicators, and (d) process and entity-level risk self-assessments. The process risk self-assessment methodology is used to facilitate compliance with Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and is also used for non-financial operational risk self-assessments. During the entity risk self-assessment, senior leaders identify key operational risks in a business unit or staff group and determine the Company’s risk mitigation plans.
Managing operational risk is an important priority for the Company, and projects and investments are underway to increase operational risk management effectiveness, which will benefit both shareholders and customers.
 
REPUTATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT PROCESS
The Company defines reputational risk as the risk that negative publicity regarding the Company’s products, services, business practices, management, clients and partners, whether true or not, could cause a decline in the customer base, costly litigation, or revenue reductions.
The Company views protecting its reputation as core to its vision of becoming the world’s most respected service brand and fundamental to its long-term success.
General principles and the overall framework for managing reputational risk across the Company are defined in the Reputational Risk Management Policy. The Reputational Risk Management Committee (RRMC) is responsible for implementation and adherence to this policy, and for performing periodic assessment of the Company’s reputation and brand health based on internal and external assessments.
Business leaders across the Company are responsible for ensuring that reputation risk implications of transactions, business activities and management practices are appropriately considered and relevant subject matter experts are engaged as needed.


50


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
BUSINESS SEGMENT RESULTS
The Company is a global service company principally engaged in businesses comprising four reportable operating segments: U.S. Card Services (USCS), International Card Services (ICS), Global Commercial Services (GCS) and Global Network & Merchant Services (GNMS).
The Company considers a combination of factors when evaluating the composition of its reportable operating segments, including the results reviewed by the chief operating decision maker, economic characteristics, products and services offered, classes of customers, product distribution channels, geographic considerations (primarily U.S. versus non-U.S.) and regulatory environment considerations. Refer to Note 25 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for additional discussion of products and services by segment.
Results of the business segments essentially treat each segment as a stand-alone business. The management reporting process that derives these results allocates income and expense using various methodologies as described below.
Beginning in the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company completed its conversion to a new general ledger platform. This conversion enabled the Company to streamline its ledger reporting unit structure, resulting in a reconfiguration of intercompany accounts. These changes have the effect of altering intercompany balances among segments, thus altering reported total segment assets. Total segment assets as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 presented below reflect the changes described above. This conversion has no impact on segment results, segment capital or return on segment capital metrics.
Beginning in the first quarter of 2010, the Company made changes to the manner in which it allocates capital and the related interest expense charged to its reportable operating segments. The changes reflect modifications in allocation methodology that the Company believes more accurately reflect the funding and capital characteristics of its segments. The change to interest allocation also impacted the consolidated and segment reported net interest yield on cardmember loans. The segment results and net interest yield on cardmember loans for 2009 and 2008 have been revised for this change.
Beginning in 2009, the Company changed the manner by which it assesses the performance of its reportable operating segments to exclude the impact of its excess liquidity funding levels. Accordingly, the debt, cash and investment balances associated with the Company’s excess liquidity funding and the related net negative interest spread are not included within the reportable operating segment results (primarily USCS and GCS segments) and are reported in the Corporate & Other segment for 2010 and 2009. The segment results for 2008 have not been revised for this change.
As discussed more fully below, results are presented on a GAAP basis unless otherwise stated. Refer to “Glossary of Selected Terminology” for the definitions of certain key terms and related information appearing in the tables below.
 
TOTAL REVENUES NET OF INTEREST EXPENSE
The Company allocates discount revenue and certain other revenues among segments using a transfer pricing methodology. Segments earn discount revenue based on the volume of merchant business generated by cardmembers. Within the USCS, ICS and GCS segments, discount revenue reflects the issuer component of the overall discount rate; within the GNMS segment, discount revenue reflects the network and merchant component of the overall discount rate. Total interest income and net card fees are directly attributable to the segment in which they are reported.
 
PROVISIONS FOR LOSSES
The provisions for losses are directly attributable to the segment in which they are reported.
 
EXPENSES
Marketing and promotion expenses are reflected in each segment based on actual expenses incurred, with the exception of brand advertising, which is primarily reflected in the GNMS and USCS segments. Rewards and cardmember services expenses are reflected in each segment based on actual expenses incurred within each segment.
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses, such as professional services, occupancy and equipment and communications, reflect expenses incurred directly within each segment. In addition, expenses related to the Company’s support services, such as technology costs, are allocated to each segment based on support service activities directly attributable to the segment. Other overhead expenses, such as staff group support functions, are allocated to segments based on each segment’s relative level of pretax income. Financing requirements are managed on a consolidated basis. Funding costs are allocated based on segment funding requirements.
 
CAPITAL
Each business segment is allocated capital based on established business model operating requirements, risk measures and regulatory capital requirements. Business model operating requirements include capital needed to support operations and specific balance sheet items. The risk measures include considerations for credit, market and operational risk.
 
INCOME TAXES
Income tax provision (benefit) is allocated to each business segment based on the effective tax rates applicable to various businesses that make up the segment.


51


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
U.S. CARD SERVICES
 
SELECTED INCOME STATEMENT DATA GAAP BASIS PRESENTATION
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Revenues
                       
Discount revenue, net card fees and other
  $ 10,038     $ 9,105     $ 10,345  
                         
Securitization income, net (a)
          400       1,070  
                         
Interest income
    5,390       3,216       4,425  
Interest expense
    812       568       1,641  
                         
Net interest income
    4,578       2,648       2,784  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense
    14,616       12,153       14,199  
Provisions for losses
    1,591       3,769       4,389  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense after provisions for losses
    13,025       8,384       9,810  
                         
Expenses
                       
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services
    5,651       4,266       4,837  
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses
    3,837       3,532       3,630  
                         
Total
    9,488       7,798       8,467  
                         
Pretax segment income
    3,537       586       1,343  
Income tax provision
    1,291       175       365  
                         
Segment income
  $ 2,246     $ 411     $ 978  
 
 
 
(a) In accordance with new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company no longer reports securitization income, net in its income statement.
 
SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION
 
                         
   
As of or for the Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Billions, except percentages
                 
and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Card billed business
  $ 378.1     $ 339.4     $ 382.0  
Total cards-in-force (millions)
    39.9       39.5       44.2  
Basic cards-in-force (millions)
    29.7       29.5       32.9  
Average basic cardmember
spending (dollars) *
  $ 12,795     $ 10,957     $ 11,594  
U.S. Consumer Travel:
                       
Travel sales (millions)
  $ 3,116     $ 2,561     $ 3,113  
Travel commissions and fees/sales
    8.2 %     8.4 %     8.2 %
Total segment assets
  $ 91.3     $ 57.6 (f)   $ 77.8 (f)
Segment capital (millions)
  $ 7,411     $ 6,021     $ 4,199  
Return on average segment capital (a)
    35.4 %     8.0 %     22.3 %
Return on average tangible segment capital (a)
    38.1 %     8.7 %     23.6 %
                         
Cardmember receivables:
                       
Total receivables
  $ 19.2     $ 17.8     $ 17.8  
30 days past due as a % of total
    1.5 %     1.8 %     3.7 %
Average receivables
  $ 17.1     $ 16.1     $ 19.2  
Net write-off rate (b)
    1.6 %     3.8 %     3.6 %
                         
Cardmember loans — GAAP basis portfolio: (c)
                       
Total loans
  $ 51.6     $ 23.5     $ 32.7  
30 days past due loans as a % of total
    2.1 %     3.7 %     4.7 %
Average loans
  $ 49.8     $ 25.9     $ 36.7  
Net write-off rate
    5.8 %     9.1 %     5.8 %
Net interest income divided by average loans (d)(e)
    9.2 %     10.2 %     7.6 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans (d)
    9.4 %     9.4 %     8.4 %
                         
Cardmember loans — Managed basis portfolio: (c)
                       
Total loans
  $ 51.6     $ 52.6     $ 62.4  
30 days past due loans as a % of total
    2.1 %     3.7 %     4.7 %
Average loans
  $ 49.8     $ 54.9     $ 64.0  
Net write-off rate
    5.8 %     8.7 %     5.5 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans (d)
    9.4 %     10.1 %     9.0 %
 
 
 
 * Proprietary cards only.
(a) Return on average segment capital is calculated by dividing (i) one-year period segment income ($2.2 billion, $411 million and $978 million for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively) by (ii) one-year average segment capital ($6.4 billion, $5.1 billion and $4.4 billion for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively). Return on average tangible segment capital is computed in the same manner as return on average segment capital except the computation of average tangible segment capital excludes from average segment capital average goodwill and other intangibles of $459 million, $432 million and $243 million at December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The Company believes that return on average tangible segment capital is a useful measure of the profitability of its business.
(b) In the fourth quarter of 2008, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in USCS are written off to 180 days past due, consistent with applicable bank regulatory guidance. Previously, receivables were written off when 360 days past billing. The net write-offs for 2008 include approximately $341 million resulting from this write-off methodology change, which is not reflected in the table above. If the $341 million had been included in USCS write-offs, the net write-off rate would have been 5.4 percent for 2008.


52


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
(c) Refer to “Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” on page 54 for discussion of GAAP and non-GAAP presentation of the Company’s U.S. loan portfolio.
(d) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (f) on page 32.
(e) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (g) on page 32.
(f) Revised from prior disclosure due to the reclassification of certain intercompany accounts.
 
CALCULATION OF NET INTEREST YIELD ON CARDMEMBER LOANS (a)
 
                 
   
Years Ended December 31,
           
(Millions, except percentages or where indicated)   2010     2009  
 
Calculation based on 2010 and 2009 GAAP information: (b)
               
Net interest income
  $ 4,578     $ 2,648  
Average loans (billions)
  $ 49.8     $ 25.9  
Adjusted net interest income
  $ 4,684     $ 2,451  
Adjusted average loans (billions)
  $ 49.8     $ 26.0  
Net interest income divided by average loans (c)
    9.2 %     10.2 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans
    9.4 %     9.4 %
Calculation based on 2010 and 2009 managed information: (b)
               
Net interest income (b)
  $ 4,578     $ 5,501  
Average loans (billions)
  $ 49.8     $ 54.9  
Adjusted net interest income
  $ 4,684     $ 5,558  
Adjusted average loans (billions)
  $ 49.8     $ 55.0  
Net interest yield on cardmember loans
    9.4 %     10.1 %
 
 
 
(a) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Calculation of Net Interest Yield on Cardmember Loans”, footnote (a) on page 33.
(b) Refer to “Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” on page 54 for discussion of GAAP and non-GAAP presentation of the Company’s U.S. loan portfolio.
(c) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (g) on page 32.
 
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2010 — GAAP BASIS
The following discussion of USCS segment results of operations is presented on a GAAP basis.
USCS reported segment income of $2.2 billion for 2010, a $1.8 billion or greater than 100 percent increase from $411 million in 2009, which decreased $567 million or 58 percent from 2008.
 
Total Revenues Net of Interest Expense
In 2010, USCS total revenues net of interest expense increased $2.5 billion or 20 percent to $14.6 billion due to increases in discount revenue, net card fees and other, and interest income partially offset by increased interest expense.
Discount revenue, net card fees and other of $10.0 billion in 2010 increased $933 million or 10 percent from 2009, primarily due to billed business growth of 11 percent. The growth in billed business was driven by a 17 percent increase in average spending per proprietary basic cards-in-force. This line also reflects higher other commissions and fees, driven by the new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, which led to the inclusion of fees formerly recorded in securitization income, net and greater travel commissions and fees, partially offset by lower net card fees.
Interest income of $5.4 billion in 2010 was $2.2 billion or 68 percent higher than in 2009, principally due to the new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, partially offset by lower yields on cardmember loans.
Interest expense of $812 million in 2010 increased $244 million or 43 percent as compared to a year ago, reflecting higher expense related to the new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, a higher cost of funds and greater average cardmember receivable balances, partially offset by reduced funding requirements due to a reduction in average balances of cardmember loans.
Total revenues net of interest expense of $12.2 billion in 2009 were $2.0 billion or 14 percent lower than 2008 as a result of lower securitization income, net, decreased interest income and lower discount revenue, net card fees and other, partially offset by lower interest expense.
 
Provisions for Losses
Provisions for losses decreased $2.2 billion or 58 percent to $1.6 billion for 2010 compared to 2009, principally reflecting lower reserve requirements driven by improving cardmember loan and charge card credit trends, partially offset by the inclusion in 2010 of write-offs on securitized cardmember loans and a higher charge card provision. The lending net write-off rate decreased to 5.8 percent in 2010 from 9.1 percent in 2009. The charge card net write-off rate decreased to 1.6 percent in 2010 from 3.8 percent in 2009.
Provisions for losses decreased $620 million or 14 percent to $3.8 billion for 2009 compared to 2008 due to lower loan balances and improving credit indicators during the second half of 2009.
 
Expenses
During 2010, USCS expenses increased $1.7 billion or 22 percent to $9.5 billion, due to increased marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses, and salaries and employee benefits and total other operating expenses. Expenses in 2010, 2009 and 2008, included $55 million, $12 million and $30 million, respectively, of charges related to reengineering activities primarily related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives in 2010, 2009 and 2008 as previously discussed. Expenses in 2009 of $7.8 billion were $669 million or 8 percent lower than in 2008, due to lower marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses and lower salaries and employee benefits and total operating expenses.
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses increased $1.4 billion or 32 percent in 2010 to $5.7 billion, reflecting increased marketing and promotion expenses due to increased investment spending resulting from better credit and business trends in 2010 and higher rewards expense primarily due to greater rewards-related spending volumes and higher co-brand expense. Rewards expense


53


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
growth also reflects the benefit in 2009 of a revised, more restrictive redemption policy for accounts 30 days past due. Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses decreased $571 million or 12 percent in 2009 to $4.3 billion, due to lower rewards costs, reduced marketing and promotion expenses and the Delta-related charge to the Membership Reward balance sheet reserve in the fourth quarter of 2008.
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses of $3.8 billion in 2010 increased $305 million or 9 percent from 2009, primarily reflecting the higher reengineering-related costs, and higher technology development expenditures and other business building investments. Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses of $3.5 billion in 2009 decreased $98 million or 3 percent from 2008, reflecting the benefits from reengineering activities, lower net charges associated with these reengineering programs, the favorable impact in 2008 related to fair value hedge ineffectiveness and the costs related to the Delta contract extension in the fourth quarter of 2008.
 
Income Taxes
The effective tax rate was 36 percent for 2010 compared to 30 percent and 27 percent for 2009 and 2008, respectively. The rates for each of these years reflect the benefits from the resolution of certain prior years’ tax items and the relationship of recurring tax benefits to varying levels of pretax income.
 
Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation
For periods ended on or prior to December 31, 2009, the Company’s non-securitized cardmember loan and related debt performance information on a GAAP basis was referred to as the “owned” basis presentation. For such periods, the Company also provided information on a non-GAAP “managed” basis which should be read only as a supplement to GAAP information. Unlike the GAAP basis presentation, the managed basis presentation in such periods assumed there had been no off-balance sheet securitizations for the Company’s USCS segment (the Company does not currently securitize its international cardmember loans), resulting in the inclusion of all securitized and non-securitized cardmember loans and related debt in the Company’s performance information.
Under the GAAP basis presentation prior to securitization for the period ended on or prior to December 31, 2009, revenues and expenses from cardmember loans and related debt were reflected in the Company’s income statements in other commissions and fees, net interest income and provisions for losses for cardmember loans. At the time of a securitization transaction, the securitized cardmember loans were removed from the Company’s balance sheet, and the resulting gain on sale was reflected in securitization income, net, as well as a reduction to the provision for losses (credit reserves were no longer recorded for the cardmember loans once sold). Over the life of a securitization transaction, the Company recognized the net cash flow from interest and fee collections on interests sold to investors (the investors’ interests) after deducting interest paid on the investors’ certificates, credit losses, contractual service fees, other expenses and changes in the fair value of the interest-only strip (referred to as “excess spread”). These amounts, in addition to servicing fees and the non-credit components of the gains/(losses) from securitization activities, were reflected in securitization income, net. The Company also recognized interest income over the life of the securitization transaction related to the interest it retained (i.e., the seller’s interest). At the maturity of a securitization transaction, cardmember loans on the balance sheet increased, and the impact of the incremental required loss reserves was recorded in provisions for losses.
Under the managed basis presentation for periods ended on or prior to December 31, 2009, revenues and expenses related to securitized cardmember loans and related debt were reflected in other commissions and fees (included in discount revenue, net card fees and other), interest income, interest expense and provisions for losses. In addition, there was no securitization income, net as this presentation assumed no securitization transactions had occurred.
Historically, the Company included USCS information on a managed basis, as that was the manner in which the Company’s management viewed and managed the business. Management believed that a full picture of trends in the Company’s cardmember loans business could only be derived by evaluating the performance of both securitized and non-securitized cardmember loans, as the presentation of the entire cardmember loan portfolio was more representative of the economics of the aggregate cardmember relationships and ongoing business performance and related trends over time. The managed basis presentation also provided investors a more comprehensive assessment of the information necessary for the Company and investors to evaluate the Company’s market share.
The adoption of new GAAP on January 1, 2010 resulted in accounting for both the Company’s securitized and non-securitized cardmember loans in the Consolidated Financial Statements. As a result, the Company’s 2010 GAAP presentations and managed basis presentations prior to 2010 are generally comparable.


54


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
The following table sets forth cardmember loan portfolio financial information for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008. The December 31, 2010 financial information was determined in accordance with the new GAAP effective January 1, 2010. The December 31, 2009 and 2008 information includes the “owned” (GAAP) basis presentation, together with the adjustments for securitization activity to arrive at the “managed” (non-GAAP) basis presentation. For additional information, see “Cardmember Loan Portfolio Presentation” above.
 
U.S. CARD SERVICES
 
SELECTED FINANCIAL INFORMATION MANAGED BASIS PRESENTATION
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Discount revenue, net card fees and other:
                       
Reported for the period (GAAP)
  $ 10,038     $ 9,105     $ 10,345  
Securitization adjustments
          331       400  
                         
Managed discount revenue, net card fees and other
  $ 10,038     $ 9,436     $ 10,745  
                         
Interest income:
                       
Reported for the period (GAAP)
  $ 5,390     $ 3,216     $ 4,425  
Securitization adjustments
          3,097       3,512  
                         
Managed interest income
  $ 5,390     $ 6,313     $ 7,937  
                         
Securitization income, net: (a)
                       
Reported for the period (GAAP)
  $     $ 400     $ 1,070  
Securitization adjustments
          (400 )     (1,070 )
                         
Managed securitization income, net
  $     $     $  
                         
Interest expense:
                       
Reported for the period (GAAP)
  $ 812     $ 568     $ 1,641  
Securitization adjustments
          244       830  
                         
Managed interest expense
  $ 812     $ 812     $ 2,471  
                         
Provisions for losses:
                       
Reported for the period (GAAP)
  $ 1,591     $ 3,769     $ 4,389  
Securitization adjustments
          2,573 (b)     2,002 (b)
                         
Managed provisions for losses
  $ 1,591     $ 6,342 (b)   $ 6,391 (b)
 
 
 
(a) In accordance with new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company no longer reports securitization income, net in its income statement.
(b) Includes provisions for losses for off-balance sheet cardmember loans based on the same methodology as applied to on-balance sheet cardmember loans, except that any quarterly adjustment to reserve levels for on-balance sheet loans to address external environmental factors was not applied to adjust the provision expense for the securitized portfolio.
 
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2010 — MANAGED BASIS
The following discussion of USCS is on a managed basis.
Discount revenue, net card fees and other in 2010 increased $602 million or 6 percent to $10.0 billion, reflecting higher billed business volumes and increased travel revenues, partially offset by lower commissions and fees. Discount revenue, net card fees and other in 2009 decreased $1.3 billion or 12 percent to $9.4 billion, due to lower billed business volumes, reduced other commissions and fees, decreased net card fees, lower other revenues and reduced travel commissions and fees.
Interest income in 2010 of $5.4 billion decreased by $923 million or 15 percent, due to a decline in the average loan balance and a lower portfolio yield driven by higher payment rates, lower revolving levels and the CARD Act, partially offset by repricing initiatives during 2009 and 2010. Interest income in 2009 of $6.3 billion decreased by $1.6 billion or 20 percent due to a decline in the average managed lending balance and a lower portfolio yield, offset by the benefits of certain repricing initiatives during 2009.
Interest expense in 2010 remained flat at $812 million, due to an increase in the cost of funds and higher average cardmember receivable balances, offset by reduced funding requirements due to a lower average cardmember loan balance in the managed portfolio. In 2009, interest expense decreased $1.7 billion or 67 percent to $812 million due to a lower market interest rate-driven cost of funds and lower average managed cardmember loans and receivable balances, as well as the movement of liquidity-related interest expense to the Corporate & Other segment.
Provisions for losses decreased $4.8 billion or 75 percent to $1.6 billion in 2010, due to improving cardmember loan and charge card credit performance and a lower average loan balance. The lending net write-off rate was 5.8 percent in 2010 versus 8.7 percent in 2009. Provisions for losses decreased 1 percent in 2009, driven by a lower average loan and receivable balance and improved charge card credit performance, partially offset by a higher lending write-off level versus 2008.
 
INTERNATIONAL CARD SERVICES
 
SELECTED INCOME STATEMENT DATA
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Revenues
                       
Discount revenue, net card fees and other
  $ 3,685     $ 3,447     $ 3,782  
                         
Interest income
    1,393       1,509       1,720  
Interest expense
    428       427       770  
                         
Net interest income
    965       1,082       950  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense
    4,650       4,529       4,732  
Provisions for losses
    392       1,211       1,030  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense after provisions for losses
    4,258       3,318       3,702  
                         
Expenses
                       
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services
    1,612       1,221       1,453  
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses
    2,008       1,821       2,145  
                         
Total
    3,620       3,042       3,598  
                         
Pretax segment income
    638       276       104  
Income tax provision (benefit)
    72       (56 )     (217 )
                         
Segment income
  $ 566     $ 332     $ 321  
 
 


55


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION
 
                         
   
As of or for the Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Billions, except percentages
                 
and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Card billed business
  $ 107.9     $ 94.9     $ 106.1  
Total cards-in-force (millions)
    15.0       15.0       16.3  
Basic cards-in-force (millions)
    10.4       10.5       11.4  
Average basic cardmember
spending (dollars) *
  $ 10,366     $ 8,758     $ 9,292  
International Consumer Travel:
                       
Travel sales (millions)
  $ 1,126     $ 985     $ 1,267  
Travel commissions and fees/sales
    8.0 %     8.6 %     8.1 %
Total segment assets
  $ 25.3     $ 23.0 (f)   $ 20.7 (f)
Segment capital (millions)
  $ 2,199     $ 2,262     $ 2,240  
Return on average segment capital (a)
    26.5 %     15.1 %     14.7 %
Return on average tangible segment capital (a)
    36.7 %     20.1 %     19.6 %
                         
Cardmember receivables:
                       
Total receivables
  $ 6.7     $ 5.9     $ 5.6  
90 days past billing as a % of total (b)
    1.0 %     2.1 %     3.1 %
Net loss ratio (as a % of charge volume) (b)(c)
    0.24 %     0.36 %     0.24 %
                         
Cardmember loans:
                       
Total loans
  $ 9.3     $ 9.2     $ 9.5  
30 days past due loans as a % of total
    2.3 %     3.3 %     3.6 %
Average loans
  $ 8.6     $ 8.9     $ 10.9  
Net write-off rate
    4.6 %     6.8 %     4.8 %
Net interest income divided by average loans (d)(e)
    11.2 %     12.2 %     8.7 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans (d)
    11.1 %     12.2 %     9.4 %
 
 
 
 * Proprietary cards only.
(a) Return on average segment capital is calculated by dividing (i) one-year period segment income ($566 million, $332 million and $321 million for December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively) by (ii) one-year average segment capital ($2.1 billion, $2.2 billion and $2.2 billion for December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively). Return on average tangible segment capital is computed in the same manner as return on average segment capital except the computation of average tangible segment capital excludes from average segment capital average goodwill and other intangibles of $592 million, $551 million and $544 million as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Management believes that return on average tangible segment capital is a useful measure of the profitability of its business.
(b) Effective January 1, 2010, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in ICS are written off to when they are 180 days past due or earlier, consistent with applicable bank regulatory guidance and the write-off methodology adopted for USCS in the fourth quarter of 2008. Previously, receivables were written off when they were 360 days past billing or earlier. Therefore, the net write-offs for the first quarter of 2010 include net write-offs of approximately $60 million for ICS resulting from this write-off methodology change, which increased the net loss ratio and decreased the 90 days past billing metric for this segment, but did not have a substantial impact on provisions for losses.
(c) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (c) on page 32.
(d) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (f) on page 32.
(e) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (g) on page 32.
(f) Refer to “U.S. Card Services — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (f) on page 52.
 
CALCULATION OF NET INTEREST YIELD ON CARDMEMBER LOANS (a)
 
                 
   
Years Ended December 31,
           
(Millions, except percentage and where indicated)   2010     2009  
 
Net interest income
  $ 965     $ 1,082  
Average loans (billions)
  $ 8.6     $ 8.9  
Adjusted net interest income
  $ 946     $ 1,087  
Adjusted average loans (billions)
  $ 8.5     $ 8.9  
Net interest income divided by average loans (b)
    11.2 %     12.2 %
Net interest yield on cardmember loans
    11.1 %     12.2 %
 
 
 
(a) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Calculation of Net Interest Yield on Cardmember Loans”, footnote (a) on page 33.
(b) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (g) on page 32.
 
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2010
ICS reported segment income of $566 million for 2010, a $234 million or 70 percent increase from $332 million in 2009, which increased $11 million or 3 percent from 2008. The increase in segment income for 2010 is primarily due to an increase in total revenues net of interest expense and a decrease in provisions for losses, partially offset by an increase in expenses. A significant portion of ICS segment income in 2009 and 2008 is attributable to the Company’s internal tax allocation process. See further discussion in the Income Taxes section below.
 
Total Revenues Net of Interest Expense
In 2010, ICS total revenues net of interest expense increased $121 million or 3 percent to $4.7 billion compared to 2009 due to higher discount revenue, net card fees and other, partially offset by lower interest income.
Discount revenue, net card fees, and other increased $238 million or 7 percent to $3.7 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, driven primarily by the higher level of cardmember spending and greater foreign-exchange conversion revenues. The 14 percent increase in billed business in 2010 reflected an 18 percent increase in average spending per proprietary basic cards-in-force, partially offset by a 1 percent decrease in basic cards-in-force. Assuming no changes in foreign currency exchange rates from 2009 to 2010, billed business and average spending per proprietary basic cards-in-force increased 9 percent and 14 percent, respectively; volumes increased across the major geographic regions, including an increase of 13 percent in Latin America, 10 percent in Asia Pacific, and 8 percent in both Canada and Europe 2 .
 
2    Refer to footnote 1 on page 33 under Consolidated Results of Operations for the Three Years Ended December 31, 2010 relating to changes in foreign exchange rates.


56


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
Interest income declined $116 million or 8 percent to $1.4 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, as a lower yield on cardmember loans and a lower average loan balance were partially offset by higher lending card fees.
Interest expense of $428 million in 2010 was flat as compared to 2009, as lower average loan balances offset higher average receivable levels.
Total revenues net of interest expense of $4.5 billion in 2009 were $203 million or 4 percent lower than 2008 due to lower discount revenue, net card fees and other and decreased interest income, partially offset by lower interest expense.
 
Provisions for Losses
Provisions for losses decreased $819 million or 68 percent to $392 million in 2010 compared to 2009, primarily reflecting lower reserve requirements due to improving cardmember loan and charge card credit trends. The charge card net loss ratio (as a percentage of charge volume) was 0.24 percent in 2010 versus 0.36 percent last year. The lending net write-off rate was 4.6 percent in 2010 versus 6.8 percent last year.
Provisions for losses increased $181 million or 18 percent to $1.2 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, primarily reflecting a higher lending reserve level.
 
Expenses
During 2010, ICS expenses increased $578 million or 19 percent to $3.6 billion compared to 2009, due to higher marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services and increased salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses. Expenses in 2010, 2009 and 2008, included $19 million, $4 million and $83 million, respectively, of reengineering costs primarily related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives in 2010, 2009 and 2008 as previously discussed. Expenses in 2009 of $3.0 billion were $556 million or 15 percent lower than 2008, due to lower marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services and decreased salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses.
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses increased $391 million or 32 percent to $1.6 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, primarily due to higher marketing and promotion expenses and greater volume-related rewards costs. Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses decreased $232 million or 16 percent to $1.2 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, reflecting reduced marketing and promotion expenses through the first nine months of 2009 and lower reward costs.
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses increased $187 million or 10 percent to $2.0 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, reflecting the higher net reengineering costs in 2010, higher technology development expenditures, increased investments in sales-force, closing costs related to the acquisition of Loyalty Partner and other business building investments. Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses decreased $324 million or 15 percent to $1.8 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, primarily due to benefits from the Company’s reengineering activities and lower net charges during 2009 related to reengineering initiatives.
 
Income Taxes
The effective tax rate was 11 percent in 2010 versus negative 20 percent in 2009 and negative 209 percent in 2008. The tax rate in 2010 reflects a benefit from the resolution of certain prior years’ tax items. In addition, the tax rates in each of the periods primarily reflect the impact of recurring tax benefits on varying levels of pretax income. This segment reflects the favorable impact of the consolidated tax benefit related to its ongoing funding activities outside the U.S., which is allocated to ICS under the Company’s internal tax allocation process.
 
GLOBAL COMMERCIAL SERVICES
 
SELECTED INCOME STATEMENT DATA
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Revenues
                       
Discount revenue, net card fees and other
  $ 4,622     $ 4,158     $ 5,082  
                         
Interest income
    7       5       6  
Interest expense
    227       180       471  
                         
Net interest expense
    (220 )     (175 )     (465 )
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense
    4,402       3,983       4,617  
Provisions for losses
    158       177       231  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense after provisions for losses
    4,244       3,806       4,386  
                         
Expenses
                       
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services
    442       332       377  
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses
    3,041       2,969       3,395  
                         
Total
    3,483       3,301       3,772  
                         
Pretax segment income
    761       505       614  
Income tax provision
    287       155       160  
                         
Segment income
  $ 474     $ 350     $ 454  
 
 


57


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION
 
                         
   
As of or for the Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Billions, except percentages
                 
and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Card billed business
  $ 132.8     $ 111.2     $ 129.2  
Total cards-in-force (millions)
    7.1       7.1       7.1  
Basic cards-in-force (millions)
    7.1       7.1       7.1  
Average basic cardmember
spending (dollars) *
  $ 18,927     $ 15,544     $ 18,527  
Global Corporate Travel:
                       
Travel sales
  $ 17.5     $ 14.6     $ 21.0  
Travel commissions and fees/sales
    8.2 %     8.8 %     7.8 %
Total segment assets
  $ 18.9     $ 16.1 (d)   $ 25.2 (d)
Segment capital (millions)
  $ 3,650     $ 3,719     $ 3,611  
Return on average segment capital (a)
    13.2 %     9.7 %     14.1 %
Return on average tangible segment capital (a)
    28.6 %     20.8 %     30.5 %
Cardmember receivables:
                       
Total receivables
  $ 11.3     $ 9.8     $ 9.4  
90 days past billing as a % of total (b)
    0.8 %     1.4 %     2.7 %
Net loss ratio (as a % of charge volume) (b)(c)
    0.11 %     0.19 %     0.13 %
 
 
 
 * Proprietary cards only.
(a) Return on average segment capital is calculated by dividing (i) one-year period segment income ($474 million, $350 million and $454 million for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively) by (ii) one-year average segment capital ($3.6 billion, $3.6 billion and $3.2 billion for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively). Return on average tangible segment capital is computed in the same manner as return on average segment capital except the computation of average tangible segment capital excludes from average segment capital average goodwill and other intangibles of $1.9 billion, $1.9 billion and $1.7 billion at December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The Company believes the return on average tangible segment capital is a useful measure of the profitability of its business.
(b) Effective January 1, 2010, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in Global Commercial Services are written off to when they are 180 days past due or earlier, consistent with applicable bank regulatory guidance and the write-off methodology adopted for U.S. Card Services in the fourth quarter of 2008. Previously, receivables were written off when they were 360 days past billing or earlier. Therefore, the net write-offs for the first quarter of 2010 include net write-offs of approximately $48 million for Global Commercial Services resulting from this write-off methodology change, which increased the net loss ratio and decreased the 90 days past billing metric for this segment, but did not have a substantial impact on provisions for losses. The metrics for prior periods have not been revised for this change as it was deemed immaterial.
(c) Refer to “Consolidated Results of Operations — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote(c) on page 32.
(d) Refer to “U.S. Card Services — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (f) on page 52.
 
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2010
GCS reported segment income of $474 million for 2010, a $124 million or 35 percent increase from $350 million in 2009, which decreased $104 million or 23 percent from 2008.
 
Total Revenues Net of Interest Expense
In 2010, GCS total revenues net of interest expense increased $419 million or 11 percent to $4.4 billion due to increased discount revenue, net card fees, and other and higher interest income, partially offset by higher interest expense.
Discount revenue, net card fees, and other revenues increased $464 million or 11 percent to $4.6 billion in 2010 primarily driven by higher cardmember spending and greater travel commissions and fees. The 19 percent increase in billed business in 2010 was driven by the 22 percent increase in average spending per proprietary basic cards-in-force. Adjusting for the impact of foreign exchange translation, billed business and average spending per proprietary basic cards-in-force grew 19 percent and 21 percent, respectively 3 , volume increased 19 percent within the United States, compared to an increase of 18 percent outside the United States 3 .
Interest income increased $2 million or 40 percent to $7 million in 2010 compared to 2009.
Interest expense increased $47 million or 26 percent to $227 million in 2010 compared to 2009 driven by increased funding requirements due to a higher average receivable balance and a higher cost of funds.
Total revenues net of interest expense of $4.0 billion in 2009 decreased $634 million or 14 percent compared to 2008 due to decreased discount revenue, net card fees, and other and lower interest income, partially offset by lower interest expense.
 
Provisions for Losses
Provisions for losses decreased $19 million or 11 percent to $158 million in 2010 compared to 2009, driven by improved credit performance within the underlying portfolio. The charge card net loss ratio (as a percentage of charge volume) was 0.11 percent in 2010 versus 0.19 percent last year. Provisions for losses decreased $54 million or 23 percent to $177 million in 2009 compared to 2008, reflecting improved credit trends as 2009 progressed.
 
 
  3   Refer to footnote 1 on page 33 under Consolidated Results of Operations for the Three Years Ended December 31, 2010 relating to changes in foreign exchange rates.


58


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
Expenses
During 2010, GCS expenses increased $182 million or 6 percent to $3.5 billion, due to higher marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expense and increased salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses. Expenses in 2010, 2009 and 2008, included $32 million, $101 million and $138 million, respectively, of reengineering costs, primarily reflecting the Company’s reengineering initiatives in 2010, 2009 and 2008 as previously discussed. Expenses in 2009 of $3.3 billion decreased $471 million or 12 percent, reflecting a reduction in salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses, as well as lower rewards costs, lower net charges associated with reengineering initiatives in 2009, and the Delta-related increase in the Membership Rewards balance sheet reserve in the fourth quarter of 2008.
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses increased $110 million or 33 percent to $442 million in 2010 compared to 2009, reflecting higher rewards costs and greater marketing and promotion expenses. Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses decreased $45 million or 12 percent to $332 million in 2009 compared to 2008, primarily reflecting lower rewards costs in 2009 and the Delta-related increase in the Membership Rewards balance sheet reserve in the fourth quarter of 2008.
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses increased $72 million or 2 percent to $3.0 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, as higher travel volume-driven personnel costs, greater incentive-based sales-force costs, as well as increased technology development expenditures and other business-building investments were partially offset by the lower reengineering-related costs. Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses decreased $426 million or 13 percent to $3.0 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, reflecting the benefits from the Company’s reengineering initiatives, partially offset by lower net charges associated with these programs during 2009.
 
Income Taxes
The effective tax rate was 38 percent in 2010 versus 31 percent in 2009 and 26 percent in 2008. The higher 2010 rate reflects the impact of increasing the valuation allowance against deferred tax assets associated with certain non-U.S. travel operations.
 
GLOBAL NETWORK & MERCHANT
SERVICES
 
SELECTED INCOME STATEMENT DATA
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Revenues
                       
Discount revenue, net card fees and other
  $ 4,169     $ 3,602     $ 3,863  
                         
Interest income
    4       1        
Interest expense
    (200 )     (177 )     (328 )
                         
Net interest income
    204       178       328  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense
    4,373       3,780       4,191  
Provisions for losses
    61       135       127  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense after provisions for losses
    4,312       3,645       4,064  
                         
Expenses
                       
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services
    755       521       553  
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses
    1,908       1,679       1,932  
                         
Total
    2,663       2,200       2,485  
                         
Pretax segment income
    1,649       1,445       1,579  
Income tax provision
    586       508       529  
                         
Segment income
  $ 1,063     $ 937     $ 1,050  
 
 
 
SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION
 
                         
   
As of or for the Years Ended December 31,
                 
(Billions, except percentages
                 
and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Global Card billed business
  $ 713.3     $ 619.8     $ 683.3  
Global Network & Merchant Services:
                       
Total segment assets
  $ 13.6     $ 12.3 (c)   $ 7.2 (c)
Segment capital (millions)
  $ 1,922     $ 1,443     $ 1,238  
Return on average segment capital (a)
    63.9 %     65.7 %     98.4 %
Return on average tangible segment capital (a)
    66.7 %     67.4 %     101.8 %
Global Network Services: (b)
                       
Card billed business
  $ 91.7     $ 71.8     $ 67.4  
Total cards-in-force (millions)
    29.0       26.3       24.8  
 
 
 
(a) Return on average segment capital is calculated by dividing (i) segment income ($1.1 billion, $937 million and $1.1 billion for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively) by (ii) average segment capital ($1.7 billion, $1.4 billion and $1.1 billion for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively). Return on average tangible segment capital is computed in the same manner as return on average segment capital except the computation of average tangible segment capital excludes from average segment capital average goodwill and other intangibles of $70 million, $36 million and $35 million as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The Company believes the return on average tangible segment capital is a useful measure of the profitability of its business.
(b) For non-proprietary retail co-brand partners, Global Network Services metrics exclude cardmember accounts which have no out-of-store spend activity during the prior 12-month period.
(c) Refer to “U.S. Card Services — Selected Statistical Information”, footnote (f) on page 52.


59


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
 
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE THREE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2010
GNMS reported segment income of $1.1 billion in 2010, a $126 million or 13 percent increase from $937 million in 2009, which decreased $113 million or 11 percent from 2008.
 
Total Revenues Net of Interest Expense
GNMS total revenues net of interest expense increased $593 million or 16 percent to $4.4 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, due to increased discount revenue, net card fees and other and increased interest expense credit.
Discount revenue, fees and other increased $567 million or 16 percent to $4.2 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, primarily due to an increase in merchant-related revenues, driven by a 15 percent increase in global card billed business, as well as higher volume driven GNS-related revenues.
Interest expense credit increased $23 million or 13 percent to $200 million in 2010 compared to 2009, due to a higher funding-driven interest credit related to internal transfer pricing, which recognizes the merchant services’ accounts payable-related funding benefit.
Total revenues net of interest expense of $3.8 billion in 2009 decreased $411 million or 10 percent compared to 2008 due to decreased discount revenue, net card fees and other and decreased interest expense credit.
 
Provisions for Losses
Provisions for losses decreased $74 million or 55 percent to $61 million in 2010 compared to 2009, primarily due to lower merchant-related debit balances. Provisions for losses in 2009 increased $8 million or 6 percent to $135 million compared to 2008, primarily driven by the higher provisions in GNS.
 
Expenses
During 2010, GNMS expenses increased $463 million or 21 percent to $2.7 billion compared to 2009 due to higher salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses and an increase in marketing and promotion expenses. Expenses in 2009 of $2.2 billion were $285 million or 11 percent lower than 2008, due to lower salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses and a decrease in marketing and promotion expenses.
Marketing and promotion expenses increased $234 million or 45 percent to $755 million in 2010 compared to 2009, reflecting higher network, merchant-related and brand marketing investments. Marketing and promotion expenses decreased 6 percent in 2009 to $521 million compared to 2008, reflecting lower brand and merchant-related marketing costs.
Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses increased $229 million or 14 percent to $1.9 billion in 2010 compared to 2009, primarily due to greater third party merchant sales-force commissions, higher technology development expenditures, and other business building investments. Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses decreased $253 million or 13 percent to $1.7 billion in 2009 compared to 2008, primarily reflecting the benefits from the Company’s reengineering initiatives.
 
Income Taxes
The effective tax rate was 36 percent in 2010, 35 percent in 2009 and 34 percent in 2008.
 
CORPORATE & OTHER
Corporate & Other had net expense of $292 million and net income of $107 million and $68 million in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. Results in 2010, 2009 and 2008 reflected $372 million, $372 million and $186 million of after-tax income related to the MasterCard litigation settlement, respectively, and $172 million of after-tax income for all three years related to the Visa litigation settlement. Reengineering costs after-tax of $2 million, $35 million and $108 million, for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, primarily related to the Company’s reengineering initiatives previously discussed.
Net expense in 2010 reflected higher incentive compensation and benefit reinstatement-related expenses, and various investments in the Global Prepaid business and Enterprise Growth initiatives.
Net income in 2009 reflected $135 million of after-tax income related to the ICBC sale, a $135 million benefit representing the correction of an error related to the accounting for cumulative translation adjustments associated with a net investment in foreign subsidiaries and a $45 million benefit resulting from the change in fair value of certain forward exchange contracts.
Net income in 2008 reflected a $19 million after-tax charge primarily relating to AEB operations retained by the Company in the first quarter of 2008.
 
EXPOSURE TO AIRLINE INDUSTRY
The Company has multiple co-brand relationships and rewards partners, of which relationships with airlines are one of the most important and valuable. Refer to Note 22 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of these relationships. Refer also to Note 8 for further discussion of prepaid miles acquired from certain airlines.


60


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
OTHER REPORTING MATTERS
 
ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS
See the Recently Issued Accounting Standards section of Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
 
GLOSSARY OF SELECTED TERMINOLOGY
Adjusted average loans  — Represents average cardmember loans on a GAAP or managed basis, as applicable, in each case excluding the impact of deferred card fees, net of deferred direct acquisition costs of cardmember loans.
Adjusted net interest income  — Represents net interest income allocated to the Company’s cardmember loans portfolio on a GAAP or managed basis, as applicable, in each case excluding the impact of card fees on loans and balance transfer fees attributable to the Company’s cardmember loans.
Asset securitizations  — Asset securitization involves the transfer and sale of receivables or loans to a special purpose entity created for the securitization activity, typically a trust. The trust, in turn, issues securities, commonly referred to as asset-backed securities, that are secured by the transferred receivables or loans. The trust uses the proceeds from the sale of such securities to pay the purchase price for the underlying receivables or loans.
Average discount rate — This calculation is designed to reflect pricing at merchants accepting general purpose American Express cards. It represents the percentage of billed business (both proprietary and Global Network Services) retained by the Company from merchants it acquires, prior to payments to third parties unrelated to merchant acceptance.
Basic cards-in-force  — Proprietary basic consumer cards-in-force includes basic cards issued to the primary account owner and does not include additional supplemental cards issued on that account. Proprietary basic small business and corporate cards-in-force include basic and supplemental cards issued to employee cardmembers. Non-proprietary basic cards-in-force includes all cards that are issued and outstanding under network partnership agreements, except for retail co-brand cardmember accounts which have no out-of-store spend activity during the prior 12-month period.
Billed business  — Includes activities (including cash advances) related to proprietary cards, cards issued under network partnership agreements (non-proprietary billed business) and certain insurance fees charged on proprietary cards. In-store spend activity within retail co-brand portfolios in Global Network Services, from which the Company earns no revenue, is not included in non-proprietary billed business. Card billed business is reflected in the United States or outside the United States based on where the cardmember is domiciled.
Capital asset pricing model  — Generates an appropriate discount rate using internal and external inputs to value future cash flows based on the time value of money and the price for bearing uncertainty inherent in an investment.
Capital ratios  — Represents the minimum standards established by the regulatory agencies as a measure to determine whether the regulated entity has sufficient capital to absorb on- and off-balance sheet losses beyond current loss accrual estimates.
Card acquisition  — Primarily represents the issuance of new cards to either new or existing cardmembers through marketing and promotion efforts.
Cardmember  — The individual holder of an issued American Express branded charge or credit card.
Cardmember loans  — Represents the outstanding amount due from cardmembers for charges made on their American Express credit cards, as well as any interest charges and card-related fees. Cardmember loans also include balances with extended payment terms on certain charge card products and are net of unearned revenue.
Cardmember receivables  — Represents the outstanding amount due from cardmembers for charges made on their American Express charge cards as well as any card-related fees.
Charge cards  — Represents cards that generally carry no pre-set spending limits and are primarily designed as a method of payment and not as a means of financing purchases. Charge cardmembers generally must pay the full amount billed each month. No finance charges are assessed on charge cards. Each charge card transaction is authorized based on its likely economics reflecting a customer’s most recent credit information and spend patterns.
Credit cards  — Represents cards that have a range of revolving payment terms, grace periods, and rate and fee structures.
Discount revenue  — Represents revenue earned from fees charged to merchants with whom the Company has entered into a card acceptance agreement for processing cardmember transactions. The discount fee generally is deducted from the Company’s payment reimbursing the merchant for cardmember purchases. Such amounts are reduced by contra-revenue such as payments to third-party card issuing partners, cash-back reward costs and corporate incentive payments.
Interest expense  — Interest expense includes interest incurred primarily to fund cardmember loans, charge card product receivables, general corporate purposes, and liquidity needs, and is recognized as incurred. Interest expense is divided principally into three categories: (i) deposits, which primarily relates to interest expense on deposits taken from customers and institutions, (ii) short-term borrowings, which primarily relates to interest expense on commercial paper, federal funds purchased, bank overdrafts and other short-term borrowings, and (iii) long-term debt, which primarily relates to interest expense on the Company’s long-term debt.
Interest income  — Interest income includes (i) interest and fees on loans, (ii) interest and dividends on investment securities and (iii) interest income on deposits with banks and others.
Interest and fees on loans includes interest on loans which is assessed using the average daily balance method for loans owned. These amounts are recognized based upon the principal amount outstanding in accordance with the terms of


61


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
the applicable account agreement until the outstanding balance is paid or written-off. Loan fees are deferred and recognized in interest income on a straight-line basis over the 12-month card membership period, net of deferred direct card acquisition costs and a reserve for projected membership cancellation.
Interest and dividends on investment securities primarily relates to the Company’s performing fixed-income securities. Interest income is accrued as earned using the effective interest method, which adjusts the yield for security premiums and discounts, fees and other payments, so that the related investment security recognizes a constant rate of return on the outstanding balance throughout its term. These amounts are recognized until these securities are in default or when it is likely that future interest payments will not be made as scheduled.
Interest income on deposits with banks and other is recognized as earned, and primarily relates to the placement of cash in excess of near-term funding requirements in interest-bearing time deposits, overnight sweep accounts, and other interest bearing demand and call accounts.
Interest-only strip  — Interest-only strips are generated from USCS’ securitization activity and are a form of retained interest held by the Company in the securitization. This financial instrument represents the present value of estimated future positive “excess spread” expected to be generated by the securitized assets over the estimated life of those assets. Excess spread is the net cash flow from interest and fee collections allocated to the third-party investors’ interests in the securitization after deducting the interest paid on the investor certificates, credit losses, contractual servicing fees, and other expenses.
Merchant acquisition  — Represents the signing of merchants to accept American Express-branded cards.
Net card fees  — Represents the charge card membership fees earned during the period. These fees are recognized as revenue over the covered card membership period (typically one year), net of provision for projected refunds for cancellation of card membership.
Net interest yield on cardmember loans — Net interest yield on cardmember loans is a non-GAAP financial measure that represents the net spread earned on cardmember loans. Net interest yield on cardmember loans is computed by dividing adjusted net interest income by adjusted average loans, computed on an annualized basis. The calculation of net interest yield on cardmember loans includes interest that is deemed uncollectible. For all presentations of net interest yield on cardmember loans, reserves and net write-offs related to uncollectible interest are recorded through provisions for losses — cardmember loans; therefore, such reserves and net write-offs are not included in the net interest yield calculation.
Net loss ratio  — Represents the ratio of charge card write-offs consisting of principal (resulting from authorized and unauthorized transactions) and fee components, less recoveries, on cardmember receivables expressed as a percentage of gross amounts billed to cardmembers.
Net write-off rate  — Represents the amount of cardmember loans or USCS cardmember receivables written off consisting of principal (resulting from authorized transactions), less recoveries, as a percentage of the average loan balance or USCS average receivables during the period.
Return on average equity  — Calculated by dividing one-year period net income by one-year average total shareholders’ equity.
Return on average tangible common equity  — Computed in the same manner as ROE except the computation of average tangible common shareholders’ equity excludes from average total shareholders’ equity average goodwill and other intangibles.
Return on average segment capital  — Calculated by dividing one-year period segment income by one-year average segment capital.
Return on average tangible segment capital  — Computed in the same manner as return on average segment capital except the computation of average tangible segment capital excludes from average segment capital average goodwill and other intangibles.
Risk-weighted assets  — Refer to Capital Strategy section for definition.
Securitization income, net  — Prior to 2010, includes non-credit provision components of the net gains or losses from securitization activities; changes in fair value of the interest-only strip; excess spread related to securitized cardmember loans; and servicing income, net of related discounts or fees. Excess spread, which is recognized as earned, is the net cash flow from interest and fee collections allocated to the third-party investors’ interests in the securitization after deducting the interest paid on the investor certificates, credit losses, contractual servicing fees and other expenses.
Segment capital  — Represents capital allocated to a segment based upon specific business operational needs, risk measures, and regulatory capital requirements.
Stored value and prepaid products  — Includes Travelers Cheques and other prepaid products such as gift cheques and cards as well as reloadable Travelers Cheque cards. These products are sold as safe and convenient alternatives to currency for purchasing goods and services.
Tier 1 leverage ratio  — Refer to Capital Strategy section for definition.
Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio  — Refer to Capital Strategy section for definition.
Total cards-in-force — Represents the number of cards that are issued and outstanding. Proprietary basic consumer cards-in-force includes basic cards issued to the primary account owner and does not include additional supplemental cards issued on that account. Proprietary basic small business and corporate cards-in-force include basic and supplemental cards issued to employee cardmembers. Non-proprietary cards-in-force includes all cards that are issued and


62


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
outstanding under network partnership agreements, except for retail co-brand cardmember accounts which have no out-of-store spend activity during the prior 12-month period.
Total risk-based capital ratio  — Refer to Capital Strategy section for definition.
Travel sales — Represents the total dollar amount of travel transaction volume for airline, hotel, car rental, and other travel arrangements made for consumers and corporate clients. The Company earns revenue on these transactions by charging a transaction or management fee.
 
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
This report includes forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, which are subject to risks and uncertainties. The forward-looking statements, which address the Company’s expected business and financial performance, among other matters, contain words such as “believe,” “expect,” “estimate,” “anticipate,” “optimistic,” “intend,” “plan,” “aim,” “will,” “may,” “should,” “could,” “would,” “likely,” and similar expressions. Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date on which they are made. The Company undertakes no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements. Factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from these forward-looking statements, include, but are not limited to, the following:
 
  changes in global economic and business conditions, including consumer and business spending, the availability and cost of credit, unemployment and political conditions, all of which may significantly affect spending on the Company’s cards, delinquency rates, loan balances and other aspects of our business and results of operations;
 
  changes in capital and credit market conditions, which may significantly affect the Company’s ability to meet its liquidity needs, access to capital and cost of capital, including changes in interest rates; changes in market conditions affecting the valuation of our assets; or any reduction in our credit ratings or those of our subsidiaries, which could materially increase the cost and other terms of our funding, restrict our access to the capital markets or result in contingent payments under contracts;
 
  litigation, such as class actions or proceedings brought by governmental and regulatory agencies (including the lawsuit filed against the Company by the U.S. Department of Justice and certain state attorneys general), that could result in (i) the imposition of behavioral remedies against the Company or the Company’s voluntarily making certain changes to its business practices, the effects of which in either case could have a material adverse impact on the Company’s financial performance; (ii) the imposition of substantial monetary damages in private actions against the Company; and/or (iii) damage to the Company’s global reputation and brand;
 
  legal and regulatory developments wherever we do business, including legislative and regulatory reforms in the United States, such as the Dodd-Frank Act’s stricter regulation of large, interconnected financial institutions, increasing regulation of rates charged to merchants and the practices merchants may engage in to discriminate among the payment products they accept, changes in requirements relating to securitization and the establishment of the Bureau of Consumer Financial Protection, which could make fundamental changes to many of our business practices or materially affect our capital requirements, results of operations, ability to pay dividends or repurchase our stock; or actions and potential future actions by the FDIC and credit rating agencies applicable to securitization trusts, which could impact the Company’s ABS program;
 
  changes in the substantial and increasing worldwide competition in the payments industry, including competitive pressures from charge, credit and debit card networks and issuers, as well as evolving alternative payment systems and products, competitive pressure that may impact the prices we charge merchants that accept our Cards and the success of marketing, promotion or rewards programs;
 
  changes in technology or in our ability to protect our intellectual property (such as copyrights, trademarks, patents and controls on access and distribution), and invest in and compete at the leading edge of technological developments across our businesses, including technology and intellectual property of third parties whom we rely on, all of which could materially affect our results of operations;
 
  data breaches and fraudulent activity, which could damage our brand, increase our costs or have regulatory implications, and changes in regulation affecting privacy and data security under federal, state and foreign law, which could result in higher compliance and technology costs to ourselves or our vendors;
 
  changes in our ability to attract or retain qualified personnel in the management and operation of the Company’s business, including any changes that may result from increasing regulatory supervision of compensation practices;
 
  changes in the financial condition and creditworthiness of our business partners, such as bankruptcies, restructurings or consolidations, involving merchants that represent a significant portion of our business, such as the airline industry, or our partners in Global Network Services or financial institutions that we rely on for routine funding and liquidity, which could materially affect our financial condition or results of operations;


63


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
2010 FINANCIAL REVIEW
 
 
 
  uncertainties associated with business acquisitions, including the ability to realize anticipated business retention, growth and cost savings or effectively integrate the acquired business into our existing operations;
 
  changes affecting the success of our reengineering and other cost control initiatives, which may result in the Company not realizing all or a significant portion of the benefits that we intend;
 
  the actual amount to be spent by the Company on investments in the business, including on marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services and certain other operating expenses, which will be based in part on management’s assessment of competitive opportunities and the Company’s performance and the ability to control and manage operating, infrastructure, advertising and promotion expenses as business expands or changes;
 
  the effectiveness of the Company’s risk management policies and procedures, including credit risk relating to consumer debt, liquidity risk in meeting business requirements and operational risks;
 
  changes affecting our ability to accept or maintain deposits due to market demand or regulatory constraints, such as changes in interest rates and regulatory restrictions on our ability to obtain deposit funding or offer competitive interest rates, which could affect our liquidity position and our ability to fund our business; and
 
  factors beyond our control such as fire, power loss, disruptions in telecommunications, severe weather conditions, natural disasters, terrorism, “hackers” or fraud, which could affect travel-related spending or disrupt our global network systems and ability to process transactions.
 
A further description of these uncertainties and other risks can be found in the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2010, and the Company’s other reports filed with the SEC.


64


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
 
 
MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
The management of the Company is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting.
The Company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with GAAP in the United States of America, and includes those policies and procedures that:
 
  Pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company;
 
  Provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with GAAP, and that receipts and expenditures of the Company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the Company; and
 
  Provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the Company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
 
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
The Company’s management assessed the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010. In making this assessment, the Company’s management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control — Integrated Framework.
Based on management’s assessment and those criteria, we conclude that, as of December 31, 2010, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting is effective.
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, the Company’s independent registered public accounting firm, has issued an attestation report appearing on the following page on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010.


65


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
 
REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS AND SHAREHOLDERS OF AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY:
In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, cash flows and shareholders’ equity present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of American Express Company and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2010 and 2009, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2010, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2010, based on criteria established in Internal Control — Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.
As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company adopted new guidance in 2010 relating to transfers of financial assets and consolidation of variable interest entities.
A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.
 
-S- PRICEWATERHOUSE COOPERS LLP
New York, New York
February 25, 2011


66


 

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
     
CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS   PAGE
 
  68
  69
  70
  71
     
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
   
  72
  75
  75
  78
  81
  83
  85
  87
  89
  89
  92
  92
  96
  97
  98
  99
  101
  103
  103
Includes further details of:
   
   Other Commissions and Fees
   
   Other Revenues
   
   Marketing, Promotion, Rewards and Cardmember Services
   
   Other, Net Expenses
   
  104
  105
  110
  111
  113
  114
  117
  119


67


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31 (Millions, except per share amounts)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Revenues
                       
Non-interest revenues
                       
Discount revenue
  $ 15,111     $ 13,389     $ 15,025  
Net card fees
    2,102       2,151       2,150  
Travel commissions and fees
    1,779       1,594       2,010  
Other commissions and fees
    2,031       1,778       2,307  
Securitization income, net
          400       1,070  
Other
    1,927       2,087       2,157  
                         
Total non-interest revenues
    22,950       21,399       24,719  
                         
Interest income
                       
Interest and fees on loans
    6,783       4,468       6,159  
Interest and dividends on investment securities
    443       804       771  
Deposits with banks and other
    66       59       271  
                         
Total interest income
    7,292       5,331       7,201  
                         
Interest expense
                       
Deposits
    546       425       454  
Short-term borrowings
    3       37       483  
Long-term debt and other
    1,874       1,745       2,618  
                         
Total interest expense
    2,423       2,207       3,555  
                         
Net interest income
    4,869       3,124       3,646  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense
    27,819       24,523       28,365  
                         
Provisions for losses
                       
Charge card
    595       857       1,363  
Cardmember loans
    1,527       4,266       4,231  
Other
    85       190       204  
                         
Total provisions for losses
    2,207       5,313       5,798  
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense after provisions for losses
    25,612       19,210       22,567  
                         
Expenses
                       
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services
    8,644       6,467       7,361  
Salaries and employee benefits
    5,566       5,080       6,090  
Professional services
    2,806       2,408       2,413  
Other, net
    2,632       2,414       3,122  
                         
Total
    19,648       16,369       18,986  
                         
Pretax income from continuing operations
    5,964       2,841       3,581  
Income tax provision
    1,907       704       710  
                         
Income from continuing operations
    4,057       2,137       2,871  
Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax
          (7 )     (172 )
                         
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130     $ 2,699  
                         
Earnings per Common Share — Basic: (Note 18)
                       
Income from continuing operations attributable to common shareholders (a)
  $ 3.37     $ 1.55     $ 2.47  
Loss from discontinued operations
          (0.01 )     (0.14 )
                         
Net income attributable to common shareholders (a)
  $ 3.37     $ 1.54     $ 2.33  
                         
Earnings per Common Share — Diluted: (Note 18)
                       
Income from continuing operations attributable to common shareholders (a)
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.47  
Loss from discontinued operations
              $ (0.15 )
                         
Net income attributable to common shareholders (a)
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.32  
                         
Average common shares outstanding for earnings per common share:
                       
Basic
    1,188       1,168       1,154  
Diluted
    1,195       1,171       1,156  
 
 
 
(a) Represents income from continuing operations or net income, as applicable, less (i) accelerated preferred dividend accretion of $212 million for the year ended December 31, 2009 due to the repurchase of $3.39 billion of preferred shares issued as part of the Capital Purchase Program (CPP), (ii) preferred share dividends and related accretion of $94 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, and (iii) earnings allocated to participating share awards and other items of $51 million, $22 million and $15 million for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.


68


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
 
                 
   
December 31 (Millions, except per share data)   2010     2009  
 
Assets
               
                 
Cash and cash equivalents
               
                 
Cash and cash due from banks
  $ 2,498     $ 1,525  
                 
Interest-bearing deposits in other banks (including securities purchased under resale agreements: 2010, $372;
2009, $212)
    13,557       11,010  
                 
Short-term investment securities
    654       4,064  
                 
                 
Total
    16,709       16,599  
                 
Accounts receivable
               
                 
Cardmember receivables (includes gross receivables available to settle obligations of a consolidated
variable interest entity: 2010, $8,192; 2009, $8,314), less reserves: 2010, $386; 2009, $546
    36,880       33,197  
                 
Other receivables, less reserves: 2010, $175; 2009, $109
    3,554       5,007  
                 
Loans
               
                 
Cardmember loans, (includes gross loans available to settle obligations of a consolidated
variable interest entity: 2010, $34,726) (a) , less reserves: 2010, $3,646; 2009, $3,268
    57,204       29,504  
                 
Other, less reserves: 2010, $24; 2009, $27
    412       506  
                 
Investment securities
    14,010       24,337  
                 
Premises and equipment — at cost, less accumulated depreciation: 2010, $4,483; 2009, $4,130
    2,905       2,782  
                 
Other assets (includes restricted cash of consolidated variable interest entities: 2010, $3,759; 2009, $1,799) (a)
    15,368       13,213  
                 
                 
Total assets
  $ 147,042     $ 125,145  
                 
                 
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
               
                 
Liabilities
               
                 
Customer deposits
  $ 29,727     $ 26,289  
                 
Travelers Cheques outstanding
    5,618       5,975  
                 
Accounts payable
    9,691       9,063  
                 
Short-term borrowings
    3,414       2,344  
                 
Long-term debt (includes debt issued by consolidated variable interest entities: 2010, $23,341; 2009, $4,970)
    66,416       52,338  
                 
Other liabilities
    15,946       14,730  
                 
                 
Total liabilities
    130,812       110,739  
                 
                 
Commitments and contingencies (Note 24)
               
                 
Shareholders’ Equity
               
                 
Common shares, $0.20 par value, authorized 3.6 billion shares; issued and outstanding 1,197 million shares
as of December 31, 2010 and 1,192 million shares as of December 31, 2009
    238       237  
                 
Additional paid-in capital
    11,937       11,144  
                 
Retained earnings
    4,972       3,737  
                 
Accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income
               
                 
Net unrealized securities gains, net of tax: 2010, $(19); 2009, $(291)
    57       507  
                 
Net unrealized derivatives losses, net of tax: 2010, $4; 2009, $15
    (7 )     (28 )
                 
Foreign currency translation adjustments, net of tax: 2010, $405; 2009, $31
    (503 )     (722 )
                 
Net unrealized pension and other postretirement benefit losses, net of tax: 2010, $226; 2009, $244
    (464 )     (469 )
                 
                 
Total accumulated other comprehensive loss
    (917 )     (712 )
                 
                 
Total shareholders’ equity
    16,230       14,406  
                 
                 
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 147,042     $ 125,145  
 
 
 
(a) The balances as of December 31, 2009 include an undivided, pro-rata interest in an unconsolidated variable interest entity (historically referred to as “seller’s interest”) totaling $8,752, of which $8,033 is included in cardmember loans and $719 is included in other assets. Refer to Note 7 for additional details.
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.


69


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31 (Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
                       
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130     $ 2,699  
Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax
          7       172  
                         
Income from continuing operations
    4,057       2,137       2,871  
Adjustments to reconcile income from continuing operations to net cash provided by operating activities
                       
Provisions for losses
    2,207       5,313       5,798  
Depreciation and amortization
    917       1,070       712  
Deferred taxes, acquisition costs and other
    1,135       (1,429 )     442  
Stock-based compensation
    287       230       256  
Changes in operating assets and liabilities, net of effects of acquisitions and dispositions:
                       
Other receivables
    (498 )     (730 )     101  
Other assets
    (590 )     526       (2,256 )
Accounts payable and other liabilities
    2,090       (98 )     490  
Travelers Cheques outstanding
    (317 )     (449 )     (770 )
Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities attributable to discontinued operations
          (233 )     129  
                         
Net cash provided by operating activities
    9,288       6,337       7,773  
                         
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
                       
Sale of investments
    2,196       2,930       4,657  
Maturity and redemption of investments
    12,066       2,900       9,620  
Purchase of investments
    (7,804 )     (13,719 )     (14,724 )
Net (increase) decrease in cardmember loans/receivables
    (6,389 )     6,154       5,940  
Proceeds from cardmember loan securitizations
          2,244       9,619  
Maturities of cardmember loan securitizations
          (4,800 )     (4,670 )
Purchase of premises and equipment
    (887 )     (772 )     (977 )
Sale of premises and equipment
    9       50       27  
Acquisitions/Dispositions, net of cash acquired
    (400 )           (4,589 )
Net (increase) decrease in restricted cash
    (20 )     (1,935 )     33  
Net cash provided by investing activities attributable to discontinued operations
          196       2,625  
                         
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
    (1,229 )     (6,752 )     7,561  
                         
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
                       
Net increase in customer deposits
    3,406       11,037       358  
Net increase (decrease) in short-term borrowings
    1,056       (6,574 )     (8,693 )
Issuance of long-term debt
    5,918       6,697       19,213  
Principal payments on long-term debt
    (17,670 )     (15,197 )     (13,787 )
Issuance of American Express Series A preferred shares and warrants
          3,389        
Issuance of American Express common shares
    663       614       176  
Repurchase of American Express Series A preferred shares
          (3,389 )      
Repurchase of American Express stock warrants
          (340 )      
Repurchase of American Express common shares
    (590 )           (218 )
Dividends paid
    (867 )     (924 )     (836 )
Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities attributable to discontinued operations
          40       (6,653 )
                         
Net cash used in financing activities
    (8,084 )     (4,647 )     (10,440 )
                         
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash
    135       7       20  
                         
Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
    110       (5,055 )     4,914  
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year includes cash of discontinued operations: 2010, $0; 2009, $3; 2008, $6,390
    16,599       21,654       16,740  
                         
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year includes cash of discontinued operations: 2010, $0; 2009, $0; 2008, $3
  $ 16,709     $ 16,599     $ 21,654  
 
 
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.


70


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
 
                                                 
   
                            Accumulated
       
                      Additional
    Other
       
Three Years Ended December 31, 2010
        Preferred
    Common
    Paid-in
    Comprehensive
    Retained
 
(Millions, except per share amounts)   Total     Shares     Shares     Capital     (Loss) Income     Earnings  
 
Balances as of December 31, 2007
  $ 11,029     $     $ 232     $ 10,164     $ (442 )   $ 1,075  
Comprehensive income
                                               
Net income
    2,699                                       2,699  
Change in net unrealized securities gains
    (711 )                             (711 )        
Change in net unrealized derivatives (losses) gains
    (9 )                             (9 )        
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    (113 )                             (113 )        
Change in net unrealized pension and other postretirement benefit losses
    (334 )                             (334 )        
                                                 
Total comprehensive income
    1,532                                          
Repurchases of common shares
    (218 )             (1 )     (42 )             (175 )
Other changes, primarily employee plans
    334               1       374       3       (44 )
Cash dividends declared Common, $0.72 per share
    (836 )                                     (836 )
                                                 
Balances as of December 31, 2008
    11,841             232       10,496       (1,606 )     2,719  
Comprehensive income
                                               
Net income
    2,130                                       2,130  
Change in net unrealized securities gains
    1,206                               1,206          
Change in net unrealized derivatives (losses) gains
    52                               52          
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    (354 )                             (354 )        
Change in net unrealized pension and other postretirement benefit losses
    (10 )                             (10 )        
                                                 
Total comprehensive income
    3,024                                          
Issuance of preferred shares and common stock warrants
    3,389       3,157               232                  
Preferred share accretion
          232                               (232 )
Repurchase of preferred shares
    (3,389 )     (3,389 )                                
Repurchase of warrants
    (340 )                     (232 )             (108 )
Issuance of common shares
    531               4       527                  
Other changes, primarily employee plans
    279               1       121               157  
Cash dividends declared
                                               
Preferred shares
    (74 )                                     (74 )
Common, $0.72 per share
    (855 )                                     (855 )
                                                 
Balances as of December 31, 2009
    14,406             237       11,144       (712 )     3,737  
Impact of Adoption of new GAAP (Note 7)
    (1,769 )                       (315 )     (1,454 )
                                                 
Balances as of January 1, 2010 (Adjusted)
    12,637             237       11,144       (1,027 )     2,283  
Comprehensive income
                                               
Net income
    4,057                                       4,057  
Change in net unrealized securities gains
    (135 )                             (135 )        
Change in net unrealized derivatives (losses) gains
    21                               21          
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    219                               219          
Change in net unrealized pension and other postretirement benefit losses
    5                               5          
                                                 
Total comprehensive income
    4,167                                          
Repurchase of common shares
    (590 )             (3 )     (132 )             (455 )
Other changes, primarily employee plans
    883               4       925               (46 )
Cash dividends declared Common, $0.72 per share
    (867 )                                     (867 )
                                                 
Balances as of December 31, 2010
  $ 16,230     $     $ 238     $ 11,937     $ (917 )   $ 4,972  
 
 
 
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.


71


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
NOTE 1
SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
THE COMPANY
American Express is a global service company that provides customers with access to products, insights and experiences that enrich lives and build business success. The Company’s principal products and services are charge and credit payment card products and travel-related services offered to consumers and businesses around the world. The Company’s various products and services are sold globally to diverse customer groups, including consumers, small businesses, mid-sized companies and large corporations. These products and services are sold through various channels, including direct mail, on-line applications, targeted direct and third-party sales forces and direct response advertising.
 
PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION
The Consolidated Financial Statements of the Company are prepared in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). All significant intercompany transactions are eliminated.
The Company consolidates all entities in which the Company holds a “controlling financial interest.” For voting interest entities, the Company is considered to hold a controlling financial interest when the Company is able to exercise control over the investees’ operating and financial decisions. For variable interest entities (VIEs), the Company is considered to hold a controlling financial interest when it is determined to be the primary beneficiary. Prior to the adoption of ASU No. 2009-17, Consolidation (Topic 810): Improvements to Financial Reporting by Enterprises Involved with Variable Interest Entities (effective January 1, 2010), a primary beneficiary was the party that absorbs a majority of the VIE’s expected losses or receive a majority of the VIE’s expected residual returns. For VIEs, subsequent to the adoption of ASU No. 2009-17, a primary beneficiary is a party that has both: (1) the power to direct the activities of a VIE that most significantly impact that entity’s economic performance, and (2) the obligation to absorb losses, or the right to receive benefits, from the VIE that could potentially be significant to the VIE. The determination of whether an entity is a VIE is based on the amount and characteristics of the entity’s equity.
Entities in which the Company’s voting interest in common equity does not provide the Company with control, but allows the Company to exert significant influence over their financial and operating decisions are accounted for under the equity method. All other investments in equity securities, to the extent that they are not considered marketable securities, are accounted for under the cost method.
 
FOREIGN CURRENCY
Assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into U.S. dollars based upon exchange rates prevailing at the end of each year. The resulting translation adjustments, along with any related qualifying hedge and tax effects, are included in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income (AOCI), a component of shareholders’ equity. Translation adjustments, including qualifying hedge and tax effects, are reclassified to earnings upon the sale or substantial liquidation of investments in foreign operations. Revenues and expenses are translated at the average month-end exchange rates during the year. Gains and losses related to transactions in a currency other than the functional currency, including operations outside the U.S. where the functional currency is the U.S. dollar, are reported net in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Income, in other non-interest revenue, interest income, interest expense, or other, net expense, depending on the nature of the activity. Net foreign currency transaction gains amounted to approximately $138 million, $205 million and $15 million in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
AMOUNTS BASED ON ESTIMATES AND
ASSUMPTIONS
Accounting estimates are an integral part of the Consolidated Financial Statements. These estimates are based, in part, on management’s assumptions concerning future events. Among the more significant assumptions are those that relate to reserves for cardmember losses relating to loans and charge card receivables, reserves for Membership Rewards costs, fair value measurement, goodwill and income taxes. These accounting estimates reflect the best judgment of management, but actual results could differ.
 
TOTAL REVENUES NET OF INTEREST EXPENSE
 
Discount Revenue
Discount revenue represents fees charged to merchants with which the Company, or its GNS partners, has entered into card acceptance agreements for facilitating transactions between the merchants and the Company’s cardmembers. The discount generally is deducted from the payment to the merchant and recorded as discount revenue at the time the charge is captured.
 
Net Card Fees
Card fees are deferred and recognized on a straight-line basis over the 12-month card membership period, net of deferred direct card acquisition costs and a reserve for projected membership cancellations. Charge card fees are recognized in net card fees in the Consolidated Statements of Income and the unamortized net card fee balance is reported in other liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets (refer to Note 11). Loan product fees are considered an enhancement to the yield on the product, and are recognized in interest and fees on loans in the Consolidated Statements of Income. The unamortized net card


72


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
fee balance for lending products is reported net in cardmember loans on the Consolidated Balance Sheets (refer to Note 4).
 
Travel Commissions and Fees
The Company earns travel commissions and fees by charging clients transaction or management fees for selling and arranging travel and for travel management services. Client transaction fee revenue is recognized at the time the client books the travel arrangements. Travel management services revenue is recognized over the contractual term of the agreement. The Company’s travel suppliers (for example, airlines, hotels and car rental companies) pay commissions and fees on tickets issued, sales and other services based on contractual agreements. Commissions and fees from travel suppliers are generally recognized at the time a ticket is purchased or over the term of the contract. Commissions and fees that are based on services rendered (for example, hotel stays and car rentals) are recognized based on usage.
 
Other Commissions and Fees
Other commissions and fees include foreign currency conversion fees, delinquency fees, service fees and other card related assessments, which are recognized primarily in the period in which they are charged to the cardmember. Also included are fees related to the Company’s Membership Rewards program, which are deferred and recognized over the period covered by the fee. The unamortized Membership Rewards fee balance is included in other liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets (refer to Note 11).
 
Contra-revenue
The Company regularly makes payments through contractual arrangements with merchants, commercial card clients and certain other customers (collectively the “customers”). Payments to customers are generally classified as contra-revenue unless a specifically identifiable benefit (e.g., goods or services) is received by the Company in consideration for that payment and the fair value of such benefit is determinable and measurable. If no such benefit is identified, then the entire payment is classified as contra-revenue and included within total non-interest revenues in the Consolidated Statements of Income in the line item where the related transaction revenues are recorded (e.g., discount revenue, travel commissions and fees and other commissions and fees). If such a benefit is identified, then the payment is classified as expense up to the estimated fair value of the benefit.
 
Interest Income
Interest on loans owned is assessed using the average daily balance method. Interest is recognized based upon the loan principal amount outstanding in accordance with the terms of the applicable account agreement until the outstanding balance is paid or written-off.
Interest and dividends on investment securities primarily relates to the Company’s performing fixed-income securities. Interest income is accrued as earned using the effective interest method, which adjusts the yield for security premiums and discounts, fees and other payments, so that a constant rate of return is recognized on the investment security’s outstanding balance. Amounts are recognized until such time as a security is in default or when it is likely that future interest payments will not be received as scheduled.
Interest on deposits with banks and other is recognized as earned, and primarily relates to the placement of cash in interest-bearing time deposits, overnight sweep accounts, and other interest-bearing demand and call accounts.
 
Interest Expense
Interest expense includes interest incurred primarily to fund cardmember loans, charge card product receivables, general corporate purposes, and liquidity needs, and is recognized as incurred. Interest expense is divided principally into three categories: (i) deposits, which primarily relates to interest expense on deposits taken from customers and institutions, (ii) short-term borrowings, which primarily relates to interest expense on commercial paper, federal funds purchased, bank overdrafts and other short-term borrowings, and (iii) long-term debt, which primarily relates to interest expense on the Company’s long-term financing.
 
BALANCE SHEET
 
Cash and Cash Equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents include cash and amounts due from banks, interest-bearing bank balances, including securities purchased under resale agreements and other highly liquid investments with original maturities of 90 days or less.
 
Premises and Equipment
Premises and equipment, including leasehold improvements, are carried at cost less accumulated depreciation. Costs incurred during construction are capitalized and are depreciated once an asset is placed in service. Depreciation is generally computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of assets, which range from 3 to 8 years for equipment. Premises are depreciated based upon their estimated useful life at the acquisition date, which generally ranges from 40 to 60 years.
Leasehold improvements are depreciated using the straight-line method over the lesser of the remaining term of the leased facility or the economic life of the improvement, which ranges from 5 to 10 years. The Company maintains operating leases worldwide for facilities and equipment. Rent expense for facility leases is recognized ratably over the lease term, and is calculated to include adjustments for rent concessions, rent escalations and leasehold improvement allowances. The Company accounts for lease restoration obligations in accordance with applicable GAAP, which requires recognition of the fair value of restoration liabilities when incurred, and amortization of capitalized restoration costs over the lease term.


73


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
Software development costs
The Company capitalizes certain costs associated with the acquisition or development of internal-use software. Once the software is ready for its intended use, these costs are amortized on a straight-line basis over the software’s estimated useful life, generally 5 years.
 
OTHER SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The following table identifies the Company’s other significant accounting policies, the Note and page where a detailed description of each policy can be found.
 
             
 
    Note
       
Significant Accounting Policy   Number   Note Title   Page
 
Fair Value Measurements
  Note 3   Fair Values   Page 76
Accounts Receivable
  Note 4   Accounts Receivable and Loans   Page 78
Loans
  Note 4   Accounts Receivable and Loans   Page 78
Reserves for Losses
  Note 5   Reserves for Losses   Page 81
Investment Securities
  Note 6   Investment Securities   Page 83
Securitization Income, Net; and Asset Securitization
  Note 7   Asset Securitizations   Page 85
Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets
  Note 8   Other Assets   Page 87
Membership Rewards
  Note 11   Other Liabilities   Page 92
Derivative Financial Instruments and Hedging Activities
  Note 12   Derivatives and Hedging Activities   Page 92
Income Taxes
  Note 17   Income Taxes   Page 101
Other Non-Interest Revenues
  Note 19   Details of Certain Consolidated Statements of Income Lines   Page 103
Other, Net Expense
  Note 19   Details of Certain Consolidated Statements of Income Lines   Page 103
Stock-based Compensation
  Note 20   Stock Plans   Page 104
Legal Contingencies
  Note 24   Commitments and Contingencies   Page 113
Reportable Operating Segments
  Note 25   Reportable Operating Segments and Geographic Operations   Page 114
 
 
 
RECENTLY ISSUED ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) recently issued Accounting Standards Update (ASU) No. 2010-20, Receivables (Topic 310): Disclosures about the Credit Quality of Financing Receivables and the Allowance for Credit Losses. This standard is intended to provide additional information to assist financial statement users in assessing an entity’s credit risk exposures and evaluating the adequacy of its allowance for credit losses. As such, the standard amends existing guidance by requiring an entity to provide a greater level of disaggregated information about its financing receivables and its allowance for credit losses and includes new disclosures such as credit quality indicators, past due information and additional impaired loan data. Effective December 31, 2010, the Company adopted these amendments except for disclosures of activity within periods, which become effective for periods beginning January 1, 2011. Additionally, certain new disclosures for Troubled Debt Restructurings were not implemented because such disclosures have been deferred by ASU No. 2011-01, Receivables (Topic 310): Deferral of the Effective Date of Disclosures about Troubled Debt Restructurings in Update No. 2010-20, and are expected to be effective for periods beginning April 1, 2011.
 
In addition, the Company adopted the following standards:
 
  ASU No. 2009-16, Transfers and Servicing (Topic 860): Accounting for Transfers of Financial Assets, and
 
  ASU No. 2009-17, Consolidations (Topic 810): Improvements to Financial Reporting by Enterprises Involved with Variable Interest Entities.
 
These standards (generally referred to herein as new GAAP effective January 1, 2010) eliminated the concept of a qualifying special purpose entity (QSPE), therefore requiring these entities to be evaluated under the accounting guidance for consolidation of VIEs. In addition, ASU 2009-17 required an entity to reconsider its previous consolidation conclusions reached under the VIE consolidation model, including (i) whether an entity is a VIE, (ii) whether the enterprise is the VIE’s primary beneficiary, and (iii) the required financial statement disclosures.
Upon adoption of ASU 2009-16 and ASU 2009-17, the Company was required to change its accounting for the American Express Credit Account Master Trust (the Lending Trust), a previously unconsolidated VIE, which is now consolidated. As a result, beginning January 1, 2010, the securitized cardmember loans and related debt securities issued to third parties by the Lending Trust are included on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheet. The Company continues to consolidate the American Express Issuance Trust (the Charge Trust). Prior period results have not been revised for the change in accounting for the Lending Trust. Refer to Note 7 for further discussion.


74


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
 
CLASSIFICATION OF CASH BALANCES
The Company determined that in periods prior to June 30, 2010, the Company misclassified certain book overdraft balances against cash balances on its Consolidated Balance Sheets. Such overdraft balances, which arise in the normal course of the Company’s business activities, should have been classified as either accounts payable or other liabilities, depending on the underlying nature of the account. The Company has evaluated the effects of these misclassifications and concluded that they are not, individually or in the aggregate, material to any of the Company’s previously issued quarterly or annual Consolidated Financial Statements. Nevertheless, the Company has elected to revise in this report and future filings its Consolidated Balance Sheet and Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows to correct the effects of these misclassifications.
 
The amounts on the Consolidated Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2009 that have been revised are summarized below:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   Previously Reported     As Revised  
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 15,542     $ 16,599  
Accounts payable
    8,926       9,063  
Other liabilities
    13,810       14,730  
 
 
 
These balance sheet misclassifications further impacted amounts previously reported in prior period Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows, as summarized below:
 
                                 
   
    Year Ended
    Year Ended
 
    December 31, 2009     December 31, 2008  
    As
          As
       
    Previously
    As
    Previously
    As
 
(Billions)   Reported     Revised     Reported     Revised  
 
Change in accounts payable and other liabilities
  $     $ (0.1 )   $ 0.9     $ 0.5  
Net cash provided by operating activities
    6.4       6.3       8.1       7.8  
Net (decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents
    (5.0 )     (5.1 )     5.3       4.9  
 
 
 
Certain other reclassifications of prior period amounts have been made to conform to the current presentation.
 
NOTE 2
 
ACQUISITIONS AND DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
 
ACQUISITIONS
During the course of the year, the Company purchased Accertify (November 10, 2010) and Revolution Money (January 15, 2010) for a total consideration of $151 million and $305 million, respectively. Accertify is an on-line fraud solution provider and Revolution Money is a provider of secure person-to-person payment services through an internet-based platform. These acquisitions did not have a significant impact on either the Company’s consolidated results of operations or the segments in which they are reflected for the year ended December 31, 2010.
On March 28, 2008, the Company purchased Corporate Payment Services (CPS), General Electric Company’s commercial card and corporate purchasing business unit.
 
The following table summarizes the assets acquired and liabilities assumed for these acquisitions as of the acquisition dates:
 
                         
   
                Corporate
 
          Revolution
    Payment
 
(Millions)   Accertify     Money     Services  
 
Goodwill
  $ 131     $ 184     $ 818  
Definite-lived intangible assets
    15       119       232  
Other assets
    11       7       1,259  
                         
Total assets
    157       310       2,309  
Total liabilities
    6       5       65  
                         
Net assets acquired
  $ 151     $ 305     $ 2,244  
                         
              Corporate          
Reportable operating segment
    GNMS       & Other       GCS (a)
 
 
 
(a) An insignificant portion of the receivables and intangible assets are also allocated to the USCS reportable operating segment.
 
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
On September 18, 2007, the Company entered into an agreement to sell its international banking subsidiary, American Express Bank Ltd. (AEB) to Standard Chartered PLC (Standard Chartered) and to sell American Express International Deposit Company (AEIDC) through a put/call agreement to Standard Chartered 18 months after the close of the AEB sale. The sale of AEB was completed on February 29, 2008. In the third quarter of 2008, AEIDC qualified to be reported as a discontinued operation. The sale of AEIDC was completed on September 10, 2009.
As of and for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008, all of the operating results, assets and liabilities, and cash flows of AEB (except for certain components of AEB that were not sold) and AEIDC have been removed from the Corporate & Other segment and are presented separately in discontinued operations in the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements. The Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements have been adjusted to exclude discontinued operations unless otherwise noted.


75


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 3
FAIR VALUES
Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability (an exit price) in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date, and is based on the Company’s principal or most advantageous market for the specific asset or liability.
GAAP provides for a three-level hierarchy of inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value, defined as follows:
 
  Level 1 — Inputs that are quoted prices (unadjusted) for identical assets or liabilities in active markets.
 
  Level 2 — Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly, for substantially the full term of the asset or liability, including:
 
  –  Quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets
 
  –  Quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in markets that are not active
 
  –  Inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability
 
  –  Inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means
 
  Level 3 — Inputs that are unobservable and reflect the Company’s own assumptions about the assumptions market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability based on the best information available in the circumstances (e.g., internally derived assumptions surrounding the timing and amount of expected cash flows).
 
The following table summarizes the Company’s financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis, categorized by GAAP’s valuation hierarchy (as described in the preceding paragraphs), as of December 31:
 
                                                                 
   
    2010     2009  
(Millions)   Total     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3     Total     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
 
Assets:
                                                               
Investment securities: (a)
                                                               
Equity securities
  $      475     $      475     $      —     $      —     $      530     $      530     $      —     $      —  
Retained subordinated securities (b)
                            3,599                   3,599  
Debt securities and other
    13,535             13,535             20,208             20,208        
Interest-only strip (b)
                            20                   20  
Derivatives (c)
    1,089             1,089             833             833        
                                                                 
Total assets
  $ 15,099     $ 475     $ 14,624     $     $ 25,190     $ 530     $ 21,041     $ 3,619  
                                                                 
Liabilities:
                                                               
Derivatives (c)
  $ 419     $     $ 419     $     $ 283     $     $ 283     $  
                                                                 
Total liabilities
  $ 419     $     $ 419     $     $ 283     $     $ 283     $  
 
 
 
(a) Refer to Note 6 for the fair values of investment securities on a further disaggregated basis.
(b) As a result of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company no longer presents the retained subordinated securities and interest-only strip within its Consolidated Financial Statements in periods subsequent to December 31, 2009. Refer to Note 7 for further details.
(c) Refer to Note 12 for the fair values of derivative assets and liabilities on a further disaggregated basis. While derivative assets and derivative liabilities are presented gross in the table above, GAAP permits the netting of derivative assets and derivative liabilities when a legally enforceable master netting agreement exists between the Company and its derivative counterparty. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, $18 million and $33 million, respectively, of derivative assets and liabilities have been offset and presented net on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
The table below presents a reconciliation of all assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) as of December 31, 2009, including realized and unrealized gains (losses) included in earnings and AOCI:
 
                 
   
    2009 (a)  
    Investments — Retained
    Other Assets —
 
(Millions)   Subordinated Securities     Interest-Only Strip  
 
Beginning fair value, January 1
  $                     744     $                  32  
Increases in securitized loans (b)
    1,760        
Unrealized and realized gains (losses)
    1,095 (c)     (12 ) (d)
                 
Ending fair value, December 31
  $ 3,599     $ 20  
 
 
 
(a) The Company did not measure any financial instruments at fair value using significantly unobservable inputs (Level 3) during the year ended December 31, 2010.
(b) Represents cost basis of securitized loans.
(c) Included in AOCI, net of taxes.
(d) Included in securitization income, net.


76


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
GAAP requires disclosure of the estimated fair value of all financial instruments. A financial instrument is defined as cash, evidence of an ownership in an entity, or a contract between two entities to deliver cash or another financial instrument or to exchange other financial instruments. The disclosure requirements for the fair value of financial instruments exclude leases, equity method investments, affiliate investments, pension and benefit obligations, insurance contracts and all non-financial instruments.
 
VALUATION TECHNIQUES USED IN MEASURING FAIR VALUE
For the financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value on a recurring basis (categorized in the valuation hierarchy table on the previous page) the Company applies the following valuation techniques to measure fair value:
 
Investment Securities (Excluding Retained Subordinated
Securities and the Interest-Only Strip)
  When available, quoted market prices in active markets are used to determine fair value. Such investment securities are classified within Level 1 of the fair value hierarchy.
 
  When quoted prices in an active market are not available, the fair values for the Company’s investment securities are obtained primarily from pricing services engaged by the Company, and the Company receives one price for each security. The fair values provided by the pricing services are estimated using pricing models, where the inputs to those models are based on observable market inputs. The inputs to the valuation techniques applied by the pricing services vary depending on the type of security being priced but are typically benchmark yields, benchmark security prices, credit spreads, prepayment speeds, reported trades and broker-dealer quotes, all with reasonable levels of transparency. The pricing services did not apply any adjustments to the pricing models used. In addition, the Company did not apply any adjustments to prices received from the pricing services. The Company classifies the prices obtained from the pricing services within Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy because the underlying inputs are directly observable from active markets or recent trades of similar securities in inactive markets. However, the pricing models used do entail a certain amount of subjectivity and therefore differing judgments in how the underlying inputs are modeled could result in different estimates of fair value.
 
The Company reaffirms its understanding of the valuation techniques used by its pricing services at least annually. In addition, the Company corroborates the prices provided by its pricing services to test their reasonableness by comparing their prices to valuations from different pricing sources as well as comparing prices to the sale prices received from sold securities. Refer to Note 6 for additional fair value information.
 
Retained Subordinated Securities
As of January 1, 2010, pursuant to changes in GAAP governing accounting for transfers of financial assets, the Company no longer has retained subordinated securities. The fair value of the Company’s retained subordinated securities was determined using discounted cash flow models. The discount rate was based on an interest rate curve observable in the marketplace plus an unobservable credit spread for risks associated with these securities and other similar financial instruments. The Company classified such securities as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy because the credit spreads were not observable due to market illiquidity for these securities and similar financial instruments.
 
Interest-Only Strip
As of January 1, 2010, pursuant to changes in GAAP governing accounting for transfers of financial assets, the Company no longer has interest-only strips. The fair value of the interest-only strip was the present value of estimated future positive excess spread expected to be generated by the securitized loans over the estimated remaining life of those loans. Management utilized certain estimates and assumptions to determine the fair value of the interest-only strip asset, including estimates for finance charge yield, credit losses, London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) (which determined future certificate interest costs), monthly payment rate and discount rate. On a quarterly basis, the Company compared the assumptions it used in calculating the fair value of its interest-only strip to observable market data when available, and to historical trends. The interest-only strip was classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy due to the significance of the unobservable inputs used in valuing this asset.
 
Derivative Financial Instruments
The fair value of the Company’s derivative financial instruments, which could be assets or liabilities on the Consolidated Balance Sheets, is estimated by a third-party valuation service that uses proprietary pricing models, or by internal pricing models. The pricing models do not contain a high level of subjectivity as the valuation techniques used do not require significant judgment, and inputs to those models are readily observable from actively quoted markets. The pricing models used are consistently applied and reflect the contractual terms of the derivatives, including the period of maturity, and market-based parameters such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity indices or prices, and volatility.
Credit valuation adjustments are necessary when the market parameters, such as a benchmark curve, used to value derivatives are not indicative of the credit quality of the Company or its counterparties. The Company considers the counterparty credit risk by applying an observable forecasted default rate to the current exposure. Refer to Note 12 for additional fair value information.


77


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
 
The following table discloses the estimated fair value for the Company’s financial assets and financial liabilities that are not carried at fair value, as of December 31:
 
                                 
   
    2010     2009  
    Carrying
    Fair
    Carrying
    Fair
 
(Billions)   Value     Value     Value     Value  
 
Financial Assets:
                               
Assets for which carrying values equal or approximate fair value
  $      62     $   62 (a)   $      58     $   58 (b)
Loans, net
  $ 58     $ 58 (a)   $ 30     $ 30  
Financial Liabilities:
                               
Liabilities for which carrying values equal or approximate
  fair value
  $ 43     $ 43     $ 34     $ 34  
Certificates of deposit
  $ 13     $ 13     $ 15     $ 16  
Long-term debt
  $ 66     $ 69 (a)   $ 52     $ 54 (b)
 
 
 
(a) Includes fair values of cardmember receivables, loans and long-term debt of $8.1 billion, $33.2 billion and $23.6 billion, respectively, held by consolidated VIEs as of December 31, 2010. Refer to the Consolidated Balance Sheets for the related carrying values.
(b) Includes fair values of cardmember receivables and long-term debt of $8.3 billion and $5.0 billion, respectively, held by a consolidated VIE as of December 31, 2009. Refer to the Consolidated Balance Sheets for the related carrying values.
 
The fair values of these financial instruments are estimates based upon the market conditions and perceived risks as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, and require management judgment. These figures may not be indicative of their future fair values. The fair value of the Company cannot be reliably estimated by aggregating the amounts presented.
 
The following methods were used to determine estimated fair values:
 
FINANCIAL ASSETS FOR WHICH CARRYING VALUES EQUAL OR APPROXIMATE FAIR VALUE
Financial assets for which carrying values equal or approximate fair value include cash and cash equivalents, cardmember receivables, accrued interest and certain other assets. For these assets, the carrying values approximate fair value because they are short term in duration or variable rate in nature.
 
FINANCIAL ASSETS CARRIED AT OTHER THAN FAIR VALUE
 
Loans, net
Loans are recorded at historical cost, less reserves, on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. In estimating the fair value for the Company’s loans the principal market is assumed to be the securitization market, and the Company uses the hypothetical securitization price to determine the fair value of the portfolio. The securitization price is estimated from the assumed proceeds of the hypothetical securitization in the current market, adjusted for securitization uncertainties such as market conditions and liquidity.
 
FINANCIAL LIABILITIES FOR WHICH CARRYING VALUES EQUAL OR APPROXIMATE FAIR VALUE
Financial liabilities for which carrying values equal or approximate fair value include accrued interest, customer deposits (excluding certificates of deposit, which are described further below), Travelers Cheques outstanding, short-term borrowings and certain other liabilities for which the carrying values approximate fair value because they are short term in duration, variable rate in nature or have no defined maturity.
 
FINANCIAL LIABILITIES CARRIED AT OTHER THAN FAIR VALUE
 
Certificates of Deposit
Certificates of deposit (CDs) are recorded at their historical issuance cost on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Fair value is estimated using a discounted cash flow methodology based on the Company’s current borrowing rates for similar types of CDs.
 
Long-term Debt
Long-term debt is recorded at historical issuance cost on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Fair value is estimated using either quoted market prices or discounted cash flows based on the Company’s current borrowing rates for similar types of borrowings.
 
NOTE 4
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE AND LOANS
The Company’s charge and lending payment card products result in the generation of cardmember receivables (from charge payment products) and cardmember loans (from lending payment products) which are described below.
 
CARDMEMBER AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
Cardmember receivables, representing amounts due from charge payment product customers, are recorded at the time a cardmember enters into a point-of-sale transaction with a merchant. Charge card customers generally must pay the full amount billed each month. Each charge card transaction is authorized based on its likely economics reflecting cardmember’s most recent credit information and spend patterns. Global limits are established to limit maximum exposure for high risk and some high spend charge cardmembers. Accounts of high risk, out-of-pattern charge cardmembers can be monitored even if they are current.
Cardmember receivable balances are presented on the Consolidated Balance Sheets net of reserves for losses (refer to Note 5), and include principal and any related accrued fees.


78


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
 
Accounts receivable as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 were as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
U.S. Card Services (a)
  $ 19,155     $ 17,750  
International Card Services
    6,673       5,944  
Global Commercial Services (b)
    11,259       9,844  
Global Network & Merchant Services (c)
    179       205  
                 
Cardmember receivables, gross (d)
    37,266       33,743  
Less: Cardmember reserve for losses
    386       546  
                 
Cardmember receivables, net
  $ 36,880     $ 33,197  
                 
Other receivables, net (e)
  $ 3,554     $ 5,007  
 
 
 
(a) Includes $7.7 billion and $7.8 billion of gross cardmember receivables available to settle obligations of a consolidated VIE as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
(b) Includes $0.5 billion of gross cardmember receivables available to settle obligations of a consolidated VIE as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.
(c) Includes receivables primarily related to the Company’s International Currency Card portfolios.
(d) Includes approximately $11.7 billion and $10.4 billion of cardmember receivables outside the United States as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
(e) Other receivables primarily represent amounts for tax-related receivables, amounts due from the Company’s travel customers and suppliers, purchased joint venture receivables, third-party issuing partners, amounts due from certain merchants for billed discount revenue, accrued interest on investments and other receivables due to the Company in the ordinary course of business. As of December 31, 2009, these amounts also include $1.9 billion of cash held in an unconsolidated VIE required for daily settlement requirements. Beginning January 1, 2010, this VIE is consolidated by the Company and cash held by this consolidated VIE is considered restricted cash included in other assets on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. Refer to Note 7 for additional details.
 
CARDMEMBER AND OTHER LOANS
Cardmember loans, representing amounts due from lending payment product customers, are recorded at the time a cardmember enters into a point-of-sale transaction with a merchant or when a charge card customer enters into an extended payment arrangement. The Company’s lending portfolios primarily include revolving loans to cardmembers obtained through either their credit card accounts or the lending on charge feature of their charge card accounts. These loans have a range of terms such as credit limits, interest rates, fees and payment structures, which can be adjusted over time based on new information about cardmembers and in accordance with applicable regulations and the respective product’s terms and conditions. Cardmembers holding revolving loans are typically required to make monthly payments greater than or equal to certain pre-established amounts. The amounts that cardmembers choose to revolve are subject to finance charges. When cardmembers fall behind their required payments, their accounts will be monitored.
Cardmember loans are presented on the Consolidated Balance Sheets net of reserves for losses and unamortized net card fees and include accrued interest receivable and fees. The Company’s policy generally is to cease accruing for interest receivable on a cardmember loan at the time the account is written off. The Company establishes reserves for interest that the Company believes will not be collected.
 
Loans as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 consisted of:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
U.S. Card Services (a)
  $ 51,565     $ 23,507  
International Card Services
    9,255       9,241  
Global Commercial Services
    30       24  
                 
Cardmember loans, gross (b)
    60,850       32,772  
Less: Cardmember loans reserve for losses
    3,646       3,268  
                 
Cardmember loans, net
  $ 57,204     $ 29,504  
                 
Other loans, net (c)
  $ 412     $ 506  
 
 
 
(a) As of December 31, 2010, includes approximately $34.7 billion of gross cardmember loans available to settle obligations of a consolidated VIE. As of December 31, 2009, includes approximately $8.0 billion for an undivided, pro-rata interest in an unconsolidated VIE (historically referred to as “seller’s interest”). Refer to Note 7 for additional details.
(b) Cardmember loan balance is net of unamortized net card fees of $134 million and $114 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.
(c) Other loans primarily represent small business installment loans, a store card portfolio whose billed business is not processed on the Company’s network and small business loans associated with the acquisition of CPS.
 
CARDMEMBER LOANS AND CARDMEMBER RECEIVABLES AGING
Generally a cardmember account is considered past due if payment is not received within 30 days after the billing statement date. The following table represents the aging of cardmember loans and receivables as of December 31, 2010:
 
                                         
   
          30-59
    60-89
    90+
       
          Days
    Days
    Days
       
          Past
    Past
    Past
       
(Millions)   Current     Due     Due     Due     Total  
 
Cardmember Loans:
                                       
U.S. Card Services
  $ 50,508     $ 282     $ 226     $ 549     $ 51,565  
International Card Services
    9,044       66       48       97       9,255  
Cardmember Receivables:
                                       
U.S. Card Services
  $ 18,864     $ 104     $ 55     $ 132     $ 19,155  
International Card Services (a)
    (b )     (b )     (b )     64       6,673  
Global Commercial Services (a)
    (b )     (b )     (b )     96       11,259  
 
 
 
(a) For cardmember receivables in International Card Services and Global Commercial Services, delinquency data is tracked based on days past billing status rather than days past due. A cardmember account is considered 90 days past billing if payment has not been received within 90 days of the cardmember’s billing statement date. In addition, if the Company initiates collection procedures on an account prior to the account becoming 90 days past billing the associated cardmember receivable balance is considered as 90 days past billing. These amounts are shown above as 90+ Days Past Due for presentation purposes.
(b) Historically, data for periods prior to 90 days past billing are not available due to system constraints. Therefore, it has not been utilized for risk management purposes. The balances that are current — 89 days past due can be derived as the difference between the Total and the 90+ Days Past Due balances.


79


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
CREDIT QUALITY INDICATORS FOR LOANS AND RECEIVABLES
The following table presents the key credit quality indicators for the years ended December 31:
 
                                 
   
    2010     2009  
          30 Days
          30 Days
 
    Net
    Past Due
    Net
    Past Due
 
    Write-Off
    as a % of
    Write-Off
    as a % of
 
(Millions, except percentages)   Rate     Total     Rate     Total  
 
U.S. Card Services Cardmember Loans
    5.8 %     2.1 %     9.1 %     3.7 %
U.S. Card Services Cardmember Receivables
    1.6 %     1.5 %     3.8 %     1.8 %
International Card Services Cardmember Loans
    4.6 %     2.3 %     6.8 %     3.3 %
 
 
 
                                 
   
    2010     2009  
         Net Loss
            Net Loss
       
    Ratio as
    90 Days
    Ratio as
    90 Days
 
    a % of
      Past Billing
    a % of
    Past Billing
 
    Charge
    as a % of
    Charge
    as a % of
 
(Millions, except percentages)   Volume (a)(b)       Receivables (a)       Volume     Receivables  
 
International Card Services Cardmember Receivables
    0.24 %     1.0 %     0.36 %     2.1 %
Global Commercial Services Cardmember Receivables
    0.11 %     0.8 %     0.19 %     1.4 %
 
 
 
(a) Effective January 1, 2010, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in International Card Services and Global Commercial Services are written off to when they are 180 days past due or earlier, consistent with applicable bank regulatory guidance and the write-off methodology adopted for U.S. Card Services in the fourth quarter of 2008. Previously, receivables were written off when they were 360 days past billing or earlier. The net write-offs for the first quarter of 2010 include net write-offs of approximately $60 million for International Card Services and $48 million for Global Commercial Services resulting from this write-off methodology change.
(b) Beginning with the first quarter of 2010, the Company has revised the net loss ratio to exclude net write-offs related to unauthorized transactions, consistent with the methodology for calculation of the net write-off rate for U.S. Card Services. The metrics for prior periods have not been revised for this change as it was deemed immaterial.
 
Refer to Note 5 for other factors, including external environmental factors, that management considers as part of its evaluation process for reserves for losses.
 
PLEDGED LOANS AND RECEIVABLES
Certain cardmember loans and receivables totaling approximately $42.9 billion as of December 31, 2010 are pledged by the Company to its Lending and Charge Trusts (including certain loans sold to the Trusts by the Company’s bank subsidiaries; refer to Note 7).
 
IMPAIRED LOANS AND RECEIVABLES
Impaired loans and receivables are defined by GAAP as individual larger balance or homogeneous pools of smaller balance restructured loans and receivables for which it is probable that the lender will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the original contractual terms of the loan and receivable agreement. The Company considers impaired loans and receivables to include: (i) loans over 90 days past due still accruing interest, (ii) non-accrual loans, and (iii) loans and receivables modified in a troubled debt restructuring (TDR).
The Company may modify cardmember loans and receivables to minimize losses to the Company while providing cardmembers with temporary or permanent financial relief. Such modifications may include reducing the interest rate or delinquency fees on the loans and receivables and/or placing the cardmember on a fixed payment plan not exceeding 60 months. If the cardmember does not comply with the modified terms, then the loan or receivable agreement generally reverts back to its original terms. Modification programs can be long-term (more than 12 months) or short term (12 months or less). The Company has classified such cardmember loans and receivables in these modification programs as TDRs.
The performance of a TDR is closely monitored to understand its impact on the Company’s reserve for losses. Though the ultimate success of these modification programs remains uncertain, the Company believes they improve the cumulative loss performance of such loans and receivables.
Reserves for a TDR are determined by the difference between cash flows expected to be received from the cardmember discounted at the original effective interest rates and the carrying value of the cardmember loan or receivable balance.


80


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
 
The following tables provide additional information with respect to the Company’s impaired cardmember loans and receivables as of December 31:
 
                                                         
   
    Loans over
                                     
    90 Days
          Loans &
                         
    Past Due
          Receivables
    Total
    Unpaid
          Related
 
(Millions)   & Accruing
    Non-Accrual
    Modified
    Impaired
    Principal
    Average
    Allowance
 
As of December 31, 2010   Interest (a)       Loans (b)       as a TDR (c)       Loans     Balance (d)       Balance     for TDRs (e)    
 
U.S. Card Services — Cardmember Loans
  $ 90     $ 628     $ 1,076     $ 1,794     $ 1,704     $ 2,255     $ 274  
International Card Services — Cardmember Loans
    95       8       11       114       112       142       5  
U.S. Card Services — Cardmember Receivables
                114       114       109       110       63  
                                                         
Total (g)(h)
  $ 185     $ 636     $ 1,201     $ 2,022     $ 1,925     $ 2,507     $ 342  
                                                         
As of December 31, 2009 (Owned)
                                                         
                                                         
U.S. Card Services — Cardmember Loans
  $ 102     $ 480     $ 706     $ 1,288       (f )     (f )   $ 180  
International Card Services — Cardmember Loans
    147       9       15       171       (f )     (f )     7  
U.S. Card Services — Cardmember Receivables
                94       94       (f )     (f )     64  
                                                         
Total (g)(h)
  $ 249     $ 489     $ 815     $ 1,553                     $ 251  
 
 
 
(a) The Company’s policy is generally to accrue interest through the date of charge-off (at 180 days past due). The Company establishes reserves for interest that the Company believes will not be collected.
(b) Non-accrual loans not in modification programs include certain cardmember loans placed with outside collection agencies for which the Company has ceased accruing interest.
(c) The total loans and receivables modified as a TDR include $655 million and $586 million that are non-accrual and $7 million and $1 million that are past due 90 days and still accruing interest as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. These amounts are excluded from the previous two columns.
(d) Unpaid principal balance consists of cardmember charges billed and excludes other amounts charged directly by the Company such as interest and fees.
(e) Reserves for losses for loans and receivables modified in a TDR are determined by the difference between cash flows expected to be received from the cardmember discounted at the original effective interest rate and the carrying value of the cardmember balance.
(f) Detailed data for these portfolios were not required prior to December 31, 2010. This information is not available for 2009.
(g) The increase in impaired loans was due to the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, which resulted in the consolidation of the Lending Trust as discussed further in Note 1. As a result of these changes, amounts as of December 31, 2010 include impaired loans and receivables for both the Charge Trust and Lending Trust; correspondingly, amounts as of December 31, 2009 only include impaired loans and receivables for the Charge Trust and the seller’s interest portion of the Lending Trust. Amounts as of both balance sheet dates also include impaired loans and receivables associated with other non-securitized portfolios.
(h) These disclosures either do not apply or are not significant for cardmember receivables in International Card Services and Global Commercial Services.
 
NOTE 5
RESERVES FOR LOSSES
 
RESERVES FOR LOSSES — CARDMEMBER RECEIVABLES AND LOANS
Reserves for losses relating to cardmember loans and receivables represent management’s best estimate of the losses inherent in the Company’s outstanding portfolio of loans and receivables. Management’s evaluation process requires certain estimates and judgments.
Reserves for these losses are primarily based upon models that analyze portfolio performance and reflect management’s judgment regarding overall reserve adequacy. The analytic models take into account several factors, including average losses and recoveries over an appropriate historical period. Management considers whether to adjust the analytic models for specific factors such as increased risk in certain portfolios, impact of risk management initiatives on portfolio performance and concentration of credit risk based on factors such as tenure, industry or geographic regions. In addition, management adjusts the reserves for losses on cardmember loans for other external environmental factors including leading economic and market indicators such as the unemployment rate, Gross Domestic Product (GDP), home price indices, non-farm payrolls, personal consumption expenditures index, consumer confidence index, purchasing managers index, bankruptcy filings and the legal and regulatory environment. Generally, due to the short-term nature of cardmember receivables, the impact of additional external factors on the inherent losses within the cardmember receivable portfolio is not significant. As part of this evaluation process, management also considers various reserve coverage metrics, such as reserves as a percentage of past due amounts, reserves as a percentage of cardmember receivables or loans and net write-off coverage.
Cardmember receivables balances are written off when management deems amounts to be uncollectible and is generally determined by the number of days past due, which is generally no later than 180 days past due. Receivables in bankruptcy or owed by deceased individuals are written off upon notification. Recoveries are recognized on a cash basis.


81


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
Changes in Cardmember Receivables Reserve for Losses
The following table presents changes in the cardmember receivables reserve for losses for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Balance, January 1
  $ 546     $ 810     $ 1,149  
Additions:
                       
Cardmember receivables provisions (a)
    439       773       1,186  
Cardmember receivables provisions — other (b)
    156       84       177  
                         
Total provision
    595       857       1,363  
                         
Deductions:
                       
Cardmember receivables net write-offs (c)(d)(e)
    (598 )     (1,131 )     (1,552 )
Cardmember receivables — other (f)
    (157 )     10       (150 )
                         
Balance, December 31
  $ 386     $ 546     $ 810  
 
 
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Cardmember receivables evaluated separately for impairment (g)
  $ 114     $ 94     $ 141  
Reserves on cardmember receivables
                       
evaluated separately for impairment (g)
  $ 63     $ 64       (h)  
 
 
Cardmember receivables evaluated collectively for impairment
  $ 37,152     $ 33,649     $ 32,847  
Reserves on cardmember receivables evaluated collectively for impairment
  $ 323     $ 482       (h)  
 
 
 
(a) Represents loss provisions for cardmember receivables consisting of principal (resulting from authorized transactions) and fee reserve components.
(b) Primarily represents loss provisions for cardmember receivables resulting from unauthorized transactions.
(c) Represents write-offs consisting of principal (resulting from authorized transactions) and fee components, less recoveries of $357 million, $349 million and $187 million for 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. For the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, these amounts also include net write-offs for cardmember receivables resulting from unauthorized transactions.
(d) Through December 31, 2009, cardmember receivables in the International Card Services (ICS) and Global Commercial Services (GCS) segments were written off when 360 days past billing or earlier. During the first quarter of 2010, consistent with applicable bank regulatory guidance, the Company modified its methodology to write off cardmember receivables in the ICS and GCS segments when 180 days past due or earlier. Therefore, net write-offs for cardmember receivables for the first quarter of 2010 included approximately $108 million resulting from this change in write-off methodology. The impact of this change to the provision for charge card losses was not material.
(e) In the fourth quarter of 2008, the Company revised the time period in which past due cardmember receivables in U.S. Card Services are written off to when 180 days past due, consistent with applicable regulatory guidance. Previously, receivables were written off when 360 days past due. The net write-offs for 2008 include approximately $341 million resulting from this write-off methodology change.
(f) For the year ended December 31, 2010, these amounts include net write-offs of cardmember receivables resulting from unauthorized transactions. For all periods these amounts include foreign currency translation adjustments.
(g) Represents receivables modified in a TDR and related reserves. Refer to the Impaired Loans and Receivables discussion in Note 4 for further information.
(h) Amounts were not available for disclosure.
 
Changes in Cardmember Loans Reserve for Losses
The following table presents changes in the cardmember loans reserve for losses for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Balance, January 1
  $ 3,268     $ 2,570     $ 1,831  
Reserves established for consolidation of a variable interest entity
    2,531              
                         
Total adjusted balance, January 1
    5,799       2,570       1,831  
                         
Additions:
                       
Cardmember loans provisions (a)
    1,445       4,209       4,106  
Cardmember loans — other (b)
    82       57       125  
                         
Total provision
    1,527       4,266       4,231  
                         
Deductions:
                       
Cardmember loans net write-offs — principal (c)
    (3,260 )     (2,949 )     (2,643 )
Cardmember loans net write-offs — interest and fees (c)
    (359 )     (448 )     (580 )
Cardmember loans — other (d)
    (61 )     (171 )     (269 )
                         
Balance, December 31
  $ 3,646     $ 3,268     $ 2,570  
 
 
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Cardmember loans evaluated separately for impairment (e)
  $ 1,087     $ 721     $ 427  
Reserves on cardmember loans evaluated separately for
  impairment (e)
  $ 279     $ 187       (f)  
                         
Cardmember loans evaluated collectively for impairment
  $ 59,763     $ 32,051     $ 41,784  
Reserves on cardmember loans evaluated collectively for
  impairment
  $ 3,367     $ 3,081       (f)  
 
 
 
(a) Represents loss provisions for cardmember loans consisting of principal (resulting from authorized transactions), interest and fee reserves components.
(b) Primarily represents loss provisions for cardmember loans resulting from unauthorized transactions.
(c) Cardmember loans net write-offs — principal for 2010, 2009 and 2008 include recoveries of $568 million, $327 million and $301 million, respectively. Recoveries of interest and fees were de minimis.
(d) These amounts include net write-offs related to unauthorized transactions and foreign currency translation adjustments.
(e) Represents loans modified in a TDR and related reserves. Refer to the Impaired Loans and Receivables discussion in Note 4 for further information.
(f) Amounts were not available for disclosure.

82


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 6
INVESTMENT SECURITIES
Investment securities include debt and equity securities and are classified as available for sale. The Company’s investment securities, principally debt securities, are carried at fair value on the Consolidated Balance Sheets with unrealized gains (losses) recorded in AOCI, net of income tax provisions (benefits). Realized gains and losses are recognized in results of operations upon disposition of the securities using the specific identification method on a trade date basis. Refer to Note 3 for a description of the Company’s methodology for determining the fair value of its investment securities.
 
The following is a summary of investment securities as of December 31:
 
                                                                 
   
    2010     2009  
          Gross
    Gross
    Estimated
          Gross
    Gross
    Estimated
 
          Unrealized
    Unrealized
    Fair
          Unrealized
    Unrealized
    Fair
 
(Millions)   Cost     Gains     Losses     Value     Cost     Gains     Losses     Value  
 
State and municipal obligations
  $ 6,140     $ 24     $ (367 )   $ 5,797     $ 6,457     $ 51     $ (258 )   $ 6,250  
U.S. Government agency obligations
    3,402       12       (1 )     3,413       6,699       47       (1 )     6,745  
U.S. Government treasury obligations
    2,450       6             2,456       5,556       10             5,566  
Corporate debt securities (a)
    1,431       15       (1 )     1,445       1,333       14       (12 )     1,335  
Retained subordinated securities (b)
                            3,088       512       (1 )     3,599  
Mortgage-backed securities (c)
    272       6       (2 )     276       179       3       (2 )     180  
Equity securities (d)
    98       377             475       100       430             530  
Foreign government bonds and obligations
    95       4             99       90       2             92  
Other (e)
    49                   49       40                   40  
                                                                 
Total
  $ 13,937     $ 444     $ (371 )   $ 14,010     $ 23,542     $ 1,069     $ (274 )   $ 24,337  
 
 
 
(a) The December 31, 2010 and 2009 balances include, on a cost basis, $1.3 billion and $1.1 billion, respectively, of corporate debt obligations issued under the Temporary Liquidity Guarantee Program (TLGP) that are guaranteed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC).
(b) As a result of the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company no longer presents the retained subordinated securities within its Consolidated Financial Statements in periods subsequent to December 31, 2009. The December 31, 2009, balance consists of investments in retained subordinated securities issued by unconsolidated VIEs related to the Company’s cardmember loan securitization programs. Refer to Note 7 for further details.
(c) Represents mortgage-backed securities guaranteed by Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac or Ginnie Mae.
(d) Represents the Company’s investment in Industrial and Commercial Bank of China (ICBC).
(e) Other is comprised of investments in various mutual funds.
 
OTHER-THAN-TEMPORARY IMPAIRMENT
Realized losses are recognized upon management’s determination that a decline in fair value is other than temporary. The determination of other-than-temporary impairment is a subjective process, requiring the use of judgments and assumptions regarding the amount and timing of recovery. The Company reviews and evaluates its investments at least quarterly and more often, as market conditions may require, to identify investments that have indications of other-than-temporary impairments. It is reasonably possible that a change in estimate could occur in the near term relating to other-than-temporary impairment. Accordingly, the Company considers several factors when evaluating debt securities for other-than-temporary impairment including the determination of the extent to which the decline in fair value of the security is due to increased default risk for the specific issuer or market interest rate risk. With respect to increased default risk, the Company assesses the collectibility of principal and interest payments by monitoring issuers’ credit ratings, related changes to those ratings, specific credit events associated with the individual issuers as well as the credit ratings of a financial guarantor, where applicable, and the extent to which amortized cost exceeds fair value and the duration and size of that difference. With respect to market interest rate risk, including benchmark interest rates and credit spreads, the Company assesses whether it has the intent to sell the securities and whether it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the securities before recovery of any unrealized losses.


83


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table provides information about the Company’s investment securities with gross unrealized losses and the length of time that individual securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position as of December 31:
 
                                                                 
   
    2010     2009  
(Millions)   Less than 12 months     12 months or more     Less than 12 months     12 months or more  
          Gross
          Gross
          Gross
          Gross
 
    Estimated
    Unrealized
    Estimated
    Unrealized
    Estimated
    Unrealized
    Estimated
    Unrealized
 
Description of Securities   Fair Value     Losses     Fair Value     Losses     Fair Value     Losses     Fair Value     Losses  
 
State and municipal obligations
  $ 2,535     $ (156 )   $ 1,076     $ (211 )   $ 837     $ (25 )   $ 2,074     $ (233 )
U.S. Government agency obligations
    299       (1 )                 249       (1 )            
Corporate debt securities
                3       (1 )     102       (1 )     38       (11 )
Retained subordinated securities
                                        75       (1 )
Mortgage-backed securities
    71       (2 )                 120       (2 )            
                                                                 
Total
  $ 2,905     $ (159 )   $ 1,079     $ (212 )   $ 1,308     $ (29 )   $ 2,187     $ (245 )
 
 
 
The following table summarizes the gross unrealized losses due to temporary impairments by ratio of fair value to amortized cost as of December 31:
 
                                                                         
   
(Millions)   Less than 12 months     12 months or more     Total  
                Gross
                Gross
                Gross
 
    Number of
    Estimated
    Unrealized
    Number of
    Estimated
    Unrealized
    Number of
    Estimated
    Unrealized
 
Ratio of Fair Value to Amortized Cost   Securities     Fair Value     Losses     Securities     Fair Value     Losses     Securities     Fair Value     Losses  
 
2010:
                                                                       
90%—100%
    457     $ 2,554     $ (113 )     31     $ 79     $ (7 )     488     $ 2,633     $ (120 )
Less than 90%
    48       351       (46 )     115       1,000       (205 )     163       1,351       (251 )
                                                                         
Total as of December 31, 2010
    505     $ 2,905     $ (159 )     146     $ 1,079     $ (212 )     651     $ 3,984     $ (371 )
                                                                         
2009:
                                                                       
90%—100%
    155     $ 1,289     $ (25 )     225     $ 1,411     $ (87 )     380     $ 2,700     $ (112 )
Less than 90%
    2       19       (4 )     78       776       (158 )     80       795       (162 )
                                                                         
Total as of December 31, 2009
    157     $ 1,308     $ (29 )     303     $ 2,187     $ (245 )     460     $ 3,495     $ (274 )
 
 
 
The gross unrealized losses on state and municipal securities and all other debt securities can be attributed to higher credit spreads generally for state and municipal securities, higher credit spreads for specific issuers, changes in market benchmark interest rates, or a combination thereof, all as compared to those prevailing when the investment securities were acquired.
In assessing default risk on these investment securities, excluding the Company’s retained subordinated securities, the Company has qualitatively considered the key factors identified above and determined that it expects to collect all of the contractual cash flows due on the investment securities. In assessing default risk on the retained subordinated securities in 2009, the Company analyzed the projected cash flows of the Lending Trust and determined that it expected to collect all of the contractual cash flows due on the investment securities.
Overall, for the investment securities in gross unrealized loss positions identified above, (a) the Company does not intend to sell the investment securities, (b) it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the investment securities before recovery of the unrealized losses, and (c) the Company expects that the contractual principal and interest will be received on the investment securities. As a result, the Company recognized no other-than-temporary impairments during the periods presented.
 
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION
Gross realized gains and losses on the sales of investment securities, included in other non-interest revenues, were as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Gains (a)
  $ 1     $ 226     $ 20  
Losses
    (6 )     (1 )     (8 )
                         
Total
  $ (5 )   $ 225     $ 12  
 
 
 
(a) The 2009 gains primarily represent the gain from the sale of 50 percent of the Company’s investment in ICBC.
 
Contractual maturities of investment securities, excluding equity securities and other securities, as of December 31, 2010, were as follows:
 
                 
   
          Estimated
 
(Millions)   Cost     Fair Value  
 
Due within 1 year
  $ 6,246     $ 6,253  
Due after 1 year but within 5 years
    1,110       1,134  
Due after 5 years but within 10 years
    299       307  
Due after 10 years
    6,135       5,792  
                 
Total
  $ 13,790     $ 13,486  
 
 
 
The expected payments on state and municipal obligations and mortgage-backed securities may not coincide with their


84


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
contractual maturities because the issuers have the right to call or prepay certain obligations.
NOTE 7
ASSET SECURITIZATIONS
 
CHARGE TRUST AND LENDING TRUST
The Company periodically securitizes cardmember receivables and loans arising from its card business through the transfer of those assets to securitization trusts. The trusts then issue securities to third-party investors, collateralized by the transferred assets.
Cardmember receivables are transferred to the Charge Trust and cardmember loans are transferred to the Lending Trust. As of December 31, 2009 and for all prior periods, cardmember receivables transferred to the Charge Trust did not qualify as accounting sales and accordingly, the Charge Trust was consolidated by the Company. As a result, securitized cardmember receivables and the related debt securities issued to third parties by the Charge Trust were included on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. The Lending Trust met the criteria of a QSPE for GAAP in effect through December 31, 2009 and, accordingly, cardmember loans transferred to the Lending Trust qualified as accounting sales. As a result, when cardmember loans were sold through securitizations, the Company removed the loans from its Consolidated Balance Sheets and recognized a gain or loss on sale, recorded certain retained interests in the securitization (i.e., retained subordinated securities and an interest-only strip asset) and received an undivided pro-rata interest in the excess loans held in the Lending Trust (historically referred to as “seller’s interest”).
Upon adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company continues to consolidate the Charge Trust. In addition, the Company was required to change its accounting for the Lending Trust, which is now consolidated. As a result, beginning January 1, 2010, the securitized cardmember loans and the related debt securities issued to third parties by the Lending Trust are included on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. Prior period Consolidated Financial Statements have not been revised for this accounting change.
The Charge Trust and the Lending Trust are consolidated by American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. (TRS), which is a consolidated subsidiary of the Company. The trusts are considered VIEs as they have insufficient equity at risk to finance their activities, which are to issue securities that are collateralized by the underlying cardmember receivables and loans.
TRS, in its role as servicer of the Charge Trust and the Lending Trust, has the power to direct the most significant activity of the trusts, which is the collection of the underlying cardmember receivables and loans in the trusts. In addition, TRS owns approximately $1.4 billion of subordinated securities issued by the Lending Trust as of December 31, 2010. These subordinated securities have the obligation to absorb losses of the Lending Trust and provide the right to receive benefits from the Lending Trust, both of which are significant to the VIE. TRS’ role as servicer for the Charge Trust does not provide it with a significant obligation to absorb losses or a significant right to receive benefits. However, TRS’ position as the parent company of the entities that transferred the receivables to the Charge Trust makes it the party most closely related to the Charge Trust. Based on these considerations, TRS was determined to be the primary beneficiary of both the Charge Trust and the Lending Trust.
The debt securities issued by the Charge Trust and the Lending Trust are non-recourse to the Company. Securitized cardmember receivables and loans held by the Charge Trust and the Lending Trust are available only for payment of the debt securities or other obligations issued or arising in the securitization transactions. The long-term debt of each trust is payable only out of collections on their respective underlying securitized assets.
There was approximately $9.0 million and $1.8 billion of restricted cash held by the Charge Trust as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively, and approximately $3.7 billion of restricted cash held by the Lending Trust as of December 31, 2010 included in other assets on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. Also, as of December 31, 2009, other receivables on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheet included $1.9 billion of restricted cash held in the Lending Trust. These amounts relate to collections of cardmember receivables and loans to be used by the trusts to fund future expenses, and obligations, including interest paid on investor certificates, credit losses and upcoming debt maturities.


85


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
LENDING TRUST — IMPACT ON THE CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET
The following table summarizes the major balance sheet impacts, including adjustments associated with the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, for the consolidation of the Lending Trust:
 
                         
   
    Balance
          Adjusted Balance
 
(Billions)   December 31, 2009     Adjustments     January 1, 2010  
 
Cardmember loans
  $ 32.8     $ 29.0     $ 61.8  
Loss reserves (cardmember loans)
    (3.3 )     (2.5 )     (5.8 )
Investment securities
    24.3       (3.6 )     20.7  
Other receivables
    5.1       (1.9 )     3.2  
Other assets
    13.2       2.2       15.4  
Long-term debt
    52.3       25.0       77.3  
Shareholders’ equity
    14.4       (1.8 )     12.6  
 
 
 
The primary changes to the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets were:
 
  An increase to cardmember loans (including impaired loans and pledged loans) for the cardmember loans held by the Lending Trust;
 
  An increase to cardmember loans for the subordinated accrued interest receivable for cardmember loans held by the Lending Trust, with a corresponding decrease in other assets;
 
  Establishment of a cardmember reserve for losses for the additional cardmember loans;
 
  The elimination in consolidation of the Company’s retained subordinated securities against the debt securities issued by the Lending Trust;
 
  The elimination of the interest-only strip;
 
  An increase to long-term debt for the debt securities issued by the Lending Trust;
 
  A reduction to shareholders’ equity, primarily for the after-tax effect of establishing the additional reserve for losses on cardmember loans, and for reversing the unrealized gains of the retained subordinated securities.
 
CHARGE TRUST AND LENDING TRUST TRIGGERING EVENTS
Under the respective terms of the Charge Trust and the Lending Trust agreements, the occurrence of certain events could result in establishment of reserve funds, or in a worst-case scenario, early amortization of investor certificates. As of December 31, 2010, no triggering events have occurred resulting in funding of reserve accounts or early amortization.
The Company announced in the second quarter of 2009 that certain actions affecting outstanding series of securities issued by the Lending Trust were completed in order to adjust the credit enhancement structure of substantially all of the outstanding series of securities previously issued by the Lending Trust. One of these enhancements was the designation of a percentage of new principal receivables arising from accounts in the Lending Trust as “Discount Option Receivables” (as defined in the Lending Trust documentation). The designated percentage was reduced to zero percent in the third quarter of 2010 given that the trust excess spread had exceeded pre-determined targets.
 
SECURITIZATION INCOME, NET
As a result of the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company no longer recognizes securitization income, net. The components of securitization income, net for the cardmember loans and long-term debt, are now recorded in other commissions and fees, interest income and interest expense.
 
The following table summarizes the activity related to securitized loans reported in securitization income, net, prior to adoption of the new accounting standards:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2009     2008  
 
Excess spread, net (a)
  $ (155 )   $ 544  
Servicing fees
    562       543  
Losses on securitizations (b)
    (7 )     (17 )
                 
Securitization income, net
  $ 400     $ 1,070  
 
 
 
(a) Excess spread, net was the net cash flow from interest and fee collections allocated to the investors’ interests after deducting the interest paid on investor certificates, credit losses, contractual servicing fees, other expenses, and the changes in the fair value of the interest-only strip. This amount excludes issuer rate fees on the securitized accounts, which were recorded in discount revenue in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Income.
(b) Excludes $201 million and $(393) million of impact from cardmember loan sales and maturities for 2009, reflected in the provisions for losses for the period. Excludes $446 million and $(177) million of impact from cardmember loan sales and maturities for 2008, reflected in the provisions for losses for the period.


86


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
 
RETAINED INTERESTS IN SECURITIZED ASSETS
As of December 31, 2009, the Company retained subordinated interests in the securitized cardmember loans. These interests included one or more A-rated, BBB-rated and unrated investments in tranches of the securitization (subordinated securities) of $3.6 billion and an interest-only strip of $20 million. The subordinated securities were accounted for at fair value as available-for-sale investment securities and were reported in investments on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets with unrealized gains (losses) recorded in AOCI. The interest-only strip was accounted for at fair value and was reported in other assets on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets with changes in fair value recorded in securitization income, net in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Income.
 
NOTE 8
OTHER ASSETS
The following is a summary of other assets as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Restricted cash (a)
  $ 4,172     $ 2,192  
Deferred tax assets, net (b)
    3,397       2,979  
Goodwill
    2,639       2,328  
Prepaid expenses (c)
    1,802       2,114  
Derivative assets (b)
    1,071       800  
Other intangible assets, at amortized cost
    972       717  
Subordinated accrued interest receivable (d)
          719  
Other
    1,315       1,364  
                 
Total
  $ 15,368     $ 13,213  
 
 
 
(a) Includes restricted cash of $3.7 billion and $1.8 billion, respectively, as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, which is primarily held for certain asset-backed securitization maturities.
(b) Refer to Notes 17 and 12 for a discussion of deferred tax assets, net, and derivative assets, respectively, as of December 31, 2010 and 2009. Derivative assets reflect the effect of master netting agreements.
(c) Includes prepaid miles and reward points acquired from airline and other partners of approximately $1.2 billion and $1.3 billion, respectively, as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.
(d) Upon the adoption of new GAAP on January 1, 2010, subordinated accrued interest receivable is no longer recorded in other assets and is now recorded in cardmember loans on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
GOODWILL
Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition cost of an acquired company over the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed. The Company assigns goodwill to its reporting units for the purpose of impairment testing. A reporting unit is defined as an operating segment, or a business one level below an operating segment for which complete, discrete financial information is available that management regularly reviews. The Company evaluates goodwill for impairment annually as of June 30 and between annual tests if events occur or circumstances change that more likely than not reduce the fair value of reporting units below their carrying amounts. The goodwill impairment test utilizes a two-step approach. The first step identifies whether there is potential impairment by comparing the fair value of a reporting unit to the carrying amount, including goodwill. If the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, the second step of the impairment test is required to measure the amount of any impairment loss. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, goodwill was not impaired and there were no accumulated impairment losses.
Goodwill impairment testing involves management judgment, requiring an assessment of whether the carrying value of the reporting unit can be supported by the fair value of the individual reporting unit using widely accepted valuation techniques, such as the market approach (earnings multiples or transaction multiples) or income approach (discounted cash flow methods). The fair values of the reporting units were determined using a combination of valuation techniques consistent with the income approach and the market approach.
When preparing discounted cash flow models under the income approach, the Company uses internal forecasts to estimate future cash flows expected to be generated by the reporting units. Actual results may differ from forecasted results. The Company uses the expected cost of equity financing, estimated using a capital asset pricing model, to discount future cash flows for each reporting unit. The Company believes the discount rates used appropriately reflect the risks and uncertainties in the financial markets generally and specifically in the Company’s internally developed forecasts. Further, to assess the reasonableness of the valuations derived from the discounted cash flow models, the Company also analyzes market-based multiples for similar industries of the reporting unit, where available.
 


87


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The changes in the carrying amount of goodwill reported in the Company’s reportable operating segments and Corporate & Other were as follows:
 
                                                 
   
                            Corporate &
       
(Millions)   USCS     ICS     GCS     GNMS     Other     Total  
 
Balance as of January 1, 2009
  $ 175     $ 509     $ 1,573     $ 28     $ 16     $ 2,301  
Other, including foreign currency translation
          3       24                   27  
                                                 
Balance as of December 31, 2009
  $ 175     $ 512     $ 1,597     $ 28     $ 16     $ 2,328  
Acquisitions (a)
                      131       184       315  
Dispositions
                (2 )                 (2 )
Other, including foreign currency translation
          (1 )     (1 )                 (2 )
                                                 
Balance as of December 31, 2010
  $ 175     $ 511     $ 1,594     $ 159     $ 200     $ 2,639  
 
 
 
(a) Comprised of $131 million and $184 million for the acquisition of Accertify Inc. and Revolution Money Inc., respectively. Refer to Note 2 for further discussion.
 
OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Intangible assets are amortized over their estimated useful lives of 1 to 22 years. The Company reviews intangible assets for impairment quarterly and whenever events and circumstances indicate that their carrying amounts may not be recoverable. In addition, on an annual basis, the Company performs an impairment evaluation of all intangible assets by assessing the recoverability of the asset values based on the cash flows generated by the relevant assets or asset groups. An impairment is recognized if the carrying amount is not recoverable and exceeds the asset’s fair value.
 
The components of other intangible assets were as follows:
 
                                                 
   
    2010     2009  
    Gross Carrying
    Accumulated
    Net Carrying
    Gross Carrying
    Accumulated
    Net Carrying
 
(Millions)   Amount     Amortization     Amount     Amount     Amortization     Amount  
 
Customer relationships
  $ 1,125     $ (332 )   $ 793     $ 873     $ (240 )   $ 633  
Other
              262       (83 )     179                  145       (61 )     84  
                                                 
Total
  $ 1,387     $ (415 )   $ 972     $ 1,018     $ (301 )   $ 717  
 
 
 
Amortization expense for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $176 million, $140 million and $83 million, respectively. Intangible assets acquired in 2010 and 2009 are being amortized, on average, over 8 years and 5 years, respectively.
 
Estimated amortization expense for other intangible assets over the next five years is as follows:
 
                                         
   
(Millions)   2011     2012     2013     2014     2015  
 
Estimated amortization expense
  $ 178     $ 168     $ 156     $ 131     $ 117  
 
 
 
OTHER
The Company has $197 million and $168 million in affordable housing partnership interests as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively, included in other assets in the table above. The Company is a limited partner and typically has a less than 50 percent interest in the affordable housing partnerships.
 
These partnership interests are accounted for in accordance with GAAP governing equity method investments and joint ventures.


88


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 9
CUSTOMER DEPOSITS
As of December 31, customer deposits were categorized as interest-bearing or non-interest-bearing deposits as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
U.S.:
               
Interest-bearing
  $ 29,053     $ 25,579  
Non-interest-bearing
    17       13  
Non-U.S.:
               
Interest-bearing
    640       680  
Non-interest-bearing
    17       17  
                 
Total customer deposits
  $ 29,727     $ 26,289  
 
 
 
The customer deposits were aggregated by deposit type offered by the Company as of December 31 as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
U.S. retail deposits:
               
Savings accounts — Direct
  $ 7,725     $ 1,950  
Certificates of deposit
               
Direct
    1,052       265  
Third party
    11,411       14,816  
Sweep accounts — Third party
    8,865       8,548  
Other deposits
    674       710  
                 
Total customer deposits
  $ 29,727     $ 26,289  
 
 
 
 
The scheduled maturities of all certificates of deposit as of December 31, 2010 were as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   U.S.     Non-U.S.     Total  
 
2011
  $ 5,696     $ 371     $ 6,067  
2012
    2,901             2,901  
2013
    2,293             2,293  
2014
    1,020             1,020  
2015
    121             121  
After 5 years
    432             432  
                         
Total
  $ 12,463     $ 371     $ 12,834  
 
 
 
As of December 31, certificates of deposit in denominations of $100,000 or more were as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
U.S. 
  $ 689     $ 196  
Non-U.S. 
    291       293  
                 
Total
  $ 980     $ 489  
 
 
 
NOTE 10
DEBT
 
SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS
The Company’s short-term borrowings outstanding, defined as borrowings with original maturities of less than one year, as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                                         
   
    2010     2009  
                            Year-End Effective
 
          Year-End Stated
          Year-End Stated
    Interest Rate with
 
(Millions, except percentages)   Outstanding Balance     Rate on Debt (a)       Outstanding Balance     Rate on Debt (a)       Swaps (a)(b)    
 
Commercial paper
  $ 645       0.16 %   $ 975       0.19 %      
Other short-term borrowings (c)
    2,769       1.23 %     1,369       0.85 %     0.85 %
                                         
Total (d)
  $ 3,414       1.03 %   $ 2,344       0.57 %        
 
 
 
(a) For floating-rate debt issuances, the stated and effective interest rates are based on the floating rates in effect as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. These rates may not be indicative of future interest rates.
(b) Effective interest rates are only presented if swaps are in place to hedge the underlying debt. There were no swaps in place as of December 31, 2010.
(c) Includes interest-bearing overdrafts with banks of $966 million and $277 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. In addition, balances include certain book overdrafts (i.e., primarily timing differences arising in the ordinary course of business), short-term borrowings from banks, as well as interest-bearing amounts due to merchants in accordance with merchant service agreements.
(d) The Company did not have any federal funds purchased as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.


89


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
 
LONG-TERM DEBT
The Company’s long-term debt outstanding, defined as debt with original maturities of one year or greater, as of December 31 was as follows:
 
                                                     
   
    2010     2009  
                    Year-End
                Year-End
 
              Year-End
    Effective
                Effective
 
              Stated
    Interest
                Interest
 
    Maturity
  Outstanding
    Rate on
    Rate with
    Outstanding
    Year-End Stated
    Rate with
 
(Millions, except percentages)   Dates   Balance (a)       Debt (b)       Swaps (b)(c)       Balance (a)      Rate on Debt (b)       Swaps (b)(c)    
 
American Express Company (Parent Company only)
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
  2011-2038   $ 9,604       6.83 %     6.02 %   $ 9,499       6.83 %     6.01 %
Subordinated Debentures (d)
  2036     745       6.80 %           744       6.80 %      
American Express Travel Related Services Company Inc.
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
  2011     700       5.25 %           700       5.25 %      
Floating Rate Senior Notes
  2011     500       0.47 %     5.63 %     500       0.44 %     5.63 %
American Express Credit Corporation
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
  2011-2015     12,406       5.15 %     3.07 %     11,478       5.58 %     3.26 %
Floating Rate Senior Notes
  2011-2013     2,480       1.51 %           4,761       1.30 %      
Borrowings under Bank Credit Facilities
  2012     4,118       5.33 %     5.38 %     3,232       4.23 %     4.52 %
American Express Centurion Bank
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
  2012-2017     2,166       5.83 %     3.31 %     2,726       5.69 %     2.86 %
Floating Rate Senior Notes
  2012     400       0.41 %           1,975       0.31 %      
American Express Bank, FSB
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
  2011-2017     7,168       4.40 %     2.72 %     7,137       4.40 %     2.70 %
Floating Rate Senior Notes
  2011-2017     2,750       0.92 %           4,502       0.80 %     1.22 %
American Express Charge Trust
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
                        1,000       4.02 %      
Floating Rate Senior Notes (e)
  2012-2014     3,988       0.51 %           3,826       0.57 %      
Floating Rate Subordinated Notes
  2012     72       0.74 %           144       0.67 %      
American Express Lending Trust (f)
                                                   
Fixed Rate Senior Notes
  2011     437       5.35 %                              
Floating Rate Senior Notes
  2011-2018     17,516       0.89 %                              
Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes
  2011     63       5.61 %                              
Floating Rate Subordinated Notes
  2011-2015     1,275       0.66 %                              
Other
                                                   
Fixed Rate Instruments (g)
  2011-2022     141       5.64 %           114       4.98 %        
Unamortized Underwriting Fees
        (113 )                                      
                                                     
Total Long-Term Debt
      $ 66,416       3.48 %           $ 52,338       4.11 %        
 
 
 
(a) The outstanding balances include (i) unamortized discounts (ii) the impact of movements in exchange rates on foreign currency denominated debt ($0.6 billion and $1.2 billion as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively), and (iii) the impact of fair value hedge accounting on certain fixed rate notes that have been swapped to floating rate through the use of interest rate swaps. Under fair value hedge accounting, the outstanding balances on these fixed rate notes are adjusted to reflect the impact of changes in fair value due to changes in interest rates. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the impact on long-term debt due to fair value hedge accounting was an increase of $0.8 billion and $0.6 billion, respectively. Refer to Note 12 for more details on the Company’s treatment of fair value hedges.
(b) For floating rate debt issuances, the stated and effective interest rates are based on the floating rates in effect as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. These rates may not be indicative of future interest rates.
(c) Effective interest rates are only presented when swaps are in place to hedge the underlying debt.
(d) The maturity date will automatically be extended to September 1, 2066, except in the case of either (i) a prior redemption or (ii) a default. See further discussion below.
(e) The conduit facility expires on December 15, 2013; the Company is required to pay down the balance one month after the expiry of the facility.
(f) Upon adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Lending Trust was consolidated. The December 31, 2009 non-consolidated outstanding balance was $25.0 billion and the year-end stated rate was 0.87 percent.
(g) Includes $132 million and $87 million as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively, related to lease transactions.


90


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Parent Company had $750 million principal outstanding of Subordinated Debentures that accrue interest at an annual rate of 6.8 percent until September 1, 2016, and at an annual rate of three-month LIBOR plus 2.23 percent thereafter. At the Company’s option, the Subordinated Debentures are redeemable for cash after September 1, 2016 at 100 percent of the principal amount plus any accrued but unpaid interest. If the Company fails to achieve specified performance measures, it will be required to issue common shares and apply the net proceeds to make interest payments on the Subordinated Debentures. No dividends on the Company’s common or preferred shares could be paid until such interest payments are made. The Company would fail to meet these specific performance measures if (i) the Company’s tangible common equity is less than 4 percent of total adjusted assets for the most recent quarter or (ii) if the trailing two quarters’ consolidated net income is equal to or less than zero and tangible common equity as of the trigger determination date, and as of the end of the quarter end six months prior, has in each case declined by 10 percent or more from tangible common equity as of the end of the quarter 18 months prior to the trigger determination date. The Company met the specified performance measures in 2010.
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company was not in violation of any of its debt covenants.
 
Aggregate annual maturities on long-term debt obligations (based on final maturity dates) as of December 31, 2010 were as follows:
 
                                                         
   
(Millions)   2011     2012     2013     2014     2015     Thereafter     Total  
 
American Express Company (Parent Company only)
  $ 400     $     $ 998     $ 1,249     $     $ 7,702     $ 10,349  
American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc. 
    1,200                                     1,200  
American Express Credit Corporation
    2,150       5,679       5,118       3,573       2,484             19,004  
American Express Centurion Bank
          1,207                   5       1,354       2,566  
American Express Bank, FSB
    5,173       1,607       1,840                   1,298       9,918  
American Express Charge Trust
          1,560             2,500                   4,060  
American Express Lending Trust
    5,330       5,222       2,904       2,685       1,950       1,200       19,291  
Other
    10                   84             47       141  
                                                         
    $ 14,263     $ 15,275     $ 10,860     $ 10,091     $ 4,439     $ 11,601     $ 66,529  
     
     
Unamortized Underwriting Fees
                                                  $ (113 )
                                                         
Total Long-Term Debt
                                                  $ 66,416  
 
 
 
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company maintained total bank lines of credit of $10.6 billion and $12.2 billion, respectively. Of the total credit lines, $6.5 billion and $9.0 billion were unutilized, and for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively, the Company paid $7.7 million and $6.8 million in fees to maintain these lines. Unutilized amounts of $5.7 billion and $8.2 billion supported commercial paper borrowings as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. In 2011 and 2012, respectively, $3.3 billion and $7.3 billion of these credit facilities will expire.
The availability of these credit lines is subject to the Company’s compliance with certain financial covenants, including the maintenance by the Company of consolidated tangible net worth of at least $4.1 billion, the maintenance by American Express Credit Corporation (Credco) of a 1.25 ratio of combined earnings and fixed charges to fixed charges, and the compliance by American Express Centurion Bank (Centurion Bank) and American Express Bank, FSB (FSB) with applicable regulatory capital adequacy guidelines. As of December 31, 2010, the Company’s consolidated tangible net worth was approximately $13.1 billion, Credco’s ratio of combined earnings and fixed charges to fixed charges was 1.54 and Centurion Bank and FSB each exceeded their regulatory capital adequacy guidelines.
Additionally, the Company maintained a 3-year committed, revolving, secured financing facility which gives the Company the right to sell up to $3.0 billion face amount of eligible notes issued from the Charge Trust at any time through December 16, 2013. As of December 31, 2010, $2.5 billion was drawn on this facility.
These committed facilities do not contain material adverse change clauses and the facilities may not be terminated should there be a change in the Company’s credit rating.
The Company paid total interest primarily related to short- and long-term debt, corresponding interest rate swaps and customer deposits of $2.4 billion, $2.3 billion and $3.5 billion in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.


91


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 11
OTHER LIABILITIES
The following is a summary of other liabilities as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Membership Rewards liabilities
  $ 4,500     $ 4,303  
Employee-related liabilities (a)
    2,026       1,877  
Book overdraft balances
    1,538       1,422  
Rebate accruals (b)
    1,475       1,309  
Deferred charge card fees, net
    1,036       1,034  
Other (c)
    5,371       4,785  
                 
Total
  $ 15,946     $ 14,730  
 
 
 
(a) Employee-related liabilities include employee benefit plan obligations and incentive compensation.
(b) Rebate accruals include payments to third-party card issuing partners and cash-back reward costs.
(c) Other includes accruals for general operating expenses, litigation, client incentives, advertising and promotion, derivatives, restructuring and reengineering reserves.
 
MEMBERSHIP REWARDS
The Membership Rewards program allows enrolled cardmembers to earn points that can be redeemed for a broad range of rewards including travel, entertainment, retail certificates and merchandise. The Company establishes balance sheet liabilities which represent the estimated cost of points earned to date that are ultimately expected to be redeemed. These liabilities reflect management’s best estimate of the cost of future redemptions. An ultimate redemption rate and weighted average cost per point are key factors used to approximate the Membership Rewards liability. Management uses models to estimate ultimate redemption rates based on historical redemption data, card product type, year of program enrollment, enrollment tenure and card spend levels. The weighted-average cost per point is determined using actual redemptions during the previous 12 months, adjusted as appropriate for recent changes in redemption costs.
The provision for the cost of Membership Rewards points is included in marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services. The Company continually evaluates its reserve methodology and assumptions based on developments in redemption patterns, cost per point redeemed, contract changes and other factors.
 
DEFERRED CHARGE CARD FEES
The carrying amount of deferred charge card and other fees, net of direct acquisition costs and reserves for membership cancellations as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Deferred charge card and other fees (a)
  $ 1,194     $ 1,213  
Deferred direct acquisition costs
    (67 )     (60 )
Reserves for membership cancellations
    (91 )     (119 )
                 
Deferred charge card fees and other, net of direct acquisition costs and reserves
  $ 1,036     $ 1,034  
 
 
 
(a) Includes deferred fees for Membership Rewards program participants.
 
NOTE 12
DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING
ACTIVITIES
The Company uses derivative financial instruments (derivatives) to manage exposure to various market risks. Market risk is the risk to earnings or value resulting from movements in market prices. The Company’s market risk exposure is primarily generated by:
 
  Interest rate risk in its card, insurance and Travelers Cheque businesses, as well as its investment portfolios; and
 
  Foreign exchange risk in its operations outside the United States.
 
General principles and the overall framework for managing market risk across the Company are defined in the Market Risk Policy, which is the responsibility of the Asset-Liability Committee (ALCO). Market risk limits and escalation triggers in that policy are approved by the ALCO and by the Enterprise-wide Risk Management Committee (ERMC). Market risk is centrally monitored for compliance with policy and limits by the Market Risk Committee, which reports into the ALCO and is chaired by the Chief Market Risk Officer. Market risk management is also guided by policies covering the use of derivatives, funding and liquidity and investments. Derivatives derive their value from an underlying variable or multiple variables, including interest rate, foreign exchange, and equity indices or prices. These instruments enable end users to increase, reduce or alter exposure to various market risks and, for that reason, are an integral component of the Company’s market risk management. The Company does not engage in derivatives for trading purposes.
The Company’s market exposures are in large part byproducts of the delivery of its products and services. Interest rate risk arises through the funding of cardmember receivables and fixed-rate loans with variable-rate borrowings as well as through the risk to net interest margin from changes in the relationship between benchmark rates such as Prime and LIBOR.
Interest rate exposure within the Company’s charge card and fixed-rate lending products is managed by varying the proportion of total funding provided by short-term and variable-rate debt and deposits compared to fixed-rate debt and deposits. In addition, interest rate swaps are used from time to time to effectively convert fixed-rate debt to variable-rate or to convert variable-rate debt to fixed rate. The Company may change the mix between variable-rate and fixed-rate funding based on changes in business volumes and mix, among other factors.
Foreign exchange risk is generated by cardmember cross-currency charges, foreign currency balance sheet exposures, foreign subsidiary equity, and foreign currency earnings in units outside the United States. The Company’s foreign exchange risk is managed primarily by entering into agreements to buy and sell currencies on a spot basis or by hedging this market exposure to the extent it is economically


92


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
justified through various means, including the use of derivatives such as foreign exchange forward, and cross-currency swap contracts, which can help “lock in” the value of the Company’s exposure to specific currencies.
Derivatives may give rise to counterparty credit risk. The Company manages this risk by considering the current exposure, which is the replacement cost of contracts on the measurement date, as well as estimating the maximum potential value of the contracts over the next 12 months, considering such factors as the volatility of the underlying or reference index. To mitigate derivative credit risk, counterparties are required to be pre-approved and rated as investment grade. Counterparty risk exposures are monitored by the Company’s Institutional Risk Management Committee (IRMC). The IRMC formally reviews large institutional exposures to ensure compliance with the Company’s ERMC guidelines and procedures and determines the risk mitigation actions, when necessary. Additionally, in order to mitigate the bilateral counterparty credit risk associated with derivatives, the Company has, in certain limited instances, entered into agreements with its derivative counterparties including master netting agreements, which may provide a right of offset for certain exposures between the parties.
In relation to the Company’s credit risk, under the terms of the derivative agreements it has with its various counterparties, the Company is not required to either immediately settle any outstanding liability balances or post collateral upon the occurrence of a specified credit risk-related event. In relation to counterparty credit risk, as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, such risk associated with the Company’s derivatives was not significant. The Company’s derivatives are carried at fair value on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The accounting for changes in fair value depends on the instruments’ intended use and the resulting hedge designation, if any, as discussed below. Refer to Note 3 for a description of the Company’s methodology for determining the fair value of its derivatives.
 
The following table summarizes the total gross fair value, excluding interest accruals, of derivative assets and liabilities as of December 31:
 
                                 
   
    Other Assets
    Other Liabilities
 
    Fair Value     Fair Value  
(Millions)   2010     2009     2010     2009  
 
Derivatives designated as hedging instruments:
                               
Interest rate contracts
                               
Fair value hedges
  $ 909     $ 632     $ 38     $ 6  
Cash flow hedges
    2       1       13       44  
Foreign exchange contracts
                               
Net investment hedges
    66       132       272       130  
                                 
Total derivatives designated as hedging instruments
  $ 977     $ 765     $ 323     $ 180  
                                 
Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
                               
Interest rate contracts
  $ 3     $ 11     $ 3     $ 5  
Foreign exchange contracts, including certain embedded derivatives (a)
    109       57       91       95  
Equity-linked embedded derivative (b)
                2       3  
                                 
Total derivatives not designated as hedging instruments
    112       68       96       103  
                                 
Total derivatives (c)
  $ 1,089     $ 833     $ 419     $ 283  
 
 
 
(a) Includes foreign currency derivatives embedded in certain operating agreements.
(b) Represents an equity-linked derivative embedded in one of the Company’s investment securities.
(c) GAAP permits the netting of derivative assets and derivative liabilities when a legally enforceable master netting agreement exists between the Company and its derivative counterparty. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, $18 million and $33 million, respectively, of derivative assets and liabilities have been offset and presented net on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS THAT QUALIFY FOR HEDGE ACCOUNTING
Derivatives executed for hedge accounting purposes are documented and designated as such when the Company enters into the contracts. In accordance with its risk management policies, the Company structures its hedges with very similar terms to the hedged items. The Company formally assesses, at inception of the hedge accounting relationship and on a quarterly basis, whether derivatives designated as hedges are highly effective in offsetting the fair value or cash flows of the hedged items. These assessments usually are made through the application of the regression analysis method. If it is determined that a derivative is not highly effective as a hedge, the Company will discontinue the application of hedge accounting.
 
FAIR VALUE HEDGES
A fair value hedge involves a derivative designated to hedge the Company’s exposure to future changes in the fair value of an asset or a liability, or an identified portion thereof that is attributable to a particular risk. The Company is exposed to interest rate risk associated with its fixed-rate long-term debt. The Company uses interest rate swaps to convert certain fixed-rate long-term debt to floating-rate at the time of issuance. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company hedged $15.9 billion


93


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
and $15.1 billion, respectively, of its fixed-rate debt to floating-rate debt using interest rate swaps.
To the extent the fair value hedge is effective, the gain or loss on the hedging instrument offsets the loss or gain on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk. Any difference between the changes in the fair value of the derivative and the hedged item is referred to as hedge ineffectiveness and is reflected in earnings as a component of other, net expenses. Hedge ineffectiveness may be caused by differences between the debt’s interest coupon and the benchmark rate, which are primarily due to credit spreads at inception of the hedging relationship that are not reflected in the valuation of the interest rate swap. Furthermore, hedge ineffectiveness may be caused by changes in the relationship between 3-month LIBOR and 1-month LIBOR rates, as these so-called basis spreads may impact the valuation of the interest rate swap without causing an offsetting impact in the value of the hedged debt. If a fair value hedge is de-designated or no longer considered to be effective, changes in fair value of the derivative continue to be recorded through earnings but the hedged asset or liability is no longer adjusted for changes in fair value due to changes in interest rates. The existing basis adjustment of the hedged asset or liability is then amortized or accreted as an adjustment to yield over the remaining life of that asset or liability.
 
The following table summarizes the impact on the Consolidated Statements of Income associated with the Company’s hedges of fixed-rate long-term debt described above:
 
                                                                                 
   
For the Years Ended December 31:  
(Millions)   Gains (losses) recognized in income  
    Derivative contract     Hedged item     Net hedge
 
        Amount         Amount     ineffectiveness  
Derivative relationship   Location   2010     2009     2008     Location   2010     2009     2008     2010     2009     2008  
 
Interest rate contracts
  Other, net expenses   $ 246     $ (446 )   $ 967     Other, net expenses   $ (233 )   $ 437     $ (898 )   $   13     $   (9 )   $   69  
 
 
 
The Company also recognized a net reduction in interest expense on long-term debt and other of $522 million, $464 million and $122 million for the three years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, primarily related to the net settlements (interest accruals) on the Company’s interest rate derivatives designated as fair value hedges.
 
CASH FLOW HEDGES
A cash flow hedge involves a derivative designated to hedge the Company’s exposure to variable future cash flows attributable to a particular risk. Such exposures may relate to either an existing recognized asset or liability or a forecasted transaction. The Company hedges existing long-term variable-rate debt, the rollover of short-term borrowings and the anticipated forecasted issuance of additional funding through the use of derivatives, primarily interest rate swaps. These derivative instruments effectively convert floating-rate debt to fixed-rate debt for the duration of the instrument. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company hedged $1.3 billion and $1.6 billion, respectively, of its floating debt using interest rate swaps.
For derivatives designated as cash flow hedges, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the derivatives is recorded in AOCI and reclassified into earnings when the hedged cash flows are recognized in earnings. The amount that is reclassified into earnings is presented in the Consolidated Statements of Income in the same line item in which the hedged instrument or transaction is recognized, primarily in interest expense. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the derivatives is reported as a component of other, net expenses. If a cash flow hedge is de-designated or terminated prior to maturity, the amount previously recorded in AOCI is recognized into earnings over the period that the hedged item impacts earnings. If a hedge relationship is discontinued because it is probable that the forecasted transaction will not occur according to the original strategy, any related amounts previously recorded in AOCI are recognized into earnings immediately.
In the normal course of business, as the hedged cash flows are recognized into earnings, the Company expects to reclassify $11 million of net pretax losses on derivatives from AOCI into earnings during the next 12 months.
 
NET INVESTMENT HEDGES
A net investment hedge is used to hedge future changes in currency exposure of a net investment in a foreign operation. The Company primarily designates foreign currency derivatives, typically foreign exchange forwards, and on occasion foreign currency denominated debt, as hedges of net investments in certain foreign operations. These instruments reduce exposure to changes in currency exchange rates on the Company’s investments in non-U.S. subsidiaries. The effective portion of the gain or loss on net investment hedges is recorded in AOCI as part of the cumulative translation adjustment. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on net investment hedges is recognized in other, net expenses during the period of change.
 


94


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table summarizes the impact of cash flow hedges and net investment hedges on the Consolidated Statements of Income:
 
                                                         
   
For the Years Ended December 31:  
    Gains (losses) recognized in income  
        Amount reclassified
           
        from AOCI into
        Net hedge
 
        income         ineffectiveness  
(Millions)   Location   2010     2009     2008     Location   2010     2009     2008  
 
Cash flow hedges: (a)
                                                       
Interest rate contracts
  Interest expense   $      (36 )   $      (115 )   $      (247 )   Other, net expenses   $      —     $      —     $      —  
Net investment hedges:
                                                       
Foreign exchange contracts
  Other, net expenses   $     $     $     Other, net expenses   $ (3 )   $ (1 )   $ 3  
 
 
 
(a) During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, there were no forecasted transactions that were considered no longer probable to occur.
 
DERIVATIVES NOT DESIGNATED AS HEDGES
The Company has derivatives that act as economic hedges but are not designated for hedge accounting purposes. Foreign currency transactions and non-U.S. dollar cash flow exposures from time to time may be partially or fully economically hedged through foreign currency contracts, primarily foreign exchange forwards, options and cross-currency swaps. These hedges generally mature within one year. Foreign currency contracts involve the purchase and sale of a designated currency at an agreed upon rate for settlement on a specified date. The changes in the fair value of the derivatives effectively offset the related foreign exchange gains or losses on the underlying balance sheet exposures. From time to time, the Company may enter into interest rate swaps to specifically manage funding costs related to its proprietary card business.
The Company has certain operating agreements whose payments may be linked to a market rate or price, primarily foreign currency rates. The payment components of these agreements may meet the definition of an embedded derivative, which is assessed to determine if it requires separate accounting and reporting. If so, the embedded derivative is accounted for separately and is classified as a foreign exchange contract based on its primary risk exposure. In addition, the Company also holds an investment security containing an embedded equity-linked derivative.
For derivatives that are not designated as hedges, changes in fair value are reported in current period earnings.
 
The following table summarizes the impact of derivatives not designated as hedges on the Consolidated Statements of Income:
 
                             
   
For the Years Ended December 31:  
(Millions)   Gains (losses) recognized in income  
        Amount  
    Location   2010     2009     2008  
 
Interest rate contracts
  Other, net expenses   $      (8 )   $      17     $      (33 )
Foreign exchange contracts (a)
  Other non-interest revenues           (1 )      
    Interest and dividends on investment securities     4       4       13  
    Interest expense on short-term borrowings     7       5       (7 )
    Interest expense on long-term debt and other     93       35       22  
    Other, net expenses     (3 )     (8 )     (38 )
Equity-linked contract
  Other non-interest revenues     (6 )     1        
                             
Total
      $ 87     $ 53     $ (43 )
 
 
 
(a) For the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, foreign exchange contracts include embedded foreign currency derivatives. Gains (losses) on these embedded derivatives are included in other, net expenses.


95


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 13
GUARANTEES
The Company provides cardmember protection plans that cover losses associated with purchased products, as well as certain other guarantees in the ordinary course of business which are within the scope of GAAP governing the accounting for guarantees. For the Company, guarantees primarily consist of card and travel protection programs, including:
 
  Credit Card Registry — cancels and requests replacement of lost or stolen cards, and provides for fraud liability coverage;
 
  Return Protection — refunds the price of eligible purchases made with the card where the merchant will not accept the return for up to 90 days from the date of purchase;
 
  Account Protection — provides account protection in the event that a cardmember is unable to make payments on the account due to unforeseen hardship; and,
 
  Merchant Protection — protects cardmembers primarily against non-delivery of goods and services, usually in the event of bankruptcy or liquidation of a merchant. In the event that a dispute is resolved in the cardmember’s favor, the Company will generally credit the cardmember account for the amount of the purchase and will seek recovery from the merchant. If the Company is unable to collect the amount from the merchant, it will bear the loss for the amount credited to the cardmember. The Company mitigates this risk by withholding settlement from the merchant or obtaining deposits and other guarantees from merchants considered higher risk due to various factors. The amounts being held by the Company are not significant when compared to the maximum potential amount of undiscounted future payments.
 
In relation to its maximum amount of undiscounted future payments as seen in the table that follows, to date the Company has not experienced any significant losses related to guarantees. The Company’s initial recognition of guarantees is at fair value, which has been determined in accordance with GAAP governing fair value measurement. In addition, the Company establishes reserves when an unfavorable outcome is probable and the amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated.
 
The following table provides information related to such guarantees as of December 31:
 
                                 
   
    Maximum amount of
       
    undiscounted future
    Amount of related
 
    payments (a)
    liability (b)
 
    (Billions)     (Millions)  
Type of Guarantee   2010     2009     2010     2009  
 
Card and travel operations (c)
  $ 67     $ 66     $ 114     $ 112  
Other (d)
    1       1       99       74  
                                 
Total
  $ 68     $ 67     $ 213     $ 186  
 
 
 
(a) Represents the notional amounts that could be lost under the guarantees and indemnifications if there were a total default by the guaranteed parties. The Merchant Protection guarantee is calculated using management’s best estimate of maximum exposure based on all eligible claims as measured against annual billed business volumes.
(b) Included as part of other liabilities on the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets.
(c) Includes Credit Card Registry, Return Protection, Account Protection and Merchant Protection, which the Company offers directly to cardmembers.
(d) Primarily includes guarantees related to the Company’s business dispositions, real estate and tax, as well as contingent consideration obligations, each of which are individually smaller indemnifications.
 
Refer to Note 26 for a discussion of additional guarantees of the Company as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.


96


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 14
COMMON AND PREFERRED SHARES AND WARRANTS
As of December 31, 2010, the Company has 86 million common shares remaining under share repurchase authorizations. Such authorizations do not have an expiration date, and at present, there is no intention to modify or otherwise rescind the current authorizations.
Common shares are generally retired by the Company upon repurchase (except for 4.7 million, 5.0 million and 0.4 million shares held as treasury shares as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively); retired common shares and treasury shares are excluded from the shares outstanding in the table below. The treasury shares, with a cost basis of $219 million, $235 million and $21 million as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, are included as a reduction to additional paid-in capital in shareholders’ equity on the Consolidated Balance Sheets.
 
The following table shows authorized shares and provides a reconciliation of common shares issued and outstanding for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions, except where indicated)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Common shares authorized (billions) (a)
    3.6       3.6       3.6  
                         
Shares issued and outstanding at beginning of year
    1,192       1,160       1,158  
(Repurchases) Issuances of common shares
    (14 )     22       (5 )
Other, primarily stock option exercises and RSAs granted
    19       10       7  
                         
Shares issued and outstanding as of December 31
    1,197       1,192       1,160  
 
 
 
(a) Of the common shares authorized but unissued as of December 31, 2010, approximately 104 million shares were reserved for issuance under employee stock and employee benefit plans.
The Board of Directors is authorized to permit the Company to issue up to 20 million preferred shares at a par value of $1.66 2 / 3 without further shareholder approval.
On January 9, 2009, under the United States Department of the Treasury (Treasury Department) Capital Purchase Program (CPP), the Company issued to the Treasury Department as consideration for aggregate proceeds of $3.39 billion: (1) 3.39 million shares of Fixed Rate (5 percent) Cumulative Perpetual Preferred Shares Series A (the Preferred Shares), and (2) a ten-year warrant (the Warrant) for the Treasury Department to purchase up to 24 million common shares at an exercise price of $20.95 per share.
On June 17, 2009, the Company repurchased the Preferred Shares at their face value of $3.39 billion and the $212 million in excess of the amortized carrying amount represented an in-substance Preferred Share dividend that reduced earnings per share (EPS) attributable to common shareholders by $0.18 for the year ended December 31, 2009. Refer to Note 18.
On July 29, 2009, the Company repurchased the Warrant for $340 million. There were no preferred shares or warrants issued and outstanding as of December 31, 2010 and 2009.


97


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 15
CHANGES IN ACCUMULATED OTHER COMPREHENSIVE (LOSS) INCOME
AOCI is a balance sheet item in the Shareholders’ Equity section of the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets. It is comprised of items that have not been recognized in earnings but may be recognized in earnings in the future when certain events occur. Changes in each component of AOCI for the three years ended December 31 were as follows:
 
                                         
   
    Net Unrealized
                Net Unrealized
       
    Gains (Losses) on
    Net Unrealized
    Foreign Currency
    Pension and Other
    Accumulated Other
 
    Investment
    Gains (Losses) on
    Translation
    Postretirement
    Comprehensive
 
(Millions, net of tax) (a)   Securities     Cash Flow Hedges     Adjustments     Benefit Losses     (Loss) Income  
 
Balances as of December 31, 2007
  $ 12     $ (71 )   $ (255 )   $ (128 )   $ (442 )
                                         
Net unrealized gains (losses)
    (718 )     (170 )                     (888 )
Reclassification for realized (gains) losses into earnings
    (8 )     161                       153  
Net translation of investments in foreign operations
                    (1,102 )             (1,102 )
Net gains related to hedges of investment in foreign operations
                    961               961  
Pension and other postretirement benefit losses
                            (329 )     (329 )
Discontinued operations (b)
    15               28       (2 )     41  
                                         
Net change in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income
    (711 )     (9 )     (113 )     (331 )     (1,164 )
                                         
Balances as of December 31, 2008
    (699 )     (80 )     (368 )     (459 )     (1,606 )
                                         
Net unrealized gains (losses)
    1,351       (22 )                     1,329  
Reclassification for realized (gains) losses into earnings
    (145 )     74                       (71 )
Net translation of investments in foreign operations (c)
                    523               523  
Net losses related to hedges of investment in foreign operations
                    (877 )             (877 )
Pension and other postretirement benefit losses
                            (10 )     (10 )
                                         
Net change in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income
    1,206       52       (354 )     (10 )     894  
                                         
Balances as of December 31, 2009
    507       (28 )     (722 )     (469 )     (712 )
                                         
Impact of the Adoption of new GAAP (d)
    (315 )                             (315 )
Net unrealized gains (losses)
    (139 )     (2 )                     (141 )
Reclassification for realized (gains) losses into earnings
    4       23       1               28  
Net translation of investments in foreign operations
                    189               189  
Net gains related to hedges of investment in foreign operations
                    29               29  
Pension and other postretirement benefit losses
                            5       5  
                                         
Net change in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income
    (450 )     21       219       5       (205 )
                                         
Balances as of December 31, 2010
  $ 57     $ (7 )   $ (503 )   $ (464 )   $ (917 )
 
 
 
(a) The following table shows the tax impact for the three years ended December 31 for the changes in each component of accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Investment securities
  $ (272 )   $ 749     $ (472 )
Cash flow hedges
    11       29       (4 )
Foreign currency translation adjustments
    22       33       (66 )
Net investment hedges
    (396 )            
Pension and other postretirement benefit losses
    18       (28 )     (159 )
Discontinued operations (b)
                16  
                         
Total tax impact
  $ (617 )   $ 783     $ (685 )
 
 
 
(b) Relates to the change in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income prior to the dispositions of AEB and AEIDC.
(c) Includes a $190 million other comprehensive loss, recorded in the third quarter of 2009, representing the correction of an error related to the accounting in prior periods for cumulative translation adjustments associated with a net investment in foreign subsidiaries. (Refer to Note 19 for further details).
(d) As described further in Notes 6 and 7, as a result of the adoption of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010, the Company no longer presents within its Consolidated Financial Statements the effects of the retained subordinated securities issued by previously unconsolidated VIEs related to the Company’s cardmember loan securitization programs.


98


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 16
RESTRUCTURING CHARGES
During 2010, the Company recorded $96 million of restructuring charges, net of adjustments of previously accrued amounts due to revisions of prior estimates. The 2010 activity primarily relates to a $98 million charge reflecting employee severance obligations to consolidate certain facilities within the Company’s global servicing network. In addition, the Company expects to record further charges in one or more quarterly periods during 2011 relating to these facility consolidations totaling between $60 million and $80 million. The total expected additional charges include lease exit (approximately 60 percent) and employee compensation (approximately 40 percent) costs. It is estimated that these costs will be recorded to the business units as follows: USCS (73 percent), International Card Services (ICS) (5 percent), GCS (12 percent), and Global Network Merchant Services (GNMS) (10 percent). As a result of this initiative, approximately 3,200 positions will be eliminated; however, overall staffing levels are expected to decrease by approximately 400 positions on a net basis as new employees are hired at the locations to which work is being transferred. The remaining 2010 activity includes $25 million of additional charges comprised of several smaller initiatives which were more than offset by adjustments of $(27) million that relate to revisions of prior estimates for higher employee redeployments to other positions within the Company and modifications to existing initiatives.
During 2009, the Company recorded $185 million of restructuring charges, net of adjustments of previously accrued amounts due to revisions of prior estimates. The 2009 activity primarily relates to the $199 million of restructuring charges the Company recorded in the second quarter to further reduce its operating costs by downsizing and reorganizing certain operations. These restructuring activities were for the elimination of approximately 4,000 positions or about 6 percent of the Company’s total worldwide workforce and occurred across all business units, markets and staff groups. Additional restructuring charges of $38 million taken in the third and fourth quarters of 2009 relate principally to the reorganization of certain senior leadership positions, as well as the exit of a business in the GNMS segment. The Company also recorded adjustments of $(52) million during 2009 that primarily relate to revisions of prior estimates for higher employee redeployments to other positions within the Company, business changes and modifications to existing initiatives. These modifications do not constitute a significant change in the original restructuring plan from an overall Company perspective.
During 2008, the Company recorded restructuring charges of $434 million, net of adjustments of previously accrued amounts due to revisions of prior estimates. While the Company’s restructuring activity in the first and third quarters of 2008 primarily related to exiting certain international banking businesses, the Company recorded $410 million of restructuring charges in the fourth quarter of 2008 in order to further reduce the Company’s cost structure. This restructuring was for the elimination of approximately 7,000 positions or approximately 10 percent of its total worldwide workforce. These reductions primarily occurred across business units, markets and staff groups focusing on management and other positions that do not interact directly with customers, and related to reorganizing or automating certain internal processes; outsourcing certain operations to third parties; and discontinuing or relocating business activities to other locations.
Restructuring charges related to severance obligations are included in salaries and employee benefits and discontinued operations in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Income, while charges pertaining to other exit costs are included in occupancy and equipment, professional services, other, net expenses and discontinued operations.

99


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table summarizes the Company’s restructuring reserves activity for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   Severance (a)       Other (b)       Total  
 
Liability balance as of December 31, 2007
  $ 60     $ 9     $ 69  
Restructuring charges, net of $10 in adjustments (c)(d)
    366       68       434  
Payments
    (63 )     (13 )     (76 )
Other non-cash (e)
    2       (2 )      
                         
Liability balance as of December 31, 2008
    365       62       427  
Restructuring charges, net of $52 in adjustments (c)
    161       24       185  
Payments
    (287 )     (45 )     (332 )
Other non-cash (e)
    14       (9 )     5  
                         
Liability balance as of December 31, 2009
    253       32       285  
Restructuring charges, net of $27 in adjustments (f)
    98       (2 )     96  
Payments
    (141 )     (14 )     (155 )
Other non-cash (e)
    (11 )           (11 )
                         
Liability balance as of December 31, 2010 (g)
  $ 199     $ 16     $ 215  
 
 
 
(a) Accounted for in accordance with the GAAP governing the accounting for nonretirement postemployment benefits and for costs associated with exit or disposal activities.
(b) Other primarily includes facility exit, asset impairment and contract termination costs.
(c) Adjustments primarily relate to higher than anticipated redeployments of displaced employees to other positions within the Company.
(d) Includes $17 million related to discontinued operations.
(e) Consists primarily of foreign exchange impacts. During 2009, the amounts in other also include asset impairments directly related to restructuring activity.
(f) Net adjustments of $27 million were recorded in the Company’s reportable operating segments as follows: $4 million in USCS, $13 million in ICS, $(2) million in GCS, and $12 million in Corporate & Other. These adjustments primarily relate to higher employee redeployments to other positions within the Company, business changes and modifications to existing initiatives.
(g) The majority of cash payments related to the remaining restructuring liabilities are expected to be completed in 2012, with the exception of certain smaller amounts related to contractual long-term severance arrangements which are expected to be completed in 2013, and certain lease obligations which will continue until their expiration in 2018.
 
The following table summarizes the Company’s restructuring charges, net of adjustments, by reportable segment for the year ended December 31, 2010, and the cumulative amounts relating to the restructuring programs that were in progress during 2010 and initiated at various dates between 2007 and 2010.
 
                                 
   
          Cumulative Restructuring Expense Incurred To Date On
 
    2010     In-Progress Restructuring Programs  
    Total Restructuring
                   
    Charges net of
                   
(Millions)   adjustments     Severance     Other     Total  
 
USCS
  $ 52     $ 99     $ 6     $ 105  
ICS
    12       92       3       95  
GCS
    21       241       31       272  
GNMS
    16       64       9       73  
Corporate & Other
    (5 )     116       33       149 (a)
                                 
Total
  $ 96     $ 612     $ 82     $ 694 (b)
 
 
 
(a) The Corporate & Other segment includes certain severance and other charges of $125 million, related to Company-wide support functions which were not allocated to the Company’s operating segments, as these were corporate initiatives, which is consistent with how such charges were reported internally.
(b) As of December 31, 2010, the total expenses to be incurred for previously approved restructuring activities that were in progress are not expected to be materially different than the cumulative expenses incurred to date for these programs, except for those 2011 charges noted above.


100


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 17
INCOME TAXES
The components of income tax expense for the years ended December 31 included in the Consolidated Statements of Income were as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Current income tax expense (benefit):
                       
U.S. federal
  $ 532     $ 661     $ 735  
U.S. state and local
    110       40       (28 )
Non-U.S. 
    508       295       352  
                         
Total current income tax expense
    1,150       996       1,059  
                         
Deferred income tax expense (benefit):
                       
U.S. federal
    782       (231 )     (150 )
U.S. state and local
    78       24       (84 )
Non-U.S. 
    (103 )     (85 )     (115 )
                         
Total deferred income tax expense (benefit)
    757       (292 )     (349 )
                         
Total income tax expense on continuing operations
  $ 1,907     $ 704     $ 710  
                         
Income tax expense from discontinued operations
  $     $ 4     $ 12  
 
 
 
A reconciliation of the U.S. federal statutory rate of 35 percent to the Company’s actual income tax rate for the years ended December 31 on continuing operations was as follows:
 
                         
   
    2010     2009     2008  
 
Combined tax at U.S. statutory federal income tax rate
    35.0 %     35.0 %     35.0 %
Increase (Decrease) in taxes resulting from:
                       
Tax-exempt income
    (1.9 )     (4.6 )     (3.9 )
State and local income taxes, net of federal benefit
    2.7       2.7       1.6  
Non-U.S. subsidiaries earnings
    (3.1 )     (6.8 )     (8.4 )
Tax settlements (a)
    (1.3 )     (1.4 )     (5.5 )
All other
    0.6       (0.1 )     1.0  
                         
Actual tax rates
    32.0 %     24.8 %     19.8 %
 
 
 
(a) Relates to the resolution of tax matters in various jurisdictions.
 
The Company records a deferred income tax (benefit) provision when there are differences between assets and liabilities measured for financial reporting and for income tax return purposes. These temporary differences result in taxable or deductible amounts in future years and are measured using the tax rates and laws that will be in effect when such differences are expected to reverse.
 
The significant components of deferred tax assets and liabilities as of December 31 are reflected in the following table:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Deferred tax assets:
               
Reserves not yet deducted for tax purposes
  $ 3,789     $ 3,495  
Employee compensation and benefits
    741       717  
Other
    290       114  
                 
Gross deferred tax assets
    4,820       4,326  
Valuation allowance
    (104 )     (60 )
                 
Deferred tax assets after valuation allowance
    4,716       4,266  
                 
Deferred tax liabilities:
               
Intangibles and fixed assets
    834       744  
Deferred revenue
    36       49  
Asset securitizations
    43       70  
Net unrealized securities gains
    19       291  
Other
    387       133  
                 
Gross deferred tax liabilities
    1,319       1,287  
                 
Net deferred tax assets
  $ 3,397     $ 2,979  
 
 
 
A valuation allowance is established when management determines that it is more likely than not that all or some portion of the benefit of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The valuation allowances as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 are associated with net operating losses and other deferred tax assets in certain non-U.S. operations of the Company.
Accumulated earnings of certain non-U.S. subsidiaries, which totaled approximately $7.4 billion as of December 31, 2010, are intended to be permanently reinvested outside the United States. The Company does not provide for federal income taxes on foreign earnings intended to be permanently reinvested outside the United States. Accordingly, federal taxes, which would have aggregated approximately $1.9 billion as of December 31, 2010, have not been provided on those earnings.
Net income taxes paid by the Company (including amounts related to discontinued operations) during 2010, 2009 and 2008, were approximately $0.8 billion, $0.4 billion and $2.0 billion, respectively. These amounts include estimated tax payments and cash settlements relating to prior tax years.
The Company, its wholly-owned U.S. subsidiaries, and certain non-U.S. subsidiaries file a consolidated federal income tax return. The Company is subject to the income tax laws of the United States, its states and municipalities and those of the foreign jurisdictions in which the Company operates. These tax laws are complex, and the manner in which they apply to the taxpayer’s facts is sometimes open to interpretation. Given these inherent complexities, the Company must make judgments in assessing the likelihood that a tax position will be sustained upon examination by the taxing authorities based on the technical merits of the tax position. A tax position is recognized only when, based on management’s judgment regarding the application of income tax laws, it is more likely


101


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
than not that the tax position will be sustained upon examination. The amount of benefit recognized for financial reporting purposes is based on management’s best judgment of the most likely outcome resulting from examination given the facts, circumstances and information available at the reporting date. The Company adjusts the level of unrecognized tax benefits when there is new information available to assess the likelihood of the outcome.
The Company is under continuous examination by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) and tax authorities in other countries and states in which the Company has significant business operations. The tax years under examination and open for examination vary by jurisdiction. In June 2008, the IRS completed its field examination of the Company’s federal tax returns for the years 1997 through 2002. In July 2009, the IRS completed its field examination of the Company’s federal tax returns for the years 2003 and 2004. However, all of these years continue to remain open as a consequence of certain issues under appeal. The Company is currently under examination by the IRS for the years 2005 through 2007.
 
The following table presents changes in unrecognized tax benefits:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Balance, January 1
  $ 1,081     $ 1,176     $ 1,112  
Increases:
                       
Current year tax positions
    182       39       81  
Tax positions related to prior years
    403       161       409  
Effects of foreign currency translations
          1        
Decreases:
                       
Tax positions related to prior years
    (145 )     (197 )     (208 )
Settlements with tax authorities
    (138 )     (97 )     (213 )
Lapse of statute of limitations
    (6 )     (2 )     (3 )
Effects of foreign currency translations
                (2 )
                         
Balance, December 31
  $ 1,377     $ 1,081     $ 1,176  
 
 
 
Included in the $1.4 billion, $1.1 billion and $1.2 billion of unrecognized tax benefits as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, are approximately $476 million, $480 million and $452 million, respectively, that, if recognized, would favorably affect the effective tax rate in a future period.
The Company believes it is reasonably possible that the unrecognized tax benefits could decrease within the next 12 months by as much as $991 million principally as a result of potential resolutions of prior years’ tax items with various taxing authorities. The prior years’ tax items include unrecognized tax benefits relating to the timing of recognition of certain gross income, the deductibility of certain expenses or losses and the attribution of taxable income to a particular jurisdiction or jurisdictions. Of the $991 million of unrecognized tax benefits, approximately $320 million relates to temporary differences that, if recognized, would only impact the effective rate due to net interest assessments and state tax rate differentials and approximately $404 million relates to amounts recorded to equity that, if recognized, would not impact the effective rate. With respect to the remaining decrease of $267 million, it is not possible to quantify the impact that the decrease could have on the effective tax rate and net income due to the inherent complexities and the number of tax years open for examination in multiple jurisdictions. Resolution of the prior years’ items that comprise this remaining amount could have an impact on the effective tax rate and on net income, either favorably (principally as a result of settlements that are less than the liability for unrecognized tax benefits) or unfavorably (if such settlements exceed the liability for unrecognized tax benefits).
Interest and penalties relating to unrecognized tax benefits are reported in the income tax provision. During the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the Company recognized approximately $31 million, $1 million and $60 million, respectively, of interest and penalties. The Company has approximately $226 million and $282 million accrued for the payment of interest and penalties as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively.


102


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 18
EARNINGS PER COMMON SHARE
The computations of basic and diluted EPS for the years ended December 31 were as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions, except per share amounts)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Numerator:
                       
Basic and diluted:
                       
Income from continuing operations
  $ 4,057     $ 2,137     $ 2,871  
Preferred shares dividends, accretion and recognition of remaining
  unaccreted dividends (a)
          (306 )      
Earnings allocated to participating share awards and other items (b)
    (51 )     (22 )     (15 )
Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax
          (7 )     (172 )
                         
Net income attributable to common shareholders
  $ 4,006     $ 1,802     $ 2,684  
                         
Denominator:
                       
Basic: Weighted-average common stock
    1,188       1,168       1,154  
Add: Weighted-average stock options and warrants (c)
    7       3       2  
                         
Diluted
    1,195       1,171       1,156  
                         
Basic EPS:
                       
Income from continuing operations attributable to common shareholders
  $ 3.37     $ 1.55     $ 2.47  
Loss from discontinued operations
          (0.01 )     (0.14 )
                         
Net income attributable to common shareholders
  $ 3.37     $ 1.54     $ 2.33  
                         
Diluted EPS:
                       
Income from continuing operations attributable to common shareholders
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.47  
Loss from discontinued operations
                (0.15 )
                         
Net income attributable to common shareholders
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.32  
 
 
 
(a) Includes the accelerated preferred dividend accretion of $212 million for the year ended December 31, 2009, due to the repurchase of $3.39 billion of preferred shares on June 17, 2009 issued as part of the CPP. Also includes $74 million of preferred dividends paid and $20 million of preferred dividend accretion during 2009.
(b) The Company’s unvested restricted stock awards, which include the right to receive non-forfeitable dividends or dividend equivalents, are considered participating securities. Calculations of EPS under the two-class method (i) exclude any dividends paid or owed on participating securities and any undistributed earnings considered to be attributable to participating securities from the numerator and (ii) exclude the participating securities from the denominator.
(c) For the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, the dilutive effect of unexercised stock options excludes 36 million, 71 million and 45 million options, respectively, from the computation of EPS because inclusion of the options would have been anti-dilutive.
 
Subordinated debentures of $750 million issued by the Company in 2006 would affect the EPS computation only in the unlikely event the Company fails to achieve specified performance measures related to the Company’s tangible common equity and consolidated net income. In that circumstance the Company would reflect the additional common shares in the EPS computation.
 
NOTE 19
DETAILS OF CERTAIN CONSOLIDATED
STATEMENTS OF INCOME LINES
The following is a detail of other commissions and fees for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Foreign currency conversion revenue
  $ 838     $ 672     $ 755  
Delinquency fees
    605       526       852  
Service fees
    328       335       459  
Other
    260       245       241  
                         
Total other commissions and fees
  $ 2,031     $ 1,778     $ 2,307  
 
 
 
The following is a detail of other revenues for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Global Network Services partner revenues
  $ 530     $ 463     $ 420  
Insurance premium revenue
    255       293       326  
Publishing revenue
    228       224       327  
(Loss) Gain on investment securities
    (5 )     225       12  
Other
    919       882       1,072  
                         
Total other revenues
  $ 1,927     $ 2,087     $ 2,157  
 
 
 
Other revenues include insurance premiums earned from cardmember travel and other insurance programs, publishing revenues, revenues arising from contracts with Global Network Services (GNS) partners including royalties and signing fees, and other miscellaneous revenue and fees.
 
The following is a detail of marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Marketing and promotion
  $ 3,054     $ 1,914     $ 2,430  
Cardmember rewards
    5,029       4,036       4,389  
Cardmember services
    561       517       542  
                         
Total marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services
  $ 8,644     $ 6,467     $ 7,361  
 
 
 
Marketing and promotion expense includes advertising costs, which are expensed in the year in which the advertising first takes place. Cardmember rewards expense includes the costs of rewards programs (including Membership Rewards, discussed in Note 11). Cardmember services expense includes protection plans and complimentary services provided to cardmembers.


103


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following is a detail of other, net expense for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Occupancy and equipment
  $ 1,562     $ 1,619     $ 1,641  
Communications
    383       414       466  
MasterCard and Visa settlements
    (852 )     (852 )     (571 )
Other (a)
    1,539       1,233       1,586  
                         
Total other, net expense
  $ 2,632     $ 2,414     $ 3,122  
 
 
 
(a) Includes in 2009, (i) a $135 million benefit representing the correction of an error related to the accounting for cumulative translation adjustments associated with a net investment in foreign subsidiaries, (ii) a $45 million benefit resulting from the change in the fair value of certain forward exchange contracts, (iii) a $59 million benefit related to the completion of certain account reconciliations and (iv) lower travel and entertainment and other expenses due to the Company’s reengineering activities.
 
Other, net expense includes general operating expenses, gains (losses) on sale of assets or businesses not classified as discontinued operations, and litigation and insurance costs or settlements.
 
NOTE 20
STOCK PLANS
 
STOCK OPTION AND AWARD PROGRAMS
Under the 2007 Incentive Compensation Plan and previously under the 1998 Incentive Compensation Plan, awards may be granted to employees and other key individuals who perform services for the Company and its participating subsidiaries. These awards may be in the form of stock options, restricted stock awards or units (RSAs), portfolio grants (PGs) or other incentives, and similar awards designed to meet the requirements of non-U.S. jurisdictions.
For the Company’s Incentive Compensation Plans, there were a total of 40 million, 37 million and 45 million common shares unissued and available for grant as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively, as authorized by the Company’s Board of Directors and shareholders.
The Company granted stock option awards to its Chief Executive Officer (CEO) in November 2007 and January 2008 that have performance-based and market-based conditions. These option awards are separately described and are excluded from the information and tables presented in the following paragraphs.
A summary of stock option and RSA activity as of December 31, 2010, and changes during the year ended is presented below:
 
                                 
   
    Stock Options     RSAs  
          Weighted-
          Weighted-
 
          Average
          Average
 
          Exercise
          Grant
 
(Shares in thousands)   Shares     Price     Shares     Price  
 
Outstanding as of December 31, 2009
    79,694     $ 39.18       15,682     $ 26.90  
Granted
    3,205     $ 37.11       4,886     $ 38.63  
Exercised/vested
    (16,987 )   $ 36.45       (4,586 )   $ 31.70  
Forfeited
    (975 )   $ 42.82       (908 )   $ 27.81  
Expired
    (7,974 )   $ 41.09              
                                 
Outstanding as of December 31, 2010
    56,963     $ 39.54       15,074     $ 28.97  
                                 
Options vested and expected to vest as of December 31, 2010
    56,681     $ 39.59              
                                 
Options exercisable as of December 31, 2010
    44,871     $ 40.88              
 
 
 
The Company recognizes the cost of employee stock awards granted in exchange for employee services based on the grant-date fair value of the award, net of expected forfeitures. Those costs are recognized ratably over the vesting period.
 
STOCK OPTIONS
Each stock option has an exercise price equal to the market price of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant and a contractual term of 10 years from the date of grant. Stock options generally vest 25 percent per year beginning with the first anniversary of the grant date.
 
The weighted-average remaining contractual life and the aggregate intrinsic value (the amount by which the fair value of the Company’s stock exceeds the exercise price of the option) of the stock options outstanding, exercisable, and vested and expected to vest as of December 31, 2010 were as follows:
 
                         
   
                Vested and
 
                Expected to
 
    Outstanding     Exercisable     Vest  
 
Weighted-average remaining contractual life (in years)
    4.6       3.7       4.6  
Aggregate intrinsic value (millions)
  $ 390     $ 251     $ 386  
 
 
 
The intrinsic value for options exercised during 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $130 million, $11 million and $79 million, respectively (based upon the fair value of the Company’s stock price at the date of exercise). Cash received from the exercise of stock options in 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $619 million, $83 million and $176 million, respectively. The tax benefit realized from income tax deductions from stock option exercises, which was recorded in additional paid-in capital, in 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $35 million, $2 million and $21 million, respectively.


104


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The fair value of each option is estimated on the date of grant using a Black-Scholes-Merton option-pricing model. The following weighted-average assumptions are used for grants issued in 2010, 2009 and 2008, the majority of which were granted in the beginning of each year:
 
                         
   
    2010     2009     2008  
 
Dividend yield
    1.8 %     4.1 %     1.5 %
Expected volatility (a)
    41 %     36 %     19 %
Risk-free interest rate
    2.8 %     2.1 %     2.8 %
Expected life of stock option (in years) (b)
    6.2       4.8       4.7  
Weighted-average fair value per option
  $ 14.11     $ 4.54     $ 8.24  
 
 
 
(a) The expected volatility is based on weighted historical and implied volatilities of the Company’s common stock price.
(b) In 2010, the expected life of stock options was determined using historical data and expectations of options currently outstanding. In 2009 and 2008, the expected life of stock options was determined using historical data.
 
STOCK OPTIONS WITH PERFORMANCE-BASED AND MARKET-BASED CONDITIONS
On November 30, 2007 and January 31, 2008, the Company’s CEO was granted in the aggregate 2,750,000 of non-qualified stock option awards with performance-based and market-based conditions. Both awards have a contractual term of 10 years and a vesting period of 6 years.
The aggregate grant date fair value of options with performance based conditions was approximately $33.8 million. Compensation expense for these awards will be recognized over the vesting period when it is determined it is probable that the performance metrics will be achieved. No compensation expense for these awards was recorded in 2010, 2009 and 2008.
The aggregate grant date fair value of options with market-based conditions was approximately $10.5 million. Compensation expense for these awards is recognized ratably over the vesting period irrespective of the probability of the market metric being achieved. Total compensation expense of $2.4 million was recorded in each of the years 2010, 2009 and 2008.
 
RESTRICTED STOCK AWARDS
RSAs are valued based on the stock price on the date of grant and generally vest 25 percent per year, beginning with the first anniversary of the grant date. RSA holders receive non-forfeitable dividends or dividend equivalents. The total fair value of shares vested during 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $175 million, $44 million and $134 million, respectively (based upon the Company’s stock price at the vesting date).
The weighted-average grant date fair value of RSAs granted in 2010, 2009 and 2008, is $38.63, $18.04 and $48.29, respectively.
 
LIABILITY BASED AWARDS
Certain employees are awarded PGs and other incentive awards that can be settled with cash or equity shares at the Company’s discretion and final Compensation and Benefits Committee payout approval. These awards earn value based on performance and service conditions and vest over periods of one to three years.
PGs and other incentive awards are classified as liabilities and, therefore, the fair value is determined at the date of grant and remeasured quarterly as part of compensation expense over the performance and service periods. Cash paid upon vesting of these awards was $64 million, $71 million and $78 million in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively.
 
SUMMARY OF STOCK PLAN EXPENSE
The components of the Company’s total stock-based compensation expense (net of cancellations) for the years ended December 31 are as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Restricted stock awards (a)
  $ 163     $ 135     $ 141  
Stock options (a)
    58       55       73  
Liability-based awards
    64       38       40  
Performance/market-based stock options
    2       2       2  
                         
Total stock-based compensation expense (b)
  $ 287     $ 230     $ 256  
 
 
 
(a) As of December 31, 2010, the total unrecognized compensation cost related to unvested RSAs and options was $257 million and $59 million, respectively. The unrecognized cost for RSAs and options will be recognized ratably over the remaining vesting period. The weighted-average remaining vesting period for RSAs and options is 3.5 years and 2.3 years, respectively.
(b) The total income tax benefit recognized in the income statement for stock-based compensation arrangements in December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 was $100 million, $81 million and $90 million, respectively.
 
NOTE 21
RETIREMENT PLANS
The Company sponsors defined benefit pension plans, defined contribution plans, and other postretirement benefit plans for its employees. The following table provides a summary of the total cost related to these plans for the years ended December 31:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Defined benefit pension plan cost
  $ 40     $ 21     $ 13  
Defined contribution plan cost
    217       118       211  
Other postretirement benefit plan cost
    25       29       27  
                         
Net periodic benefit cost
  $ 282     $ 168     $ 251  
 
 
 
The expenses in the above table are recorded in salaries and employee benefits in the Consolidated Statements of Income.
 
DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION PLANS
The Company’s significant defined benefit pension plans cover certain employees in the United States and United Kingdom. Most employees outside the United States and United Kingdom are covered by local retirement plans, some of which are funded, while other employees receive payments at the time of retirement or termination under applicable labor laws or agreements. The Company complies with the minimum funding requirements in all countries.


105


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The Company sponsors the U.S. American Express Retirement Plan (the Plan) for eligible employees in the United States. The Plan is a noncontributory defined benefit plan and a tax-qualified retirement plan subject to the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (ERISA). The Plan is closed to new entrants and existing participants no longer accrue future benefits. The Company funds retirement costs through a trust and complies with the applicable minimum funding requirements specified by ERISA. The funded status of the Plan on an ERISA basis as of October 1, 2010 (applicable plan year) is 95 percent. The calculation assumptions for ERISA differ from the calculation of the net funded status for GAAP purposes (see Net Funded Status as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 in the table below).
The Plan is a cash balance plan and employees’ accrued benefits are based on notional account balances, which are maintained for each individual. Employees’ balances are credited daily with interest at a fixed-rate. The interest rate varies from a minimum of 5 percent to a maximum equal to the lesser of (i) 10 percent or (ii) the applicable interest rate set forth in the Plan.
The Company also sponsors an unfunded non-qualified plan, which was renamed the Retirement Restoration Plan (the RRP) effective January 1, 2011, for employees compensated above a certain level to supplement their pension benefits that are limited by the Internal Revenue Code. The RRP’s terms generally parallel those of the Plan, except that the definitions of compensation and payment options differ.
For each plan, the net funded status is defined by GAAP governing retirement benefits as the difference between the fair value of plan assets and the respective plan’s projected benefit obligation.
 
As of December 31, 2010, the net funded status related to the defined benefit pension plans was underfunded by $383 million, as shown in the following table:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Net funded status, beginning of year
  $ (406 )   $ (441 )
                 
Increase in fair value of plan assets
    63       296  
Increase in projected benefit obligation
    (40 )     (261 )
                 
Net change
    23       35  
                 
Net funded status, end of year
  $ (383 )   $ (406 )
 
 
 
The net funded status amounts as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 are recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets in other liabilities.
 
Plan Assets and Obligations
The following tables provide a reconciliation of changes in the fair value of plan assets and projected benefit obligations for all defined benefit pension plans as of December 31:
 
Reconciliation of Change in Fair Value of Plan Assets
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Fair value of plan assets, beginning of year
  $ 1,989     $ 1,693  
Actual return on plan assets
    177       290  
Employer contributions
    50       74  
Benefits paid
    (55 )     (59 )
Settlements
    (81 )     (81 )
Foreign currency exchange rate changes
    (28 )     72  
                 
Net change
    63       296  
                 
Fair value of plan assets, end of year
  $ 2,052     $ 1,989  
 
 
 
Reconciliation of Change in Projected Benefit Obligation
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Projected benefit obligation, beginning of year
  $ 2,395     $ 2,134  
Service cost
    19       14  
Interest cost
    126       127  
Benefits paid
    (55 )     (59 )
Actuarial loss
    66       189  
Settlements
    (81 )     (81 )
Curtailments
          (14 )
Foreign currency exchange rate changes
    (35 )     85  
                 
Net change
    40       261  
                 
Projected benefit obligation, end of year
  $ 2,435     $ 2,395  
 
 
 
Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss
The following table provides the amounts comprising accumulated other comprehensive loss, which are not yet recognized as components of net periodic pension benefit cost as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Net actuarial loss
  $ 648     $ 655  
Net prior service cost
    (2 )     (3 )
                 
Total, pretax effect
    646       652  
Tax impact
    (213 )     (219 )
                 
Total, net of taxes
  $ 433     $ 433  
 
 
 
The estimated portion of the net actuarial loss and net prior service cost that is expected to be recognized as a component of net periodic pension benefit cost in 2011 is $28 million and nil, respectively.


106


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table lists the amounts recognized in other comprehensive loss in 2010:
 
         
   
(Millions)   2010  
 
Net actuarial loss:
       
Reclassified to earnings from equity (a)
  $ (41 )
Losses in current year (b)
    34  
         
Net actuarial loss, pretax
    (7 )
Net prior service cost:
       
Reclassified to earnings from equity
    1  
         
Total, pretax
  $ (6 )
 
 
 
(a) Amortization of actuarial losses and recognition of losses related to lump sum settlements.
(b) Deferral of actuarial losses.
 
Benefit Obligations
The accumulated benefit obligation in a defined benefit pension plan is the present value of benefits earned to date by plan participants computed based on current compensation levels as contrasted to the projected benefit obligation, which is the present value of benefits earned to date by plan participants based on their expected future compensation at their projected retirement date.
 
The accumulated and projected benefit obligations for all defined benefit pension plans as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Accumulated benefit obligation
  $ 2,353     $ 2,327  
Projected benefit obligation
  $ 2,435     $ 2,395  
 
 
 
The accumulated benefit obligation and fair value of plan assets for pension plans with accumulated benefit obligation that exceeds the fair value of plan assets were as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Accumulated benefit obligation
  $ 1,407     $ 1,369  
Fair value of plan assets
  $ 1,091     $ 1,020  
 
 
 
The projected benefit obligation and fair value of plan assets for pension plans with projected benefit obligation that exceeds the fair value of plan assets as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Projected benefit obligation
  $ 2,435     $ 2,395  
Fair value of plan assets
  $ 2,052     $ 1,989  
 
 
 
Net Periodic Pension Benefit Cost
The components of the net periodic pension benefit cost for all defined benefit pension plans for the years ended December 31 were as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Service cost (a)
  $ 19     $ 14     $ 23  
Interest cost (b)
    126       127       136  
Expected return on plan assets (c)
    (145 )     (146 )     (169 )
Amortization of prior service cost (d)
    (1 )            
Recognized net actuarial loss (e)
    23       10       17  
Settlements losses (f)
    18       19       5  
Curtailment (gains) losses (g)
          (3 )     1  
                         
Net periodic pension benefit cost
  $ 40     $ 21     $ 13  
 
 
 
(a) Current value of benefits earned by employees during the period.
(b) Estimated interest incurred on the outstanding projected benefit obligation during the period.
(c) Expected return on the market related value of plan assets.
(d) Costs that result from plan amendments, which are amortized over the expected future service period of the employees impacted.
(e) Amortization of the accumulated losses which exceed 10 percent of the greater of the projected benefit obligation or the market related value of plan assets.
(f) Recognition of the actuarial losses resulting from lump sum settlements of the benefit obligation.
(g) Gains resulting from a reduction in the benefit obligation due to a decrease in the expected years of future service of current plan participants.
 
Assumptions
The weighted-average assumptions used to determine defined benefit pension obligations as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                 
   
    2010     2009  
 
Discount rates
    5.3 %     5.3 %
Rates of increase in compensation levels
    4.0 %     3.6 %
 
 
 
The weighted-average assumptions used to determine net periodic pension benefit costs as of December 31 were as follows:
 
                         
   
    2010     2009     2008  
 
Discount rates
    5.3 %     5.9 %     5.8 %
Rates of increase in compensation levels
    3.6 %     3.9 %     4.2 %
Expected long-term rates of return on assets
    6.9 %     6.9 %     7.6 %
 
 
 
The Company assumes a long-term rate of return on assets on a weighted-average basis. In developing this assumption, management considers expected and historical returns over 5 to 15 years based on the mix of assets in its plans.
The discount rate assumptions are determined using a model consisting of bond portfolios that match the cash flows of the plan’s projected benefit payments based on the plan participants’ service to date and their expected future compensation. Use of the rate produced by this model generates a projected benefit obligation that equals the current market value of a portfolio of high-quality zero-coupon bonds whose maturity dates and amounts match the timing and amount of expected future benefit payments.


107


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
Asset Allocation and Fair Value
The Benefit Plans Investment Committee (BPIC) is appointed by the Compensation and Benefits Committee of the Company’s Board of Directors and has the responsibility of reviewing and approving the investment policies related to plan assets for the Company’s defined benefit pension plans; evaluating the performance of the investments in accordance with the investment policy; reviewing the investment objectives, risk characteristics, expenses and historical performance; and selecting, removing and evaluating the investment managers. The BPIC typically meets quarterly to review the performance of the various investment managers and service providers as well as other investment related matters. The Company’s significant defined benefit pension plans have investment policies, which prescribe targets for the amount of assets that can be invested in a security class in order to mitigate the detrimental impact of adverse or unexpected results with respect to any individual security class on the overall portfolio. The portfolios are diversified by asset type, risk characteristics and concentration of investments. Refer to Note 3 for a discussion related to valuation techniques used to measure fair value, including a description of the three-level fair value hierarchy of inputs.
 
The following tables summarize the target allocation and categorization of all defined benefit pension plan assets measured at fair value on a recurring basis by GAAP’s valuation hierarchy:
 
As of December 31, 2010:
                                         
   
                Quoted Prices in
             
                Active Markets
    Significant
    Significant
 
    Target
          for Identical
    Observable
    Unobservable
 
    Allocation
          Assets
    Inputs
    Inputs
 
(Millions, except percentages)   2011     Total     (Level 1)     (Level 2)     (Level 3)  
 
U.S. equity securities
    15 %   $ 331     $ 331     $     $  
International equity securities (a)
    30 %     704       704              
U.S. fixed income securities
    30 %     522             522        
International fixed income securities (a)
    15 %     318             318        
Balanced funds
    5 %     65             65        
Cash
          11       11              
Other (b)
    5 %     101                   101  
                                         
Total
    100 %   $ 2,052     $ 1,046     $ 905     $ 101  
 
 
 
(a) A significant portion of international investments are in U.K. companies and U.K. government and agency securities.
(b) Consists of investments in private equity and real estate funds measured at reported net asset value.
 
As of December 31, 2009:
                                         
   
                Quoted Prices in
             
                Active Markets
    Significant
    Significant
 
    Target
          for Identical
    Observable
    Unobservable
 
    Allocation
          Assets
    Inputs
    Inputs
 
(Millions, except percentages)   2010     Total     (Level 1)     (Level 2)     (Level 3)  
 
U.S. equity securities
    15 %   $ 334     $ 334     $     $  
International equity securities (a)
    30 %     626       626              
U.S. fixed income securities
    30 %     553             553        
International fixed income securities (a)
    15 %     301             301        
Balanced funds
    5 %     62             62        
Cash
          15       15              
Other (b)
    5 %     98                   98  
                                         
Total
    100 %   $ 1,989     $ 975     $ 916     $ 98  
 
 
 
(a) A significant portion of international investments are in U.K. companies and U.K. government and agency securities.
(b) Consists of investments in private equity, real estate and hedge funds measured at reported net asset value.


108


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The fair value measurement of all defined benefit pension plan assets using significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) changed during the years ended December 31:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Beginning fair value, January 1
  $ 98     $ 187  
Actual net gains (losses) on plan assets:
               
Held at the end of the year
    11       (38 )
Sold during the year
          (10 )
                 
Total net gains (losses)
    11       (48 )
Net purchases (sales and settlements)
    (8 )     (41 )
                 
Net increase (decrease)
    3       (89 )
                 
Ending fair value, December 31
  $ 101     $ 98  
 
 
 
Benefit Payments
The Company’s defined benefit pension plans expect to make benefit payments to retirees as follows:
 
                                                 
   
                                  2016
 
(Millions)   2011     2012     2013     2014     2015     — 2020  
 
Expected payments
  $ 145     $ 148     $ 149     $ 155     $ 171     $ 890  
 
 
 
In addition, the Company expects to contribute $46 million to its defined benefit pension plans in 2011.
 
DEFINED CONTRIBUTION RETIREMENT PLANS
The Company sponsors defined contribution retirement plans, the principal plan being the Retirement Savings Plan (RSP), a 401(k) savings plan with a profit sharing component. The RSP is a tax-qualified retirement plan subject to ERISA and covers most employees in the United States. The RSP held 12 million and 13 million shares of American Express Common Stock as of December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively, beneficially for employees. The Company matches employee contributions to the plan up to a maximum of 5 percent of total pay, subject to the limitations under the Internal Revenue Code (IRC). Additional annual conversion contributions of up to 8 percent of total pay are provided into the RSP for eligible employees. The Company also sponsors an RSP RRP, which is an unfunded non-qualified plan for employees whose RSP benefits are limited by the IRC and its terms generally parallel those of the RSP. In addition, the RSP RRP was amended effective January 1, 2011 such that the Company matches employee contributions up to a maximum of 5 percent of total pay in excess of IRC compensation limits only to the extent the employee contributes to the plan.
The total expense for all defined contribution retirement plans globally was $217 million, $118 million and $211 million in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The increase in expense in 2010 primarily reflects the Company’s reinstatement in January of the employer match and conversion contributions.
 
OTHER POSTRETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS
The Company sponsors unfunded other postretirement benefit plans that provide health care and life insurance to certain retired U.S. employees.
 
Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss
The following table provides the amounts comprising accumulated other comprehensive loss which are not yet recognized as components of net periodic benefit cost as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Net actuarial loss
  $ 50     $ 60  
                 
Total, pretax effect
    50       60  
Tax impact
    (19 )     (24 )
                 
Total, net of taxes
  $ 31     $ 36  
 
 
 
The estimated portion of the net actuarial loss above that is expected to be recognized as a component of net periodic benefit cost in 2011 is $2 million.
 
The following table lists the amounts recognized in other comprehensive loss in 2010:
 
         
   
(Millions)   2010  
 
Net actuarial loss:
       
Reclassified to earnings from equity
  $ (2 )
Gains in current year
    (8 )
         
Net actuarial loss, pretax
  $ (10 )
 
 
 
Benefit Obligations
The projected benefit obligation represents a liability based upon estimated future medical and other benefits to be provided to retirees.
 
The following table provides a reconciliation of the changes in the projected benefit obligation:
 
                 
   
(Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Projected benefit obligation, beginning of year
  $ 324     $ 295  
Service cost
    6       5  
Interest cost
    17       18  
Benefits paid
    (20 )     (16 )
Actuarial (gain) loss
    (8 )     16  
Curtailment loss
          6  
                 
Net change
    (5 )     29  
                 
Projected benefit obligation, end of year
  $ 319     $ 324  
 
 
 
The plans are unfunded and the obligations as of December 31, 2010 and 2009 are recognized in the Consolidated Balance Sheets in other liabilities.
 
Net Periodic Benefit Cost
GAAP provides for the delayed recognition of the net actuarial loss and the net prior service credit remaining in accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income.


109


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The components of the net periodic benefit cost for all other postretirement benefit plans for the years ended December 31 were as follows:
 
                         
   
(Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Service cost
  $ 6     $ 5     $ 6  
Interest cost
    17       18       19  
Amortization of prior service cost
          (2 )     (2 )
Recognized net actuarial loss
    2       2       4  
Curtailment loss
          6        
                         
Net periodic benefit cost
  $ 25     $ 29     $ 27  
 
 
 
ASSUMPTIONS
The weighted-average assumptions used to determine benefit obligations were:
 
                 
   
    2010     2009  
 
                       
Discount rates
    5.2 %     5.4 %
Health care cost increase rate:
               
Following year
    8.5 %     8.0 %
Decreasing to the year 2018
    5.0 %     5.0 %
 
 
 
The weighted-average discount rate used to determine net periodic benefit cost was 5.4 percent, 6.0 percent and 6.1 percent in 2010, 2009 and 2008, respectively. The discount rate assumption is determined by using a model consisting of bond portfolios that match the cash flows of the plan’s projected benefit payments. Use of the rate produced by this model generates a projected benefit obligation that equals the current market value of a portfolio of high-quality zero-coupon bonds whose maturity dates and amounts match the timing and amount of expected future benefit payments.
 
A one percentage-point change in assumed health care cost trend rates would have the following effects:
 
                                 
   
    One
    One
 
    percentage-
    percentage-
 
    point increase     point decrease  
(Millions)   2010     2009     2010     2009  
 
Increase (decrease) on benefits earned and
  interest cost for
  U.S. plans
  $ 1     $ 1     $ (1 )   $ (1 )
Increase (decrease) on postretirement benefit
  obligation for U.S.
  plans
  $ 15     $ 15     $ (13 )   $ (14 )
 
 
 
Benefit Payments
The Company’s other postretirement benefit plans expect to make benefit payments as follows:
 
                                                 
   
                                  2016
 
(Millions)   2011     2012     2013     2014     2015     — 2020  
 
Expected payments
  $ 23     $ 24     $ 24     $ 25     $ 25     $ 128  
 
 
 
In addition, the Company expects to contribute $23 million to its other postretirement benefit plans in 2011.
 
NOTE 22
SIGNIFICANT CREDIT
CONCENTRATIONS
Concentrations of credit risk exist when changes in economic, industry or geographic factors similarly affect groups of counterparties whose aggregate credit exposure is material in relation to American Express’ total credit exposure. The Company’s customers operate in diverse industries, economic sectors and geographic regions.
 
The following table details the Company’s maximum credit exposure by category, including the credit exposure associated with derivative financial instruments, as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Billions)   2010     2009  
 
On-balance sheet:
               
Individuals (a)
  $ 88     $ 60  
Financial institutions (b)
    23       21  
U.S. Government and agencies (c)
    12       19  
All other (d)
    15       17  
                 
Total on-balance sheet (e)
  $ 138     $ 117  
                 
Unused lines-of-credit — individuals (f)
  $ 226     $ 222  
 
 
 
(a) Individuals primarily include cardmember loans and receivables.
(b) Financial institutions primarily include debt obligations of banks, broker-dealers, insurance companies and savings and loan associations.
(c) U.S. Government and agencies represent debt obligations of the U.S. Government and its agencies, states and municipalities and government sponsored entities.
(d) All other primarily includes cardmember receivables from other corporate institutions.
(e) Certain distinctions between categories require management judgment.
(f) Because charge card products have no preset spending limit, the associated credit limit on cardmember receivables is not quantifiable. Therefore, the quantified unused line-of-credit amounts only include the approximate credit line available on cardmember loans (including both for on-balance sheet loans and loans previously securitized).
 
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company’s most significant concentration of credit risk was with individuals, including cardmember receivables and loans. These amounts are generally advanced on an unsecured basis. However, the Company reviews each potential customer’s credit application and evaluates the applicant’s financial history and ability and willingness to repay. The Company also considers credit performance by customer tenure, industry and geographic location in managing credit exposure.


110


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table details the Company’s cardmember loans and receivables exposure (including unused lines-of-credit on cardmember loans) in the United States and outside the United States as of December 31:
 
                 
   
(Billions, except percentages)   2010     2009  
 
On-balance sheet:
               
United States
  $ 77     $ 47  
Non-U.S. 
    21       20  
                 
On-balance sheet (a)
  $ 98     $ 67  
                 
Unused lines-of-credit — individuals:
               
United States
  $ 184     $ 181  
Non-U.S. 
    42       41  
                 
Total unused lines-of-credit — individuals
  $ 226     $ 222  
 
 
 
(a) Represents cardmember loans to individuals as well as receivables from individuals and corporate institutions as discussed in footnotes (a) and (d) from the previous table.
 
The remainder of the Company’s on-balance sheet credit exposure includes cash, investments, other loans, other receivables and other assets, including derivative financial instruments. These balances are primarily within the United States.
 
EXPOSURE TO AIRLINE INDUSTRY
The Company has multiple co-brand relationships and rewards partners, of which airlines are one of the most important and valuable. The Company’s largest airline co-brand is Delta Air Lines (Delta) and this relationship includes exclusive co-brand credit card partnerships and other arrangements, including Membership Rewards, merchant acceptance and travel. American Express’ Delta SkyMiles Credit Card co-brand portfolio accounts for approximately 5 percent of the Company’s worldwide billed business and less than 15 percent of worldwide cardmember lending receivables.
In recent years, there have been a significant number of airline bankruptcies and liquidations, driven in part by volatile fuel costs and weakening economies around the world. Historically, the Company has not experienced significant revenue declines when a particular airline scales back or ceases operations due to a bankruptcy or other financial challenges because volumes generated by that airline are typically shifted to other participants in the industry that accept the Company’s card products. The Company’s exposure to business and credit risk in the airline industry is primarily through business arrangements where the Company has remitted payment to the airline for a cardmember purchase of tickets that have not yet been used or “flown”. The Company mitigates this risk by delaying payment to the airlines with deteriorating financial situations, thereby increasing cash withheld to protect the Company in the event the airline is liquidated. To date, the Company has not experienced significant losses from airlines that have ceased operations.
 
NOTE 23
REGULATORY MATTERS AND CAPITAL
ADEQUACY
The Company is supervised and regulated by the Federal Reserve and is subject to the Federal Reserve’s requirements for risk-based capital and leverage ratios. The Company’s two U.S. bank operating subsidiaries, Centurion Bank and FSB (collectively, the “Banks”), are subject to supervision and regulation, including similar regulatory capital requirements by the FDIC and the Office of Thrift Supervision (OTS). As of July 21, 2011, subject to a possible six-month extension, supervision and regulation of FSB will be transferred to the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency (OCC), pursuant to the Dodd-Frank Reform Act.
The Federal Reserve’s guidelines for capital adequacy define two categories of risk-based capital: Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital (as defined in the regulations). Under the risk-based capital guidelines of the Federal Reserve, the Company is required to maintain minimum ratios of Tier 1 and Total (Tier 1 plus Tier 2) capital to risk-weighted assets, as well as a minimum leverage ratio (Tier 1 capital to average adjusted on-balance sheet assets).
Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate certain mandatory, and possibly additional, discretionary actions by regulators, that, if undertaken, could have a direct material effect on the Company’s and the Banks’ operating activities.
As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Company and its Banks were well-capitalized and met all capital requirements to which each was subject. Management is not aware of any events subsequent to December 31, 2010 that would materially, adversely affect the Company’s and the Banks’ 2010 capital ratios.


111


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table presents the regulatory capital ratios for the Company and the Banks:
 
                                         
   
    Tier 1
    Total
    Tier 1 capital
    Total capital
    Tier 1
 
(Millions, except percentages)   capital     capital     ratio     ratio     leverage ratio  
 
December 31, 2010:
                                       
American Express Company
  $ 13,100     $ 15,529       11.1 %     13.1 %     9.3 %
American Express Centurion Bank
  $ 5,771     $ 6,170       18.3 %     19.5 %     19.4 %
American Express Bank, FSB
  $ 5,586     $ 6,424       16.3 %     18.8 %     16.1 % (a)
December 31, 2009:
                                       
American Express Company
  $ 11,464     $ 13,897       9.8 %     11.9 %     9.7 %
American Express Centurion Bank (b)
  $ 4,430     $ 4,841       13.7 %     15.0 %     17.1 %
American Express Bank, FSB (b)
  $ 4,784     $ 5,623       14.2 %     16.7 %     15.1 % (a)
Well-capitalized ratios (c)
                    6.0 %     10.0 %     5.0 % (d)
Minimum capital ratios (c)
                    4.0 %     8.0 %     4.0 %
 
 
 
(a) FSB leverage ratio represents Tier 1 core capital ratio (as defined by regulations issued by the OTS), calculated similarly to Tier 1 leverage ratio.
(b) Since January 2009, FSB has committed to maintain a Total capital ratio of no less than 15 percent. During 2009, enhancements were made to the American Express Credit Account Master Trust used to securitize credit card receivables issued by both FSB and Centurion Bank. As a result of these enhancements, the Banks began holding capital against their off-balance sheet trust assets. The Company infused $1.4 billion and $475 million of additional capital into FSB and Centurion Bank, respectively, during 2009 and in connection with the foregoing increased capital commitment for FSB and the impact of the trust enhancements for both FSB and Centurion Bank.
(c) As defined by the regulations issued by the Federal Reserve, OCC, OTS and FDIC.
(d) Represents requirements for banking subsidiaries to be considered “well capitalized” pursuant to regulations issued under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act. There is no “well capitalized” definition for the Tier 1 leverage ratio for a bank holding company.
 
RESTRICTED NET ASSETS OF SUBSIDIARIES
Certain of the Company’s subsidiaries are subject to restrictions on the transfer of net assets under debt agreements and regulatory requirements. These restrictions have not had any effect on the Company’s shareholder dividend policy and management does not anticipate any impact in the future. Procedures exist to transfer net assets between the Company and its subsidiaries, while ensuring compliance with the various contractual and regulatory constraints. As of December 31, 2010, the aggregate amount of net assets of subsidiaries that are restricted to be transferred to American Express’ Parent Company (Parent Company) was approximately $9.3 billion.
 
BANK HOLDING COMPANY DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS
The Company is limited in its ability to pay dividends by the Federal Reserve which could prohibit a dividend that would be considered an unsafe or unsound banking practice. It is the policy of the Federal Reserve that bank holding companies generally should pay dividends on common stock only out of net income available to common shareholders generated over the past year, and only if prospective earnings retention is consistent with the organization’s current and expected future capital needs, asset quality and overall financial condition. Moreover, bank holding companies should not maintain dividend levels that undermine a company’s ability to be a source of strength to its banking subsidiaries. Under guidance issued by the Federal Reserve in November 2010, a large bank holding company will face particularly close scrutiny for any proposed dividend that exceeds 30 percent of after-tax net income.
 
BANKS’ DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS
In the year ended December 31, 2008, Centurion Bank and FSB paid dividends from retained earnings to its parent of $650 million and $150 million, respectively. No dividends were paid in 2010 and 2009.
The Banks are subject to statutory and regulatory limitations on their ability to pay dividends. The total amount of dividends which may be paid at any date, subject to supervisory considerations of the Banks’ regulators, is generally limited to the retained earnings of the respective bank. As of December 31, 2010 and 2009, the Banks’ retained earnings, in the aggregate, available for the payment of dividends were $3.6 billion and $2.1 billion, respectively. In determining the dividends to pay its parent, the Banks must also consider the effects on applicable risk-based capital and leverage ratio requirements, as well as policy statements of the federal regulatory agencies. In addition, the Banks’ banking regulators have authority to limit or prohibit the payment of a dividend by the Banks, if, in the banking regulator’s opinion, payment of a dividend would constitute an unsafe or unsound banking practice in light of the financial condition of the banking organization.


112


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 24
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
 
LEGAL CONTINGENCIES
The Company and its subsidiaries are involved in a number of legal proceedings concerning matters arising in connection with the conduct of their respective business activities and are periodically subject to governmental examinations (including by regulatory authorities), information gathering requests, subpoenas, inquiries and investigations (collectively, “governmental examinations”). As of December 31, 2010, the Company and various of its subsidiaries were named as a defendant or were otherwise involved in numerous legal proceedings and governmental examinations in various jurisdictions, both in the United States and outside the United States. The Company discloses certain of its more significant legal proceedings and governmental examinations under “Legal Proceedings” in its Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2010 (“Legal Proceedings”).
The Company has recorded liabilities for certain of its outstanding legal proceedings and governmental examinations. A liability is accrued when it is both (a) probable that a loss with respect to the legal proceeding has occurred and (b) the amount of loss can be reasonably estimated (although, as discussed below, there may be an exposure to loss in excess of the accrued liability). The Company evaluates, on a quarterly basis, developments in legal proceedings and governmental examinations that could cause an increase or decrease in the amount of the liability that has been previously accrued.
The Company’s legal proceedings range from cases brought by a single plaintiff to class actions with hundreds of thousands of putative class members. These legal proceedings, as well as governmental examinations, involve various lines of business of the Company and a variety of claims (including, but not limited to, common law tort, contract, antitrust and consumer protection claims), some of which present novel factual allegations and/or unique legal theories. While some matters pending against the Company specify the damages claimed by the plaintiff, many seek a not-yet-quantified amount of damages or are at very early stages of the legal process. Even when the amount of damages claimed against the Company are stated, the claimed amount may be exaggerated and/or unsupported. As a result, some matters have not yet progressed sufficiently through discovery and/or development of important factual information and legal issues to enable the Company to estimate a range of possible loss.
Other matters have progressed sufficiently through discovery and/or development of important factual information and legal issues such that the Company is able to estimate a range of possible loss. Accordingly, for those legal proceedings and governmental examination disclosed in Legal Proceedings as to which a loss is reasonably possible in future periods, whether in excess of a related accrued liability or where there is no accrued liability, and for which the Company is able to estimate a range of possible loss, the current estimated range is zero to $500 million in excess of the accrued liability (if any) related to those matters. This aggregate range represents management’s estimate of possible loss with respect to these matters and is based on currently available information. This estimated range of possible loss does not represent the Company’s maximum loss exposure. The legal proceedings and governmental examinations underlying the estimated range will change from time to time and actual results may vary significantly from the current estimate.
Based on its current knowledge, and taking into consideration its litigation-related liabilities, the Company believes it is not a party to, nor are any of its properties the subject of, any pending legal proceeding or governmental examination that would have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial condition or liquidity. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such matters, the ultimate outcome of a particular matter could be material to the Company’s operating results for a particular period depending on, among other factors, the size of the loss or liability imposed and the level of the Company’s income for that period.
 
VISA AND MASTERCARD SETTLEMENTS
As previously disclosed, the Company reached settlement agreements with Visa and MasterCard. Under the terms of the settlement agreements, the Company will receive aggregate maximum payments of $4.05 billion. The settlement with Visa comprised an initial payment of $1.13 billion ($700 million after-tax) that was recorded as a gain in 2007. Having met quarterly performance criteria, the Company recognized $280 million ($172 million after-tax) from Visa in 2010, 2009 and 2008, and $600 million ($372 million after-tax) from MasterCard in 2010 and 2009, respectively, and $300 million ($186 million after-tax) in 2008. The remaining Visa and MasterCard quarterly payments, subject to the Company achieving certain quarterly performance criteria, continue through the fourth and second quarters of 2011, respectively. These payments are included in other, net expenses within the Corporate & Other segment.
 
OTHER CONTINGENCIES
The Company also has contingent obligations to make payments under contractual agreements entered into as part of the ongoing operation of the Company’s business, primarily with co-brand partners. The contingent obligations under such arrangements were approximately $7.5 billion as of December 31, 2010.


113


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
RENT EXPENSE AND LEASE COMMITMENTS
The Company leases certain facilities and equipment under noncancelable and cancelable agreements. The total rental expense amounted to $250 million in 2010, $362 million in 2009 (including lease termination penalties of $36 million) and $337 million in 2008.
 
As of December 31, 2010, the minimum aggregate rental commitment under all noncancelable operating leases (net of subleases of $25 million) was as follows:
 
         
   
(Millions)      
2011
  $ 222  
2012
    196  
2013
    183  
2014
    167  
2015
    138  
Thereafter
    1,071  
         
Total
  $ 1,977  
 
 
 
As of December 31, 2010, the Company’s future minimum lease payments under capital leases or other similar arrangements is approximately $12 million per annum from 2011 through 2013, $14 million in 2014, $6 million in 2015 and $35 million thereafter.
 
NOTE 25
REPORTABLE OPERATING SEGMENTS AND GEOGRAPHIC OPERATIONS
 
REPORTABLE OPERATING SEGMENTS
The Company is a leading global payments and travel company that is principally engaged in businesses comprising four reportable operating segments: USCS, ICS, GCS and GNMS.
The Company considers a combination of factors when evaluating the composition of its reportable operating segments, including the results reviewed by the chief operating decision maker, economic characteristics, products and services offered, classes of customers, product distribution channels, geographic considerations (primarily United States versus non-U.S.), and regulatory environment considerations. The following is a brief description of the primary business activities of the Company’s four reportable operating segments:
 
  USCS issues a wide range of card products and services to consumers and small businesses in the United States, and provides consumer travel services to cardmembers and other consumers.
 
  ICS issues proprietary consumer and small business cards outside the United States.
 
  GCS offers global corporate payment and travel-related products and services to large and mid-sized companies.
 
  GNMS operates a global general-purpose charge and credit card network, which includes both proprietary cards and cards issued under network partnership agreements. It also manages merchant services globally, which includes signing merchants to accept cards as well as processing and settling card transactions for those merchants. This segment also offers merchants point-of-sale products, servicing and settlements, and marketing and information programs and services.
 
Corporate functions and auxiliary businesses, including the Company’s publishing business, the Enterprise Growth Group (including the Global Prepaid Group), as well as other company operations are included in Corporate & Other.
Beginning in the first quarter of 2010, the Company made changes to the manner in which it allocates equity capital as well as funding and the related interest expense charged to its reportable operating segments. The changes reflect the inclusion of additional factors in its allocation methodologies that the Company believes more accurately reflect the capital characteristics and funding requirements of its segments. The segment results for 2009 and 2008 have been revised for this change.
Beginning in 2009, the Company changed the manner by which it assesses the performance of its reportable operating segments to exclude the impact of its excess liquidity funding levels. Accordingly, the debt, cash and investment balances associated with the Company’s excess liquidity funding and the related net negative interest spread are not included within the reportable operating segment results (primarily USCS and GCS segments) and are reported in the Corporate & Other segment for 2010 and 2009. The segment results for 2008 have not been revised for this change.


114


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
The following table presents certain selected financial information as of December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008 and for each of the years then ended:
 
                                                 
   
                            Corporate &
       
(Millions, except where indicated)   USCS     ICS     GCS     GNMS     Other (a)       Consolidated  
 
2010
                                               
Non-interest revenues
  $ 10,038     $ 3,685     $ 4,622     $ 4,169     $ 436     $ 22,950  
Interest income
    5,390       1,393       7       4       498       7,292  
Interest expense
    812       428       227       (200 )     1,156       2,423  
Total revenues net of interest expense
    14,616       4,650       4,402       4,373       (222 )     27,819  
Total provision
    1,591       392       158       61       5       2,207  
Pretax income (loss) from continuing operations
    3,537       638       761       1,649       (621 )     5,964  
Income tax provision (benefit)
    1,291       72       287       586       (329 )     1,907  
Income (loss) from continuing operations
  $ 2,246     $ 566     $ 474     $ 1,063     $ (292 )   $ 4,057  
                                                 
Total equity (billions)
  $ 7.4     $ 2.2     $ 3.7     $ 1.9     $ 1.0     $ 16.2  
                                                 
2009
                                               
Non-interest revenues
  $ 9,505     $ 3,447     $ 4,158     $ 3,602     $ 687     $ 21,399  
Interest income
    3,216       1,509       5       1       600       5,331  
Interest expense
    568       427       180       (177 )     1,209       2,207  
Total revenues net of interest expense
    12,153       4,529       3,983       3,780       78       24,523  
Total provision
    3,769       1,211       177       135       21       5,313  
Pretax income (loss) from continuing operations
    586       276       505       1,445       29       2,841  
Income tax provision (benefit)
    175       (56 )     155       508       (78 )     704  
Income (loss) from continuing operations
  $ 411     $ 332     $ 350     $ 937     $ 107     $ 2,137  
                                                 
Total equity (billions)
  $ 6.0     $ 2.3     $ 3.7     $ 1.4     $ 1.0     $ 14.4  
                                                 
2008
                                               
Non-interest revenues
  $ 11,415     $ 3,782     $ 5,082     $ 3,863     $ 577     $ 24,719  
Interest income
    4,425       1,720       6             1,050       7,201  
Interest expense
    1,641       770       471       (328 )     1,001       3,555  
Total revenues net of interest expense
    14,199       4,732       4,617       4,191       626       28,365  
Total provision
    4,389       1,030       231       127       21       5,798  
Pretax income (loss) from continuing operations
    1,343       104       614       1,579       (59 )     3,581  
Income tax provision (benefit)
    365       (217 )     160       529       (127 )     710  
Income (loss) from continuing operations
  $ 978     $ 321     $ 454     $ 1,050     $ 68     $ 2,871  
                                                 
Total equity (billions)
  $ 4.2     $ 2.2     $ 3.6     $ 1.2     $ 0.6     $ 11.8  
 
 
 
(a) Corporate & Other includes adjustments and eliminations for intersegment activity.
 
Total Revenues Net of Interest Expense
The Company allocates discount revenue and certain other revenues among segments using a transfer pricing methodology. Segments earn discount revenue based on the volume of merchant business generated by cardmembers. Within the USCS, ICS and GCS segments, discount revenue reflects the issuer component of the overall discount rate; within the GNMS segment, discount revenue reflects the network and merchant component of the overall discount rate. Total interest income and net card fees are directly attributable to the segment in which they are reported.
 
Provisions for Losses
The provisions for losses are directly attributable to the segment in which they are reported.
 
Expenses
Marketing, promotion, rewards and cardmember services expenses are reflected in each segment based on actual expenses incurred, with the exception of brand advertising, which is reflected in the GNMS segment. Rewards and cardmember services expenses are reflected in each segment based on actual expenses incurred within each segment. Salaries and employee benefits and other operating expenses reflect expenses such as professional services, occupancy and equipment and communications incurred directly within each segment. In addition, expenses related to the Company’s support services, such as technology costs, are allocated to each segment based on support service activities directly attributable to the segment.


115


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
Other overhead expenses, such as staff group support functions, are allocated from Corporate & Other to the other segments based on each segment’s relative level of pretax income, with the exception of certain fourth quarter 2008 severance and other related charges of $133 million from the Company’s fourth quarter restructuring initiatives for staff group support functions. This presentation is consistent with how such charges were reported internally. See further discussion in Note 16 regarding this corporate initiative. Financing requirements are managed on a consolidated basis. Funding costs are allocated based on segment funding requirements.
 
Capital
Each business segment is allocated capital based on established business model operating requirements, risk measures and regulatory capital requirements. Business model operating requirements include capital needed to support operations and specific balance sheet items. The risk measures include considerations for credit, market and operational risk.
 
Income Taxes
Income tax provision (benefit) is allocated to each business segment based on the effective tax rates applicable to various businesses that make up the segment.
 
GEOGRAPHIC OPERATIONS
The following table presents the Company’s total revenues net of interest expense and pretax income (loss) from continuing operations in different geographic regions:
 
                                                 
   
                            Other
       
(Millions)   United States     EMEA (a)       JAPA (a)       LACC (a)       Unallocated (b)       Consolidated  
 
2010 (c)
                                               
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 20,246     $ 3,297     $ 2,701     $ 2,449     $ (874 )   $ 27,819  
Pretax income (loss) from continuing operations
  $ 6,112     $ 572     $ 304     $ 503     $ (1,527 )   $ 5,964  
2009 (c)
                                               
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 17,489     $ 3,286     $ 2,294     $ 2,315     $ (861 )   $ 24,523  
Pretax income (loss) from continuing operations
  $ 3,131     $ 407     $ 188     $ 277     $ (1,162 )   $ 2,841  
2008 (c)
                                               
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 19,792     $ 3,693     $ 2,414     $ 2,511     $ (45 )   $ 28,365  
Pretax income (loss) from continuing operations
  $ 3,322     $ 373     $ 122     $ 291     $ (527 )   $ 3,581  
 
 
 
(a) EMEA represents Europe, Middle East and Africa, JAPA represents Japan, Asia/Pacific and Australia and LACC represents Latin America, Canada and Caribbean.
(b) Other Unallocated includes net costs which are not directly allocable to specific geographic regions, including costs related to the net negative interest spread on excess liquidity funding and executive office operations expenses.
(c) The data in the above table is, in part, based upon internal allocations, which necessarily involve management’s judgment. Certain revisions and reclassifications have been made to 2009 and 2008 to conform to 2010 classifications and internal allocation methodology.


116


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 26
PARENT COMPANY
 
Parent Company — Condensed Statements of Income
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31 (Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Revenues
                       
Non-interest revenues
                       
Gain on sale of securities
  $     $ 211     $  
Other
    8       4       6  
                         
Total non-interest revenues
    8       215       6  
                         
Interest income
    136       142       286  
Interest expense
    (638 )     (562 )     (462 )
                         
Total revenues net of interest expense
    (494 )     (205 )     (170 )
                         
Expenses
                       
Salaries and employee benefits
    153       111       129  
Other
    117       161       119  
                         
Total
    270       272       248  
                         
Pretax loss
    (764 )     (477 )     (418 )
Income tax benefit
    (292 )     (164 )     (176 )
                         
Net loss before equity in net income of subsidiaries and affiliates
    (472 )     (313 )     (242 )
Equity in net income of subsidiaries and affiliates
    4,529       2,450       3,113  
                         
Income from continuing operations
    4,057       2,137       2,871  
Loss from discontinued operations, net of tax
          (7 )     (172 )
                         
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130     $ 2,699  
 
 
 
Parent Company — Condensed Balance Sheets
 
                 
   
As of December 31 (Millions)   2010     2009  
 
Assets
               
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 5,267     $ 5,679  
Investment securities
    475       530  
Equity in net assets of subsidiaries and affiliates of continuing operations
    15,603       14,677  
Accounts receivable, less reserves
    831       523  
Premises and equipment — at cost, less accumulated depreciation: 2010, $41; 2009, $34
    73       52  
Loans to affiliates
    4,942       3,879  
Due from subsidiaries
    1,196       402  
Other assets
    458       389  
                 
Total assets
  $ 28,845     $ 26,131  
                 
Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity
               
Liabilities
               
Accounts payable and other liabilities
  $ 1,366     $ 1,398  
Due to affiliates
    911       69  
Long-term affiliate debt
          15  
Long-term debt
    10,338       10,243  
                 
Total liabilities
    12,615       11,725  
Shareholders’ equity
               
Common shares
    238       237  
Additional paid-in capital
    11,937       11,144  
Retained earnings
    4,972       3,737  
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
    (917 )     (712 )
                 
Total shareholders’ equity
    16,230       14,406  
                 
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity
  $ 28,845     $ 26,131  
 
 
 
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURE
The Parent Company guarantees up to $107 million of indebtedness under lines of credit that subsidiaries have with various banks. As of December 31, 2010, there were no draw downs against these lines.


117


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
Parent Company — Condensed Statements of Cash Flows
 
                         
   
Years Ended December 31 (Millions)   2010     2009     2008  
 
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
                       
Net income
  $ 4,057     $ 2,130     $ 2,699  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to cash provided by operating activities:
                       
Equity in net (income) loss of subsidiaries and affiliates:
                       
— Continuing operations
    (4,530 )     (2,450 )     (3,113 )
— Discontinued operations
          7       172  
Dividends received from subsidiaries and affiliates
    1,999       1,103       2,340  
Gain on sale of securities
          (211 )      
Other operating activities, primarily with subsidiaries
    (39 )     246       93  
                         
Net cash provided by operating activities
    1,487       825       2,191  
                         
Cash Flows from Investing Activities
                       
Sale/redemption of investments
    9       361        
Premises and equipment
    (32 )     (20 )     (14 )
Loans to affiliates
    (1,064 )     2,665       (2,008 )
Loan, affiliate in discontinued operations
                (238 )
Purchase of investments
    (3 )            
Investments in affiliates
                (58 )
                         
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities
    (1,090 )     3,006       (2,318 )
                         
Cash Flows from Financing Activities
                       
Issuance of debt
          3,000       3,000  
Principal payment of debt
          (505 )     (1,995 )
Long-term affiliate debt
    (15 )            
Issuance of American Express Series A preferred shares and warrants
          3,389        
Issuance of American Express common shares and other
    663       614       176  
Repurchase of American Express Series A preferred shares
          (3,389 )      
Repurchase of American Express stock warrants
          (340 )      
Repurchase of American Express common shares
    (590 )           (218 )
Dividends paid
    (867 )     (924 )     (836 )
                         
Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities
    (809 )     1,845       127  
                         
Net change in cash and cash equivalents
    (412 )     5,676        
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
    5,679       3       3  
                         
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year
  $ 5,267     $ 5,679     $ 3  
 
 


118


Table of Contents

AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
 
NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
 
NOTE 27
QUARTERLY FINANCIAL DATA (UNAUDITED)
 
                                                                 
   
(Millions, except per share amounts)   2010     2009  
Quarters Ended   12/31 (a)       9/30     6/30     3/31     12/31     9/30 (b)       6/30 (b)(c)       3/31  
 
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 7,322     $ 7,033     $ 6,858     $ 6,606     $ 6,489     $ 6,016     $ 6,092     $ 5,926  
Pretax income from continuing operations
    1,477       1,640       1,595       1,252       961       918       418       544  
Income from continuing operations
    1,062       1,093       1,017       885       710       642       342       443  
Income (Loss) from discontinued operations, net of tax
                            6       (2 )     (5 )     (6 )
Net income (b)
    1,062       1,093       1,017       885       716       640       337       437  
Earnings Per Common Share — Basic:
                                                               
Continuing operations
  $ 0.88     $ 0.91     $ 0.84     $ 0.74     $ 0.59     $ 0.54     $ 0.09     $ 0.32  
Discontinued operations
                            0.01                   (0.01 )
                                                                 
Net income
  $ 0.88     $ 0.91     $ 0.84     $ 0.74     $ 0.60     $ 0.54     $ 0.09     $ 0.31  
                                                                 
Earnings Per Common Share — Diluted:
                                                               
Continuing operations
  $ 0.88     $ 0.90     $ 0.84     $ 0.73     $ 0.59     $ 0.54     $ 0.09     $ 0.32  
Discontinued operations
                            0.01       (0.01 )           (0.01 )
                                                                 
Net income
  $ 0.88     $ 0.90     $ 0.84     $ 0.73     $ 0.60     $ 0.53     $ 0.09     $ 0.31  
                                                                 
Cash dividends declared per common share
  $ 0.18     $ 0.18     $ 0.18     $ 0.18     $ 0.18     $ 0.18     $ 0.18     $ 0.18  
Common share price:
                                                               
High
  $ 46.78     $ 45.68     $ 49.19     $ 43.25     $ 42.25     $ 36.50     $ 28.45     $ 21.38  
Low
  $ 37.33     $ 38.42     $ 37.13     $ 36.60     $ 31.69     $ 22.00     $ 13.08     $ 9.71  
 
 
 
(a) The results of operations for the quarter ended December 31, 2010 include restructuring charges in the amount of $98 million. Refer to Note 16 for further discussion of these items.
(b) The results for the quarter ended September 30, 2009 include (i) a $135 million benefit representing the correction of an error related to the accounting for cumulative translation adjustments associated with a net investment in foreign subsidiaries and (ii) a $45 million benefit resulting from the change in the fair value of certain forward exchange contracts. The results of operations for the quarter ended June 30, 2009 include a $59 million benefit related to the completion of certain account reconciliations. Refer to Note 19 for further discussion of these items.
(c) The results of operations for the quarter ended June 30, 2009 include restructuring charges in the amount of $199 million. Refer to Note 16 for further discussion of these items.


119


Table of Contents

 
AMERICAN EXPRESS COMPANY
CONSOLIDATED FIVE-YEAR SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
 
                                         
   
(Millions, except per share amounts, percentages, and where indicated)   2010     2009     2008     2007     2006  
 
Operating Results (a)
                                       
Total revenues net of interest expense
  $ 27,819     $ 24,523     $ 28,365     $ 27,559     $ 24,826  
Expenses
    19,648       16,369       18,986       17,762       17,008  
Provisions for losses
    2,207       5,313       5,798       4,103       2,666  
Income from continuing operations
    4,057       2,137       2,871       4,126       3,625  
(Loss) Income from discontinued operations
          (7 )     (172 )     (114 )     82  
Net income
    4,057       2,130       2,699       4,012       3,707  
Return on average equity (b)
    27.5 %     14.6 %     22.3 %     37.3 %     34.7 %
                                         
Balance Sheet (a)
                                       
Cash and cash equivalents (c)
  $ 16,709     $ 16,599     $ 21,651     $ 10,350     $ 3,801  
Accounts receivable, net
    40,434       38,204       36,571       41,994       38,642  
Loans, net (d)
    57,616       30,010       40,659       53,339       43,034  
Investment securities (d)
    14,010       24,337       12,526       13,214       13,207  
Assets of discontinued operations
                216       22,278       20,699  
Total assets (c)(d)
    147,042       125,145       127,178       151,215       128,262  
Customer deposits
    29,727       26,289       15,486       15,397       12,011  
Travelers Cheques outstanding
    5,618       5,975       6,433       7,197       7,215  
Short-term borrowings
    3,414       2,344       8,993       17,761       15,236  
Long-term debt (d)
    66,416       52,338       60,041       55,285       42,747  
Liabilities of discontinued operations
                260       21,527       20,003  
Shareholders’ equity (d)
    16,230       14,406       11,841       11,029       10,511  
                                         
Common Share Statistics
                                       
Earnings per share:
                                       
Income from continuing operations:
                                       
Basic
  $ 3.37     $ 1.55     $ 2.47     $ 3.49     $ 2.97  
Diluted
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.47     $ 3.44     $ 2.91  
(Loss) Income from discontinued operations:
                                       
Basic
  $     $ (0.01 )   $ (0.14 )   $ (0.09 )   $ 0.07  
Diluted
  $     $     $ (0.15 )   $ (0.10 )   $ 0.07  
Net income:
                                       
Basic
  $ 3.37     $ 1.54     $ 2.33     $ 3.40     $ 3.04  
Diluted
  $ 3.35     $ 1.54     $ 2.32     $ 3.34     $ 2.98  
Cash dividends declared per share
  $ 0.72     $ 0.72     $ 0.72     $ 0.63     $ 0.57  
Book value per share
  $ 13.56     $ 12.08     $ 10.21     $ 9.53     $ 8.76  
Market price per share:
                                       
High
  $ 49.19     $ 42.25     $ 52.63     $ 65.89     $ 62.50  
Low
  $ 36.60     $ 9.71     $ 16.55     $ 50.37     $ 49.73  
Close
  $ 42.92     $ 40.52     $ 18.55     $ 52.02     $ 60.67  
Average common shares outstanding for earnings per share:
                                       
Basic
    1,188       1,168       1,154       1,173       1,212  
Diluted
    1,195       1,171       1,156       1,193       1,235  
Shares outstanding at period end
    1,197       1,192       1,160       1,158       1,199  
                                         
Other Statistics
                                       
Number of employees at period end (thousands):
                                       
United States
    29       28       31       32       32  
Outside the United States
    32       31       35       36       33  
                                         
Total (e)
    61       59       66       68       65  
Number of shareholders of record
    38,384       41,273       43,257       50,216       51,644  
 
 
 
(a) In 2007, the Company entered into an agreement to sell its international banking subsidiary, AEB, and its subsidiary that issues investment certificates to AEB’s customers, AEIDC, to Standard Chartered subject to certain regulatory approvals. The results, assets and liabilities of AEB (except for certain components of the business which were not sold) are presented as discontinued operations. Additionally, the spin-off of Ameriprise and certain dispositions were completed in 2006 and 2005, and the results of these operations are presented as discontinued operations. Refer to Note 2 for additional information on discontinued operations.
(b) Return on average equity is calculated by dividing one-year period of net income by one-year average of total shareholders’ equity.
(c) Prior to June 30, 2010, the Company misclassified certain book overdraft balances against cash balances on its Consolidated Balance Sheets. Such overdraft balances have been reclassified to either accounts payable or other liabilities as of December 31, 2009, 2008 and 2007.
(d) Refer to Note 7 for discussion of the impact of new GAAP effective January 1, 2010.
(e) Amounts include employees from discontinued operations.


120

Exhibit 21
SUBSIDIARIES OF THE REGISTRANT
      Unless otherwise indicated, all of the voting securities of these subsidiaries are directly or indirectly owned by the registrant. Where the name of the subsidiary is indented, the voting securities of such subsidiary are owned directly by the company under which its name is indented.
                 
            State / Country of
Name   Country Name   Incorporation
American Express Company
  United States   New York
56th Street AXP Campus LLC
  United States   Arizona
American Express Austria Bank GmbH
  Austria   Austria
American Express Bank LLC
  Russian Federation   Russia
American Express Bank Ltd. S.A.
  Argentina   Argentina
American Express Banking Corp.
  United States   Arizona
American Express Travel Related Services Company, Inc.
  United States   New York
Accertify, Inc.
  United States   United States
American Express Bank (Mexico) S.A. Institucion de Banca Multiple
  Mexico   Mexico
American Express Bank Services, S.A. de C.V.
  Mexico   Mexico
American Express Bank FSB
  United States   Utah
American Express Receivables Financing Corporation IV LLC
  United States   Delaware
American Express Business Loan Corporation
  United States   Utah
American Express Centurion Bank
  United States   Utah
American Express Receivables Financing Corporation III LLC
  United States   Delaware
American Express Company (Mexico) S.A. de C.V.
  Mexico   Mexico
American Express Insurance Services, Agente de Seguros, S.A. de C.V.
  Mexico   Mexico
American Express Servicios Profesionales, S.A. de C.V.
  Mexico   Mexico
American Express Credit Corporation
  United States   New York
American Express Capital Australia
  Australia   New South Wales
American Express Credit Mexico, LLC
  United States   Delaware
Fideicomiso Empresarial Amex
  Mexico   Mexico
American Express Euro Funding Limited Partnership
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
American Express Overseas Credit Corporation Limited
  Jersey   Jersey
AEOCC Management Company Limited
  Jersey   Jersey
American Express Overseas Credit Corporation N.V.
  Netherlands Antilles   Netherlands Antilles
AE Hungary Holdings Limited Liability Company
  Hungary   Hungary
American Express Canada Credit Corporation
  Canada   Canada
American Express Canada Finance Limited
  Canada   Canada
American Express Sterling Funding Limited Partnership
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
American Express Funding (Luxembourg) S.a.r.l
  Luxembourg   Luxembourg
Credco Receivables Corp.
  United States   Delaware
American Express Dutch Capital, LLC
  United States   Delaware
American Express Global Financial Services Inc.
  United States   Delaware
American Express GP Japan K.K.
  Japan   Japan
American Express Holdings Netherlands CV
  Netherlands   Cayman Islands
American Express Insurance Agency of Puerto Rico, Inc.
  Puerto Rico   Puerto Rico
American Express International (NZ), Inc.
  United States   Delaware
American Express Limited
  United States   Delaware
American Express (Malaysia) SDN. BHD.
  Malaysia   Malaysia
American Express (Thai) Company Limited
  Thailand   Thailand
American Express Brasil Assessoria Empresarial Ltda.
  Brazil   Brazil
American Express European Holdings B.V.
  Netherlands   Netherlands
Alpha Card S.C.R.L/C.V.B.A
  Belgium   Belgium
Alpha Card Merchant Services S.C.R.L/C.V.B.A
  Belgium   Belgium
BCC Corporate NV/SA
  Belgium   Belgium
American Express International (B) SDN BHD
  Brunei Darussalam   Brunei Darussalam
American Express International Holdings, LLC
  United States   Delaware
American Express Argentina S.A.
  Argentina   Argentina
American Express Holdings (France) SAS
  France   France
American Express France SAS
  France   France
American Express Carte France SA
  France   France
American Express Change SAS
  France   France

1


 

                 
            State / Country of
Name   Country Name   Incorporation
American Express Paris SAS
  France   France
American Express Services SA
  France   France
American Express Voyages SAS
  France   France
American Express Management
  France   France
American Express France Finance SNC
  France   France
American Express International, Inc.
  United States   Delaware
AE Exposure Management Limited
  Jersey   Jersey
American Express (India) Private Limited
  India   New Delhi
American Express Asia Network Consulting (Beijing) Limited Company
  China   China
American Express Company AS
  Norway   Norway
American Express Continental, LLC
  United States   Delaware
Amex Global Holdings C.V.
  Jersey   Jersey
American Express Australia Limited
  Australia   New South Wales
American Express Wholesale Currency Services Pty Limited
  Australia   New South Wales
South Pacific Credit Card Limited
  New Zealand   New Zealand
Centurion Finance Limited
  New Zealand   New Zealand
American Express Euro Travel Holdings B.V.
  Netherlands   Netherlands
American Express Business Travel AB
  Sweden   Sweden
American Express Business Travel ApS
  Denmark   Denmark
American Express Business Travel AS
  Norway   Norway
American Express Corporate Travel BVBA
  Belgium   Belgium
American Express Hungary Travel Related Services Ltd.
  Hungary   Hungary
American Express spol. s.r.o.
  Czech Republic   Czech Republic
American Express Travel Services Vostok LLC
  Russian Federation   Russia
“AMERICAN EXPRESS INTERNATIONAL SERVICES” Limited Liability Company
  Russian Federation   Russia
American Express Denmark A/S
  Denmark   Denmark
American Express Europe Limited
  United States   Delaware
American Express Group Services Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
American Express Holding AB
  Sweden   Sweden
Forsakringsaktiebolaget Viator
  Sweden   Sweden
American Express Holdings Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
American Express Insurance Services Europe Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
American Express Services Europe Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
Uvet American Express Corporate Travel S.p.A.
  Italy   Italy
Congress Lab S.r.l.
  Italy   Italy
American Express Hungary Financial Services Ltd
  Hungary   Hungary
American Express International (Taiwan), Inc.
  Taiwan   Taiwan, Province of China
American Express International SA
  Greece   Greece
American Express Japan Co., Ltd.
  Japan   Japan
American Express Locazioni Finanziarie s.r.l
  Italy   Italy
American Express Payment Services Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
American Express Poland S.A.
  Poland   Poland
American Express Reisebüro GmbH
  Austria   Austria
American Express Services India Limited
  India   New Delhi
American Express Swiss Holdings GmbH
  Switzerland   Switzerland
Swisscard AECS AG
  Switzerland   Switzerland
American Express Travel (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.
  Singapore   Singapore
American Express Travel Holdings (Hong Kong) Limited
  Hong Kong   Hong Kong
CITS American Express Air Services Limited
  China   China
CITS American Express Southern China Air Services Limited
  China   China
CITS American Express Travel Services Limited
  China   China
Farrington American Express Travel Services Limited
  Hong Kong   Hong Kong

2


 

                 
            State / Country of
Name   Country Name   Incorporation
American Express Travel Holdings (M) Company SDN. BHD.
  Malaysia   Malaysia
Amex Broker Assicurativo s.r.l.
  Italy   Italy
Amex General Insurance Agency, Inc.
  Taiwan   Taiwan, Province of China
Amex Life Insurance Marketing, Inc.
  Taiwan   Taiwan, Province of China
Amex Travel Holding (Japan) Limited
  Japan   Japan
American Express Nippon Travel Agency, Inc.
  Japan   Japan
Interactive Transaction Solutions Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
Interactive Transactions Solutions SAS
  France   France
PT American Express Indonesia
  Indonesia   Indonesia
Sociedad Internacional de Servicios de Panama S.A.
  Panama   Panama
TransUnion Limited
  Hong Kong   Hong Kong
American Express Service (Thailand) Company Limited
  Thailand   Thailand
TRS Card International, Inc.
  United States   Delaware
American Express de Espana, S.A. (Sociedad Unipersonal)
  Spain   Spain
American Express Card Espana, S.A.U.
  Spain   Spain
American Express Foreign Exchange, S.A. (Sociedad Unipersonal)
  Spain   Spain
American Express Viajes, S.A. (Sociedad Unipersonal)
  Spain   Spain
American Express Barcelo Viajes SL
  Spain   Spain
Amex Asesores de Seguros, S.A. (Sociedad Unipersonal)
  Spain   Spain
American Express Marketing & Development Corp.
  United States   Delaware
American Express Prepaid Card Management Corporation
  United States   Arizona
American Express Publishing Corporation
  United States   New York
American Express Receivables Financing Corporation II
  United States   Delaware
American Express Receivables Financing Corporation V LLC
  United States   Delaware
Amex (Middle East) B.S.C. (closed)
  Bahrain   Bahrain
Amex (Saudi Arabia) Limited
  Saudi Arabia   Saudi Arabia
Amex Al Omania LLC
  Oman   Oman
Amex Egypt LLC
  Egypt   Egypt
Amex Bank of Canada
  Canada   Canada
Amex Canada Inc.
  Canada   Canada
Amex Card Services Company
  United States   Delaware
Asesorías e Inversiones American Express Chile Limitada
  Chile   Chile
Bansamex, S.A.
  Spain   Spain
Business Equipment Capital Corporation
  United States   Delaware
Cardmember Financial Services Limited
  Jersey   Jersey
Cavendish Holdings, Inc.
  United States   Delaware
FRC West Property, LLC
  United States   Arizona
Serve Virtual Enterprises, Inc.
  United States   Delaware
Southern Africa Travellers Cheque Company (Pty) Ltd
  South Africa   South Africa
Travel Impressions, Ltd.
  United States   Delaware
Travellers Cheque Associates Limited
  United Kingdom   United Kingdom
AMEX Assurance Company
  United States   Wisconsin
Amexco Insurance Company
  United States   Vermont
National Express Company, Inc.
  United States   New York
The Balcor Company Holdings, Inc.
  United States   Delaware
The Balcor Company
  United States   Delaware
Rexport, Inc.
  United States   Delaware
Drillamex, Inc.
  United States   Delaware

3

Exhibit 23.1
 
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
 
We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements (Form S-8 No. 2-46918, No. 2-59230, No. 2-64285, No. 2-73954, No. 2-89680, No. 33-01771, No. 33-02980, No. 33-28721, No. 33-33552, No. 33-36442, No. 33-48629, No. 33-62124, No. 33-65008, No. 33-53801, No. 333-12683, No. 333-41779, No. 333-52699, No. 333-73111, No. 333-38238, No. 333-98479; and No. 333-142710; Form S-3 No. 2-89469, No. 33-43268, No. 33-50997, No. 333-32525, No. 333-45445, No. 333-47085, No. 333-55761, No. 333-51828, No. 333-113768, No. 333-117835, No. 333-138032 and 333-162791) of American Express Company of our report dated February 25, 2011, relating to the consolidated financial statements and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, which appears in the 2010 Annual Report to Shareholders, which is incorporated by reference in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.
 
/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
 
New York, New York
February 25, 2011

EXHIBIT 31.1
 
CERTIFICATION
 
I, Kenneth I. Chenault, certify that:
 
1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of American Express Company;
 
2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
 
3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
 
4. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
 
(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
 
(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
5. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
 
(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
/s/  Kenneth I. Chenault
Kenneth I. Chenault
Chief Executive Officer
 
Date: February 25, 2011

EXHIBIT 31.2
 
CERTIFICATION
 
I, Daniel T. Henry, certify that:
 
1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of American Express Company;
 
2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;
 
3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;
 
4. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:
 
(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;
 
(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;
 
(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and
 
(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and
 
5. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):
 
(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and
 
(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.
 
/s/  Daniel T. Henry
Daniel T. Henry
Chief Financial Officer
 
Date: February 25, 2011

EXHIBIT 32.1
 
Certification Pursuant to
18 U.S.C. Section 1350,
as Adopted Pursuant to
Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
 
In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K of American Express Company (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2010, as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), Kenneth I. Chenault, as Chief Executive Officer of the Company, and Daniel T. Henry, as Chief Financial Officer of the Company, each hereby certifies, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, that:
 
(1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and
 
(2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.
 
/s/  Kenneth I. Chenault
Name:     Kenneth I. Chenault
  Title:  Chief Executive Officer
 
Date: February 25, 2011
 
/s/  Daniel T. Henry
Name:     Daniel T. Henry
  Title:  Chief Financial Officer
 
Date: February 25, 2011
 
The foregoing certification is being furnished solely pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, and is not being “filed” as part of the Form 10-K or as a separate disclosure document for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), or otherwise subject to liability under that section. This certification shall not be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any filing under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Exchange Act except to the extent that this Exhibit 32.1 is expressly and specifically incorporated by reference in any such filing.
 
A signed original of this written statement required by Section 906 has been provided to the Company and will be retained by the Company and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission or its staff upon request.